Intro Page 1 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Welcome to GTS NX > Intro

Link to Ribbon Menu Link to Trouble Shooting Guide Link to Appendix

GTS NX 2024
On-line Manual
Loading multimedia control...

Homepage Link: https://www.midasgeotech.com

Copyright © Since 1989 MIDAS Information Technology Co., Ltd.

Home > GTS NX > Welcome to GTS NX > About GTS NX

About GTS NX
GTS NX is a simulation program developed for the evaluation of soil-structure interaction based on the finite element method. GTS NX helps
engineers to perform step-by-step analysis of excavation, banking, structure placement, loading and other factors that directly affect design
and construction. The program supports various conditions (soil characteristics, water level etc.) and analytical methodologies to simulate real
phenomena.

Settings for all types of field conditions can be simulated using non-linear analysis methods (such as linear/non-linear static analysis,
linear/non-linear dynamic analysis, seepage and consolidation analysis, slope safety analysis) and various coupled analysis (such as
seepage-stress, stress-slope, seepage-slope and nonlinear dynamic-slope coupled analysis).

The interface of GTS NX provides easy summoning of modeling and analysis tools, creating an intuitive working environment for general and
novice designers. The 64-bit OS supported next-generation platform base and new graphic engine allows the best modeling performance for
object calculation and element generation, while the 64-bit integrated solver considerably reduces the analysis time for large models.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 2 of 1024

<GTS NX Frameworks>

Introducing new FrameWorks

This manual gives detailed instructions for each menu function in GTS NX.

All functions are arranged in order of modeling, analysis setting, result analysis and output process for each analysis method and helpful tips
are included. The function descriptions and tips can also be accessed through the Online manual(F1 key) within the program.

The contents of each chapter are as follows.

Chapter1. Introduction

This chapter gives the program outline and manual composition.

Chapter 2. General Information

This chapter explains the basic menu and various tools for starting the program. Details on the toolbar for task screen settings and the tools
required for program operation, such as view/selection/model guide, are included. Complete understanding of the modeling and result
confirmation functions is required before learning about the main menu and other functions.

Chapter 3. Geometry

This chapter explains the functions for geometric shape (line, surface, solid) creation and modification, i.e. the first step of modeling.
Explanations are given for the calculating functions that are necessary to complete the geometry by modifying/editing shapes created on other
CAD-based programs. There is also a feature that can search and correct shape errors automatically.

Chapter 4. Mesh

This chapter explains the functions for creating and editing elements based on their geometric shape. A detailed description of the behavioral
characteristics and material parameters assigned to an element (ground/structure) that affects the analysis is included. This step is the most
important modeling step and hence, it is necessary to understand the sections on element quality and material properties of the soil/structure.
More details on soil/structure material properties can be found in the ‘Material’ section of the ‘Analysis’ manual.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 3 of 1024

Chapter 5. Analysis method

This chapter explains the functions for setting boundary and load conditions during the final stage of modeling. Construction stage setting
functions for step-by-step interpretation of the construction process is also included. Setting of boundary and load conditions corresponding
to the analysis type is vital for correct result analysis.

Chapter 6. Analysis

This chapter explains the important options for controlling analysis method as per real phenomenon after the modeling is completed. Analysis
conditions and controlling options have a significant impact on the results. Options and their impact on results for each analysis method are
described in detail. The detailed algorithm for each analysis method can be found in the ‘Algorithm’ section of the ‘Analysis’ manual.

Chapter 7. Result & Tools

The interpretation and extraction of results are as important as the actual analysis process. Efficient checking of outputs for design applications
are described in detail.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > System Requirements

System Requirements
Link to Ribbon Menu Link to Error/Warning Code Link to Appendix

Item Minimum Requirements Recommend Requirements

Operating System (O/S) Windows XP/7 - 32bit Win7 - 64bit
CPU Core 2 Quad CPU 2.66Hz Core i7 CPU 3.3GHz or Higher
Memory (RAM) 2GB 8GB
Hard Drive Type HDD HDD(+ *SSD)
Hard Drive Space 100GB 1TB or Higher
Video Card GeForce NVIDIA Recommended (+ *GPU Support : NVIDIA Tesla)
Video Memory 256MB 2GB or Higher

* SSD (Solid State Drive) : Speed up the transfer rate for reading and writing.

* GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) : Accelerate graphic performance.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error,Warning code

Error/Warning code & Message string

Link to Ribbon Menu Link to Trouble Shooting Guide Link to Appendix

1000 1002 1006 1008 1010 1018 1019 1020 1022 1023

1024 1032 1036 1037 1038 1045 1046 1102 1201 1202
1203 2001 2004 2007 2008 2009 2012 2101 2102 2103
2104 2105 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2116
2117 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2130 2131
2132 2133 2134 2135 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142
2143 2145 2149 2150 2151 3501 3503 4003 4009 4010
4011 4012 4013 4014 4016 4017 4018 4020 4021 4024
4025 4026 4027 4028 4030 4031 4032 4033 4035 4037
4039 4040 4041 4042 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4051
4052 4054 4055 4057 4060 4063 4064 4105 4106 4108
4109

During modeling and analysis process, the user can find following error or warning code with message in output window.

Check the code and the user can find the main reason and suggested solution for each code.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 4 of 1024

Error/Warning
Message String
Code

1000 SOLVER LOCK WAS NOT DETECTED. _ARG_REP_

1002 CANNOT OPEN INPUT FILE '"_ARG_REP_"'.

1006 SELF DEPENDENCY FOUND IN MULTIPOINT CONSTRAINT DEFINITION FOR _ARG_REP_"."

1008 _ARG_REP_" IS ALREADY CONSTRAINED. CANNOT BE CONSTRAINED BY MULTIPOINT CONSTRAINT."

1010 INVALID RIGID BODY MOTION DEFINITION IN RBE ID=_ARG_REP_"."

1018 INVALID MATERIAL DATA IN MATERIAL ID="_ARG_REP_".

1019 UNABLE TO DEFINE ELEMENT ORIENTATION FOR "_ARG_REP_" ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_".

1020 NODAL COORDINATE HAS NEGATIVE X VALUE IN AXISYMMETRIC ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_".

1022 INVALID MATERIAL REFERENCE IN PROPERTY ID="_ARG_REP_".

1023 NOT ENOUGH ELEMENTS DEFINED TO FORM CAVITY ID=_ARG_REP_"."

1024 "CANNOT RESUME WRITING TO RESULT FILE "_ARG_REP_ "."

1032 CURVE FITTING FAILED IN MATERIAL ID="_ARG_REP_".

1036 INVALID ELEMENT TYPE FOR NONLINEAR EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS.

1037 PRELOAD (BOLT LOAD) IS NOT SUPPORTED IN ANALYSIS ID="_ARG_REP_".

BOTH (DISPLACEMENT/VELOCITY/ACCELERATION) AND (VELOCITY/ACCELERATION/DISPLACEMENT) CANNOT BE

1038
SPECIFIED TO THE SAME DOF. NODE ID= ….

1045 "MATERIAL COORDINATE SYSTEM CANNOT BE CHANGED DURING CONSTRUCTION STAGE ANALYSIS."

1046 "INVALID RELEASE DOF DEFINITION IN "_ARG_REP_" ELEMENT ="_ARG_REP"."

1102 ERROR ENCOUNTERED WHILE READING INPUT FILE '_ARG_REP_"

1201 CANNOT OPEN SCRATCH FILE _ARG_REP_"."

1202 CANNOT OPEN RESTART FILE _ARG_REP_"."

1203 IDENTICAL RESTART FILENAME SPECIFIED FOR BOTH READ AND WRITE METHOD.

2001 NEGATIVE JACOBIAN IN ELEMENT ID=_ARG_REP_"."

2004 FAILED TO COMPUTE EIGENVALUES. "_ARG_REP_

2007 FACTORIZATION FAILED DUE TO SINGULARITY AT "_ARG_REP_" (RANK="_ARG_REP_").

2008 ERROR IN LINEAR EQUATION SOLVER ("_ARG_REP_").

2009 FAILED TO DETERMINE MATERIAL AXIS BY PROJECTION IN ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_".

2012 IMPROPER LINEAR EQUATION SOLVER SELECTED. TRY OTHER SOLVERS OR USE AUTO SELECTION.

2101 1D ELEMENT LENGTH IS ZERO IN ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_".

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 5 of 1024

2102 SCRATCH FILE IO FAILED.

2103 FAILED TO CONVERGE IN NONLINEAR ANALYSIS. LOAD INCREMENT="_ARG_REP_".

2104 SINGULARITY OCCURRED WHILE COMPUTING CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX IN ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_".

CANNOT COMPUTE CONSISTENT TANGENT MODULUS, MATERIAL ID="_ARG_REP_

2105
", ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_", INTEGRATION POINT="_ARG_REP_".
TOO MANY THICKNESS INTEGRATION POINTS IN PROPERTY ID="_ARG_REP_" FOR EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
2107
(MAX=31)

2108 CRITICAL TIME STEP IS ZERO IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS.

2109 ZERO DIAGONAL MASS FOUND IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS.

2110 MASS MPC OR RBE MASS CANNOT BE DIRECTIONAL IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS.

2111 SCALAR MASS CANNOT BE SPECIFIED TO ROTATIONAL INERTIA IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS.

2112 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR TEMPORARY EIGENVECTOR STORAGE. REDUCE NUMBER OF EIGENVECTORS.

2113 FACTORIZATION FAILED IN EIGEN SOLVER. THIS MAY BE DUE TO EXCESSIVELY CLUSTERED EIGENVALUES.

2116 FAILED TO CONVERGE IN AMG (~).

2117 DIVERGENCE DETECTED IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS.

2122 NO FLEXIBLE-BODY MODE.

2123 DIVERGENCE DETECTED IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS AT TIME="_ARG_REP_".("_ARG_REP_

2124 PROPERTY ID="_ARG_REP_" IS ASSIGNED TO INCOMPATIBLE ELEMENT TYPE.

CONTACT SEGMENT WITH NODE IDS = "_ARG_REP_" IS INVALID. IDENTICAL NODAL COORDINATES FOUND IN THE
2125
SEGMENT.

2126 RIGID MATERIAL IN COMPOSITE PROPERTY (ID = "_ARG_REP_") IS NOT ALLOWED.

2127 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR TEMPORARY RITZ VECTOR STORAGE.

2128 MULTI-BODY SYSTEM SEEMS TO BE OVER-CONSTRAINED.

2130 LIMIT VALUE OF STRESS CONSTRAINT FOR MATERIAL ID = "_ARG_REP" IS ZERO.

2131 ERROR ENCOUNTERED DURING ANALYSIS RESTART. CURRENT ELEMENT IS INCONSISTENT WITH STORAGE DATA.

ERROR ENCOUNTERED IN MODIFIED CAM CLAY MATERIAL MODEL. TENSILE STRESS IS APPLIED IN ELEMENT ID=
2132
"_ARG_REP_" MATERIAL ID= "_ARG_REP_".
MODIFIED CAM CLAY MATERIAL MODEL ID="_ARG_REP_" CAN ONLY BE USED WITH SOLID, PLAIN STRAIN, OR
2133
AXISYMMETRIC ELEMENTS.
ERROR ENCOUNTERED IN ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_". MODIFIED CAM CLAY MATERIAL MODEL ID="_ARG_REP_"
2134
CAN ONLY BE USED WITH SOLID, PLAIN STRAIN, OR AXISYMMETRIC ELEMENTS.
ERROR ENCOUNTERED IN MODIFIED CAM CLAY MATERIAL MODEL. IN MATERIAL ID "_ARG_REP_", INITIAL VOID
2135
RATIO MUST BE LARGER THAN ZERO.
ERROR ENCOUNTERED IN MATERIAL ID = "_ARG_REP_". "_ARG_REP_" MATERIAL MODEL CANNOT BE USED WITH
2137
VISCOELASTIC MATERIAL.
"CANNOT COMPUTE ELASTIC-CREEP TANGENT MODULUS, MATERIAL ID="_ARG_REP_
2138
", ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_", INTEGRATION POINT="_ARG_REP_"."
"MISSING DILATANCY ANGLE IN COULOMB FRICTION MODEL WITH VARIABLE FRICTION ANGLE, MATERIAL
2139
ID=_ARG_REP_". "

2140 "SHELL INTERFACE ELEMENT ID= "_ARG_REP_" CAN ONLY BE ATTACHED TO SHELL ELEMENTS."

2141 SHELL INTERFACE ELEMENT ID= "_ARG_REP_" CANNOT FIND ATTACHED SHELL ELEMENT."

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 6 of 1024

2142 PILE ELEMENT ID= "_ARG_REP_" IS NOT EMBEDDED IN SOLID ELEMENT."

2143 "ANALYSIS CANCELED BY USER REQUEST."

2145 "FAILED TO CHANGE ELEMENT PROPERTY TO PROPERTY ID = "_ARG_REP_". INCOMPATIBLE MATERIAL MODELS."

"UNABLE TO FIND STABLE EQUILIBRIUM BASED ON GIVEN C, PHI IN SLOPE STABILITY ANALYSIS. FACTOR OF
2149
SAFETY MAY BE LESS THAN "_ARG_REP_"."
"ERROR WHILE INTEGRATION OF POLYLINE IN SAM MODULE (ELEMENT ID = "_ARG_REP"). CHECK POLYLINE
2150
DEFINITION."
"ERROR IN EMBEDDED ELEMENTS. FOLLOWING EMBEDDED TRUSS ELEMENTS HAVE NO MOTHER ELEMENT:
2151
"_ARG_REP_". "

3501 CANNOT CLOSE SCRATCH FILE "_ARG_REP_".

3503 FAILED TO WRITE ANALYSIS DATA TO FILE OR READ ANALYSIS DATA FROM FILE.

4003 UNREASONABLE MATERIAL DATA IN MATERIAL ID="_ARG_REP_".

4009 NEGATIVE STRENGTH VALUE SPECIFIED "_ARG_REP_". USING ABSOLUTE VALUE.

4010 FAILED TO FIND APPROPRIATE SHIFT FOR EIGEN SOLVER. (ZERO MASS MATRIX).

4011 SYSTEM MASS IS DIRECTIONAL. USING AVERAGED MASS CENTER AS MODAL FACTOR REFERENCE.

4012 INVALID GRID POINT ID="_ARG_REP_" SPECIFIED IN GRID POINT WEIGHT GENERATOR.

4013 INVALID GRID POINT ID="_ARG_REP_" SPECIFIED IN MODAL FACTOR CALULATION.

4014 ONE OR MORE NON-ZERO DEGREES OF FREEDOM WERE AUTO-CONSTRAINED.

4017 THERE ARE ONLY "_ARG_REP_" EIGENVALUES IN THE RANGE OF INTEREST.

4018 ONLY "_ARG_REP_" EIGENVALUES WERE COMPUTED SUCCESSFULLY.

4020 IGNORING Y-DIRECTION IN GRAVITY LOAD FOR AXISYMMETRIC PROBLEM.

4021 NO LAYER DEFINED IN COMPOSITE PROPERTY. NOT CREATING PROPERTY ID="_ARG_REP_".

4024 FAILED TO CONVERGE IN NONLINEAR ANALYSIS. LOAD INCREMENT="_ARG_REP_".

MAXIMIUM ITERATION REACHED IN RETURN MAPPING, MATERIAL ID=" _ARG_REP_", ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_ ",
4025
INTEGRATION POINT="_ARG_REP_ ".

4026 STIFFNESS MATRIX IS NOT POSITIVE DEFINITE IN PRE-STRESSED LINEAR STATIC ANALYSIS.

4027 MID-NODES OF ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_" ARE RELOCATED TO CENTER OF CORNER POINTS.

4028 MID-NODES OF ALL QUADRATIC SOLID ELEMENTS ARE RELOCATED TO CENTER OF CORNER POINTS.

4030 ITERATIONS STOPPED IN AMG BEFORE SOLUTION CONVERGED (~).

4031 STEFAN BOLTZMANN CONSTANT IS ZERO. RADIATION CONDITIONS WILL HAVE NO EFFECT.

4032 FAILED TO FIND ELEMENT CONNECTED TO SEGMENT WITH NODE IDS = # # # # . THIS SEGMENT IS IGNORED.

4033 MULTIPLE CONNECTED ELEMENTS FOUND FOR SEGMENT WITH NODE IDS = # # # # . THIS SEGMENT IS IGNORED.

CONTACT SURFACE ID = # DEFINED IN CONTACT PARAMETER ID = # WAS NOT FOUND. THIS PARAMETER IS
4035
IGNORED.

4037 CANNOT DETERMINE CRITICAL TIME STEP. TIME STEP VALUE OF "_ARG_REP_" WILL BE USED.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 7 of 1024

4039 DOF "_ARG_REP_" IS ALREADY CONSTRAINED. MULTIPOINT CONSTRAINT IGNORED.

4040 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ITERATIONS FOR AMG IS TOO SMALL. DEFAULT VALUE "_ARG_REP_" WILL BE USED.

4041 RESIDUAL TOLERANCE FOR AMG IS TOO SMALL. DEFAULT VALUE "_ARG_REP_" WILL BE USED.

DISCREPANCY IN CONSTRAINTS, CONTACT OR MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOUND IN SUBCASE

4042
COMBINATION. COMBINED RESULTS OF SUBCASES ID # AND # MAY BE INVALID.

4045 MINIMUM ALLOWED TIME STEP REACHED. "_ARG_REP_" MAY BE LARGER THAN THE SPECIFIED.

FAILED TO ESTIMATE DOMINANT FLEXIBLE FREQUENCY IN LINEAR DIRECT TRANSIENT ANALYSIS ID = "_ARG_REP_".
4046
DEFAULT TIME STEP WILL BE USED.

4047 INFINITE RESPONSE DETECTED DUE TO RESONANCE AT FREQUENCY = "_ARG_REP_".

4048 INFINITE RESPONSE DETECTED DUE TO RIGID BODY MODE AT FREQUENCY = 0

4049 MEMBRANE MATERIAL IS RIGID. BENDING AND SHEAR PROPERTIES WILL BE IGNORED.

4051 MULTI-BODY SYSTEM SEEMS TO BE OVER-CONSTRAINED. DUPLICATED CONSTRAINTS IGNORED.

EXCESSIVE MESH IRREGULARITY DETECTED FOR CASTING DIRECTION CONTROL. ESTIMATED IRREGULARITY
4052
MEASURE =

4054 "NEGATIVE JACOBIAN IN ELEMENT ID="_ARG_REP_"."

"SYSTEM MATRIX SEEMS TO BE TOO LARGE FOR PHYSICAL MEMORY. PERFORMANCE MAY BE SEVERELY
4055
DEGRADED."

4057 EQUIVALENT LINEAR ANALYSIS FAILED TO CONVERGE WITHIN MAX. ITERATIONS = "_ARG_REP_".

"IGNORING UNPARALLEL K0 DEFINITION FOR PLANE STRAIN/AXISYMMETRIC ELEMENTS." " MAXIMUM K0 VALUE
4060
WILL BE USED FOR COMPUTING HORIZONTAL STRESSES."
"CRITICAL FACTOR OF SAFETY NOT FOUND IN "_ARG_REP_" TRIES IN SLOPE STABILITY ANALYSIS. FACTOR OF
4063
SAFETY IS GREATER THAN "_ARG_REP_"."

4064 "MATERIAL ASSIGNED TO HOST MESH OF GAUGE PROPERTY (ID = "_ARG_REP_") IS NOT UNIQUE."

4105 ONE OF THE FREQUENCY RANGE BOUNDARIES IS TOO CLOSE TO A FREQUENCY.

4106 EIGENVALUES HAVE NOT PASSED STURM SEQUENCE CHECK.

4108 EIGENVECTORS MAY NOT BE ORTHOGONAL.

4109 EIGENVALUES ARE TOO CLUSTERED TO EVALUATE. SOME EIGENVALUES MAY BE LOST.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR

ERROR: CANNOT ALLOCATE MEMORY

Cause

This error corresponds to all cases associated with lack of memories. This does not typically occur, but is

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 8 of 1024

generated when large memories are used for specific functions. For example, this error may be generated
when cavity radiation is applied to too many nodes (10,000 to 20,000) in a 32-bit system.

Also, an insufficient virtual memory of the system or a limitation on the memory in a 32 bit system may lead
to the error.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

None

Remedy

No typical solution exists since the error is generated in various situations. In most cases, the problems are
associated with model sizes. So reduce the model size, or if the model is symmetric, use the symmetric
boundary conditions.

In case of lack of system virtual memory, increase the memory by the following steps:

1. Click Start >> Control Panel

2. Click System >> Advanced tab >> Click Settings under Performance.

3. In Performance Options window, select Advanced tab >> Click Change under Virtual Memory.

4. In Virtual Memory window, Select Custom size >> Enter 3000 for Initial size and 4000 for Maximum size >> Click OK.

When using a 32-bit system (maximum memory is 4GB), 2GB memory is allocated to the operating system
(Windows XP or Windows 2000), and the remaining 2GB memory is used to operate external programs. Microsoft offers an option to allocate 1GB memory to the operating
system when using Windows XP and use a maximum of 3GB memory for the external programs. The following steps are taken to activate the option to use 3GB memory:

1. Click Start >> Control Panel

2. Click System >> Advanced tab >> Click Settings under Startup and Recovery.

3. In Startup and Recovery window, Click Edit.

4. Copy and paste the following at the bottom of the edited file.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 9 of 1024

5. Type in "/3GB" at the end of the pasted section (the finally edited file is shown below).

6. Save and close.

The above method has been recommended by Microsoft and does not represent the solution provided by MIDAS. The system change may lead to an instability
problem.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1000

ERROR [1000]: SOLVER LOCK WAS NOT DETECTED #

Cause

Invalid solver license

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Analysis >> Tools >> Options >> General >> License...

Remedy

Check analysis option and protection key number as well.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 10 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1002

ERROR [1002]: CANNOT OPEN INPUT FILE #

Cause

This error is generated when the specified file cannot be opened due to the loss or damage in the file.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

None

Remedy

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 11 of 1024

None.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1006

ERROR [1006]: SELF DEPENDENCY FOUND IN MULTIPOINT CONSTRAINT DEFINITION FOR #

(NODEID/DOFTYPE)

Cause

This error is generated when dependent (constraint) DOFs in an MPC (Multi-Point Constraint) or rigid body
element is defined to ultimately become dependent on itself again through recursive definition.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Create >> Other >> Rigid Link...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint Equation...

Remedy

Since the constraint equations (MPC) or rigid body elements have been incorrectly defined, check the
dependency relationships between DOFs. If the dependency relationships are complex, utilize the rigid
body analysis (static/dynamic) using connector elements.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1008

ERROR [1008]: # (NODEID/DOFTYPE) IS ALREADY CONSTRAINED. CANNOT BE CONSTRAINED BY

MULTIPOINT CONSTRAINT.

Cause

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 12 of 1024

This error is generated either when DOFs are constrained with an SPC (Single-Point Constraint) or when the
DOFs, which have been already defined as dependent through an MPC (Multi-Point Constraint) or rigid body
element, are re-defined as dependent DOFs. In other words, the error is generated when additional DOFs
are constrained to the dependent node or when additional MPC or rigid bodies are created.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Create >> Other >> Rigid Link...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint Equation...

Remedy

Examine the DOFs with duplicated definitions. Remove any additional DOFs that have been defined on a
dependent DOF, and delete any additional MPC or rigid bodies.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1010

ERROR [1010]: INVALID RIGID BODY MOTION DEFINITION IN RBE ID=#.

Cause

This error is generated when a nonlinear rigid body element and an MPC (Multi-Point Constraint) are
tangled in an explicit dynamic analysis.

Analysis Type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 13 of 1024

Explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Create >> Other >> Rigid Link...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint Equation...

Remedy

Break any connections between the rigid body element and the linear MPC (Multi-Point Constraint).

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1018

ERROR [1018]: INVALID MATERIAL DATA IN MATERIAL ID=#

Cause

This error is generated if it has been determined that the analysis using a given material cannot be
performed due to the errors associated with the entered data or the coefficients of the material.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Mesh >> Property >> Material...

Remedy

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 14 of 1024

Revise the problems of the corresponding material.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1019

ERROR [1019]: UNABLE TO DEFINE ELEMENT ORIENTATION FOR (ELEMENT TYPE) ELEMENT ID=#

Cause

This error is generated when an element coordinate system cannot be created with the Y-axis entered in a
1D element.

A 1D element must be defined with a reference vector or a reference node in order to define the strong and
weak axes of the element, and the element Y-axis is defined based on the reference. It is typically defined
by a reference vector, and the element Y-axis is defined to be parallel to the Z-axis of the global rectangular
coordinate system. The error is generated when the Y-axis of an 1D element, which has been set by default,
is identical to the axial direction of the element.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 15 of 1024

Mesh >> Generate >> 1D >> Orientation (Element Z-Axis)...

Mesh >> Element >> Parameters >> 1D >> Change Csys >> Orientation (Element Z-Axis)...

Remedy

Modify the element Z-axis to be different from the axial direction.

Define by using Reference Node or Reference Vector in "Mesh >> Element >> Parameters >> 1D >> Change
CSys >> Orientation (Element Z-Axis)".

① Select the element to be modified.

② Re-define the axial direction and the Y-axis of the element to be different by using Reference Node or
Reference Vector.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1020

ERROR [1020]: NODAL COORDINATE HAS NEGATIVE X VALUE IN AXISYMMETRIC ELEMENT ID=#

Cause

The coordinate in the radius direction (X coordinate) of an axisymmetric element must be positive. This
error is generated when the X coordinate of a node in an axisymmetric element is negative.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 16 of 1024

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

None

Remedy

Place any axisymmetric elements in either the 1st or 4th quadrant.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1022

ERROR [1022]: INVALID MATERIAL REFERENCE IN PROPERTY ID=#

Cause

This error is generated when an improper material is defined in Element/Property.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material...

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Property...

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 17 of 1024

Remedy

Use the materials suited to Element and Property.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1023

ERROR [1023]: NOT ENOUGH ELEMENTS DEFINED TO FORM CAVITY ID=#

Cause

This error is generated when there is an insufficient number of elements forming a cavity in a heat transfer
analysis in which cavity radiation conditions are included.

Analysis Type

Heat transfer analysis (steady state, transient)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Static/Heat Analysis >> Heat load >> Cavity...

Dynamic/Trans.Heat/CFD Analysis >> Transient Heat load >> Cavity...

Remedy

Specify 2 or more elements to form a cavity.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1024

ERROR [1024]: CANNOT RESUME WRITING TO RESULT FILE #

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 18 of 1024

Cause

This error is generated when the result file cannot be opened in a construction stage analysis since it does not match the model file.

Analysis Type

Construction stage analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

Re-run analysis with the latest model file.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1032

ERROR [1032]: CURVE FITTING FAILED IN MATERIAL ID=#

Cause

This error is generated when a solution cannot be obtained during a curve fitting process to obtain the
material constant from the test data of a hyperelastic material.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis (nonlinear static, nonlinear explicit transient)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 19 of 1024

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material...

Remedy

Re-try after adjusting the settings related to curve fitting (Error Norm for Fit, Range of Test Data for Fit,
etc.). Also, change the degree of the model or modify the material data.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1036

ERROR [1036]: INVALID ELEMENT TYPE FOR NONLINEAR EXPLICIT TRANSIENT ANALYSIS.

Cause

This error is generated when the elements used in explicit dynamic analysis are not supported by the
program.

Except for the higher-order tetrahedral elements, higher-order solid elements, plane strain elements,
axisymmetric elements, higher-order plane stress/shell elements, rectangular surface elements and layered
solid elements cannot be used in explicit dynamic analysis (nonlinear explicit transient).

Analysis Type

Explicit dynamic analysis (nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

Mesh >> Generate... (High-Order Element option)

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Property...

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 20 of 1024

Remedy

Re-create the corresponding elements to be usable in explicit dynamic analysis (nonlinear explicit transient).

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1037

ERROR [1037]: PRELOAD (BOLT LOAD) IS NOT SUPPORTED IN ANALYSIS ID=#

Cause

Bolt loads are supported only in linear and nonlinear static analyses. This error is generated if bolt loads are
used in other types of analyses.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses except for linear and nonlinear static analyses

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Static/Heat Analysis >> Contact/Connect >> Pin/Bolt...

Static/Heat Analysis >> Static Load >> Bolt Load...

Remedy

Revise the model to exclude bolt loads in the analysis types, which are not supported by the program.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1038

ERROR [1038]: BOTH (DISPLACEMENT/VELOCITY/ACCELERATION) AND

(VELOCITY/ACCELERATION/DISPLACEMENT) CANNOT BE SPECIFIED TO THE SAME DOF. NODE ID=#

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 21 of 1024

Cause

This error is generated when displacement, velocity or acceleration is defined more than once at a DOF in
explicit dynamic analysis (nonlinear explicit transient).

Analysis Type

Explicit dynamic analysis (nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

Dynamic Analysis >> Load >> Time Varying Static...

Remedy

Define only one of the boundary conditions out of displacement, velocity and acceleration at a DOF. Then
the other two can be automatically determined.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1045

ERROR [1045]: MATERIAL COORDINATE SYSTEM CANNOT BE CHANGED DURING CONSTRUCTION

STAGE ANALYSIS

Cause

This error is generated when the material coordinate system has been changed by change property function during construction stage.

Analysis Type

Construction stage analysis

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 22 of 1024

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Property >> Material CSys

Analysis >> Boundary >> Change Property

Remedy

Modify the material coordinate system. It cannot be changed during construction stage.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1046

ERROR [1046]: INVALID RELEASE DOF DEFINITION IN # ELEMENT = #

Cause

This error is generated in case that all DOFs are released in bar and shell element.

Analysis Type
All types of analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Create >> Other >> Rigid Link...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint Equation...

Remedy

Examine the DOFs identified to make sure that at least more than one DOF can be constrained.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1102

ERROR [1102]: ERROR ENCOUNTERED WHILE READING INPUT FILE #

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 23 of 1024

Cause

This error is generated when the specified file cannot be opened due to the loss or damage in the file.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

None

Remedy

None.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1201

ERROR [1201]: CANNOT OPEN SCRATCH FILE (FILENAME)

Cause

This error is generated when a temporary file required in the process of executing an analysis cannot be
created. Temporary files generated during an analysis are generally created in the work folder. The primary
reasons for this error are as follows:

1. If the disk capacity is insufficient

2. If the target work folder is set to Read Only

3. If a virus vaccine program prevents creation of any temporary files

Analysis Type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 24 of 1024

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Tools >> Option >> General >> Application >> Temporary Folder...

Remedy

1. In case of insufficient disk capacity, secure a sufficient amount of disk capacity or move the model file to
a folder with enough disk capacity.

2. If the target work folder is Read Only, change the folder properties.

3. Using the related menu, specify the path of the temporary files to a location with sufficient disk capacity
and no Read Only option.

4. Disable the "Live Check" function of the virus vaccine program.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1202

ERROR [1202]: CANNOT OPEN RESTART FILE (FILENAME)

Cause

This error is generated when the specified Restart file cannot be opened in an analysis using a Restart file.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis (Nonlinear static, nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Analysis Control >> Parameter >> Restart...

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 25 of 1024

Remedy

Perform a preceding step analysis to create a Restart file prior to performing Restart analysis. In order to create a Restart file, the
"Generation Restart Info. File" option needs to be checked on in the related menu before performing the analysis.

When using the Restart file, check on "Specify Restart Info. File" to specify the Restart file created in the preceding step analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR1203

ERROR [1203]: IDENTICAL RESTART FILENAME SPECIFIED FOR BOTH READ AND WRITE METHOD

Cause

This error is generated when the specified Restart file name is identical to the Restart file for output.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis (Nonlinear static, nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Analysis Control >> Parameter >> Restart...

Remedy

Change the name of specified restart file or subcase of analysis using restart file.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2001

ERROR [2001]: NEGATIVE JACOBIAN IN ELEMENT ID=#

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 26 of 1024

Cause

This error is generated when the inverse matrices cannot be obtained during an analysis. The primary reasons are as follows:

1. When an element shape is excessively twisted

2. When the node numbers are incorrectly sequenced

For linear analysis, such a problem is processed as an error since it is a modeling issue. However, it is not considered as an error in
nonlinear static analysis because it may occur while the calculation has not converged. Especially when higher-order elements are
used and the geometric model is complex, the error may be most likely generated due to the 1st reason.

Analysis Type

Linear analysis (linear static, modal)

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Parameters >> 2D or 3D >> Change Element Order...

Mesh >> Element >> Modify...

Mesh >> Element >> Modify Topology >> Fix Connectivity of Reversed Solid...

Remedy

1. Identify and correct the excessively distorted elements. In case higher-order elements are used, improve the shape of the mesh
using the "Move Mid-Node to Center of Two Nodes" function under "Mesh >> Element >> Parameters >> 2D or 3D >> Change
Element Order.

2. No errors are generated for node IDs automatically assigned by the mesh creation functions provided by the program. Check
the mesh generated by user-defined node IDs. Once the troublesome mesh is identified, revise the corresponding elements using
the "Mesh >> Element >> Modify" function. Especially for solid element mesh, revise the error using the "Mesh >> Element >>
Modify Topology >> Fix Connectivity of Reversed Solid" function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 27 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2004

ERROR [2004]: FAILED TO COMPUTE EIGENVALUES

Cause

This error is generated when eigenvalue calculations are abnormally terminated due to numerical problems. By and large, problems exist in the analysis model, and
additional error messages may be generated.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis (modal, linear buckling, modal response)

Related Menu

None

Remedy

Since most problems are associated with the analysis model, check to see if the model has been properly constructed.

The main variables in eigenvalue analysis are mass and stiffness; thus, check if the mass density has been correctly entered in
material properties or if the unit system for the density has been properly defined. Also, in case additional mass has been added
using a mass element, check to see if it has been defined with the mass unit.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2007

ERROR [2007]: FACTORIZATION FAILED DUE TO SINGULARITY AT # (NODE ID) (RANK=#)

Cause

This error is generated when matrix decomposition cannot progress any further due to the presence of singularities. Such errors often occur when constraints to the
analysis model are insufficient.

Analysis Type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 28 of 1024

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic, nonlinear and mode-based analyses

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Create >> Other >> Rigid Body...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint Equation...

Analysis >> Contact >> Define Contact...

Remedy

This error is typically generated when the overall analysis model has been insufficiently constrained. The following steps must be
taken:

1. Add suitable constraints by adding SPC (Single-Point Constraint), MPC (Multi-Point Constraint) or rigid body elements in order
to eliminate any singularities.

2. The error may be generated if contacts are not properly defined in the analysis model. In this case, check if all the contact
conditions between the parts have been defined, and also if the "Contact Tolerance" value has been defined to include the
tolerance distances between the parts.

3. In case of elements that include DOFs associated with no stiffness, use the "AUTOSPC/Automatic Single-Point Constraint" option
or other appropriate constraints to eliminate the singularities.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2008

ERROR [2008]: ERROR IN LINEAR EQUATION SOLVER (comments)

Cause

This error may be generated within an equation solver in addition to the singularity errors (2007, 2129). When using the iterative solver (AMG solver), this error is
generated instead of ERROR [2007] even if singularities exist in the matrices. Use caution if this error is generated in using a non-iterative solver, which is not normal.
in such a case, refer to the additional messages inside the parenthesis.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic analysis

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 29 of 1024

Related Menu

None

Remedy

When using the iterative solver (AMG solver), refer to ERROR [2007] since the error may have been caused by the singularities of
the matrices.

For other solvers, refer to the additional messages inside the parenthesis.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2009

ERROR [2009]: FAILED TO DETERMINE MATERIAL AXIS BY PROJECTION IN ELEMENT ID=#

Cause

This error is generated when the material coordinate system defined in a layered solid element cannot be projected. The material
coordinate system of a layered solid element assumes the X-axis as the principal axis of the material by projecting the user-defined
coordinate system onto the mid-plane of the element. The error is generated when the X-axis of the material coordinate system
cannot be projected onto the mid- plane of a layered solid element; in other words, when the X-axis is perpendicular to the mid-
plane.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 30 of 1024

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Mesh >> Attribute >> Property >> 3D >> Composite Solid...

Static/Heat Analysis >> Attribute/CSys/Function >> Property >> 3D >> Composite Solid...

Dynamic/Trans.Heat/CFD Analysis >> Attribute/CSys/Function >> Property >> 3D >> Composite Solid...

Remedy

Revise so that the X-axis of the defined material coordinate system can be projected onto the mid-plane of the layered solid
element; that is, the X-axis is not perpendicular to the mid-plane.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2012

ERROR [2012]: IMPROPER LINEAR EQUATION SOLVER SELECTED. TRY OTHER SOLVERS OR USE
AUTO SELECTION

Cause

This error is generated when the selected equation solver is not suitable for a particular analysis type. (Example: when the iterative AMG solver is selected for
eigenvalue analysis)

Analysis Type

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

Tools >> Option >> Analysis/Results >> Analysis Control >> Equation Solver...

Remedy

For eigenvalue analysis (Modal, Buckling), select a direct solver (dense solver or multifrontal solver), or use the Auto selection

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 31 of 1024

option.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2101

ERROR [2101]: 1D ELEMENT LENGTH IS ZERO IN ELEMENT ID=#

Cause

This error is generated when the initial length or the length after deformation of an 1D element (Rod, Bar, Pipe) is 0. It can be generated when the length of an 1D
element is defined as 0. However, the error mostly occurs when a 1D element deforms to a length becoming 0 during the analysis.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

None

Remedy

If the initial length is 0, search for the problematic element for modification. If the deformed length is 0, modify either the analysis
conditions or the analysis model.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2102

ERROR [2102]: SCRATCH FILE IO FAILED

Cause

This is an IO error of the files temporarily created during an analysis. The temporary files are basically created in the work folder.
The primary reasons for this error are as follows:

1. If there is insufficient disk capacity

2. If the target work folder is set to Read Only

3. If a virus vaccine program prevents creation of any temporary files

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 32 of 1024

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Tools >> Option >> General >> Application >> Temporary Folder...

Remedy

1. In case of insufficient disk capacity, secure a sufficient amount of disk capacity or move the model file to
a folder with enough disk capacity.

2. If the target work folder is Read Only, change the folder properties.

3. Using the related menu, specify the path of the temporary files to a location with sufficient disk capacity
and no Read Only option.

4. Disable the "Live Check" function of the virus vaccine program.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2103

ERROR [2103]: FAILED TO CONVERGE IN NONLINEAR ANALYSIS. LOAD INCREMENT=#

Cause

This error is generated when convergence fails at a specific load increment step during a nonlinear analysis, provided that the
analysis termination option is turned on. When convergence fails, the nonlinear analysis is terminated.

Failed convergence in nonlinear analysis is typically caused by the following reasons:

1. When the sign of the curvature changes around the solution, the Newton-Raphson method may diverge.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 33 of 1024

2. When the load control procedure is used to perform an analysis on a model whose stiffness drastically decreases

3. When the mesh becomes severely distorted due to large deformation

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis (nonlinear static, nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Analysis Control >> Nonlinear...

Remedy

1. Revise the main parameters for nonlinear analysis such as the number of load increments and convergence criterion to become
favorable for convergence in "Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Analysis Control >> Nonlinear...".

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 34 of 1024

2. If the load increment is too large, divide it into a number of load increments using the subcases for each step.

3. Since the displacement control procedure is more stable than the load control procedure in nonlinear analysis, assign forced
displacement conditions and perform the analysis with the displacement control procedure. When a forced displacement is
applied, the applied load can be calculated by using the reaction force.

4. If the material model is complex, use the Bi-Linear model, which is a typical material model.

5. Examine the shape of the element which results in high stress. Even if the initial shape is good, severe distortion may occur as a
result of large deformation. In such a case, modify the mesh to maintain a certain level of mesh quality even after deformation.

6. Re-distribute loads to avoid any unnecessary concentrated local stresses. When a concentrated load is applied to a node,
redistribute the load onto an assumed small face as a pressure load.

Typically the remedy numbers 1-3 are investigated first. If the error persists, try the remedy numbers 4-6.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2104

ERROR [2104]: SINGULARITY WHILE COMPUTING CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX IN ELEMENT ID=#

Cause

This error is generated when the performance of an element becomes very poor due to severe distortion during the analysis. The error generally occurs in a model at
a level similar to the NEGATIVE JACOBIAN error. Also, this error is generated only when hybrid elements are used.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 35 of 1024

Analysis Type

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

1. For linear analysis, search for the elements identified with the error and modify the shapes.

2. In case of nonlinear analysis, such an error occurs when significant changes in loads are present. Increase the number of load
increments. Refer to the remedies for ERROR [2103].

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2105

ERROR [2105]: CANNOT COMPUTE CONSISTENT TANGENT MODULUS, MATERIAL ID=# ELEMENT
ID=# INTEGRATION POINT=#

Cause

This error is generated when the consistent tangent modulus, which satisfies the material data provided in the elasto-plastic model, cannot be obtained. The error
usually occurs when the displacement increment is large or a complex hardening curve zone exists in the material data.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis (nonlinear static, nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

None

Remedy

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 36 of 1024

1. Increase the number of load increments.

2. If the hardening curve is complex, simplify the curve and perform the analysis.

3. Remove the softening zone of the material model or simplify the curve into a 2nd-order curve of a Bi-Linear form.

4. If the problem persists, convert the model into a perfect plastic material model.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2107

ERROR [2107]: TOO MANY THICKNESS INTEGRATION POINTS IN PROPERTY ID=# FOR EXPLICIT
DYNAMIC ANALYSIS (MAX=31)

Cause

This error is generated when the specified number of integration points in the thickness direction of 2D plate elements is too large (more than 31) in nonlinear explicit
dynamic analysis.

Analysis Type

Explicit dynamic analysis (nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Mesh >> Attribute >> Property >> 2D >> Plate...

Static/Heat Analysis >> Attribute/CSys/Function >> Property >> 2D >> Plate...

Dynamic/Trans.Heat/CFD Analysis >> Attribute/CSys/Function >> Property >> 2D >> Plate...

Remedy

1. In [Additional Options...], reduce the Simpson Integration Points in the thickness direction to a value less than 31.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 37 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2108

ERROR [2108]: CRITICAL TIME STEP IS ZERO IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS

Cause

This error is generated when the time step is defined as 0 due to incorrect data entries in nonlinear explicit dynamic analysis.

Analysis Type

Explicit dynamic analysis (nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX}

Analysis Case >> Subcase Control >> Dynamic >> Advanced Dynamic Setting...

Remedy

This error is generated when the material density is missing or when the elements undergo severely deformation. First, check the
material property data. Next, check the analysis results obtained thus far. If excessive deformation of elements is identified,
reduce the time scaling factor. Also, since the severe deformation of elements is related to the element shapes or the magnitude
of the loads, check the corresponding data.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 38 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2109

ERROR [2109]: ZERO DIAGONAL MASS FOUND IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS

Cause

This error is generated if any of the diagonal terms in a diagonalized mass matrix contains 0.

Analysis Type

Explicit dynamic analysis (nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

None

Remedy

Check if the mass values (material density or mass elements) have been correctly entered. Constrain any unused DOFs.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2110

ERROR [2110]: MASS MPC OR RBE MASS CANNOT BE DIRECTIONAL IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC
ANALYSIS

Cause

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 39 of 1024

This error is generated when the mass matrix retains the directionality at the nodes retaining independent DOFs of MPC (Multi-Point Constraint) or at the nodes
constituting rigid body elements.

Analysis Type

Explicit dynamic analysis (explicit nonlinear transient)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Mesh >> Element >> Create >> Other >> Rigid Link...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint Equation...

Remedy

The mass matrix of the nodes, which retain independent DOFs of MPC or constitute rigid body elements, must not retain any
directional properties, so a careful use of elements must be practised. Especially when the mass matrix is directly entered by using
mass elements, directional properties must not be included. In other words, the mass matrix must only have the diagonal terms
whose X-, Y- and Z-direction components must be all equal.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2111

ERROR [2111]: SCALAR MASS CANNOT BE DESIGNATED TO ROTATIONAL INERTIA IN EXPLICIT

DYNAMIC ANALYSIS

Cause

This error is generated when the inertia for rotational DOFs is entered using a scalar mass element.

Analysis Type

Explicit dynamic analysis (explicit nonlinear transient)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 40 of 1024

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Mesh >> Element >> Create >> Other >> Mass...

Remedy

Since scalar mass cannot be applied to rotational DOFs, enter the mass matrix using concentrated mass elements and constrain the
unused DOFs.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2112

ERROR [2112]: NOT ENOUGH MEMORY FOR TEMPORARY EIGENVECTOR STORAGE. REDUCE
NUMBER OF EIGENVECTORS

Cause

This error is generated when there is a lack of memory due to a large number of eigenvalues are specified to be calculated at once.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis (Eigenvalue analysis)

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Eigenvalue >> Analysis Control >> General

Remedy

If the number of eigenvalues to be obtained is too large, divide them into separate ranges, thereby reducing the number of
eigenvalues required to be calculated at once.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 41 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2113

ERROR [2113]: FACTORIZATION FAILED IN EIGEN SOLVER. THIS MAY BE DUE TO EXCESSIVELY
CLUSTERED EIGENVALUES

Cause

This error is generated when the shift value is determined between almost duplicated eigenvalues in the process of calculating eigenvalues. It usually occurs during
Sturm Sequence Check of missing eigenvalues .

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Eigenvalue >> Analysis Control >> General

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 42 of 1024

Remedy

Set the calculation range to avoid the range in which many eigenvalues exist, or do not perform the Sturm Sequence Check of
missing eigenvalues. Or adjust the number of eigenvalues such that more eigenvalues are calculated than those expected to be
duplicated.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2116

ERROR [2116]: FAILED TO CONVERGE IN AMG

Cause

In case the AMG solver is used while the "Fix Singularity by Dummy Spring" option is turned off, this error is generated when no convergence is reached within the
convergence tolerance within the specified maximum number of iterations.

Analysis Type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 43 of 1024

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

Tools >> Option >> Analysis/Results >> Analysis Control >> Equation Solver...

Remedy

Check to see if the maximum number of iterations and the convergence tolerance are set to 1000 and 1e-006 respectively. If they
are not set to the default values, click the "Initialize" button at the bottom left of the dialog box to set them back to the defaults.

If the above measure does not resolve the problem, increase the maximum number of iterations or the convergence tolerance.
Also, try to fix the error by selecting the multifrontal solver as the system of equation solver, which is a direct solver.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2117

ERROR [2117]: DIVERGENCE DETECTED IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS

Cause

This error is generated when the solution to nonlinear explicit dynamic analysis is assessed to have diverged. The solution mainly diverges if the specified initial
velocity is unusually large or the vibration modes caused by an impact due to a suddenly applied large external load cannot be adequately simulated.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 44 of 1024

Analysis Type

Nonlinear explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

None

Remedy

If one of the above causes is identified, modify the corresponding condition. Especially if the cause of divergence is related to time
steps, reduce the time scale factor.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2122

ERROR [2122]: NO FLEXIBLE-BODY MODE

Cause

When topology optimization is performed using the mode-based analysis (transient response/frequency response/modal), this error is generated when only the rigid
body modes exist because of insufficient boundary conditions.

Analysis Type

Topology optimization using mode-based analysis

Related Menu

None

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 45 of 1024

Remedy

Since the analysis becomes meaningful with the presence of flexible body modes, add proper boundary conditions and thus
remove the rigid body modes.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2123

ERROR [2123]: DIVERGENCE DETECTED IN EXPLICIT DYNAMIC ANALYSIS AT TIME=#

Cause

This error is generated when the solution to nonlinear explicit dynamic analysis is assessed to have diverged. The solution mainly diverges if the specified initial
velocity is unusually large or the vibration modes caused by an impact due to a suddenly applied large external load cannot be adequately simulated.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

None

Remedy

If one of the above causes is identified, modify the corresponding condition. Especially if the cause of divergence is related to time
steps, reduce the time scale factor.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2124

ERROR [2124]: PROPERTY ID=# IS ASSIGNED TO INCOMPATIBLE ELEMENT TYPE

Cause

This error is generated when properties incompatible with the element type have been specified.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 46 of 1024

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Property...

Remedy

Modify the properties of the corresponding ID so that the properties become compatible with the element
type.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2125

ERROR [2125]: CONTACT SEGMENT WITH NODE IDS=# IS INVALID. IDENTICAL NODAL
COORDINATES FOUND IN THE SEGMENT

Cause

In case an element shape has been severely distorted, this error is generated when the nodes of a contact segment, which faces a surface of the corresponding
element, point to the identical coordinates.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

None

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 47 of 1024

Remedy

Modify the severely distorted element.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2126

ERROR [2126]: RIGID MATERIAL IN COMPOSITE PROPERTY (ID=#) IS NOT ALLOWED

Cause

Rigid materials cannot be used for composite material properties.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material...

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Property...

Remedy

Modify not to use any rigid materials for the composite material properties.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2127

ERROR [2127]: NOT ENOUGH MEMORY FOR TEMPORARY RITZ VECTOR STORAGE

Cause

This error is generated if the memory space for eigenvalue analysis has not been secured.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 48 of 1024

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis (Eigenvalue analysis)

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Eigenvalue >> Analysis Control >> General

Remedy

Reduce the number of eigenvalues to be obtained.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2128

ERROR [2128]: MULTI-BODY SYSTEM SEEMS TO BE OVER-CONSTRAINED

Cause

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 49 of 1024

When using a joint element in linear analysis, this error is generated if the constraints defined by the joint element have been duplicated.

Analysis Type

Static/dynamic rigid body analysis (multi-body system)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Dynamic/Trans.Heat/CFD Analysis >> MBS >> Joint...

Remedy

Typically, if 2 or more master joints are connected to a slave joint of a joint element, the constrains are duplicated. Properly modify
the joint element to avoid any duplicated definitions of the constraints .

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2129

ERROR [2129]: FACTORIZATION FAILED DUE TO SINGULARITY IN STIFFNESS MATRIX (RANK=#)

Cause

This error is generated when matrix decomposition by a direct solution cannot progress any further due to the presence of singularities. Such errors often occur when
constraints to the analysis model are insufficient.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis, mode-based analysis

Related Menu

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 50 of 1024

Mesh >> Element >> Create >> Other >> Rigid Link...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint Equation...

Analysis >> Contact >> Define Contact...

Remedy

This error is typically generated when the overall analysis model has been insufficiently constrained. The following steps must be taken:

1. Add suitable constraints by adding SPC (Single-Point Constraint), MPC (Multi-Point Constraint) or rigid body elements in order
to eliminate any singularities.

2. The error may be generated if contacts are not properly defined in the analysis model. In this case, check if all the contact
conditions between the parts have been defined, and also if the "Contact Tolerance" value has been defined to include the
tolerance distances between the parts.

3. In case of elements that include DOFs associated with no stiffness, use the "AUTOSPC/Automatic Single-Point Constraint" option
or other appropriate constraints to eliminate the singularities.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2130

ERROR [2130]: LIMIT VALUE OF STRESS CONSTRAINT FOR MATERIAL ID=# IS ZERO

Cause

This error is generated if the material limit stress is "0" when the stress condition is used as the design constraint condition in topology optimization.

Analysis Type

Topology optimization using linear static analysis

Related Menu

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 51 of 1024

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material...

Remedy

Enter the yield stress of the corresponding material.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2131

ERROR [2131]: ERROR ENCOUNTERED DURING ANALYSIS RESTART. CURRENT ELEMENT IS

INCONSISTENT WITH STORAGE DATA

Cause

This error is generated when the element type and size of specified Restart file do not match with the
current file.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis (Nonlinear static, nonlinear explicit transient)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Analysis Control >> Parameter >> Restart...

Remedy

Match the element type currently used restart file with the previous one.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2132

ERROR [2132]: ERROR ENCOUNTERED IN MODIFIED CAM CLAY MATERIAL MODEL. TENSILE STRESS
IS APPLIED IN ELEMENT ID = # MATERIAL ID = #

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 52 of 1024

Cause

This error is generated when the element assigned by modified cam clay model is under tensile stress.
Modifiled cam clay model do not allow tensil stress

Analysis Type

All types of analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material

Remedy

MCC material models fundamentally do not allow tensile stress in the failure criteria (stress-strain relationship). However, various
conditions can generate tensile stress, such as the heaving of neighboring ground due to embankment load during consolidation
or uplift due to excavation. To overcome the material model limits and increase the applicability, analysis on tensile stress within
the 'allowable tensile stress' range can be conducted.

The size of the allowable tensile stress is not specified, and requires repeated analysis to input a larger value than the tensile stress
created from the overburden load (embankment) or failure behavior. Hence, the allowable tensile stress value needs to be set, to
prevent divergence and halting of analysis results due to tensile failure during analysis.

Hence, the allowable tensile stress value needs to be set, to prevent divergence and halting of analysis results due to tensile failure
during analysis.

However, when directly entering the pc (pre-consolidation load), the allowable tensile stress cannot surpass the pc value. When
defining using the OCR, the pc value is automatically calculated internally by considering the size of the input allowable tensile
stress.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 53 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2133

ERROR [2133]: MODIFIED CAM CLAY MATERIAL MODEL ID = # CAN ONLY BE USED WITH
SOLID,PLAIN STRAIN, OR AXISYMMETRIC ELEMENTS

Cause

This error is generated when Modified Cam Clay model is used for inappropriate elements. It can only be
used with solid, plain strain and axisymmetric elements.

Analysis Type

All types of analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Property

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 54 of 1024

Remedy

Modify the material property.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2134

ERROR [2134]: ERROR ENCOUNTERED IN ELEMENT ID = #. MODIFIED CAM CLAY MATERIAL MODEL
ID = # CAN ONLY BE USED WITH SOLID,PLAIN STRAIN, OR AXISYMMETRIC ELEMENTS

Cause

This error is generated when Modified Cam Clay model is used for inappropriate elements. It can only be
used with solid, plain strain and axisymmetric elements.

Analysis Type

All types of analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Property

Remedy

Modify the material property.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2135

ERROR [2135]: ERROR ENCOUNTERED IN MODIFIED CAM CLAY MATERIAL MODEL. IN MATERIAL ID
#. INITIAL VOID RATIO MUST BE LARGER THAN ZERO.
Cause

This error is generated when the initial void ratio of Modified Cam Clay model is less than zero.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 55 of 1024

Analysis Type

All types of analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Property

Remedy

Modify the material property.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2137

ERROR [2137]: ERROR ENCOUNTERED IN MATERIAL ID = #. # MATERIAL MODEL CANNOT BE USED

WITH VISCOELASTIC MATERIAL

Cause

This error is generated when the element assigned by one of the following models, Duncan-Chang, Jardine,
Jointed Rock, Modified Cam Clay, is used with viscoelastic material,

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 56 of 1024

Remedy

Change material with one except Duncan-Chang, Jardine, Jointed Rock, Modified Cam Clay.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2138

ERROR [2138]: "CANNOT COMPUT ELEASTIC-CREEP TANGENT MODULUS. MATERIAL ID = #.

ELEMENT ID = #. INTEGRATION POINT = #.

Cause

This error is generated in case that the tangent modulus cannot be calculated in viscoelastic material model.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material

Remedy

Check and modify the material property.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2139

ERROR [2139]: "MISSING DILATANCY ANGLE IN COULOMB FRICTION MODEL WITH VARIABLE
FRICTION ANGLE. MATERIAL ID = #.

Cause

This error is generated when the friction angle is defined with table data without dilatancy angle.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 57 of 1024

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material

Remedy

Define dilatancy angle or do not define the friction angle with table data.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2140

ERROR [2140]: "SHELL INTERFACE ELEMENT ID = # CAN ONLY BE ATTACHED TO SHELL ELEMENTS.

Cause

This error is generated when the shell interface is connected with different types of element.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Parameters

Remedy

Shell interface must be connected with the shell elements. Change the material property

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 58 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2141

ERROR [2141]: SHELL INTERFACE ELEMENT ID = # CANNOT FIND ATTACHED SHELL ELEMENT.

Cause

This error is generated when the shell interface is surrounded with different types of element.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Parameters

Remedy

Shell interface must be attached with the shell elements. Change the material property

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2142

ERROR [2142]: PILE ELEMENT ID = # IS NOT EMBEDDED IN SOLID ELEMENT.

Cause

This error is generated when the pile element is surrounded with inappropriate types of elements.

Analysis Type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 59 of 1024

Nonlinear analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Parameters

Remedy

Pile element can be only used with the solid type of elements. Change the element type of surrounded elements to solid type.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2143

ERROR [2143]: "ANALYSIS CANCELED BY USER REQUEST."

Cause

This error is generated when the user stop the analysis.

Analysis Type

All types of analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

None

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2145

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 60 of 1024

ERROR [2145]: FAILED TO CHANGE ELEMENT PROPERTY TO PROPERTY ID = #. INCOMPATIBLE

MATERIAL MODELS.

Cause

This error is generated when the user try to change material property with incompatible one.

Analysis Type

Construction stage analysis

Related Menu

Analysis >> Boundary >> Change Property

Remedy

In case of changing material property, use the same types of nonlinear material.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2149

ERROR [2149]: "UNABLE TO FIND STABLE EQUILIBRIUM BASED ON GIVEN C, PHI IN SLOPE
STABILITY ANALYSIS. FACTOR OF SAFETY MAY BE LESS THAN #

Cause

This error is generated when the calculated factor of safety is less than defined increment of safety factor.

Analysis Type

Slope stability analysis (SRM)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 61 of 1024

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material

Remedy

Since nonlinear parameters in used material is too unstable compared to applied external load including self
weight, the user must modify the parameters.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2150

ERROR [2150]: "ERROR WHILE INTERGRATION OF POLYLINE IN SAM MODULE (ELEMENT ID = #).
CHECK POLYLINE DEFINITION

Cause

This error is generated when the user define the slip polygonal surface inappropriately.

Analysis Type

Slope stability analysis (SAM)

Related Menu

Static/Slope Analysis >> Boundary >> Slip polygonal surface

Remedy

Modify slip polygonal surface

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 62 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Error > ERROR2151

ERROR [2151]: "ERROR IN EMBEDDED ELEMENTS. FOLLOWING EMBEDDED TRUSS ELEMENTS

HAVE NO MOTHER ELEMENT : #.

Cause

This error is generated when the embedded truss element do not have its mother elements.

Analysis Type

All types of analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

Include the mesh set adjacent to the embedded truss elements in the analysis.

For instance, in case that the embedded truss element is loacated outside of theelement edge or face.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning3501

WARNING [3501]: CANNOT CLOSE SCRATCH FILE (FILENAME)

Cause
Temporary files created during the analysis have not been properly deleted.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 63 of 1024

Related Menu

Tools >> Option >> General >> Application >> Temporary Folder...

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning3503

WARNING [3503]: FAILED TO WRITE ANALYSIS DATA TO FILE OR READ ANALYSIS DATA FROM FILE

Cause

This warning may be generated when writing or reading binary files such as temporary files, Restart files and analysis result files
used in the analysis. The primary causes for this warning to are as follows:

1. If the disk capacity is insufficient

2. If the target work folder is set to Read Only

3. If a virus vaccine program prevents creation of any temporary files

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Tools >> Option >> General >> Application >> Temporary Folder...

Remedy

1. In case of insufficient disk capacity, secure a sufficient amount of disk capacity or move the model file to a folder with enough disk capacity.

2. If the target work folder is Read Only, change the folder properties.

3. Using the related menu, specify the path of the temporary files to a location with sufficient disk capacity and no Read Only
option.

4. Disable the "Live Check" function of the virus vaccine program.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4003

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 64 of 1024

WARNING [4003]: UNREASONABLE MATERIAL DATA IN MATERIAL ID=#

Cause

This warning is generated if the specified coefficients of a material do not satisfy the material stability or violate the physical validity of the material.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material...

Remedy

Check and modify the problematic coefficients entered in the material of the corresponding ID.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4009

WARNING [4009]: NEGATIVE STRENGTH VALUE SPECIFIED # (ID). USING ABSOLUTE VALUE

Cause

This warning is generated when the tension strength value used to calculate the safety factor has been changed from negative to positive.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 65 of 1024

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material...

Remedy

Enter a positive tension capacity value for the material of the corresponding ID.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4010

WARNING [4010]: FAILED TO FIND APPROPRIATE SHIFT FOR EIGEN SOLVER. (ZERO MASS MATRIX)

Cause

This warning is generated when a proper shift value for eigenvalue calculation cannot be found.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis (Eigenvalue analysis)

Related Menu

None

Remedy

The main variables in eigenvalue analysis are mass and stiffness; thus, check if the mass density has been correctly entered in
material properties or if the unit system for density has been properly defined. Also, in case additional mass has been added using
a mass element, check if it has been defined in the mass unit.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4011

WARNING [4011]: SYSTEM MASS IS DIRECTIONAL. USING AVERAGED MASS CENTER AS MODAL
FACTOR REFERENCE

Cause

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 66 of 1024

This warning is generated when the system mass retains the directionality (when masses are different in X-, Y- and Z-directions)
and the modal participation factors are calculated with respect to the centers of gravity. In this case, the average mass of the 3
directions is used since the locations of the centers of gravity are different in different directions.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis (Eigenvalue analysis)

Related Menu

None

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4012

WARNING [4012]: INVALID GRID POINT ID=# SPECIFIED IN GRID POINT WEIGHT GENERATOR

Cause

This warning is generated when the reference node defined by the user for the grid point weight generator cannot be found. In such a case, the origin is used as the
reference point.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Analysis Control >> Parameter...

Remedy

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 67 of 1024

Revise the incorrectly defined reference node.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4013

WARNING [4013]: INVALID GRID POINT ID=# SPECIFIED IN MODAL FACTOR CALCULATION

Cause

This warning is generated when the reference node defined by the user to produce the modal participation factors cannot be found. In such a case, the center of
mass is used as the reference point.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Analysis Control >> Parameter...

Remedy

Revise the incorrectly defined reference node.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4014

WARNING [4014]: ONE OR MORE NON-ZERO DEGREES OF FREEDOM WERE AUTO-CONSTRAINED

Cause

In case the AUTOSPC (Automatic Single-Point Constraint) option is turned on, this message is generated if any DOFs have been auto-constrained. If the AUTOSPC
option is turned off, ERROR [2007] is generated in the same situation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 68 of 1024

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Analysis Control >> Parameter >> Advanced Model Parameter...

Remedy

Remove the warning by applying appropriate constraint conditions to the DOFs with no element stiffness.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4016

WARNING [4016]: SINGULARITY IN SYSTEM MATRIX FIXED

Cause

When the "Fix Singularity by Dummy Spring" option is checked on, this warning is generated to indicate that singularities developed in the process of matrix
decomposition have been resolved by adding small values in the diagonal terms. In case the "Fix Singularity by Dummy Spring" option is checked off, ERROR [2007]
is generated in the same situation.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 69 of 1024

Analysis Case >> Analysis Control >> Parameter >> Advanced Model Parameter...

Remedy

Since this warning is generated when insufficient constraints exist in the overall analysis model, add appropriate constraints by
using SPC, MPC, rigid body elements or contact conditions to eliminate the singularities (refer to ERROR [2007]).

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4017

WARNING [4017]: THERE ARE ONLY # EIGENVALUES IN THE RANGE OF INTEREST

Cause

This warning is generated when the number of eigenvalues to be calculated is greater than the total number of eigenvalues of the model.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Eigenvalue >> Analysis Control >> General ...

Remedy

Reduce the number of eigenvalues, or check if the mass data of the analysis model contains any errors.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 70 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4018

WARNING [4018]: ONLY # EIGENVALUES WERE COMPUTED SUCCESSFULLY

Cause

This warning indicates that not all the eigenvalues requested to be calculated have been completed.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Eigenvalue >> Analysis Control >> General ...

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 71 of 1024

Remedy

Since there may not exist as many eigenvalues as requested in the calculation range, specify the range of eigenvalue calculation,
rather than defining the number of eigenvalues. Checking on the "Sturm Sequence Check" option to check for missing
eigenvalues may be also helpful.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4020

WARNING [4020]: IGNORING Y-DIRECTION IN GRAVITY LOAD FOR AXISYMMETRIC PROBLEM

Cause

This warning is generated when the gravity is applied in the circumferential direction in axisymmetric problems. Gravity in the circumferential direction is ignored.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic analysis

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 72 of 1024

Related Menu

Analysis >> load >> Self Weight...

Remedy

Remove the gravity component in the circumferential direction.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4021

WARNING [4021]: NO LAYER DEFINED IN COMPOSITE PROPERTY. NOT CREATING PROPERTY ID=#

Cause

This warning is generated when the layer data of the composite materials are not specified.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Mesh >> Attribute >> Property >> 2D/3D >> Composite Shell/Solid...

Static/Heat Analysis >> Attribute/CSys/Function >> Property >> 2D/3D >> Composite Shell/Solid...

Dynamic/Trans.Heat/CFD Analysis >> Attribute/CSys/Function >> Property >> 2D/3D >> Composite Shell/Solid...

Remedy

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 73 of 1024

Specify the missing layer data. Such a problem will not occur if the composite materials with deficient layer data are not used in
the analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4024

WARNING [4024]: FAILED TO CONVERGE IN NONLINEAR ANALYSIS. LOAD INCREMENT=#

Cause

This warning is generated when convergence fails at a specific load increment step during a nonlinear analysis if the option to continue after convergence failure is
checked on. If the option is checked off, the nonlinear analysis continues.

Analysis Type

Nonlinear analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

Refer to ERROR [2103].

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4025

WARNING [4025]: MAXIMIUM ITERATION REACHED IN RETURN MAPPING, MATERIAL ID=#, ELEMENT
ID=#, INTEGRATION POINT=#

Cause

This warning is generated when the stress condition, which coincides with the yield curve of the material data provided in an elasto-plastic model, cannot be
calculated. It usually occurs when the displacement increment is large or the hardening curve zone of the material data is complex.

Analysis Type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 74 of 1024

Nonlinear analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material >> Isotropic ...

Remedy

1. Increase the number of load increments.

2. Simplify the curve if a complex hardening curve has been defined.

3. Remove the softening zone of the material model, or use a 2nd-order curve in a Bi-Linear form.

4. If the problem persists, convert the model into a perfect plastic model.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4026

WARNING [4026]: STIFFNESS MATRIX IS NOT POSITIVE DEFINITE IN PRE-STRESSED LINEAR STATIC
ANALYSIS

Cause

This warning is generated when the system stiffness matrix does not retain positive definite properties in prestressed linear static analysis.

Analysis Type

Prestressed analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

This warning occurs if the system stiffness matrix is not structurally stable due to the effects of the geometric stiffness by the initial

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 75 of 1024

stress. Depending on the intent, the user may adjust the initial stress or continue the analysis at the present state.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4027

WARNING [4027]: MID-NODES OF ELEMENT ID=# ARE RELOCATED TO CENTER OF CORNER POINTS

Cause

This warning informs that the location of the mid-node of a quadratic element has been changed. The change in mid-node location applies to an element whose
Jacobian is negative. The changed location is the midpoint between the adjacent vertices.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

None

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4028

WARNING [4028]: MID-NODES OF ALL QUADRATIC SOLID ELEMENTS ARE RELOCATED TO CENTER
OF CORNER POINTS

Cause

This warning informs that the mid-node locations of all the higher-order solid elements have been changed irrespective of the element shapes without undergoing the
Jacobian checks .

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 76 of 1024

None

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4030

WARNING [4030]: MAXIMUM ITERATION REACHED IN AMG BEFORE SOLUTION CONVERGED

Cause

In case the AMG solver is used with the "Fix Singularity by Dummy Spring" option turned on, this warning is generated when convergence fails within the convergence
tolerance required within the specified maximum number of iterations. The results of the calculation are still saved nevertheless. If the "Fix Singularity by Dummy
Spring" option is turned off, ERROR [2116] is generated in the same situation.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

Tools >> Option >> Analysis/Results >> Analysis Control >> Equation Solver...

Remedy

Check to see if the maximum number of iterations and the convergence tolerance are set to 1000 and 1e-006 respectively. If they are not set to the default values, click the
"Initialize" button at the bottom left of the dialog box to set them back to the defaults.

If the above measure does not resolve the problem, increase the maximum number of iterations or the convergence tolerance.
Also, try to fix the problem by selecting the multifrontal solver as the system of equation solver, which is a direct solver.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 77 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4031

WARNING [4031]: STEFAN BOLTZMANN CONSTANT IS ZERO. RADIATION CONDITIONS WILL HAVE
NO EFFECT

Cause

This warning is generated when the Stefan-Boltzmann Constant is given as 0, even though radiation (general radiation and cavity radiation) conditions are included,

Analysis Type

Heat transfer analysis

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Analysis Control >> Parameter...

Remedy

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 78 of 1024

Enter the Stefan-Boltzmann Constant.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4032

WARNING [4032]: FAILED TO FIND ELEMENT CONNECTED TO SEGMENT WITH NODE IDS=# #. THIS
SEGMENT IS IGNORED

Cause

This warning is generated when the free face of elements coinciding with the contact segment of a defined contact pair does not exist. The corresponding contact
segment is ignored.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Analysis >> Contact >> Define Contact...

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4033

WARNING [4033]: MULTIPLE CONNECTED ELEMENTS FOUND FOR SEGMENT WITH NODE IDS=# #.
THIS SEGMENT IS IGNORED

Cause

This warning is generated when 2 or more free faces of elements exist, which coincide with the contact segment of a defined contact pair. This usually occurs when
the element faces at the boundary of a mesh set are incorrectly recognized as free faces. The corresponding contact segment is ignored.

Analysis Type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 79 of 1024

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Analysis >> Contact >> Define Contact...

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4035

WARNING [4035]: CONTACT SURFACE ID=# DEFINED IN CONTACT PARAMETER ID=# WAS NOT
FOUND. THIS PARAMETER IS IGNORED

Cause

This warning is generated when the contact face corresponding to a (master and slave) contact face ID specified with contact parameters does not exist.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Analysis >> Contact >> Define Contact...

Remedy

Check the contact parameters of the corresponding ID.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4037

WARNING [4037]: CANNOT DETERMINE CRITICAL TIME STEP. TIME STEP VALUE OF # WILL BE USED

Cause

This warning is generated when the time step cannot be determined while executing an explicit dynamic analysis.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 80 of 1024

Analysis Type

Explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

Similar to a case in which the entire structure is a rigid body, the warning is generated when a stable time step cannot be
calculated. If the automatically determined time step in such an instance is too large, the accuracy of the analysis may be
compromised.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4039

WARNING [4039]: DOF # IS ALREADY CONSTRAINED. MULTIPOINT CONSTRAINT IGNORED

Cause

This warning is generated when slave DOFs constrained by SPC (Single-Point Constraint), MPC (Multi-Point Constraint) or rigid body elements are re-defined as
slave DOFs.

Analysis Type

All types of analyses

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Create >> Other >> Rigid Link...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint...

Analysis >> Boundary >> Constraint Equation...

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 81 of 1024

Remedy

Examine the DOFs identified to have been constrained more than once. If additional DOFs have been defined for the slave DOFs, delete the subject DOFs. If there
are additional MPC or rigid bodies, delete them.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4040

WARNING [4040]: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ITERATIONS FOR AMG IS TOO SMALL. DEFAULT VALUE #
WILL BE USED

Cause

When using the AMG solver, this warning is generated if the maximum number of iterations has been defined too low (<10).

Analysis Type

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

Tools >> Option >> Analysis/Results >> Analysis Control >> Equation Solver...

Remedy

Check if the maximum number of iterations and the convergence tolerance are set to 1000 and 1e-006 respectively. If they are not
set to the default values, click the "Initialize" button at the bottom left of the dialog box to set them back to the defaults.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 82 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4041

WARNING [4041]: RESIDUAL TOLERANCE FOR AMG IS TOO SMALL. DEFAULT VALUE # WILL BE
USED

Cause

When using the AMG solver, this warning is generated when the convergence tolerance is defined too small (<1e-16).

Analysis Type

All types of analyses except for explicit dynamic analysis

Related Menu

Tools >> Option >> Analysis/Results >> Analysis Control >> Equation Solver...

Remedy

Check if the maximum number of iterations and the convergence tolerance are set to 1000 and 1e-006 respectively. If they are not
set to the default values, click the "Initialize" button at the bottom left of the dialog box to set them back to the defaults.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 83 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4042

WARNING [4042]: DISCREPANCY IN CONSTRAINTS, CONTACT OR MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOUND IN

SUBCASE COMBINATION. COMBINED RESULTS OF SUBCASES ID # AND # MAY BE INVALID

Cause

This warning is generated when the results of subcases of different material temperatures, different boundaries or different contact conditions are linearly combined.

Analysis Type

Linear static analysis

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Subcase Setting >> Create >> Combination...

Remedy

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 84 of 1024

Adjust their analysis conditions to become identical since the linear combinations of the corresponding subcase results may not be
accurate,

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4045

WARNING [4045]: MINIMUM ALLOWED TIME STEP REACHED. TEMPERATURE CHANGE PER
INCREMENT MAY BE LARGER THAN SPECIFIED

Cause

When the automatic time step function is used in transient heat transfer analysis, this warning is generated if the time step required to satisfy the maximum
temperature change per step increment is smaller than the time step at the maximum bisection level.

Analysis Type

Transient heat transfer analysis

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Subcase Control >> Nonlinear Transient >> Auto Time Step...

Remedy

Since the minimum time step has not satisfied the maximum temperature change per step increment, check to see if an excessive
load has been applied. Or adjust the maximum bisection level (advanced nonlinear parameter) for accurate analysis within the
allowable range of calculations.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4046

WARNING [4046]: FAILED TO ESTIMATE DOMINANT FLEXIBLE FREQUENCY IN LINEAR DIRECT

TRANSIENT ANALYSIS ID=#. DEFAULT TIME STEP WILL BE USED

Cause

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 85 of 1024

This warning is generated when the prediction of the lowest-order natural frequency, which is intended to be used to predict the automatic time in direct transient
response analysis, has failed. The default time step is used to continue the analysis.

Analysis Type

Transient response analysis (direct method)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Analysis Case >> Subcase Control >> Dynamic >> Auto Time Step...

Remedy

The automatic time step function cannot be used in a model that includes rigid body modes.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4047

WARNING [4047]: INFINITE RESPONSE DETECTED DUE TO RESONANCE AT FREQUENCY=#

Cause

This warning is generated when the frequency of a response to be obtained is too close to the resonant frequency in frequency response analysis.

Analysis Type

Frequency response analysis

Related Menu

None

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 86 of 1024

Remedy

The warning can be removed by properly adding damping or changing the frequency value to be calculated. However, since it is
not a critical warning, it may be ignored.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4048

WARNING [4048]: INFINITE RESPONSE DETECTED DUE TO RIGID BODY MODE AT FREQUENCY=0

Cause

This warning is generated when the response of the frequency 0 is to be obtained for a structure that has rigid body modes in frequency response analysis,

Analysis Type

Frequency response analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

Remove the rigid body modes using proper constraints, or modify the frequency domain starting from a value greater than 0.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4049

WARNING [4049]: MEMBRANE MATERIAL IS RIGID. BENDING & SHEAR MATERIAL WILL BE IGNORED

Cause

This warning is generated when the membrane material of 2D plate elements has been defined as a rigid material, but the bending or shear material is different from
the membrane material.

Analysis Type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 87 of 1024

All types of analyses

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Mesh >> Attribute >> Property >> 2D >> Plate...

Static/Heat Analysis >> Attribute/CSys/Function >> Property >> 2D >> Plate...

Dynamic/Trans.Heat/CFD Analysis >> Attribute/CSys/Function >> Property >> 2D >> Plate...

Remedy

In this case, the bending or shear material is ignored. Set the bending and shear materials identical to the membrane material to
remove the message.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4051

WARNING [4051]: MULTI-BODY SYSTEM SEEMS TO BE OVER-CONSTRAINED. DUPLICATED

CONSTRAINTS IGNORED

Cause

When using joint elements in linear analysis, this warning is generated if duplicate constraints are defined by the joint elements.

Analysis Type

Static/dynamic rigid body analysis (multi-body system)

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 88 of 1024

Dynamic/Trans.Heat/CFD Analysis >> MBS >> Joint...

Remedy

Generally if 2 or more master joints are connected to a slave joint of a joint element, the constraints are duplicated. Modify the
joint element to remove such duplicated constraints.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4052

WARNING [4052]: EXCESSIVE MESH IRREGULARITY DETECTED FOR CASTING DIRECTION CONTROL.
ESTIMATED IRREGULARITY MEASURE=#

Cause

When using the casting condition as the manufacturing condition in topology optimization, this warning is generated if the mesh shape is irregularly arranged in the
casting direction (when irregularity measure > 1.1).

Analysis Type

Topology optimization

Related Menu

[Not Applicable in GTS NX]

Topology Optimization Case >> Analysis Control >> Manufacturing Condition >> Casting Direction...

Remedy

Rearrange the elements in the casting direction, or check if the casting direction is appropriate.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4054

WARNING [4054]: NEGATIVE JACOBIAN IN ELEMENT ID = #

Cause

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 89 of 1024

This error is generated when the inverse matrices cannot be obtained during an analysis. The primary reasons are as follows:

1. When an element shape is excessively twisted

2. When the node numbers are incorrectly sequenced

For linear analysis, such a problem is processed as an error since it is a modeling issue. However, it is not considered as an error in
nonlinear static analysis because it may occur while the calculation has not converged. Especially when higher-order elements are
used and the geometric model is complex, the error may be most likely generated due to the 1st reason.

Analysis Type

Linear analysis (linear static, modal)

Related Menu

Mesh >> Element >> Parameters >> 2D or 3D >> Change Element Order...

Mesh >> Element >> Modify...

Mesh >> Element >> Modify Topology >> Fix Connectivity of Reversed Solid...

Remedy

1. Identify and correct the excessively distorted elements. In case higher-order elements are used, improve the shape of the mesh
using the "Move Mid-Node to Center of Two Nodes" function under "Mesh >> Element >> Parameters >> 2D or 3D >> Change
Element Order.

2. No errors are generated for node IDs automatically assigned by the mesh creation functions provided by the program. Check
the mesh generated by user-defined node IDs. Once the troublesome mesh is identified, revise the corresponding elements using
the "Mesh >> Element >> Modify" function. Especially for solid element mesh, revise the error using the "Mesh >> Element >>
Modify Topology >> Fix Connectivity of Reversed Solid" function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 90 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4055

WARNING [4055]: "SYSTEM MATRIX SEEMS TO BE TOO LARGE FOR PHYSICAL MEMORY.
PERFORMANCE MAY BE SEVERELY DEGRADED.

Cause

This error is generated when the size of model, the number of nodes and elements, is too large to solve with available memory.

Analysis Type

All types of analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

Decrease the number of nodes and elements.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4057

WARNING [4057]: EQUIVALENT LINEAR ANALYSIS FAILED TO CONVERGE WITHIN MAX. ITERATIONS
=#

Cause

This error is generated when equivalent linear analysis failed to converge within the max. number of iterations.

Analysis Type

Equivalent linear analysis

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 91 of 1024

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> 2D Equivalent Linear >> Analysis Control

Remedy

Increase the Max. Number of Iteration

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4060

WARNING [4060]: "IGNORING UNPARALLEL KO DEFINITION FOR PLANE STRAIN/AXISYMMETRIC

ELEMENTS. MAXIMUM KO VALUE WILL BE USED FOR COMPUTING HORIZONTAL STRESSES.

Cause

This error is generated when unparallel ko is defined in plane strain or axisymmetric elements.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 92 of 1024

Analysis Type

All types of analysis

Related Menu

Mesh >> Prop./CSys./Func. >> Material

Remedy

Unparallel ko condition can be only used in Solid elements. Modify ko condition.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4063

WARNING [4063]: "CRITICAL FACTOR OF SAFETY NOT FOUND IN # TRIES IN SLOPE STABILITY
ANALYSIS. FACTOR OF SAFETY IS GREATER THAN #.

Cause

This error is generated when the calculated factor of safety is larger than 1+(Max.iterfaction * Increment of safety factor). This
means the slope is very stable state so that the calculated factor of safety cannot have any physical meaning.

Analysis Type

Slope stability analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 93 of 1024

None

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4064

WARNING [4064]: "MATERIAL ASSIGNED TO HOST MESH OF GAUGE PROPERTY (ID = #) IS NOT
UNIQUE.

Cause

This warning occurs in a situation where gauging elements with the same gauge property are created for a host meshes with
different properties.

Analysis Type

Construction stage analysis

Related Menu

None

Remedy

None

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4105

WARNING [4105]: ONE OF THE FREQUENCY RANGE BOUNDARIES IS TOO CLOSE TO A FREQUENCY

Cause

This warning is generated when one of the calculated eigenvalues is too close to the boundary of the calculation range. So its accuracy is suspected.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 94 of 1024

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis (Eigenvalue analysis)

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Eigenvalue >> Analysis Control >> General...

Remedy

Adjust the range of eigenvalue calculations such that the eigenvalue at the boundary is well within the new range.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4106

WARNING [4106]: EIGENVALUES HAVE NOT PASSED STURM SEQUENCE CHECK

Cause

This warning informs that the calculated eigenvalues have failed to pass the Sturm sequence check for missing eigenvalues. That is, the number of calculated
eigenvalues is different from the number of eigenvalues assessed to exist within the calculation range by the Sturm sequence check.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 95 of 1024

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis (Eigenvalue analysis)

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Eigenvalue >> Analysis Control >> General...

Remedy

Adjust the range of eigenvalue calculations.

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4108

WARNING [4108]: EIGENVECTORS MAY NOT BE ORTHOGONAL

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 96 of 1024

Cause

This warning informs that the eigenvectors have deviated from the orthogonality among themselves due to the inaccuracy of the calculated eigenvalues caused by the
numerical properties of the given eigenvalue problem.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis (Eigenvalue analysis)

Related Menu

Analysis >> Analysis Case >> General >> Eigenvalue >> Analysis Control >> General...

Remedy

Adjust the range of the eigenvalue calculations, or checking on the Sturm sequence check may also help resolve the problem.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 97 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Trouble Shooting Guide > Warning > Warning4109

WARNING [4109]: EIGENVALUES ARE TOO CLUSTERED TO EVALUATE. SOME EIGENVALUES MAY
BE LOST

Cause

In case too many eigenvalues are duplicated, this warning is generated when certain eigenvalues are omitted from calculations depending on the specified range of
calculations or the number of eigenvalues to be calculated. For buckling analysis, such problems may occur due to numerical problems associated with very small
loadings.

Analysis Type

Mode-based analysis (Eigenvalue analysis)

Related Menu

None

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 98 of 1024

Remedy

For models such as cylindrical shells, too many duplicated eigenvalues can emerge due to the characteristic. In buckling analysis,
adjust the magnitudes of loads.

Home > GTS NX > General Information > Start file > Export

Export

▒ Overview

This function can capture the work plane or export geometric shapes and meshes.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 99 of 1024

The work plane can be saved using [Screen Shot file]. [Screen Shot Select All], [Screen Shot Selected Area] tabs.

The [Screen Shot file] tab only saves the work plane and the [Screen Shot Select All] tab saves the whole image. The [Screen Shot Selected
Area] tab saves the area selected by the user. PNG, JPG, BMP, GIF image file formats are supported.

CAD geometric shapes and meshes on the work plane can be exported. CAD geometric shapes are exported as Parasolid files (*.x_t, *.x_b) and
meshes can be exported as a STL file (*.stl) or a neutral file (*.fpn) supported on other Midas programs (GTS/NFX/FEA/SoilWorks) and non-
MIdas programs.

Export Soilworks Neutral Format File for 2D

Export the geometric shapes (Line) of a GTS NX 2D model as a SoilWorks neutral file. The user can select all shapes on the screen, or directly
select the edges to export.

[Spacing length (B-Spline)]: Divides a B-spline edge into equal spacing and export. It does not apply to Line or Arc types, which are not B-
Splines.

Export Soilworks Neutral Format File for 3D

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 100 of 1024

Export the geometric shapes (Solid) of a GTS NX 3D model as a SoilWorks neutral file.

[Target solid]: Select the target 3D geometric shape (Solid).

[Tool face]: Select the tool face to cut the solid. The tool face can be directly selected, or 3 points can be selected to create a cutting plane.

[Spacing length (B-Spline)]: Divide the B-spline outlines of a solid into equal spacing and export. It does not apply to Line or Arc types, which
are not B-Splines.

Export FPN file

This format links the model information file created on GTS NX to Midas family programs (GTS NX, FEA, NFX, SoilWorks, GeoXD). This file
format also enables user to exchange information between different programs using text format.

Export Midas Civil

This format links the model information file created on GTS NX to Midas family program (Midas Civil) as *.mct formation.

Export Midas Gen

This format links the model information file created on GTS NX to Midas family program (Midas Gen) as *.mgt formation.

Export Nodal Results (*.txt)

Export Nodal Results feature from GTSNX model to midas Gen / Civil allows for outputting the results of the reaction / displacement results
calculated from the existing constraints as well as the load-displacement results of the nodes subjected to the nodal load.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 101 of 1024

Soil-Structure Interaction procedure steps:

1) Gen / Civil superstructure modeling. GTSNX soil ground and superstructure modelling.
2) Analysis of Gen / Civil superstructure model.
3) Gen / Civil Superstructure Reaction Results export to apply as nodal loads in GTS NX
4) GTS NX soil ground and superstructure analysis.
5) GTS NX Load-Displacement result applying in Gen / Civil as the node spring load.
6) Repeat 2) ~ 5) steps and finish analysis when convergence satisfies.

Target Nodes

All (By Supports) – reactions and displacements will be exported at only the nodes with constraint boundary conditions defined according to
the analysis set and step chosen by the user. The result of the reaction force / displacement of the node subjected to the enforced
displacement can be called up as a nodal load / enforced displacement by Gen / Civil.

Selected Nodes – allows users to select specific nodes for output. Reactions will be exported at only the nodes with constraint boundary
conditions defined according to the analysis set and step chosen by the user. Displacements will be exported at all selected nodes. The result
of the reaction force / displacement of the node subjected to the enforced displacement can be called up as a nodal load / enforced
displacement by Gen / Civil.

Load Sets (by Force) - reaction force / displacement will be exported at only the nodes where Load Set has been defined (as Force type only)
according to the analysis set and step chosen by the user. User defined choice for specific load set is allowed.

In addition to the reaction force / displacement results, the "load-displacement" type was added to the output result type.

The 'Load-displacement' type will simultaneously output the value of the nodal load considered in the load set and the displacement result
calculated at the corresponding node after the analysis and will be loaded in Gen / Civil as Multi-Linear Point Spring (Unsymmetric) type.

The 'load' value is calculated as Σ (node load / load increment number) entered, and the cumulative displacement generated at the stage
where the 'load' is applied is transferred to the 'displacement' data.

※ Precautions

1) Gen / Civil> The Multi-Linear Point Spring (Unsymmetric) type requires a minimum of 3 data. Therefore, when outputting 'load-
displacement' type in GTS NX, please perform analysis to satisfy the number of data.

2) Gen / Civil> The Multi-Linear Point Spring (Unsymmetric) type is designed to receive increasingly larger values of the load / displacement
data. Therefore, if the displacement result calculated by the GTS NX is output as a decrease rather than as an increase, the Gen / Civil will not
be able to recall the value.

Output Data

Analysis Set – select the analysis case for output.

Step – select the construction stage set for output.

Results Type – opt to output reactions or displacement.

Results Component – select the components for output. Reactions (All, FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ). Displacements (All, DX, DY, DZ)

Export Nastran Input File

This tool allows the user to export all the model attributes into an executable Nastran File.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 102 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > General Information > Start file > Create file and save

Create file and save

New

This tab creates a new file.

When creating a new file, the user can set the initial variables necessary for analysis (model type, direction and strength of gravity, system of
units).

The required Model Type can be selected from 3 dimensional (3D)/ 2 dimensional (2D)/ axially symmetrical (Axisymmetric) models. For 2
dimensional models, the direction of gravity is the Y axis. For 3 dimensional models, the direction of gravity can be set as either the Y axis or
the Z axis.

The physical quantities required for modeling, such as structure size or material property, are generally defined by specific unit systems.
Because GTS NX allows conversion of force/ length/ energy/ time units any time during modeling, the user can easily change the unit system

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 103 of 1024

as and when needed thereby facilitating the modeling process. The unit systems supported in the GTS NX are as follows.

Force Length Energy Time

kgf mm cal sec
tonf cm kcal min
N m J hr
KN in Btu day
lbf ft kJ
Kips Um

Open

This tab opens an existing saved file. The user can open both the old GTS and the new GTX NX file in GTS NX.

Depending on the file format, the user can check the image and basic information of the analysis model.

Save

This tab saves the current project file. Checking ‘Auto Save File’ and setting the time interval in the options tab automatically saves the file for
every interval.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 104 of 1024

Save as

This tab saves the current project file under a new name. The user can undo/redo any operations during the modeling process, but saving the
finalized model for each stage can make error correction and condition modification easier.

Home > GTS NX > General Information > Start file > Close

Close

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 105 of 1024

▒ Overview

Close an activated file.

Close

This function closes the active project. If there are any changes to the model information within the project, a message will appear.

Close all

This function closes all open project files and a message will ask whether to save changes if there are any.

Home > GTS NX > General Information > Start file > Import

Import

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 106 of 1024

Import CAD File

Using the Import CAD File automatically deactivates the analysis information of the current model.

The user can use this function even when a file is not open and can import as many CAD geometries as they wish without limits. Parasolid
(Parasolid(9 to 28) (*x_t;*.xmt_txt;*.x_b;*xmt_bin) file formats and optional CAD file formats as below are supported.

Because CAD geometries do not have a length unit, the user must set the length unit when importing. The set units decide the size of the CAD
geometry and both the meter and feet units are supported.

DXF 2D (Wireframe)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 107 of 1024

This function imports a DXF file created on a higher version of AutoCAD than R13. The user can import 2D surfaces as well as wireframes (a
model consisting of edges).

DXF files created on AutoCAD do not have tolerance that can determine the connectivity between endpoints. Although edges may seem
connected to the naked eye, they maybe intersected or not connected after import. It is recommended that the user check the edges of the
AutoCAD DXF file before importing.

<When the endpoints do not coincide>

If a line is joined by multiple polylines, it may not be imported properly. It is recommended that these lines be exploded on AutoCAD before
importing.

<Example of joined poly lines>

When importing a 2D DXF file, the user can simultaneously input distance from origin along x axis and y axis to move or rotate about z axis
the imported file in order to place it at the desired location in the model.

Wireframes can be imported in GTS NX as a single composite line for easy management or as individual lines.

Imported intersected edges can be cut and registered using the [Break Intersected Edges] function.

DXF 3D(Wireframe)

This function imports a DXF file created on a higher version of AutoCAD than R13. It imports a 3D model on to the work space. The user can
call up DXF file as a wireframe (a model consisting of edges).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 108 of 1024

DXF files created on AutoCAD do not have tolerance that can determine the connectivity between endpoints. Although edges may seem
connected to the naked eye, they maybe intersected or not connected after import. It is recommended that the user check the edges of the
AutoCAD DXF file before importing

When importing a 3D DXF file, the user can simultaneously input distance from origin along x axis, y axis and z axis to place the imported file
at the desired location in the model.

Wireframes can be imported on to the GTS NX as a single composite for easy management, or as individual lines.

Imported intersected edges can be cut and registered using the [Break Intersected Edges] function.

Import DWG

This function imports a DWG file created on a higher version of AutoCAD than R13. It imports a CAD model onto the 2D space or 3D space.

Like the Import DXF file function, DWG files created on AutoCAD do not have tolerance that can determine the connectivity between
endpoints. Although edges may seem connected to the naked eye, they maybe intersected or not connected after import. It is recommended
that the user check the edges of the AutoCAD DWG file before importing

When importing a 2D DWG file, the user can simultaneously input distance from origin along x axis and y axis to move or rotate about z axis
the imported file in order to place it at the desired location in the model. While when importing a 3D DWG file, the user can simultaneously
input distance from origin along x axis, y axis and z axis to place the imported file at the desired location in the model.

Imported edges can be registered on the geometry set for each layer using the [Create geometry set for layers].

Execute Mining Model Convert

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 109 of 1024

Mining data type: Type can be selected from 3D Face and Model Blocks. 3D Face type can import dxf. file. Model Block type can import csv
file.

Directory: Directory for information of model file and define save folde.

Convert: It is creating the GT NX file(fpn.) after converting. This converted file can be imported to GTS NX from Main Menu > Import > GTS NX
Neutral Format.

[3D Face] [Model Blocks]

Import Midas Mxt file

Model information and loading/ boundary condition/analysis data from the 'Gen, Civil, Building' program, other Midas family programs, can
be synchronized on the GTS NX. Element types, load/ boundary conditions, analysis methods not supported on the GTS NX are excluded.

The compatibility range for midas Mxt files is shown below.

GTS Gen/Civil Restrictions

Unit System Unit System

Project Setting Structure Type

Node Node

Element Element

Mesh Set Group

Material Plastic Material, Material

Property Section, Thickness

Supports Supports

Point Spring Point Spring

Elastic Link Elastic Link

Beam End Release Beam End Release

Plate End Release Plate End Release

Rigid Link Rigid Link

Load Set Static Load Case

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 110 of 1024

Nodal Mass Nodal Mass

Self Weight Self Weight

Force, Moment Nodal Loads

Prescribed Displacement Specified Displacement of Supports

Element Beam Load Element Beam Load

Prestress Pretension Load

Pressure Load Pressure Load

Nodal Temperature Nodal Temperature

Element Temperature Element Temperature Cable → Truss,

Temperature Gradient Temperature Gradient Wall → Plate element

compatible, SRC excluded
Response Spectrum Function Spectrum Function
PSC, Composite excluded
Spectrum Load Set Spectrum Load Case

Time History Function Time History Function

Time History Load Case Time History Load Case

Dynamic Nodal Load Dynamic Nodal Load

Ground Acceleration Ground Acceleration

Time Varying Static Load Time Varying Static Load

Time History Result Function Time History Result Function

Hinge Inelastic Hinge Data

Import FPN file

This format links the model information file created on Midas family programs (GTS NX, FEA, NFX, SoilWorks, GeoXD) to the GTS NX.

This file format also enables user to exchange information between different programs using text format.

Import Nodal Results

This function allows users to import nodal results from midas Gen and Civil into GTS NX.

Displacement results will be imported as prescribed displacement (Tx, Ty, Tz).

Reaction results will be imported as nodal loads in the opposing direction (FX, FY, FZ, RX, RY, RZ).

Home > GTS NX > General Information > View Toolbar

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 111 of 1024

View Toolbar

For general CAD programs, the y axis of the global coordinate system points upward. To view an imported geometric model created in CAD,
the user can use the ‘Two-point Isometric View’ perspective to view the model in the same perspective as CAD.

Zoom All

Zoom in/out to fit the whole model on the screen.

Zoomfit Grid

Zoom in/out to appropriately to fit both the model and the work plane grid.

Zoom Window

Zoom in to the designated rectangular area.

Zoom in/out

The user can click on the icon menu and use the left mouse button or the mouse wheel to zoom in/out.

Dragging right while holding the left mouse button expands the model; dragging left shrinks the model. Scrolling upward zooms in and
scrolling downward zooms out.

Holding the Ctrl key allows the user to expand and shrink the model without having to select the zoom in/out icon.

Rotate

Click this icon menu and dragging the left mouse button on the task window rotates the model in the drag direction.

For continued rotation, hold the Ctrl key and drag with the right mouse button.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 112 of 1024

Rotate center

Specify a reference point and rotates the model around that point. In the work plane, dragging with the middle mouse button held rotates the
model around the specified reference point.

Pan

Move the model to desired location.

In the work plane, dragging with the left mouse button held moves the model in the drag direction.

Holding the Ctrl key and dragging with the middle mouse button held allows the user to move the model without having to ‘Pan’ icon.

Normal

Move the perspective in the normal direction of the working plane. (Perspective changed to a 2 dimensional view with the X-axis to the right
and the Y-axis to the top of the screen.)

Isometric 1

Change the perspective to the isometric view. (Z-axis of the global coordinate system points up.)

Isometric 2

Change the perspective to the isometric view. (Y-axis of the global coordinate system points up.)

When importing a geometric model created in CAD, use this perspective to view the model in the same perspective as CAD.

Front

Change the perspective to the front view.

It is the Y, Z plane of the global coordinate system rotated 180 degrees about the Z-axis.

Back

Change the perspective to the back view. It is the Y, Z plane of the global coordinate system.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 113 of 1024

Top

Change the perspective to the top view.

It is the X, Y plane of the global coordinate system rotated 90 degrees about the X-axis and the Y-axis.

Bottom

Change the perspective to the bottom view.

It is the X, Y plane of the global coordinate system rotated 90 degrees about the Y-axis and the X-axis.

Left

Change the perspective to the left view.

It is the X, Z plane of the global coordinate system rotated 180 degrees about the Z-axis.

Right

Change the perspective to the left view.

It is the X, Z plane of the global coordinate system.

Display mode [Geometric] : Provides various view modes to display the model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 114 of 1024

GTS NX provides various display modes that help the user easily understand the work state and display the model as they please.

The display mode can be called up by selecting the geometric shape and clicking the right mouse button.

l Shading + line

Display the geometric shape using faces and outlines.

l Shading

Display the geometric shape using only faces.

l Line

Display the geometric shape using only outlines.

l Bounding box

Display the geometry object by its bounding box than its actual shape.

l Change geometry color

The user can change the color of the object depending on the geometric shape, mesh, material or other properties. The user can define the
color of the object directly or randomly assign a color using the random color assign function.

When displaying the geometric shape using the [Shading] or [Shading and line] method, the user can specify the shading transparency to
display the interior of the object.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 115 of 1024

The transparency can be specified by selecting the geometric shape and clicking the right mouse button > Contents menu > Transparency.

Complex geometric shapes can be effectively represented by applying different display modes to individual geometric shapes.

Display mode [Mesh] : Set the display modes for the created mesh object.

The units for mesh display are mesh sets.

The assignment of display modes for meshes is the same that for geometric shapes; the mesh set is selected first and the display mode sub-
menu is brought up from the pop-up menu.

Just like for geometric shapes, various display modes can be assigned to individual mesh sets. Color coding is especially useful when sorting
and checking model information such as the object characteristics, materials or coordinate system.

Various mesh set display modes are listed below.

l Shading + Wireframe

Display the mesh set using faces and edges.

l Shading + Feature edge

Display the mesh set using faces (without the sides) of elements and feature edges.

l Shading

Display the mesh set using faces and edges of all elements.

l Wireframe

Display the mesh set as a wire frame, showing only edges and no faces.

l Free-face wireframe

Display the free faces of the mesh set as wire frames. All internal elements are hidden.

l Feature edge

Display the mesh set using its feature edges. A feature edge is an element edge whose angle (created by the two free faces making up that
edge) is larger than the specified angle.

l Mesh set color

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 116 of 1024

Assign the mesh set color to the mesh.

l Element type color

Assign the element type color to the mesh.

l Property color

Assign the selected property color to the mesh.

l Material color

Assign the selected material color to the mesh.

l Front-Back face color

Display different colors for the front and back faces of the mesh. This option is useful in determining an element whose normal direction has
been reversed with respect to the element coordinate system. In particular, errors can occur when analyzing a 2D element with a reversed
normal direction and this function helps the user identify such elements using different colors.

The example below expresses the reversed elements in red. Such elements must be reversed for a unified normal direction using the element
> parameter > element coordinate system change.

l Change mesh color

Change the mesh color to an assigned or random color.

l Assign random color

Assign random colors to all meshes.

Perspective view

Assign perspective to the model and presents it as a three-dimensional picture.

Geometry shadow

Show a shadow of the model on the XY plane. The shading rotates along with the model.

Bounding box

Show the bounding box that circumscribes the model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 117 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > General Information > Modeling Guide Toolbar

Modeling Guide Toolbar

Show/Hide grid

Show or hide the grid on the screen.

Show/Hide Datum Axis/Plane

Show or hide the datum axis/plane on the screen.

Show/Hide WCS

Show or hide the WCS on the screen.

The WCS (Work-plane Coordinate System) is the coordinate system of the work-plane. Work-plane is user-defined plane to facilitate modeling

Show/Hide GCS

Show or hide the GCS on the screen.

The GCS (Global Coordinate System) is the fixed global coordinate system.

There are two basic coordinate systems used in the GTX NX; The Global Coordinate System (GCS) and the Work-plane Coordinate System
(WCS).

The GCS (Global Coordinate System) is the fixed global coordinate system expressed in the bottom right-hand corner using red (X-axis), green
(Y-axis) and blue (Z-axis) arrows.

The WCS (Work-plane Coordinate System) is the coordinate system that moves with the work-plane and can be found at the center of the
work screen. Because the work-plane is used for entering the 2-dimensional coordinates of a shape, the WCS changes along with the
workplace. The absolute 3-dimensional coordinates are necessary to create a shape in space, but in most cases the only the relative
coordinates such as the model length are given. In this case, modeling can be done easily by moving the work-plane to an appropriate
position and then entering the 2-dimensional coordinates (the XY plane on the WCS).

Please note that when extruding the geometric shape, the load/boundary conditions and extrude direction follows the GCS.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 118 of 1024

<Global Coordinate System(GCS) and Work-plane Coordinate System(WCS)>

Move work plane

Move the work-plane to the desired location. This can be done by [Reference plane], [3 point plane] or [Normal direction] methods.

This function moves the current work-plane to the desired location. This can be done by [Reference plane], [3 point plane] or [Normal
direction] methods.

l [Reference plane]: This function moves the grid to a plane parallel to the reference plane. Clicking the [Normal ] after moving the grid
helps the user work more easily. This function is convenient when working on a plane different from the specified work-plane.
GTS NX provides 7 basic work-planes: XY(0,0,1), XZ(0,-1,0), XZ(0,1,0), YX(0,0,1), YZ(1,0,0), ZX(0,1,0), ZY(1,0,0).
If the workspace is a certain distance from the plane, the user can specify the grid origin using the [Offset] function.

l [3 point plane]: This function moves the work-plane by selecting 3 points. The work-plane moves to the plane define by the selected
points, with the vector created by the first and second points the X-axis and the vector created by the first and third points the Y-axis.

l [Normal direction]: This function moves the work-plane by selecting a vector and a reference point. The reference point is defined as the
origin and the normal direction to the vector is defined as the vertical axis.

[Reverse Normal]

Reverse the vertical direction (the Z-axis of the WCS) of the plane.

[Reset to GCS]

Return to the initial grid position.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 119 of 1024

[Save]

Check the [Save] button and enter a name to register the workplace under Work tree > Workplane.

Define grid

The grid is always located on the XY plane of the work-plane to ease the modeling process. When modeling with the grid, the grid snap ( )
function can be used to specify the desired location and easily estimate the approximate model or element sizes.

The grid setting can be set according to the convenience of the user and the dimensions of the model.

Define snap

The user can specify the location of the point using various snap options shown in the table below.

Grid snap Positions the mouse snap on a grid point in the work-plane.
Point snap Positions the mouse snap on a point.
End snap Positions the mouse snap on the closest endpoint of an edge.
Middle snap Positions the mouse snap on the midpoint of an edge.
Perpendicular snap Positions the mouse snap on the perpendicular point of an edge.
Center snap Positions the mouse snap on the center point of a circle/arc.
Quadrant snap Positions the mouse snap on the four circle/arc quadrant points.
Intersection snap Positions the mouse snap on the intersection point between two edges.
Tangent snap Positions the mouse snap on the tangent point.
Arbitrary snap Designates an arbitrary snap.
Node Positions the mouse snap on a node.

When using a snap related to a particular edge, such as end snap or middle snap, the user needs to position the mouse above the target edge
of the snap, rather than on the position of the target (end, middle).

Home > GTS NX > General Information > Select Toolbar

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 120 of 1024

Select Toolbar
The select tools are essential for the overall modeling process and are used to specify the target for various functions. When working with large
and complex models, selection of geometry or model components can be made very simple by using appropriate select tool. GTS NX provides
the user with a variety of effective selection methods for efficient work progress.

All select methods in the GTS NX are provided in the select toolbar.

When selecting an object in the work-plane using the mouse, the boundary of the detected object is displayed in green and the user can check
in advance whether the target object is correctly detected. The selected target is then highlighted in green.

Pick/Rectangle select

Sets the mode to select the specified object

Unselect mode

Sets the mode to unselect the specified object

Select screen

Selects/Unselects individual objects or objects within an area set by dragging the mouse. There are four ways to select an area; rectangular,
ellipse, polygon and polyline.

l Rectangle (Pick/Window)

Select/unselect all current selected objects.

Individual objects or objects within an area set by dragging the mouse can be selected or unselected.

The ‘Pick’ and ‘Window’ are distinguished only by mouse click or mouse drag.

[Pick Select]

Select/unselect objects by individual clicks.

In the select mode, an already selected object can be unselected by selecting pick again.

[Window Select]

Select/unselect objects within a rectangular area created from a diagonal movement by mouse drag.

The Esc key cancels the definition of the rectangle during mouse drag.

*The direction of the mouse drag during Window Select is not important. To include/exclude objects is determined only by the Include
Intersected option.

l Circle

Select/unselect objects within a circular area.

The area is defined by a left mouse click at the center of the circle and a mouse drag that determines the size of the radius. The Esc key
cancels the definition of the circle during mouse drag.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 121 of 1024

l Polygon

Selects/unselects objects within a polygon.

The polygon is defined by clicking consecutive points and double-clicking the left mouse button at the final point. The area is defined by the
connected start and end points.

Clicking the right mouse button cancels the definition of the polygon.

l Polyline

Selects/unselects objects intersected by a polyline.

To define multi-line, the user can specify the polyline by clicking consecutive points and double-clicking the left mouse button at the final
point. Clicking the right mouse button cancels the definition of the multi-line.

Selection filter

The Selection filter primarily filters the selected objects by their specified types.

The Selection filter is composed of an object type predetermined by the current work status and the summoned command types. The user can
specify a particular object type in this configuration.

The Selection filter-related work status is basically classified by the command execution viability.

l Main selection filter

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 122 of 1024

Sub selection filterThe Main selection filter has the most basic default composition.

Only geometric elements (sub-objects not selected), mesh sets and datum registered on the shape set can be selected in the Main
selection filter.

*The datum is the reference point, axis, or plane for modeling.

l Sub selection filter

The Sub selection filter is restructured into types based on command execution viability.

Geometric elements registered in the shape set can be selected, as well as the sub-objects of the shape (point, edge, face etc.), loadings,
boundaries and individual joints and elements.

*Because the selection filter composition is different for every command, it is recommended that the user check the select filter composition
when using a command for the first time.

Shape Type

Face (Four subdivision

F-1
Edges)

E-1 Edge

Shape Selection filter Selectable objects

Face Main selection filter 1 (F-1)
Sub selection filter 1 (F-1)
Line Main selection filter 1 (E-1)
Sub selection filter 5 (E-1, E-a, E-b, E-c, E-d)

<Table. The selection difference between the Main select filter and the Sub select filter>

The Selection filter composition is as follows.

Selection filter Selectable objects

Select the data axis.
Data axis (X)
4Used to specify the direction (Translate/Extrude/Project), rotation axis etc.
Select the data plane.
Data plane (U)
4 Used to specify the work/reflect/divide/mirror plane etc.
Geometry related
All geometric shape (P) Select the “Shape”, the highest ranking geometry.
Solid (D) Select a solid.
Shell (J) Select a shell.
Face (A) Select a face.
Wire (W) Select a wire.
Edge (G) Select an edge.
Point (B) Select a point.
Complex object (C) Select a complex object.
Mesh set / joint / element related
Select a mesh set
Mesh set (M)
4 Used to select a mesh set itself or the joints and elements in the mesh set.

<Table. Selectable elements in the Main selection filter>

Geometry related
Face (F) Select a face, a lower ranking geometry of the "Shape".
Line (E) Select a line.
Point (V) Select a point.
Load/Boundary (L) Select the load/boundary conditions applied on the geometry.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 123 of 1024

Mesh set / joint / element related

Node (N) Select a node.
Element (T) Select an element.

<Table. Selectable elements in the Sub selection filter>

Difference in selection between the Main selection filter and the Sub selection filter

The user may be unfamiliar to the difference in selected objects between the Main selection filter and the Sub selection filter, where only the
highest ranking geometry “Shape” is selected for the Main selection filter, but this function is useful during modeling.

The following example will explore the convenience of using the Main selection filter.

The figure below shows a Face, interpolated by Edges created from the cross sections of a random 3-dimensional curved face.

To hide (or remove) the eight Edges that are no longer useful after the face has been created, let us consider case when only the eight Edges
are selected.

l When the selection of all geometry is allowed in the Main selection filter (not just "Shape")
When using the [Rectangle selection] with the selection filter set at 'all geometric shape', nine "Shapes" (one Face, eight Edges) are
selected.

l When using the [Rectangle selection] with the Main selection filter set at <Edge>
A total of twelve Edges are selected, four of which are the lower rank Edges of the Face and cannot be hidden individually.
*Manual selection is possible, but because the “Shape” Edges and the lower rank Edges of the Face exist in the same position, it is not
easy to manually select individual edges.

l When allowing only the “shape” selection in the Sub selection filter
When using the [Rectangle selection] with the selection filter set at <Edge>, the eight Edges can be easily selected and can be hidden
directly.
*In practical use, the user can take advantage of the work tree to make this work much easier.

Thus, the Main selection filter and Sub selection filter are separated to provide convenient selection during actual work.

Selection filter use

Command execution mode using the Sub selection filter

The direct constraints and loading conditions can be defined on the work screen using Sub selection filters. Also, the parts can be specified
as selection elements, making it possible to assign materials or mesh sets. The Sub selection filter selects the sub-objects of a shape (point,
edge, face etc.), as well as joints and elements. Application of the Sub selection filter on the work screen helps the user easily define properties
using geometric features without a separate command execution mode process.

* To select nodes or elements based on geometric shapes, the object must be shown on the screen.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 124 of 1024

Specifying the direction and axis of rotation

Setting the direction for Translate, Extrude or Project, as well as the axis of rotation for Rotate and Revolve, is often needed during the
modeling process. In this case, the direction and axis of rotation can be specified by various methods using the Datum and the geometric
features of the shape.

The following is a summary of the methods used to specify the rotation axis direction.

Available object Used geometric features Selection filter

Datum axis ① Direction of Datum axis Datum axis
“Normal” direction to the Datum Plane

Datum plane Datum plane

Edge (Straight line) Direction of straight line Edge

“Normal" direction to the plane where the circle/arc and its
center point exist

Edge (Circle or arc) Edge

“Normal” direction to the plane

Plane surface Face

Central axis of the rotated body (cylinder etc.)

Rotated body face Face

2 point vector User specified 2 point vector N/A

"Normal" direction to the Profile, whose "plane" definition allows
Normal line to the profile ② N/A
Extrude etc.

①The selection filter for specifying direction, axis of rotation is fundamentally set as <Datum axis>.

②This is only restrictively supported for some functions such as Extrude.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 125 of 1024

The use of such selection methods that utilizes the geometric features of objects allows the convenient specification of direction and axis of
rotation, even for very complex models.

Selection using the concept of hierarchy for geometric shapes

When selecting lower rank objects using the concept of hierarchy, selecting a higher rank object provides the selection functions for all lower
rank objects (sub-objects that correspond to the type in selection filter) within it.

In the figure below, the lines need to be selected individually when the Sub selection filter is set as Edge (E). However, setting the Sub
selection filter as a Face (F) and selecting the face selects all 4 lower rank lines.

In other words, when selecting all the lower rank objects in a particular object, it is convenient to select the higher rank object first and then
set the [Sub selection filter] to that higher rank object type.

Node, Element Selection

Similar to the concept of hierarchy, when selecting nodes or elements, setting the selection filter to Mesh Set (M) and selecting the Mesh Set
selects all the nodes and elements within the mesh set.

If the mesh is created on a geometric model, the user can choose the nodes and elements based on the geometric shapes (line, face) that
form the mesh.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 126 of 1024

Free face / free end-node selection function using the feature angle for nodes and elements

The loading, boundary condition dialog box provides additional functions that consider individual loading and boundary conditions for easier
selection.

The most useful selection functions are for the adjacent Free Face of a 3D element and adjacent Free End of a 2D element.

Select all neighboring edges or surfaces

Automatically selects adjacent elements (faces/lines) after selecting a face or line.

Select neighboring edges or surfaces with feature angle

Automatically selects adjacent elements (faces/lines) within the feature angle after selecting a face or line.

Limit feature angle

Limits the feature angle for selecting adjacent lines or faces.

Intersect

This function selects objects that are within the borderlines of an area created by a rectangle, circle or polygon.

*The borderlines of the area are displayed in dotted lines for the Intersection selection function. Pressing and releasing the Ctrl key when
drawing the rectangle, circle or polygon switches to the Intersection selection option.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 127 of 1024

Front selection only

Selects only the objects at the front in the current view. It is used when the object consists of multiple layers and the user wants to select one
face.

Select all

Selects all objects in the current work space.

In the view all perspective, all objects in the current work space are selected.

Unselect all

Unselects all objects in the current work space.

In the view all perspective, all objects in the current work space are unselected.

Select node/element by ID

This function selects/unselects objects by entering the ID in the node, element select mode.

This selection method can be coupled with other selection methods. The node or element select mode is significant when the selection filter is
set as "Node (N)" or "Element (T)" and can only be used in the node, element control functions (functions that require direct selection of the
node/element). When ID selection is called up, a dialog box appears on the upper right corner of the work screen and the selection process is
as follows.

l Select individual nodes and elements by directly entering their ID in to the ID selection dialog box.

l Selecting nodes and elements using other methods (Pick/Window, Circle etc.) in the work-plane transfers the node/element ID in to the
ID selection dialog box. The user can check the transferred ID and edit to select the desired nodes and elements. It is useful to use the
ID selection function when selecting some of the overlapping nodes or elements.

*The ID selection dialog box acts as a middleman between the Selection manager and the Command dialog box.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 128 of 1024

IThe ID selection dialog box buttons are as follows.

Add Adds a new node, element ID to the selection.

Releases all of the existing selection and only selects the nodes, elements with new ID. (Select
Change
substitution)
Delete Deletes all content in the ID field.
Close Closes the ID selection dialog box.

*When selecting new nodes, elements from the work-plane after deleting all content in the ID field, the existing selection is still shown in the
ID selection dialog box.

Home > GTS NX > General Information > Advanced View Control Toolbar

Advanced View Control Toolbar

Clipping Plane

Geometric shapes can be cut by a specified plane direction and the section can be viewed. Necessary sections can be saved by pressing the
[Add] button. Clicking the icon shows the clipped section.

This function can be used to understand the interior shape of the geometry during pre-processing and is also useful in displaying particular
cross sections during post-processing.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 129 of 1024

l Plane Direction

[X]: Cuts the shape in the plane normal to the X-axis. It is possible to edit the distance and move the plane.

[Y]: Cuts the shape in the plane normal to the Y-axis. It is possible to edit the distance and move the plane.

[Z]: Cuts the shape in the plane normal to the Z-axis. It is possible to edit the distance and move the plane..

[3 point definition]: Defines 3 points in the work-plane to form a cutting plane. The shape is cut in this plane.

[2 point definition]: Defines 2 points in the work-plane to form a cutting plane. The shape is cut in this plane.

[Element face]: Cuts the shape in the plane containing the element face.

l Distance

Display the distance between the plane and the origin.

l Degree

Cross-section can be defined by Angle from selected axis.

l Reverse

Show the section by changing the normal direction.

l Display Capped Part

Uncheck to display the section only.

l Display Mesh Shape on Plane

Check to display the mesh formed on the section.

l Always Show Edges

Check to view the edges that make up the geometric shape.

l Plane Color

Specify the color of the section.

l Plane Composite

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 130 of 1024

[Union]

Displays all sections and shapes on the screen.

[Intersection]

Displays the intersection between sections and shapes on the screen.

Mirror Plane

Displays the symmetrical model centered on a specified plane or planes normal to the X, Y, Z axis. The distance between the original model
and the symmetrical model can be adjusted.

When configuring planes 1, 2, 3 individually, clicking the [Max] button displays the furthest symmetrical model with respect to the original
model, while clicking the [Min] button displays the closest symmetrical model with respect to the original model.

Iso Value Surface

Sets a criterion for the resulting value and displays an area inside/outside of a specified value range. Checking the 'Surface Style' displays an
area with the same result value as a face.

Home > GTS NX > General Information > Node Element Toolbar

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 131 of 1024

Node/Element Toolbar

Show/Hide element free edge

Shows/hides the B-Spline.

A B-Spline is where the node is not shared between 2D elements.

Show/Hide Element coordinate system

Shows/hides the element coordinate system.

Because the element coordinate system is determined by the order and direction of the element, a unified coordinate system is necessary for
a consistent load output. The element coordinate system can be modified at Mesh > Element > Parameter > Change CSys

Show/Hide Material coordinate system

Shows/hides the material coordinate system.

The user can also view the material coordinate system by selecting the mesh at Work tree > Mesh and then right mouse click > Display >
Material CSys.

Show/Hide Node ID

Shows/hides the node ID.

This function is useful when checking the results at a particular node.

Show/Hide Element ID

Shows/hides the element ID.

This function is useful when checking the results at a particular element.

Query Node/Element

Checks the information of a specified node/element. The user can input the particular node/element number or click the node/element on the
screen. The information is displayed in the output window.

Active Element

Shows/hides desired meshes that make up the total model.

This function if effective when working with large complex models because it shows partial models.

Selecting [All] shows all elements and the [Previous] button undoes the enabling/disabling of the element.

Active All Elements

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 132 of 1024

Returns to the original state (view all elements) after Activating partial elements.

Measure distance

Measure the distance or angle between two points.

This function plays the same role as Geometry > Tools > Measure.

The user can set the display of nodes/elements of the model by selecting the mesh from Work tree > Mesh and then right mouse click >
display to check the desired option.

Home > GTS NX > General Information > Run Analysis Toolbar

Run Analysis Toolbar

Perform

Run the analysis. The check button can be used to perform partial analysis of the case.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 133 of 1024

Pre-mode

Switch to the pre-processing mode. <Unlock Icon>

Information of geometry, mesh, loading and boundary conditions etc. are displayed in real time in a tree structure form similar to that of
Microsoft Windows Explorer. A pop-up menu provides various control functions for object select and modification, show/hide etc.

Post-mode

Switch to the post-processing mode. <Lock Icon>

After the analysis has successfully finished, the program automatically loads the analysis results and the verifiable results are displayed in a
tree structure form. The user can perform various functions such as graph output, table output, save post-processing graphic state etc.

When performing additional work on geometric shapes or meshes, the user needs to switch back to the [Pre-processing mode] and reanalyze
after the work has finished.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Point

Point

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Create an independent point on a 2D or 3D space.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 134 of 1024

Create

There are 5 ways to create a point.

[Coordinate] : Directly input the coordinate. The user can create a point by directly clicking on the workplane or
typing in the coordinate values.

[Conic center] : Create a point at the center of an existing conic.

[Center of points] : Create a point at the center of an existing group of points.

[Curve-curve intersection] : Create a point at the intersection between two curves.

[Curve-surface intersection] : Create a point at the intersection between a curve and a face.

[Convert Node] : Create a point at the node of a created mesh.

Geometry set

Register the created point on the Geometry Set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry Set.

Tabular input

Directly inputs the 3D coordinate values in a table. The user can also select the import coordinates function to import a .txt file with the
coordinate values. When creating a .txt file, the point coordinates are in the order of x,y,z and distinguished by a space in between.

The following example shows an input file to create points at (0,0,0), (1,1,2), (2,2,2) and (5,5,5).

IMG_C_ICON_NOTE_01

When entering the exact coordinates of a line intersection or center of a circle, it is also possible to use the center snap, intersection snap or

point snap methods of the define snap ( )function.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Line

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 135 of 1024

Line

▒ Overview

Create an edge type straight line on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

2D

Input the coordinate of the start point and the end point to create a line. The start point input is in
the absolute coordinate(x,y) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 3
methods:

1. [Absolute (x,y)] : Input the absolute 2D coordinate value in the workplane.

2. [Relative (dx,dy)] : Input the relative distance from the point entered in the previous stage.

3. [Length,Angle] : Input the length and angle from the point entered in the previous stage. The
angle is the rotation angle in the counter clockwise direction relative to the x axis of the workplane.
3D

Input the coordinate of the start point and the end point to create a line. The start point input is in
the absolute coordinate(x,y,z) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 2
methods:

1. [Absolute (x,y,z)] : Input a 3D absolute coordinate value in the workplane.

2. [Relative (dx,dy,dz)] : Input the relative 3D distance from the point entered in the previous step.

The user can click on the workplane or a geometry shape and directly assign the next point. The y-
axis values are not entered because the workplane is two-dimensional.

Geometry set

Register the created line on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Arc

Arc

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 136 of 1024

Creates an edge type arc on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

2D

As shown below, there are 3 ways to create an arc. The points used in each method can be specified
directly by clicking on the workplane of the work screen. The arc is created in a counterclockwise
direction relative to the vertical direction of the workplane.

: Center point, Start point and End point

Creates an arc using the Center point [(Absolute x,y)], Start point [(Absolute x,y), (Radius, Start
angle)] and End point [(Absolute x,y), (Included Angle), (End angle)] inputs in order.

: Start point, Secondary point and Endpoint

Creates an arc using the Start point [(Absolute x,y)], a Secondary point on arc[(Absolute x, y)] and
End point [(Absolute x,y)] inputs in order.

: Edge and Curvature

The curve starts from the end of an existing edge and ends at a random point [Radius and Angle
between] to draw an arc. The edge and curve are continuous, but are separate edges. The start
point of the arc is set at the closest end point of the existing edge with respect to the mouse click.

3D

There are 2 ways to create an arc, as shown below. The points used in each method can be specified
directly by clicking on the workplane of the work screen. The arcs are created in a counterclockwise
direction relative to the vertical direction of the workplane.

: Center point, Start point and End point

Creates an arc using the center point [(Absolute x,y,z)], start point [(Absolute x,y,z)] and end point
[(Absolute x,y,z)] inputs in order.

: Start point, Secondary point and Endpoint

Creates an arc using the [(Absolute x,y,z)], a secondary point on arc[(Absolute x,y,z)] and end point
[(Absolute x,y,z)] inputs in order.

Geometry set

Register the created arc on the Geometry Set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry Set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Circle

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 137 of 1024

Circle

▒ Overview

Create an edge type circle on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

There are 4 ways to draw a circle. The points used in each method can be specified directly by
clicking on the workplane of the work screen.

: Center coordinates and radius

Create a circle using center point coordinates [(Absolute x,y)] and radius.

: End points of diameter

Create a circle using one end point of the diameter [(Absolute x,y)] and the other end point
[(Absolute x,y), (Relative dx,dy), (Length, Angle)].

: Three points on the circle

Create a circle using the coordinates of three arbitrary points on the circle [(Absolute x,y)].

: Within and adjacent to two edges

Create a circle that is within and adjacent to two existing edges. The user needs to input the radius
and select two edges.

Make face

Creates the circular plane used to outline the circle.

Geometry set

Register the created circle on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Polyline

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 138 of 1024

Polyline

▒ Overview

Create an edge type polyline on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

2D

Input the coordinates of the start point and the end point to create a polyline. The start point input
is in the absolute coordinate(x,y) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 3
methods. The points used in each method can be specified directly by clicking on the workplane of
the work screen. The right mouse click stops the interpolation and creates the polyline.

1. [Absolute(x,y)] : Input an absolute 2D coordinate value in the workplane.

2. [Relative(dx,dy)] : Input the relative distance from the point entered in the previous step.

3. [Length/Angle] : Input a length and angle from the point entered in the previous step. The angle
is the rotation angle in the counterclockwise direction relative to the x axis of the workplane.

3D

Input the coordinates of the start point and the end point to create a polyline. The start point input
is in the absolute coordinate(x,y,z) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 2
methods. The user can click on the workplane or a geometry shape and directly assign the next
point. But because the workplane is two-dimensional, the y-axis values are not entered.

1. [Absolute(x,y,z)] : Input a 3D absolute coordinate value in the workplane.

2. [Relative(dx,dy,dz)] : Input the relative 3D distance from the point entered in the previous step.

Make Face

Create a plane that has the closed polyline as its boundary.

Link Start and End Point

Automatically connects the end point and the start point. The right mouse click on the work screen
automatically connects the end point to the start point, closing the polyline.

Geometry set

Register the generated polyline on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the
geometry set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 139 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Rectangle

Rectangle

▒ Overview

Create a wire type rectangle on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

: Diagonal End points

Creates a rectangle using one end point [(Absolute x,y)] and the other diagonal end point [(Absolute x,y),(Relative x,y)].

: 2 End points and length

Creates a rectangle using one End point [(Absolute x,y)], a second end point [(Absolute x, y),(Relative x,y)] and the length inputs in this order.

The user can directly click on the workspace of the work screen to specify points.

Make Face

Create a rectangular plane that has the rectangle as its boundary. In this case, it does not create a border of rectangular wire.

Geometry set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 140 of 1024

Register the generated rectangle on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Ellipse

Ellipse

▒ Overview

Create a wire type ellipse on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

Creates an ellipse using the center point coordinates [Absolute (x,y)] and the major and minor axis radius. The major axis input can be in the
form of [Absolute (x,y)] or [Length, Angle]. When using the [Length, Angle] form, input the length and angle relative to the previous point.

The user can directly click on the workspace of the work screen to specify points

Creates an ellipse using the center point coordinates [Absolute (x,y)] and the major and minor axis radius. The major axis input can be in the
form of [Absolute (x,y)] or [Length, Angle]. When using the [Length, Angle] form, input the length and angle relative to the previous point.

The user can directly click on the workspace of the work screen to specify points.

Make Face

Create an elliptical plane that has the ellipse as its boundary line. In this case, it does not create a border of edge type wire.

Geometry set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 141 of 1024

Register the generated ellipse on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > B-Spline

B-Spline

▒ Overview

Create an edge type B-Spline on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

2D

Input the coordinates of the start point and the end point to create a B-Spline. The start point input
is in the absolute coordinate(x,y) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 3
methods:

1. [Absolute(x,y)] : Input an absolute 2D coordinate value in the workplane.

2. [Relative(dx,dy)] : Input the relative distance from the point entered in the previous step.

3. [Length/Angle] : Input a length and angle from the point entered in the previous step. The angle
is the rotation angle in the counterclockwise direction relative to the x-axis of the workplane.

The points can be specified directly by clicking on the workplane of the work screen. The right
mouse click stops further interpolation and creates the B-Spline.

3D

Input the coordinates of the start point and the end point to create a B-Spline. The start point input
is in the absolute coordinate(x,y,z) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 3
methods.

[Absolute(x,y,z)] : Input a 3D absolute coordinate value in the workplane.

[Relative(dx,dy,dz)] : Input the relative 3D distance from the point entered in the previous step.

The user can click on the workplane or a geometry shape and directly assign the next point, but
because the workplane is two-dimensional, the y-axis values are not entered. The right mouse click
stops further interpolation and creates the B-Spline.

Make Face

Create a plane that has the closed B-Spline as its boundary.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 142 of 1024

Define Two End Tangent Vectors

Use the tangent vectors of the start and end points to modify the shape of the overall B-Spline after
it has been finished.

Geometry set

Register the created B-Spline on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry
set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Profile

Profile

▒ Overview

Create a wire type profile that consists of lines and arcs on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

The user can directly click on the workplane in the work screen or input the coordinate values. When specifying the points using the mouse,
the right mouse click stops further interpolation and creates the profile.

: Three point straight line profile

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 143 of 1024

Creates a connected straight line using the start point coordinates [(Absolute x,y)] and continuously inputting the next point’s coordinates
[(Absolute x,y),(Relative dx,dy),(Length,Angle)].

: Two point arc profile

Creates an arc that is adjoined to the previous line. Because the start point of the arc is automatically assigned to the end point of the
previously created line, only the end point coordinates of the arc [(Radius, Angle)] are needed. It is not possible to draw an arc connected to a
line and is it only possible during the create profile process.

: Three point arc profile

Creates an arc using the coordinates of three points. When using this function during the create profile process, the end point of the previous
line becomes the first point and only the coordinates for the other two points [(Absolute x,y),(Relative dx,dy)] are needed. However if this
function is used first in the profile, the user must input all three points in order to create an arc.

Make Face

Create a plane that has the closed polyline as its boundary. In this case, it does not create an wire type profile.

Geometry set

Register the created profile on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Polygon

Polygon

▒ Overview

Create a wire type polygon on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 144 of 1024

: Inscribed regular polygon

Input the number of sides of the regular polygon. Input the center coordinates of the inscribed circle [(Relative x,y)] and select one of the 3
input methods for the coordinate values of the radius and direction.

(Absolute coordinates x,y)

(Relative coordinates dx,dy)

(Length, Angle)

The vertex of the polygon will be located on the second input point.

: Circumscribed regular polygon

Input the number of sides of the regular polygon. Input the center coordinates of the inscribed circle [(Relative x,y)] and select one of the 3
input methods for the coordinate values of the radius and direction.

(Absolute coordinates x,y)

(Relative coordinates dx,dy)

(Length,Angle)

A tangent point will be located on the second input point.

: Edge length, Center point and angle between X axis

Input the number of sides of the regular polygon. Input the center point coordinates of the polygon [Absolute (x,y)]. Input the angle between
a vertex and the x axis to create a polygon.

Make Face

Create a plane that has the closed polyline as its boundary. In this case, it does not create a wire type polygon.

Geometry set

Register the generated polygon on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 145 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Helix

Helix

▒ Overview

Create a wire type helix on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

Direction

Determine the helix direction by selecting the reference axis direction or a two-point vector.

[Select direction] : Determine the direction vector that is to be used as the reference axis of the
helix. The user can select the datum axis, datum plane, plane or edge.

[2 points vector] : Determine the direction vector that is to be the reference axis of the helix by
entering the coordinates of its start and end points. The user can also directly click on the work
screen to specify the Start and End points.

Other inputs

Create a spiral by entering the Start XYZ, Pitch, Turn and Taper angle.

[Start XYZ] : Input the 3D absolute coordinates for the start point of the helix. The user can also
directly click on the work screen to specify the point.

[Pitch] : Defined as the height increase in the axis direction per one rotation period.

[turn] : The number of revolutions in the helix.

[Taper angle] : The angle between the reference axis and side slope of the helix.

Some errors can occur when creating a helix; so the input value and the angle between the
reference axis and side slope may not match exactly.

Geometry set

Register the generated helix on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry
set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Tunnel

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 146 of 1024

Tunnel

▒ Overview

Create a wire type tunnel section on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

Tunnel type

There are 4 types of tunnels: [3 Center Circle], [3 Center Circle + Invert], [5 Center Circle] and [5
Center Circle + Invert]. There are 3 types of sections: [Full], [Left Half], [Right Half].

: 3 Center Circle

Create a tunnel using 3 arcs, all with different center points and diameters.

: 3 Center Circle + Invert

Create a tunnel using 3 different arcs and an invert.

: 5 Center Circle

Create a tunnel using 5 arcs, all with different center points and diameters.

: 5 Center Circle + Invert

Create a tunnel using different 5 arcs and an invert.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 147 of 1024

Size

Input the Radius (R1~R4) and Angle (A1~A4) of the tunnel section. If the section is not horizontally
symmetrical, check the axis symmetry section to create a non-symmetric tunnel shape. In this case,
the Inputs A1’~A3’, R2’~R3’ represent the shape on the left half section.

Invert

This function is only active when the tunnel type is [3 center circle + invert] or [5 center
circle+invert]. The invert can be drawn in an arc form when the bottom of the tunnel is not flat. The
invert shape can be created with one of the following 3 methods:

1. [Tangential] : Creates an invert shape based on the Radius (R) and Angle (A) input and the 3
center circle (or 5 center circle) information.

2. [Radius] : Creates an invert shape based on the 3 center circle (or 5 center circle) information and
the appropriate Angle (A) calculated by the Radius (R) input.

3. [Angle] : Creates an invert shape based on the 3 center circle (or 5 center circle) information and
the appropriate Radius (R) calculated by the Angle (A) input.

Rock bolt

If the tunnel section contains rock bolts, check [Include Rock Bolts] to place the edges. Input the
number of rock bolts and their length. The user can align the bolts by using two methods:
[Tangential Pitch] or [Rotation Angle].

Location

Input the center point location of the created tunnel section.

The user can input the center point coordinates on the workplane by either checking the [Screen
Snap] and using the mouse, or directly entering the coordinates.

Make wire

Create the tunnel section shape using a single wire. If the user does not check the option, it creates
the tunnel section shape using multiple edges.

Geometry set

Register the created tunnel section on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the
Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Fillet Curve & Chamfer

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 148 of 1024

Fillet Curve & Chamfer

▒ Overview

Applies fillet and chamfer to the intersection between two edges. This function is only applicable when the edges exist on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

Fillet

Select the two edges that need to be filleted and input the radius. The applied fillet curves become
a single wire type.

Trim Off Original Entities (Only Lines)

Remove the exterior edge protruding from the filleted area. If the selected edge is an arc or circle, it
is not removed.
Chamfer

Select the two edges that need to be trimmed and input the radius. The applied line trim becomes a
single wire type.

Trim off Original Entities (Only Line)

Remove the exterior edge protruding from the trimmed area.

Geometry set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 149 of 1024

Register the filleted or trimmed edge on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the
Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Make Wire

Make Wire

▒ Overview

Create a single wire from selected edges on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

Create a single wire from edges within the Tolerance.

[Tolerance] is the allowed error criterion that determines whether the edges are connected. For example when the distance between the edges
is 2.0e-006, although the value is not zero, it can be made into a single wire by setting the error as 0.0001 (distance larger than the value
between edges).

After the operation is performed, a single wire remains and the selected edges are deleted.

Geometry set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 150 of 1024

Register the wire on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

A wire is a concept of collective edges and has these edges as its sub-shape. Because the wire is a set of edges, the user can use commands
such as Extend to create shells, a set of faces created by individual edges. For these reasons, it is not appropriate to use the create wire
function when creating a face by extruding multiple edges. The geometry shape hierarchy is as follows.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Extend Curve

Extend Curve

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 151 of 1024

Extend the length of existing edges or trims edges to match the end points on the work-plane.

▒ Methodology

Extend Curve

Select the reference edge to which the target edge will extend.

The function does not work for edges that would not meet even if they were extended. The extend
function is unavailable for B-Spline type edges.
2D Coinciding Ends

Select end points that need to be matched. After the operation, the selected edges are removed
and only the extended edges remain.

When one of the edges is long enough and only the short edge needs to be extended, the short
edge is extended to and the long edge is cut until the intersection point.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Intersect

Intersect

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 152 of 1024

Cut the intersecting edges at the intersection point.

▒ Methodology

Select the edges to cut at the intersection.

After the operation, the selected edges are removed and only the cut edges remain.

Geometry set

Register the generated edges on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Trim Curve

Trim Curve

▒ Overview

Cut the intersecting edges the based on the intersection point. This function is only applicable when the edges exist on the workplane. After
the operation, the selected edges are removed and only the cut edges remain.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 153 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Select the reference edge for the cut and then select the target edge. The user can select multiple reference edges. The edges will remain
unchanged after the operation.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Break Curve

Break Curve

▒ Overview

Divide an edge in the 3D space.

▒ Methodology

Percentage

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 154 of 1024

Divide the edge using a ratio. Multiple edges can be selected and divided. The original length is viewed as 1 and the ratio is set at a value
between 0 and 1.

Point

Divide the edge using points. If there is no geometry shape to divide, the user can specify the object on the workplane using the snap option
or directly enter the coordinate values. The selected point is projected onto the edge at the shortest distance and that point is the reference
point for the division.
Edge

Divide edges using another edge. Select the reference edge and divide the target edge. The selected edge is projected onto the edge at the
shortest distance and that point is the reference point for the division.
Face

Divide the edge using a face. The selected face is projected onto the edge at the shortest distance and that point is the reference point for the
division.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Merge Curve

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 155 of 1024

Merge Curve

▒ Overview

Select edges that exist on the workplane and connect the end points using appropriate extend or trim operations.

▒ Methodology

Create a single edge from edges within the error limit. The error is the allowed error criterion that determines whether the edges are
connected. For example when the distance between the edges is 2.0e-006, although the value is not zero, it can be made into a single edge by
setting the error as 0.0001 (distance larger that the value between edges).

After the operation, the selected edges are removed and only a single joined edge remains.

Join line and wire

Join line and wire are both ways to join multiple edges into a single line. The middle points used to create the edges are removed but for join
line, but not for wire. So if the small points can be ignored, it is best to use the join line function. If not, it is best to use the create wire
function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 156 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Offset Curve

Offset Curve

▒ Overview

Create a new line by offsetting an existing edge by a certain distance. The offset is created only when the edges exist on the workplane.

▒ Methodology

Select the edge and line to offset on the workplane. Circles or arcs can also be selected. Because the offset is always in the normal direction of
the target edge, there is no need to set the direction. The user only needs to input the distance to automatically offset. Checking the [Make
Face] option creates a plane that contains the offset edges.

Geometry set

Register the generated edges on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Shortest Path Line

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 157 of 1024

Shortest Path Line

▒ Overview

Create a shortest distance line between two shapes or an intersection curve between two intersecting shapes.

▒ Methodology

Shortest path line

Create the shortest possible line between two shapes by selecting them in order.

Surface Intersection Curve

Selecting two shapes create an edge type line at the intersection. If the intersection is a single edge,
a single edge is created but if there are more intersections, a compound shape consisting of edges
is created.

Geometry set

Register the generated edges on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry
set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Point&Curve > Points on Edge

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 158 of 1024

Points on Edge

▒ Overview

Create a points based on the input intervals on edges.

▒ Methodology

Interval Length: Input the node spacing in the current length unit.

Number of Divisions: Divides the selected line into multiple divisions, specified by the input number.

Linear Grading (Length): Input the spacing between the start and end points of a line to automatically set the node positions through linear
interpolation.

Linear Grading (Ratio): Input the spacing ratio (end/start) between the start and end points of a line.

Hyperbolic Tangent: Input the start length and number of divisions to specify the nodes positions considering the total length of the line and
number of divisions.

[Preacusions]
- Points on Edge function is generating points. That doesn't mean that the places(edge/face) where points generated are not automatically
divided.
- It's totally the same way to give seed when making meshes.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Cylinder

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 159 of 1024

Cylinder

▒ Overview

Create a shell or solid type cylinder.

▒ Methodology

Create a cylinder from the Origin Point(OP), Radius(R), Height(H) and Angle(A) input.

[Origin Point (OP)]

The Origin point consists of the Center point coordinates of the bottom face of the cylinder. The user can directly specify the center point of
the workplane or geometry shape by selecting the points with the mouse. Because the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y axis value is not
entered.

[Angle (A)]

The angle is the rotation angle of the circle between the top and bottom face of the cylinder. If the user enters 360, it creates a generic
cylinder with circular top and bottom faces.

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type cylinder with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell type cylinder.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 160 of 1024

l GCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 3D space.

l WCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Workplane coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 2D space.

For GCS (Global coordinate system) and WCS (Workplane coordinate system), please refer to General information-Manage modeling toolset.

Geometry set

Register the created cylinder on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Cone

Cone

▒ Overview

Create a shell or solid type cone.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 161 of 1024

Create a cone from the Origin point (OP), Top Radius (TR), Bottom Radius (BR), Height (H) and Angle (A) input.

[Origin Point (OP)]

The center point consists of the Center point coordinates at the bottom face of the cone. The user can directly specify the center point of the
workplane or geometry shape by selecting with the mouse. Because the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y-axis value is not entered.

[Angle (A)]

The angle is the rotation angle of the circle between the top and bottom face of the cone. If the user enters 360, it creates a generic cone with
circular top and bottom faces.

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type cylinder with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell type cylinder.

l GCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 3D space.

l WCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Workplane coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 2D space.

For GCS (Global coordinate system) and WCS (Workplane coordinate system), please refer to General information-Manage modeling toolset.

Geometry set

Register the created cylinder on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

l When creating a solid or 2D mesh on a cone, the user can observe mesh deformation at the vertex. This phenomenon happens near the
pole, which is created near the revolution axis of the rotated body.

l Mesh deformation can also happen during the general modeling process when a vertex is created on a curved face. This phenomenon
may negatively effect on the analysis results. This problem cannot be solved on the geometry shape and it is best to use move node or
merge node functions after creating the mesh for any modifications.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Box

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 162 of 1024

Box

▒ Overview

Create a shell or solid type box.

▒ Methodology

Create a box from the Origin Point(OP), Width X(WX), Width Y(WY) and Height(H).

The Origin Point(OP) consists of the corner point coordinates of the bottom face of the box.

The user can directly specify the center point of the workplane or geometry shape by selecting the points with the mouse. Because the
workspace is 2-dimensional, the y-axis value is not entered.

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type cylinder with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell type cylinder.

l GCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 3D space.

l WCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Workplane coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 2D space.

For GCS (Global coordinate system) and WCS (Workplane coordinate system), please refer to General information-Manage modeling toolset.

Geometry set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 163 of 1024

Register the created cylinder on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Wedge

Wedge

▒ Overview

WedgeCreate a shell or solid type, wedge-shaped atypical hexahedral.

▒ Methodology

Create a wedge shape from the Origin Point (OP), Length (DX, DY, DZ) and Shape width (Xmin,
Xmax, Zmin, Zmax).

The Origin Point (OP) is the corner point coordinates of the bottom face of the hexahedral. The user
can directly specify the center point of the workplane or geometry shape with the mouse. Because
the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y-axis value is not entered.

DX, DY, DZ represent the bottom face x direction length, height and bottom face width of the
hexahedral respectively.

X min, X max is the relative distance of the Start and End point coordinates of the top face in the x-
axis.

Z min, Z max is the relative distance of the Start and End point coordinates of the top face in the z-
axis.

The hexahedral is created as follows. If the Corner coordinates are (X,Y,Z), The bottom face is the
rectangle that starts at (X,Y,Z) and ends at (DZ,DY,DX). The top face is the rectangle that starts at
(X+X min,Y,Z+Z min) and ends at (X+X max,Y,Z+Z max). The hexahedral is set based on the two
rectangles.

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type cylinder with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a
shell type cylinder.

l GCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center
coordinates are input in 3D space.

l WCS

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 164 of 1024

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Workplane coordinate system. In this case, the
center coordinates are input in 2D space.

For GCS (Global coordinate system) and WCS (Workplane coordinate system), please refer to
General information-Manage modeling toolset.

Geometry set

Register the created cylinder on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry
set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Sphere

Sphere

▒ Overview

Create a shell or solid type sphere.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 165 of 1024

Create a sphere from the Origin point (OP) and Angles (A1, A2, A3).

Origin point (OP)

The center point coordinates of the sphere. The user can directly specify the center point of the workplane or geometry shape by selecting the
points with the mouse. Because the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y- axis value is not entered.

Angle (A1, A2, A3)

The angle input to create a sphere. The values represent:

A1: Rotation angle of the sphere's vertical plane

A2: Start angle of the sphere's vertical plane (0<A2≤90)

A3: End angle of the sphere's vertical plane (-90≤A3≤0)

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type cylinder with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell type cylinder.

l GCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 3D space.

l WCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Workplane coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 2D space.

For GCS (Global coordinate system) and WCS (Workplane coordinate system), please refer to General information-Manage modeling toolset.

Geometry set

Register the created cylinder on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

When creating a solid or 2D mesh on a sphere, the user can observe mesh deformation at the vertex. This phenomenon happens near the
pole, which is created near the revolution axis of the rotated body.

Mesh deformation can also happen during the general modeling process when a vertex is created on a curved face. This phenomenon may
have a negative effect on the analysis results. This problem cannot be solved on the geometry shape and it is best to use move node or merge
node functions after creating the mesh for any modifications.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Torus

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 166 of 1024

Torus

▒ Overview

A donut shaped rotated body. Using a closed section creates a shell or solid type torus. Using an open section creates a rotated body with a
blocked center. The sectional shape is a circle or an arc.

▒ Methodology

Create a torus from the Origin Point (OP), Outer Radius (OR), Inner Radius (IR), Height (H) and Angle (A) input.

[Origin point (OP)]

The center point coordinates of the torus. The user can directly specify the center point of the workplane or geometry shape by clicking.
Because the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y axis value is not entered.

[Outer radius (OR) and Inner radius (IR)]

The outer circumference radius and inner circumference radius respectively. 0<IR<OR needs to be satisfied.

[Angle (A)]

The angle is the start angle of the sectional shape (circle or arc) of the rotated body.

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type cylinder with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell type cylinder.

l GCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 3D space.

l WCS

Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Workplane coordinate system. In this case, the center coordinates are input in 2D space.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 167 of 1024

For GCS (Global coordinate system) and WCS (Workplane coordinate system), please refer to General information-Manage modeling toolset.

Geometry set

Register the created cylinder on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Make Face

Make Face

▒ Overview

Create a plane from multiple closed edges. The edges are the outline of the plane.

▒ Methodology

Face

Create a face by selecting the edges that form its outline. There is no limit to the numbers of edges the user can select, but there should be no
overlapping outlines in order to create a normal plane.

[Tolerance]

The criterion that determines whether an edge is connected. For example when the distance between the edges is 2.0e-006, although the
value is not zero, it is determined to be connected with a tolerance of 0.0001 (distance larger that the value between edges).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 168 of 1024

If there is an outline inside an area formed by another outline, it is still possible to create a plane that considers both the exterior and interior
outlines. However, if the exterior and interior outlines are not on the same plane, the interior face is projected onto the exterior face.

Coons face

Create a 3D curved face using 2 or 4 outline edges.

When using 4 edges, the selected outline needs form a closed area to generate a normal curved face.

When using 2 edges, the curved face is created by the two outlines and the closest distance between them. When creating a Coons face using
2 edges, the face is formed by connecting the selected edges in a straight line. Because the face is created by connecting the Start points and
End points of the two edges, it creates a twisted face if the edge directions do not match. In this case, use the reverse direction option to
connect the Start and End points of each edge to create a normal face.

A Coons face is a curved face that has small errors and a fast production rate. However, using more than 4 outlines to create the face is
inconvenient. When using 4 edges to create a Coons face, use the join line function to reduce the number of outlines to at most 4.

The face is not created if the shape is not shaded in the preview window after the edges have been selected. A face that cannot be shaded is
one that has a problem in its configuration and has an effect on future modeling processes. In this case, it is recommended that the edges be
modified or recreated or rejoined before creating the Coons face again. If there is no appropriate solution, it is safe to remodel the abnormal
face using the shape modification function in the modification toolset.

Grid Face

Set an imaginary grid on the XY plane of the GCS and input the height information for each grid point to create a compound shape-curved
face.

M(X direction number), N(Y direction number) represent the number of grid lines in each axis direction.

Origin X and Origin Y are the X, Y coordinates of the grid start point. LX and LY are the length in the X and Y direction of the plane.

The height information can be directly entered into a table dialog box or input from a .txt file.

Point

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 169 of 1024

Create a curved face in the space that contains all selected points.

The points can be selected on the screen or their coordinates directly entered into a table dialog box.

When using a table to input the coordinates, the [Make Points] becomes active. Check this option to create the input point and un-check this
option to create the face only. Check [Make Points As Compound] to create points that are grouped as a compound shape.

Geometry set

Register the created face on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Fillet & Chamfer

Fillet & Chamfer

▒ Overview

Create a fillet or chamfer shell on a shell or solid type edge.

▒ Methodology

Fillet Curve

Select the edge to fillet. Only a sub edge of the solid or shell can be selected.

Input the fillet radius (R1) at the Start point and the fillet radius (R2) at the End point of the edge to
be filled.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 170 of 1024

The edge direction is not shown, but the user can check the preview button ( ) to preview the
shape.
Chamfer

Select the edge to chamfer. Only a sub edge of the solid or shell can be selected.

Input the length (L1) at the Start point and the length (L2) at the End point of the edge to be
chamfered.

The edge direction is not shown, but the user can check the preview button ( ) to preview the
shape.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Offset

Offset

▒ Overview

Create a shell by offsetting the whole or parts of a solid or shell.

▒ Methodology

Whole shape

Offset all the shapes (Solid, Shell, Face) of the selected object by the same distance (Offset Distance
(OD)).

Check the [Round Extended Bound] to connect any disconnected offset faces of the object using

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 171 of 1024

curved faces. The offset distance (OD) is the radius used for the fillet.

Check the [Delete original] to remove all target objects used in the offset process, leaving only the
final shape.
Partial Face

Offset parts of the selected object.

Check the [Offset Each Face independently] to offset each face separately. Un-checking this option
and selecting multiple connected faces creates a shell type offset face.

When offsetting only some shells of a compound shape from the select face tab, the faces diverge when offset.

Entering a positive offset distance, the offset is performed in the normal direction to the face. So when offsetting individual faces separately, it
is good to use the preview function for each face to check whether it has been offset properly. If the shell has been created by joining or
connecting faces, the program adjusts the different normal directions into one direction to ease the operation.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Imprint

Imprint

▒ Overview

Create a curve or point on a specified face based on the projected shape.

▒ Methodology

Auto Imprint

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 172 of 1024

Imprint Point

Select the imprint face and point. The imprint direction can be set using the following 2 methods.

[Select Direction] : Determine the direction vector for imprint. The user can select the datum axis,
datum plane, face or edge.

[2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector that is to be the reference axis of the imprint by
entering the coordinates of its Start and End points. The user can also directly click on the work
screen to specify the Start and End points.

Check the [Connect two points by Line] option to draw a line connecting the origin point and the
projected point.
Imprint Curve

Select the imprint face and point. The imprint direction can be set using the following 3 methods:

1. [Select Direction] : Determine the direction vector for imprint. The user can select the datum axis,
datum plane, face or edge.

2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector that is to be the reference axis of the imprint by
entering the coordinates of its Start and End points. The user can also directly click on the work
screen to specify the Start and End points.

3. [Direction of the Shortest Path Line] : Project in the shortest distance direction between the tool
shape and the target shape.
Imprint Auto

Select the imprint faces, lines and points to automatically perform imprint.

If the line passes through multiple solids, using the automatic imprint function divides the line for
every solid and the intersections are automatically imprinted.

Geometry set

Register the created lines or points on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the
Geometry set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 173 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Auto Connect

Auto Connect

▒ Overview

Automatically creates a shared face between objects.

▒ Methodoolgy

Auto connect

Select objects to automatically correct a shared face between them. This function facilitates the crossover operation between solids and one of
the following operations is automatically performed.

l Imprint : In case of solid and solid in contact

l Boolean : Solid within a solid(embed) or partially included - Intersection set

For the set intersection function, the solid shape changes with the selection order. However, in the case of automatic connection, the program
determines and creates the shared face so that the selection order does not change the shape. Hence, it is useful to use the Geometry >
Boolean > Solid > Cut function if the user wants to include sections that are not in contact.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 174 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Merge Face-Edge

Merge Face-Edge

▒ Overview

Merge the outline of a selected face into one edge while keeping the face.

▒ Methodology

Perform the merge face-edge operation on a single or multiple shapes. For a single shape, the merge operation is only available for a single
face; for multiple shapes, the operation is automatically available for all edges included in the selection criteria.

The merge operation is performed only when the angle between the selected edges are within the criteria. The merging edges need to be
connected to other edges for the operation.

The merge face-edge operation does not work on edges existing on a node (an edge of length 0). These edges are not common but can
happen during the modeling process. In this case, the join edge function is impossible and needs to be modified using Create mesh and
manual operations such as Move node.

If the merging edge is composed of 2 short edges on one side and one long edge on the other side in the suturing process, the long edge is
divided to fit in with the 2 short edges, such that all the shared edges are in the same phase for the fuse operation. Hence, when performing
the merge face-edge operation after the fuse process, the shell edge can be formed too short by mistake is the adjacent edge is short.

To prevent this problem, it is possible to perform the fuse process before the merge face-edge operation. For large shell models, the merge
face-edge operation may be slow and hence it is efficient to perform partial fuse and merge face-edge operations at the same time.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 175 of 1024

The Start point of the object is shown as a red circle and the End point a blue circle.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Surface&Solid > Bedding Plane

Bedding Plane

▒ Overview

A Wizard that can be used to create multiple planes on the 3D space.

▒ Methodology

3D bedding plane using boring data & Terrain Geometry Maker.

Define the plane name and specify the name and position of the irradiation hole. Each
irradiation hole can be added by clicking the Add button, and the depth for each
plane is directly input. The depth is input with reference to the GCS and is cumulated
under the ground surface. For example, inputs of -10m ground surface, 30m soil plane
and 60m weathered rock indicate that the soil layer is located 40m below the ground
surface and the weathered rock layer 70m below the ground surface.

The position and number of irradiation holes need to be larger than 1 and 3
respectively to create a bedding plane and hence, 3 or more columnar sections need
to be input when creating a surface using multiple columnar sections.

The separation distance creates bending planes by separating the columnar sections
by a certain distance.

Import

The information of bedding planes can be defined with an Excel file in the ‘Bedding
Plane Wizard’. The information of several boreholes can be imported at one time. The
bedding planes will be created by correction of borehole depth based on the ‘Plane
Name’.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 176 of 1024

Geometry set

The created bending planes and columnar sections are registered on the Geometry
set, under the model works tree, as a face and line shape respectively. The user can
specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Boolean > Solid

Solid

▒ Overview

Perform boolean operations on selected shapes.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 177 of 1024

Fuse

Merge shapes using the [Fuse] function. It is mostly applied to solids and solids and the outer boundary lines of each shape remains. However,
if the [Merge faces] option is on, the objects are defined as a single face and the outlines are automatically removed.

For general cases, the [Fuse] function is applied to solids.

l Fuse of line(edge, wire) and line(edge, wire) : All lines are cut at the intersection points and form a single wire. If the lines are not
connected, the operation forms a compound shape.

l Fuse of face(face, shell) and face(face, shell) : Does the same function as Geometry > Boolean > Surface > Sew

Cut

Remove the overlap between the target shape and tool shapes using a [Cut] function. It is mostly applied to solids and solids.

For general cases, the [Boolean > Cut] function is applied to solids.

l Cut of master line (edge, wire) and tool shape (face, shell) : Divide the edge at its intersection with the shape, creating wires.

l Cut of master shape (face, shell) and tool shape (face, shell) : The overlapping shape is removed from the master shape.

l Cut of master shape (edge, wire) and tool shape (solid) : The intersection with the solid is removed from the shape.

Common

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 178 of 1024

Remove everything but the overlap between the target shape and tool shapes from the [Common] function. It is mostly applied to solids and
solids. If the [Common] is applied to two faces, it may create an inappropriate shape.

For general cases, the [Boolean > Common] function is applied to solids.

l Common of line (edge, wire) and shape (face, shell) : Divide the edge at its intersection with the shape, creating wires.

l Common of shape (face, shell) and shape (face, shell) : Only the overlap between the shapes remain as a shell.

l Common of shape (edge, wire) and shape (solid) : The overlap between the shape and solid remain as a shell.

For all cases, the results are the same.

Embed

Embed the target shape on the tool shape. It is often used when modeling a solid element that has another solid element with a different
material embedded in it. The [Common] function is done between the target shape and the tool shape and the results are embedded into the
target shape.

Delete Tool

Remove the tool shape after each operation.

1. Using this function on Points or Compounds can create an incorrect shape and it is not recommended.

2. [Fuse], [Cut] and [Common] functions are greatly affected by shape error. The shape error determines whether a shape is intersecting an
adjacent shape and, as the compound modeling process continues, the errors that may cumulate and cause problems. If the [Fuse], [Cut] and
[Common] set operations do not function properly, use the Boolean > Surface > Sew function to correct for errors and then re-perform the
operation.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Boolean > Surface

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 179 of 1024

Surface

▒ Overview

Select independent faces to create a single shell.

▒ Methodology

Fuse

Merge the faces (shell, face) that overlap, pass through or have no fuse operation into a single shell
using the [Fuse]. Check the [Merge faces] option to merge outlines to create a face when possible.
The outlines are deleted afterwards.

It is possible to create a shell using the Fuse function for adjoined faces, but this method may take
too long and using many Fuse commands makes the shape unstable. It is recommended to use the
Sew function for modeling. However, for cases where two shapes are not adjacent and do not
overlap nor pass through each other, the Sew operation is not possible. In such case the shell needs
to be created using the Fuse function.

Fuse is a simple union set operation that cannot be used when two faces are apart. When two faces
pass through each other, the faces are divided with reference to the intersection line and each face
becomes a sub-shape of the shell. Hence, if two faces pass through slightly, a very long and thin
face maybe included in the shell after the Fuse operation. It is best to use the delete sub-shape
menu and delete faces from the shell that are below a certain size.

Sew

Combine independent faces (shell, face) into one shell. This function is used when the faces (shell,
face) meet at the boundary edge with no overlap.

[Tolerance]

The allowable limit used in the Sew operation. If the gap between the face outlines is less than the
tolerance, it creates a single shell without a free edge.

Checking the [Non-Manifold] option sews non-manifold faces that have three or more faces
meeting at a single edge. Uncheck the option to not fuse Non-manifold faces.

Checking the [Make Solid] option automatically changes a perfectly closed shell into a solid.

Press the preview button [ ] to see the results of the Sew operation on the selected shape (shell,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 180 of 1024

face). The areas displayed in dark red lines are the B-Spline sections that have not undergone the
sew operation because they are not within the allowable limit. In this case, gradually increasing the
limit and previewing the results repeatedly can prevent B-Splines from being displayed. Pressing the
confirm or apply button with the B-Spline included creates a shell with a B-Spline included.

Be aware that a very large tolerance can create an abnormal shape.

<When fuse does not occur even with tolerance adjustment>

l Check to see if the face overlaps at that position.

l If a face is not sewed, sew the other faces first and then reconstruct the edges of the un-sewed
face for another sew operation.

l It is possible to perform the sew operation without removing a local B-Spline. In this case, a
seed is assigned to the B-Spline to create a mesh and the fuse node operation is performed in
the subsequent mesh creating process.

l Modify the faces such that adjacent faces meet at the edges with the same length using
Geometry > Surface&Solid > Merge Face-Edge. If a mesh is created with the same mesh size
without fuse, the positions of the nodes are very similar. This process combines all the shared
nodes of the created mesh into one using the merge node function.

Some faces are not shaded after the sew operation. This happens when there are problems in a
face's configuration that create erroneous relationships with adjacent faces in the sew process,
resulting in an incorrect shell. These errors can be corrected by modifying the incorrect face and
then performing the sew operation. If there are problems after the suturing, the incorrect face can
be removed from the shell by using the sub-shape remove function.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Divide > Solid

Solid

▒ Overview

Divide a solid into faces.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 181 of 1024

Select the target solid and divide it using the tool faces.

The division tool face can be set in 3 ways.

[Select tool surface] : Select the target surfaces directly for division. If the tool shape consists of
multiple faces, it is recommended to group the faces into a single shell to obtain accurate results.

[3 points vector] : Divide the solid using an infinite face defined by specifying three points. The user
can also click directly on the work screen to input the coordinates of the three points.

[Dividing plane] : Divides the solid using an infinite face created with reference to the Global
Coordinate System (GCS).

Divide Touching Faces

When multiple solids are adjacent with faces in contact, diving parts of the solid can also divide the
adjacent solid and their contact face. This allows the sharing of face nodes when creating a solid.

Delete Original, Delete Tool

Check this option to delete the original target shape and tool shape after the division operation.

Geometry set

Register the created solid on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Divide > Surface

Surface

▒ Overview

Divide multiple faces using arbitrary lines or faces.

▒ Methodology

By Curves

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 182 of 1024

Select the target surface (shell, face) and the tool curves for division. If the tool shape consists of
multiple edges, it is recommended to merge the edges into a single edge instead of selecting
multiple edges.

If the tool curves do not exist in the same plane as the target surface, the tool edge is projected
onto the target surface and then divided. In this case, the projection direction needs to be specified.
The direction can be set in the following 4 ways:

1. [Projection Direction] : Determine the projection direction vector of the tool edge. The user can
select the datum axis, datum plane, plane or edge.

2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector by entering the coordinates of its Start and End
points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start and End points.

3. [Point on Curve] : Project an arbitrary point on the tool edge in the shortest distance direction to
the target surface. The arbitrary point can be specified by a ratio of 0 to 1 from the Start point to the
End point of the tool edge.

4. [Direction of Shortest Path Line] : Project in the shortest distance direction from the tool edge to
the target shape.

Separate divided faces

Check this option to separate the shell into face units.

By Surface

Select the target surface (shell, face) and the tool faces for division. The tool faces can be directly
selected or an infinite tool face can be created by defining the coordinates of three points.

Divide Touching faces

When multiple solids are adjacent with faces in contact, diving parts of the solid can also divide the
adjacent solid and their contact face. This allows the sharing of face nodes when creating a solid.

Delete Original, Delete Tool

Check this option to delete the original target shape and tool shape after the division operation.

Geometry set

Register the created face on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 183 of 1024

When working with an imported geometry data file, the shape may not divide well. The methods for
dividing a face with a line are as follows:

l When the tool line cuts across the target shape completely, it has a similar effect as the
imprint operation.

l Create a temporary solid by extruding the target surface using an arbitrary value and create a
temporary face by extruding the tool curve. Dividing the created solid by using the created
face leaves only the desired face. Using the sub-shape extend command deletes the
temporary solid and the face.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Protrude > Extrude

Extrude

▒ Overview

Create a solid, face and line by extruding a geometry shape (face, line, point) in a straight direction. It is possible to create a solid using a
face, a face using a line, and a line using a point. For special cases, the solid option can be set to create a solid using a closed wire or edge.

▒ Methodology

Input the geometry shape (face, line, point) for the Extrude operation and enter the extend direction
and length. The extend direction can be set using the following 3 methods:

1. [Select Direction] : Determine the extend direction vector of the selected section. The user can
select the datum axis, datum plane, plane or edge.

2. [2 point vector] : Determine the extend direction vector by entering the coordinates of its Start
and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start and End
points.

3. [Normal of profile] : Extend the section in the normal direction to the plane when the direction
can be specified. If there are multiple sections, the shape is extended for each normal direction. If
the extend section is a curved face or a straight line, the normal direction cannot be defined and it
cannot be extended.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 184 of 1024

Check the [Reverse Direction] option to reverse the extend direction.

[Length]

If the extend direction has a finite length (straight line edge or two-point vector), click the right "<"
button to automatically enter the extend length.

Make Solid

Used on solids created by a closed line. Using an open edge or wire does not cause errors, but be
aware that it may create an incorrect shape..

[Fuse]

Use the Fuse operation between solids to expand the shape during extend process.

[Cut]

Use the Cut operation between solids to divide the shape during the extend process.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the extend line command on the Geometry set. The user
can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Protrude > Revolve

Revolve

▒ Overview

Create a solid, face and line by rotating the geometry shape (face, line, point). It is possible to create a solid using a face, to create a face
using a line, and to create a line using a point. For special cases, the solid option can be set to create a solid using a closed wire or edge.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 185 of 1024

Select the geometry shape (face, line, point) and input the revolution axis and angle.

The revolution axis can be set using the following two methods:

1. [Rotation Axis] : Determine the revolution axis for rotation for the selected section. The user can
select the datum axis, datum plane, plane or edge. Check [Position] to specify the Start point of the
revolution axis directly. Entering the position moves the revolution axis to that value.

2. [2 points vector] : Determine the extend direction vector by entering the coordinates of its Start
and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start and End
points.

Make Solid

Used on solids created by a closed line. Using an open edge or wire does not cause errors, but be
aware that it may create an incorrect shape.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the rotation extend line command on the Geometry set.
The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

When creating a solid or 2D mesh on a rotated body, the user can observe mesh deformation at the vertex. This happens near the pole, which
is created near the revolution axis of the rotated body.

This problem cannot be solved on the geometry shape and it is best to use move node or merge node functions after creating the mesh for
any modifications.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Protrude > Loft

Loft

▒ Overview

Create a shell or solid that connects the selected sections in order of selection. The line type that connects the objects can be set as a B-
Spline or a straight line. A solid can be created by selecting a closed wire or edge on the solid option.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 186 of 1024

Select shapes to perform loft. The selection method depends on the selection order. The order can
be largely divided into [Creation], [Selection] and [Vector].

[Creation] : Select section shapes in order of connection to create a shape. The selection shapes are
selected individually with the mouse.

[Selection] : Select section profiles in order of connection to create a shape. The section profiles are
selected individually with the mouse.

[Vector] : Select multiple sections that are connected depending on the organized vector direction
of the object shape. 2 point vectors can be used to define the coordinates of the direction vectors at
Pt1 and Pt2. The reference point and order of the profile is applied in the same way as organizing a
section profile using the coordinate system.

Make Solid, Straight

Check the [Make Solid] option to create a solid using a closed line.

Using this operation on an open edge or wire does not cause errors, but be aware that it may create
an incorrect shape.

Sections with the [Straight] option checked on will connect each selected section using straight
lines, not curved.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the loft extend command on the Geometry set. The user
can specify the name of the Geometry set.

A solid cannot be created, even when the solid option is on and the wires and edges are closed, if the planes cannot be created. In this case, it
is recommended to create the planes individually and use the Sew operation (Main menu > Geometry > Boolean > Surface > Sew).

Sometimes, a twisted geometry can form during the extend loft operation. This is because the wires or edges selected as the section profile
are not in the same direction.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Protrude > Sweep

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 187 of 1024

Sweep

▒ Overview

Create a face, shell or solid by extruding the selected section along a guide curve. Working with a wire as a section profile creates a shell.
Working with an edge as a section profile creates a face.

▒ Methodology

Select the Object to perform sweep and extend along the guide curve.

[Scale] Check to input the scale size and extend with the end shape scaled to that factor.

[Make Solid] Check to extend the face to create a solid.

[Ortho] Check to extend the selected section in the direction perpendicular to the guide curve.

[Contact] Check to move the section to the start point of the guide curve and then sweep extend.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the sweep extend command on the Geometry set. The
user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

The object is best created when the guide curve exists on the center position of the sweep profile.

A solid cannot be created, even when the solid option is used and the wires and edges are closed, if the planes cannot be created. In this case,
it is recommended to create the planes individually and then perform the fuse process to create a solid.

Use the preview button to check the shape. If the shape is not appropriate, use the sweep mod or bend mod functions to create an
appropriate shape.

Sometimes complexities in geometry will prevent the desired result from being generated through the sweep functions. In this case, use the
Sweep pattern (Main menu > Geometry > Transform > Sweep-Translate) to copy the object profile using the guide curve and use the Loft
extend (Main menu > Geometry > Protrude > Loft) to obtain the same result.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Transfer > Translate

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 188 of 1024

Translate

▒ Overview

Move the object by a certain distance. This command can be applied regardless of the type of shape. The [Copy] options can be used to
leave the original object and only move the copied object.

▒ Methodology

Select the shape to move and specify the direction. The direction can be defined in 2 ways:

1. [Select Direction] : Determine the direction vector for move. The user can select the datum axis,
datum plane, face or edge.

2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector to be the reference axis of the move by entering
the coordinates of its Start and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to
specify the Start and End points.

The target object can be moved/copied using [Move], [Copy (Uniform)] and [Copy (Non-Uniform)].

[Move]

Move target shape by desired distance.

[Copy (Uniform)]

The repeat option is activated and copies the target object repeatedly by the entered number.

[Copy (Non-Uniform)]

List the copy distance by a space or comma (,) and when repeating, enter number @ distance

(Example : 2,3,4,4,4 or 2 3 3@4)

[Multiple Points Copy]

List the relative base point of the object and create an array of the object anywhere in the datum
points or along multiple points, and this can be done either by clicking random grid points or at
pre existing points. User can also enter the locations manually at Target Point.

Distance

If the direction has a finite length (straight line edge or two-point vector), click the right "<" button
to automatically enter the length.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the move command on the Geometry set. The user can
specify the name of the Geometry set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 189 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Transfer > Rotate

Rotate

▒ Overview

Move or copy the object by rotation. This command can be applied regardless of the type of shape and the [Copy] option can be used to
leave the original object and only move the copied object.

▒ Methodology

Select the shape to rotate and specify the revolution axis. The revolution axis can be defined in 2
ways:

1. Check [Location] to specify the Start point of the revolution axis directly. Entering the position
moves the revolution axis to that value.

2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector for rotation extend by entering the coordinates
of its Start and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start
and End points.

The target object can be moved/copied using [Move], [Copy (Uniform)] and [Copy (Non-Uniform)].

[Move]

Enter the angle directly to rotate.

[Copy (Uniform)]

The repeat option is activated and rotation copies the target object repeatedly by the entered
number.

[Copy (Non-Uniform)]

List the rotation angle by a space or comma (,) and when repeating, enter number @ distance

(Example : 10,20,25,25,25 or 10 20 3@25).

Geometry set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 190 of 1024

Register the geometry shape created from the rotate command on the Geometry set. The user can
specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Transfer > Mirror

Mirror

▒ Overview

Move the target object. This command can be applied regardless of the type of shape and the [Copy] option can be used to leave the
original object and only move the copied object.

▒ Methodology

Select the shape to mirror and specify the mirror type.

The mirror type can be defined by [Point], [Axis] and [Plane].

[Point] type : Mirror the selected point with reference to a point. The mirrored point can be selected
directly by clicking on the work screen or checking the coordinate system option and entering the
coordinates.

[Axis] type : Mirror the selected axis with reference to an axis. The mirror axis can be selected
directly by clicking on the work screen or checking the Two-point vector option and entering the
Start and End point coordinates of the direction vector.

[Plane] type : Mirror the selected plane with reference to a plane. The mirror plane can be selected
directly by clicking on the work screen or checking the Three-point plane option and entering the
three coordinates to define an infinite plane.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the mirror command on the Geometry set. The user can
specify the name of the Geometry set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 191 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Transfer > Scale

Scale

▒ Overview

Scale the target object with reference to a point. This command can be applied regardless of the type of shape and the [Copy] option can be
used to leave the original object and only move the copied object.

▒ Methodology

Select the shape to scale and specify the reference point coordinates to scale up or down.

There are 2 scale methods; [Uniform] and [Non-Uniform]

[Uniform] : All axis's are scaled by the same amount.

[Non-Uniform] : Each axis direction (GCS standard) can be scaled by a different factor.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the scale command on the Geometry set. The user can
specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Transfer > Sweep-Translate

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 192 of 1024

Sweep-Translate

▒ Overview

Copy the target object along a guide curve. This command can be applied regardless of the type of shape.

▒ Methodology

Select the shape to move and specify the guide curve (edge or wire).

Check [Reverse Curve Direction] to move in the opposite direction of the guide curve.

There are 3 move methods: [Offsets], [Ratio (0~1)], [Division].

1. [Offsets] : Specify the offset interval and input the move distance. If the entered move distance is
longer than the guide curve, the shape does not move past the end of the guide curve.

Enter a space or comma to enter multiple distances to copy and move multiple shapes.

2. [Ratio (0~1)] : Specify the guide curve ratio and input the move distance. The ratio at the Start
point of the guide curve is 0 and the ratio at the End point of the guide curve is 1. Enter multiple
ratios to copy and move multiple shapes.

3. [Division] : Specify the number of guide curve divisions and input the move distance. Copy and
move the equally divided edge to the division position.

Check the [Keep angle] option to apply the curves of the guide curve during sweep pattern move
and check the [Contact] option to move the guide curve of the target object to the Start point.

Select a Sweep Basis point

The reference point used when applying a vertical, line contact option on a plane. The reference
point must be a particular point on the shape.

Make Lofted Shape

It is convenient to use this option instead of the loft extend option when creating a shape by
interpolating a section along a guide curve with discontinuous curvature. The solid can be made in
line form. The resulting shape is created and the original shape is not copied.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the sweep pattern command on the Geometry set. The
user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Transfer > Project

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 193 of 1024

Project

▒ Overview

Project the selected shape. The user can project [Curve to Surface], [Point to Edge] or [Point on Surface].

▒ Methodology

Curve to Surface

Select the target surface and tool line for projection.

The projection direction can be set using the following 4 methods:

1. [Select direction] : Determine the projection direction vector. The user can select the datum axis,
datum plane, plane or edge.

2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector of the projection axis by entering the coordinates
of its Start and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start
and End points.

3. [Point on Curve (Ratio)] : Select a point on the line. Project the shortest distance direction from
the selected point to target surface.

4. [Direction of Shortest path Line] : Project in the shortest distance direction from the tool edge to
the target shape.
Point to Edge

Select the target edge and tool point for projection. The selected point is projected in the vertical
direction.

Point to Surface

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 194 of 1024

Select the target surface (shell or face) and tool point for projection. The selected point is
projected in the vertical direction.

Nearest Only

Projection is performed infinitely in the selected direction and if the target shape is a curved plane
or shell, it can meet the target shape more than twice. Check this option to select only the
projected shape closest to the tool shape.

Geometry set

Register the created line or point on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the
Geometry set.

There is no function to create a straight line and project a point at the same time. Imprinting the point and connecting it to a line can be a
similar function.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Transfer > Attach

Attach

▒ Overview

Attach the target shape and tool shape. Here, the selected shape moves in the direction with shortest distance between it and the shape to
which it is being attached. If there are more than two tool shapes, the attaching shape moves to the closest tool shape.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 195 of 1024

Select the target shape and the shape to attach. All target shapes can be selected if they are independent shapes.

The attach direction can be selected from [X-Dir], [Y-Dir] or [Z-Dir].

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Sub Shape > Super Shape

Super Shape

▒ Overview

Create a solid or compound shape using selected target shapes.

▒ Methodology

Shell -> Solid

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 196 of 1024

Selecting closed shells or faces and running this option automatically fills the interior and creates a solid.

Compound

A compound is a group of shapes that cannot be defined as a single shape (point, line, face, solid). Multiple shapes can be selected to form a
compound.

Compounds are created during the modeling process when a shape is completely divided into two or more shapes. For example, when the 4
side faces of a cube are removed, the resulting compound is formed by two completely separate top and bottom faces.

A compound can also be created from grouping un-connectable shapes. For example, performing a crossover operation on two separated
solids can result in a compound.

Hence, if a compound is created, acknowledge it as a set of un-connectable shapes.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Sub Shape > Remove

Remove

▒ Overview

Remove the desired outer face of a selected shell or solid.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 197 of 1024

Select the faces to delete and press the [OK] or [Apply] button to delete the selected faces. For solids, deleting a face creates a shell. For faces,
deleting a face leaves the outline wires.

Geometry set

Register the created shape on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Sub Shape > Extract

Extract

▒ Overview

Extract a geometry shape (face, line, point) of the selected shape to create an independent shape.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 198 of 1024

Select the geometry shape (face, line, point) to extract. A face can be extracted from a face, a line from a face and a point from a line. If the
extracted shapes are within the error range, check the [Merge] option to merge the shapes into a single shape. For example, an object that is
extracted with two adjacent faces, such that the error between the outlines is small, can create a single shell without any free edges.

Geometry set

Register the created shape on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Disassembling a face can be used when an edge of an existing face is needed during the modeling process. In this case, the face is deleted but
using the extract command leaves the face intact and extracts the independent edge.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Sub Shape > Explode

Explode

▒ Overview

Disassemble a selected shape into its sub-shapes.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 199 of 1024

Select the shape and set the disassemble level to disassemble into its sub-shapes.

The disassemble level can be selected from [Sub Shpes], [Solid], [Shell], [Face], [Wire], [Edge] and [Point].

Disassemble is applied to target shapes that have a higher rank than the disassemble level. In other words, if the shape is solid, it can be
divided into shapes that have a lower rank than a solid such as [Shell], [Face], [Wire], [Edge] or [Point].

[Sub Shapes] is the option that disassembles the shape by the geometry rank just below it.

Compound shapes are a set of simple shapes and applying [Sub Shapes] disassembles each shape in the compound individually.

The geometry ranking is as follows: [Solid] > [Shell] > [Face] > [Wire] > [Edge] > [Point].

For example, the sub-shapes of a shape consisting of faces and solids are as follows.

The properties of the selected shape can be verified from Tools > Show/hide > Properties.

Shape Face
Wire 1
Sub-Shape Edge 5
Point 5

Shape Face
Wire 2
Sub-Shape Edge 2
Point 2

Shape Face
Face 2
Wire 2
Sub-Shape
Edge 7
Point 6

Shape Face
Shell 1
Face 6
Sub-Shape Wire 6
Edge 12
Point 8

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 200 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Remove > Face,Edge

Face/Edge

▒ Overview

Find and delete faces/Edges that are smaller in value (area for face, length for edge) than the input value.

▒ Methodology

Select the geometry shape to check and input the micro-line/micro-face threshold values. Press the find button to automatically find faces or
lines with areas or lengths less than the threshold value. The user can check and delete the selected shapes.

When using an imported geometry shape data file, very small faces (especially, long faces with small widths) can also be imported, which leads
to a reduction of work efficiency and the creation of incorrect shapes. The best way to solve this problem is to erase the problematic faces and
restructure the shape using adjacent faces. However, if the model is too large and the problematic faces cannot be checked individually by the
naked eye, it is efficient to use this option to adjust the allowance and automatically delete small faces.

When using many edges to create a face, some faces may not form. This problem can be caused by very short edges that overlap. In this case,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 201 of 1024

the function can be used to find and delete such micro-edges when creating a face.

Condition : Find and remove selected entities automatically

Hole (Radius) : Input radius of hole

Fillet (Radius) : Input radius of fillet

Small Edge : Input the length of edge

Small face : Input the length for the longest edge of face

Silver Face : Input the width of strip

Spike : Input the width of spike

Results : All entities which meet criteria are listed in the dialog

Selected entities will be highlighted in the model view

Double click on the selected entity to fit zoom to window

[Spike Width]

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Remove > Remove Manual

Remove Manual

▒ Overview

Infinitesimal lines or faces are main sources of error when creating an element. Unintended infinitesimal faces can be created during
repeated divisions or shared surface creation during complex geometry modeling.

Elements are created by linear interpolation of the input size with reference to the division point of the geometry shape. Here, the infinitesimal
lines or faces, which cannot create an element, need to be modified by combining with adjacent shapes, deleting or regenerating. This
function searches for infinitesimal lines or faces with reference to the input size and deletes or merges them.

8.1 Face/Edge can only be performed on created faces and lines, and Manual delete searches and modifies faces/lines that are sub-shapes of a
solid.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 202 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Select infinitesimal line or face shapes manually to delete them from the specified geometry, or automatically figure out the total number and
positions of the infinitesimal faces on the solid, with reference to the will-be created element size by entering the infinitesimal length directly.
Input the infinitesimal area and press the Find button to highlight faces that are smaller than the input value, as shown in the figure below.

It can also delete the sub-shapes of the solid and stretch the adjacent shapes to fit automatically. For example, deleting a small hole on the
solid creates a solid that automatically fills the deleted hole. Selecting a particular face (sub-shape) of a solid cannot maintain the solid shape
and so, it is not automatically deleted. In this case, the specified solid needs to be decomposed into faces.

ü Remove Vertex : Remove the shortest edge of ones which are connected to the selected vertex

ü Remove Edge : Remove selected edge and corresponding vertex at the same time

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 203 of 1024

ü Remove Face : Remove selected face and merge

ü Merge Faces : Merge faces with removing selected edge

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Remove > Imprinted Object

Imprinted Object

▒ Overview

Delete edges or points that exist in an interior object inside the selected geometry shape.

▒ Methodology

Point

Select points created by imprint and press the apply button to automatically erase them.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 204 of 1024

Edge

Select the surface that contains the interior edges and then select the target edges. Select one of
the following methods to automatically find and select interior edges..

[All] : Automatically select all selectable interior edges.

[Radius] : Input the radius and select all interior edges within that radius. It can be linked with the
arc shaped interior edges.

[Length] : Input the edge length and select all interior edges that are shorter than the specified
value.

[Diagonal] : Input the diagonal length of the boundary box and select interior edges that have a
shorter diagonal length than the specified value.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Tools > Options

Options

▒ Overview

Set the general environment of the program. The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary Condition,
Analysis/Results.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 205 of 1024

General

[General]

l Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.

l License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web Authorization method are supported.

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

[Graphic]

l Work View : Set the options for the screen.

- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.

- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder shaped curved surface. The available levels are
from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and smoother surface as the level gets higher.

- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work window during view rotation.

l Selection : Specify the options for the model part.

l Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.

l Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.

l Element : Specify the color for each element type.

l Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show the shadow and controls its shade. The
available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information shown as the level gets higher.

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]

l Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.

l Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]

l Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.

l Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 206 of 1024

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol 3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z
axis respectively.

[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.

[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.

[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.

[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol.

Analysis/Results

[Analysis]

l Number of processors : Specify the number of CPUs used for analysis. For a dual core CPU, input 2 processors and for a quad core CPU,
input 4 processors to increase the analysis speed.

l Element Formulation : Specify the formula applied to the element.

In terms of speed, a faster solution can be obtained in order of Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability) > Hybrid (Accuracy). In terms
of accuracy, a more accurate solution can be obtained in order of Hybrid (Accuracy) > Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability).

l Equation Solver (Structural) : Specify the method for solving a finite element simultaneous equation. If the setting is automatic, the
program automatically determines one of the following methods: Multifrontal, Dense matrix or AMG(Algebraic Multi-Grid).

l 2D Element Setting (Structure) : The [Unique Shell Normal Generation] function judges two adjacent shell elements to have two different
normal directions when the value between the normal direction vectors are larger than the input value. Because the element size is
relatively larger than the curvature, if this value is increased for a rough curved mesh, a smooth contour that considers the curvature of
the geometry shape can be calculated.
The [Consider Drilling DOF(degree of freedom)] option calculates the stiffness of the in-plane deformation by considering the rotation
about the out-plane axis (drilling degree of freedom).

[Result]

l General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default value is set as 1e-12, and results lower
than this value is considered as 0.

l Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.

l Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to represent the vectors.

l Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.

l No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.

l Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.

l Graph : Select whether to show the graph.

l Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.

l Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Tools > Terrain Geometry Maker

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 207 of 1024

Terrain Geometry Maker

▒ Overview

The Terrain Geometry Maker (TGM) function can be used to model a terrain geometry using a CAD DXF file. When using GTS NX, first use
the CAD DXF file to set the bounds of the analysis area and save it as a file (*.tms format) that can be used in the GTS NX. Import this file to
GTS NX to create the terrain geometry.

▒ Methodology

3D bedding plane using boring data & Terrain Geometry Maker.

Step 1. Tools > Terrain Geometry Maker > Terrain Geometry Maker

Use the CAD DXF file to set the bounds of the analysis area and save it as a file (*.tms format) that can be used in GTS NX. Activating this
function creates a new window called MIDAS/TGM.

<MIDAS/TGM>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 208 of 1024

Step 2 : File > Import DXF

Import the AutoCAD DXF file.

<Import AutoCAD DXF file>

[Visible layers]

The layers that are needed for the terrain geometry out of all the layers in the AutoCAD DXF files. The unused layers are selected and moved
to the invisible layer.

[Invisible layers]

The layers in the AutoCAD DXF file that are not used for the terrain geometry.

Step 3 : Set analysis boundary

Move the mouse to the area to be modeled and click the Terrain geometry information icon ( ) on the right toolbox to set the analysis
boundary.

Step 4 : Set section zone

<Terrain geometry information>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 209 of 1024

[Base Contours]

Select the minimum zone that contains the analysis boundary by dragging on the XY plane.

[Geometry Zone (Rectangle)]

Specify the rectangular analysis boundary that is within the base contour zone. Corner 1 and Corner 2 are the diagonal corners that specify the
rectangular boundary. Lx, Ly specify the X axis and Y axis lengths of the specified boundary. Click the Display area to view the specified
boundary on the plane.

[Number of Sampling Points]

Specify the number of sampling points in the selected region with respect to the X direction and Y direction.

<Example of Terrain geometry information zone>

Step 5 : Check geometry face

Check the geometry face on the View model window.

<Example of Terrain geometry information zone>

Step 6 : File > Export surface

Save the generated terrain face as a *.tms file that can be used in the GTS NX.

Step 7 : Main menu : Tools > Terrain Geometry Maker > Import TMS file

Import a generated *.tms file using the MIDAS/TGM function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 210 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Tools > Frame to Solid

Frame to Solid

▒ Overview

Convert frame data created on midas Civil or midas Gen into solid data.

▒ Methodology

Select a frame data (*.mcs) file created on midas Civil or midas Gen. Defining the Linear
interpolation (straight line) or Smoothstep (smooth interpolation), automatically calls up a solid
element. This depends on the multidimensional curved lines of the selected frame element’s end
section,

Checking mesh can create a mesh on the solid during conversion.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Tools > Check Geometry

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 211 of 1024

Check Geometry

▒ Overview

Check the detailed information of a selected shape.

▒ Methodology

Check shape

Select the geometry shape to be checked and select the option to view the information on the
screen. The geometric information is also shown on the output window.

[Free Edge (Red)]

The object outlines are indicated in red.

[Manifold Edge (Green)]

The edges between 2 meeting faces are indicated in green.

[Non-Manifold Edge (Blue)]

The edges between 3 meeting faces are indicated in blue.

[Small Edge (Orange)]

The edges shorter than the input length are indicated in orange.

[Small Face (Yellow)]

The faces smaller than the input area are indicated in yellow.

Repair Shape

Find and modify geometric errors automatically for atypical and inaccurate shape. The user can
perform the function when have failed to create mesh for selected geometry. Recommended to
be performed "Geometry Clean → Geometry Simplify → Topology Optimize" continuously.

Geometry Clean : Modify invalid shape

Geometry Simplify : Modify irregular shape

· B-Spline surface ; Plane, Cylinder, Sphere, Cone and Torus

· B-Spline curve ; Line, Circle and Ellipse

· Irregular shape : Normalized and primitive shape

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 212 of 1024

Topology Optimize : Performance improvement in creating mesh

· Simplify geometry and delete duplicated edge / surface automatically

Edges-Domain

Check the connection of lines. When importing geometry shapes from CAD, this option can be
used to check for areas that are not connected.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Tools > Check Duplicates

Check Duplicates

▒ Overview

Check the detailed information of a selected shape.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 213 of 1024

Check for repeated shapes in the same position.

[Visible Shape Only]

Repeated shapes are represented by visible shapes on the screen. The check is performed regardless
of the Show/hide status of the target.

[Check Duplicate Points]

Check for duplicated points. The function only checks for independent points. Overlapping points
are indicated in yellow. Check the [Include Sub-Points] to perform the check on sub-shape points

(ex: the corner points of a box).

[Check Duplicate Edges/Wires]

Check repeated edges or wires. The function only checks for independent edges and wires.
Overlapping edges/wires are indicated in green. Check the [Include Sub-Edges] to perform the check
on sub-shape edges (ex: the edges of a rectangle).

[Check Duplicate faces]

Check duplicated faces. The function only checks for independent faces. Overlapping faces are
indicated in orange. Check the [Include Sub-Faces] to perform the check on sub-shape edges (ex: a
face of a box). Use the [Extract Boundary Topology] to only check faces that are exactly overlapping.
An overlapping face has the same number of points on the outline, the same coordinates and the
same edge direction.

[Remove Duplicated Shape]

Remove repeated independent shapes and only leave a single shape. However, the sub-shapes are
not deleted.

Check for shared faces after creating a 3D geometry object. Creating a mesh on an unshared solid
created a free face makes obtaining accurate analysis results difficult. Such shared faces can be
checked using Check Shape > Check Duplicates. To view the object information, change the view
mode of the solid to linear view.

When the shared face of adjacent shapes are not shown, use Boolean > Solid to create a shared
face.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Tools > Measure

Measure

▒ Overview

Measure the shortest distance or angle between shapes using various methods.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 214 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Measure the distance or angle by selecting a shape’s point, line, face etc. on the screen.

The distance can be measured using [Distance between point and point], [Distance between point and Edge], [Distance between point and
face], [Distance between edge and edge], [Distance between edge and face], [Distance between face and face]. The angle can be measured
using [Angle between three points].

Checking the needed snaps with Define snap ( ) makes it easier to select points on the screen.

Home > GTS NX > Geometry > Tools > Frame to Shell

Frame to Shell

▒ Overview

Convert frame data created in MIDAS CIVIL or MIDAS GEN into shell data. During the conversion, it can generate mesh directly.

▒ Methodology

Select a frame data (*.mcs) file created in midas Civil or midas Gen. Defining the Linear
interpolation (straight line) or Smooth step (smooth interpolation), automatically calls up shell
elements. This depends on the multi-dimensional curved lines of the selected frame element’s end
section,

Checking mesh can create a mesh on the solid during conversion.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 215 of 1024

Interpolation Method

Select an interpolation scheme between two sections at both ends.

Smooth

Curved Interpolation

Linear

Linear interpolation

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material

Material

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Define the general stiffness and nonlinear material properties of the ground and structure. For ground, additional
permeability properties and drained/undrained conditions can be set.

▒ Methodology

Create

Add a ground or structure material. The following 4 material types can be selected and the model type can be set for each material type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 216 of 1024

The model type available for each material type is shown below. The ground/structure material properties and the material behavior
properties are defined for each model type. Here, the elements used for ground modeling such as plane strain or solid can be assigned to a
structure material that does not consider Ko effects or permeability properties.

Ground Structure Material behavior

Material type Model type
material material properties
Elastic O O Linear elastic
Tresca O O Elasto-plastic
von Mises (Nonlinear) O O Elasto-plastic
Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Drucker Prager O O Elasto-plastic
Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Generalized Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Hyperbolic(Duncan-
O X Elasto-plastic
Chang)
Strain Softening O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Cam Clay O X Elasto-plastic
Jardine O X Nonlinear elastic
D-min O X Nonlinear elastic
Modified Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Soft Soil O X Elasto-plastic
Soft Soil Creep O X Elasto-plastic
Isotropic(General User defined model O O Elasto-plastic
Parameter) User- Supplied Soil
O X Elasto-plastic
Material
Concrete Damaged
X O Elasto-plastic
Plasticty
Concrete Smeared Crack X O Elasto-plastic
Modified UBCSAND O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Ramberg-
O O Elasto-plastic
Osgood
Bowl Model O O Elasto-plastic
Modified Hardin-Drnevich O O Elasto-plastic
Hardening Soil(small
O X Elasto-plastic
strain stiffness)
Generalized SCLAY1S O X Elasto-plastic
GHE-S O O Elasto-plastic
Norsand O X Elasto-plastic
CWFS O O Elasto-plastic
PM4Sand O X Elasto-plastic
Transversely Isotropic O O Linear elastic
Jointed Rock Mass O O Elasto-plastic
Orthotropic
2D Orthotropic X O Linear elastic
Geogrid X O Elasto-plastic
(Equivalent)Linear
2D Equivalent 2D Equivalent O O
elastic
X O Elasto-plastic
X O Elasto-plastic
Interface / Pile Interface
X O Elasto-plastic
X O Nonlinear elastic
Sloshing Medium Sloshing Fluid/Medium X X Elastic

Isotropic

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 217 of 1024

Isotropic materials have the same properties in every direction and is used to define material behavior properties of most linear-elastic /
nonlinear elastic / elasto-plastic materials.

Orthotropic

Natural ground is generally layered and sloped, making it possible to have different strengths in each orthogonal direction. This option can
also be used to define Jointed Rocks, which have different properties depending on the direction and behave differently according to the
specific confinement conditions. In case of 2D Orthotropic, users can define different values of stiffness along each direction. It is required to
define geometrically orthotropic with significant different stiffness in horizontal and vertical direction.

2D Equivalent

2D equivalent linear analysis specific model. Use the converging strength and damping ratio from the equivalent linear method to consider
the nonlinear and n1lastic behavior of materials.

Interface / Pile

Applied when simulating relative behavior (interface behavior) between ground and structure.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

Import/Import from Excel / Export to Excel

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

The user can construct the frequently used material DB by importing or exporting the excel file containing the material properties.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual to understand the Finite element formulization and yield shape. The input parameters and behavioral
characteristics for each material model are as follows.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material Properties

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 218 of 1024

Material Properties

▒ Methodology

Default parameter (General)

The input parameters and units for defining the default stiffness and initial condition of each model are listed in the table below

Input parameter Definition Unit

Elasticity modulus(
Elasticity modulus kN/m2
)
Elasticity modulus The Elasticity modulus increment amount depending on height
kN/m3
increment (slope)
Reference height Reference height of Elasticity modulus increment m
Poisson’s ratio( ) Poisson’s ratio -
Unit weight (γ) Unit weight of entire unsaturated soil(γt) kN/m3
Initial stress (Ko) Coefficient of earth pressure (initial stress parameter) -
Temperature
Coefficient for calculating temperature loading 1/[T]
coefficient
Damping ratio Material damping ratio (only applied to dynamic analysis) -
Safety Result (Mohr- Calculate Factor of Safety for each element based on MC failure
-
Coulomb) criteria

[Elastic modulus (E)]

This parameter defines the default initial stiffness of the material. The user can specify the Elasticity modulus, or use the Shear modulus (G) or
Oedometer Elasticity modulus (Eoed) from the Oedometer test. The initial stiffness is very important because geo-materials display nonlinear
behavior from the early stages of loading. The initial stiffness can be defined from the stress-strain curves of the triaxial compression test. It is
realistic to use the E0 for materials that display linear (elastic) behavior until a large strain but for general geo-materials, E50, the slope of the

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 219 of 1024

tangent at 50% of the stress, is appropriate as an initial stiffness. When simulating unloading and reloading due to excavation during
construction step analysis, it is better to use Eur instead of E50 to realistically simulate the ground behavior.

Hence, it is important to set the stress path and stress range (size) when using the initial stiffness to simulate the ground behavior. To simulate
detailed behavior, various nonlinear material models can be used.

<Triaxial compression test result graph>

The use of K(bulk modulus) and G(shear modulus) may be debatable use to the continuity issues associated with the ground, but it can be
expressed more simply and clearly than E or v and is convenient to use. The following figure briefly explains the mechanical significance of K
and G.

<Various types of Elasticity modulus>

The Elasticity modulus values gained from on-site tests can be 1 of the many elasticity moduli discussed above and can be modified
appropriately for real situations.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 220 of 1024

Elasticity modulus
Geo-material Poisson’s ratio
(tonf/m2)
amphibolite 9.4~12.1 ´106 0.28~0.30
anhydrite 6.8 ´106 0.30
siabase 8.7~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.30
siorite 7.5~10.8 ´106 0.26~0.29
solomite 11.0~12.1 ´106 0.30
sunite 14.9~18.3 ´106 0.26~0.28
deldspathic gneiss 8.3~11.9 ´106 0.15~0.20
gabbro 8.9~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.31
granite 7.3~8.6 ´106 0.23~0.27
ice 7.1 ´106 0.36
limestone 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
marble 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
mica Schist 7.9~10.1 ´106 0.15~0.20
obsidian 6.5~8.0 ´106 0.12~0.18
oligoclasite 8.0~8.5 ´106 0.29
quartzite 8.2~9.7 ´106 0.12~0.15
rock salt 3.5 ´106 0.25
slate 7.9~11.2 ´106 0.15~0.20
aluminum 5.5~7.6 ´106 0.34~0.36
steel 20.0 ´106 0.28~0.29

<The Elasticity modulus and Poisson’s ratio for rock and other materials>

The Elasticity modulus in the table above is for small, intact rock samples tested in the lab. Hence, when considering the site conditions, a
reduced elasticity modulus needs to be used considering the discontinuous surfaces within large scale rocks. The figure below is a graph of
actual data showing the relationship between the RQD (Rock Quality Designation) and the Elasticity modulus reduction ratio. An RQD is the
percentage of the sum of the lengths of cracks that are over 10cm and exist on the 100cm situ core against the total length. An RQD of 100%
does not mean the core is an intact rock. However, a higher RQD means a higher quality rock and the RQD decreases with more weathering.

<RQD- Modulus reduction ratio (EL/EM) relationship>

As shown on the figure, an RQD of 70% already needs to decrease the lab Elastic modulus by 20%.

[Increment of Elastic modulus]

In general, the strength properties of the soil change with depth and confining pressure, even within a ground layer composed of the same
material. To take this characteristic into account, increase or decrease in the Elastic modulus can be simulated with reference to a reference
height (standard height). If the elastic increase according to height is '0(zero)', the Elastic modulus has a constant value and if it is not '0(zero)',
the Elastic modulus is calculated with reference to a standard height using the following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 221 of 1024

Here, : Input elastic modulus value

: Incremental slope of elastic modulus

: Depth of measurement

<Schematic diagram of Elastic modulus increment>

The in the equation represent the integral point positions of an element where the finite element method calculation occurs. If the integral
point position is higher than , the elastic modulus value can be less than 0 in some places. To avoid this, use the value instead of
further decreasing the value.

[Poisson’s ratio( )]

Poisson’s ratio is a proportional constant from the stress-strain relationship and displays the material volume change associated with loading.
As approaches 0.5, the material becomes an incompressible solid and closer to 0 means the material is elastic, showing large volume
changes even at small loads. The initial stress ratio due to self weight K0 = σh/ σv can be related to the ratio in the uniaxial compression state
by K0 = . If K0 is not used to define the initial in-situ stress, the horizontal stress is calculated from the vertical stress using the
entered . For geo-materials, the general Poisson range is within 0.3~0.4 and entering a value larger than 0.49 can cause numerical errors.
Hence, if K0 is larger than 1, for example over-consolidated ground, the Poisson’s ratio cannot be calculated and the value must be entered
directly.

Shear modulus(G)

The Shear modulus is automatically calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation derived from Hooke's
law. If the value is directly entered, the Elastic modulus changes.

[Oedometer Elastic modulus (Eoed)]

The Oedometer modulus can be calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation.

[Initial stress (K0)]

K0 is the Coefficient of earth pressure, which is defined as the ratio of the initial vertical/horizontal stress (K0 = σh/ σv). The anisotropic
property can be set with reference to the Global Coordinate System.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 222 of 1024

Firstly, select yes/no on whether the Global Coordinate System direction and anisotropic property match and set the lateral pressure index in
each axis or any direction depending on the selected options.

The coefficient of lateral pressure needs to be defined in each axis direction when it is parallel to the Global Axes. In this case, the values of K0
should be defined by "1" (for 2D/3D analysis).

The coefficient of lateral pressure needs to be defined by entering the angle with respect to the reference axis when it is not parallel to the
Global Axes. The reference axis exists to set the lateral pressure index direction. For a 2D work environment, the ’X-Y’ plane is fixed and only
the ‘X’ axis can be selected, with all initial shear stress at ‘0(zero)’. For 3D, each axis apart from the gravitational direction can be selected. For
example, if the gravitational direction is the ‘Z’ axis and the reference axis is set as the ‘X’ axis, the angle can be entered on the ‘X-Z’ plane will
be the maximum lateral pressure angle and all initial shear stress in the XY and YZ direction will be '0(zero)'.

The in-situ stress state, where the soil it not disturbed by excavation or fill, can be expressed using the Coefficient of earth pressure and self
weight. In other words, realistic results can be obtained from applying K0 after modeling the in-situ ground for the 1st step of construction
during analysis. This is true for flat foundations but for inclined foundations, it is recommended that another construction process be added to
converge the stress found using K0 for equilibrium.

[Thermal Parameter]

Thermal Coefficient - describes how the size of an object changes with a change in temperature. Specifically, it measures the fractional
change in size per degree change in temperature at a constant pressure.

Molecular vapor diffusion coefficient - the gas diffusion coefficient of a porous medium, which indicates the change in gas density over time.
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

Thermal diffusion enhancement (factor) - controls the degree of gas flow according to the temperature gradient (unit less).
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

[Safety Result (Mohr-Coulomb)]

§Cohesion, Friction Angle and Allowable tensile strength (optional) can be defined as the failure criteria.

§Stress status of material for each construction stage can be represented by Factor of Safety based on Mohr-Coulomb failure criteria.

§The ratio of generated stress to stress at failure for each element will be calculated automatically.

§Users can figure out stable, potential failure and plastic failure area directly.

§Check factor of safety for each element - (2D : Plain Strain Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR , 3D : Solid Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR)

§In case that Safety Factor is less than 1(or 1.2), it can be identical with plastic failure region.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 223 of 1024

Porous: Seepage, Drained/Undrained Parameter

The input parameters for the permeability characteristics and drained/undrained conditions of the foundation are as follows.

Input parameter Definition Unit

Unit weight(saturated) Saturated state unit weight kN/m3
Initial void ratio(eo) Initial void ratio -
Unsaturated characteristic function setting (negative pore water
Unsaturated characteristic -
pressure-water content-permeability ratio)
Drainage parameter Drained/Undrained condition -
Permeability coefficient GCS direction - Saturated permeability constant m/sec
Void ratio dependent permeability
Permeability ratio dependent on void ratio -
ratio (ck)
Specific storage(Ss) Volume ratio of water inflow/outflow 1/m

<Permeability parameter>

[Initial void ratio (e0)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 224 of 1024

The initial void ratio of the foundation used in consolidation analysis and stress-seepage coupled analysis. It is the volume ratio between the
voids and soil particles within the soil and the value is less than 1 for most soils. The value can be larger than 1 for clays or organic soils, but
the value depends greatly on the sampling method or compaction. Generally, coarse grain sand has a value of 0.6~0.8 and high density sand
with an even size distribution has a value of 0.3. The void ratio can be even 2~3 for fine grained soils.

[Unsaturated Property]

Set to consider the unsaturated property of the foundation. It is a required property for unsteady infiltration analysis and is used to consider
the partial degree of saturation of the foundation for nonlinear (construction step)/consolidation analysis etc. Because real foundations are
unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil for more realistic
results. If the unsaturated properties are not considered, it is assumed that the ground is saturated and hence, the infiltration analysis with
time cannot be examined.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship). Refer to
"Function>Unsaturated characteristic function" for more information.

[Drainage parameters]

The pore water pressure in stress analysis can be divided into normal state pore water pressure and abnormal state pore water pressure - the
excess pore water pressure generated between soil particles due to external loading under undrained conditions. An excess pore water
pressure of nearly 0 is called the drainage condition and is generally used for drainage analysis of sand, which has a large permeability.
However when simulating clay, which has a very small permeability and water cannot be drained out during sudden loading, undrained
analysis is appropriate. The initial state, where the excess pore water pressure has not yet dissipated, is seen as the most unstable state and
the pore water pressure is determined by the volume change of the foundation due to compressibility and permeability coefficient.

Undrained Poisson’s ratio and Skempton(B) coefficient are parameters used to calculate the bulk modulus of elasticity for water. The
undrained Poisson’s ratio has a standard value of 0.495 with a compressibility of nearly ‘0(zero)’ and the Skempton coefficient expresses the
saturation, with 1 meaning full saturation.

The materials for the unsaturated analysis are as follows.

Please refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual for more detailed information.

Drained/Undrained Materials Useable Material models

Drained All geo-materials
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Duncan-Chang,
Undrained (Effective stiffness /Effective strength)
Hoek-Brown, Strain Softening, Modified Cam-clay, Jardine, D-min, Modified Mohr-
Coulomb, User-supplied, Transversely Isotropic
Undrained (Effective stiffness / Undrained
Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)
Undrained (Undrained stiffness / Undrained
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)

[Permeability coefficients (kx,ky,kz)]

The permeability coefficient represents the permeability characteristics (velocity) of the foundation and is used in infiltration analysis and
consolidation analysis. The permeability coefficient for each direction can be defined on the GCS. The input value is the saturated permeability
coefficient and becomes the standard for computing the permeability ratio (Kunsat / Ksat) due to negative pore water pressure when defining
an unsaturated property function.

[Void ratio dependency permeability (ck)]

The permeability coefficient is a measurement of how much the groundwater within a foundation moves in a unit time and is dependent on
the water content and the void ratio change . The larger water content, the larger the flow channel and hence, the value is largest when the
foundation is saturated. The water content depends on the pore water pressure and hence, the permeability coefficient is also dependent on

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 225 of 1024

the pore water pressure. The change in void ratio is considered in consolidation analysis as well as stress-seepage coupled analysis and is
calculated from the initial void ratio.

To express the change in pore water pressure, GTS NX uses the permeability ratio function depended on saturated pore water
pressure coefficient and pore water pressure change and the void ratio dependent permeability ratio dependent on void ratio change .
The unsaturated permeability coefficient depending on void ratio change is given by the following equation.

[Specific storativity(Ss)]

The Specific storage is the water volume inflow or outflows from the unit volume of the aquifer due to water level rise or fall in a confined
aquifer. A coefficient can be directly entered or automatically calculated for compressible fluids.

The change in volumetric water content for pore water pressure in infiltration and consolidation analysis can be expressed by the porosity and
degree of saturation.

The first clause is the slope of the volumetric water content under saturated conditions that can be expressed using the specific storage.

When the material drainage property is set to undrained, the specific storage is automatically calculated using the undrained Poisson's ratio
(vu) and the Effective elastic modulus (E') and Poisson's ratio (v'), entered in the general parameters.

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature unit. (required for transient heat
transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load vector for heat transfer analysis is
the total exothermic load applied to the object.

Unfrozen water content: indicates floating water content in soil / rock. It is given as a temperature-dependent function as a unique
characteristics of the ground.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 226 of 1024

Time Dependent

This is to define Creep Formulation to simulate time-dependent behavior of concrete structures. Following constitutive models are available
for concrete structures, Elastic, Tresca, von Mises, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker Prager, and Hoek Brown.

Two types of creep formulation are available to define Time-dependent behavior of material, Age Dependent and Age Independent. Refer to
analysis reference Ch.4-Section5 in detail.

[Age Dependent]

The stiffness of concrete changes with time, and the creep and shrinkage may cause unexpected deformation. The creep strain of concrete
depends on the time of stress occurrence even under the same applied load. GTSNX supports aging-Kelvin model and aging Viscous model
excluding the spring from Kelvin model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 227 of 1024

[Age Independent]

GTSNX can take into account the primary and secondary creep. The user can use two types of empirical law to define the creep behavior.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Elastic

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Elastic

A linear elastic model where the stress is directly proportional to strain. The proportionality constants are the Elasticity modulus ( ) and
Poisson’s ratio ( ).

<Linear elastic-stress strain behavior>

Since the yield value is not defined, the calculated stress and strain of the linear elastic model can be highly unrealistic. Hence, it is
recommended that the Mohr-Coulomb or other nonlinear material models be used for general analysis. However, this model is appropriate in
modeling concrete or structural steel structures, which have a much higher strength than the ground.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 228 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Tresca

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Tresca

The Tresca criterion was originally developed to be used on yield conditions of metallic materials. In geotechnics, it is often used to simulate
the ground material behavior during undrained conditions. This model has some flaws when applied to soil materials, such as no
consideration of the effects of hydrostatic pressure acting on the yield surface. Firstly, the assumption that shear stress is unrelated to
hydrostatic pressure (or confining pressure) is wrong for general soil behavior. Secondly, the yield stress is the same for compression and
tension in this criterion, but soils generally have a much larger compressive strength than tensile strength, sometimes even negligible tensile
strength.

However, performing the total stress analysis for saturated soils under undrained conditions (called analysis) using the Tresca yield
criterion still gives appropriate results. The Tresca yield criterion can be used because according to the results, the shear strength of the
saturated soil is unrelated to the stress comp1nt of the hydrostatic pressure during undrained loading. In this case, because the maximum
shear stress limit represents the undrained shear strength, the decision must be made from the results of the undrained triaxial compression
test.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > von Mises_Nonlinear

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 229 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ von Mises (Nonlinear)

The von Mises model is often used to define the behavior of ductile materials based on the principle that yielding occurs when the shear
stress reaches the threshold value. This model can be applied to truss, embedded truss and pipe elements as well as geotechnical elements. It
can also be applied when simulating anchors, nails or steel pipe piles made from steel.

The von Mises model has the same limitation as the Tresca model when applied to soil materials; it does not consider of the effects of
hydrostatic pressure and the yield stress is the same for compression and tension. Like the Tresca criterion, the undrained strength of
saturated soil can be appropriately presented using the von Mises yield criterion. This model is useful because it does not have the
mathematical difficulty or analysis complexity caused by the hexagonal corners of the curved surface on the Tresca criterion.

As a material yield, hardening defines the change of yield surface with plastic straining, which is classified in to the three types : Isotropic,
Kinematic and Combined.

Appropriate for all types of materials, which exhibit Plastic Incompressibility.

Perfect Plastic: Specify Initial Uniaxial (tensile) Yield Stress

Hardening Curve : Relation between plastic strain and stress(true stress) can be resulted from uniaxial compression / tensile test or shear test.

Stress Strain curve (optional) : Relation between strain and stress(true stress)

Hardening Rule: Isotropic, Kinematic and Combined (Isotropic + Kinematic)

- Total increment of Plastic can be expressed by Isotropic and Kinematic Hardening as follows:

- Combined hardening factor (λc, 0~1) represents the extent of hardening. ‘1’ for Isotropic, ‘0’ for Kinematic, and between ‘0~1’ for Combined
hardening.

[ Yield Surface for each hardening rule ]

- Combined hardening factor (λc, 0~1) represents the extent of hardening. ‘1’ for Isotropic, ‘0’ for Kinematic, and between ‘0~1’ for Combined
hardening.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 230 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Mohr-Coulmb

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Mohr-Coulomb

The Mohr-Coulomb model is defined by an elasto-plastic behavior as shown in the figure below. This behavioral assumption shows reliable
results for general nonlinear analysis of the ground and is widely used in simulating most terrain.

<Material behavior of Mohr-Coulomb model>

The Mohr-Coulomb yield criterion has 2 flaws when using geo-materials. First, the intermediate principal stress does not affect yield, which is a
contradictory assumption to real soil test results. Second, the Meridian and Failure envelope of the Mohr-Circle is linear; so the Strength
parameter (angle of friction) does not change with the Confining pressure (or Hydrostatic pressure). This criterion is accurate within a limited
range of confining pressure but as the range difference increases, the accuracy decreases. However, this criterion is often used because it is
easy to use and displays considerably accurate results within the general confining pressure range.

The major nonlinear parameters used to define the Coulomb yield criterion are as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 231 of 1024

[Cohesion (C) , Friction angle (Φ)]

Soils have different cohesion and friction angle depending on their type and these values are applied to the shear strength equation. Soils,
unlike other construction materials, have very little resistance to tension and in most cases shear failure occurs. When an external force or self
weight is applied, shear stress occurs in the ground. The strain increases with stress increase and as this progresses, it works along a plane
causing what is known as shear failure. The shear stress induces shear resistance and the shear resistance limit is called shear strength. The
shear resistance of soil is made up of 2 comp1nts: cohesion and friction angle.

According to Coulomb, the shear strength of soil can be expressed in the following linear equation.

τ= c + σtanφ(c: Cohesion, σ: Normal stress, φ: Interior friction angle)

Cohesion is the shear strength when the interior friction angle is '0(zero)' according to the yield criterion. It can be defined as an undrained
shear strength of cohesive soils. Sandy soils with no cohesion can be defined as c=0, but to avoid errors in analysis, it is recommended that a
value of at least 0.2 (kN/m2) be entered.

Defining the cohesion automatically sets the tensile strength by that amount. However, because tensile resistance is generally ignored for
geo-materials, the Tension-Cutoff is set to prevent unrealistic resistance behavior to tension.

<Mohr-Coulomb Failure envelope (Drained/Undrained)>

[Increment of Cohesion Reference Height]

In general, the strength properties of the soil change with the depth and confining pressure; even within a ground layer composed of the
same material. For example, defining a soil layer several meters deep as a ‘strength parameter’ may be a limitation in the detailed simulation
of a ground behavior. The ground layer can be further subdivided and modeled, but this characteristic can be replaced by changing cohesion
according to height. If the cohesion increases according to the height being '0(zero)', the cohesion has a constant value and if it is not '0
(zero)', the cohesion is calculated with reference to a standard height (reference height based on the Global Coordinates) using the
following equation.

: Input cohesion value

: Incremental amount depending on cohesion depth

: Depth of measurement

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 232 of 1024

<Conceptual diagram of cohesion increment>

The in the equation represent the integral point positions of an element where the finite element method calculation occurs. If the integral
point position is higher than , the cohesion can be less than 0 in some places. To avoid this, use the value instead of further decreasing
the cohesion value.

Dilatancy Angle

The dilatancy angle can be viewed as the volume increase rate according to shear strain. It is a type of strength parameter for roughness and
is generally defined as dilatancy angle = interior friction angle-30˚. Hence, if the interior friction angle is less than 30˚, the dilatancy angle is
close to '0(zero)'. In real tests, a negative dilatancy angle can be defined for vey loose sandy soil but numerically, the dilatancy angle has a
value between 0 and the interior friction angle.

For undrained analysis, the dilatancy angle must be set as '0(zero)' when the interior friction angle is '0(zero)'. The important thing is that the
dilatancy angle is a parameter considered in analysis after changes have been made to the constitutive equation. If the effects of the dilatancy
angle are not considered, the same value must be entered for the dilatancy angle and interior friction angle. In other words, not checking the
‘Consider dilatancy angle’ option automatically performs the analysis with the dilatancy angle equal to the interior friction angle.

Tensile Strength (Tension-CutOff)

Input the allowable tensile strength of the geo-material. In many cases, tension cracks can be observed on the natural ground surface rather
than shear failure. Input the allowable tensile strength to assign tensile resistance to the geo-material. The tensile resistance of geo-materials
are generally ignored and so the default setting is '0(zero)'. Not checking the tensile strength option uses a tensile stress, automatically
calculated from cohesion and the interior friction angle, into the analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Drucker Prager

General Material(Behavioral properties)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 233 of 1024

▒ Drucker Prager

The Drucker-Prager model was developed by Drucker and Prager (1952) to solve the numerical problems that occur on the corners of the yield
shape of the Mohr-Coulomb model. The internal algorithm is the same as the Mohr-Coulomb model, and the material constant can be related
to the existing cohesion ( ) and friction angle ( ) of the Mohr-Coulomb model.

<Drucker-Prager>

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Hoek Brown

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Hoek Brown

Geo-materials can be largely divided into rocks and soils. Rocks are more rigid than soils and their strength characteristics depend on the
degree of weathering. The behavioral characteristics of rocks are divided by the fact that the change in stiffness due to stress is negligible. In
particular, the shear stress and tensile stress of rocks have a larger effect on the overall behavioral characteristic than soils. Hoek and Brown
(1980) suggested the concept of an equivalent continuum to define the stress decrease phenomenon in jointed rock mass failure. A yield
function was proposed to distinguish between intact rock and broken rock and when the rock failure was defined by this function, certain
parameter values that define the function could be decreased to simulate the stress decrease phenomenon. This method defines the
unconfined compressive strength that could not be considered in the existing Mohr-Coulomb method and allows accurate and simple
representation of rock behavior, making it a widely used analysis method even today. The shear strength of rocks can be expressed using the
Mohr-Coulomb yield criterion and Hoek-Brown strength parameters within a certain stress range can be used to predict the cohesion and
friction angle of the Mohr-Coulomb model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 234 of 1024

<Hoek-Brown yield criterion>

The main nonlinear parameters of the Hoek-Brown criterion are as follows.

[Initial m,s value]

The initial m,s values are 1 of the empirical Hoek-Brown material constants for Intact rocks that classify rocks according to their grade (type).
General m values are shown in the table below.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 235 of 1024

<Hoek-Brown material constant m >

i

The s constant can be calculated from the GSI (Geological Strength Index) when the rock is intact and has a value of '1'. The GSI according to
rock grade is shown in the table below and the value can be generally predicted by calculating the rock classification results (RMR, RQD).

The s calculated from the GSI is as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 236 of 1024

<GSI (Hoek(1999))>

The m,s relationship from the GSI assumed by a=0.5 from the Hoek-Brown model is as follows.

<Relationship between GSI and m,s>

[Uniaxial Compressive Strength]

Input the Uniaxial compressive strength test results for Intact Rock. The general numerical value for rock grade is as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 237 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Generalized Hoek Brown

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Generalized Hoek Brown

Representative model to simulate general rock behavior (stiffer and stronger than other types of soil). Hoek-Brown model is isotropic linear
elastic behavior and Generalized Hoek-Brown is to link the empirical criterion to geological observations by means of one of the available rock
mass classification schemes. All geological index was subsequently extended for weak rock masses. This model is also applicable for Strength
Reduction Method (slope stability analysis).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 238 of 1024

<Failure surface in principle stress plane>

The main nonlinear parameters of the Generalized Hoek-Brown criterion are as follows.

Refer to following Geological Index (Hoek, 1999)

[Uniaxial Compressive Strength]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 239 of 1024

[Intact Rock Parameter]

[Geological Strength Index (GSI)]

[Guideline for estimating Disturbance Factor (D), 0~1]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 240 of 1024

[Engineering example for material verification (Slope Stability Analysis)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 241 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Hyperbolic(Duncan-Chang)

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Hyperbolic(Duncan-Chang)

Ground stress-strain behavior becomes nonlinear as it approaches the yield criterion; nonlinear elastic models simulate such ground behavior
by modifying the foundation modulus. The function proposed by Duncan and Chang (1970) is used to calculate the foundation modulus. The
stress-strain curve of the function is a hyperbola and the foundation modulus is a function of confining stress and shear stress. This nonlinear
elastic material model is very useful because it only needs material properties that can be easily obtained from the triaxial compression test or
literature. The Duncan and Change nonlinear stress-strain curve represents a hyperbola between the axial strain space generated by shear
stress ( ) and it can be defined according to stress state and stress path by 3 foundation moduli (Initial modulus , Tangent modulus
, Unloading-reloading modulus ).

The main nonlinear parameters of the hyperbolic model are as follows.

Hyperbolic (Duncan-Chang E-v) Hyperbolic (Duncan-

Chang E-B)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 242 of 1024

Frictional angle increment can describe that frictional angle will be decreased during the increasing of confining pressure from the coarse
grained soil. Frictional angle increment is defined by following equation.

The Fictional angle increment value must be over than 0.

Experiment variable values (G, F and D) are added for calculating the Poisson Ratio Parameters from Hyperbolic (Duncan-Chang E-v). G is
distance to axis from initial poisson’s ratio, F is rate of change for compression from initial poisson’s ratio and D is rate of change for stress
from initial poission’s ratio.

Limitation of those values and Poisson’s Ratio Parameters defined by following equation.

The results of the triaxial compression test can be plotted on a vertical axis of or and a horizontal axis of . Set each axis to a
log scale and the vertical axis value at =1 is the Initial Loading Modulus (K). The Initial Stiffness Exp1nt(n) can be found from the slope
when the vertical axis is and the Bulk Modulus Exp1nt(m) can be found from the slope when the vertical axis is . Here, the Bulk
modulus Bm is defined by the following equation and can be predicted using the relationship with Poisson’s ratio. Here, the Poisson’s ratio is
limited to values within 0 to 0.5.

: Amount of principal stress change,

: Amount of volume strain change

<Set material property>

The Duncan and Change nonlinear stress-strain curve can be defined according to stress state and stress path by 3 foundation moduli (Initial

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 243 of 1024

modulus , Tangent modulus , Unloading-reloading modulus ).

<Nonlinear stress-strain behavior>

Here, the Failure Ratio (Rf) can be found by the relationship between the Initial modulus and Tangent modulus . The ratio of failure is
the ratio between the asymptote of the hyperbola and the maximum shear strength and has a value between 0.75~1. A convergence problem
can occur when the Tangent modulus is too small and so the minimum Tangent modulus value is set as the atmospheric pressure (Pa).
Bulk modulus number (Kb) can be calculated from the Bulk modulus (Bm) and Bulk modulus index (m).

Here,

: Bulk modulus,

: Bulk modulus number,

: Bulk modulus index

Unloading-reloading modulus number can be calculated from the unloading-reloading ratio .

If the confining stress is '0(zero)' or negative (tensile state) when calculating the initial moduli, the moduli can be '0(zero)' or a negative value.
Hence, a lower bound needs to be set for the confining stress and the set Minimum confining pressure is 0.01Pa.

The suggested parameter values depending on the density of sandy soils are as follows. (Duncan, J. M. and Chan, C. Y. (1970))

Relative density
100% (dense) 36.5 0.91 2000 2120 0.54
38% (loose) 30.4 0.90 295 1090 0.65
for dense and loose sand

, : Dry state friction angle and cohesion

<Table. Summary of stress-strain parameters for uniform fine silica sand>

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Strain Softening

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 244 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Strain Softening

The softening model consists of a linear region until it reaches the maximum shear strength. The softening region then enters a nonlinear
region. Specify the Maximum residual strength, Residual strength and Softening rate to define the constitutional relationship below.

<Strain softening constitution relationship>

The main nonlinear parameters of the Softening model are as follows.

The maximum cohesion using the undrained shear strength and define residual cohesion, defined by the amount of stress reduction and
softening rate to simulate the strength decrease with strain and bulk increase. In comparison with the Tresca model, the Tresca model behaves
in a simple or perfectly plastic state for undrained conditions but this model decreases from the maximum strength and can simulate the
effects of the residual strength.

<Softening behavior>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 245 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Modified Cam Clay

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Modified Cam Clay

A model used to simulate clay materials. The general relationship between volume change and pressure in clay ground can be expressed
using the concept of normal consolidation line and over-consolidation line. The over-consolidation line is also called the dwelling line and the
stress increase (load) follows along over-consolidation line to the normal consolidation line. Passing the intersection with additional stress
increase makes the stress state move down along the normal consolidation line. This has similar characteristics to the stress-strain curve of an
elasto-hardening plastic model. Hence, the initial linear elastic region of the over-consolidation line can be corresponded to the hardening
plastic region of the normal consolidation line.

<Volume-Pressure vs Stress-Strain relationship>

To use the Modified Cam Clay model, the initial void ratio, initial stress and initial Pre-consolidation pressure need to be defined. The Pre-
consolidation pressure can be directly entered, or calculated from the initial stress and Over Consolidation Ratio (OCR). When both the OCR
and Pre-consolidation pressure are entered, the Pre-consolidation pressure is preferentially used.

The main nonlinear parameters of the Modified Cam Clay model are as follows.

Symbol Definition

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 246 of 1024

Over-consolidation line slope

Normal consolidation line slope
Critical state line slope

The material properties of the ground are generally obtained from the 1-dimensional consolidation test and the Compression index and
Swelling index can be obtained from the void ratio ( )- graph. The Compression index and Swelling index are related to the
Normal consolidation line slope and Over-consolidation line slope by the following equations.

The Critical state line slope can be assumed from the effective shear resistance angle (shear resistance angle from drained test).

: Interior friction angle from triaxial compression test

The OCR value can be used to calculate the stress distribution of the in-situ state from the current loaded stress distribution. The stress for
each depth is calculated from the entered OCR and because the ground surface stress can be underestimated than the actual initial stress, the
Pc (Pre-consolidation pressure) can be directly defined. When both the OCR and Pre-consolidation pressure are entered, the Pre-consolidation
pressure is preferentially used in the analysis.

When the Pc is entered, the internal solver studies whether the Pc and in-situ stress state satisfy the yield function. If it does not, the Pc is
recalculated.

Allowable Tensile Stress

MCC material models fundamentally do not allow tensile stress in the failure criteria (stress-strain relationship). However, various conditions
can generate tensile stress, such as the heaving of neighboring ground due to embankment load during consolidation or uplift due to
excavation. To overcome the material model limits and increase the applicability, analysis on tensile stress within the 'allowable tensile stress'
range can be conducted.

The size of the allowable tensile stress is not specified, and requires repeated analysis to input a larger value than the tensile stress created
from the overburden load (embankment) or failure behavior. Hence, the allowable tensile stress value needs to be set, to prevent divergence
and halting of analysis results due to tensile failure during analysis.

Hence, the allowable tensile stress value needs to be set, to prevent divergence and halting of analysis results due to tensile failure during
analysis.

However, when directly entering the pc (pre-consolidation load), the allowable tensile stress cannot surpass the pc value. When defining using
the OCR, the pc value is automatically calculated internally by considering the size of the input allowable tensile stress.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Jardine

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 247 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Jardine

The Jardine model is appropriate for geo-materials that display nonlinear behavior even with little strain. Jardine (1984) proposed this
nonlinear elastic model to simulate clay like materials that display nonlinear behavior when the confining stress range is small and this model
displays perfectly plastic behavior when the material stress is larger than the input shear stress. The main nonlinear parameters of this model
are as follows.

The Jardine model is often applied to clay ground. Clays display nonlinear elastic behavior at small strains and the Jardine model was
developed to consider this. The nonlinear equation can be derived from the Secant elasticity modulus and axial strain measured from the
undrained triaxial compression test as shown below. The undrained triaxial compression test applies a load in the axial direction of a cylindrical
sample and the stress along the side is maintained.

Here, , the maximum and average stiffness that satisfies the best fit line value, , , the strain at the maximum, medium and
minimum Elasticity modulus and , the maximum and minimum strain.

The shear strength of clay is needed because the Tresca model is used at the plastic region.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > D-min

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 248 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ D-min

The D-min model is a secti1d linear model proposed by Japan Central Research Institute of Electric Power Industry (CRIEPI), Hayashi, Hibino
and applied to general rocks (hard rock, soft rock etc.). In this model, the stiffness is different for each construction step, but the stiffness
within 1 construction step is a constant value. In other words, the materials in the model have a fixed material property value for each load
step and hence, do not require repeated analysis.

It is assumed that as the failure envelope approaches the Mohr circle, the interior bonding state of the rock eases and the Elasticity modulus
decreases while the Poisson’s ratio increases. Hence, the relative distance between the Mohr circle and failure envelope in each section
determines the Elasticity modulus and Poisson’s ratio.

<Failure envelope and Mohr circle of D-min model>

The main nonlinear parameters are as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 249 of 1024

If the user enters the material properties at the initial state and limit state, the value proceeds to the limit state material property depending
on the plasticity as shown below.

Here, is the initial Elasticity modulus, is the limit Elasticity modulus, is the nonlinear property factor, is the initial Poisson’s ratio,
is the limit Poisson’s ratio, is the nonlinear material modulus.

The Mohr’s envelop parameter ( ) and relax factor ( ) increases with the increase in initial Elasticity modulus ( ).The relationship between
the Mohr’s envelop parameter ( ) and relax factor ( ) with the initial Elasticity modulus ( ) is shown below. The data was based on the
triaxial compression test and put together

Initial Elasticity modulus ( , ) Relax Factor ( ) Mohr’s envelop parameter( )

2.0 1.0
4.0 2.0
6.0 3.0
10.0 4.0

<Table. Parameters based on initial Elasticity modulus (JARTIC, 1986)>

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Modified Mohr-Coulomb

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Modified Mohr-Coulomb

This model is an improvement on the Mohr-Coulomb model, generated by combining nonlinear elastic models and elasto-plastic models to
make a suitable model for the behavioral characteristics of silt or sand based ground. The Modified Mohr-Coulomb model can simulate the
Double stiffening behavior, which is not affected by the shear failure or compressive yield.

The axial strain and decrease in material stiffness caused by the initial deviatory stress is similar to the Hyperbolic (nonlinear elastic) model, but

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 250 of 1024

it is closer to the plastic theory than elastic theory and has differences in dilatancy angle consideration and yield cap application.

The main nonlinear parameters are as follows.

[Elasticity modulus : Three types of reference stiffness modulus]

This model is a more detailed material model than the Mohr-Coulomb model and the Elasticity modulus can be set at different values for
loading and unloading. In most cases, the Elasticity modulus for unloading is set larger to prevent uplift (bulging phenomenon) on the cutting
surface due to stress release during excavation modeling. For a rough approximation, in case of hard soil (sand, OC clay), unloading stiffness is
set equal to 3 times of secant stiffness in standard drained triaxial test. In case of soft soil, based on the relationship between compression and
swelling index, unloading stiffness is approximately set equal to 10 times of secant stiffness.

[Failure Ratio]

The ultimate deviatoric stress is derived from the Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion. As soon as the deviatoric stress reaches to the ultimate
value, the failure criterion is satisfied and perfectly plastic yielding occurs. The ratio between the ultimate and the quantity in deviatoric stress
is given by the failure ratio which must be smaller than1.

[Reference Pressure]

The reference stress used in the triaxial test of specific strengths on the nonlinear elastic curve. This can represent in-situ horizontal stress at
mid-level of soil layer depending on OCR(Over Consolidation Ratio).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 251 of 1024

[Power Law nonlinear elastic model coefficient]

Hardening soil model is the stress dependency of soil stiffness. The reference stiffness modulus which is used in this model has the relationship
with the confining stress dependent stiffness. In this relation, the amount of stress dependency is given by the power m. In case of soft clays,
the power is recommended to be taken equal to 1. The value of m around 0.5 for hard soil like sand and OC clays can be used to simulate a
logarithmic compression behavior. In general, m is in the range of 0.5 to 1.

[Porosity]

The void ratio is the volume ratio between voids and soil particles. Here, the porosity is the volume ratio between voids and the total soil
including water. Hence, unlike the void ratio, the porosity cannot have a value larger than 1 and has a value of 0.6 in general. When soil
experience shearing, dilating materials reach to the state of critical density. In order to include this soil behavior by means of dilatancy cut-off,
the maximum porosity must be entered as advanced parameters. When the soil is subject to shear hardening, solver recalculates dilatancy
angle.

[KNC]

KNC is the percentage of K (Coefficient of earth pressure) in a normally consolidated ground. In other words, it is the effective horizontal stress
ratio during maximum vertical stress. This can be expressed as 1-sin (Interior friction angle) and because general clays have an interior
friction angle of nearly zero, the value is close to 1. However, it cannot be smaller than '0(zero)'

[Friction angle at shear / Ultimate dilatancy angle / Cohesion]

Same as the friction angle, dilatancy angle, cohesion parameters of the Mohr coulomb material model.

Shear hardening can be defined by equivalent plastic strain related to the mobilized shear resistance automatically. Shear yield surface can
expand up to the Mohr-Coulomb failure surface.

Increment of Cohesion with depth can be defined with additional options as in Mohr-Coulomb model. The reference height must be inputted
based on the Global coordinates.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 252 of 1024

[Cap : Compression Hardening]

Compressive yield can happen when excessive compression forces occur on the ground. Normally, the compressive forces that cause yield are
very large and the Mohr-Coulomb model has no problems in simulating real soils with it omitted. However, in order to simulate the
compressive behavior more accurately, the model considers circles or ellipses when considering compressive failure, hence the name 'Cap'.

[OCR / Pc (Pre- overburden pressure]

Yield surface of hardening soil model in p-q plane has the length of preconsolidation stress and its magnitude is determined by Cap shape
factor and cap hardening parameter. The smaller value of cap shape factor(α) lead to steep caps underneath the Mohr-coulomb failure line.
For this, the preconsolidation stress can be calculated from either the OCR(Over consolidation ratio) or the Pc(Pre-overburden pressure).

The user can input the pressure at which compressive failure occurs.

[Cap shape factor / Cap Hardening Parameter]

Use this variable to change the shape of the Cap, a yield function shape. Refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual for a more detailed algorithm.
These are considered automatically based on the relation between KNC and Eoedref rather than directly inputting parameters.

[Tensile Strength]

This model fundamentally do not allow tensile stress in the failure criteria (stress-strain relationship). However, various conditions can generate
tensile stress, such as the heaving of neighboring ground due to embankment load during consolidation or uplift due to excavation. To
overcome the material model limits and increase the applicability, analysis on tensile stress within the 'allowable tensile stress' range can be
conducted.
The size of the allowable tensile stress is not specified, and requires repeated analysis to input a larger value than the tensile stress created
from the overburden load (embankment) or failure behavior. However, when directly entering the pc (pre-consolidation load), the allowable
tensile stress cannot surpass the pc value. When defining using the OCR, the pc value is automatically calculated internally by considering the
size of the input allowable tensile stress.

Following is the summary of parameters for the Modified Mohr-Coulomb model.

Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Soil stiffness and failure
Ei x (2 – Rf) / 2
E50ref Secant stiffness in standard drained triaxial test
(Ei = Initial stiffness)
Eoedref Tangent stiffness for primary oedometer loading E50ref
Eurref Unload / reloading stiffness 3 x E50ref
0.5 ≤ m ≤ 1 (0.5 for hard soil,
m Power for stress-level dependency of stiffness
1 for soft soil)
C (C ) Failure parameter as in MC
inc Effective cohesion (Increment of cohesion)
model
Failure parameter as in MC
φ Effective friction angle
model
ψ Ultimate dilatancy angle 0≤ψ≤φ
Advanced parameters (Recommend to use Reference value)
Rf Failure Ratio (qf / qa) 0.9 (< 1)
Pref Reference pressure 100

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 253 of 1024

KNC Ko for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)

Tensile
Cut off value for tensile hydrostatic pressure -
strength
Dilatancy cut-off
Porosity Initial void ratio -
Porosity(Max) Maximum void ratio Porosity < Porosity(Max)
Cap yield surface
When entering both
Over Consolidation Ratio / Pre-overburden parameters,
OCR / Pc
pressure
Pc has the priority of usage
Cap Shape Factor (scale factor of preconsolidation
α from KNC (Auto)
stress)
β Cap Hardening Parameter from Eoedref (Auto)

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Soft Soil

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Soft Soil

The Soft Soil model is suitable for simulation of normally consolidated or near normally consolidated clay soils. The Soft Soil model has the
nonlinear elastic characteristic which has the logarithmically relationship between volumetric strain and mean effective pressure. This is the
same stress-dependent stiffness with Modified Cam-Clay.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 254 of 1024

Following is the summary of parameters for the Soft Soil model.

Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Soil stiffness and failure
λ Compression index Cc / 2.303
Cs / 2.303
κ Swelling index
(Cc / 5 for a rough estimation)
Failure parameter as in MC
c Cohesion
model
Failure parameter as in MC
φ Friction angle
model
ψ Dilatancy angle 0
Advanced parameters (Recommend to use Reference value)
KNC Ko for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)
Cap yield surface
Over Consolidation Ratio /
When entering both parameters,
OCR / Pc
Pc has the priority of usage
Pre-overburden pressure
Cap Shape Factor (scale factor
α from KNC (Auto)
of preconsolidation stress)

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Soft Soil Creep

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 255 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Soft Soil Creep

This is the model which is extended to a 3D-model based on the 1D-creep theory. In case that time-dependent behavior is critical, this model
is applicable to estimate the creep from FE analysis. The stress dependent stiffness parameters can be estimated from compression and
recompression index as in Modified Cam Clay model. Unlike MCC model, the user can consider secondary consolidation.

Following is the summary of parameters for the Soft Soil Creep model.

Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Soil stiffness and failure
λ Compression index Cc / 2.303
Cs / 2.303
κ Swelling index
(Cc / 5 for a rough estimation)
μ Creep index Cc / 20 for a rough estimation
Failure parameter as in MC
c Cohesion
model
Failure parameter as in MC
φ Friction angle
model
ψ Dilatancy angle 0
Tensile Cut off value for tensile
-
strength hydrostatic pressure

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 256 of 1024

Advanced parameters (Recommend to use Reference value)

KNC Ko for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)
Cap yield surface
Over Consolidation Ratio /
When entering both parameters,
OCR / Pc
Pc has the priority of usage
Pre-overburden pressure
Cap Shape Factor (scale factor
α from KNC (Auto)
of preconsolidation stress)

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > User Supplied Material

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ User Supplied Material

The User Supplied Material utilizes the material model generated by the user using the Pre/Post of the program. The total stress, interior
variable, strain and strain increment amount is basically given at the integral points to calculate the stress and tangent slope converged to the
User Supplied Material. Nonlinear elastic materials and nonlinear elasto-plastic materials are applied and the supported elements are planar
strain, axis symmetry and solid element. Refer to the separately attached 'User Supplied Subroutine (Appendix)" for more information.

User Supplied Material library file

Select the User Specified Model DLL file path on Windows explorer.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 257 of 1024

Number of parameters

Input the number of parameters needed to define the materials. For example, input the material properties such as Elasticity modulus or
Poisson’s ratio needed for the User Supplied Material.

Number of internal state variables

Save the variables needed for the next repetitive calculation. In this case, real type variables are saved such as plastic strain.

Number of integer indicator variables

If the interior state variables were saved as real type variables, the integer indicator variables are saved as integer type variables such as
plasticity state index.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Modified UBCSAND

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Modified UBCSAND

This model is an effective stress model for predicting liquefaction behavior of sand under seismic loading. GTSNX Liquefaction Model is extended to a full 3D implementation of the modified
UBCSAND model using implicit method. In elastic region, nonlinear elastic behavior can be simulated, elastic modulus changes according to the effective pressure applied. In plastic region,
the behavior is defined by three types of yield functions : shear (shear hardening), compression (cap hardening), and pressure cut-off. In case of shear hardening, soil densification effect can
be taken into account by cyclic loading.

* Note - Implicit Method : Explicit methods calculate the state of a system at a later time from the state of the system at the current time, while implicit methods find a solution by solving an
equation involving both the current state of the system and the later one.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 258 of 1024

[Elastic]

Shear modulus is updated according to the effective pressure (p’) based on the following equation. Allowable tensile stress (Pt) is calculated
using cohesion and friction angle automatically. Poisson’s ratio is constant and bulk modulus of elasticity will be determined by following
relation.

[Plastic / Shear]

Depending on the difference between mobilized friction angle (Фm) and constant volume friction angle (Фcv), shear induces plastic expansion
or dilation is predicted. The Plastic shear strain increment is related to the change in shear stress ratio assuming a hyperbolic relationship and
can be expressed as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 259 of 1024

Following is the summary of parameters for the Modified UBCSAND model.

[Model Calibration]

Monotonic and cyclic drained Direct Simple Shear (DSS) test (Skeleton Response).

Single element test and calibration using Standard Penetration Test (SPT) - ((N1)60 : Equivalent SPT blow count for clean sand.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 260 of 1024

Estimation of liquefaction results

[Pore Pressure Ratio (PPR)]

The ratio of excessive pore pressure change and the initial effective pressure.

Δp Excessive Pore Pressure Change

w

p’ Initial Effective Pressure

init

p’ Current Effective Pressure

current

[Normalized Max Stress Ratio]

The ratio of mobilized friction angle and the peak friction angle

When the Max stress ratio is reached, the mobilized friction angle is close to the peak friction angle, liquefaction is triggered (1 = Liquefaction)

φ’ Mobilized Friction
m
Angle
φ’ Peak Friction Angle
p

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 261 of 1024

[Nonlinear Time History Analysis under the earth quake]

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid)

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid)

This model is one of the Critical state theory model which is similar to Modified Cam Clay model. The yield function has K0 dependent terms, therefore users have to always consider Ko
condition (Earth pressure coefficient at rest) for initial stress of ground (Ko Anisotropy is not applicable). As the representative cohesive soil model, this can consider the elasto-plastic
behavior, but time-independent one.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 262 of 1024

[Nonlinear Parameters]

Following is the summary of parameters for the Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid) model.

Parameter Description Reference value

Nonlinear
Slope of normal consolidation
λ Cc / 2.303
line
Slope of over-consolidation Cs / 2.303
κ
line (Cc / 5 for a rough estimation)
6 x sinФ’ / (3-sinФ’)
M Slope of critical state line
(Ф’: Effective internal friction
angle)
K0nc K0 for normal consolidation 1-sinφ’ (< 1)
Cap yield surface
Over Consolidation Ratio /
When entering both parameters,
OCR / Pc
Pc has the priority of usage
Pre-overburden pressure
T Allowable Tensile Stress * Note
allow

[Allowable Tensile Stress]

Fundamentally, this model do not allow tensile stress in the failure criteria (stress-strain relationship). However, various conditions can generate tensile stress, such as the heaving of
neighboring ground due to embankment load during consolidation or uplift due to excavation. To overcome the material model limits and increase the applicability, analysis on tensile stress
within the 'allowable tensile stress' range can be conducted.
The size of the allowable tensile stress is not specified, and requires repeated analysis to input a larger value than the tensile stress created from the overburden load (embankment) or

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 263 of 1024

failure behavior. However, when directly entering the pc (pre-consolidation load), the allowable tensile stress cannot surpass the pc value. When defining using the OCR, the pc value is
automatically calculated internally by considering the size of the input allowable tensile stress.

[Model Calibration]

- Undrained Triaxial Compression and Extension test - Effect of Strain Rate.

- Undrained strength depends on the rate of shearing in different ways on the compressional and extensional sides of shearing.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 264 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid)

This model is one of the Critical state theory model which is similar to Modified Cam Clay model. The yield function has K0 dependent terms, therefore users have to always consider K0
condition (Earth pressure coefficient at rest) for initial stress of ground (K0 Anisotropy is not applicable). As the representative cohesive soil model, this can consider the elasto-plastic
behavior, and time-dependent one like soft soil creep model.

[Nonlinear Parameters]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 265 of 1024

[Allowable Tensile Stress]

Fundamentally, this model do not allow tensile stress in the failure criteria (stress-strain relationship). However, various conditions can generate tensile stress, such as the heaving of
neighboring ground due to embankment load during consolidation or uplift due to excavation. To overcome the material model limits and increase the applicability, analysis on tensile stress
within the 'allowable tensile stress' range can be conducted.
The size of the allowable tensile stress is not specified, and requires repeated analysis to input a larger value than the tensile stress created
from the overburden load (embankment) or failure behavior. However, when directly entering the pc (pre-consolidation load), the allowable
tensile stress cannot surpass the pc value. When defining using the OCR, the pc value is automatically calculated internally by considering the
size of the input allowable tensile stress.

Sekiguchi Ohtamodel requires some material properties, which can be obtained by triaxial tests.
Following empirical relations can be used to estimate the additional soil parameters : Karibe Method

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 266 of 1024

[Model Calibration]

- Undrained Triaxial Compression and Extension test - Effect of Strain Rate.

- Undrained strength depends on the rate of shearing in different ways on the compressional and extensional sides of shearing.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 267 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Modified Ramberg-Osgood

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Modified Ramberg-Osgood

This model is one of Hysteresis models for inelastic hinge, an extension was made to 2D and 3D solid elements. This model can be applied to simulate crack or local (plastic) failure. (Refer
to inelastic hinge). This model is applicable to all types of nonlinear static and dynamic analysis. (Nonlinear static, Construction Stage, Consolidation, Fully Coupled, SRM (Strength
Reduction Method), Nonlinear Time History, Nonlinear Time History + SRM analysis.

[Nonlinear Parameters]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 268 of 1024

The reference pressure is the direct input of the confining pressure used in triaxial compression experiment. It also supports the input of shear
stiffness and reference strain rate.

Following is the summary of parameters for the Modified Ramberg-Osgood model.

[Yield Function]

[Verification Example]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 269 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Modified Hardin-Drnevich

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Modified Hardin-Drnevich

This model is one of Hysteresis models for inelastic hinge, an extension was made to 2D and 3D solid elements. This model can be applied to simulate crack or local (plastic) failure. (Refer
to inelastic hinge). This model is applicable to all types of nonlinear static and dynamic analysis. (Nonlinear static, Construction Stage, Consolidation, Fully Coupled, SRM (Strength
Reduction Method), Nonlinear Time History, Nonlinear Time History+SRM analysis. Hysteresis curves are formulated on the basis of the Masing’s rule.

[Nonlinear Parameters]

Following is the summary of parameters for the Modified Hardin-Drnevich model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 270 of 1024

-n1: The Initial Shear Modulus index (0 < n1 < 1)

-n2: The Reference Shear Strain index (0 < n2 < 1)

[Yield Function]

[Verification Example]

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Hardening Soil(small strain stiffness)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 271 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Hardening Soil (small strain stiffness)

The Hardening Soil with small strain stiffness model is implemented by using the Modified Mohr-Coulomb model and Small strain overlay
model, and needed two additional parameters as below:

ref : Initial or very small-strain shear modulus

G0
Threshold strain (γ0.7) : Shear strain at which the shear modulus is about 70% of the initial small-strain shear modulus

The strain range in which soils can be considered truly elastic is very small. With increasing strain range, soil stiffness decrease nonlinearly as
the following graph.

To reflect the above characteristics, the Hardening Soil with small strain stiffness model uses the modified Hardin & Drnevich relationship as
the following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 272 of 1024

Gs : Shear modulus
G0 : Initial shear modulus
γ : Shear strain
γ0.7 : Shear strain at which the shear modulus is about 70% of the initial small-strain shear modulus

[Nonlinear Parameters]

Following is the summary of parameters for the Hardening Soil (small strain stiffness) model.

Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Soil stiffness and failure
Ei x (2 – Rf) /2
Secant stiffness in standard drained
E50ref
triaxial test
(Ei = Initial stiffness)
Tangent stiffness for primary oedometer
Eoedref E50ref
loading
Eurref Unload / reloading stiffness 3 x E50ref
Power for stress-level dependency of 0.5 ≤ m ≤ 1 (0.5 for hard soil,
m
stiffness 1 for soft soil)
C Effective cohesion Failure parameter as in MC model
φ Effective friction angle Failure parameter as in MC model
ψ Ultimate dilatancy angle 0≤ψ≤φ
Advanced parameters (Recommend to use Reference value)
Rf Failure Ratio (qf / qa) 0.9 (< 1)
Pref Reference pressure 100
K0NC K0 for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)
Tensile Cut off value for tensile hydrostatic
-
strength pressure
Small strain stiffness
Shear strain at which shear modulus has
Threshold
decayed
Shear strain
to 70% of initial shear stiffness (G0ref)
β Shear modulus at small strain

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 273 of 1024

Relation of principal stress with principal deformations in HSS. The Hardening Soil results for strains are generated using return mapping
algorithm as shown below:

The nomenclature follows a rule for GTS NX program.

The hyperbolic equation in the “Schanz & Vermeer” paper is modified to accommodate the nomenclature.

The following equations come from return mapping algorithm, and these equations are for tri-axial or oedometer conditions

The plastic multiplier variables are determined using a given loading.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Generalized SCLAY1S

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 274 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Generalized SCLAY1S

The Generalized S-CLAY1S model is a development of the earlier S-CLAY1 model and is a rotational hardening elasto-plastic model
incorporating the influence of bonding and destructuration. The S-CLAY1 model assumes the triaxial stress state whereas the Generalized S-
CLAY1S model considers to the general stress state as well. The Generalized S-CLAY1S model has the complex yield surface and needs
additional constitutive parameters for anisotropy and destructuration.

[Nonlinear Parameters]

Following is the summary of parameters for the Generalized SCLAY1S model.

Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Over Consolidation Ratio / Pre-overburden When entering both parameters,
OCR / Pc
pressure Pc has the priority of usage
POP Pre-Overburden Pressure -
λ Compression index Cc / 2.303
Cs / 2.303
κ Swelling index
(Cc / 5 for a rough estimation)
M Stress ratio at critical state Triaxial test
K0nc K0 for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)
α Initial inclination of the yield curve Anisotropy (estimated via φ’)
Absolute effectiveness of rotational Anisotropy (typical values: 10/λ ~
μ
hardening 20/λ)
Relative effectiveness of rotational
β Anisotropy (estimated via φ’)
hardening
x Initial bonding effect Destructuration
Absolute effectiveness of destructurational Destructuration (typical values:
a
hardening 8~11)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 275 of 1024

Relative effectiveness of destructurational Destructuration (typical values:

b
hardening 0.2~0.3)

[Yield Function]

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > CWFS

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ CWFS

When a tunnel or an underground structure is excavated in deep geological environments, the failure process is affected and eventually
dominated by stress-induced fractures growing preferentially parallel to the excavation boundary. This fracturing is generally referred to as
brittle failure by spalling and slabbing. Continuum models with traditional failure criteria such as Hoek-Brown or Mohr-Coulomb model have
not been successful in prediction of the extent and depth of brittle failure. The cohesion weakening and frictional strengthening (CWFS) model
is known to predict brittle failure well. The general conditions (General, Porous and Time Dependent) are same with Mohr-Coulomb model, but
the hardening/softening behavior with table using Mohr-Coulomb yield surface can be considered in the nonlinear parameters.

[Nonlinear Parameters]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 276 of 1024

[Mobilisation of the strength components]

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > PM4Sand

General Material(Behavioral properties)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 277 of 1024

▒ PM4Sand

It is developed to scheme the liquefaction using plastic theory based on effective stress. It is expanded to analysis with non-linear implicit based on the material model which is applied to
liquefaction scheme using explicit method.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 278 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Transversely Isotropic

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 279 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Transversely Isotropic

Natural ground is generally layered and sloped, making it possible to have different strengths in each orthogonal direction. The figure below
shows a soil layer with an angle between the global x axis and the element x' axis and displays perpendicular anisotropy (orthotropy) with the
x' axis and z' axis of the element.

<Orthotropic model>

This orthotropy is simulated by assigning different stiffness to the tangent and normal direction to the stratification (fault) orientation.
Generally, the normal direction stiffness decreases in comparison to the tangential stiffness and the anisotropic shear strength is defined by
the Shear modulus (G). For fully isotropic case, , is equal to , respectively and G is defined by .

Transversely isotropic materials are material models defined by an isotropic transverse section with a vertical axis to the section. The physical
properties are the same within the transverse section and the vertical direction has different properties.

l Out of transverse plane material properties : , ,

l In transverse plane material properties : , ,

Here, is the Elasticity modulus in the vertical axis to the section, , and , are the Poisson’s ratio and Shear modulus of the
surfaces generated by the vertical and section with the other axes respectively.

The local coordinate system is defined by the dip angle and dip direction . Because the reference axis of the inclined plane and
horizontal plane ( and respectively) are not identical, use the auxiliary angle that subtracts the declination (angle formed between
the 2 axes) from when setting the actual transformation matrix.

Thermal

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 280 of 1024

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature unit. (required for transient heat
transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load vector for heat transfer analysis is
the total exothermic load applied to the object.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Jointed Rock Mass

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Jointed Rock Mass

Geo-materials have different material properties depending on the direction and behave differently according to the direction specific
conditions. This material property is called Anisotropic. Jointed Rock models pose both transversely isotropic properties and anisotropic plastic
properties, making it an Anisotropic elasto-perfectly plastic model. The Jointed rock model is appropriate in modeling the behavior rock
formations with joined stratifications as shown below.

<Schematic diagram of Jointed Rock model>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 281 of 1024

It is appropriate when a series of connections or set of connections (joint, Fault etc.) exists. These connection sets must not be filled with fault
clay and the spacing must be smaller than the size of the structure. The direction of the connection can be defined in a maximum 3 directions.

Elastic modulus, Poisson’s Ratio, Cohesion, Frictional angle, Dilatancy angle and Tensile Strength are same as Mohr-Coulomb model.

Method of definition for dip direction, dip degree and declination is same as Transversely Isotropic model. But, in this jointed rock mass model can define three joints and elastic anisotropic
behavior will be defined by alpha 1 and alpha2 from joint1. Joint2 and Joint3 will define plastic failure only.

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature unit. (required for transient heat
transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load vector for heat transfer analysis is
the total exothermic load applied to the object.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > 2D Orthotropic

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 282 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ 2D Orthotropic

This model is applicable to 2D element type such as Shell, Plane Stress and 2D Geogrid. Users can define different values of stiffness along each direction, so can define geometrically
orthotropic with significant different stiffness in horizontal and vertical direction.

[Parameters]

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature unit. (required for transient heat

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 283 of 1024

transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load vector for heat transfer analysis is
the total exothermic load applied to the object.

[Engineering example for geometrical orthotropic]

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Geogrid

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Geogrid

The Geogrid model is an orthotropic material which has tension only behavior and can be only assigned to 1D/2D Geogrid property. 1-direction and 2-direction behave independently each
other. It shows tension only nonlinear elastic behavior without the ‘Tensile Strength’ option, and it shows plastic behavior under load conditions that exceed the tensile strength if this option is
selected. In case of 1D Geogrid element, E2, G12 and Tensile Strength 2 are not considered.

[Parameters]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 284 of 1024

Geogrid Tensile Strength Calculation

2D Plane Strain Model, (Plane Strain Element Width -1m)
Manufacturer SPecified Strength - 50 kN/m

Geogrid Tensile Strength: 50/(thickness * plane strain width) = 50/(0.01*1) =5000 kN/m2

Area in Property Definition: Thickness* plane strain width = 0.01*1 = 0.01 m2

3D Model

Geogrid Tensile Strength: 50/(thickness * plane strain width) = 50/(0.01*1) =5000 kN/m2. Thickness: 0.01m ( Manufacturer's Specified Stiffness - 50 kN/m)

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature unit. (required for transient heat
transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load vector for heat transfer analysis is
the total exothermic load applied to the object.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 285 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > 2D Equivalent

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ 2D Equivalent

Is a material that simplifies complex nonlinear behavior of geo-material properties into equivalent linear properties and allows ground-
structure analysis under dynamic loading. Shear strain due to earthquakes or other dynamic loading is constantly changing and the effective
shear strain concept is used to set an equivalent linear value. The required input parameters and application process are as follows.

Process Analysis process

1 Assume initial Shear modulus and damping ratio
2 Compute ground response and strain hysteresis from initial values
3 Use maximum strain from computed strain hysteresis to calculate effective strain
Use equivalent linear damping ratio corresponding to effective strain and Shear modulus to re-
4
compute the ground response and strain hysteresis
Repeat process 2~4 until the calculated Shear modulus and damping ratio error variation is within the
5
tolerance

<Convergence of nonlinear Shear modulus and damping factor using the equivalent linear method>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 286 of 1024

The stress-strain relationship graph for equivalent linear analysis and nonlinear analysis can be expressed as follows.

In the equivalent linear method, the nonlinear characteristics of the geo-material can be expressed as a function of the ratio of maximum
shear modulus and shear modulus and shear strain , and a function of damping ratio and shear strain . These material
properties can be found from the dynamic strain test as shown below.

Strain compatibility properties can be set using a function of Shear modulus and damping ratio to strain when considering the nonlinear,
inelastic behavior of the ground. If the function is not defined, the geo-material is assumed to be linear and an entered (fixed) Shear modulus
and damping ratio is used in the analysis. Various DB exist for each type of ground. Refer to 'Function' section for more detailed information.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Interface

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 287 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Interface (Interface / Shell Interface)

1. Interface

The interface behavioral model was developed to simulate the boundary (interface) behavior between same or different materials. The
interface behavioral model is not only used in geo-technology but also throughout architecture and civil engineering in general to define the
behavior of various interfaces. The interface behavioral model is based on Coulomb's law of friction (1785) and follows the assumption that the
frictional force of an interface is proportional to the coefficient of friction and the confining forces perpendicular to the normal direction acting
on the interface.

This model is mostly used to simulate rock joints or structure-ground interfaces such as friction pile-ground interface, earth retaining wall-
ground interface, lining-ground interface etc.

<Coulomb Friction function>

The main nonlinear parameters of the interface model are as follows. The user can also define the coefficient of permeability or stiffness to
simulate interface behavior.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 288 of 1024

[Normal stiffness modulus (Kn)]

Is the Elasticity modulus for bonding and un-bonding behavior in the normal direction to the interface element. The general range is 10~100
times the smallest value of the Elasticity modulus on the oedometer of adjacent elements.

[Shear stiffness modulus (Kt)]

Is the Elasticity modulus for slip behavior in the normal direction to the interface element. The general range is 10~100 times the smallest
value of the shear strength of adjacent elements.

The nonlinearity of the interface needs to be computed by applying the Coulomb Friction criterion and using the stiffness parameters along
with experimentation (relative displacement-frictional force curve), but an empirical formula can be used to predict the interface behavior
between 2 materials. The empirical formula uses a virtual thickness (tv) and strength reduction factor (R). When creating an interface element,
the following Wizard can be used for automatically calculate, according to the element properties of the neighboring ground element, using
the 2 parameters (tv, R).

The interface material can be defined using the following equation. Using the stiffness of adjacent elements and nonlinear parameters, the
virtual thickness (tv) and strength reduction factor (R) is applied. Interface material stiffness and parameters are applied differently according
to the relative stiffness difference between neighboring ground and structural members. The Wizard can be used to simplify this process.

Kn = Eoed,i / tv

Kt = Gi/tv

Ci = R x Csoil

phii = tan-1 (R x tan (phisoil))

Here, Eoed,i = 2 x Gi x (1-νi)/(1-2 x νi)

(νi =Interface Poisson’s ration=0.45, the interface is used to simulate the non-compressive frictional behavior and automatically calculates

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 289 of 1024

using 0.45 to prevent numerical errors.)

tv = Virtual thickness(Generally has a value between 0.01~0.1, the higher the stiffness difference between ground and structure, the smaller
the value)

Gi = R2 x Gsoil (Gsoil = E/(2(1+ νsoil)), R = Strength Reduction Factor

The general Strength reduction factor for structural members and neighboring ground properties are as follows.

l Sand/Steel = R : 0.6~0.7

l Clay/Steel = R : 0.5

l Sand/Concrete = R : 1.0~0.8

l Clay/Concrete = R : 1.0~0.7

In case of multiple soil layer the same structural component, the smaller value of R is recommended.

Checking the Element size consideration calculates the interface material properties considering the average length(line), average area(face) of
the neighboring ground element when creating an interface. In other words, the average length(l), average area(A) are multiplies to the virtual
thickness in the equation below to calculate the tangent, normal direction stiffness of the interface.

Kn = Eoed,i / (I or √A x tv ) , Kt = Gi / (I or √A x tv )

If the consideration is not checked, the unit length(area) is applied.

The thickness is defined separately for a line interface. The thickness is an important element when using the interface on a ground material
that displays hardening behavior. Generally, the neighboring ground particle size is input, but if an accurate numerical value is not available,
the default value from the program is used. For a 3D model, like the 1 in the example above, the surface interface does not need a thickness.

When defining the stiffness against seepage for an interface element, the “permeability coefficient” can be defined to be the same as the
permeability coefficient of the ground. If the option is not checked, the layer is considered to be impermeable.

When the dilatancy angle and tensile strength is defined, a smaller or equal value needs to be defined for the interface element and the
cohesion; friction angle can be multiplied with the strength reduction factor. For the interface dilatancy angle, the same angle can be applied
as the ground when the ground is under rigid body motion without strength reduction (R=1). When considering strength reduction, entering
'0(zero)' is the general definition for rigid body motion.

[Mode-II Model]

The Mode-II model expresses shear behavior and defines the tangential slip behavior or the interface. For the 2 models below, the failure
envelopes are shown for when the ‘Constant Shear Retention’ function is considered suitable in terms of numerical analysis stability etc.

l Brittle model

The structure does not receive any loading if the vertical force is higher than the tensile strength.

l Constant Shear Retention

Apply the input value on the shear direction such that the structure can receive loading in that direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 290 of 1024

: Reduced Shear Stiffness

[Multi-linear Hardening]

If a function is entered in the multi-linear hardening, the cohesion and friction angle used in the Coulomb friction failure criterion changes with
plastic displacement. Note that the cohesion and friction angle both need to increase as the plastic displacement increases. This behavioral
characteristic must be defined by experimentation and is mainly used for research purposes than practical purposes.

[Conduction for Seepage flow]

Sets allowable flow rate at the interface.

[Convection coefficient]

Controls allowable heat exchange at the interface.

Bond Slip

In reinforced concrete, the interaction between the reinforcement and the concrete is governed by secondary transverse and longitudinal cracks
in the vicinity of the reinforcement. This behaviour can be modelled with a bond-slip mechanism where the relative slip of the reinforcement
and the concrete is described in a phenomenological sense.

In GTS NX, the relationship between the normal traction and the normal relative displacement is assumed to be linear elastic, whereas the
relationship between the shear traction and the slip is assumed as a nonlinear function.

Differentiating results in expressions for the tangential stiffness coefficients.

GTS NX offers a predefined curve, ‘polynomial function’, for the relationships between shear traction and slip, and a user-defined multi-linear function is also available. The polynomial function
describes the relationship between shear stress and slip as shown in the figure below, and the formula is shown below.

Discreet Cracking

The constitutive law for discrete cracking in GTS NX is based on a total deformation theory, which expresses the tractions as a function of the
total relative displacements. The relationship between normal traction and crack width and the relationship between shear traction and slip are
assumed as nonlinear functions.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 291 of 1024

In the above equation, the relationship between the normal traction and shear traction is independent to each other, so the stiffness can be
expressed as follows.

In general, the normal traction is governed by a tension softening relation. For structural interface elements, GTS NX supports the following relations:

Brittle Cracking Model -

Brittle cracking model is characterized by the full reduction of the strength after the strength criterion has been reached.

Linear Tension Softening Model

In case of linear tension softening, the relation of the crack stress and displacement in the normal direction is given by the figure below.

Unloading and reloading can be modeled according to a secant approach or an elastic approach. In the secant approach, the relation between the traction and the relative normal displacement
is linear up to the origin, after which the initial stiffness is recovered. In the elastic approach, the initial stiffness is recovered immediately after the relative normal displacement has become less
than the current maximum relative normal displacement.

Non-Linear Tension Softening Model

Hordijk , Cornelissen & Reinhardt proposed an expression for the softening behavior of concrete as shown in the figure below.

Unloading and reloading can be modeled according to a secant approach, an elastic approach or by application of hysteresis.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 292 of 1024

Shear Retention
In general, the shear traction is reduced after cracking according to the following equation

In general, β may vary between 0.1 and 0.3. If the crack surface is assumed to be smooth after Mode-I cracking, β is defined as zero. But generally, it is assumed that the crack surface is not
smooth and β and hence 0<β<1.

2.Shell Interface

The interface element was developed to simulate the interface behavior just like a general face element. Here, the interface element is also
capable of resisting the rotational force between plates.

l Tensile force is not transmitted to the load or moment.

l Linear behavior is observed for small rotations or shear force.

l Nonlinear elastic behavior for large rotations. (Janssen’s law)

l Plastic behavior for large shear force. (Coulomb friction)

Nonlinear behavior at the plate interface element follows the Coulomb friction law for movement and Janssen’s law for rotation. The relative
move displacement and interface force follows the Coulomb friction model with some restrictions. The tensile strength is set as 0 for the
Tension Cut-off function, the dilatancy angle and interior friction angle are identical and the asymmetrical material property matrix is not
defined. The stiffening function does not need to be defined separately.

For the User supplied shell interface, it is the same as the "User Suplied Material" model.

Janssen's Law

The Janssen model, which is applied to the rotational DOF of shell interface elements, simulates the nonlinear elastic relationship between the
moment and rotational displacement. GTS NX provides for the Coulomb friction model and Janssen model for shell interface elements. The
Coulomb friction model is used to define the normal and lateral direction forces.

Only perfectly plastic behavior is supported for Coulomb friction models used on shell interface elements.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 293 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Pile

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Pile (Pile & Pile Tip)

The pile element behavior is the interfacial behavior between the parent element and pile elements such as a beam or a truss. The interfacial
behavior for a pile can divided into 2 normal direction behavior and 1 tangent direction behavior. Like the interface element, the shear/vertical
stiffness is defined for simulation of interface behavior but here, it is assumed that the 2 normal direction (vertical) motions undergoes
identical rigid body motion as the parent element and the tangent direction (shear) behavior undergoes nonlinear elastic motion.

The pile tip element behavior is the interfacial behavior between the parent element and the 1 tip of the pile element. It is assumed that the
normal direction behavior with respect to the element coordinate axis at the pile tip undergoes identical rigid body motion as the parent
element and the tangent direction behavior undergoes nonlinear elastic motion. For the pile element, it is assigned either multiple curves as a
nonlinear material model or a value for fully plastic behavior.

Pile and pile tip elements express nonlinear behavior through default stiffness as well as bearing power or ultimate strength. The nonlinear
behavior can be defined by functions and a 3D table is supported for piles to define different function for different depths.

When defining the shear stiffness of the pile using yield strength, assume that the slope and yield strength undergoes fully elasto-plastic
behavior depending on height as shown below. The user can also define the strain-frictional force relationship curve for different heights when
defining the stiffness as a function.

<Relative displacement-Frictional force relationship>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 294 of 1024

Input a certain coefficient for the normal direction. The nonlinear analysis is analyzed linearly. For the shear direction, use the input coefficient
and analyze if linear. For nonlinear analysis, also consider the ultimate shear strength and analyze as a fully plastic model. If the shear stiffness
is differs for each depth, a function must be used.

Ultimate Shear Force : Input the ultimate shear resistance force(kN) of the pile for a load in the axial direction in stress units, by dividing it with
the pile length(m) and pile element thickness(m). The frictional force of the pile is output as the force per unit length(kN/m) and the Ultimate
frictional force becomes the input [Ultimate shear force(kN/m2) x Pile element thickness(m)].

Shear Stiffness Modulus (Kt) : The slope of the linear section of the friction stress(kN/m2)-relative displacement(m) curve that has the units of
kN/m3. When the analysis results of the tangent direction frictional force(kN/m) and relative displacement(m) of a pile is drawn with respect to
the applied load size, the graph has a linear slope(kN/m2) until the ultimate frictional force and this becomes the input [Shear stiffness
modulus(kN/m3) x Pile element thickness(m)].

Function : To specify the nonlinear elastic behavior in the tangent direction, define the Friction stress(kN/m2)-Relative displacement(m) curve
for each depth, rather than entering the Ultimate shear force and Shear stiffness modulus.

Normal Stiffness Modulus (Kn) : The slope of the linear section of the relationship graph between the ground resistance to a horizontally
applied force(kN), which is expressed as stress by dividing it with the pile length(m) and pile element thickness(m), and the relative
displacement. It is the same concept as the Lateral subgrade reaction modulus, calculated from general p-y analysis. When the analysis results
of the tangent direction frictional force(kN/m) and relative displacement(m) of a pile is drawn with respect to the applied load size, it is the
linear slope(kN/m2), which can be expressed as the input [Shear stiffness modulus(kN/m3) x Pile element thickness(m)].

When using the Lateral subgrade reaction modulus formula proposed by the design code, input the calculated coefficient into the Normal
Stiffness Modulus and the pile element thickness can be input as a unit width(1m).

Thermal

[Convection coefficient]

Controls allowable heat exchange at the interface.

Because the pile size, length, neighboring ground material properties all affect the pile element parameters, it is ideal to use the results of a
loading test. However, if there are no test results, the Ultimate Shaft Resistance, Lateral Subgrade Reaction Modulus and End Bearing Capacity
of a pile can be calculated using the formulas proposed by the design code and the neighboring ground parameters (unit weight, cohesion,
friction angle etc.).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 295 of 1024

1. Using loading test results

For example, if a load of 1000kN was found before failure from the pile loading test and the pile length was 10m, the Ultimate shear force is
[1000kN/10m/1m] = 100kN/m2. Here, the 1m is the unit length of the input pile element thickness.

The Shear stiffness modulus is the slope of the linear section on the relationship graph with relative displacement until the 1000kN load is
applied. If we assume that the relative displacement at 1000kN is 0.01m, the Shear stiffness modulus becomes [100kN/m2 / 0.01m] =
10000kN/m3.

2. Using the Ultimate Shaft Resistance results

For each design code, various formulas are suggested to predict the Ultimate bearing capacity of a pile according to ground and pile section
properties. For example, if the calculated Ultimate shaft resistance is 50kN/m2 and the Shaft surface area of the pile(equivalent circumference)
is 3m, input 50kN/m2 for the Ultimate shear force and 3m for the Pile element thickness respectively, or input 150kN/m2 for the Ultimate
shear force and the unit length of the Pile element thickness 1m. The Pile element length is automatically taken into account.

Because the load-relative displacement has no relationship, if the allowable settlement is assumed to occur at the Ultimate bearing capacity,
the Shear stiffness modulus applied to the analysis can be inferred with reference to the allowable settlement. If the allowable settlement is
0.025m for the example above, the Shear stiffness modulus is [150kN/m2 / 0.025m] = 6000kN/m3. If the Pile element thickness is 3m, entering
[50kN/m2 / 0.025m] = 2000kN/m3 still gives the same results.

However, if a different numerical value from the unit length is input for the Pile element thickness, be aware that the same Normal stiffness
modulus is equally applied.

3. Applying the interface Wizard interaction formula

Pile elements are also used to estimate the ground-structure mutual behavior with interface elements. Because the neighboring ground
material has a larger affect than the pile stiffness or sectional properties, the shear/normal stiffness of the pile element can be inferred using
the interaction formula that calculates the tangent/normal stiffness on the interface Wizard.

[Kn = Eoed,i / (L x tv) , Kt = Gi / (L x tv)]

Here, Eoed,i = 2 x Gi x (1-νi)/(1-2 x νi)

(νi =Interface Poisson’s ration=0.45, the interface is used to simulate the non-compressive frictional behavior and automatically calculates
using 0.45 to prevent numerical errors.)

tv = Virtual thickness (Generally has a value between 0.01~0.1, the higher the stiffness difference between ground and structure, the smaller
the value)

Gi = R x Gsoil (Gsoil = E/(2(1+ νsoil)), R = Strength Reduction Factor

The general Strength reduction factor for structural members and neighboring ground properties are as follows.

l Sand/Steel = R : 0.6~0.7

l Clay/Steel = R : 0.5

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 296 of 1024

l Sand/Concrete = R : 1.0~0.8

l Clay/Concrete = R : 1.0~0.7

When inferring the shear/normal stiffness of the pile using this method, the Ultimate shear force can be found using the Shear stiffness
modulus, as calculated in example 2, and the allowable displacement that is to be applied in the analysis.

Examples 2 and 3 are only acceptable suggestions when the test results are not available. For accurate behavior predictions, the load test must
be conducted, or the design parameters need to be computed through repeated analysis.

4. Shear Resistance

The user can directly input the global depth of the pile and the corresponding ultimate shear force( skin friction). Therefore, there are 3
methods of inputting the Pile Interface as summarized below:

l Direct definition of Skin Friction and corresponding stiffness for the entire pile

l Skin Friction vs Depth & Shear Stiffness VS Depth.

l Direct P-y Curve definition VS Depth.

l Shear Resistance: Select the Methods "Value" or 'Function".

l Value: The user needs to define the "Ultimate Shear Force VS Height" and "Shear Stiffness Modulus VS Height".

l Height: The user needs to input the global depth in the Height Column.

Consider Elastic Zone

There is plasticity without considering the elastic zone and will be occurred huge deformation. So, elastic zone will prevent to occur the
plasticity in the area considering diameter of pile.

(Warning) Elastic zone can not be considered from the previous modeling because there is no connection information. So, it needs to delete
the pile and 1D element and generate mesh again for considering it.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 297 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > User-Supplied Soil Material

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ User-Supplied Soil Material

The User Supplied Soil Material utilizes the material model generated by the user using the Pre/Post of the program. The total stress, interior
variable, strain and strain increment amount is basically given at the integral points to calculate the stress and tangent slope converged to the
User Supplied Material. Here, the user can load their own geotechnical model library file made in FORTRAN and then select the type of
material model as applicable. Choice of material model ranges from elastic to elasto plastic. Refer to the separately attached 'User Supplied
Subroutine (Appendix 2)" for more information..

User Supplied Material library file

Select the User Specified (Geotechnical) Model DLL file path on Windows explorer.

User Supplied Soil Material Models

Input the model type as elastic or elasto plastic.

User Supplied Soil Material Parameters

Input the number of parameters needed to define the materials. For example, input the material properties such as Elasticity modulus or
Poisson’s ratio needed for the User Supplied Material.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 298 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Concrete Damaged Plasticity

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Concrete Damaged Plasticity

The concrete damaged plasticity model2829 provides a general capability for modeling concrete and other quasi-brittle materials, i.e. rock,
mortar, ceramics in all types of structures and is designed for applications in which concrete is subjected to dynamic loading due to
earthquake under low confining pressures. This model is not suitable for concrete under high confining pressures which would lead to ductile
behavior. This model can describe the irreversible damage that occurs during the fracturing process of concrete under relatively low confining
pressures. Using this model, the following behaviors of concrete can be described:

► Different behaviors for tension and compression. (Failure tensile stress and ultimate compressive stress)

► Different reductions of the elastic stiffness when unloading for tension and compression.

► Stiffness recovery effects during cyclic load reversals

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 299 of 1024

Compression Hardening Curve Tension Softening Curve

Compression Damage Curve Tension Damage Curve

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 300 of 1024

Tension Damage

Compression Damage

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Concrete Smeared Crack

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 301 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Concrete Smeared Crack

The concrete smeared crack model is used to simulate the plain concrete. The concrete-smeared crack model assumes that the monotonic load is
applied to concrete under low confining pressure. The low confining pressure corresponds to the stress less than 1/5 to 1/4 of the maximum
compressive strength of concrete. For reinforced concrete, the embedded elements are used. In this case, effects such as bond slip from the
interface of concrete and steel are considered through tension stiffening. The concrete smeared crack model simulates the compression part of
concrete using a typical isotropic elasto-plastic model, and the tensile part of concrete is simulated using a smeared crack model. The smeared
crack model is a method of simulating the crack by adjusting the stress and stiffness at the integration point, without reconfiguring the mesh. In
the smeared crack model, the band-width obtained based on the size of the element is reflected in the crack behavior to avoid mesh
dependencies (Bazant and Oh 1983). The square root of an area for a two-dimensional element and the cubic root of a volume for a three-
dimensional element are the crack width of the element. For the higher order element, the half of the square root and the cubic root are the crack
width. The tensile/compression uniaxial behavior of the concrete smeared crack model is shown in the figure below.

Uniaxial Behavior Of Concrete Smeared Crack

Tensile Behavior

Cracks occur when the stress is outside the crack detection surface, a type of yield function. If a crack occurs, the stress is returned using an implicit backward Euler method, and the direction of
the maximum principal strain is the direction of the crack. This direction is stored to simulate the anisotropy by cracking in subsequent analyses. Since the orthogonal fixed crack model is used in
the smeared crack model, the subsequent crack shall be in a direction orthogonal to the existing crack direction and up to three in the case of the three dimensional model. If the elastic strain in
the direction of the crack is tensile after the crack has occurred, it behaves as damaged elastic and it is considered that the crack is closed when it is compressed.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 302 of 1024

Tensile Behavior of Concrete Smeared Crack

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > GHE-S

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 303 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ GHE-S

This is for Japanese Railway Dynamic non-linear constitutive model. Unbounded curve is suggested from Tatsuoka and Shibuya using GHE (General Hyperbolic Equation) model. And, History law is a model which is satisfied
with relationship and relationship after developing the Massing law.

After inputting experiment data of G / G0 ~ γ and h ~ γ relationship, parameters for the defining material will be calculated automatically.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 304 of 1024

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 305 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Bowl Model

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 306 of 1024

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Bowl Model

This model was developed by Fukutake & Matsouka to model multidirectional simple shear-induced dilatancy and is applied to Modified Ramberg-Osgood model to consider liquefaction due
to seismic loading. This model is applicable to all types of nonlinear static and dynamic analysis.

[Nonlinear Parameters]

Bowl Model can be illustrated by the images according to the inputs

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 307 of 1024

Bowl Model

The incremental volume deformation of soil is generally composed of the incremental deformation due to shear and the incremental
deformation due to compression.

Volumetric deformation by shear:

In the Bowl model, when shear occurs, soil particles are considered to move along the bowl as they rise in contact with surrounding particles.

Also, the bowl itself undergoes volumetric deformation as shear disturbance occurs, compressing outward.

Volumetric deformation due to compression is determined by the relationship between the initial mean effective stress and the current mean effective stress of the bowl model:

Assuming the condition of no drainage, the mean effective stress of the Bowl model at the state where total volumetric deformation becomes 0 would be:

Using the average effective stress of the bowl model, the parameters of the Modified Ramberg-Osgood model are modified to match the current ground condition, considering the liquefaction
effect.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 308 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Norsand

General Material(Behavioral properties)

▒ Norsand

NorSand constitutive model is a critical state model was originated from the sand behavior in tailings dams previously. But, the model is widely applicable to
the ground from clay silt to sand. NorSand requires relatively few soil properties that can be collected from regular laboratory and in-situ tests so that users
can get results easily. The consideration of a state parameter which is the difference between the current void ratio and the void ratio of its critical state is the
prime advantage.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 309 of 1024

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 310 of 1024

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 311 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Material > General Material (Behavioral properties) > Sloshing Medium

General Material(Behavioral properties)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 312 of 1024

▒ Sloshing Medium

Sloshing fluid is essentially a fluid element which was developed to analyze the impact of hydrodynamic forces on dams and supporting structures, sloshing in tanks, material transport for
oils etc.

The inputs for fluid element are illustrated below:

[Parameters]

For the particular fluid type, the user needs to enter the Bulk Modulus and the Unit Weight.

This material model is only supported in Eigen Value Analysis and Time History Analysis types and can also be incorporated in
Construction Stages for the above-mentioned analysis types.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Property

Property
Go to Section property

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Add/define ground and structural properties. This function defines the property of each mesh set when a ground or
structure mesh is generated. For ground, it determines which material to use and for structures, it adds section size, shape (stiffness) and
horizontal spacing etc. The horizontal spacing is the 1D spacing between structural members in the horizontal direction of a 2D model.
Tapered section option, where the size (thickness) of a beam or plate changes, is also available.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 313 of 1024

Create

Creates 1 of the following 4 property types and adds a material type and section characteristic for each property.

The supported model type for each property type is as follows. The section shape/size, stiffness depending on spacing and selectable
materials is defined.

Go to Section property

Ground Structural
Property type Model type Nonlinear property
property property
Geogrid(1D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(1D) X X -
From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
1D From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Embedded truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Beam X O -
Embedded Beam X O -
Pile X O -
Geogrid(2D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(2D) X X -
Gauging shell X O -
Sloshing Fluid (2D) O X -
Sloshing Fluid (Axisym.) O X -
2D
Axisymmetric O X -
Shell X O -
Plane stress X O Tension Only
Composite Shell X O -
Plane strain O X -
Solid O X -
3D
Sloshing Fluid (3D) O X -
Rigid link X O -
Pile tip X O -
User Supplied Behavior
X O -
for Shell Interface
Linear Elastic
Tension Only
Compression Only
Point spring X O
Hook
Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Matrix spring X O -
Free Field
Others Free Field O X
Absorbent Boundary
Interface X O -
Shell interface X O -
Free Surface
Fluid Boundary O X
FSI Surface
From Adjacent Element
Infinite O X
User Defined
Linear Elastic
Rigid Body
Elastic link X O Tension Only
Compression Only
Nonlinear Elastic

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 314 of 1024

Refer to Ch.3 of the Analysis manual for detailed information on each input parameter and behavioral characteristic.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

Import

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Section Property

Section Property

▒ Overview

The section material properties need to be defined for a 1 dimensional truss, embedded truss or beam element. Here, the truss and
embedded truss only need the cross-sectional area but the beam needs other material properties such as total cross section, torsional rigidity,
first area moment of inertia and second area moment of inertia to consider torsion, bend and shear.

The thickness of the element needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1 and the user can define the used units according to the thickness.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. Here, the plate element has a
rotor float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 315 of 1024

▒ Methodology

1D element

1D element is an element that is made up of 2(primary) or 3(secondary) nodes and has the geometric property of length. Because 3D shapes
are expressed as 1D elements, the section (size, shape) needs to be defined and this is modeled as a 2D element for calculations.

GTS NX provides various shapes, as shown in the figure below. The position can also be set when defining the sectional properties.

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 316 of 1024

QUAD-4 6400개 QUAD-4 3400개 QUAD-4 1700개

<Solid square> <H section> <Channel>

<Automatic section modeling >

<Solid Rectangle> <Solid Round> <Pipe>

<Box> <T-section> <H-section>

<Channel> <Angle> <Cross>

<I-section> <Channel 1> <Hat>

<Section shape and size specification>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 317 of 1024

1D element SRC Section

<SRC Section DB>

SRC(Steel Reinforced Concrete) can be defined under 1D element(truss, beam, embedded truss, embedded beam).

It has added SRC-Box, SRC-Pipe, Sect-HBeam, Circle-HBeam in the section of 1D element. User can define the section selecting the database
of steel and concrete, elastic modulus of steel will use for calculation.

Steel Data: Input the parameter of steel section or selecting the section from database.

Concrete Data: Input the outer dimensions of section for steel concrete

Material: Select the material for SRC or input the parameters. The parameters will be inputted automatically selecting the database from
[Select Material from DB…].

Es/Ec: Elastic ratio between steel and concrete

Ds/Dc: Deadweight ratio between steel and concrete

Ps: Poisson’s ratio of steel

Pc: Poisson’s ratio of concrete

Conv. Stiffness Factor: Stiffness reduction factor of concrete (default=1.0) for SRC section

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 318 of 1024

2D element

2D elements are Triangles or Quadrilaterals with the geometric property of area. Because 3D shapes are expressed as 2D elements, the
thickness needs to be defined. The thickness can be set the same or tapered.

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

3D element

3D elements are Tetrahedron or Hexahedrons, Bricks with the geometric property of volume.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 319 of 1024

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

Cross sectional area (A)

The cross sectional area is used to calculate the axial stiffness when a tensile or axial force acts on the member or the stress on a member. The
calculations for the H section are as follows.

There are 2 methods to calculate the cross sectional area in the GTS NX. The first method uses the provided database to input the dimensions
of a section and automatically calculate the area. For the second method, the user calculates the area directly and inputs the value. The first
method is convenient, but because it does not consider the decrease in area due to bolts in the connection or rivet holes, the area entered
using the second method may provide more accurate results.

<Example of cross sectional area calculation>

Torsional stiffness (I )
xx

The torsional stiffness resists the torsional moment and is expressed as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 320 of 1024

Here, : Torsional stiffness,

: Torsional moment or torque,

: Torsional angle (angle of twist),

: Shear modulus

The torsional stiffness is the stiffness that resists the torsional moment and is different from the polar moment of inertia that decides the shear
stress due to torsion. (However, the 2 are the same when considering a circular cross-section or a thick cylindrical section)

The torsional stiffness can be calculated from Saint-Venant's principle as shown below.

is the warping function that can be calculated using the Finite element method as shown below.

Because , the torsional stiffness comp1nt is expressed as the following equation.

Effective shear area (Asy, Asz )

The effective shear area is needed to calculate the shear stiffness that resists the shear force acting on the y axis or z axis of the element
coordinate system. If the effective shear area is not entered, the shear strain in that direction is ignored.

Here, : Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

When the interior section material properties are calculated or entered from the database, the shear stiffness comp1nt is automatically
considered and the effective shear factor is calculated using the warping function from the shear force caused by bending moment
and the warping function from the Saint-Venant principle.

Here,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 321 of 1024

Area moment of inertia (Iyy, Izz)

The area moment of inertia is used to calculate the flexural stiffness that resists the bending moment and is calculated from the centroid axis
of the section using the following equation.

l • Area moment of inertia about the y axis of the element coordinate system

l Area moment of inertia about the z axis of the element coordinate system

Section element b h
① 10 4 40 2 80 5 200
② 2 10 20 9 180 5 100
③ 8 3 24 15.5 372 5 120
total - - 84 - 632 - 420

<Table. First area moment of inertia and calculation of centroid >

: area

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the z′-axis direction

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the z′-axis direction

l • Calculate position of neutral axis ( , )

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 322 of 1024

l • Calculate second area moment of inertia ( , )

Section element
① 40 5.5328 1224.5 53.3 1277.8 0 0 333.3 333.3
② 20 1.4672 43.1 166.7 209.8 0 0 6.7 6.7
③ 24 7.9762 1526.9 18.0 1544.9 0 0 128.0 128.0
total 2794.5 238.0 3032.5 0 468.0 468.0

<Table. Second area moment of inertia example>

Area product moment of inertia (Iyz)

The area product moment of inertia is used to calculate the stress comp1nt of an asymmetrical section and the definition is as follows.

H, pipe, box, channel, tee type sections have at least 1 axis of symmetry out of the y,z axis on the element coordinate system and hence Iyz=0.
For angle type sections, it does not have any angle of symmetry (Iyz≠ 0) and so, the stress comp1nt needs to be calculated.

The calculations for the area product moment of inertia of an angle type section are shown in the figure below.

<Area product moment of inertia calculations for an angle section>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 323 of 1024

< Flexural stress distribution diagram for asymmetrical section>

The neutral axis is the axis that passes the points where the flexural stress due to the bending moment is ‘0(zero)’ within the member. The
neutral axis is perpendicular to the -axis and the -axis.

Because the flexural stress due to bending moment is ‘0’ on the neutral axis, the neutral axis direction can be found by the following equation.

The general equation used to calculate the flexural stress due to bending moment is as follows.

If this is a H type section, and,

Here, : Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Area product moment of inertia,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system

The shear stress due to shear force acting in the axis and axis direction of the element coordinate system can be calculated using the
following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 324 of 1024

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

First moment of area (Qy, Qz)

The first moment of area is used to calculate the shear stress at an arbitrary point on the section and the shear stress can be calculated using
the following equation.

For a section that is symmetrical about the y, z or both axis, the shear strength on an arbitrary point can be calculated using the following
equation.

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

Element thickness

On the GTS NX, the thickness needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. The plate element has a rotor
float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 325 of 1024

Spacing

This functionality is in the 1D element property which is activated only in 2D project setting. Since this option is used to consider the 1D
element force per each element when the user introduce the 1D element more or less than one along the axis of horizontal direction
(thickness direction) in 2D model.

If the user uncheck the spacing option, on the GTS NX, the spacing will be regarded as Plane Strain Thickness in the analysis setting, meaning
that the unit thickness based on the selected unit system.

On the GTS NX, spacing is used to calculate the stiffness of the element and output the member force per each element.

where, n = spacing, L = length , A = area, K* = stiffness considering spacing.

where, f* = member force

Refer to the following example,

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Complex Cross Section Property

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 326 of 1024

Complex Cross-Section Property

▒ Overview

Calculate the section property in the non-formalized cross-section. (Cross Sectional Area (A), Torsional Constant (Ix), Torsional Stress
Coefficient, Area Moment of Inertia (Iy, Iz), Effective Shear Area (Ay, Az), Shear Stress Coefficient (Gy, Gz))

The section property is calculated automatically from the material property by selecting 2D elements assigned ground material, and this can
be used for 1D structural property.

A value close to the exact solution can be obtained under the more dense mesh.

▒ Methodology

Auto-calculation of complex cross-section property

Create 2D mesh for the complex cross-section.

Click ‘Add’ in the Complex Cross-Section Property window. If 2D mesh is selected, the cross-section property is calculated automatically.

Save the cross-section property.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 327 of 1024

Create/Modify 1D Property > Section Template

The complex cross-section property can be assigned when creating 1D structural element.

The registered complex cross-section property is available if the ‘Complex Cross-Section’ is selected in the ‘Section Template’.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Coordinate System

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 328 of 1024

Coordinate System

▒ Overview

Add a result output coordinate system for 2D/3D element. The default rectangular/cylindrical coordinate system is defined and another
coordinate system can be added by arbitrarily defining 1 of the three planes on the coordinate system. The added coordinate system can be
used as the material coordinates when the properties of the 2D / 3D elements are defined. For 2D structural members, it is especially hard to
unify the element coordinate system in 1 direction depending on the element shape. It is useful to set the output coordinate system to check
the member forces of the entire structure according the same direction and sign convention.

▒ Methodology

There are 2 types of coordinate systems; rectangular and cylindrical. The coordinate system can be set by defining 1 of the three planes of the
coordinate system 12, 23, 31 (XY,YZ,ZX) by entering three points. In other words, the plane that passes the three points becomes 1 of the 12,
23, 31 planes and the other 2 planes are automatically determined by the direction of the reference plane.

Select the plane, origin point, a point on 1 axis of the selected plane and a point on the selected plane in this order to specify the position and
direction of the reference plant.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 329 of 1024

Function

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
When setting the analysis conditions (boundary, loading etc.) after the mesh has been generated, the values that change
with position and time can be registered as a function. The provided function types are as follows and the characteristics and applicable range
for each function is given.

▒ Methodology

Applicable range
Function type
Material/Property Boundary condition Loading

Force, Displacement, Pressure,

Prestress, Initial equilibrium
General (Spatial) - Water level
force, Dynamic nodal, Dynamic
surface
General (Non-spatial) Pile, Pile tip - -
Force, Displacement, Pressure,
Prestress, Initial equilibrium
Generalized space - Water level
force, Dynamic noda, Dynamic
surface
Surface Function - Water level -
Non-Hydrostatic Water
- Water level -
Pressure

- -
Creep / Shrinkage Strain Time-dependent (User-

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 330 of 1024

Function defined)
Time-dependent
Creep / Shrinkage Strain
- -
Function Group
(Design code based)
Time-dependent
Elastic Modulus Function - -
(Design code based)
Shear Hardening (User-
Plastic Hardening Function - -
defined)
Hardening Curve von Mises - -
Stress-Strain Curve von Mises - -
Cohesion Hardening Curve CWFS - -
Frictional Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Dilatancy Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Tensile Strength Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve

Node head, Node

Seepage boundary - -
flux, Surface flux

Nonlinear elastic (Truss

Truss, Embedded truss - -
element)
Nonlinear elastic
Point spring, Elastic link - -
(Point spring/ Elastic link)
Unsaturated property Isotropic, Orthotropic - -
Strain compatible 2D Equivalent - -
Response spectrum - - Response spectrum
Ground acceleration, Time
Time forcing - - varying static, Dynamic nodal,
Dynamic surface
Grain-Size Distribution
- - -
Function

Concrete Smeared Crack Concrete Smeared Crack - -

Concrete Damaged Concrete Damaged

- -
Plasticity Plasticity

Fatigue Load Fatigue Analysis - -

S-N Curve Fatigue Analysis - -

General function(Spatial)

Changes in position (coordinates) of a value with respect to the rectangular or cylindrical coordinate system can be set as function and used
when specifying the load. The water level conditions can be directly specified on the screen, but registering the water level according to the
coordinate change as a function allows this to be used as the water line during the construction step.

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

<Reference coordinate system standard>

[Equation]

The Equation can be set without defining the values of the independent variables.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 331 of 1024

For example, when defining the function Y=2*X on the Cartesian coordinate system, specify the X coordinate range (start, end) and the X
coordinate increment first. Input 2*X and press the calculate button to automatically generate a function as shown above.

When defining the function Sin(T) between a certain angle with reference to the T coordinate on the cylindrical coordinate system , specify the
angle range (start, end) and increment angle and then input sin(T) to generate a sin function within the specified angle range.

[Scale Value]

Value multiplied to the defined function value. The initial value is set as 1. For example, to increase all defined functions by 2 times, input 2 for
the scale value.

[Extrapolation]

Assign a function value to values outside the independent variable range. The user can select whether to set the function value outside the
range to be 0, the same as the closest function value or determined through linear extrapolation.

<Extrapolation>

General function (Non-spatial)

Used to specify the shear stiffness and spring stiffness of pile or pile tip elements as a function. The relative displacement vs Force/Area is
used as a shear stiffness function and the relative displacement vs Force/Length is used as a spring stiffness function at the pile tips. Different
pile shear stiffness functions can be set for each depth when defining the pile material properties.

Generalized space function

The purpose and functions are the same as the general function (spatial). However, the generalized space function is able to generate a
function that considers all 3 axis directions while the general function (spatial) is a 1 dimensional function that can only set 1 independent
variable axis. The input method and detailed functions are the same as the general function (spatial).

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 332 of 1024

Surface function

Used to specify the water level surface in 3D space. The 3D water level surface can be generated by entering the variable values with reference
to the global or cylindrical coordinates as shown in the table below, but it can also be generated using the Boundary Condition > Water Level
operation and selecting a surface in space to automatically extract the coordinate information. Here, the X axis spacing determines the
precision of the water surface and for suddenly changing sections, the spacing needs to be carefully set following the element node positions.

Non-Hydrostatic Water Pressure

Define the water pressure at the top and bottom depending on the position of the model.

Applicable in integer conditions and user-defined conditions when specifying the mesh set level.

- User-defined condition: the user can directly define the water pressure at the top and bottom of the assigned mesh by using the specific
water pressure function

- Hydrostatic condition: this function is used to define the water pressure at the top of the allocated mesh as hydrostatic.

Name – input name for the function.

Ref. CSys – reference coordinate system for the function definition.

Water Pressure Type – select the type of function for selection in Analysis Case > Analysis Control > Define Water Level for Mesh Set. (User
Defined or Hydrostatic condition)

Scale factor to multiply all input data.

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Function

Define the time dependent creep property and shrinkage strain of concrete material. These functions are available if User Defined is selected
in the Code field.

There are three types of Creep function data types.

Specific Creep ; Strain per unit stress excluding immediate deformation

Creep Function ; Strain per unit stress including immediate deformation

Creep Coefficient ; Ratio of creep strain to elastic strain

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 333 of 1024

A frequently used Creep Function may be saved in and recalled from a file. The data file, fn.TDM retains the following form:

* Unit, in, kip

* Data Assign the units (optional items)
Enter the data in the form of 'day' and
20, 0.9934
'value' (mandatory items)
40,1.2182 -
60, 1.3705 -
80,1.4883 -
100, 1.5854 -
120, 1.6683 -
140, 1.7408 -
160, 1.8054 -
180, 1.8636 -
200, 1.9166 -
220, 1.9653 -
240, 2.0103 -
260, 2.0252 -

Creep / Shrinkage Function Group

The user can define Creep/Shrinkage Function based on the embedded Design Codes as follows.

Link to Creep / Shrinkage Design Code

Elastic Modulus Function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 334 of 1024

Define Time-dependent Elastic modulus function based on selected design code. It is required to input End Time of function with the number
of steps.

Link to Elastic Modulus Design Code

Plastic Hardening Function

Shear Hardening in Modified Mohr-Coulomb model can be defined by Equivalent plastic strain related to the mobilized shear resistance.
Using "Auto-Calculated" option, solver recalculates friction angle based on the deviatoric plastic strain.

Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and stress are directly inputted. It is used when defining hardening curve within von Mises model. Plastic strain begin once the
material starts yielding so it can be calculated using following equation.

Stress-Strain Curve

Stress and stain are directly inputted. It is used when defining Stress-Strain Curve within von Mises model. When Load-Displacement Curve is
already known, true strain can be calculated using following equation.

Cohesion Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and cohesion are directly inputted. It is used when describing Cohesion Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion Weakening and
Frictional Strengthening).

Frictional Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and frictional angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Frictional Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 335 of 1024

Dilatancy Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and dilatancy angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Dilatancy Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Tensile Strength Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and tensile strength are directly inputted. It is used when describing Tensile Strength Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Seepage Boundary function

Used to simulate the head and flow rate difference with time such as node head, node flux rate, surface flux. Setting the values (head/flux)
according to the time flow that fits the specified time unit generates a function that can be applied to unsteady infiltration analysis.

For unsteady infiltration analysis, the time steps for result verification are set separately and the time function for the steps is used in the
analysis. When the time step is beyond the range of the function, the function value is automatically calculated using linear interpolation. In
other words, to apply a 0 function value to time steps outside the range, the same function value (0) needs to be entered for arbitrary time
steps when creating the function as shown in the figure above.

Nonlinear elastic function (Truss element)

The behavioral characteristics of truss elements or embedded truss elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The stress change according
to strain of the truss element can be directly generated as a function and used. The function can be applied to the tensile (compression) test
results of a structural member (truss affiliated) or to the deformation behavior properties of a general steel member.

Nonlinear elastic function (Point spring/ Elastic link)

The behavioral characteristics of spring or elastic link elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The spring/link stiffness according to the
element strain can be defined to generate a function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 336 of 1024

Unsaturated property function

For steady infiltration analysis that assumes a saturated ground, the unsaturated properties are not taken into account even if they are
entered. For the time dependent unsteady analysis, the unsaturated properties of the ground must be considered. Also, because real
foundations are unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil
for more realistic results.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship).

[Individually]

Define the permeability function data and water content function data. Based on the experimental data of unsaturated soil, the coefficients for
each function type can be defined using Curve Fitting or the data can be directly input through customize. If the experimental data is entered
directly, the negative pore water pressure size is entered by its absolute value and the permeability ratio is found by dividing the unsaturated
value with the saturated state value.

<Individual consideration>

The provided permeability functions and coefficients are listed below.

l Gardner coefficient

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Frontal function

K ratio (Rk) : Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

Ho : Head at which the permeability coefficient no longer decreases

l Van Genuchten function (Permeability ratio)

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Van Genuchten (Water content)

: Volume water content

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 337 of 1024

: Residual volume water content

: Saturated volume water content

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

[Relation]

The unsaturated material property data can be set on the ground type according to the JICE (Japan Institute of Construction Eng.) criteria. The
pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio relationship function for each type of ground is shown
below.

Pressure head(P)-Volumetric water content(T) Pressure head(P)-Degree of saturation(Sr)

-Permeability ratio (K) -Permeability ratio(K)

(T)- (P) (T)- (K) (Sr)- (P) (Sr)- (K)
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F],
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], [GF]
[GF] (JICE) (JICE)
[GF] (JICE) [GF] (JICE)
Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], Sandy soil [S], [S-F],

[SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE) [S-F], [SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE)

Cohesive soil [M], [C]
Sandy soil [SF] (JICE) Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) Sandy soil [SF] (JICE)
(JICE)
Cohesive soil [M], [C]
User specified Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) User specified
(JICE)
User specified User specified

<Dual consideration>

For unsteady analysis, the negative pressure head (pore water pressure) is calculated for each time step (construction step) and applied,
renewing the relative permeability coefficient. The volumetric water content (degree of saturation), according to the calculated pressure head,
is found and the relative permeability, according to the found volumetric water content (degree of saturation), is renewed for each step.

Strain compatible function

For the 2D equivalent linear analysis, the shear modulus and damping ratio are set as functions of strain to consider the nonlinearity and
inelastic behavior of the ground. If the function is not defined, the ground material is assumed to be linear and the entered (fixed) shear
modulus and damping ratio is applied. Generally, the ground displays decreasing shear modulus and increasing damping ratio as the shear
strain increases. For complex nonlinear behavior of the ground, the material properties are simplified to linear equivalent properties. Repeated
calculations from the assumed initial values can compute the converging shear modulus and damping ratio.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 338 of 1024

Material properties can be defined from various existing database. The following empirical equation can be used to generate a function
following the stratum properties.

[Database]

A strain function stored from existing research can be imported from the database. An example DB is shown below.

Clay - Pl=5-10 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Lower Bound (Sun et al.0)

Clay - Pl=10-20 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Average (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=20-40 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Upper Bound (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=40-80 (Sun et al.0) Clay (Idriss 1990)
Clay - Pl=80+ (Sun et al.0) Gravel (Seed et al.0)
Clay (Seed and Sun 1989) Linear
Modulus Gravel (Seed et al.0) Rock
Damping
Reduction Linear Rock (Idriss)
Curve
Curve Rock Sand (Idriss 1990)
Rock (Idriss) Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound Vucetic - Dobry
Sand (Seed and Idriss 1970)
-
Vucetic - Dobry

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 339 of 1024

Response spectrum function

Define the spectrum function used in response spectrum analysis. Because the response spectrum analysis uses a linearly interpolated
spectrum function value for the natural periodicity of the structure, compact spectrum values are needed for areas where the curvature of the
spectrum curve changes rapidly. The period range of the spectrum function must contain all natural periods of the structure.

The spectrum data types are normalized acceleration (acceleration spectrum, gravitational acceleration), acceleration, velocity and
displacement spectrum and changing the time function data format only changes the application format, not the data format. The scale factor
is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value. In the 'Damping Ratio' space,
input the damping ratio applied on the response spectrum but if the damping ratio of the target structure is different, the input spectrum data
is processed to fit the structural damping ratio.

[Design spectrum function]

Use the built-in design spectrum. The default built-in design spectrum types are as follows.

l Korea(Bridge) : Korea, Traffic Specification

l Japan(Bridge02) : Japan, Load instruction and Dynamic Analysis of Building

l China(JTJ004-89) : China, Specifications of Earthquake Resistant Design for Highway Engineering

l KBC 2009 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2009

l KBC 2005 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2005

l IBC2000(ASCE7-98) : USA, International Building Code 2000

l UBC(1997) : USA, Measure of Uniform Building Code 97 (Standards)

l EURO(2004H-ELASTIC) : Europe, Sesismic Design Measure of Structures

Time forcing function

The time forcing function is applied to the loading conditions (ground acceleration, time varying static, dynamic nodal, dynamic surface)
applied to linear/nonlinear time history analysis. A function for the time history loading value is formed and changing the time function data
format only changes the application format, not the data format.[edit] The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the
entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 340 of 1024

[Add Time Function]

The defined function is also applicable for Dynamic node (surface) loading and time varying static loading. Specifying 'Force' or 'Moment' uses
the time history load as a 'dynamic node (surface) load' input and specifying 'Normalized Acceleration' or 'Acceleration' uses it to input the
'ground acceleration'. Specifying 'Normal' uses the time history load as the change in static load with time for 'time varying static load' or
'dynamic surface load'.

[Import/Earthquake]

Save and import frequently used time history loading or select earthquake acceleration data from the program DB. There are a total of 32
types of earthquake acceleration.

[Add Time Sinusoidal]

A sine function can be used to define the time history loading. A, C are constants, f is the frequency of the input load, D is the damping factor
and P is the phase angle. If the time history load is entered as a harmonic function, input the necessary sine function variables and click
[Redraw Graph] to view the loading on the right hand side.

Grain SIze Distribution Function

The properties of saturated soil are inputted by test data and it is hard to conduct the test in real project due to the time and cost. From the
newer version, the curve can be made by void ration, specific gravity, density and reference grain distribution from curve of grain distribution.

Grain-size distribution function needs to be defined before input the function of saturated soil.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 341 of 1024

Curve of grain-size distribution will be created automatically after input the Particle size and Accumulative Rate of Transmission (Data from the test).

Soil-water characteristic curve can be made by grain-size distribution curve, selecting the estimation of unsaturated property from user define
of moisture content data.

Unit weigh, density and void ratio need to be inputted to estimation of unsaturated property and need to connect with created size
distribution function (it needs to create size distribution function first using (…).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 342 of 1024

Concrete Smeared Crack Function

Refer to Concrete Smeared Crack Material Model.

Concrete Damaged Plasticity Function

Refer to Concrete Damaged Plasticity Material Model.

Fatigue Load Function

Refer to Fatigue Analysis Setting.

S-N Curve Function

Refer to Fatigue Analysis Setting.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Property Coordinate Function > Hinge

Hinge Property

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 343 of 1024

When crack or yield occurs due to irregular cyclic load such as seismic load, very complex behavior appears since displacement history to the
current affects to the restoring force and displacement relationship. It is called that hysteresis model which regulates this relationship and is
considered to inelastic hinge at inelastic element.

Inelastic hinges are available in nonlinear, construction stage, consolidation, fully coupled, nonlinear time history analysis, SRM/SAM (Slope
stability analysis) and nonlinear time history analysis with SRM and element results can be displayed.

▒ Methodology

Type

- Beam - Lumped : It concentrates the inelastic behavior represented by rotational and translational springs at each end and the center. And the remaining
parts are assumed to behave elastically. Inelastic hysteresis behaviors are defined by skeleton curves, which are empirical hysteresis models. The axial
component is represented by a spring at the center and two translational components are represented by springs at each end defined by force-
displacement relationships. The two flexural components, My and Mz, are represented by springs defined by the relationship between moment and angle of
rotation at either I or J or at both ends.

- Beam - Distributed : Unlike lumped hinges, it assumes inelastic behavior throughout the member. The plastic hinge locations in the length direction of a
member assigned by the user are defined as the integration points. The flexibility matrix of a section, which represents the distribution of internal forces, is
calculated through the integration points. The number of integration points can be 1 and between 3 and 20. If the number of integration points is 2, the
moment at the free end of a cantilever beam does not come to exactly zero due to the inherited characteristic of the integration method. Therefore, two
integration points are not permitted. Inelastic hysteresis behavior can be defined by 2 models, empirical Skeleton and Fiber. The hinge behaviors can be
expressed by force - deformation relationships in each axis direction, and the hinge hysteresis behavior of the flexural components can be expressed by the
relationships of moment and angle of rotation. Inelastic behaviors can be defined for 3 axis components and 2 flexural (My & Mz) components.

- Truss : The axial component is represented by a spring at the center defined by the force-displacement relationship. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a
spring is defined by a skeleton model.

- Spring / Elastic Link : Unlike Lumped and Distributed hinges, which are influenced by the inelastic properties of materials and members, the inelastic plastic
hinge properties for the corresponding linear properties of each component of Property Type defined in General Link Properties are defined. The elastic
stiffness of each component is defined by effective stiffness and acts as the initial stiffness in inelastic analysis. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a spring is
defined by a skeleton model. The inelastic properties of a spring can be defined for all 3 translational and 3 rotational directions.

Interaction

The type of considering interaction between axial force and moment is selected.

- None: Interaction between axial force and moments is not considered.

- P-M in Strength Calculation: N-M interaction in time history analysis is reflected by calculating the flexural yield strength of a hinge considering the effect

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 344 of 1024

of axial force. In this method, the interaction between biaxial bending moments is ignored. The axial force is assumed to act with each directional bending
moment independently when the hinge status is evaluated at each time step. Recalculation of bending moment yield strength reflecting axial force is carried
out in a loading condition, which satisfies the following three conditions:

1) It must be the first among the sequential time history load cases, which will be consecutively analyzed.

2) Inelastic static analysis must be carried out.

The elements are inelastic beam elements assigned with hinge properties to which P-M interaction is applied. The initial axial and bending moment at this
time are determined by the combination of linear elastic analysis results of all the static loads contained in Time Varying Static Load. The factors used in the
combination are defined by the Scale Factors specified in Time Varying Static Load.

- P-M-M in Status Determination: This method uses a multi-axis hinge hysteresis model in inelastic time history analysis. Interaction between axial force
and biaxial moments is realized by applying the plasticity theory. The interaction is considered at each time step through evaluating the status of inelastic
hinges using the 3-dimensional yield surface. GTSNX supports the kinematic hardening type.

Yield Surface Function

If "P-M in Strength Calculation" or "P-M-M in Status Determination" is selected in Interaction Type, enter the related data for P-M interaction curve and 3-D
yield surface.

Component

Select the components of sectional strength for which properties will be entered. The Spring Type permits properties in all directional components, whereas
Lumped and Distributed types permit all but the Mx component.

Hinge Location

Select the locations of lumped inelastic hinges. Axial component is fixed to the center of a member. I-end, j-end or both ends can be selected for the
bending moment components.

Num. of Sections

Enter the number of integration points for inelastic hinges of the distributed type. Up to 20 sections are permitted, and moment - curvature relationships are
calculated at all the sections corresponding to the points.

Hysteresis Model

Select a hysteresis model for an inelastic hinge.

Hinge Components (Single)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 345 of 1024

Hysteresis Model Type

- Origin-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
origin and again move along the skeleton curve after reaching the opposite skeleton curve.

- Peck-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
point of maximum displacement on the opposite side. If the first yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the response points move
toward the first yielding point on the skeleton curve.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 346 of 1024

- Kinematic : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. It shows the tendency of strength increase with the increase in loading. This is used to model the Bauschinger effect of metallic
materials. Accordingly, it is cautioned that energy dissipation may be overestimated for concrete. Due to the characteristic of the model, only
the positive (+) and negative (-) symmetry is permitted for the strength reduction ratios after yielding.

- Clough : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. Unloading stiffness is obtained from the elastic stiffness
reduced by the equation below. As the deformation progresses after yielding, unloading stiffness reduces gradually.

where,

K : unloading stiffness
R

Ko : elastic stiffness

Dy : yield displacement in the zone where unloading begins

Dm : maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins

(In the zone where yielding has not occurred, replace it with the yield displacement)

: constant for determining unloading stiffness

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 347 of 1024

If the sign of loading changes in the process of unloading, response points move toward the point of maximum displacement in the zone of
progressing direction. If yielding has not occurred in this zone, the response points move toward the yield point on the skeleton curve. If
unloading becomes loading without changing the loading sign, the response points move along the unloading path. If the loading continually
increases, loading continues on the skeleton curve again.

- Degrading : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The load-displacement coordinates at unloading
move to the path of reaching the maximum deformation point on the opposite side due to the change of unloading stiffness once in the
middle. If yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the first yielding point is assumed to be the maximum deformation point.

- Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a tetralinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D, does
not exceed D3, the hysteresis rules are identical to the Original Taketa hysteresis. If the current displacement or deformation, D, exceeds D3,
response points move along the slope K4. For unloading, response points move by the same rules as the Original Taketa hysteresis. The
Takeda tetralinear hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 348 of 1024

- Modified Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D,
exceeds D2 for the first time or the maximum deformation point up until now, response points move along the trilinear skeleton curve. If
unloading takes place from this straight line toward the opposite direction, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the point of the
restoring force becoming 0. If the restoring force goes beyond the 0 point, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the
opposite side. Even in the case where unloading takes place from the straight line directed toward the maximum deformation point from the
point of the 0 restoring force, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the points reach the 0 restoring force. After the point of 0 restoring
force is passed, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the opposite side. The Modified Takeda type hysteresis model
can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

- Normal Bilinear : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. The Normal Bilinear type hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and
Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 349 of 1024

- Modified Ramberg-Osgood :

- Modified Hardin-Drnevich :

Symmetric / Asymmetric

: Select the type of Skeleton Curve.

Yield Function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 350 of 1024

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

- Yield Displacement : Enter the yield displacement of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Yield Displacement is selected for Input Type.

- Force (Yield Strength) : Yield strength is specified. It is user defined based on material and section properties. The user specifies positive (+)
values regardless of tension (t) or compression (c). The program treats compression as negative (-) internally.

Unloading Stiffness Parameter

Exponent in Unloading Stiffness Calculation: This is an option used to determine the unloading stiffness of the outer loop used in the
Clough and Takeda type models among hysteresis models of skeleton curves. This is used to reflect the effect of reduction in stiffness, which
occurs as the deformation progresses after yielding. The unloading stiffness is determined by the elastic stiffness reduced by the yield
displacement and maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins and the exponent entered here.

Inner Loop Unloading Stiffness Reduction Factor: This is used to determine the unloading stiffness of the inner loop. The inner loop is
formed when unloading occurs before reaching the target point on the skeleton curve while reloading after the loading sign changes in the
process of unloading. The unloading stiffness of the inner loop is calculated by multiplying the unloading stiffness of the outer loop by the
reduction ratio for the unloading stiffness of the inner loop.

Hinge Components (Multi)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 351 of 1024

- P-M Interaction Curves : Enter the P-M interaction curve data required to calculate 3-dimensional yield surfaces. All strength values must be
entered with positive sign. Sign convention for plotting P-M curve is positive for compression and negative for tension.

Strengths for the 1st P-M Interaction Curves

PC(t): First yield strength subject to pure tension force

PC(c): First yield strength subject to pure compression force

PCBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PCBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MCy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MCz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

Strengths for the 2nd P-M Interaction Curves

PY(t): Second yield strength subject to pure tension force

PY(c): Second yield strength subject to pure compression force

PYBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second stage yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PYBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MYy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MYz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

- Approximation of Yield Surface Shape : On the basis of P-M interaction curve, the parameters for 3-dimensional yield surface are either user
defined or auto-calculated. If some items are auto-calculated and the remainder is to be user defined, Auto-calculation should be performed
first, and then necessary items can be modified after converting to User Input. In case of Alpha, only user defined entry is possible. The value
of each parameter is used in the equation of yield surface displayed in the dialog box.

Beta y, Beta z, Gamma: Being the exponential powers of P-My or P-Mz interactions, different values can be entered for the first and second

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 352 of 1024

yields. For Beta y and Beta z on the other hand, two separate values representing the ranges of larger and smaller axial forces relative to the
axial force at the time of balanced failure can be entered.

Alpha: Exponent for My-Mz interaction for the 1st and 2nd yielding

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

α1: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the first yielding divided by the initial stiffness

α2: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the second yielding divided by the initial stiffness

- Initial Stiffness : The initial stiffness used in inelastic analysis is either selected or entered by the user.

Elastic Stiffness: elastic stiffness of a member is used as the initial stiffness for inelastic analysis.

User Defined: the user directly enters the initial stiffness if the Input Type is Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio.

Hinge Element Results

NOTE: Hinge element results are based upon the material Csys of the local hinge elements located along the total length/depth of the
beam/truss element. The example below covers all the results that are displayed for hinge elements.

- The images below display the characteristics of the material Csys for the hinge elements:

For the image displayed above, the positive axial direction is X (pointed downwards) while Y & Z axes form the shear direction. And the forces
are applied for axial direction (2500 kN) and shear "Z"direction (2500 kN) while the yield limit Force for the hinge element here is 950 kN. The
parent element here was modelled as 1D Beam.

Results List:

One can refer to the Appendix for complete results list and their description for Hinge Elements. They have also been summarized here for
ease of understanding:

- Hinge Force Results

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 353 of 1024

Axial Load Shear Force Y Shear Force Z

- Hinge Status Results

This group shows the status of Hinge elements, for hinge elements, either the elements have yielded or they are intact. In case of yielding, the software
gives the output as "1" and all other non yielded elements give an output of "0".

Yield Status (Axial) Yield Status (Shear Y) Yield Status (Shear Z)

To summarize the yield status of the hinge elements for the above example:

1. Axial Direction - 48 % return value of 1, hence they have yielded and transfer the force to the non yielded element returning a value of 0.

2. Shear Direction Y - All hinge elements are in non yield status, as the value is "0".

3. Shear Direction Z - All elements have yielded as value of "1" is consistent along the entire length of the beam.

- If hinge elements are applied to a parent truss element, then the axial yield results are in the form of a contour diagram as shown below:

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Control > Size Control(Point)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 354 of 1024

Size Control-Point

▒ Overview

Specify the size of elements surrounding the selected point. It is only applied to points imprinted on the surface or points that exist as
interior objects. Points that exist on sub-shapes, such as the corners of a surface, are automatically ignored during the mesh creation process.

▒ Methodology

Specify the point and input the mesh size with respect to the current length unit to generate a mesh around the selected point.

'Seeding' is defined as the 'position where the node will be generated’.

If a seed is assigned to the shape and the shape is then modified, all seeding information is erased. Hence, seeding assignment is best d1 just
before the mesh creation, after the geometrical shape has been finished. Seed information is the value that is applied first during mesh
creation and the value is continuously applied until it is erased or removed.

The generated seed information can be registered on the Control mesh column of the Model tree by the specified name. The seed
information can be erased/modified using the Context Menu.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Control > Size Control(Edge)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 355 of 1024

Size Control-Edge

▒ Overview

Select edges (lines) and use the following 5 methods to preset the position (mesh size) of the new mesh node. The node spacing can be
directly entered or a selected line can be divided into constant or linearly changing segments.

▒ Methodology

Interval Length

Input the node spacing in the current length unit.

Number of Divisions

Divides the selected line into multiple divisions, specified by the input number.

Linear Grading (Length)

Input the spacing between the start and end points of a line to automatically set the node positions through linear interpolation.

Linear Grading (Ratio)

Input the spacing ratio (end/start) between the start and end points of a line.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 356 of 1024

<Interval Length> <Number of Divisions>

<Linear Grading (Length)> <Linear Grading (Ratio)>

Hyperbolic Tangent

Input the start length and number of divisions to specify the nodes positions considering the total length of the line and number of divisions.

<Hyperbolic Tangent>

The number of divisions and certain intervals to the Linear Gradient (Length/Ratio) method. Entering the number of divisions makes it a
priority. The certain interval defines the section of the selected line where linear change will take place. Input 0 for the start point and 1 for the
end point. For an input of 0.3, the line will be divided by the specified constant value until 0.3 of the length from the start point. From that
point, linear change takes place. Entering a negative value applies the certain interval value from the end point. For an input of -0.3, the line
will be divided by the specified constant value until 0.3 of the length from the end point. The rest of the line will undergo linear change. Check
the symmetric seed option to generate seeds that are symmetric about the center of the line.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Control > Size Control(Custom seed)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 357 of 1024

Size Control-Custom seed

▒ Overview

Specify the node positions on the selected edge by entering the coordinates in the table directly. Entering a ratio between 0~1 automatically
calculates the node position (length) of the selected line.

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Control > Layer Control

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 358 of 1024

Layer Control

▒ Overview

This tool creates several layers of mesh around holes (circular closed shapes) to obtain more accurate stress concentration result.

▒ Methodology

Select the target surface where circular shape is present and edges from circular shape (closed edges domain) .

Number of Layers

Specify the number of layers to be offset (minimum value 1).

Total Layer Height

Specifies the height of the total number of boundary layers.

Layer Growth Rate

Proportionally adjusts the height value as the layer advances when the number of boundary layers is 2 or more.

Ex)

When 1 is input, it is represented by the same height.

If it is larger than 1, it becomes larger.

If it is smaller than 1 a layer is created with increasingly smaller heights.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 359 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Control > Default Size Control

Default Size Control

▒ Overview

The mesh size and number of divisions used in the mesh creation process can be preset. The default mesh size is not forced upon and is the
value entered in the Generate mesh dialog box. Hence, the user can input a different value to generate a different size mesh during the mesh
creation process.

▒ Methodology

Check the ‘Use Default Size’ to apply the default setting to all Generate mesh dialog boxes. The current length unit can be set directly or can
be defined by the number of divisions of the selected shape.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 360 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Control > Property Control

Property Control

▒ Overview

Pre-assign the properties (Edge, Face, Solid) of the geometry shape.

▒ Methodology

<Pre-asEdge (Property Control)> <Face (Property Control)> <Solid (Property Control)>

The element properties can be assigned simultaneously as the mesh creation. However, this function can be used to pre-assign the properties
of the geometry shape and to automatically generate elements using the assigned properties. Pre-assigning a property give it priority over
other property assignments during mesh creation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 361 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Control > Match Seed

Match Seed

▒ Overview

Specify the seed by transferring the seed information of a seeded edge to another edge. It is generally used to make the node positions of 2
separated edges similar to generate a homogeneous mesh or to ease the share node operation at a point with a very small gap.

▒ Methodology

Select the target edge and the already seeded source edge to transfer the seed information from the source edge to the target edge.

Projection

The source edge seeds are projected on to the target edge in the minimum distance direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 362 of 1024

Proportional

Set the ratio such that the target edge has the same node division ratio as the source edge.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Generate > 1D

1D

▒ Overview

Generate a 1D structural mesh by selecting an edge. It is mostly used to generate independent structural elements that do not require node
connections with neighboring ground elements.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 363 of 1024

Embedded trusses or Pile elements are interface elements that do not require node connections with neighboring ground elements. These
elements can set independent mesh sizes or number of divisions to generate meshes independently.

The assigned properties can be set or new properties can be added during Mesh creation.

[Orientation (Element Z-Axis)]

This function is used to unify the direction property of a 1D element to 1 direction or to set the major and minor axes directions. Adjust the Z
axis direction by checking the element coordinate axis and assigning with reference to the Beta angle.

l Reference node: Select the reference node for the sectional direction of the 1D element. The element Z coordinate direction is set with
reference to the selected node.

l Reference Vector (GCS): Set the Z coordinate direction of the selected element using the GCS direction or the input vector direction.

l Beta Angle: Angles 0, 90 and 180 can be chosen, and the selected Beta angle rotates the element by that angle with reference to the X
axis.

<Beta angle:0> <Beta angle:90> <Beta angle:180>

Advanced Option ( )

Small gaps within the tolerance can be automatically joined for mesh creation. When creating a mesh for 2 or more edges, individual
independent mesh sets can be generated.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 364 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Generate > 2D(Auto-Face)

2D: Auto-Face

▒ Overview

Generate a 2D mesh by selecting a surface. It is mostly used to generate a mesh in the ground or specified area of a 2D model.

▒ Methodology

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions for the surface forming edge to set the mesh size. Assigned properties can be
specified during mesh creation, and the name of the mesh set can be pre-determined.

Option ( )

Additional options are provided depending on the mesh generation method. The mesh shape, mesh density and generation algorithm can be
set. The initial settings take into account the efficiency and accuracy depending on the geometric shape for the best mesh generation. The
detailed settings are as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 365 of 1024

Merge Nodes

Merge 2 or more nodes within the tolerance during mesh generation. Nodes separated by tiny gaps are the main sources of error during
analysis, and small gaps within the tolerance can be automatically joined for mesh creation.

Refinement Factor

Select the mesh size (mesh density) that will be created in the interior of the selected shape. A more compact mesh is created as the value
approaches [Fine]. Fine meshes provide more detailed result analysis, but it is important to consider analysis time and efficiency when
selecting the mesh density.

2D Mesher

Select the mesh generation algorithm for mesh generation. The user can select between three options; Loop Mesher, Grid Mesher and
Delaunay Mesher. The generated shape and process change with the selected algorithm.

l Loop: Mesh generation method and shape based on Looping algorithm

l Grid: Complex mesh generation based on Modified grid algorithm

l Delaunay: Indirect mesh generation based on Delaunay triangulation algorithm

<Loop> <Grid> <Delaunay>

Element type

Generate a mesh with the selected shape. The user can select between a triangle, quadrilateral or a combination of the 2. Quadrilateral meshes
provide a more stable analysis, but for complex geometric shapes where quadrilateral meshes are difficult to generate, it is better to generate
a triangular mesh.

Higher-Order Element

Generate another node between mesh nodes to create a higher order mesh. Higher order adds a computation point and therefore, a more

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 366 of 1024

detailed analysis is possible, but the analysis time becomes longer. It is recommended that meshes be created with reference to the mesh
shape and mesh density, and the higher order meshes be created only when necessary, depending on the analysis method. For example,
generate a higher order mesh for the strength reduction method on a slope face where analysis of detailed deformation sections is necessary.

Check the [Skip Meshed Face(s)] to prevent overlapping generation of meshes on a surface with an existing mesh. The homogeneity option
can be set to make the mesh sizes as uniform as possible. Also, when generating meshes on multiple surfaces at the same time, the mesh sets
can be individualized by each surface or grouped into 1 mesh set.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Generate > 2D(Auto-Area)

2D:Auto-Area

▒ Overview

Select lines that form a closed area to generate a mesh in that domain. It does not create a surface for a complex 2D shape and is used to
generate a mesh in all areas.

▒ Methodology

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions for the area forming edge to set the mesh size.

If the closed domain is within another closed domain, use the [Mesh Inner Domain] option to divide the domain and auto-generate. If an

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 367 of 1024

interior line (edge) or point is selected, the option identifies the position of the line or point and creates a node. In particular, the [Include
Interior Edges] option can extract sub-shapes from an edge and is a vital option when generating a structural element.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Generate > 2D(Map-Face)

2D: Map-Face

▒ Overview

Select a surface and auto-generate a quadrilateral mesh. The Mapped mesh maps the selected shape with square domains and generates a
mesh on the mapped domains.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 368 of 1024

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions on the surface forming edge.

The target shape must have at least 4 outlines for the mesh to be generated and if the shape has too many outlines, the automatic mapping
may not work. In this case, select 4 corners to manually map the edges. The 4 selected points become the corners of the square domain and
lines between each point are mapped by 1 side of the square domain.

For mapped domains, mesh cannot be created if the opposing outlines (the group of outlines opposite each other after mapping) have
different number of generated mesh elements. Hence, it is convenient to work after entering the seed information on the edge beforehand.

Generating a mesh by selecting multiple surfaces in random order may not generate a mesh because the number of divisions on the left and
right are not the same. To avoid this, specify the mesh generation order as X axis, Y axis or Z axis and align the surfaces in order before
generating a mesh.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Generate > 2D (Map-Area)

2D :Map-Area

▒ Overview

Select lines that form a closed domain to generate a quadrilateral mesh.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 369 of 1024

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions on the surface forming edges. Select [Automatic Mapped-Boundaries] or
[Manual Mapped Boundaries] edge composition to select edges that form a closed domain.

<Automatic Mapped-Boundaries > <Manual Mapped Boundaries>

Automatic Mapped-Boundaries

Generate a 2D mapped mesh by automatically selecting edges that form the desired domain. The mesh may not be created due to the model
shape and algorithm properties.

Manual Mapped Boundaries

When the 2D mapped mesh cannot be automatically generated, the edges are divided into 4 explicit groups and then selected. All edges
within an edge group must be connected and the edge groups need to be specified in order, either in the clockwise or counter clockwise
direction. Finally, the selected edges must form 1 closed domain.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Generate > 3D(Auto-Solid)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 370 of 1024

3D: Auto-Solid

▒ Overview

Automatically generate a mesh on a 3D solid shape. The mesh shape can be selected between a tetrahedral and a hexahedron centered
hybrid (tetrahedral + hexahedron combination shape).

▒ Methodology

Automatic mesh generation - High quality hybrid mesh to minimize element number

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions on the solid forming edges to set the
mesh size. Also, the mesh density can determine the mesh size by the “More” or “Less” option in
[Automatic].

Mesh generator

The default tetrahedron element and hexahedral centered hybrid element are both supported. Like
the 2D mesh, quadrilateral-based meshes provide more stable analysis than triangle-based meshes.
Hybrid elements are formed by combining a pyramid and tetrahedron on the hexahedron base.

<Hybrid mesh shape>

Match Adjacent Faces

The most important part in mesh generation is the node connection between adjacent elements. If
the nodes are not connected, errors can occur during analysis and if the “Fit adjacent mesh” option
is checked off, the nodes may not be connected even though an interface forms between the 2
solids. Unless the node is removed separately, always keep this option checked when generating a

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 371 of 1024

mesh.

Advanced Option ( )

The mesh shape and mesh density options can be set additionally depending on the mesh
generation method. The detailed settings are as follows.

Interior Edge/Point

Generate a solid mesh considering the position and size of the interior edges inside a solid. If the
whole edge is within the solid, just selecting the edge creates a solid mesh that considers the
interior edge. However, if the edge is touching or penetrating the exterior boundary surface, the
intersecting point needs to be imprinted on the surface of the solid and the mesh division point
needs to be set to generate a solid mesh. Selecting an interior point creates a mesh node at the
point when the mesh is created.

The additionally selected interior edges can be assigned a 1D structural property during mesh
generation.

Merge Nodes

Merge 2 or more nodes within the tolerance during mesh generation. Nodes separated by tiny gaps
are main sources of error during analysis and small gaps within the tolerance can be automatically
joined for mesh creation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 372 of 1024

Refinement Factor

Set the interior mesh density in addition to the mesh size to create a better quality mesh.

Higher-Order Element

Generate another node between mesh nodes for a more detailed analysis, but the analysis time
becomes longer per additional node.

Other options are available, such as [Geometry Proximity], which divides meshes that have a size
difference during the mesh generation process, and {Pattern mesh}, which makes the mesh sizes as
uniform as possible.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Generate > 3D(Map-Solid)

3D : Map-Solid

▒ Overview

Automatically generate a hexahedral mesh on 3D solid.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 373 of 1024

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions on the corner edges to set the mesh size. Mapped meshes use only hexahedral
shapes to generate the mesh and so, the seed information on the 2 opposing surfaces needs to be identical. Hence for complex shapes, the
solid needed to be divided appropriately or the seed information must be input in advance.

Select Base Face

Use the Sweep Based Mapped Mesh algorithm to generate a mesh when the 3D mapped mesh is not generated by the Full Mapping
algorithm. However, the mapped mesh may not be generated if the shape is complex and the reference surface cannot be automatically
found. In this case, directly select the reference surface for Sweep.

Match Adjacent Mesh

Generating a mesh by selecting multiple solids in random order may not generate a mesh because the number of divisions on the left and
right are not the same. To avoid this, specify the mesh generation order as X axis, Y axis or Z axis and align the surfaces in order before
generating a mesh.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Generate > 3D(2D to 3D)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 374 of 1024

3D : 2D->3D

▒ Overview

Generate a tetrahedral or hybrid (hexahedral centered) mesh using 2D mesh information for a 2D mesh enclosed domain with no solids.

▒ Methodology

The 2D mesh must completely surround the domain where the 3D mesh will be created without any free edges. The original 3D mesh can be
deleted or kept.

Advanced options ( )

The following advanced options can be set when generating a 3D mesh from a 2D mesh. The nodes within the tolerance can be automatically
merged to prevent analysis error and the interior mesh density of the solid mesh can be specified. Selecting the [Avoid Tetra with All Boundary
Nodes] option prevents the 4 nodes of the tetrahedral element from all being on the boundary surface. This option puts at least 2 elements in
the thickness direction of a thin solid and granting it a boundary condition can prevent the 4 nodes of the tetrahedral element from all being
restricted.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 375 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Generate > Remesh

Remesh

▒ Overview

Regenerate a 2D mesh using already created 2D mesh information to define the surface. This option can be used to edit the mesh size and
shape.

▒ Methodolgoy

When selecting the target for mesh generation, surfaces that do not have an existing 2D mesh are not selected. The mesh type can be
selected from triangular, quadrilateral and triangular+quadrilateral combined elements.

Maximum Element Size

Specify the maximum Element size of the new mesh. However, if the target surface is seeded, the seed is also applied to the mesh
regeneration process. Hence, to specify a new mesh size, the existing seeds need to be deleted before regeneration.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 376 of 1024

Patch Angle

Input the maximum angle between the selected existing element and the new generated element. The angle needs to be smaller than 45
degrees.

Keep Boundary Nodes

Decide whether to keep the boundary nodes. The boundary node positions may not be changed, even if the element shape or size is changed,
to connect with other nodes of adjacent meshes.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Mesh Set > Rename

Rename

▒ Overview

Change the name of the mesh set by adding numeric suffixes in the specified order. Because the data used for construction step is classified
by the name of the mesh set, it is recommended to classify the mesh sets by domain or property in advance. It is especially useful to use the
Wizard to automatically set the construction step.

▒ Methodology

Select all the mesh sets that need name changes and set the classified order and name. For example,
selecting 3 mesh sets and entering “Excavation” for the name and “3” for the Start number changes
the name of the mesh sets in the classified order to “Excavation-003”, “Excavation-004”, “Excavation-
005”.

Coordinate

Specify the mesh set order with respect to the Global Rectangular or Cylindrical coordinate system.
Specify the order according to priority by specifying each coordinate axis direction in 1st, 2nd, or 3rd
priorities. The 1st axis is given the most preference, and the 2nd axis becomes the order reference
when the coordinates of the 1st axis are equal. Hence, if the target is assigned an order in the 1st
axis, the order does not change even if the coordinates in the 2nd axis is different. If the coordinates
are the same in both the 1st and 2nd axes, the 3rd axis determines the order.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 377 of 1024

Base Point of Mesh Set (Bounding Box)

Specify the coordinates of the calculation position used for order comparison. For example, selecting
the center compares the position of the mesh set using the coordinates of the center point of the
mesh set boundary box.

Order

Increase or decrease the suffix number in order of specification.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Mesh Set > Copy

Copy

▒ Overview

Copy the generated mesh set. The copied mesh can be used in various ways. For example, the mesh can be generated without further
geometrical modeling when comparing different materials or properties on each copied element to the original element; or when the same
element is uniformly placed for each construction step.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 378 of 1024

Select the target mesh set and input the new position to copy all the nodes and elements of the original mesh set to the new position 1 by 1.
The [Copy Prestress Option for 1D Elements] allows the user to copy the prestress force applied to 1d elements directly to the copied mesh
sets thus eliminating the redundant process of applying the force again and again.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Mesh Set > Create

Create

▒ Overview

Create multiple empty mesh sets according to the specified name rule. This function is useful for defining an element in 1 set into multiple
sets.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 379 of 1024

Input the name of the newly generated mesh set. When creating multiple mesh sets, input the starting number and number of mesh sets.

Data used in analysis is classified by mesh sets. Hence, the mesh set needs to be subdivided depending on the analysis case. Generating an
empty mesh set, clicking it with the right mouse button and bringing up the Context Menu allows the [Include/Exclude of Elements and
Nodes] for each mesh set, as shown below.

<Include/Exclude Elements/Nodes>

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Mesh Set > Divide

Divide

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 380 of 1024

Divide the mesh set by curved face and straight face. The elements which are located middle of the faces will be automatically moved to the
set which are more included.

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Extrude(Node to 1D)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 381 of 1024

Extrude: Node->1D

▒ Overview

Generate a 1D element by extruding a node in the set direction. This function can be used to create a structural element without drawing a
line.

▒ Methodology

Select the element node to extrude and specify the extrude direction and length. The element can
be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions.

Orientation (Element Z axis)

This function is used to unify the direction property of a 1D element to 1 direction or to set the
major and minor axis directions. Adjust the Z axis direction by checking the element coordinate axis
and assign with reference to the Beta angle.

l Reference Node : Select the reference node for the sectional direction of the 1D element. The element Z coordinate direction is set with
reference to the selected node.

l Reference Vector (GCS) : Set the Z coordinate direction of the selected element using the GCS direction or the input vector direction.

l Beta Angle : Angles 0,90,180 can be chosen and the selected Beta angle rotates the element by that angle with reference to the X axis.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 382 of 1024

<Beta:0> <Beta:90> <Beta:180>

Extrude Direction

Select the element extrude direction with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the direction vector using the 2-point
vector function. It is useful when extruding in an arbitrary direction.

Extrude Information

Set the total length and division of 1D element which will be created. The division spacing can be set as either uniform or nonuniform.
Entering a negative value for length (Offset,Times) extrudes in the opposite direction to the axis or vector direction.

[Nonuniform]

Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@length for continuously
repeating extrude operations.

For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates 3 elements, each with a length of 2,3 and
4.

[Uniform]

Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.

Advanced Option ( )

When checking the User defined mesh set, the generated elements are classified and registered in different mesh sets depending on the
number of inputs in the [Offsets per Set] option. Entering a number registers the mesh sets in the specified uniform offset spacing and
entering 2 or more numbers register the mesh sets in the specified uniform offset spacing and the rest are registered separately on the mesh
set. When entering 2 or more numbers, the sum of input numbers should not be more than the total number of offsets.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Exxtrude(1D to 2D)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 383 of 1024

Extrude: 1D->2D

▒ Overview

Generate a 2D element by extruding a 1D element, element edge (element outline) or line (edge). Here, the used edge needs to be seeded
(have seed information) or needs to be connected to the mesh.

▒ Methodolgoy

Select the 1D element, element side or edge to be extruded and set the extrude direction, length
and number of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions.
The original element used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element
is moved to the end of the extruded element.

<1D element->2D element extrude> <Element edge->2D element extrude>

<Geometry edge->2D element extrude>

Extrude Direction

Select the element extrude direction with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of
the direction vector using the 2-point vector function. It is useful when extruding in an arbitrary
direction.

Extrude Information

Set the total length and division of 2D element will be created. The division spacing can be set as

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 384 of 1024

either uniform or non-uniform. Entering a negative value for length (offset, spacing) extrudes in
the opposite direction to the axis or vector direction.

[Non-uniform]

Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,)
or as number@length for continuously repeating extrude operations.

For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates
3 elements, each with a length of 2,3 and 4.

[Uniform]

Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced
options ( ).

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Extrude(2D to 3D)

Extrude : 2D->3D

▒ Overview

Generate a 3D element by extruding a 2D element of a boundary surface of a 3D element.

▒ Methodology

Select the 2D element or 3D element face to be extruded and set the extrude direction, length and
number of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions. The
original element used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is
moved to the end of the extruded element.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 385 of 1024

<2D element->3D element extrude> <Element face->3D element extrude>

Extrude Direction

Select the element extrude direction with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of
the direction vector using the 2 points vector function. It is useful when extruding in an arbitrary
direction.

Extrude Information

Set the total length and division of 3D element which will be created. The division spacing can be
set as either uniform or nonuniform. Entering a negative value for length (offset, spacing) extrudes
in the opposite direction to the axis or vector direction.

[Nonuniform]

Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,) or
as number@length for continuously repeating extrude operations.

For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates
3 elements, each with a length of 2,3 and 4.

[Uniform]

Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Revolve(Node to 1D)

Revolve:Node->1D

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 386 of 1024

▒ Overview

Generate a 1D element by rotating a node about the specified revolution axis by the input angle. It can be used to create various arch or
circle shaped 1D elements without using geometry shape.

▒ Methodology

Generate a 1D element by rotating a node about the specified rotation axis by the input angle. It
can be used to create various arch or circle shaped, 1D elements without using geometry shape.

Rotation Axis

Select the rotation axis with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the direction
vector using the 2 points vector function. It is useful when setting the reference axis in an arbitrary
direction. When using the GCS, use the [Locate] option to set the revolution axis position using its
coordinates. The revolution axis is moved to the coordinate position and the node is rotated about
the moved axis.

Revolution Information

Set the rotation angle and division of 1D element will be created. The division spacing can be set as
either uniform or non-uniform. Entering a positive angle rotate extrudes in the counterclockwise
direction and entering a negative angle rotate extrudes in the clockwise direction.

[Non-uniform]

Specify the rotation angle. The angle can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@angle for
continuously repeating angles.

For example, entering 10@20 continuously creates 10 elements that are rotated 20 degrees from
the previous element and entering 10,20,30 creates 3 elements, each rotated by 10 degrees, 20
degrees and 30 degrees.

[Uniform]

Set the rotation angle and number, or input the total rotation angle and division spacing.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Revolve(1D to 2D)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 387 of 1024

Revolve: 1D->2D

▒ Overview

Generate a 2D element by revolve extruding a 1D element, element side (element outline) or line (edge). Here, the used edge needs to be
seeded (have seed information) or needs to be connected to the mesh.

▒ Methodology

Select the 1D element, element side or edge to be revolve extruded and set the rotation axis,
rotation angle and number of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2
directions. The original element used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used
element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

<1D element->2D revolve extrude> <Element ede->2D revolve extrude>

<Geometry edge->2D revolve extrude>

Rotation Axis

Select the rotation axis with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the direction
vector using the 2 points vector function. It is useful when setting the reference axis in an arbitrary
direction. When using the GCS, use the [Locate] option to set the revolution axis position using its
coordinates. The revolution axis is moved to the coordinate position and the node is rotate
extruded about the moved axis.

Revolution Information

Set the rotation angle and division of 1D element will be created. The division spacing can be set as
either uniform or non-uniform. Entering a positive angle rotate extrudes in the counterclockwise
direction and entering a negative angle rotate extrudes in the clockwise direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 388 of 1024

[Non-uniform]

Specify the rotation angle. The angle can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@angle for
continuously repeating angles.

For example, entering 10@20 continuously creates 10 elements that are rotated 20 degrees from
the previous element and entering 10,20,30 creates 3 elements, each rotated by 10 degrees, 20
degrees and 30 degrees.

[Uniform]

Set the rotation angle and number, or input the total rotation angle and division spacing.

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options
( ).

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Revolve(2D to 3D)

Revolve:2D->3D

▒ Overview

Generate a 3D element by rotate extruding a 2D element or a boundary surface of a 3D element.

▒ Methodology

Select the 2D element or 3D element boundary surface to be revolve extruded and set the rotation
axis, rotation angle and number of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction
or 2 directions. The original element used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the
used element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 389 of 1024

<2D element->3D revolve extrude> <Element Face->3D revolve extrude>

Rotation Axis

Select the rotation axis with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the direction
vector using the 2 points vector function. It is useful when setting the reference axis in an arbitrary
direction.

When using the GCS, use the [Locate] option to set the revolution axis position using its
coordinates. The revolution axis is moved to the coordinate position and the node is rotate
extruded about the moved axis.

Revolution Information

Set the rotation angle and division of 1D element will be created. The division spacing can be set as
either uniform or non-uniform. Entering a positive angle rotate extrudes in the counterclockwise
direction and entering a negative angle rotate extrudes in the clockwise direction.

[Non-uniform]

Specify the rotation angle. The angle can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@angle for
continuously repeating angles.

For example, entering 10@20 continuously creates 10 elements that are rotated 20 degrees from
the previous element and entering 10,20,30 creates 3 elements, each rotated by 10 degrees, 20
degrees and 30 degrees.

[Uniform]

Set the rotation angle and number, or input the total rotation angle and division spacing.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Fill(Node to 2D)

Fill: Node -> 2D

▒ Overview

Generate a 2D surface element between 2 nodes. It is useful when creating elements in a certain area using edit/add mesh.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 390 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Set the top and bottom nodes of the 2D element to set the total domain and define the mesh size by entering the mesh size directly or the
number of divisions between nodes. The number of top nodes and bottom nodes must be the same and the selected nodes are assigned a
number in order. The same numbered nodes correspond and generate a 2D element. To reverse the corresponding order, use the [Reverse
Ends] option.

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options ( ).

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Fill(1D to 2D)

Fill : 1D -> 2D

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 391 of 1024

Generate a 2D surface element that connects 1D elements or 2 edges. It is useful when creating a 2D connecting element between structural
elements or surface elements.

▒ Methodolgy

Select the top and bottom nodes or edges of the 2D element and define the mesh size by entering
the mesh size directly or the number of divisions between edges or nodes. The number of top
nodes and bottom elements must be the same when using a 1D element and if a line (edge) is used,
the input seed information for the top and bottom lines (edges) need to be the same. The bottom
element, or start point of a line and top element, or start point of a line correspond in order and
generate a 2D element. If the start point of the bottom element and end point of the top element
correspond such that the element is twisted, use the [Reverse Ends] option to reverse the
corresponding order.

<1D->2D요소> <선 -> 2D 요소>

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced
options ( ).

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Fill(2D to 3D)

Fill : 2D -> 3D

▒ Overview

Generate a 3D element that connects 2D elements. It is useful when adding elements to a certain area to edit the model.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 392 of 1024

Select the top and bottom 2D elements and define the 3D element size by entering the mesh size
directly or the number of divisions between the selected 2D elements. The number of top and
bottom elements of each selected 2D element need to the same and the element position or shape
needs to be similar to allow 3D element fill. If the corresponding pairs cannot be found
automatically, the corresponding reference nodes need to be specified manually. Each reference
node needs to exist on the outline of the element.

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options
( ).

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Sweep(Node to1D)

Sweep:Node->1D

▒ Overview

Generate a 1D element by sweeping a node about a selected guide curve. It is useful to create complex elements continuously.

▒ Methodology

Select the element node to extrude and select the sweep guide curve or node positions that can
substitute the guide curve. Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions for the
selected curve.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 393 of 1024

Sweep Guide

[Curve]

Only 1 guide curve can be selected. Hence, the curves for a complex shape need to be created into
a single wire in advance.

[Sequential Nodes]

When selecting multiple nodes, be aware that the extrude direction is specified by the selection
order. When selecting the nodes directly, the spacing between the nodes becomes the element size
so the size does not need to be set.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Sweep(1D to 2D)

Sweep: 1D->2D

▒ Overview

Generate a 2D element by extruding a 1D element, element side (element outline) or line (edge) along a guide curve. Here, the used edge
needs to be seeded (have seed information) or needs to be connected to the mesh.

▒ Methodolgy

Select the 1D element, element side or seeded line (edge) to be extruded and directly select the
sweep guide curve or node positions that can substitute the guide curve. The element size can be
directly entered or defined by the number of divisions on the selected extrude curve. The original
element used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to
the end of the extruded element.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 394 of 1024

<1D element->2D Sweep extrude> <Element edge->2D Sweep extrude>

<Geometry edge->2D Sweep extrude>

Sweep Guide

[Curve]

Only 1 guide curve can be selected. Hence, the curves for a complex shape need to be created
into a single wire in advance.

[Sequential Nodes]

When selecting multiple nodes, be aware that the extrude direction is specified by the selection
order. When selecting the nodes directly, the spacing between the nodes becomes the element
size so the size does not need to be set.

[End Scale Ratio]

Adjust the scale ratio at the end of the element generation to set the ratio for the extruded mesh
size.

For example, entering 2 generates an element that is 2 times larger at the extrude finish point.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Sweep(2D to 3D)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 395 of 1024

Sweep: 2D -> 3D

▒ Overview

Generate a 3D element by extruding a 2D element or 3D element boundary surface along a guide curve.

▒ Methodology

Select the 2D element or 3D element boundary surface and select the sweep guide curve or node
positions that can substitute the guide curve. Define the mesh size directly or input the number of
divisions for the selected curve. The original element (2D element) used in extrude can be
deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

<2D element->3D Sweep extrude> <Element Face->3D Sweep extrude>

Orthogonal

Extrude along the selected guide line or in the orthogonal direction to the selected node direction
to generate an element. It is especially useful when rotate extrude along a curve.

Sweep Guide

[Curve]

Only 1 guide curve can be selected. Hence, the curves for a complex shape need to be created into
a single wire in advance.

[Sequential Nodes]

When selecting multiple nodes, be aware that the extrude direction is specified by the selection
order. When selecting the nodes directly, the spacing between the nodes becomes the element size
so the size does not need to be set.

[End Scale Ratio]

Adjust the scale ratio at the end of the element generation to set the ratio for the extruded mesh
size.

For example, entering 2 generates an element that is 2 times larger at the extrude finish point.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Project(Node to 1D)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 396 of 1024

Project : Node -> 1D

▒ Overview

Generate a 1D element by project extrude a node. It is useful when generating an element in the same direction as the target surface
(projection target).

▒ Methodology

Select the element nodes to project extrude and specify the projection target (target surface) and
projection direction. Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions for the
projection distance.

Project Target

Select an existing surface of a geometry shape or an element boundary surface as the projection
target (target surface) or select 3 arbitrary points that pass the target surface using the [Tree points
Plane] function.

Projection Direction

Set the projection direction using the axis direction on the GCS or the direction of an arbitrary
vector that connects the start and end points. Use the [Shortest Path Line] to automatically set the
shortest distance direction between the node and projection target (target surface) in the normal
direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 397 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Project(1D to 2D)

Project : 1D-> 2D

▒ Overview

Generate a 2D element by project extruding a 1D element, element side (element boundary line) or edge onto the target surface. Here, the
used edge needs to be seeded, or connected to a mesh.

▒ Methodology

Select the 1D element, element side or seeded line (edge) to be extruded and set the projection
target (target surface) and direction. The element size can be directly entered or defined by the
number of divisions on the distance to the projection. The original element used in extrude can be
deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

<1D element->2D Project extrude> <Element edge->2D Project extrude>

<Geometry edge->2D Project extrude>

Project Target

Select an existing surface of a geometry shape or an element boundary surface as the projection
target (target surface). Or, select 3 arbitrary points that pass the target surface using the [Tree Points
Plane] function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 398 of 1024

Projection Direction

Set the projection direction using the axis direction on the GCS or the direction of an arbitrary
vector that connects the start and end points. Use the [Shortest Path Line] to automatically set the
shortest distance direction between the node and projection target (target surface) in the normal
direction.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Project(2D to 3D)

Project: 2D->3D

▒ Overview

Generate a 3D element by project extruding a 2D element or 3D element surface (element boundary surface).

▒ Methodology

Select the 2D element or element face to project extrude and set the projection target (target
surface) and direction. The element size can be directly entered or defined by the number of
divisions on the distance to the projection. The original element (2D element) used in extrude can
be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to the end of the extruded
element.

<2D element->3D Project extrude> <Element face->3D Project extrude>

Project Target

Select an existing surface of a geometry shape or an element boundary surface as the project target
(target surface). Or, select 3 arbitrary points that pass the target surface using the [Three points

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 399 of 1024

Plane] function.

Projection Direction

Set the projection direction using the axis direction on the GCS or the direction of an arbitrary
vector that connects the start and end points. Use the [Shortest Path Line] to automatically set the
shortest distance direction between the node and projection target (target surface) in the normal
direction.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Offset(1D to 2D)

Offset:1D->2D

▒ Overview

Generate a 2D element by offset extruding a 1D element, element side or line (edge). Here, the used edge needs to be seeded (have seed
information) or needs to be connected to the mesh.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 400 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Select the 1D element, element side or seeded line (edge) to be extruded and directly select the
offset direction, extrude length and number of element divisions. The element can be created by
extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions. The original element (1D) used in extrude can be
deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

<1D element->2D Offset extrude> <Element edge->2D Offset extrude>

<Geometry edge->2D Offset extrude>

Offset Direction

Set the extrude direction in the selected object [Positive] direction (normal direction), [Negetive]
direction (opposite normal direction), or in both directions.

Extrude Information

Set the total width and division of 2D element will be created. The division spacing can be uniform
or non-uniform. Entering a negative value for length (offset, spacing) extrudes in the opposite
direction to the axis or vector direction.

[Non-uniform]

Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,) or
as number@length for continuously repeating extrude operations.

For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates
3 elements, each with a length of 2,3 and 4.

[Uniform]

Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options
( ).

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Extrude > Offset(2D to 3D)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 401 of 1024

Offset : 2D->3D

▒ Overview

Generate a 3D element by offset extruding a 2D element or a 3D element boundary surface.

▒ Methodology

Select the 2D element or 3D element boundary surface and set the offset direction, extrude length
and number of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions. The
original element (2D) used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is
moved to the end of the extruded element.

<2D element->3D Offset extrude> <Element face->3D Offset extrude>

Offset Direction

Set the extrude direction in the selected object [Possitive] direction (normal direction), [Negetive]
direction (opposite normal direction), or in [Both] directions.

Extrude Information

Set the total width and division of 2D element will be created. The division spacing can be uniform
or non-uniform. Entering a negative value for length (offset, spacing) extrudes in the opposite
direction to the axis or vector direction.

[Non-uniform]

Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,) or
as number@length for continuously repeating extrude operations.

For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates 3
elements, each with a length of 2,3 and 4.

[Uniform]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 402 of 1024

Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Transform > Translate

Translate

▒ Overview

Move/copy a node, element or mesh set. It is useful for moving the element position or copying the same element to a specified distance.

▒ Methodology

Select the node, element or mesh set to move (or copy) and define the direction.

Direction

Select the move/copy direction with respect to the GCS or the direction of a vector that connects 2
arbitrary points. For the 2 points vector function, select (deselect) a particular coordinate axis and
select only the directional comp1nt of a vector defined by a start and end point.

Method

Move the position of the selected element or copy and move the element to a specified or arbitrary
distance.

[Move]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 403 of 1024

Directly input the move distance or using the 2 points vector function, automatically calculate the
actual move distance with reference to the start and end points. Select the button to check the
automatically calculated distance.

[Copy (Uniform)]

Specify the copy distance and number of copies. Entering a negative value copies the object in the
opposite direction to the set direction.

[Copy (Non-Uniform)]

The length can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@length for continuously repeated moves
(copies).

For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a move length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4
creates 3 elements, each with a move/copy length of 2,3 and 4.

[Copy Prestress for 1D Elements]

It allows the user to copy the prestress force applied to 1d elements directly to the copied mesh sets
thus eliminating the redundant process of applying the force again and again.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Transform > Rotate

Rotate

▒ Overview

Rotate a node, element or mesh set about the rotation axis to move/copy. It is useful for continuously generating a mesh that forms a certain
angle.

▒ Methodology

Select the node, element or mesh set to rotate move (or copy) and define the revolution axis.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 404 of 1024

Rotation Axis

Select the move/copy revolution axis with respect to the GCS or for the 2 points vector function,
input the start and end point coordinates of the direction vector. It is useful when setting the
reference axis in an arbitrary direction.

When using the GCS, use the [Locate] option to set the rotation axis position using its coordinates.
The rotation axis is moved to the specified coordinate position and the node is rotated and
moved/copied about this axis.

For the 2 points vector function, select (deselect) a particular coordinate axis and select only the
directional comp1nt of a vector defined by a start and end point.

Methodology

Specify the rotation angle and rotation copy angle. A uniform angle or arbitrarily set non-uniform
angle can be used to rotate and move/copy.

[Move]

Directly input the rotation angle.

[Copy (Uniform)]

Set the rotation angle and number of repetitions. Input a negative to rotate in the opposite direction
to the set direction.

[Copy (Non-uniform)]

The angle can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@angle for continuously repeating angles.

For example, entering 10@30 continuously creates 10 elements that are rotated 30 degrees from the
previous element and entering 20,30,40 creates 3 elements, each rotated and moved/copied by 20
degrees, 30 degrees and 40 degrees.

[Copy Prestress for 1D Elements]

It allows the user to copy the prestress force applied to 1d elements directly to the copied mesh sets
thus eliminating the redundant process of applying the force again and again.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Transform > Mirror

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 405 of 1024

Mirror

▒ Overview

Mirror a node, element or mesh set and move/copy. If a section shape is symmetrical, model only half and use the mirror (copy) function to
easily model the whole section.

▒ Methodology

Select the node, element or mesh set to mirror move/copy and select the mirror type. The mirror
types are point, axis and plane. Use the copy target option to use mirror move and copy
simultaneously.

<Mirror point> <Mirror axis>

<Mirror plane>

Mirror Type

[Point] : Directly select the mirror point or input the coordinates.

[Axis] : Select the mirror axis on the GCS or define an arbitrary vector axis that connects the start and
end points.

[Plane] : Select the mirror plane or define an arbitrary plane that passes 3 points.

[Copy Prestress for 1D Elements]

It allows the user to copy the prestress force applied to 1d elements directly to the copied mesh sets
thus eliminating the redundant process of applying the force again and again.

Generating an element using the mirror move operation reverses its coordinates with respect to the original element.

For example, the normal direction is reversed for 2D elements that are mirrored about an axis or point. This creates an error during analysis
and the element coordinate system needs to be united from Mesh > Element > Parameter.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 406 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Transform > Scale

Scale

▒ Overview

Scale up/down a node, element or mesh set with reference to a scale center.

▒ Methodology

Select the node, element or mesh set to scale up/down and specify the scale center. Apply a
constant ratio with respect to the scale center or selectively apply a scale factor on the axial
direction of the GCS.

Check the copy target option to use scale up/down and copy simultaneously

Scale type

[Uniform] : Scale up/down the selected target in all axial directions of the GCS uniformly.

[NonUniform] : The scale factor can be applied differently for each axial direction on the GCS.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 407 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Transform > Sweep

Sweep

▒ Overview

Move a node, element or mesh set along a sweep guide and copy.

▒ Methodology

Select the node, element or mesh set and directly select the sweep guide or node positions that can
substitute the guide curve. Specify the center point. Apply a certain ratio with respect to the center
point or apply a selective scale factor on the axial directions of the GCS.

Sweep Guide

[Curve]

Only 1 guide curve can be selected. Hence, the curves for a complex shape need to be created into
a single wire in advance.

[Sequential Nodes]

When selecting multiple nodes, be aware that the extrude direction is specified by the selection
order. When selecting the nodes directly, the spacing between the nodes becomes the element size
so the size does not need to be set.

[Orthogonal]

The copied shape is always perpendicular to the sweep guide and the reference point can be set by
selecting a node.

[End Scale Ratio]

Adjust the scale factor at the end of the element generation to set the ratio for the sweeped mesh

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 408 of 1024

size.

For example, entering 2 generates an element that is 2 times larger at the sweep finish point.

Size Method

[Size] : Directly specify the mesh size. For Sweep move/copy, it is the sweep interval.

[Ratio] : Define the sweep interval and number with a ratio between 0~1.

For example, entering 0.3,0.5,1 moves/copies the mesh at 0.3,0.5,1 ratio positions on the total length
of the sweep guide.

[Divisions] : Define the sweep interval by the number of divisions on the total length of the sweep
guide.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Node > Create

Create

▒ Overview

Add a node in the desired position on the 3D work space. There are a total of 5 node creation methods. The position and number can be
freely adjusted depending on the creation method. The additional node number can be set as the minimum non-overlapping and available
number or the maximum number+1.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 409 of 1024

Coordinates

Directly input the node coordinates or select the position on the screen using snap point.

Between 2 nodes

Create an additional node between the 2 selected nodes. Select the number of nodes to create and when
creating more than 1 node, adjust the spacing by entering the ratio between the starting space and ending
space of nodes,

Center of nodes

Create an additional node at the center of the shape created by selecting 2 or more nodes.

On curve

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 410 of 1024

Add a node on the selected curve. The node position can be specified by directly entering its distance from
the start or end point, or by entering a ratio between 0~1. The [Reverse Direction] option can be used to
reverse the direction of the start point and end point.

Conic center

Automatically create a node at the center point of selected arc (circle). The node can also be created by
using the snap position for arc centers.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Node > Delete

Delete

▒ Overview

Delete a node.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 411 of 1024

The free nodes that are not connected to an element can be deleted and selected. However, deleting a node that forms an element will delete
the element as well.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Node > Merge

Merge

▒ Overview

Merge 2 or more nodes into 1, or merge two nodes by selecting be moved and be kept node continuously. It is mostly used to connect
nodes between elements that are slightly apart during the modeling modification process. It is useful when checking for model errors due to
free edges by checking the free nodes that are not connected to an element.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 412 of 1024

Selected Nodes

Select the nodes to merge and define the merge criterion. The tolerance is the allowable limit of the merger; nodes with spacing smaller than
the tolerance are merged. Selecting ‘find’ automatically searches for nodes below the tolerance. The merged node positions are specified by
the node number (Smallest ID/Largest ID) or the Center of Nodes (Merge Nodes at the Center Location). The [Blink Mark] function indicates
the Free Nodes on the screen, which can be used to distinguish modeling errors such as Free Edges.

2-Nodes

Merge 2 nodes by selecting the moving node and maintained node. If a Free Edge is created on a small area, the Merge 2-Nodes function can
be used to edit easily.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Node > Project

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 413 of 1024

Project

▒ Overview

Project the node onto the target surface or edge.

▒ Methodology

Select the nodes to project; the target shape can be selected between a surface and edge. The
projection direction can be selected using the axis direction on the GCS or the direction of an
arbitrary vector that connects the start and end points. Use the [Shortest Path Line] to
automatically set the shortest distance direction between the node and projection target (target
surface) in the normal direction. Selecting all nodes of the element moves the whole mesh.
Selecting only some nodes, the unselected nodes remain in their position and the element shape
and size automatically changes with the projection distance.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Node > Align

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 414 of 1024

Align

▒ Overview

Align/move the selected nodes with reference to the target node. It is useful when editing the shape with respect to the target node and
alignment direction.

▒ Methodology

Select the nodes to align and the alignment reference node to move the target nodes in the alignment direction. The alignment direction can
be selected from 1 of the X,Y,Z axis directions of the GCS. Selecting all nodes of the element moves the whole mesh. Selecting only some
nodes, the unselected nodes remain in their position and the element shape and size automatically changes with the projection distance.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Node > Modify

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 415 of 1024

Modify

▒ Overview

Select individual nodes to edit the node number and node coordinate system.

▒ Methodology

Select the node to edit or input the node number to automatically print the coordinates of that point. The node number can be kept or a new
node can be assigned, provided that the new number does not conflict with an existing node number. Simultaneously, the coordinate system
of the selected node can be changed. The node coordinate system change can be d1 simultaneously for multiple nodes in the coordinate
system function.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Node > Coordinate system

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 416 of 1024

Coordinate System

▒ Overview

Change the node coordinate system.

▒ Methodology

Select the node to change the coordinate system. The changed coordinate system can be selected from the Rectangular coordinate system,
Cylindrical coordinate system and the arbitrary setting using the 3-point plane.

The Rectangular coordinate system and Cylindrical coordinate system can be distinguished as follows.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Create(1D)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 417 of 1024

Create: 1D

▒ Overview

Create a 1D element connecting 2 nodes. This is useful when creating structural elements (pile, embedded truss, truss element) which do not
require connections to the neighboring ground individually.

▒ Methodology

Input the element ID that becomes the end points of the 1D element. Already created nodes can be
selected in order on the screen. The element ID is automatically set to maximum previous
number+1. Note that the number being directly entered cannot overlap with an existing node ID.
Structural properties that will be assigned can be set or added to the created element and the mesh
set can be created separately.

Orientation (Element Z axis)

This function is used to unify the direction property of a 1D element to 1 direction or to set the
major and minor axis directions. Adjust the Z axis direction by checking the element coordinate axis
and assign with reference to the Beta angle.

l Reference Node: Select the reference node for the sectional direction of the 1D element. The element Z coordinate direction is set with
reference to the selected node.

l Reference Vector (GCS): Set the Z coordinate direction of the selected element using the GCS direction or the input vector direction.

l Beta Angle: Angles 0,90,180 can be chosen and the selected Beta angle rotates the element by that angle with reference to the X axis..

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 418 of 1024

<Beta:0> <Beta:90> <Beta:180>

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Create(2D)

Create: 2D

▒ Overview

Create a 2D element connecting 2 nodes. This is useful when creating an arbitrary surface strain element in an area where mesh auto-
generation has failed.

▒ Methodology

Create a triangular or rectangular element depending on the number of selected nodes. Directly
input the node numbers that will become the corners of the 2D element, or select already created
nodes in order on the screen. The element ID is automatically set to maximum previous number+1
and when entering the number directly, the number cannot overlap with an existing node number.
Properties that will be assigned can be set or added and the mesh set can be created separately.
Using the automatic generation function generates a mesh set immediately after node selection.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 419 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Create(3D)

Create: 3D

▒ Overview

Create a 3D element filling the space between selected nodes. It is useful when creating individual 3D elements of a complex geometry.

▒ Methodology

Create a tetrahedral, pyramidal, pentahedral, hexahedral shape depending on the number of

selected nodes. Directly input the node numbers that will become the corners of the 3D element,
or select already created nodes in order on the screen. The element number is automatically set to
maximum previous number+1 and when entering the number directly, the number cannot overlap
with an existing node number. Properties which will be assigned can be set or added and the
mesh set can be created separately.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 420 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Create(Other)

Create: Other

▒ Overview

Create a spring, node link or Pile affiliated elements as shown below. The assigned properties can be defined depending on the created
element type.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 421 of 1024

Point spring

Create a spring with a constant stiffness on the selected node. The constraints on deformation and rotation with
reference to the GCS are defined by the spring constant and damping coefficient. It is mostly used as a flexible
support condition for ground or a constraint condition for dynamic analysis.

Matrix Spring

Has the same function as the Point spring. However, the spring constant for deformation and rotation can be directly
input into a matrix when defining the characteristics.

Rigid links

Create a link element that connects 2 selected nodes. Select the first node (reference) and select multiple nodes that
become the connection target. It is used to simulate the rigid behavior between 2 nodes under deformation and
rotation and the constraint direction can be defined the with reference to the GCS.

Elastic link

Connect 2 nodes with a spring that has a constant stiffness. Select the first node (reference) and select another node
to create the link. Like the point string, the property is defined by the constant stiffness to deformation and rotation.

Interpolation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 422 of 1024

This function simulates the behavior of the standard (reference) node by weighing the average behavior of the
selected nodes. It restricts the movement between connected nodes, similar to the rigid link. However, the
interpolation element allows the relative behavior of a node due to movement at multiple different nodes. Hence, the
average behavior at the multiple other nodes determines the movement of the reference node (dependent node).

Select the nodes to restrict and the degree of freedom, and then select the nodes to take the average values from. The
weight of each node can be applied.

<Rigid link> <Interpolation>

Surface spring

Create a point spring or elastic link by entering the spring stiffness per unit area at the support point of an element.

This is used to consider the flexible support condition of the ground during foundation analysis or underground
structure analysis. Entering the spring stiffness per unit area automatically converts it to the spring or link acting on
the node by considering the selected element area.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 423 of 1024

The surface spring inputs are as follows.

l Frame: Create a point spring or elastic link on a 1D element node. Input the width to calculate the support
stiffness per unit length of a beam element.

l Planar: Create a spring or link by selecting a 2D element.

l Solid-Face: Specify an arbitrary surface on 3D Solid and create a spring or link at all nodes connected to that
surface.

l Element Edge: Select an outline of a 2D element and create a spring or link at the nodes connected to that
outline.

The stiffness of the soil varies with depth. To define the varying stiffness with respect to space using the surface spring function of
GTS NX, the [Base Function] is to be used as the input.

The input elastic link per unit area is a way to define the spring constant. Other options are available, such as [Tension
only] or [Compression only].

Ground surface spring

- Auto generation of elastic/viscous boundary

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 424 of 1024

This automatically creates the elastic/viscous boundary elements needed for dynamic analysis. Selecting a mesh
automatically creates boundary conditions at the left/right/floor of the selected mesh and the spring constant is
automatically calculated from the material/characteristics assigned to the element.

For dynamic analysis, the bottom of the model (floor surface) is often assigned a fixed condition (displacement
constraint) to simulate bedrock conditions. Check the [Fixed Bottom Condition] to set this condition more easily.

NOTE: As ground surface spring stiffness values are calculated by elastic modulus, Poisson's Ratio and Unit Weight of
Ground, this element type cannot be directly applied for constitutive soil models like D-min, Jardine, Modified Mohr-
Coulomb, Hardening Soil (HSS), Ramberg-Osgood, GHE-S, and Hardin-Drnevich. This is because the above mentioned
models do not have Elastic Modulus Input. In case of these soils, the ground reaction force coefficient or damping
constant can be applied to a surface spring element.

• When using an Outcrop motion as an input motion at the base of the model, a rigid base boundary will not produce
correct results. In such cases, we need to use the Complaint Base function. When the complaint base is used half of the
input (downward motion) applied to the ground node is absorbed by the damper, and half is forwarded to the node
of the main ground mesh. In the latest version, the user has the option to choose between Absorbent, Complaint
Base, and Rigid Base.

How to create an elastic boundary element

l The elastic spring is used as a ground boundary condition for Eigen value analysis and Response spectrum
analysis.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 425 of 1024

l Creating an elastic spring can be hard for beginners and the elastic spring element can be created from the
following steps.

1.Use the elastic modulus of the ground to compute K . (The Equation is shown below.)
v0

Here, E0: Elastic modulus of the ground, a Coefficient depending on test condition

a
Modulus of deformation E0 from the
Regular During
following test methods (kfg/cm2)
time earthquake
1/2 of E0 from the cyclic curve of the
plate load test, d1 using a rigid circular 1 2
plate of 30cm diameter
E0 measured in the borehole 4 8
E0 from the unconfined or tri-axial
4 8
compression test on a specimen
E0 estimated by the N value from the
1 2
Standard Penetration test when E0=28N

2. Re-calculate the Subgrade Reaction Modulus Kv(= Kh) using the computed Kv0.

Here,

The area Av becomes the area where the subgrade reaction spring will be installed.

If the model exists like the following figure,

Area of Ground A is Av=1m(Left length of model)*1m(Unit width of 2D analysis)=1m2, Bv becomes 1m=100cm.

Using the same method, the unit width of Ground B is Bv=√(20000)cm=141.42136 cm.

Ultimately, the Subgrade Reaction Modulus K can be computed and a point spring is created on the node, considering
the area of the element.

E
Ky0 A (cm) B K (tonf/m3) α
(tonf/m2)
Ground A 1000 3.3333 1.00E + 04 100 1351.186643 1
Ground B 2000 6.6667 2.00E + 04 1414213562 2083.845925 1

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 426 of 1024

The spring coefficient of the floor (Z direction) is created with the same value as the X direction.

(Element length x Width (1m) = Cross sectional area, so only consider the effective length of the element.)

2 overlapping boundary elements are created where the ground and ground meet.

How to create a viscous boundary element

l The viscous boundary element required as a model boundary condition for time history analysis.

l The viscous boundary element can be created from the following steps.

1. Compute Cp, Cs

Cp, Cs can be calculated using the equation below.

Here, , ,

λ : Bulk modulus, G : Shear modulus, E : Elastic modulus, ν : Poisson’s ratio, A : Cross-section area

2. The cross-section area is automatically considered until the surface spring is created, so only the Cp, Cs needs to be
computed.

Elastic Bulk Shear Unit

Poisson’
P wave S wave
s ratio
modulus modulus modulus weight
E λ G W Cp Cp
ν
2 2 2 3 3 3
(tonf/m ) (tonf/m ) (tonf/m ) (tonf/m ) (tonf·sec/m ) (tonf·sec/m )
GroundA 1000 864.1975309 370.3703704 1.8 0.35 17.1605 8.2437
GroundB 2000 1459.531181 751.8796992 2 0.33 24.5792 12.381

Multiplying the Cp, Cs (tonf•sec/m3 units) to the cross-section area eventually leads to the spring stiffness of the
viscous boundary element in tonf•sec/m units.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 427 of 1024

The shaded cell parameters are the physical properties of the ground the user inputs during modeling and the Bulk
modulus and Shear modulus are calculated using the Elastic modulus and Poisson’s ratio. Hence, there is no need to
input additional values when creating a viscous boundary element.

When creating the viscous boundary element automatically, the spring is automatically created by considering the
element area (effective length*unit width) as shown below. Input the Cp value for the normal direction coefficient at
the point of spring creation and input the Cs value for the parallel direction.

For example, the Cx of the spring coefficient created on the left/right of the model is the Cp of each ground and Cz
becomes the Cs value. The bottom spring coefficient Cz becomes the Cp value.

Gauging shell

Create a shell element to check the force and moment on the surface of a solid element structure. To create a gauging
shell, select the base solid element and then select the element surface on the solid to extrude the gauging shell from.
The stiffness of the gauging shell is calculated by applying the stiffness increment coefficient to the stiffness of the
solid element. The thickness of the selected solid is automatically considered and the thickness of each element is
calculated.

<Select element surface>

<Gauging shell thickness (Length of red dotted line)>

Mass

Input the lumped mass on an arbitrary point. It is used to convert the loading into mass and apply it to the analysis.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 428 of 1024

Check total mass to automatically divide and input the lumped mass data entered in the mass property onto a
selected node. The sum of the divided lumped mass data on a node, created using the total mass option, is equal to
the entered lumped mass data. Entering the loading using the converted mass value and selecting the total mass
option allows easy application of mass data for Eigen value analysis, Response spectrum, analysis, Time history analysis
etc. The lumped mass data is input with respect to the GCS and the moment of inertia (I) is defined according to the
set unit system.

Virtual Beam

It is creating the virtual beam from 2D/3D element and will be expressed with diagram for the result of virtual beam.
Force can be found from virtual beam force after analysis with activating the mesh set of virtual beam under
construction stage.

3D plane will be created on the normal direction of created virtual beam and force will be got from Local Direction
force Sum of element which is on the same plane

Object Type: Select the mesh set or element.

Locate: Define 2 points for creation of virtual beam

Orientation(Element Z-Axis)

This function can make the same direction from section of 1D element or define the strength direction and weakness direction. This function can control the

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 429 of 1024

z axis of element after verifying element coordinate system and define with beta degree.

- Ref. Node: It is selecting the base node for direction of section from 1D element. Define z-axis based on selected
node.

- Ref. Vector(GCS): Z-axis of Direction from selected element z-axis based on manually defined vector direction or
direction of Global Coordinate system(GCS),

- Beta Angle: It can be selected from 0, 90, 180 and rotated with selected beta degree based on x-axis.

Results for virtual beam elements are dictated by the location of the element within the plane strain/solid element. The example below illustrates the
difference of results due to placement of the virtual beam element within the mesh.

For a 2d concrete wall modelled as a plane strain and embedded within the soil body, the placement of virtual beam at left edge, right edge and centre
shows the following results:

This change in results is caused by the enclosure of mesh by the newly formed element, the presence of the virtual
beam element on the sides causes the formation of a closed frame box which gives the difference in force and stress
values along the edges. Hence, one needs to carefully select the location of the virtual beam element within the mesh
to get the correct results assessment.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 430 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Delete

Delete

▒ Overview

Delete an element. It is possible to select the element to delete on the model tree or work screen and press the Delete key, but this function
provides the following options.

▒ Methodology

Delete Affected Node

The selected element is deleted and the nodes that no longer have a connection with the element are also deleted.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 431 of 1024

Delete Empty Mesh Set

The empty mesh set that no longer has an element is deleted along with the selected element.

Duplicated Element only

Overlapping elements are different elements that have the same node and can be the source of analysis error. Changing the properties of an
identical element can use the element property change boundary condition and so, it is better to delete the overlapping element created
during modeling. This function searches for overlapping elements out of the selected elements and deletes all but 1 overlapping elements.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Modify

Modify

▒ Overview

Edit the properties of the selected element. Select the element to edit on the work screen or use the ID select function to input the element
ID. The element property modification can also be d1 through Element > Parameters.

▒ Methodology

The input information needed for editing, depending on the selected element type, is automatically printed as shown below.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 432 of 1024

<1D Element> <2D Element> <3D Element>

Edit Geometry through changing node information or change property. This function is useful when modifying details of the specific element.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Modify Topology

Modify Topology

▒ Overview

Modify the shape after element generation. There are 3 methods to choose from, depending on the element type and modification purpose.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 433 of 1024

Flip 2 Triangles

Modify the shape of 2 2D triangle elements that share a side by selecting them consecutively. The nodes are kept. When modifying an
element shape, the relationship with the geometry shape can be ignored, or the shape can be automatically renewed by setting the auto-
apply option and selecting 2 elements.

Merge Element

Merge 2 connected triangles, or quadrilaterals, into 1 element by selecting them consecutively.

However, a B-Spline can form if the node connection between the adjacent elements is ignored.

Fix Connectivity of Reversed Solid

An incorrect element can be formed during mesh ‘import’ or when the normal direction is defined in the opposite direction accidentally. In
this case, this function modifies the node connections of a solid element. Use the [Front-Back Color] in View mode (mesh) to view the element
shape on the screen and to check for elements in the opposite normal direction, indicated by the different color.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Parameter(1D)

Parameter : 1D

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 434 of 1024

Change the properties, difference, coordinate system of a 1D element or add the offset distance or the end boundary conditions (fixed,
hinge roller etc.) of a beam element. The addable and changeable items are listed below.

▒ Methodology

Change Property

Change the property assigned to a 1D element during its creation. Select the 1D element to modify and specify the property to change.

Change Element Order

Add or delete the nodes between a 1D element to change it into a higher order or lower order element. Changing the position of the middle
node to the start or end point for high order element can create an arbitrary middle node on the geometry shape. A 1D high order element
can be divided into 2 low order elements with reference to the middle node.

Change Coordinate System

The analysis results of a structural element are printed with reference to the element coordinate axis. Hence, it is important to check the
coordinate system of the structural element to make sure it is in 1 direction. Switch the element x axis direction or specify the element y axis
direction to unify the major and minor axis directions of the structural elements. The direction can be unified with adjacent 2D elements.

Orientation (Element Z-axis)

This function is used to unify the direction property of a 1D element to 1 direction or to set the major and minor axis directions. Adjust the Z
axis direction by checking the element coordinate axis and assign with reference to the Beta angle.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 435 of 1024

l Reference Node: Select the reference node for the sectional direction of the 1D element. The element Z coordinate direction is set with
reference to the selected node.

l Reference Vector (GCS): Set the Z coordinate direction of the selected element using the GCS direction or the input vector direction.

l Beta Angle: Angles 0, 90,180 can be chosen and the selected Beta angle rotates the element by that angle with reference to the X axis.

<Beta:0> <Beta:90> <Beta:180>

Add Offset (Beam/Embedded Beam)

Define the offset distance by considering the sectional properties (shape) of the structural element. When defining the properties, the offset
can be set within the boundary of the section shape, or outside the boundary using the extra features of offset. The offset is the eccentric
distance between the position of the geometry shape (line), needed to create a structural element, and the reference axis, where the loading is
applied and the results are calculated. It is mostly used to express the connection between structural members or the combined section of 2
meeting members.

Specify the reference coordinates for the offset distance calculation and input uniform or non-uniform to set the offset distance for each axial
direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 436 of 1024

Add End Release (Beam/Embedded Beam)

Specify the end point boundary conditions for a 1D element. It is mostly applied when specifying the connection conditions between
structural members such as hinge, roller etc.

Taper Section Group (Beam/Embedded Beam)

Members designated to a tapered section are grouped and calculate the section size automatically to define a constant tapered section
regardless of the divided state of the elements. Firstly, select all elements that configure section changing area, and select the node at the
beginning and the end of section changing area into the node of section i and j respectively. The tapered section is calculated by section
property assigned to section i and j. The complex section changing area can be modeled quickly without creating the property of tapered
section as the number of elements within section changing area.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Parameter(2D)

Parameter : 2D

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 437 of 1024

▒ Overview

Change the properties, difference, coordinate system of a 2D element or add the offset distance or the end boundary conditions (fixed,
hinge roller etc.) of a surface element. The addable and changeable items are listed below. The material coordinate system is defined as the
result printing coordinate system for the 2D element and a separate print coordinate system (material coordinate system) can be added to
certain selected elements.

▒ Methodology

Change Property

Change the property assigned to a 2D element during its creation. Select the 2D element to modify and specify the property to change.

Change Element Order

Add or delete nodes between a 2D element to change it into a higher order or lower order element. Changing the position of the middle node
to the start or end point for high order element can create an arbitrary middle node on the geometry shape.

Change Coordinate System

For a 2D structural element, the print coordinate system (material coordinate system) can be defined separately. Here, if the print coordinate
system (material coordinate system) is set as the element coordinate system, it is important to check the coordinate system of the structural
element to make sure it is in 1 direction. Switch the element z axis direction or unify the normal directions of the selected elements to the
normal direction of the reference element. When using centered coordinates, use the direction vector from the reference point to each
element to modify the normal direction of each element.

Add Thickness

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 438 of 1024

The thickness of a 2D element is defined in the section properties, but an additional thickness can be specified for selected elements. Select
the 2D element and change the thickness by specifying the thickness for each element node.

Add Offset

Define the offset distance by considering the sectional properties (shape) of the structural element. The offset is the eccentric distance
between the positions of the geometry shape (surface), needed to create a structural element, and the reference axis, where the loading is
applied and the results are calculated. The distance can be specified by a function on the GCS and the direction moves to the normal direction
(+,-) of the 2D element. When applying the function, the input offset distance becomes the scale factor that is multiplied to the function for
calculation.

Add Material Orientation

Apart from the material coordinate system specified on the 2D element property, a separate material coordinate system (print coordinate
system) can be additionally set for selected elements. The coordinate system can be defined as follows.

l Coordinate System: Specify the material x direction in the X,Y,Z direction of the GCS. Both the Global rectangular coordinate system and
Global cylindrical coordinate system can be used.

l Angle: Specify the material x direction by setting the normal direction of the element as the revolution axis and rotating the coordinate
system by the specified angle.

l Reference Vector: Input or use the selected space vector direction to specify the material X direction.

l Coordinate system and Angle: Specify the material X direction as the rotated direction of the reference coordinate axis on the selected
coordinate plane.

Add End Release (Shell)

Specify the selected node boundary conditions for a 2D element. The axial direction and rotation conditions can be released for each element.

Auto Pore Pressure Boundary

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 439 of 1024

Specify the selected mesh sets or elements where the material stiffness properties changes from fully unsaturated to fully saturated zones,
here the material properties can be changed based on inputs of saturated material stiffness and unsaturated material stiffness. This change in
values is governed by change in the pore pressure regime inside the soil matrix, due to which depending upon the degree of saturation of the
material type, a difference in results can be observed.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Parameter(3D)

Parameter : 3D

▒ Overview

Change the properties and difference of a 3D element.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 440 of 1024

Change Property

Change the property assigned to a 3D element during its creation. Select the 3D element to modify and specify the property to change.

Change Element Order

Add or delete nodes between a 3D element to change it into a higher order or lower order element. Changing the position of the middle node
to the start or end point for high order element can create an arbitrary middle node on the geometry shape.

Auto Pore Pressure Boundary

Specify the selected mesh sets or elements where the material stiffness properties changes from fully unsaturated to fully saturated zones,
here the material properties can be changed based on inputs of saturated material stiffness and unsaturated material stiffness. This change in
values is governed by change in the pore pressure regime inside the soil matrix, due to which depending upon the degree of saturation of the
material type, a difference in results can be observed.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Parameter(Other)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 441 of 1024

Parameter : Other

▒ Overview

Use to change the assigned other properties of an element. It is applied to spring, link, interface affiliated elements and select the element to
define a fitting property.

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Connect

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 442 of 1024

Connection

▒ Overview

Cut the connection between shared nodes or create a spring or rigid link element between nodes. The free edge/faces created by the node
separation can be used to create an interface element.

▒ Methodology

Split

Select the element that contains the node which will be separated. Then, select the nodes to divide or create a link element on. The
connection type can be chosen between only node separation, create elastic link after node separation or create rigid link. When creating an
elastic link, specify the coordinate system of the link element.

Closest

Select 2 groups of nodes and create an elastic link between the 2 closest nodes between the groups.

Coincident

Create a rigid link between selected nodes that are within the tolerance range. The tolerance is the allowable limit of the node connection, and
the operation is only applied when the distance between the nodes is smaller than the tolerance. It is used to automatically connect 2 barely
separated nodes

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Extract

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 443 of 1024

Extract

▒ Overview

Extract a sub-element from an existing mesh on a geometry shape or a mesh set. The extracted mesh is connected to the existing meshes by
nodes and is often used to create structural elements that are connected to the neighboring ground by nodes. During extract, the element
properties can be defined or added and for 1D elements, the element coordinate system can be specified.

▒ Methodology

The extracted mesh can be divided by target shape, possessed shape or mesh to create a mesh set. This option automatically divides the mesh
sets when extracting elements from multiple solids simultaneously.

Geometry

Extract 1D/2D elements that have kept their node position from the edge/surface used for mesh creation. The [Skip Duplicated Faces] option
can be applied when extracting a 2D element from a surface. This option extracts the mesh from only the non-overlapping surfaces of the
selection. If the selected target surface lies on multiple solids in a complex manner, select all the solids and use [Skip Duplicated Faces] to
extrude only the outermost surface of the solid.

Mesh

Extrude a 1D/2D element from the free edge/surface of an existing mesh. Only the selected nodes on the free edge/surface are extruded
automatically and selecting the reference mesh extrudes only the nodes on the specified mesh.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 444 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > DIvide(1D)

Divide : 1D

▒ Overview

Divide the 1D element by the set number. It is used to divide a 1D high order element into 2 low order elements.

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Divide(2D)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 445 of 1024

Divide : 2D

▒ Overview

Divide a 2D element into multiple elements using a pattern or entering the number of divisions. If the geometry shape is complex, the shape
(quality) of the equal size mesh created by the auto-mesh function may not be good. In this case, use the divide function to increate the
Aspect ratio. Set the divide pattern or the number of divisions in the axial direction. Use the [Divide Neighbor Element] option to maintain the
node connections with adjacent elements during element division.

▒ Methodology

Divide by Pattern

Specify the 2D element and pattern. Then, select the reference node.

Pattern -2: Use 1 of the 11 patterns to divide the element outline into 2 segments. The red point
that appears in the pattern indicates the position of the reference node. The white points indicate
the points that ignore the reference node.

Pattern -3: Use 1 of the 8 patterns to divide the element outline into three segments. The red point
that appears in the pattern indicates the position of the reference node.

Divide by Number

Evenly divide the 2D element by the input number of divisions. However, it can only be applied to
rectangular elements that are defined in 2 axial directions. Set the number of divisions in the axis 1,
2 direction and define the axial direction as follows. Input the number of divisions in the axial
direction of an element edge that has makes up the smallest angle between the specified axis
directions.

Axis Direction

[Local Coordinate]

Use axis 1 as the x axis direction of the element coordinate system.

[Coordinate Axis]

Use the coordinate system to specify axis 1. The axis can be select from the Global rectangular
system or the Global cylindrical system.

[Location along Vector]

Use the input vector as axis 1. Input the start point and another arbitrary point on axis 1 to create a
vector.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 446 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Divide(3D)

Divide : 3D

▒ Overview

Divide a 3D element into multiple elements using a pattern or entering the number of divisions. Only hexahedral elements can be divided.

▒ Methodology

Divide by Pattern

Use 1 of the 4 preset patterns to divide the element. The red point that appears in the pattern
indicates the position of the reference node. Specify the 3D element and pattern and select the
reference node.

Divide by Number

Evenly divide the 3D element by the input number of divisions. Set the number of divisions in the
axis 1,2,3 direction and define the axial direction as follows. Input the number of divisions in the
axial direction of an element edge that has makes up the smallest angle between the specified axis
direction.

Axial Direction

[Local Coordinate]

Use axis 1 as the x axis direction of the element coordinate system.

[Coordinate Axis]

Use the coordinate system to specify axis 1 and axis 2. The axis can be select from the Global
rectangular system or the Global cylindrical system.

[Location along Vector]

Use 2 input vectors as axis 1 and axis 2. Input the start point and any other arbitrary points on axis 1
and axis 2 to create 2 vectors.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 447 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Measure

Measure

▒ Overview

Measure the material and geometric information of a selected element. It is useful to check the Length (1D), Area (2D) and Volume (3D) of
an element. Select the element to be measured and use calculate to check the total sum of all selected elements. For Volume (2D), use the
property (thickness) information of a 2D element and the element area to calculate the hypothetical volume.

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Interface

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 448 of 1024

Interface

▒ Overview

Create a homogeneous or heterogeneous material interface where slip or isolation can happen. It is used to simulate the interface behavior
between ground and structural members with a large relative stiffness difference. The interface generation method is classified by the work
environment (2D/3D) and the target. The properties must be defined in order to create an interface element. The properties can be directly
entered, or can be automatically calculated from the properties of adjacent elements using Wizard.

▒ Methodology

Interface element generation immediately separates the connected nodes of that position and creates an element with specific stiffness in the
normal and tangent directions. Hence, because the nodes are left separated for certain steps where the interface element is not used (ex.
Initial in-situ ground), the nodes need to be connected by a rigid link to prevent analysis error. Reversely, when the interface element is used,
the rigid links need to be removed during analysis. Use the [Create Rigid Link Element] option to automatically create a Link element
connecting 2 nodes. Upon deletion of this interface, the separated nodes of the adjacent mesh sets (separated by formation of interface) are
automatically joined by the software.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 449 of 1024

The interface material can be defined using the following equation. Using the stiffness of adjacent elements and nonlinear parameters, the
virtual thickness (tv) and strength reduction factor (R) is applied. Interface material stiffness and parameters are applied differently according
to the relative stiffness difference between neighboring ground or structural members. The Wizard can be used to simplify this process.

Ex) Kn = Eoed,i / tv

Kt = Gi/tv

Ci = R x Csoil

phi_i = tan-1 (R x tan (phi_soil))

Here, Eoed,i = 2 x Gi x (1-νi)/(1-2 x νi)

(νi =Interface Poisson’s ration=0.45, the interface is used to simulate the non-compressive frictional behavior and automatically calculates
using 0.45 to prevent numerical errors.)

tv = Virtual thickness(Generally has a value between 0.01~0.1, the higher the stiffness difference between ground and structure, the smaller
the value)

Gi = R2 x Gsoil (Gsoil = E/(2(1+ νsoil)), R = Strength Reduction Factor

The interface can be created using the following methods, depending on the work environment and comp1nts or shape.

<Line Interface> <Shell Interface> <Plane Interface>

l From Element Boundary

Create an interface element at the boundary position between the selected element and adjacent element, as shown in the figure below.
Selecting all elements cannot create an interface element because there are not adjacent elements. If the created interface element is within a
mesh, the interface element has a wedge shape, as shown.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 450 of 1024

<From element boundary>

l Manual Node ID Input

Directly input the node ID to create an interface element. The nodes are divided into 2 groups: Side 1 and Side 2 that determine the shape of
the interface element. The number of input nodes on Side1 and Side2 must be the same and the shape for each size is as follows.

l Convert Element

Convert a general 1D, 2D, 3D element into an interface element. Because general elements do not have a consistent node order, the base
reference node needs to be selected additionally.

<Convert element>

l From Free-Edge

Create an interface element from opposing free surface/edge. The free edges (free surface for 3D) with no node connections need to be
selected on each side and if the free edge (free surface) does not exist, use the Connection > Divide function to divide beforehand.

l From Truss/Beam/Shell (Use Shell element)

Create an interface element using the truss/beam element. For 3D, use a shell element. Creating an interface element for structural elements
such as truss/beam/plate generates an interface element on both sides of the element.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 451 of 1024

<Use structural element>

Also, if the ground element connected to the interface element is removed during construction, the interface element is also removed to
prevent analysis errors.

<From Shell (Plane Interface for 3D Models)>

l From Truss/Beam/Shell (T/X-cross type)

The interface elements are created at the location where truss/beam elements cross T or X-shape. Shell elements can be selected in 3D model.
The ‘Register Interface Mesh Set Separately’ option isn’t available since interface elements are T or X-shape.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 452 of 1024

<From Truss/Beam (T/X-cross type)>

<From Shell (T/X Cross Type)

l From Mesh-Set (T/X-cross type)

Create an interface element at the T- or X-cross of the selected mesh set. This method can be used when the interface elements intersect, such
as in masonry structures.

<From Mesh-Set (T/X-cross type)>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 453 of 1024

<Shell Interface (T/X- Cross Type)>

l From Node

Create an interface element between adjacent elements, using the relationship between the selected nodes. For 3D, select a segment point if
the interface element is not created properly.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Pile Pile tip

Pile/Pile Tip

▒ Methodology

Pile

Piles are an interface affiliated element in embedded beam element form that does not require node connections with the neighboring
ground. It is used to check the relative displacement and friction behavior between the beam element and the ground. Create a beam element
and neighboring ground element and then select the beam element to create a pile element.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 454 of 1024

Pile tip

The pile tip element is added when defining the relative behavior between the ground element and 1 end node of a pile. Create a pile
element. Then, select the tip. The stiffness of the pile tip is defined by the end bearing capacity and spring constant.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Free Field

Free Field Element (Infinite Element for Dynamic Analysis)

▒ Overview

For the seismic analysis, users need to model infinite ground to eliminate the boundary effect caused by reflection wave. Since it is not

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 455 of 1024

possible to model infinite ground, users can apply Free Field Element at the boundary.

Free Field Element enables to apply traction resulted from Free Field Analysis to the ground boundary and then, eliminate reflection wave
using absorbent boundary condition.

▒ Methodology

Select free edges in 2D and free faces in 3D to define Free Field Elements

Free Field : Enable to simulate infinite ground boundary

Absorbent Boundary : Enable to eliminate reflection wave at the ground boundary

4
Width Factor (Penalty Parameter) : In order to minimize the size effect of the model, users have to input more than 10 , This value will be
multiplied by model width (In case of 2D, this is plain strain thickness (unit width).

DOF (Degree Of Freedom for damping) : Users can select specified DOF for damping effect.

[Schematic Overview of Free Field Element] [Free field effect (O), Absorb reflection (O)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 456 of 1024

[Free field effect (X), Absorb reflection (X)] [Free field effect (X), Absorb reflection (O)]

Verification Example : Free field element can result in identical behavior with infinite ground model.

[None] [Free Field]

[Ground Acceleration]

[Infinite Ground]

[Displacement results for each case]

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Hinge

Hinge (Inelastic Hinge)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 457 of 1024

Go to Hinge property

▒ Methodology

Inelastic Hinge

- Inelastic hinge can be applied to the structural elements to simulate crack or local (plastic) failure.

- Applicable in Nonlinear Static and Time History Analysis as follows : Nonlinear, Construction Stage, Consolidation, Fully Coupled, SRM (Slope Stability).

- Following properties are available to define inelastic hinge : Beam, Truss, Elastic Link and Point Spring

Go to Hinge property

Hinge Table

When assigning inelastic hinge properties (M-Φ) to structural elements this feature that allows users to easily assign hinge properties through a table. Additionally, a feature has been added to facilitate the import
and export of hinge property files from a CSV file when defining hinge properties.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 458 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Infinite

Infinite Element

▒ Overview

Without modeling all region, a model can be reduced considering the area of interests by assigning infinite element on the boundary which
does not have significant effects on the result. All analysis types are applicable except dynamic analysis. (Free field element is used in dynamic
analysis.)

It isn't possible to use all kind of load & boundary condition (Self Weight, Constraint, Nodal Head, Review, etc.) in the node or element of
infinite element.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 459 of 1024

It is divided into ‘Line, and ‘Plane’ tab according to the type. For the adjacent element with infinite element, analysis is only for Quad /
Wedge / Hexa typed Low/High order element with 'Plane Strain / Axisymmetric / Solid' property.

Target Object Type : Infinite element can be created by selecting 2D element, ‘Free Edge’ in the case of 'Line' type. Infinite element can be
created by selecting 3D element, ‘Free Face’ in the case of 'Plane' type.

Property : Select Line/Plane type infinite element

Infinite Type : Select infinite element type. It is divided into ‘Line’ type and ‘Plane’ type for 2D model and 3D model respectively.

Constitutive Behavior : Select Constitutive Behavior of infinite element. It is divided into ‘From Adjacent Element’ type which adopt material
property of adjacent element and ‘User Defined’ type which can assign other material property for only infinite element. ‘Material’ is directly
inputted for only 'User Defined' type.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Element > Fluid Boundaries

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 460 of 1024

Fluid Boundary

▒ Overview

This tool allows the user to define the boundary conditions between the fluid element and the ground or structural elements and also the free
surface.

▒ Methodology

The fluid boundary can be defined using the option below;

The free surface represents the free water surface of the reservoir.

Free Surface Boundary

FSI or Fluid Structure Interaction Boundary needs to be assigned where the fluid medium meets the ground or structural elements.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 461 of 1024

FSI Boundary (Boundary between Fluid Element with Foundation & Dam Block)

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Tools > Seepage Cut Off Element

Seepage Cut Off element

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 462 of 1024

▒ Overview

The Seepage Cut Off (SCO) element can be used to simulate the behavior of structural waterproof members. Main role of the element is to
control seepage DOF on the line or face

▒ Methodology

In 2D analysis, select a line element (From Element Boundary/Truss/Beam element) to define the impermeability.

In 3D analysis, the impermeability can be defined by selecting the face element (From Element Boundary/Shell element).

From Element Boundary

Create an SCO element at the boundary position between the selected element and adjacent element, as shown in the figure below.

Selecting all elements cannot create an SCO element because there are not adjacent elements.

From Truss/Beam (for 3D case - Shell element)

Create an SCO element using the truss/beam element.

For 3D, use a plate element.

Creating a seepage cut off element for structural elements such as truss/beam/shell generates “impermeable interface” element on both
sides of the element.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 463 of 1024

▒ Property

Checking the Seepage Flow DOF option allows for control the flow rate/impermeability characteristics.

(※ When checked: consider the effect of seepage, when not checked: consider the impermeability effect)

The effective thickness used in Seepage Flow DOF is the effective thickness for the imaginary size used for the calculation of the seepage
flow and it defines the width of the structural member

▒ Results Comparison

2D analysis case (via Truss/Beam element type)

3D analysis case (via Shell element type)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 464 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Tools > Options

Options

▒ Overview

Set the general environment of the program. The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary Condition,
Analysis/Results.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 465 of 1024

General

[General]

l Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.

l License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web Authorization method are supported.

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

[Graphic]

l Work View : Set the options for the screen.

- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.

- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder shaped curved surface. The available levels are
from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and smoother surface as the level gets higher.

- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work window during view rotation.

l Selection : Specify the options for the model part.

l Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.

l Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.

l Element : Specify the color for each element type.

l Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show the shadow and controls its shade. The
available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information shown as the level gets higher.

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]

l Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.

l Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]

l Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.

l Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 466 of 1024

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol 3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z
axis respectively.

[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.

[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.

[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.

[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol.

Analysis/Results

[Analysis]

l Number of processors : Specify the number of CPUs used for analysis. For a dual core CPU, input 2 processors and for a quad core CPU,
input 4 processors to increase the analysis speed.

l Element Formulation : Specify the formula applied to the element.

In terms of speed, a faster solution can be obtained in order of Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability) > Hybrid (Accuracy). In terms
of accuracy, a more accurate solution can be obtained in order of Hybrid (Accuracy) > Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability).

l Equation Solver (Structural) : Specify the method for solving a finite element simultaneous equation. If the setting is automatic, the
program automatically determines one of the following methods: Multifrontal, Dense matrix or AMG(Algebraic Multi-Grid).

l 2D Element Setting (Structure) : The [Unique Shell Normal Generation] function judges two adjacent shell elements to have two different
normal directions when the value between the normal direction vectors are larger than the input value. Because the element size is
relatively larger than the curvature, if this value is increased for a rough curved mesh, a smooth contour that considers the curvature of
the geometry shape can be calculated.
The [Consider Drilling DOF(degree of freedom)] option calculates the stiffness of the in-plane deformation by considering the rotation
about the out-plane axis (drilling degree of freedom).

[Result]

l General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default value is set as 1e-12, and results lower
than this value is considered as 0.

l Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.

l Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to represent the vectors.

l Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.

l No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.

l Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.

l Graph : Select whether to show the graph.

l Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.

l Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Tools > Renumber

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 467 of 1024

Renumber

▒ Overview

When mesh and node numbers are recomposed, results can be checked in an organized manner.

▒ Methodology

Select the target nodes and elements and input the starting number. The organization can be set for
the whole model, or only for the selected nodes (elements). Use the [Compact IDs Only] option to
organize the node number continuously starting from 1, and the coordinate system priority for the
organization reference can be selected from User defined. Assign the minimum number with
reference to the first axis. The numbers are then organized by the second axis within the range that
does not affect the first axis. The numbers are organized again by the third axis within the range
that does not affect the first and second axes.

For example, if the first is X, second is Y, third is Z, then the organization is first d1 by considering
the X coordinates specified by the first priority. The number increases from the small X coordinate
to the large X coordinate, and if the X coordinates are the same, then the next priority Y coordinates
are considered. For elements, XYZ coordinates of the center of gravity is used for organization.

The number order can be selected from Ascending/Descending order.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Tools > Check Mesh Topology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 468 of 1024

Check Mesh Topology

▒ Overview

Analyze the mesh information and sort the mesh depending on classification for easy distinction. Apply the check mesh menu to view all
existing meshes regardless of the view/hide status to display all calculated free lines, free surfaces, and etc. on the screen.

When checking a free surface, the mesh is displayed as a wireframe and it may be difficult to check for free surfaces existing within the interior
of the model. In this case, the mesh check is performed with all target meshes hidden.

▒ Methodology

Non-Manifold Edges (Blue)

Check Non-Manifold edges in blue. A Non-Manifold edge is formed at the meeting edge of three or more element surfaces.

Feature Edge (Yellow)

Check the feature edge in yellow. A feature edge is the line that has a sudden change in the model shape, and has an angle larger than the
feature division angle between 2 element surfaces.

l Feature Angle

Input the feature angle to calculate the feature edge.

Free Faces (Orange)

Check the free surface in orange. The free surface is the section where the nodes between 3D elements are not connected.

l Show Bounding Faces

This is an option to show/hide the boundary faces among free faces. It is useful to check free faces located inside in case of 3D complex
model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 469 of 1024

Clamped Element (Purple)

Check the clamped element in purple. Search for elements with all nodes on the free surface in each 3D element. If the boundary condition is
all applied on the free surface of the mesh, the confined element does not affect the analysis.

Overlapped Element (Green)

Check overlapped elements that have the same node information at the same position. The elements are highlighted in green, and the
Element > Delete function can be used to delete the overlapping element. The illustration below shows the presence of overlapped elements
in a model:

Original Mesh Original + Overlapped Elements

Overlapped Elements (Green)

Penetrated Element (Pink)

Check penetrated elements that have penetrated an pre-existing element/mesh set, here new nodes are present inside a pre-existing element.
The elements are highlighted in pink, and the Element > Delete function can be used to delete the penetrated element. The illustration below
shows the presence of penetrated elements in a model:

Original Mesh Original + Penetrated Elements

Penetrated Elements (Pink)

NOTE: Presence of either free faces (non bounding) in the absence of interface and seepage cut off element might lead to divergence and
errors in results calculations. Hence, it is recommended to perform this check for free faces immediately after meshing or before running the
analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Tools > Check Mesh Quality

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 470 of 1024

Check Mesh Quality

▒ Overview

The relative size between connected elements and the shape and quality of a mesh have a larger effect on the analysis results than its
absolute size. Hence, after creating a mesh, it is important to check and modify the quality of the mesh, especially for 3D elements. Input the
reference value to color the elements that do not meet this standard.

▒ Methodology

Aspect Ratio

Length ratio between the width and length, or the ratio of the longest side to the shortest side of a
2D element. For example, a square has the same width and length and therefore has an aspect ratio
of 1. As a shape digresses from the square shape, the aspect ratio becomes smaller. A value closer
to 1 is ideal. This ratio has significant effect on the analysis result and if the value is very small, it
may be hard to obtain normal analysis results.

Skew Angle

How much the shape digresses from the rectangular shape (90 degrees), measured in angles. A
quadrilateral forms a 90 degree angle, the inclination angle is 0 degrees and this value increases as
the shape strays from the quadrilateral. For a solid element, the inclination angle is checked for each
face and the smallest value is chosen as the inclination angle. A value closer to 0 is better.

Warpage

Evaluates how much the shape is out of the plane. For a quadrilateral 2D element with all nodes on
the same plane, the value is 0. The value increases as the shape strays from the plane. For a solid
element, the warpage is checked for each rectangular face and the smallest value is chosen as the
warpage value. A value closer to 0 is better. This item has significant effect on the analysis result and
if the value is very large, it may be hard to obtain normal analysis results.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 471 of 1024

Taper

Geometrically calculates how much the quadrilateral digresses. It is not applied to triangular
elements. A quadrilateral has a value of 1, and the value decreases as it digresses (becomes closer to
a triangular shape) from its rectangular shape. For a solid element, the taper value is checked for
each face and the smallest value is chosen as the taper value. A value closer to 1 is better.

Jacobian Ratio

The Jacobian determinant is calculated at each Gauss integral point on the mesh the Jacobian
ratio is the ratio between the largest and smallest Jacobian determinant value. For 2D elements,
the Jacobian determinant is calculated on the element projected onto a plane. For solid elements,
the Jacobian determinant is calculated directly. If the quadrilateral element is not convex, the
negative value is outputted and the analysis is not performed properly. A higher value is better.

Twist(Solid)

Value that represents the twist between 2 opposing faces in a solid.

Element length

Check the edge length of an element. Here, the minimum and maximum values can be set.

Mesh set

After the quality check has finished, press ‘Send’ to define a different mesh set. The user can specify
the name of the mesh set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 472 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Tools > Geo Relation

Geo. Relation

▒ Overview

With this feature, a 2D mesh can be created for the new shape/geometry on an existing geometric shape, and even when creating a 3D solid
mesh using the 2D -> 3D feature, the Geo Relation feature can be used to automatically search and connect elements and nodal points to the
faces and edges of the underlying geometric shape within a specified tolerance range

Post execution of this tool, while defining the new load and boundary conditions on the newly developed geometric shape, they will be
connected to the pre existing elements and nodal points of the plain strain/solid mesh, thus enabling in the successful execution of the
analysis.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 473 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Mesh > Tools > Table

Table

▒ Overview

The node and mesh information for all mesh sets in a model can be printed onto a table. Activate all created mesh sets and select mesh set
to extract the overlapping nodes and element information from.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 474 of 1024

Node table

Selecting an element prints the coordinate information of all nodes in the selected element. The model information can be modified on the
table through Add, Edit, Delete.

Element table

Selecting an element prints the element information divided into element type tabs. The node connections and node number can be checked
and the element can be edited on the table through Add, Edit, Delete.

Click the right mouse button on the node/element table to bring up the Context Menu. The functions available in the menu are as follows.

Copy/Paste/Find

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 475 of 1024

Copy the selected area on the table and paste it into a different table on excel or search particular number.

Sorting Dialog

Organize the table information according to a certain principle. Each column title is listed in the Table column and the chosen align principle is
moved to the Align key column. The checked Asc in the Align key column organizes in ascending order and the top column on the Align key
column is given priority. The priority can be changed by using the Up, Down button.

Style Dialog

Change the expression style of each data on the table. The name of each column is listed and Integer, real, string is automatically listed for
each string type. The width, alignment (Left, Right, Center) format, digits or each column can be set. The data format can be chosen from the 4
options below.

l Default : The data is expressed in 11 digits.

l Fixed : The decimal place is specified by the input value.

l Scientific : The input value is used as the number of significant figures, which are expressed in exp1ntial form. It is useful for expressing
very small numerical data such as the permeability coefficient.

l General : Rounding off at the digit, automatically determined by the program.

Resize Column Width

Minimize the width of each column. It is useful when there are many columns.

Show Graph

Select 2 or more columns to draw a graph. The graph type can be chosen from the 25 built-in options.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 476 of 1024

The graph can be drawn by setting the graph type and X axis, Y axis labels and click the right mouse button on the graph table to bring up the
Context Menu. The functions available in the menu are as follows.

Edit the graph title and the label of each axis. Select an arbitrary point on the graph with the left mouse button and drag to magnify. In this
case, use Zoom out to return to the original state. The graph can be saved as an image file (*.bmp, *.jpg. etc.)

Export to Excel / Active Dialog

Auto-save the printed table as an excel file and re-set the mesh set to print the node/element information from using the Active dialog box.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Property

Property
Go to Section property

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Add/define ground and structural properties. This function defines the property of each mesh set when a ground or
structure mesh is generated. For ground, it determines which material to use and for structures, it adds section size, shape (stiffness) and
horizontal spacing etc. The horizontal spacing is the 1D spacing between structural members in the horizontal direction of a 2D model.
Tapered section option, where the size (thickness) of a beam or plate changes, is also available.

▒ Methodology

Create

Creates 1 of the following 4 property types and adds a material type and section characteristic for each property.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 477 of 1024

The supported model type for each property type is as follows. The section shape/size, stiffness depending on spacing and selectable
materials is defined.

Go to Section property

Ground Structural
Property type Model type Nonlinear property
property property
Geogrid(1D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(1D) X X -
From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
1D From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Embedded truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Beam X O -
Embedded Beam X O -
Pile X O -
Geogrid(2D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(2D) X X -
Gauging shell X O -
2D Axisymmetric O X -
Shell X O -
Plane stress X O Tension Only
Plane strain O X -
3D Solid O X -
Rigid link X O -
Pile tip X O -
User Supplied Behavior
X O -
for Shell Interface
Linear Elastic
Tension Only
Compression Only
Point spring X O
Hook
Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Matrix spring X O -
Others
Free Field
Free Field O X
Absorbent Boundary
Interface X O -
Shell interface X O -
From Adjacent Element
Infinite O X
User Defined
Linear Elastic
Rigid Body
Elastic link X O Tension Only
Compression Only
Nonlinear Elastic

Refer to Ch.3 of the Analysis manual for detailed information on each input parameter and behavioral characteristic.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

Import

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 478 of 1024

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Section Property

Section Property

▒ Overview

The section material properties need to be defined for a 1 dimensional truss, embedded truss or beam element. Here, the truss and
embedded truss only need the cross-sectional area but the beam needs other material properties such as total cross section, torsional rigidity,
first area moment of inertia and second area moment of inertia to consider torsion, bend and shear.

The thickness of the element needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1 and the user can define the used units according to the thickness.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. Here, the plate element has a
rotor float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

▒ Methodology

1D element

1D element is an element that is made up of 2(primary) or 3(secondary) nodes and has the geometric property of length. Because 3D shapes
are expressed as 1D elements, the section (size, shape) needs to be defined and this is modeled as a 2D element for calculations.

GTS NX provides various shapes, as shown in the figure below. The position can also be set when defining the sectional properties.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 479 of 1024

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

QUAD-4 6400개 QUAD-4 3400개 QUAD-4 1700개

<Solid square> <H section> <Channel>

<Automatic section modeling >

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 480 of 1024

<Solid Rectangle> <Solid Round> <Pipe>

<Box> <T-section> <H-section>

<Channel> <Angle> <Cross>

<I-section> <Channel 1> <Hat>

<Section shape and size specification>

1D element SRC Section

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 481 of 1024

<SRC Section DB>

SRC(Steel Reinforced Concrete) can be defined under 1D element(truss, beam, embedded truss, embedded beam).

It has added SRC-Box, SRC-Pipe, Sect-HBeam, Circle-HBeam in the section of 1D element. User can define the section selecting the database
of steel and concrete, elastic modulus of steel will use for calculation.

Steel Data: Input the parameter of steel section or selecting the section from database.

Concrete Data: Input the outer dimensions of section for steel concrete

Material: Select the material for SRC or input the parameters. The parameters will be inputted automatically selecting the database from [Select Material from DB…].

Es/Ec: Elastic ratio between steel and concrete

Ds/Dc: Deadweight ratio between steel and concrete

Ps: Poisson’s ratio of steel

Pc: Poisson’s ratio of concrete

Conv. Stiffness Factor: Stiffness reduction factor of concrete (default=1.0) for SRC section

2D element

2D elements are Triangles or Quadrilaterals with the geometric property of area. Because 3D shapes are expressed as 2D elements, the
thickness needs to be defined. The thickness can be set the same or tapered.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 482 of 1024

To create a shell element, the user needs to select the Material from the materials section as constitutive model and the applicable material
CSys can also be changed.

Base Thickness

The user can enter a constant thickness value for uniform shell elements, otherwise depending upon the thickness of each side the thickness
can be altered too.

Nonstructural Mass

It is the mass for part of the structure which responds to gravity due its mass but its presence does not aid in any strengthening aspect of the
structure.

Include Drilling DOF

Activating this option will give the shell rational degrees of freedom normal to the plane of the element.

Multi-Layered Grid -

This option is useful for accurately representing the presence of rebar in concrete shell and the application is via two methods as shown
below:

Detailed Definition

The placement of rebar inside the shell element based on location and thickness input can be done using the two methods shown below

1. Thickness Type

The user needs to enter the material thickness and its location from the neutral axis as shown below:

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 483 of 1024

2. Rebar Type

Option

Bending Stiffness Ratio - It is a measure of the member resistance to deformation due to bending.

Transverse Shear Thickness Ratio - Default Value for FEM is 0.833.

Simpson Integration Points - Total number of integration points along

Fiber Distance -

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 484 of 1024

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

3D element

3D elements are Tetrahedron or Hexahedrons, Bricks with the geometric property of volume.

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

Cross sectional area (A)

The cross sectional area is used to calculate the axial stiffness when a tensile or axial force acts on the member or the stress on a member. The
calculations for the H section are as follows.

There are 2 methods to calculate the cross sectional area in the GTS NX. The first method uses the provided database to input the dimensions
of a section and automatically calculate the area. For the second method, the user calculates the area directly and inputs the value. The first
method is convenient, but because it does not consider the decrease in area due to bolts in the connection or rivet holes, the area entered
using the second method may provide more accurate results.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 485 of 1024

<Example of cross sectional area calculation>

Torsional stiffness (I )
xx

The torsional stiffness resists the torsional moment and is expressed as follows.

Here, : Torsional stiffness,

: Torsional moment or torque,

: Torsional angle (angle of twist),

: Shear modulus

The torsional stiffness is the stiffness that resists the torsional moment and is different from the polar moment of inertia that decides the shear
stress due to torsion. (However, the 2 are the same when considering a circular cross-section or a thick cylindrical section)

The torsional stiffness can be calculated from Saint-Venant's principle as shown below.

is the warping function that can be calculated using the Finite element method as shown below.

Because , the torsional stiffness comp1nt is expressed as the following equation.

Effective shear area (Asy, Asz )

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 486 of 1024

The effective shear area is needed to calculate the shear stiffness that resists the shear force acting on the y axis or z axis of the element
coordinate system. If the effective shear area is not entered, the shear strain in that direction is ignored.

Here, : Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

When the interior section material properties are calculated or entered from the database, the shear stiffness comp1nt is automatically
considered and the effective shear factor is calculated using the warping function from the shear force caused by bending moment
and the warping function from the Saint-Venant principle.

Here,

Area moment of inertia (Iyy, Izz)

The area moment of inertia is used to calculate the flexural stiffness that resists the bending moment and is calculated from the centroid axis
of the section using the following equation.

l • Area moment of inertia about the y axis of the element coordinate system

l Area moment of inertia about the z axis of the element coordinate system

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 487 of 1024

Section element b h
① 10 4 40 2 80 5 200
② 2 10 20 9 180 5 100
③ 8 3 24 15.5 372 5 120
total - - 84 - 632 - 420

<Table. First area moment of inertia and calculation of centroid >

: area

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the z′-axis direction

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the z′-axis direction

l • Calculate position of neutral axis ( , )

l • Calculate second area moment of inertia ( , )

Section element
① 40 5.5328 1224.5 53.3 1277.8 0 0 333.3 333.3
② 20 1.4672 43.1 166.7 209.8 0 0 6.7 6.7
③ 24 7.9762 1526.9 18.0 1544.9 0 0 128.0 128.0
total 2794.5 238.0 3032.5 0 468.0 468.0

<Table. Second area moment of inertia example>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 488 of 1024

Area product moment of inertia (Iyz)

The area product moment of inertia is used to calculate the stress comp1nt of an asymmetrical section and the definition is as follows.

H, pipe, box, channel, tee type sections have at least 1 axis of symmetry out of the y,z axis on the element coordinate system and hence Iyz=0.
For angle type sections, it does not have any angle of symmetry (Iyz≠ 0) and so, the stress comp1nt needs to be calculated.

The calculations for the area product moment of inertia of an angle type section are shown in the figure below.

<Area product moment of inertia calculations for an angle section>

< Flexural stress distribution diagram for asymmetrical section>

The neutral axis is the axis that passes the points where the flexural stress due to the bending moment is ‘0(zero)’ within the member. The
neutral axis is perpendicular to the -axis and the -axis.

Because the flexural stress due to bending moment is ‘0’ on the neutral axis, the neutral axis direction can be found by the following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 489 of 1024

The general equation used to calculate the flexural stress due to bending moment is as follows.

If this is a H type section, and,

Here, : Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Area product moment of inertia,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system

The shear stress due to shear force acting in the axis and axis direction of the element coordinate system can be calculated using the
following equation.

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

First moment of area (Qy, Qz)

The first moment of area is used to calculate the shear stress at an arbitrary point on the section and the shear stress can be calculated using
the following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 490 of 1024

For a section that is symmetrical about the y, z or both axis, the shear strength on an arbitrary point can be calculated using the following
equation.

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

Element thickness

On the GTS NX, the thickness needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. The plate element has a rotor
float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

Spacing

This functionality is in the 1D element property which is activated only in 2D project setting. Since this option is used to consider the 1D
element force per each element when the user introduce the 1D element more or less than one along the axis of horizontal direction
(thickness direction) in 2D model.

If the user uncheck the spacing option, on the GTS NX, the spacing will be regarded as Plane Strain Thickness in the analysis setting, meaning
that the unit thickness based on the selected unit system.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 491 of 1024

On the GTS NX, spacing is used to calculate the stiffness of the element and output the member force per each element.

where, n = spacing, L = length , A = area, K* = stiffness considering spacing.

where, f* = member force

Refer to the following example,

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material

Material

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 492 of 1024

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Define the general stiffness and nonlinear material properties of the ground and structure. For ground, additional
permeability properties and drained/undrained conditions can be set.

▒ Methodology

Create

Add a ground or structure material. The following 4 material types can be selected and the model type can be set for each material type.

The model type available for each material type is shown below. The ground/structure material properties and the material behavior
properties are defined for each model type. Here, the elements used for ground modeling such as plane strain or solid can be assigned to a
structure material that does not consider Ko effects or permeability properties.

Ground Structure Material behavior

Material type Model type
material material properties
Elastic O O Linear elastic
Tresca O O Elasto-plastic
von Mises (Nonlinear) O O Elasto-plastic
Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Drucker Prager O O Elasto-plastic
Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Generalized Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Hyperbolic(Duncan-
O X Elasto-plastic
Chang)
Strain Softening O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Cam Clay O X Elasto-plastic
Jardine O X Nonlinear elastic
D-min O X Nonlinear elastic
Isotropic(General Modified Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Parameter)
Soft Soil O X Elasto-plastic
Soft Soil Creep O X Elasto-plastic
User defined model O O Elasto-plastic
Modified UBCSAND O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Ramberg-
O O Elasto-plastic
Osgood
Modified Hardin-Drnevich O O Elasto-plastic
Hardening Soil(small
O X Elasto-plastic
strain stiffness)
Generalized SCLAY1S O X Elasto-plastic
CWFS O O Elasto-plastic
PM4Sand O X Elasto-plastic
Transversely Isotropic O O Linear elastic
Jointed Rock Mass O O Elasto-plastic
Orthotropic
2D Orthotropic X O Linear elastic
Geogrid X O Elasto-plastic
(Equivalent)Linear
2D Equivalent 2D Equivalent O O
elastic
Interface X O Elasto-plastic
Shell Interface X O Elasto-plastic

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 493 of 1024

User supplied - Shell

X O Elasto-plastic
Interface / Pile Interface
Pile X O Nonlinear elastic

Isotropic

Isotropic materials have the same properties in every direction and is used to define material behavior properties of most linear-elastic /
nonlinear elastic / elasto-plastic materials.

Orthotropic

Natural ground is generally layered and sloped, making it possible to have different strengths in each orthogonal direction. This option can
also be used to define Jointed Rocks, which have different properties depending on the direction and behave differently according to the
specific confinement conditions. In case of 2D Orthotropic, users can define different values of stiffness along each direction. It is required to
define geometrically orthotropic with significant different stiffness in horizontal and vertical direction.

2D Equivalent

2D equivalent linear analysis specific model. Use the converging strength and damping ratio from the equivalent linear method to consider
the nonlinear and n1lastic behavior of materials.

Interface / Pile

Applied when simulating relative behavior (interface behavior) between ground and structure.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

Import/Import from Excel / Export to Excel

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

The user can construct the frequently used material DB by importing or exporting the excel file containing the material properties.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual to understand the Finite element formulization and yield shape. The input parameters and behavioral
characteristics for each material model are as follows.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material Properties

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 494 of 1024

Material Properties

▒ Methodology

Default parameter (General)

The input parameters and units for defining the default stiffness and initial condition of each model are listed in the table below

Input parameter Definition Unit

Elasticity modulus(
Elasticity modulus kN/m2
)
Elasticity modulus The Elasticity modulus increment amount depending on height
kN/m3
increment (slope)
Reference height Reference height of Elasticity modulus increment m
Poisson’s ratio( ) Poisson’s ratio -
Unit weight (γ) Unit weight of entire unsaturated soil(γt) kN/m3
Initial stress (Ko) Coefficient of earth pressure (initial stress parameter) -
Temperature
Coefficient for calculating temperature loading 1/[T]
coefficient
Damping ratio Material damping ratio (only applied to dynamic analysis) -
Safety Result (Mohr- Calculate Factor of Safety for each element based on MC failure
-
Coulomb) criteria

[Elastic modulus (E)]

This parameter defines the default initial stiffness of the material. The user can specify the Elasticity modulus, or use the Shear modulus (G) or
Oedometer Elasticity modulus (Eoed) from the Oedometer test. The initial stiffness is very important because geo-materials display nonlinear
behavior from the early stages of loading. The initial stiffness can be defined from the stress-strain curves of the triaxial compression test. It is
realistic to use the E0 for materials that display linear (elastic) behavior until a large strain but for general geo-materials, E50, the slope of the

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 495 of 1024

tangent at 50% of the stress, is appropriate as an initial stiffness. When simulating unloading and reloading due to excavation during
construction step analysis, it is better to use Eur instead of E50 to realistically simulate the ground behavior.

Hence, it is important to set the stress path and stress range (size) when using the initial stiffness to simulate the ground behavior. To simulate
detailed behavior, various nonlinear material models can be used.

<Triaxial compression test result graph>

The use of K(bulk modulus) and G(shear modulus) may be debatable use to the continuity issues associated with the ground, but it can be
expressed more simply and clearly than E or v and is convenient to use. The following figure briefly explains the mechanical significance of K
and G.

<Various types of Elasticity modulus>

The Elasticity modulus values gained from on-site tests can be 1 of the many elasticity moduli discussed above and can be modified
appropriately for real situations.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 496 of 1024

Elasticity modulus
Geo-material Poisson’s ratio
(tonf/m2)
amphibolite 9.4~12.1 ´106 0.28~0.30
anhydrite 6.8 ´106 0.30
siabase 8.7~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.30
siorite 7.5~10.8 ´106 0.26~0.29
solomite 11.0~12.1 ´106 0.30
sunite 14.9~18.3 ´106 0.26~0.28
deldspathic gneiss 8.3~11.9 ´106 0.15~0.20
gabbro 8.9~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.31
granite 7.3~8.6 ´106 0.23~0.27
ice 7.1 ´106 0.36
limestone 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
marble 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
mica Schist 7.9~10.1 ´106 0.15~0.20
obsidian 6.5~8.0 ´106 0.12~0.18
oligoclasite 8.0~8.5 ´106 0.29
quartzite 8.2~9.7 ´106 0.12~0.15
rock salt 3.5 ´106 0.25
slate 7.9~11.2 ´106 0.15~0.20
aluminum 5.5~7.6 ´106 0.34~0.36
steel 20.0 ´106 0.28~0.29

<The Elasticity modulus and Poisson’s ratio for rock and other materials>

The Elasticity modulus in the table above is for small, intact rock samples tested in the lab. Hence, when considering the site conditions, a
reduced elasticity modulus needs to be used considering the discontinuous surfaces within large scale rocks. The figure below is a graph of
actual data showing the relationship between the RQD (Rock Quality Designation) and the Elasticity modulus reduction ratio. An RQD is the
percentage of the sum of the lengths of cracks that are over 10cm and exist on the 100cm situ core against the total length. An RQD of 100%
does not mean the core is an intact rock. However, a higher RQD means a higher quality rock and the RQD decreases with more weathering.

<RQD- Modulus reduction ratio (EL/EM) relationship>

As shown on the figure, an RQD of 70% already needs to decrease the lab Elastic modulus by 20%.

[Increment of Elastic modulus]

In general, the strength properties of the soil change with depth and confining pressure, even within a ground layer composed of the same
material. To take this characteristic into account, increase or decrease in the Elastic modulus can be simulated with reference to a reference
height (standard height). If the elastic increase according to height is '0(zero)', the Elastic modulus has a constant value and if it is not '0(zero)',
the Elastic modulus is calculated with reference to a standard height using the following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 497 of 1024

Here, : Input elastic modulus value

: Incremental slope of elastic modulus

: Depth of measurement

<Schematic diagram of Elastic modulus increment>

The in the equation represent the integral point positions of an element where the finite element method calculation occurs. If the integral
point position is higher than , the elastic modulus value can be less than 0 in some places. To avoid this, use the value instead of
further decreasing the value.

[Poisson’s ratio( )]

Poisson’s ratio is a proportional constant from the stress-strain relationship and displays the material volume change associated with loading.
As approaches 0.5, the material becomes an incompressible solid and closer to 0 means the material is elastic, showing large volume
changes even at small loads. The initial stress ratio due to self weight K0 = σh/ σv can be related to the ratio in the uniaxial compression state
by K0 = . If K0 is not used to define the initial in-situ stress, the horizontal stress is calculated from the vertical stress using the
entered . For geo-materials, the general Poisson range is within 0.3~0.4 and entering a value larger than 0.49 can cause numerical errors.
Hence, if K0 is larger than 1, for example over-consolidated ground, the Poisson’s ratio cannot be calculated and the value must be entered
directly.

Shear modulus(G)

The Shear modulus is automatically calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation derived from Hooke's
law. If the value is directly entered, the Elastic modulus changes.

[Oedometer Elastic modulus (Eoed)]

The Oedometer modulus can be calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation.

[Initial stress (K0)]

K0 is the Coefficient of earth pressure, which is defined as the ratio of the initial vertical/horizontal stress (K0 = σh/ σv). The anisotropic
property can be set with reference to the Global Coordinate System.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 498 of 1024

Firstly, select yes/no on whether the Global Coordinate System direction and anisotropic property match and set the lateral pressure index in
each axis or any direction depending on the selected options.

When the 2 properties do match, the lateral pressure index is set in each axis direction but a value of ‘1’ in the direction of gravity cannot be
defined depending on the work environment (2D/3D).

When the 2 properties do not match, the lateral pressure index direction is set by entering the angle with respect to the reference axis. The
reference axis exists to set the lateral pressure index direction. For a 2D work environment, the ’X-Y’ plane is fixed and only the ‘X’ axis can be
selected, with all initial shear stress at ‘0(zero)’. For 3D, each axis apart from the gravitational direction can be selected. For example, if the
gravitational direction is the ‘Z’ axis and the reference axis is set as the ‘X’ axis, the angle can be entered on the ‘X-Z’ plane will be the
maximum lateral pressure angle and all initial shear stress in the XY and YZ direction will be '0(zero)'.

The in-situ stress state, where the soil it not disturbed by excavation or fill, can be expressed using the Coefficient of earth pressure and self
weight. In other words, realistic results can be obtained from applying K0 after modeling the in-situ ground for the 1st step of construction
during analysis. This is true for flat foundations but for inclined foundations, it is recommended that another construction process be added to
converge the stress found using K0 for equilibrium.

[Thermal Parameter]

Thermal Coefficient - describes how the size of an object changes with a change in temperature. Specifically, it measures the fractional
change in size per degree change in temperature at a constant pressure.

Molecular vapor diffusion coefficient - the gas diffusion coefficient of a porous medium, which indicates the change in gas density over time.
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

Thermal diffusion enhancement (factor) - controls the degree of gas flow according to the temperature gradient (unit less).
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

[Safety Result (Mohr-Coulomb)]

§Cohesion, Friction Angle and Allowable tensile strength (optional) can be defined as the failure criteria.

§Stress status of material for each construction stage can be represented by Factor of Safety based on Mohr-Coulomb failure criteria.

§The ratio of generated stress to stress at failure for each element will be calculated automatically.

§Users can figure out stable, potential failure and plastic failure area directly.

§Check factor of safety for each element - (2D : Plain Strain Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR , 3D : Solid Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR)

§In case that Safety Factor is less than 1(or 1.2), it can be identical with plastic failure region.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 499 of 1024

Porous: Seepage, Drained/Undrained Parameter

The input parameters for the permeability characteristics and drained/undrained conditions of the foundation are as follows.

Input parameter Definition Unit

Unit weight(saturated) Saturated state unit weight kN/m3
Initial void ratio(eo) Initial void ratio -
Unsaturated characteristic function setting (negative pore water
Unsaturated characteristic -
pressure-water content-permeability ratio)
Drainage parameter Drained/Undrained condition -
Permeability coefficient GCS direction - Saturated permeability constant m/sec
Void ratio dependent permeability
Permeability ratio dependent on void ratio -
ratio (ck)
Specific storage(Ss) Volume ratio of water inflow/outflow 1/m

<Permeability parameter>

[Initial void ratio (e0)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 500 of 1024

The initial void ratio of the foundation used in consolidation analysis and stress-seepage coupled analysis. It is the volume ratio between the
voids and soil particles within the soil and the value is less than 1 for most soils. The value can be larger than 1 for clays or organic soils, but
the value depends greatly on the sampling method or compaction. Generally, coarse grain sand has a value of 0.6~0.8 and high density sand
with an even size distribution has a value of 0.3. The void ratio can be even 2~3 for fine grained soils.

[Unsaturated Property]

Set to consider the unsaturated property of the foundation. It is a required property for unsteady infiltration analysis and is used to consider
the partial degree of saturation of the foundation for nonlinear (construction step)/consolidation analysis etc. Because real foundations are
unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil for more realistic
results. If the unsaturated properties are not considered, it is assumed that the ground is saturated and hence, the infiltration analysis with
time cannot be examined.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship). Refer to
"Function>Unsaturated characteristic function" for more information.

[Drainage parameters]

The pore water pressure in stress analysis can be divided into normal state pore water pressure and abnormal state pore water pressure - the
excess pore water pressure generated between soil particles due to external loading under undrained conditions. An excess pore water
pressure of nearly 0 is called the drainage condition and is generally used for drainage analysis of sand, which has a large permeability.
However when simulating clay, which has a very small permeability and water cannot be drained out during sudden loading, undrained
analysis is appropriate. The initial state, where the excess pore water pressure has not yet dissipated, is seen as the most unstable state and
the pore water pressure is determined by the volume change of the foundation due to compressibility and permeability coefficient.

Undrained Poisson’s ratio and Skempton(B) coefficient are parameters used to calculate the bulk modulus of elasticity for water. The
undrained Poisson’s ratio has a standard value of 0.495 with a compressibility of nearly ‘0(zero)’ and the Skempton coefficient expresses the
saturation, with 1 meaning full saturation.

The materials for the unsaturated analysis are as follows.

Please refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual for more detailed information.

Drained/Undrained Materials Useable Material models

Drained All geo-materials
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Duncan-Chang,
Undrained (Effective stiffness /Effective strength)
Hoek-Brown, Strain Softening, Modified Cam-clay, Jardine, D-min, Modified Mohr-
Coulomb, User-supplied, Transversely Isotropic
Undrained (Effective stiffness / Undrained
Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)
Undrained (Undrained stiffness / Undrained
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)

[Permeability coefficients (kx,ky,kz)]

The permeability coefficient represents the permeability characteristics (velocity) of the foundation and is used in infiltration analysis and
consolidation analysis. The permeability coefficient for each direction can be defined on the GCS. The input value is the saturated permeability
coefficient and becomes the standard for computing the permeability ratio (Kunsat / Ksat) due to negative pore water pressure when defining
an unsaturated property function.

[Void ratio dependency permeability (ck)]

The permeability coefficient is a measurement of how much the groundwater within a foundation moves in a unit time and is dependent on
the water content and the void ratio change . The larger water content, the larger the flow channel and hence, the value is largest when the
foundation is saturated. The water content depends on the pore water pressure and hence, the permeability coefficient is also dependent on

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 501 of 1024

the pore water pressure. The change in void ratio is considered in consolidation analysis as well as stress-seepage coupled analysis and is
calculated from the initial void ratio.

To express the change in pore water pressure, GTS NX uses the permeability ratio function depended on saturated pore water
pressure coefficient and pore water pressure change and the void ratio dependent permeability ratio dependent on void ratio change .
The unsaturated permeability coefficient depending on void ratio change is given by the following equation.

[Specific storativity(Ss)]

The Specific storage is the water volume inflow or outflows from the unit volume of the aquifer due to water level rise or fall in a confined
aquifer. A coefficient can be directly entered or automatically calculated for compressible fluids.

The change in volumetric water content for pore water pressure in infiltration and consolidation analysis can be expressed by the porosity and
degree of saturation.

The first clause is the slope of the volumetric water content under saturated conditions that can be expressed using the specific storage.

When the material drainage property is set to undrained, the specific storage is automatically calculated using the undrained Poisson's ratio
(vu) and the Effective elastic modulus (E') and Poisson's ratio (v'), entered in the general parameters.

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature unit. (required for transient heat
transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load vector for heat transfer analysis is
the total exothermic load applied to the object.

Unfrozen water content: indicates floating water content in soil / rock. It is given as a temperature-dependent function as a unique
characteristics of the ground.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 502 of 1024

Time Dependent

This is to define Creep Formulation to simulate time-dependent behavior of concrete structures. Following constitutive models are available
for concrete structures, Elastic, Tresca, von Mises, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker Prager, and Hoek Brown.

Two types of creep formulation are available to define Time-dependent behavior of material, Age Dependent and Age Independent. Refer to
analysis reference Ch.4-Section5 in detail.

[Age Dependent]

The stiffness of concrete changes with time, and the creep and shrinkage may cause unexpected deformation. The creep strain of concrete
depends on the time of stress occurrence even under the same applied load. GTSNX supports aging-Kelvin model and aging Viscous model
excluding the spring from Kelvin model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 503 of 1024

[Age Independent]

GTSNX can take into account the primary and secondary creep. The user can use two types of empirical law to define the creep behavior.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Coordinate System

Coordinate System

▒ Overview

Add a result output coordinate system for 2D/3D element. The default rectangular/cylindrical coordinate system is defined and another
coordinate system can be added by arbitrarily defining 1 of the three planes on the coordinate system. The added coordinate system can be
used as the material coordinates when the properties of the 2D / 3D elements are defined. For 2D structural members, it is especially hard to
unify the element coordinate system in 1 direction depending on the element shape. It is useful to set the output coordinate system to check
the member forces of the entire structure according the same direction and sign convention.

▒ Methodology

There are 2 types of coordinate systems; rectangular and cylindrical. The coordinate system can be set by defining 1 of the three planes of the
coordinate system 12, 23, 31 (XY,YZ,ZX) by entering three points. In other words, the plane that passes the three points becomes 1 of the 12,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 504 of 1024

23, 31 planes and the other 2 planes are automatically determined by the direction of the reference plane.

Select the plane, origin point, a point on 1 axis of the selected plane and a point on the selected plane in this order to specify the position and
direction of the reference plant.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Function

Function

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
When setting the analysis conditions (boundary, loading etc.) after the mesh has been generated, the values that change
with position and time can be registered as a function. The provided function types are as follows and the characteristics and applicable range
for each function is given.

▒ Methodology

Applicable range
Function type
Material/Property Boundary condition Loading

Force, Displacement, Pressure,

Prestress, Initial equilibrium
General (Spatial) - Water level
force, Dynamic nodal, Dynamic
surface
General (Non-spatial) Pile, Pile tip - -
Force, Displacement, Pressure,
Prestress, Initial equilibrium
Generalized space - Water level
force, Dynamic noda, Dynamic
surface
Surface Function - Water level -
Non-Hydrostatic Water
- Water level -
Pressure

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Time-dependent (User-

- -
Function defined)

Time-dependent
Creep / Shrinkage Strain
- -
Function Group
(Design code based)
Time-dependent
Elastic Modulus Function - -
(Design code based)
Shear Hardening (User-
Plastic Hardening Function - -
defined)
Hardening Curve von Mises - -
Stress-Strain Curve von Mises - -
Cohesion Hardening Curve CWFS - -

Frictional Angle Hardening CWFS - -

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 505 of 1024

Curve
Dilatancy Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Tensile Strength Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve

Node head, Node

Seepage boundary - -
flux, Surface flux

Nonlinear elastic (Truss

Truss, Embedded truss - -
element)
Nonlinear elastic
Point spring, Elastic link - -
(Point spring/ Elastic link)
Unsaturated property Isotropic, Orthotropic - -
Strain compatible 2D Equivalent - -
Response spectrum - - Response spectrum
Ground acceleration, Time
Time forcing - - varying static, Dynamic nodal,
Dynamic surface

General function(Spatial)

Changes in position (coordinates) of a value with respect to the rectangular or cylindrical coordinate system can be set as function and used
when specifying the load. The water level conditions can be directly specified on the screen, but registering the water level according to the
coordinate change as a function allows this to be used as the water line during the construction step.

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

<Reference coordinate system standard>

[Equation]

The Equation can be set without defining the values of the independent variables.

For example, when defining the function Y=2*X on the Cartesian coordinate system, specify the X coordinate range (start, end) and the X
coordinate increment first. Input 2*X and press the calculate button to automatically generate a function as shown above.

When defining the function Sin(T) between a certain angle with reference to the T coordinate on the cylindrical coordinate system , specify the
angle range (start, end) and increment angle and then input sin(T) to generate a sin function within the specified angle range.

[Scale Value]

Value multiplied to the defined function value. The initial value is set as 1. For example, to increase all defined functions by 2 times, input 2 for
the scale value.

[Extrapolation]

Assign a function value to values outside the independent variable range. The user can select whether to set the function value outside the
range to be 0, the same as the closest function value or determined through linear extrapolation.

<Extrapolation>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 506 of 1024

General function (Non-spatial)

Used to specify the shear stiffness and spring stiffness of pile or pile tip elements as a function. The relative displacement vs Force/Area is
used as a shear stiffness function and the relative displacement vs Force/Length is used as a spring stiffness function at the pile tips. Different
pile shear stiffness functions can be set for each depth when defining the pile material properties.

Generalized space function

The purpose and functions are the same as the general function (spatial). However, the generalized space function is able to generate a
function that considers all 3 axis directions while the general function (spatial) is a 1 dimensional function that can only set 1 independent
variable axis. The input method and detailed functions are the same as the general function (spatial).

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

Surface function

Used to specify the water level surface in 3D space. The 3D water level surface can be generated by entering the variable values with reference
to the global or cylindrical coordinates as shown in the table below, but it can also be generated using the Boundary Condition > Water Level
operation and selecting a surface in space to automatically extract the coordinate information. Here, the X axis spacing determines the
precision of the water surface and for suddenly changing sections, the spacing needs to be carefully set following the element node positions.

Non-Hydrostatic Water Pressure

Define the water pressure at the top and bottom depending on the position of the model.

Applicable in integer conditions and user-defined conditions when specifying the mesh set level.

- User-defined condition: the user can directly define the water pressure at the top and bottom of the assigned mesh by using the specific
water pressure function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 507 of 1024

- Hydrostatic condition: this function is used to define the water pressure at the top of the allocated mesh as hydrostatic.

Name – input name for the function.

Ref. CSys – reference coordinate system for the function definition.

Water Pressure Type – select the type of function for selection in Analysis Case > Analysis Control > Define Water Level for Mesh Set. (User
Defined or Hydrostatic condition)

Scale factor to multiply all input data.

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Function

Define the time dependent creep property and shrinkage strain of concrete material. These functions are available if User Defined is selected
in the Code field.

There are three types of Creep function data types.

Specific Creep ; Strain per unit stress excluding immediate deformation

Creep Function ; Strain per unit stress including immediate deformation

Creep Coefficient ; Ratio of creep strain to elastic strain

A frequently used Creep Function may be saved in and recalled from a file. The data file, fn.TDM retains the following form:

* Unit, in, kip

* Data Assign the units (optional items)
Enter the data in the form of 'day' and
20, 0.9934
'value' (mandatory items)
40,1.2182 -
60, 1.3705 -
80,1.4883 -
100, 1.5854 -
120, 1.6683 -
140, 1.7408 -

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 508 of 1024

160, 1.8054 -
180, 1.8636 -
200, 1.9166 -
220, 1.9653 -
240, 2.0103 -
260, 2.0252 -

Creep / Shrinkage Function Group

The user can define Creep/Shrinkage Function based on the embedded Design Codes as follows.

Link to Creep / Shrinkage Design Code

Elastic Modulus Function

Define Time-dependent Elastic modulus function based on selected design code. It is required to input End Time of function with the number
of steps.

Link to Elastic Modulus Design Code

Plastic Hardening Function

Shear Hardening in Modified Mohr-Coulomb model can be defined by Equivalent plastic strain related to the mobilized shear resistance.
Using "Auto-Calculated" option, solver recalculates friction angle based on the deviatoric plastic strain.

Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and stress are directly inputted. It is used when defining hardening curve within von Mises model. Plastic strain begin once the
material starts yielding so it can be calculated using following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 509 of 1024

Stress-Strain Curve

Stress and stain are directly inputted. It is used when defining Stress-Strain Curve within von Mises model. When Load-Displacement Curve is
already known, true strain can be calculated using following equation.

Cohesion Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and cohesion are directly inputted. It is used when describing Cohesion Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion Weakening and
Frictional Strengthening).

Frictional Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and frictional angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Frictional Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Dilatancy Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and dilatancy angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Dilatancy Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Tensile Strength Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and tensile strength are directly inputted. It is used when describing Tensile Strength Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Seepage Boundary function

Used to simulate the head and flow rate difference with time such as node head, node flux rate, surface flux. Setting the values (head/flux)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 510 of 1024

according to the time flow that fits the specified time unit generates a function that can be applied to unsteady infiltration analysis.

For unsteady infiltration analysis, the time steps for result verification are set separately and the time function for the steps is used in the
analysis. When the time step is beyond the range of the function, the function value is automatically calculated using linear interpolation. In
other words, to apply a 0 function value to time steps outside the range, the same function value (0) needs to be entered for arbitrary time
steps when creating the function as shown in the figure above.

Nonlinear elastic function (Truss element)

The behavioral characteristics of truss elements or embedded truss elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The stress change according
to strain of the truss element can be directly generated as a function and used. The function can be applied to the tensile (compression) test
results of a structural member (truss affiliated) or to the deformation behavior properties of a general steel member.

Nonlinear elastic function (Point spring/ Elastic link)

The behavioral characteristics of spring or elastic link elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The spring/link stiffness according to the
element strain can be defined to generate a function.

Unsaturated property function

For steady infiltration analysis that assumes a saturated ground, the unsaturated properties are not taken into account even if they are
entered. For the time dependent unsteady analysis, the unsaturated properties of the ground must be considered. Also, because real
foundations are unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil
for more realistic results.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship).

[Individually]

Define the permeability function data and water content function data. Based on the experimental data of unsaturated soil, the coefficients for
each function type can be defined using Curve Fitting or the data can be directly input through customize. If the experimental data is entered
directly, the negative pore water pressure size is entered by its absolute value and the permeability ratio is found by dividing the unsaturated
value with the saturated state value.

<Individual consideration>

The provided permeability functions and coefficients are listed below.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 511 of 1024

l Gardner coefficient

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Frontal function

K ratio (Rk) : Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

Ho : Head at which the permeability coefficient no longer decreases

l Van Genuchten function (Permeability ratio)

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Van Genuchten (Water content)

: Volume water content

: Residual volume water content

: Saturated volume water content

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

[Relation]

The unsaturated material property data can be set on the ground type according to the JICE (Japan Institute of Construction Eng.) criteria. The
pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio relationship function for each type of ground is shown
below.

Pressure head(P)-Volumetric water content(T) Pressure head(P)-Degree of saturation(Sr)

-Permeability ratio (K) -Permeability ratio(K)

(T)- (P) (T)- (K) (Sr)- (P) (Sr)- (K)
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F],
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], [GF]
[GF] (JICE) (JICE)
[GF] (JICE) [GF] (JICE)
Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], Sandy soil [S], [S-F],

[SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE) [S-F], [SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE)

Cohesive soil [M], [C]
Sandy soil [SF] (JICE) Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) Sandy soil [SF] (JICE)
(JICE)
Cohesive soil [M], [C]
User specified Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) User specified
(JICE)
User specified User specified

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 512 of 1024

<Dual consideration>

For unsteady analysis, the negative pressure head (pore water pressure) is calculated for each time step (construction step) and applied,
renewing the relative permeability coefficient. The volumetric water content (degree of saturation), according to the calculated pressure head,
is found and the relative permeability, according to the found volumetric water content (degree of saturation), is renewed for each step.

Strain compatible function

For the 2D equivalent linear analysis, the shear modulus and damping ratio are set as functions of strain to consider the nonlinearity and
inelastic behavior of the ground. If the function is not defined, the ground material is assumed to be linear and the entered (fixed) shear
modulus and damping ratio is applied. Generally, the ground displays decreasing shear modulus and increasing damping ratio as the shear
strain increases. For complex nonlinear behavior of the ground, the material properties are simplified to linear equivalent properties. Repeated
calculations from the assumed initial values can compute the converging shear modulus and damping ratio.

Material properties can be defined from various existing database. The following empirical equation can be used to generate a function
following the stratum properties.

[Database]

A strain function stored from existing research can be imported from the database. An example DB is shown below.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 513 of 1024

Clay - Pl=5-10 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Lower Bound (Sun et al.0)

Clay - Pl=10-20 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Average (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=20-40 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Upper Bound (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=40-80 (Sun et al.0) Clay (Idriss 1990)
Clay - Pl=80+ (Sun et al.0) Gravel (Seed et al.0)
Clay (Seed and Sun 1989) Linear
Modulus Gravel (Seed et al.0) Rock
Damping
Reduction Linear Rock (Idriss)
Curve
Curve Rock Sand (Idriss 1990)
Rock (Idriss) Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound Vucetic - Dobry
Sand (Seed and Idriss 1970)
-
Vucetic - Dobry

Response spectrum function

Define the spectrum function used in response spectrum analysis. Because the response spectrum analysis uses a linearly interpolated
spectrum function value for the natural periodicity of the structure, compact spectrum values are needed for areas where the curvature of the
spectrum curve changes rapidly. The period range of the spectrum function must contain all natural periods of the structure.

The spectrum data types are normalized acceleration (acceleration spectrum, gravitational acceleration), acceleration, velocity and
displacement spectrum and changing the time function data format only changes the application format, not the data format. The scale factor
is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value. In the 'Damping Ratio' space,
input the damping ratio applied on the response spectrum but if the damping ratio of the target structure is different, the input spectrum data
is processed to fit the structural damping ratio.

[Design spectrum function]

Use the built-in design spectrum. The default built-in design spectrum types are as follows.

l Korea(Bridge) : Korea, Traffic Specification

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 514 of 1024

l Japan(Bridge02) : Japan, Load instruction and Dynamic Analysis of Building

l China(JTJ004-89) : China, Specifications of Earthquake Resistant Design for Highway Engineering

l KBC 2009 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2009

l KBC 2005 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2005

l IBC2000(ASCE7-98) : USA, International Building Code 2000

l UBC(1997) : USA, Measure of Uniform Building Code 97 (Standards)

l EURO(2004H-ELASTIC) : Europe, Sesismic Design Measure of Structures

Time forcing function

The time forcing function is applied to the loading conditions (ground acceleration, time varying static, dynamic nodal, dynamic surface)
applied to linear/nonlinear time history analysis. A function for the time history loading value is formed and changing the time function data
format only changes the application format, not the data format.[edit] The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the
entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

[Add Time Function]

The defined function is also applicable for Dynamic node (surface) loading and time varying static loading. Specifying 'Force' or 'Moment' uses
the time history load as a 'dynamic node (surface) load' input and specifying 'Normalized Acceleration' or 'Acceleration' uses it to input the
'ground acceleration'. Specifying 'Normal' uses the time history load as the change in static load with time for 'time varying static load' or
'dynamic surface load'.

[Import/Earthquake]

Save and import frequently used time history loading or select earthquake acceleration data from the program DB. There are a total of 32
types of earthquake acceleration.

[Add Time Sinusoidal]

A sine function can be used to define the time history loading. A, C are constants, f is the frequency of the input load, D is the damping factor
and P is the phase angle. If the time history load is entered as a harmonic function, input the necessary sine function variables and click
[Redraw Graph] to view the loading on the right hand side.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 515 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Hinge

Hinge Property

▒ Overview

When crack or yield occurs due to irregular cyclic load such as seismic load, very complex behavior appears since displacement history to the
current affects to the restoring force and displacement relationship. It is called that hysteresis model which regulates this relationship and is
considered to inelastic hinge at inelastic element.

Inelastic hinges are available in nonlinear, construction stage, consolidation, fully coupled, nonlinear time history analysis, SRM/SAM (Slope
stability analysis) and nonlinear time history analysis with SRM and element results can be displayed.

▒ Methodology

Type

- Beam - Lumped : It concentrates the inelastic behavior represented by rotational and translational springs at each end and the center. And the remaining
parts are assumed to behave elastically. Inelastic hysteresis behaviors are defined by skeleton curves, which are empirical hysteresis models. The axial
component is represented by a spring at the center and two translational components are represented by springs at each end defined by force-
displacement relationships. The two flexural components, My and Mz, are represented by springs defined by the relationship between moment and angle of

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 516 of 1024

rotation at either I or J or at both ends.

- Beam - Distributed : Unlike lumped hinges, it assumes inelastic behavior throughout the member. The plastic hinge locations in the length direction of a
member assigned by the user are defined as the integration points. The flexibility matrix of a section, which represents the distribution of internal forces, is
calculated through the integration points. The number of integration points can be 1 and between 3 and 20. If the number of integration points is 2, the
moment at the free end of a cantilever beam does not come to exactly zero due to the inherited characteristic of the integration method. Therefore, two
integration points are not permitted. Inelastic hysteresis behavior can be defined by 2 models, empirical Skeleton and Fiber. The hinge behaviors can be
expressed by force - deformation relationships in each axis direction, and the hinge hysteresis behavior of the flexural components can be expressed by the
relationships of moment and angle of rotation. Inelastic behaviors can be defined for 3 axis components and 2 flexural (My & Mz) components.

- Truss : The axial component is represented by a spring at the center defined by the force-displacement relationship. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a
spring is defined by a skeleton model.

- Spring / Elastic Link : Unlike Lumped and Distributed hinges, which are influenced by the inelastic properties of materials and members, the inelastic plastic
hinge properties for the corresponding linear properties of each component of Property Type defined in General Link Properties are defined. The elastic
stiffness of each component is defined by effective stiffness and acts as the initial stiffness in inelastic analysis. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a spring is
defined by a skeleton model. The inelastic properties of a spring can be defined for all 3 translational and 3 rotational directions.

Interaction

The type of considering interaction between axial force and moment is selected.

- None: Interaction between axial force and moments is not considered.

- P-M in Strength Calculation: N-M interaction in time history analysis is reflected by calculating the flexural yield strength of a hinge considering the effect
of axial force. In this method, the interaction between biaxial bending moments is ignored. The axial force is assumed to act with each directional bending
moment independently when the hinge status is evaluated at each time step. Recalculation of bending moment yield strength reflecting axial force is carried
out in a loading condition, which satisfies the following three conditions:

1) It must be the first among the sequential time history load cases, which will be consecutively analyzed.

2) Inelastic static analysis must be carried out.

The elements are inelastic beam elements assigned with hinge properties to which P-M interaction is applied. The initial axial and bending moment at this
time are determined by the combination of linear elastic analysis results of all the static loads contained in Time Varying Static Load. The factors used in the
combination are defined by the Scale Factors specified in Time Varying Static Load.

- P-M-M in Status Determination: This method uses a multi-axis hinge hysteresis model in inelastic time history analysis. Interaction between axial force
and biaxial moments is realized by applying the plasticity theory. The interaction is considered at each time step through evaluating the status of inelastic
hinges using the 3-dimensional yield surface. GTSNX supports the kinematic hardening type.

Yield Surface Function

If "P-M in Strength Calculation" or "P-M-M in Status Determination" is selected in Interaction Type, enter the related data for P-M interaction curve and 3-D
yield surface.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 517 of 1024

Component

Select the components of sectional strength for which properties will be entered. The Spring Type permits properties in all directional components, whereas
Lumped and Distributed types permit all but the Mx component.

Hinge Location

Select the locations of lumped inelastic hinges. Axial component is fixed to the center of a member. I-end, j-end or both ends can be selected for the
bending moment components.

Num. of Sections

Enter the number of integration points for inelastic hinges of the distributed type. Up to 20 sections are permitted, and moment - curvature relationships are
calculated at all the sections corresponding to the points.

Hysteresis Model

Select a hysteresis model for an inelastic hinge.

Hinge Components (Single)

Hysteresis Model Type

- Origin-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
origin and again move along the skeleton curve after reaching the opposite skeleton curve.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 518 of 1024

- Peck-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
point of maximum displacement on the opposite side. If the first yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the response points move
toward the first yielding point on the skeleton curve.

- Kinematic : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. It shows the tendency of strength increase with the increase in loading. This is used to model the Bauschinger effect of metallic
materials. Accordingly, it is cautioned that energy dissipation may be overestimated for concrete. Due to the characteristic of the model, only
the positive (+) and negative (-) symmetry is permitted for the strength reduction ratios after yielding.

- Clough : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. Unloading stiffness is obtained from the elastic stiffness
reduced by the equation below. As the deformation progresses after yielding, unloading stiffness reduces gradually.

where,

K : unloading stiffness
R

Ko : elastic stiffness

Dy : yield displacement in the zone where unloading begins

Dm : maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 519 of 1024

(In the zone where yielding has not occurred, replace it with the yield displacement)

: constant for determining unloading stiffness

If the sign of loading changes in the process of unloading, response points move toward the point of maximum displacement in the zone of
progressing direction. If yielding has not occurred in this zone, the response points move toward the yield point on the skeleton curve. If
unloading becomes loading without changing the loading sign, the response points move along the unloading path. If the loading continually
increases, loading continues on the skeleton curve again.

- Degrading : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The load-displacement coordinates at unloading
move to the path of reaching the maximum deformation point on the opposite side due to the change of unloading stiffness once in the
middle. If yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the first yielding point is assumed to be the maximum deformation point.

- Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a tetralinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D, does
not exceed D3, the hysteresis rules are identical to the Original Taketa hysteresis. If the current displacement or deformation, D, exceeds D3,
response points move along the slope K4. For unloading, response points move by the same rules as the Original Taketa hysteresis. The
Takeda tetralinear hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 520 of 1024

- Modified Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D,
exceeds D2 for the first time or the maximum deformation point up until now, response points move along the trilinear skeleton curve. If
unloading takes place from this straight line toward the opposite direction, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the point of the
restoring force becoming 0. If the restoring force goes beyond the 0 point, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the
opposite side. Even in the case where unloading takes place from the straight line directed toward the maximum deformation point from the
point of the 0 restoring force, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the points reach the 0 restoring force. After the point of 0 restoring
force is passed, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the opposite side. The Modified Takeda type hysteresis model
can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

- Normal Bilinear : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. The Normal Bilinear type hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and
Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 521 of 1024

- Modified Ramberg-Osgood :

- Modified Hardin-Drnevich :

Symmetric / Asymmetric

: Select the type of Skeleton Curve.

Yield Function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 522 of 1024

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

- Yield Displacement : Enter the yield displacement of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Yield Displacement is selected for Input Type.

- Force (Yield Strength) : Yield strength is specified. It is user defined based on material and section properties. The user specifies positive (+)
values regardless of tension (t) or compression (c). The program treats compression as negative (-) internally.

Unloading Stiffness Parameter

Exponent in Unloading Stiffness Calculation: This is an option used to determine the unloading stiffness of the outer loop used in the
Clough and Takeda type models among hysteresis models of skeleton curves. This is used to reflect the effect of reduction in stiffness, which
occurs as the deformation progresses after yielding. The unloading stiffness is determined by the elastic stiffness reduced by the yield
displacement and maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins and the exponent entered here.

Inner Loop Unloading Stiffness Reduction Factor: This is used to determine the unloading stiffness of the inner loop. The inner loop is
formed when unloading occurs before reaching the target point on the skeleton curve while reloading after the loading sign changes in the
process of unloading. The unloading stiffness of the inner loop is calculated by multiplying the unloading stiffness of the outer loop by the
reduction ratio for the unloading stiffness of the inner loop.

Hinge Components (Multi)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 523 of 1024

- P-M Interaction Curves : Enter the P-M interaction curve data required to calculate 3-dimensional yield surfaces. All strength values must be
entered with positive sign. Sign convention for plotting P-M curve is positive for compression and negative for tension.

Strengths for the 1st P-M Interaction Curves

PC(t): First yield strength subject to pure tension force

PC(c): First yield strength subject to pure compression force

PCBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PCBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MCy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MCz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

Strengths for the 2nd P-M Interaction Curves

PY(t): Second yield strength subject to pure tension force

PY(c): Second yield strength subject to pure compression force

PYBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second stage yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PYBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MYy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MYz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

- Approximation of Yield Surface Shape : On the basis of P-M interaction curve, the parameters for 3-dimensional yield surface are either user
defined or auto-calculated. If some items are auto-calculated and the remainder is to be user defined, Auto-calculation should be performed
first, and then necessary items can be modified after converting to User Input. In case of Alpha, only user defined entry is possible. The value
of each parameter is used in the equation of yield surface displayed in the dialog box.

Beta y, Beta z, Gamma: Being the exponential powers of P-My or P-Mz interactions, different values can be entered for the first and second

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 524 of 1024

yields. For Beta y and Beta z on the other hand, two separate values representing the ranges of larger and smaller axial forces relative to the
axial force at the time of balanced failure can be entered.

Alpha: Exponent for My-Mz interaction for the 1st and 2nd yielding

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

α1: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the first yielding divided by the initial stiffness

α2: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the second yielding divided by the initial stiffness

- Initial Stiffness : The initial stiffness used in inelastic analysis is either selected or entered by the user.

Elastic Stiffness: elastic stiffness of a member is used as the initial stiffness for inelastic analysis.

User Defined: the user directly enters the initial stiffness if the Input Type is Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Contact > Define Contact

Define Contact (Welded / General)

▒ Overview

Use welded contact elements where element faces meet, but the nodes are not shared, to induce the same behavior.

It can be used as the initial contact conditions between adjacent objects in structural analysis, consolidation analysis or seepage analysis. It is
often used when node sharing on very complex geometry needs to be ignored to create an element. This function prevents analysis error and
checks the analysis results that are similar to node sharing.

General contact considers the impact and impact friction between two objects in analysis, otherwise two objects are bonded like rigid link each
other by welded contact. General contact can be used in nonlinear (static, dynamic) and fully coupled analysis. With Geometric Nonlinearity
option, solver will take into account all possible contact area automatically regardless of defined Contact tolerance between two objects. It is
also possible to consider Frictional behavior by Friction coefficient between two objects and the penetration at initial stage can be ignored by
adjusting slave nodes automatically.

▒ Concept

Contact analysis fundamentally assumes that two objects in a space can be in contact, but cannot penetrate each other (non-penetration
condition), and are nonlinear in behavior or condition from a physical point of view. The type of contacts are general contact (considers the
impact and impact friction between two objects in analysis), rough contact(does not consider sliding), welded contact (two objects are welded
from the start of analysis) and sliding contact (only considers the sliding in the tangent direction). In the example below, general contact and
rough contact are assigned depending on the position of two objects at the start of analysis and can be seen as linear. GTS NX supports the

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 525 of 1024

welded and general contact feature.

<Concept of General contact and Rough contact> <Concept of Welded contact>

▒ Methodology

Contact element generation (Welded Contact)

The contact can be defined through the Automatic Contact and the Create Manual Contact Pair functions.

Auto contact

This function automatically searches for areas where the selected meshes meet without node sharing and creates a contact surface.

[Searching Distance] : Input the distance between the main contact surface and the sub contact surface. The function searches for contact
surfaces within this range.

Manual contact pair

The user can directly specify the main contact surface and the sub contact surface to create a contact surface. Face, 2D element, 3D element,
2D element free face, and 3D element free face geometries can be selected.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 526 of 1024

When creating the contact surface manually, the node-to-surface contact or surface-to surface-contact can be selected to create the surface.
Node-to-surface contact takes less time, but the solution accuracy is relatively low because the nodes of the main object tend to penetrate
through the sub object. On the other hand, surface-to surface-contact takes longer but the non-penetrating conditions are satisfied relatively
accurately, allowing for more accurate simulations of structural behavior.

[Contact Parameters] : Input the coefficient value to calculate the initial contact search distance. The initial contact search distance can be
found by multiplying the coefficient value by the longest length on the element face. If the main and sub contact faces are within this distance,
contact is considered to have occurred.

Contact Parameters

Define the normal and tangential stiffness of contact element. Based on the material properties of adjacent elements, the stiffness will be
updated automatically according to the generated strain. Highly recommend to use Default setting for Scaling Factor.

Following is the summary of parameters for the Contact Elements.

Parameter Reference value (kN, m)

Contact stiffness (Recommend to use default setting)
Normal stiffness scaling 1 (The smaller value, the larger penetration)
Tangential stiffness scaling 0.1 ( Normal stiffness / 10)
Advanced options (parameters)
Contact Tolerance Auto (Uncheck) : Find contact area within the tolerance
Friction Coefficient (Optional) 0.3 ~ 0.6 (Depending on material types)
Impermeable (Uncheck) : Possible to allow seepage flow
Conduction for Seepage Flow
through the contact elements
Property used to describe ability to conduct heat
Thermal Conductance
between two bodies in contact.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Construction Stage > Construction Stage Set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 527 of 1024

Construction Stage Set

▒ Overview

Define the Construction stage set for analysis. Used for analyses that incorporate construction stages (Static/Slope analysis,
Seepage/Consolidation analysis, Thermal Analysis).

▒ Methodology

Define the Construction Stage Set and then define the Construction Stage.

A single file can be composed of multiple Construction stage sets.

The construction stage types are [Stress], [Seepage], [Stress-Seepage-Slope], [Consolidation], [Fully Coupled stress], [Heat Transfer], [Seepage-
Thermal Stress], [Thermal Stress].

Click the Define Construction Stage button to form the construction stage. Advanced options that are not available on the [Stage Definition
Wizard] can be set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 528 of 1024

<Define construction stage>

Stage name

Define the construction stage name. Use [New] to create a new construction stage and use [Insert] to add a new construction stage in
between existing stages.

For example, clicking the Insert button at Stage 2 moves the current stage to Stage 3, and the new stage becomes Stage2. Click the button
to move to the previous or next stage.

Stage type

Specify the construction stage type. Be aware that the designated [Analysis Control], [Output Control] options are different and the boundary
conditions/loading conditions for each stage type are different.

Refer to the Analysis > Analysis case > General > Analysis/Output Control for more information on control options.

Move to Previous/Next

The construction stage order may need modification when many construction stages are created. Use the Move to Previous or Next button to
change the order of created construction stages.

Time Step

Define time steps used in the analysis.

l Duration

Insert the duration to be analyzed. ‘User Defined Step’ generates steps by dividing with Step Number. ‘Auto Time Step’ automatically
divides defined period with time step.

l Auto Time Step

It will automatically choose appropriate time steps for a seepage, consolidation, semi/fully coupled stress seepage analysis and thermal
analyses.

When the calculation runs smoothly, resulting in very few iterations per step, then the program will choose a larger time step. When the
calculation uses many iterations due to an increasing amount of plasticity, then the program will take smaller time steps.

This function reduces the pore water pressure result errors when loading is applied in short period of time.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 529 of 1024

l Initial Time Step

Initial Time Step can be either manually defined by user or calculated automatically within solver. The automatic calculation formula is as
follows:

l Max. Pore Pressure Changes per Step

Input Max. Pore Pressure Changes per step. When pore pressure changes exceeds the maximum value, step size is automatically reduced
and analyzed.

l Max. Temperature Changes per Step

Input Max. Temperature Changes per step. When temperature changes exceeds the maximum value, step size is automatically reduced
and analyzed.

l Ratio of Max Time Step to Initial

Input the maximum value of time step ratio compared to ‘Initial Critical Time Step’.

l Save Step

Select the output method of results. 'Last Increment': Only output results from last step, 'Every Increment': Output results from all steps.

Set Data

Display the usable Mesh sets, Boundary sets, and Load sets in a worktree. Be aware that the sub-sets are also displayed independently, so take
caution when selecting the mesh sets.

For example, the set data for the created Core mesh set with registered mesh sub-sets (Core 001, Core 002, Core 003) are shown in the right
figure. In this case, activating Core does not activate the mesh sub-sets Core 001, Core 002, Core 003. Hence, mesh sets that are not registered
directly on the set data are useless.

Activated Data

Register the activated sets for each construction stage. The activated sets remain active for future construction stages without needing re-
activation until it is deactivated. The sets that need to be activated for the construction stage can be selected using the left mouse button and
dragged & dropped into the activated data. Another method is to select the sets using the right mouse button on the Set data and select
activate on the Context menu.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 530 of 1024

Deactivated data

Register the deactivated set for each construction stage. The deactivated sets remain active for future construction stages until they are re-
activated. The sets that need to be deactivated for the construction stage can be selected using the left mouse button and dragged &
dropped into [Deactivated data]. Another method is to select the sets using the right mouse button on [Set data] and select deactivate on the
Context menu.

Define Water Level For Global

Input the groundwater level that changes according to the construction stage with respect to the GCS. Click to set the ground water level
function. If the water level and function are both specified, the input water level is multiplied onto the function and applied on the analysis.

Define Water Level for Mesh Set

Define the groundwater level that changes according to the construction stage for each mesh set.

If the groundwater layer is surrounded by rocks or an impermeable clay layer (confined aquifer), the presence/absence of the groundwater
level for each ground layer can be set for analysis.

If the total groundwater level is input and a mesh set has a defined groundwater level, the mesh set groundwater level has priority and the
total groundwater level is applied to mesh sets that do not have a defined level.

If the water level and function are both specified, the input water level is multiplied onto the function and applied on the analysis.

LDF

Set the Load Distribution Factor. The sum of all distribution factors need to be 1, and the keyboard Enter key needs to be pressed after the
input to apply the value properly.

For the example case shown below, a LDF of 0.4 is applied to the current stage and a LDF of 0.3 is applied to the next stage and the
subsequent stage. Here, the LDF does not need to be checked for the latter two stages and the LDFs need to be set such that they do not
overlap in the construction stages.

The application method of the Load Distribution Factor is as follows:

The LDF keeps track of the Internal Forces of a deleted element and loads it in stages according to the factor assigned for each construction
stage, rather than loading it at once.

When applying the LDF on the top and bottom simultaneously, the factors need to be set such that they do not overlap in the construction
stages. If the LDFs overlap as shown below, when calculating the internal forces of this stage, the 0.5 on the bottom element released in STG
#5 releases the stress using the internal force of the bottom element, created by the 0.7 on the top element defined in STG #4. Hence, the 1.0
on the top element of STG #4 is not released and so, the internal force for the 0.3 on top is not taken into account for analysis. (Very

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 531 of 1024

Confusing)

Part STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6

Top 0.3 0.4 0.3 -
Bottom - - 0.5 0.5

STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6

Hence, be careful not to overlap the LDFs in the construction stage, as shown below.

Part STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6 STG #7

Top 0.3 0.4 0.3 - -
Bottom - - - 0.5 0.5

Clear Displacement

Set the displacement of an analysis result in the current stage as 0. It is used to set the initial conditions of the in-situ state. The stress is not
reset to 0.

Slope Stability (SRM/SAM)

Decide whether to conduct the slope stability analysis (SRM) in the current construction stage. If this option is checked, it is automatically
registered as an analysis case and analysis is conducted. In other words, the ground stress from the non-linear analysis results in the previous
stage is coupled and slope stability analysis is conducted. (However for SAM analysis, it is only applicable for 2D analysis and the boundary
conditions of the virtual slip surface needs to be set.)

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Construction Stage > Construction Stage Wizard

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 532 of 1024

Stage Definition Wizard

▒ Overview

A wizard to efficiently define the construction stages. A regular number (postfix) needs to be assigned to each set to define the construction
stage using wizard. This number can be assigned using the [Rename] function for mesh sets. Sets that are only used once in the entire
construction stage process does not need to be assigned a number.

It can be used in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis, Thermal Analysis).

▒ Methodology

Display the usable Mesh sets, Boundary sets and Load sets. Select the desired data and drag it to the Set assignment rule, or drag the Mesh
set, Boundary set and Load set to the activation state.

Be aware that the display format of each set is completely different from the workstree. Here, all mesh sets are displayed as individual mesh
sets, ignoring the relationship between mesh sets and sub-mesh sets in the workstree. Also, the upper most display name is the mesh set
name without the postfix. Expanding one step displays the mesh set name with the postfix.

Refer to the following example.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 533 of 1024

<Element, Boundary, Load display format>

Set Assignment Rule

Specify the construction stage set used to define the construction stage and specify the assignment rule.

l Set Type

The type of set on which the construction stage will be defined. The user can select between Mesh set, Boundary set or Load set. All
kinds of construction stages can be defined using this wizard including stress seepage coupled, where the user can check for ground or
terrain deformation due to either infiltration or drawdowns.

l Set Name Prefix

Specify the name without the serial number of the set on which the construction stage will be defined.

For example, if a Mesh set is specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’, select the Set name prefix as ‘‘Final Core #’.

l A/R

Select whether to Add or Remove a selected set. A is displayed in green and R is displayed in yellow.

l Start Postfix

Specify the set number of the selected set that is used first in the construction stage.

For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final Core #001’ is removed at the
second construction stage with the other Cores removed in sequence after each step, the first used set number is 001 and so the postfix
can be set as ‘1’.

l F

Check this option on when the selected set is not used until the final number. The user can input the end suffix when checked. If it is not
checked, the set is used sequentially until the final number.

l End Postfix

Specify the set number of the selected set that is used last in the construction stage.

For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final Core #001’ is removed at the
second construction stage with sequential removal until the ‘Final Core #006’, check F and input the postfix 6.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 534 of 1024

l Postfix Increment

Input the postfix number increment used as the construction stage progresses.

For a Mesh set specified from 'Final Core #001' to 'Final Core #012', if the mesh is removed in order of 'Final Core #001', 'Final Core #003'
and 'Final Core #005' for each construction stage, the postfix increment is 2 and hence, input a postfix spacing of 2.

l Start Stage

Input the stage number first used in the construction stage.

For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final Core #001’ is removed at the
second construction stage with the other Cores removed in sequence after each step, the second stage is first used and so the start
stage is set as 2.

l Stage Increment

Select the stage increment for a selected set that is used every few stages.

For a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’, if the 'Final Core #001' is removed at the second construction stage
and the Final Core #002' is removed at the fourth construction stage, the set is used every 2 stages and so the stage spacing is 2.

[Apply Assignment Rule]

Press this button to display the specified data according to the assignment rule on the Mesh, Boundary, Load set activated state. Press
OK to create the construction stage.

The activated Mesh, Boundary, and Load set can be checked for each stage using the Preview construction stage( ) option. This
function has the same function as Construction stage simulation ( ).

Mesh, Boundary, Load Activation Status

Display the currently specified construction stage on a table.

The construction stage progresses as it moves to the right. The I.S. and S1 on the top of the columns are abbreviations for initial stage and
Stage1, respectively. The added data is displayed in green and the removed data is displayed in orange. Data defined by postfixes are
expressed in each construction stage as numbers. Data that does not use a prefix (eg. Ground) are expressed as a line. If the mesh, boundary
condition and load data are dragged onto the menu [Mesh, Boundary, Load Activation Status], the delete setting cannot be conducted and
only additional settings can be conducted.

<Mesh, Boundary, Load display format>

Click the [Apply Assignment Rule] button to display the construction stage on the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status. To delete the
displayed construction stage, select that data cell and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

This method deletes the created construction stage data, but not the construction stage. Hence, a construction stage with no content is
created. Select the whole target column and press the Ctrl and Delete key together to delete the construction stage for the whole column.

The stage where all the mesh sets are activated initially (in-situ state) is when all the mesh sets in the I.S. (initial stage) are activated. This stage
can be specified by entering 0 for start stage (the 0 stage is the initial stage) and 0 for stage spacing (the stage increment number is 0 and
thus all elements are activated in one stage).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 535 of 1024

The advanced options (LDF etc.) used in the construction stage can be set in the Define Construction Stage menu. Hence for complex models,
it is convenient to use the Construction Stage Wizard to create the framework of the overall construction stages. It is also convenient to use
the [Define Construction Stage] menu to specify the individual options used in each construction stage.

Example

Let us examine a simple example of Construction stage definition.

The construction stage is defined for a tunnel modeled on a homogeneous ground. The entire tunnel shape is excavated at once and the rock
bolts and shotcrete are created in the following stages. The excavation is done in 5 stages. The excavation is assumed to start from the smaller
postfix number and progresses to the larger postfix.

The mesh set is created as follows.

Run the Stage definition wizard.

'Soil' and 'Tunnel#' need to be included in the in-situ state. Select using the Ctrl key and drag & drop into the I.S. column of the Mesh,
Boundary, Load activation status.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 536 of 1024

Start the tunnel excavation.

In this example, the exaction is done stage by stage, starting from the first stage as follows: 1st face tunnel excavation -> 1st face rock
bolt/shotcrete installment -> 2nd tunnel excavation -> 2nd face rock bolt/shotcrete installment -> ….

Select R to select and delete the 'Tunnel#' of the element type, the Start postfix as 1 and do not check F to process until the last number. The
Start stage is 1 and the input is 2 for the Stage spacing to allow for the installation of rock bolts and shotcrete between excavation stages.
Afterwards, click the [Apply Assignment Rules] button to specify the construction stage of the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status.

The shotcrete and rock bolts are also specified on the construction stage.

Input 2 for the Start stage and set as A to create both elements in the second construction stage. Also, input Start postfix 1, do not check F
and input Postfix spacing to use all the numbers from 1 to the final number. Finally, input 2 for the Start stage and Stage spacing to create the
first elements at the second construction stage with two stage spacing between element creation.

Press the [Assign Assignment Rules] button to automatically create the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status and click the [OK] button to
create the construction stage.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Construction Stage > Simulate Construction Stage

Simulate Stage

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 537 of 1024

▒ Overview

Check the defined construction stage as a video. It can be used in analyses that incorporate construction stages (Static/Slope analysis,
Seepage/Consolidation analysis).

▒ Methodology

Specify the defined construction stage set and click the button to play the construction stage video. The video is created by capturing the
whole work screen. Unwanted frames can be inserted if a different dialog box is open above the model.

Check the [Mesh],[Load] and [Boundary] to check the activated/deactivated data of the construction stage.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Construction Stage > Auto Set

Auto Set

▒ Overview

Automatically generate construction stages using the mesh, boundary condition, load that are viewed on the current model screen.

It can be used in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis). The data used for each stage can be
checked on the model, allowing intuitive composition of stages.

▒ Methodology

Define construction stage automatically

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 538 of 1024

The construction stage auto set function can be activated by using the following steps:

1. Adding the construction stage set after finishing modeling registers the added construction stage set on the worktree, as shown below.

2. Check the [Define Auto Stage] option by right mouse clicking on the registered construction stage set. This option activates the
Construction stage > Auto set on the ribbon menu that allows for the specification of construction stages on the selected construction stage
set.

3. Click the [Auto Set] icon to automatically register the displayed meshes, boundary conditions, load conditions on the activated data column
and the un-displayed (not checked) meshes, boundary conditions, load conditions on the deactivated data column. In other words, set the
show/hide model information for each composing stage and select [Auto Set] to automatically set the construction stage with reference to the
currently shown information. The created stages can be checked on the worktree.

Because the concept of construction stages is cumulative, the program compares the activated/deactivated model information in the previous
stage and only adds/deletes the changed information. Hence, it is recommended that the creation be done in stages, after the displayed
model information is returned to its initial in-situ state.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 539 of 1024

The auto set function generates construction stages using the work environment displayed on the screen. Hence, to specify the individual
options (LDF setting, clear displacement etc.) for each stage, use the Construction stage set specification menu to check the options for each
stage.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Construction Stage > Volume Data Export

Volume Data Export

▒ Overview

The volume data of 1D/2D/3D elements defined to the construction stage is exported to excel file. This shows the length/area/volume of activated/deactivated set for stages. This doesn’t
apply for the other element types (point spring, matrix spring, free field, interface, shell interface, pile tip, elastic link, rigid link, user supplied behavior for shell interface, mass).

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 540 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Construction Stage > Partial Factor

Partial Factor

▒ Overview

Partial factor which is derived from Euro Code (EN1997-1 Annex A) can be applied on the 2D model.

(Partial factor will be considered to materials which is containing the cohesion and friction angle and construction stage analysis with stress type.)

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 541 of 1024

Partial Factor

Import database: Values of partial factor for permanent load / variable load / soil materials can be defined from database or those values can be defined as user define. it will be indicated on
the partial factor window whether apply the factors for load and soil materials.

Permanent Variable Soil

Undrained
Values of Effective
Cohesion
Fav. Unfav. Fav. Unfav. tan Φ’ Strength
Partial Factor
(c)
(su)
Eurocode 7 - DA1,
1.000 1.350 1.000 1.500 1.000 1.000 1.000
C1
Eurocode 7 - DA1,
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.300 1.250 1.250 1.400
C2
Eurocode 7 - DA2 1.000 1.350 1.000 1.500 1.000 1.000 1.000
Eurocode 7 - DA3 1.000 1.350 1.000 1.500 1.250 1.250 1.400

DA1, C1: Partial factor will apply to load only.

DA1, C2: Partial factor will apply to load and soil material.

DA2: DA2 is similar with DA1, C1. But, the factors for pile and footing are different.

DA3: DA3 is similar with DA1, C2. But, the factor for load (Unfavorable under Variable) is different.

[ADD]: Add the defined partial factor

[Modify]: Modify the defined partial factor

[Delete]: Delete defined partial factor

Material

Material needs to be selected under this tab. It can be compared between original and factored properties from partial factor window.

Loads

Factor will apply to selected load set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 542 of 1024

Partial factor will be defined with construction stage analysis which is containing the stress analysis and this construction stage can make sub-stage.

Sub-stage will be defined with stage name and partial factor which is created in partial factor function. The name of sub-stage will be specified with “name of construction stage_name of
sub-stage”.

Partial factor can be defined under analysis control and it will be applied to every construction stage. But, User needs to define partial factor for sub-stage manually.

PF1 (Partial Factor 1) is applied from analysis control, PF2 (Partial Factor 2) is applied from sub-stage.

Stage 1(PF1)

↓→ Stage1_1(PF2)

Ex) Stage 2(PF1)

- Properties under PF1: Original Properties x PF1

- Properties under PF2: Original Properties x PF2

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 543 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > Define Set

Define Set

▒ Overview

Define the boundary condition set.

▒ Methodology

Input the name and specification and click [Add] to define the boundary condition set. The boundary
condition set can be input beforehand, and the name of each boundary condition can be entered when it is
generated.

The registered boundary condition set is automatically registered under Worktree > Analysis > Boundary
Condition and the checkbox is used to show or hide the set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 544 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > Constraint

Constraint

▒ Overview

Set the constraint conditions of a model.

▒ Methodology

Auto generation of self weight and boundary condition

The methods for setting a constraint condition of a model are Basic, Advanced and Auto.

Basic

Select the target and assign a [Fixed], [Pinned] or [No Rotation] that fits the behavior of the analysis model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 545 of 1024

Advanced

The 6 degrees of freedom of a node can be fully or partially constrained.

Tx, Ty, Tz are the displacement constraints in the x, y, z direction and Rx, Ry, Rz are the rotational constraints in the x, y, z direction.

The constraint conditions can be input for a desired boundary condition (Point, Edge, Face, Node, Free face node).

The constraint conditions are assigned to the element node and reflected in the analysis. Setting the constraint conditions on a point, edge,
face etc. is a convenient method of selecting element nodes included in the selected geometry shape

Auto

Select the target mesh set to automatically create constraint conditions. The ground conditions for general stress analysis are set
automatically. The x direction displacement is constrained for the left/right side, the y direction displacement is constrained for the front/back
side and the x,y direction displacement is constrained for the bottom of a model.

Boundary set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

Symmetric and inverse symmetric constraints

Boundary conditions can be largely divided into two conditions;

1. Constraint conditions of the analysis target are specified.

2. Symmetry of the structure is used to analyze the symmetric area only, not the entire model.

Applying symmetry is a very effective way to increase the convenience of modeling and decrease the analysis time. If the geometry of the
structure and loading is symmetrical, a 1/2 model or 1/4 model can be used to decrease the number of elements and create an economic
model that reduces analysis time. However, constraints exist when checking the deformed shape or stress distribution for the entire model
because the analysis results from the symmetric model cannot be shown on the entire model. Here, use the View symmetric model function
on the Additional view control toolset to expand the analysis results of the 1/2 or 1/4 model onto the entire model.

l How to apply symmetric boundary conditions

If one or more of the geometry shapes, materials, loads or boundary conditions is symmetrical about a plane or axis, the symmetric boundary
condition can be used. The View symmetric model function can output, expand a 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 symmetric model onto the entire model. To
assign a symmetric boundary condition, a boundary condition needs to be set such that the structure does not invade the symmetry plane.

The figure below is an example of symmetric constraint conditions applied to a solid model. To apply the symmetric constraint conditions in
the YZ plane, the Translation degree of freedom Tx is constrained. For the XY plane, the Tz needs to be constrained and for the ZX plane, the
Ty needs to be constrained.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 546 of 1024

Because Solid elements do not have a rotational degree of freedom, only the displacement boundary condition of the symmetric model is
constrained. However, the rotational degree of freedom needs to be constrained for a Shell model such that the symmetry plane is not
invaded. In other words, Tx,Ry,Rz need to be constrained for the XY plane, Tz,Rx,Ry for the XY plane and Ty,Rx,Rz for the ZX plane.

When applying a symmetric boundary condition, the loading size needs to be converted to fit the symmetric condition. Also, the symmetric
condition cannot be applied to the model shape and buckling shape because of the asymmetric vibration mode or the possibility of
asymmetric buckling.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > Constraint Equation

Constraint Equation

▒ Overview

Constrain the degree of freedom such that a particular node is dependent on the behavior of another node.

▒ Methodology

Constrain the behavior of one node to the behavior of another node. Define the main node that
affects the deformation of another node and degree of freedom [Constrained Node/DOF]. TX, TY,
TZ are the degrees of freedom for displacement and RX, RY, RZ are the degrees of freedom for
rotation. [Independent Node/DOF] inputs the coefficient applied on the displacement of the
independent node, to define the degree of freedom and interrelationship between the dependent
node.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of
the boundary set.

The behavioral characteristics are similar to Mesh > Element > Create > Other > Rigid link. For

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 547 of 1024

example, when the main node moves by a certain distance, the dependent node can be constrained
such that it moves by twice that length. When creating a complex interrelationship between two or
more nodes, the constraint equation can be used.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > Change Property

Change Property

▒ Overview

Apply a new attribute data or substitute an existing attribute data for an element that changes with the construction stage. It can be used
only in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis), it will not be activated for any other analysis
type (Linear Static/Non Linear Static/ Seepage/Slope Stability etc), hence the user needs to define a construction stage to implement change
property attribute.

▒ Methodology

General

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 548 of 1024

Select the target element and specify the element property subject to change.

Construction Stage

If the construction stage is specified, change the element property collectively.

For example, apply a stage by stage change in the material property of shotcrete, from ductile to
hardening, of a 3D model. If the mesh set is already specified by shotcrete 001 ~ shotcrete 010, the
boundary conditions for element property change need to be specified separately for each element
when using Change property > General. However, for Change property > Construction stage,
selecting shotcrete 001 ~ shotcrete 010 can create 10 boundary condition sets with just one click.

The name of the boundary condition set can be specified by [Replace substring of selected Mesh],
[Fixed Prefix] and [Add Prefix] to collectively change the name of the created mesh sets. If nothing is
input, the boundary condition set is created with the same name as the mesh set.

[Replace substring of selected Mesh] : Create a boundary condition set by using a different postfix
on the selected mesh set name.

[Fixed Prefix] : Create a boundary condition set by adding a different prefix, instead of using the
selected mesh set name.

[Add Prefix] : Create a boundary condition set by adding a prefix to the selected mesh set name.

Boundary set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

[Change Property] can be used when the element properties change with the construction stage. If the ground has a property A in Stage 1
and that property changes to B in Stage 2, which then changes to property C in Stage 3, the following two boundary conditions are created.

Boundary condition 1 : A -> B

Boundary condition 2 : A -> C

Using Define construction stage, activate Boundary condition 1 in Stage 2 and for Stage 3, activate Boundary condition 2 and deactivate
Boundary condition 1.

As a result, an element property that changes by A->B->C can be defined.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > Slip Circular Surface

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 549 of 1024

Slip Circular Surface

▒ Overview

Define an circular virtual slip surface. The virtual slip surface is a boundary condition used in slope stability analysis. The virtual slip surface
can only be set when the analysis setting is for 2D models.

▒ Methodology

Define the slip surface of the virtual fracture arc using the grid point of the arc
center and radius where the tangent line to the arc is located.

Specify the rectangular grid area where the arc center can be located using 3 points
(reference point x,y).

The center count x, y is the number of divisions in the grid area.

For example, entering a center count of 5,4 creates 5 x 4 = 20 arc center points.

The radius where the tangent line of the arc is located can be set using [Method
using Tangent Line of Circle] or [Method using Length and Range of Radius].

Method using Tangent Line of Circle

Directly specify the rectangular area where the tangent line is located on the work
screen using [Draw Range]. The number of radius divisions divides the rectangular
area by that number and the tangent direction of the arc radius domain can be
changed using [Change Tangent Direction].

Method using Length and Range of Radius

Directly input the length of initial circular radius, increment for circle radius and
number of increments for circle radius.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions of the desired boundary set. The user can
specify the name of the boundary set.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > Slip Polygonal Surface

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 550 of 1024

Slip Polygonal Surface

▒ Overview

Define a non circular virtual slip surface. The virtual slip surface is a boundary condition used in slope stability analysis. The virtual slip surface
can only be set when the analysis setting is for 2D models.

▒ Methodology

The non circular virtual slip surface can be defined by:

l Directly input the coordinate values of the non-circular slip surface onto a
table

l Mouse click the non circular slip surface domain on the workplane

When defining the virtual slip surface on the workplane, use the right mouse click to
stop the input.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can
specify the name of the boundary set.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > Sloshing Constraint

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 551 of 1024

Sloshing Constraint

▒ Overview

: Due the seismic event and the corresponding excitation, the Fluid (Reservoir) would generate waves which would go back and forth and hit the dam resulting in Sloshing Load. These
waves would come back from dam to the end of the reservoir and its energy dissipated (lost). To nullify the vibrations at the end of the reservoir Sloshing Constraint is provided.

▒ Methodology

An example of the methodology is shown below:

Sloshing Constraint (Applied at end of reservoir)

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > Water Level

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 552 of 1024

Sloshing Constraint

▒ Overview

: Due the seismic event and the corresponding excitation, the Fluid (Reservoir) would generate waves which would go back and forth and hit the dam resulting in Sloshing Load. These
waves would come back from dam to the end of the reservoir and its energy dissipated (lost). To nullify the vibrations at the end of the reservoir Sloshing Constraint is provided.

▒ Methodology

An example of the methodology is shown below:

Sloshing Constraint (Applied at end of reservoir)

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > SRM Inclusion

SRM Inclusion

▒ Overview

This boundary condition lets the user select or deselect elements or mesh sets to participate in a Strength Reduction Method (SRM) analysis.
This tool is applicable only in construction stage analysis, application of this tool in standalone SRM and SAM Analysis cases will not activate
the inclusion zones.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 553 of 1024

SRM Analysis can only be conducted on Mohr-Coulomb, Modified Mohr-Coulomb, Hardening Soil, Generalized Hoek-Brown &
Drucker-Prager.

▒ Methodology

General

Select the target elements or mesh sets to be involved in the SRM analysis.

Construction Stage

This options works only in construction stage analysis cases just like the change property boundary
set. Once the selected objects are selected, the user can run the analysis case and the see the
necessary changes in slip surface.

[Boundary Set] : Create a boundary condition set by using a different postfix on the selected mesh
set name.

Example:

For an open pit mine, the local slip surfaces for different zones are located based on SRM Inclusion
as shown below:

ZONE 1:

ZONE 2:

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 554 of 1024

ZONE 3:

ZONE 4:

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Boundary > Boundary Table Import Export

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 555 of 1024

Boundary Table Import / Export

▒ Overview

Import the information of boundary conditions from excel file or export them to excel. The sample of table for boundary conditions
(BoundaryTable Sample.xlsx) can be found in the installation folder. (ex. C:\Program Files\MIDAS\GTS NX\Sample)

▒ Methodology

There are limitations in this function as follows.

- Constraint : The 'Advanced' type is only supported. The DOFs of 'Tx-Rz' are displayed ‘1’ (check on) or ‘0’ (check off).

- Nodal Head : The 'Total' and 'Pressure' type are separated.

- Nodal Flux : This is exported the same way as the ‘Nodal Head‘ type.

- Review : This is exported only the node information.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Body Force

Body Force

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 556 of 1024

This option lets the user assign accelerations for pseudo static loads for elements or mesh sets.

▒ Methodology

In the case of Pseudo Static Loads, user needs to input the Accelerations directly (seismic coefficients * acceleration due to gravity) in the body
force definition.

[Element]

Select the edges/faces/elements where the force needs to be applied.

[Reference Object]

Select the coordinate/edge/face where the force needs to be applied along any custom
direction.

[Components]

2
Here the user can enter the acceleration components. seismic coefficients*9.81 m/s

[Base Function]

The user can also input a function for the ground acceleration values.

[Load Set]

Enter the name of the new load set.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Self Weight

Self Weight

▒ Overview

Enter the self-weight of elements included in the model as applied loads, or modify or delete previously entered self-weight. The computed
self-weight can be applied in each GCS X, Y and Z direction as a body force for static analysis. When considering the effects of self-weight in
dynamic analysis computations, the option can be considered through the Project Setting function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 557 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Input the factor for the self-weight application direction in Project settings depending on the work
environment (2D/3D). The volume, density and gravitational acceleration of the input element is
used to automatically compute the self-weight included in the analysis model. The self-weight
direction is defined by a unit vector. The default value for the gravitational direction is set as -1.

[Spatial Distribution]

The ‘Generalized Space Function’ can be applied in the ‘Self Weight’. The input of ‘Generalized Space
Function’ is applied by scaling according to the location.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Force Moment

Force/Moment

▒ Overview

Apply the Force or Moment load on an element node. Force is one of the most fundamental loads and it can be specified by 3 force
components and a moment for each node. The direction can be defined with reference to an arbitrary coordinate system.

▒ Methodology

Select the node where the load will be applied and set the size and direction. The load direction can
be set using Default Load or Reference Object Load methods. For Default Load, the x, y, z,
components are input with reference to the coordinate system in the bottom right corner. For
Reference Object Load, select the target and reference shape to set the load direction. If the
reference shape is a line, the component direction is set in the line creation direction. If the
reference shape is a surface, the normal direction to the surface becomes the z component direction
and the left, right directions become the x, y component directions.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 558 of 1024

If the selected target shape is geometric, the Force can be selected as either a total force or
individual loads in Load Type as shown below. For total force, the input load size is considered as
the total force acting on the selected line/surface and is distributed evenly to all nodes. For
individual loads, the input load size is applied to all nodes of the selected line/surface.

<Total force / Individual load processing>

The total force is distributed according to the length or area ratio when two or more targets are
selected and the individual load is applied to each selected target.

[Object]

The applied load is defined on the node, but the selection target can also be set as a geometry
shape (edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes. For an edge or surface, the selected
shape must have been used for element creation and the force is applied to all nodes in the
specified direction/size. For free face nodes, select a free face node and all points that make contact
with the node-containing element at an angle smaller than the specified angle (feature angle) will
automatically be selected.

[Reference Object]

The load direction can be set using different methods. The reference coordinate system is the global
rectangular(cylindrical) coordinate axis. Geometry shapes (edge and surface) can be selected as a
reference direction. Selecting edge or surface displays the coordinate system of the selected shape
and the load is set with reference to that system. The vector is used to specify the load direction
using X,Y,Z vector components. The tangent direction can only be selected for surface objects and
automatically sets the direction in the tangent direction of the selected surface.

[Components]

Input the load size according to the set direction. A positive (+) value applies the load in the set
direction and a negative (-) value applies the load in the direction opposite of the set. The load size
changes with respect to the coordinate value increase in the GCS can be defined using a reference
function. Here, the input value is multiplied by the function value for application. The [Base

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 559 of 1024

Function] for any force can be set by the user by creating an user -defined function, however once it
is created and inputted, a scale value has to be entered in the components according to the user in
either X,Y,Z direction otherwise, an error message will pop out on the output section of the screen.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Displacement

Displacement

▒ Overview

Input the displacement at an element node. The displacement is used to assign a displacement to a particular node. It is classified as a load
because it causes structural deformation, but it has similar characteristics as the boundary condition. For example, constraint forces occur on
the node where the displacement is input. The input displacement acts in the node coordinate system direction, which is defined by the GCS
by default. The displacement is useful when applying the measured displacement in analysis or when understanding the plastic (limit) state of
the element.

▒ Methodology

Select the node where the displacement will be applied and set the size and direction. The target
selection method and size/direction settings are as follows:

[Object]

The applied displacement is defined on the node, but the selection target can also be set as a
geometry shape (edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes. For an edge or surface, the
selected shape must have been used for element creation and the displacement is applied to all
nodes in the specified direction/size. For free face nodes, select a free face node and all points that
make contact with the node-containing element at an angle smaller than the specified angle
(feature angle) are automatically selected.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 560 of 1024

[Components]

Input the displacement size according to the set direction. A positive (+) value applies the
displacement in the set direction and a negative (-) value applies the displacement in the opposite
direction to the set direction. The size change with respect to the coordinate value increase in the
GCS can be defined using a reference function. Here, the input value is multiplied by the function
value for application.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Pressure

Pressure

▒ Overview

Input the pressure loads on the face or edge of a plate element, plane stress element or solid element. Uniform load and linearly/non-
linearly distributed loads can all be defined. The pressure load acts on the target geometric surface in a linearly/non-linearly distributed form
per unit area and hence, the units are [Force/Area]. Because it is the force per unit area, it is applied to all selected target surfaces equally. The
pressure is differ with the Force because the Force is using unit [N] and the force is loaded as nodal loads at sub-nodes generated at the
selected geometric surface.

Because the Pressure load considers the area of the target surface (element surface) and is automatically converted as a nodal load for
analysis, the two load conditions do not have a difference in analysis results. The more convenient load, depending on the applied direction,
can be selected and used from the concentrated/distributed load option given in Analysis Condition.

▒ Methodology

The pressure is input in distributed force form for an element face or edge. It can be used on 2D or
3D elements and the input direction can be specified as an arbitrary coordinate axis direction,
arbitrary vector direction or normal direction. The direction setting is the same as for [Force].
Uniform load size or linearly/non-linearly distributed load size can all be specified as shown below,
and the load change can be defined using a function of coordinate direction/distance. When

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 561 of 1024

applying a function, the input value is multiplied by the function value for application as a total load.

<Pressure acting on each element (target)>

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Water Pressure

Water Pressure

▒ Overview

A function that automatically calculates and applies the water pressure on an element boundary line or surface. It application extend to 2D &
3D elements, Axisymmetric elements and Free Field Elements.

▒ Methodology

Select the element boundary edge or surface where the water pressure will be applied.

Auto ( by Water Level Boundary) – This option is to be applied only if the water level has been
pre defined. GTS NX automatically calculates the water pressure on each node based on the
difference between total heads of existing water level and the node location.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 562 of 1024

Manual – This option lets the user set the water level and accordingly the water pressure will be
calculated by the software based on the head difference between the Water Level and node
location.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Beam Load

Beam load

▒ Overview

Concentrated and distributed force(moment) can be applied with reference to the GCS or the beam element coordinate system. Linear beam
load can be used when multiple beam elements are connected continuously. Both ends of the beam element can be specified and a
continuous beam load can be applied as either a distributed load or force load. The load can also be applied to a continuous beam placed in a
curve on the same plane as the loading direction. For a beam element load, the beam load is applied as a distributed or force on the singular
beam element.

▒ Methodology

[Object]

For beam elements, select the beam element directly or select the line used to create the element to
apply a load. For continuous beam loads, the On Load Application Line Method or Select Element
Method can be used.

The [On the Loading Line] command applies the load to elements placed on the line between the
two points used to specify the continuous beam load. In this case, selecting two nodes sequentially
inputs the load for elements existing on the line between the two points. For the [Selected Element]
command, the load is applied to the selected element. It can be used to apply the continuous beam
load on elements that are not placed on the line. Select the start and end points of the beam
element on which the load will be applied.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 563 of 1024

[Direction]

The direction can be set with reference to the global coordinate system (X,Y,Z) or element
coordinate system (x,y,z). The projected area can be additionally set, which specifies whether to
apply the load on the total beam element within the load application section, or to apply the load
by the projected length, perpendicular to the load application direction. This option is only valid for
[Distributed] loads in directions with respect to the global coordinate system (GCS).

[Value (Fraction/Length)]

l Fraction: Input the continuous beam load position using a relative length ratio of the load
application section.

l Length: Input the actual length as the reference for the continuous beam load position.

x1 and x2 are the start and end points of the beam load respectively and w1,w2 are the load size at
points x1,x2. Entering a negative load size applies the load in the opposite direction to the set
direction, and a linearly distributed (increment, decrement) load can be set using the size difference.

<Apply linear beam load >

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Temperature load(Nodal Element Temperature)

Temperature load : Nodal,Element Temperature

▒ Overview

Input the final temperature on a node or element for thermal stress analysis. The temperature load induces deformation by temperature
difference and all nodes are assigned an initial temperature in Analysis Setting. Entering a node temperature calculates the load caused by the
temperature difference with the initial element temperature, and thermal stress does not occur if there is no displacement constraint. The
element temperature load is similar to the nodal temperature load. However, specifying an element sets a uniform temperature for that
selected element so that it has the same effect as entering the nodal temperature load for all nodes connected to that element.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 564 of 1024

Select a node or element to input the temperature. If the target shape is a geometry shape, the
shape must have been used to create the element. All nodes in the selected shape are defined by
the input initial temperature. The load is calculated by the temperature difference with that initial
temperature. The temperature difference can be simulated by directly entering the temperature or
applying a function with reference to the global coordinate system (GCS). When applying a function,
the input value is multiplied to the function value for application.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Temperature load(Temperature Gradient)

Temperature load : Temperature Gradient

▒ Overview

The temperature difference between the top and bottom of a beam element or plate element can be defined. Temperature gradient analysis
can only be conducted for beam or plate elements, which can consider flexural rigidity. For beam elements, the temperature difference and
distance of the outermost portion is input with reference to the y axis and z axis of the element coordinate system to consider temperature
gradient loading. For plate elements, the temperature difference between the top and bottom faces and the plate thickness is input to
consider temperature gradient loading.

▒ Methodology

Select the beam (plate) element. The element can be selected directly, or the Beam/Shell that was
used to create that element can be selected. Selecting a shape inputs the load for all element
nodes in the shape. For a beam element, the temperature difference and distance in the z,y
direction of the element coordinate system can be input. Checking the [Used Section] option uses
the structural section information assigned to the element. For a plate element, the temperature
difference in the thickness direction is input, and the plate element thickness is used. The distance

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 565 of 1024

can also be input directly.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Prestress

Prestress

▒ Overview

Used to input the prestress load. For truss/beam elements, the initial load for axial direction force and moment can be applied. For plane
strain elements, axis symmetric elements and solid elements, the initial stress can be defined.

For truss/beam elements, the [Pretension Type] option can be applied. Checking this option maintains the input pretension regardless of the
stress state changes that occur in the construction stage. If this option is unchecked, the prestress changes with the input stress state. If a
prestress of 50 is input as shown in the figure below, checking [Pretension Type] retains the prestress as the axial force, regardless of the stress
change due to excavation. If the pretension is not checked, the axial force is affected by the stress change of 10 due excavation and so, the
output axial force is 40. Pretension can only be applied if the prestress is input for a truss element type.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 566 of 1024

[Element Type]

The applicable element types are as follows and the input load component is different for each type.
The target shape can be selected by directly selecting the element or geometry shape (edge, face,
solid). For shapes, the selected shape must have been used for element creation and the input load is
applied to all element nodes within the shape.

[Components]

Define the load or stress for each axial direction and use a function to simulate the linear
increment/decrement of the load size with reference to the global coordinate system(GCS). The load
components for different element types are as follows:

l Nxx : Initial axial force acting on 1D element

l Mx, My, Mz : Bending force (moment load) with reference to each element coordinate system

l Sxx, Syy, Szz : Axial stress in each axial direction

l Sxy, Syz, Szx : Shear stress in each plane direction

The load application direction for the initial stress of Plane/Axis Symmetric/Solid elements can be set
with reference to the GCS or element coordinate system.

In case of pretension will analysis with external force. Previously, It is working with only add fucntion under the activation step. But,
User can add or replace the pretension from this newer version.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Initial Equilibrium Force

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 567 of 1024

Initial Equilibrium Force

▒ Overview

Use the prestress function to apply the resultant force or stress as initial conditions, depending on the element type. If the initial stress state
is given as such, a force corresponding to the initial stress occurs. This initial equilibrium force uses the force created by the initial stress from
the prestress function as an external force. If additional external forces do not exist, the initial equilibrium force is in equilibrium with the initial
stress, hence the initial state is maintained. Also, use the [Self-Weight Consideration] option to assume the initial stress to be caused by
gravity. If this assumption is applied, the load distribution factor considering the self weight of the element is applied when the element is
removed from the construction stage.

▒ Methodology

[Element Type]

The applicable element types are as follows and the input load component is different for
each type. The target shape can be selected by directly selecting the element or geometry
shape (edge, face, solid), depending on the selected element type. For shapes, the selected
shape must have been used for element creation and the input load is applied to all
element nodes within the shape.

[Components]

Define the load or stress for each axial direction and use a function to simulate the linear
increment/decrement of the load size with reference to the global coordinate system
(GCS). The load components for different element types are as follows:

l Fx, Fy, Fz : Initial axial force acting on 1D element along i & j.

l Mx, My, Mz : Bending force (moment load) with reference to each element coordinate
system

l Sxx, Syy, Szz : Axial stress in each axial direction

l Sxy, Syz, Szx : Shear stress in each plane direction

The load application direction for the initial stress of Plane/Axis symmetric/Solid elements
can be set with reference to the GCS or element coordinate system.

From Result

This option allows the user to input the initial equilibrium forces from an existing analysis
case. Additionally,, the user can also set results of analysis cases (stress or internal forces)
as the initial conditions for dynamic analysis and execute the analysis.

[Element Type]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 568 of 1024

[Ref. CSys]

The user can select the CSys according to the analysis case, it can either be
Global/Element/User-Defined.

[Self-Weight Consideration]

Activate or deactivate the option of Self-Weight.

[Analysis Set]

Select the completed analysis set whose result need to be implemented.

[Step]

The user can select the particular step (in case of Load Increments).

[Load Set]

The user needs to enter the name of the New Load Set created here.

Initial Equilibrium Force Table

The user can import the forces and moments in a tabular format.

Initial Equilibrium Force Table (Plane Strain/Plane Stress Element)

Initial Equilibrium Force Table (Beam/Embedded Beam Element)

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Load Set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 569 of 1024

Load Set

▒ Overview

The load conditions can be classified as sets. It is useful to create the load set in advance for easy classification of data such as mesh sets,
boundary sets, etc, during analysis. When entering the actual loads, the loads can be inputted individually by entering their names. If the load
set is already classified, a particular factor can be assigned to each load set to create a combined load.

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Combined Load Set

Combined Load Set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 570 of 1024

▒ Overview

Create a combined load set by combining existing load sets. A factor can be assigned to each load set and the combined load is created
with respect to these load factors. It is generally used when creating a load combination according to the design code.

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Create Load from Results

Create Load from Results

▒ Overview

The 'Nodal Force', 'Nodal Moment', 'Nodal Translational Displacement' and 'Nodal Rotational Displacement' are created to the loads from
the results which analysis has been completed, and these are available in another analysis case as the load type.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 571 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Contraction

Contraction

▒ Overview

Consider shrinkage or simulate a volume loss around a lining of TBM tunnel. It can be applied by selecting beam/shell elements in 2D/3D
model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 572 of 1024

▒ Methodology

The ‘Contraction’ is for the shrinkage in the circumferential direction of tunnel and the
‘Contraction Inc.’ is for the shrinkage in the excavation direction of 3D tunnel. The ‘Rep. Depth’
is for the reference depth to calculate the shrinkage in the excavation direction of 3D tunnel. To
specify this contraction, a contraction value is defined as a strain value in percentage.

Modeling Precautions

1. Contraction can only be applied to circular tunnels (bores tunnels) with an active continuous
homogeneous lining. (If the selected elements are closure, contraction can be applied even
though non-circular tunnels, but it is unable to get the correct results.)

2. In case of shell elements in 3D model, the coordinate system needs to be aligned that the
excavation direction is the Element CSys-X to calculate the excavation length automatically. It is
recommended not to apply to contraction before application of the corrected C-Sys, otherwise
the results will be incorrect.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Load Table Import / Export

Load Table Import / Export

▒ Overview

Define or modify load sets through excel file like the usage of Load Table.

Users can import the amounts of load sets from excel file and export defined load sets (node/element number, magnitude, and direction) to
excel. The sample of table for load sets (LoadTable Sample.xlsx) can be found in the installation folder. (ex. C:\Program Files\MIDAS\GTS
NX\Sample)

Force, Moment, Pressure, Prescribed Displacement and Element Beam Load are available to use this function.

Can be useful when users have to manage (input and modify) large numbers of load sets at once.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 573 of 1024

In case that users select Geometries (Edge, Face) to define load sets, these load sets cannot be detected when exporting load sets to excel,
meaning that users must select element nodes or faces to define pressure load.

▒ Methodology

There are limitations in this function as follows.

- Force / Moment : GCS (Global Coordinate System) is only applicable to import and export.

- Pressure : Axisymmetric type is not available. In terms of direction, "Normal" and "Direction" are available.

- Only one excel file can communicate with GTSNX at the same time.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Prescribed Strain

Prescribed Strain

▒ Overview

The prescribed strain is served as the boundary condition for the volume loss from Jet-grouting, compensation grouting and strain of rock.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 574 of 1024

Element Type;

Truss/Embedded Truss

Beam/Embedded Beam

Shell

Plane Strain/Plane Stress

Axisymmetric

Solid

Strain Component;

To apply volumetric strain to 3 directions (xx, yy, zz)

Applying to Solid Model for Example;

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 575 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Load > Arbitrary Load

Arbitrary Load

▒ Overview

It can be applied to arbitrary locations/areas regardless of node and/or element connection.

▒ Methodology

[Type]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 576 of 1024

Select Object(s) : Select the object where arbitrary load is assigned.

- Elements : Select the elements automatically or manually.

- Ref. CSys : Select the reference coordinate system when load is being applied.

- Base Function : Select the function for applying load.

- X : Input X direction value.(when the user selects the global cylindrical coordinate system, R direction)

- Y : Input Y direction value.(when the user selects the global cylindrical coordinate system, Θ direction)

- Z : Input Z direction value.

- P1 / P2 : Input the value for the start point/end point.

-Uniformly Distributed Load : When the user wants to assign unit value.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Wizard > Tunnel Modeling

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 577 of 1024

Tunnel Modeling

▒ Overview

The Wizard creates a simple 3D tunnel model easily. It can be used to model a 3D tunnel model that considers the undisturbed stratum and
ground surface.

The Wizard is made up of 4 tabs: 1)General, 2)Shotcrete & Rock Bolts, 3)Excavation and 4)Mesh. The data in all 4 tabs need to be properly
input to create the tunnel model. Because everything up to the material selection can be conducted at once, the Tunnel Wizard menu can be
used immediately without any separate processes after running GTS NX. The data can be set as the default wizard data, or a separate Tunnel
Wizard save file can be created. This allows for fast modeling when analyzing similar tunnels; only certain variables need to be modified for the
existing tunnel model.

The Tunnel Model Wizard cannot be used if the modeling is not done. If a model exists, the Tunnel Model Wizard cannot be executed.

▒ Methodology

Tunnel modeling wizard

General

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 578 of 1024

Input the number of tunnels and tunnel shapes, and set the excavation method.

First, decide whether to model the full tunnel face or the half(right) of the full tunnel face. Be aware that the specified construction stages and
result data etc. cannot be used if the model, created using the Tunnel Modeling Wizard, is modified later.

[Shape]

Determine the tunnel shape. Circular, 3 Center circle, 5 Center circle shapes are supported. The dimensions specify the tunnel changes,
depending on the specified tunnel shape. Set the input guide to display the relationship between the tunnel shape and input values on the
Tunnel Wizard dialog box. The guide can be used as a reference when entering the variables. The input values for the tunnel shape are the
same as for Geometry > Point&Curve > Tunnel (Wire).

<Circular> <3 Center circle> <5 Center circle>

[Property]

Input the ground material around the tunnel. If the tunnel model is created using the Tunnel Wizard, a basic rectangular ground shape can be
created around the tunnel and the upper stratum and index shape can be added to the model optionally. A basic model is the rectangular
ground shape on the periphery of the tunnel. The basic shape can be composed of a homogeneous material. The material and properties are
the same as the specified Material property in Property/Coordinate and System/Function.

[Excavation Method]

Determine the excavation method for the tunnel section. GTS NX supports the section shapes for [Full Face Cut], [Bench cut 1], [Bench cut 2],
[Ring cut 1], [Ring cut 2] and [3D cut]

<Full face cut> <Bench cut 1> <Bench cut 2>

<Ring cut 1> <Ring cut 2> <CD cut>

Shotcrete & Rock Bolts

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 579 of 1024

The Shotcrete & Rock Bolts tab determines the generation of shotcrete and rock bolts, type and material, arrangement, shape, etc.

The generation of shotcrete, soft shotcrete and rock bolts can be set using the checkbox. Shotcrete and soft shotcrete are specified as plate
elements and rock bolts are specified as embedded truss elements.

The material and properties are the same as the specified Material Property in Property/Coordinate System/Function. The properties of
shotcrete & rock bolts must be specified as a structural property.

[Add Shotcrete to the Intermediate Wall]

If the 3D cut tunnel excavation method is activated, the installation of shotcrete on the intermediate wall can be decided.

[Rock Bolts]

Input the number, division length and spacing between rock bolts (Tangential pitch).

l Staggered Disposition

This option determines whether to place the rock bolts in an intersecting array for each construction stage. Setting +1 creates the set
number of rock bolts in the first construction stage, an extra rock bolt is added in the second stage, and the number returns back to the
set number in the third stage. Setting -1 creates the set number of rock bolts in the first construction stage, a rock bolt is removed in
the second stage, and the number returns back to the set number in the third stage.

The [Add Rock Bolt to the Intermediate Wall] option is activated when the tunnel excavation method is set as 3D cut, and determines whether
to install a rock bolt on the center wall.

<Rock bolt> <Add rock bolt to center wall>

[Input Guide] or [Drawing] can be used to check the drawn section shape in real time.

Excavation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 580 of 1024

Determine the tunnel excavation for each construction stage.

Select the excavation type, whether to excavate in one direction or in both directions. For both directions, the program creates the
construction stages until the tunnel is perforated. After this point, the user needs to create the construction stages directly.

When modeling 2 tunnels, specify the tunnel to be excavated first.

[1st Excavation Tunnel]

Input the stage spacing for shotcrete and rock bolts after excavation. For example, if 1 is inputted, the shotcrete or rock bolts are created in
the subsequent stage after excavation. When creating soft shotcrete, the soft shotcrete is created in the specified stage and then stiffens in the
next stage.

[2nd Excavation Tunnel]

Input the excavation stage for the second tunnel in the case of two tunnel construction. For example, if 2 is inputted, one tunnel is excavated
and the next tunnel is excavated 2 stages later. The shotcrete and rock bolt creation point is determined by the specified value in Define
Stages after the 1st Excavation.

[Advancing Length]

Specify the excavation length for each construction stage. Entering advancing length automatically calculates and displays the total tunnel
length. The excavation length for each construction stage is input using commas or spaces. Repeating lengths can be input using
number@length. For example, if the excavation is done for lengths of 2,2,2,2,3,4, input ‘2,2,2,2,3,4’ or 4@2,3,4.

Divisions are the number of created elements in the excavation direction for each excavation stage. If loading is needed, click the button
to input the load distribution factor for each stage.

[Rock Bolt Location]

Input the rock bolt creation location for each construction stage. Rock bolts can be automatically created at the center of the excavation
length of each stage and the user can directly input the pitch and angle to adjust the creation location.

[Pitches] expresses the rock bolt creation location using the start portion of the tunnel and the rock bolt creation location of the previous
stage.

[Angle] is the angle between the tunnel length direction and the rock bolt.

Mesh

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 581 of 1024

Input the mesh shape, strata and ground surface shape.

For the tunnel location, the model depth, the distance from tunnel floor to the lower boundary of the model, the distance from the tunnel to
the left/right boundaries of the model, and the distance between tunnels for 2 tunnel construction can be input.

Each boundary distance is input as a multiple of the tunnel floor width.

[Ground Modeling]

Model the upper stratum. The upper stratum can be modeled using the [Actual] or [Load] methods.

The [Actual] method creates real meshes to conduct modeling. The [Load] method does not model the ground surface shape directly, but
processes it as a pressure load.

The reference height is the [Base Elevation] on which the input values from the created stratum or terrain will be added.

[Strata]

The stratum exists above the upper part of the tunnel, and multiple strata can be created using the [New] button. The material and properties
are the same as the specified material property in Property/Coordinate System/Function.

l x

Input the stratum shape following the model width direction. Input the width coordinates in the x direction. The origin is located at the
bottom left corner of the tunnel as viewed from the front.

l Value

Input the height value at each x coordinate position. Input the x coordinate and value to draw the input shape on the right.

l z

Input the stratum shape following the tunnel direction. Input the tunnel length direction coordinates in the z direction. The origin is located at
the bottom left corner of the tunnel as viewed from the front.

l Offset

Input the height value at each z coordinate position. The height value is the change in height respective to the previous value.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 582 of 1024

[Terrain]

Model the terrain. The terrain is generated using virtual grids identical to the grid face. The height is input at the grid intersections. The terrain
height on a text file can be imported or the height can be input directly.

The material and properties are the same as the specified material property in Property/Coordinate System/Function.

[Mesh Size]

Input the size of the mesh created in the tunnel. For the tunnel (Interval), the user can input the mesh size directly. The mesh boundary is input
as a multiple of the created mesh size. Using the automatic setting sets the boundary element size automatically.

Open

Open a saved Tunnel Wizard file (*.wzd).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 583 of 1024

Save as

Save the entered values in current Tunnel Wizard as a Tunnel Wizard file (*.wzd).

Save Default Data

Set the current input values as the default values of the Tunnel Wizard.

Open Default Data

Delete all current input values and reset to the default values of the Tunnel Wizard.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Wizard > Anchor Modeling

Anchor Modeling

▒ Overview

The Anchor Modeling Wizard creates a simple anchor model.

▒ Methodology

2D/3D Anchor modeling wizard

Directly input the start position(Anchor head node position) or click from the work screen.

The anchor installation direction can be specified using [Angle,Length], [Relative dx, dy] or
[Absolute x, y].

[Angle,Length] : Input the length and angle from the point entered in the previous stage. The
angle is the rotation angle in the counterclockwise direction relative to the x axis of the
workplane.

[Relative (dx, dy)] : Input the relative distance from the point entered in the previous stage as 2D

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 584 of 1024

coordinates on the workplane.

[Absolute (x,y)] : Input the absolute 2D coordinate value in the workplane.

The anchor length can be classified as an ungrouted length or a grouted length. The ungrouted
length always creates 1 element using the seed method and setting the ‘number of divisions’ as
1. The grouted length creates elements with a unit length using the seed method and setting the
‘length spacing’ as 1.

Prestress is the initial prestressing force of the anchor. A (+) value represents tension and A (-)
value represents compression.

Checking the [Pretension Type] option does not create axial force loss in the a load activated
construction stage. The created prestress can be registered by specifying the load set name.

Mesh set

Register the created anchor on the mesh set. The user can specify the name of the mesh set.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Wizard > Soil Test

Soil Test

▒ Overview

In engineering practice, soil parameters are obtained from one or more laboratory tests. In order to perform the best calculation, these soil
parameters have to be translated into input parameters for the constitutive model used, taking into account the possibilities and limitations of
the constitutive model. Most parameters for the constitutive models can be determined directly from standard laboratory tests such as triaxial
test and oedometer test. However, due to the complexity of the models, it is recommended to not simply accept the parameters determined
from those tests, but to actually model the tests and see if the parameters found actually give a proper representation of the real laboratory
test results within the limits of the constitutive models. For this purpose, the Soil Test wizard is available with which in a simple manner
laboratory tests can be simulated without the need for making a finite element model.

▒ Methodology

[Soil Test Set Name]

Define the set name of soil test to simulate.

[Method]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 585 of 1024

Select the test that will be simulated. The test options available are Tri-axial, Oedometer, CRS, DSS and General.

l Tri-axial Test

In a triaxial test, stress is applied to a sample of the material being tested in a way which results in stresses along one axis being different from
the stresses in perpendicular directions. This is typically achieved by placing the sample between two parallel platens which apply stress in one
direction, and applying fluid pressure to the specimen to apply stress in the perpendicular directions.

With the triaxial test, it is possible to test soil properties while controlling the stresses applied in the vertical and horizontal directions relative
to the specimen.

l Oedometer Test

Oedometer test is designed to simulate the one-dimensional deformation and drainage conditions that soils experience in the field. To
simulate these conditions, rigid confining rings are used to prevent lateral displacement of the soil sample. Porous stones are placed on the
top and bottom of the sample to allow drainage in the vertical direction.

With the oedometer test, it is possible to define a one-dimensional compression test for soil models.

l CRS (Constant Rate of Strain) Test

In a Constant Rate of Strain test (CRS test), it is possible to gradually apply a load to a soil model by increasing the displacement of a pressure
cylinder at a constant rate.

In a CRS test, it is possible to gradually apply a load to a soil model by increasing the displacement of a pressure cylinder at a constant rate.

l DSS (Direct Simple Shear) Test

The DSS test can be used to determine the shear strength of a soil model.

l General Test

The general soil test can be used as a customisable soil test mode. The user can define arbitrary stress and strain conditions.

[Material]

Define the soil material properties.

[Initial Stress]

Define the initial stress. In case of ‘General’ type, it is possible to define the stresses of each direction.

[Boundary Condition]

The boundary condition is decided by the test method. In case of ‘General’ type, it is possible to restrain the stress / strain conditions of each
direction. This is an initial condition which cannot be changed to the construction stages (applies to all stages).

[Stage Name]

Define the different stages of the test.

[Advanced Setting]

Define the details for analysis.

[Analysis]

Start the calculation for the selected soil tests.

[Show Graph]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 586 of 1024

The results of the test are displayed in the predefined diagrams in the graph window.

Stage

Each stage is defined by a number of steps (Inc.), a duration (in units of time) and a applied stress or strain increments. The given stress or
strain increment will be reached at the end of the given duration in the given number of steps. A negative stress or strain increment means
additional compression, whereas a positive stress or strain increment means unloading or tension.

Analysis

Define the convergence criteria of analysis.

Output

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 587 of 1024

Define the graph setting. You can select the configuration of diagrams to display.

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Options > LEM

Overview

This feature takes the user to the Slope LEM Module of SOILWORKS. The license for usage of LEM in GTS NX is included, hence the user can
access this feature anytime they want to conduct LEM Analysis for slope FoS calculations. The analysis performed here are independent of
what the user has done in GTS NX. Hence, the model from GTS NX cannot be directly linked to the model created in this LEM Module.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 588 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Static Slope Analysis > Options > Options

Options

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Set the general environment of the program. The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary
Condition, Analysis/Results.

▒ Methodology

General

[General]

l Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.

l License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web Authorization method are supported.

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

[Graphic]

l Work View : Set the options for the screen.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 589 of 1024

- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.

- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder shaped curved surface. The available levels are
from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and smoother surface as the level gets higher.

- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work window during view rotation.

l Selection : Specify the options for the model part.

l Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.

l Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.

l Element : Specify the color for each element type.

l Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show the shadow and controls its shade. The
available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information shown as the level gets higher.

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]

l Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.

l Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]

l Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.

l Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol 3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z
axis respectively.

[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.

[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.

[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.

[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol.

Analysis/Results

[Analysis]

l Number of processors : Specify the number of CPUs used for analysis. For a dual core CPU, input 2 processors and for a quad core CPU,
input 4 processors to increase the analysis speed.

l Element Formulation : Specify the formula applied to the element.

In terms of speed, a faster solution can be obtained in order of Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability) > Hybrid (Accuracy). In terms
of accuracy, a more accurate solution can be obtained in order of Hybrid (Accuracy) > Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability).

l Equation Solver (Structural) : Specify the method for solving a finite element simultaneous equation. If the setting is automatic, the
program automatically determines one of the following methods: Multifrontal, Dense matrix or AMG(Algebraic Multi-Grid).

l 2D Element Setting (Structure) : The [Unique Shell Normal Generation] function judges two adjacent shell elements to have two different
normal directions when the value between the normal direction vectors are larger than the input value. Because the element size is
relatively larger than the curvature, if this value is increased for a rough curved mesh, a smooth contour that considers the curvature of
the geometry shape can be calculated.
The [Consider Drilling DOF(degree of freedom)] option calculates the stiffness of the in-plane deformation by considering the rotation
about the out-plane axis (drilling degree of freedom).

[Result]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 590 of 1024

l General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default value is set as 1e-12, and results lower
than this value is considered as 0.

l Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.

l Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to represent the vectors.

l Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.

l No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.

l Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.

l Graph : Select whether to show the graph.

l Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.

l Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Section Property

Section Property

▒ Overview

The section material properties need to be defined for a 1 dimensional truss, embedded truss or beam element. Here, the truss and
embedded truss only need the cross-sectional area but the beam needs other material properties such as total cross section, torsional rigidity,
first area moment of inertia and second area moment of inertia to consider torsion, bend and shear.

The thickness of the element needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1 and the user can define the used units according to the thickness.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. Here, the plate element has a
rotor float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

▒ Methodology

1D element

1D element is an element that is made up of 2(primary) or 3(secondary) nodes and has the geometric property of length. Because 3D shapes
are expressed as 1D elements, the section (size, shape) needs to be defined and this is modeled as a 2D element for calculations.

GTS NX provides various shapes, as shown in the figure below. The position can also be set when defining the sectional properties.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 591 of 1024

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

QUAD-4 6400개 QUAD-4 3400개 QUAD-4 1700개

<Solid square> <H section> <Channel>

<Automatic section modeling >

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 592 of 1024

<Solid Rectangle> <Solid Round> <Pipe>

<Box> <T-section> <H-section>

<Channel> <Angle> <Cross>

<I-section> <Channel 1> <Hat>

<Section shape and size specification>

1D element SRC Section

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 593 of 1024

<SRC Section DB>

SRC(Steel Reinforced Concrete) can be defined under 1D element(truss, beam, embedded truss, embedded beam).

It has added SRC-Box, SRC-Pipe, Sect-HBeam, Circle-HBeam in the section of 1D element. User can define the section selecting the database
of steel and concrete, elastic modulus of steel will use for calculation.

Steel Data: Input the parameter of steel section or selecting the section from database.

Concrete Data: Input the outer dimensions of section for steel concrete

Material: Select the material for SRC or input the parameters. The parameters will be inputted automatically selecting the database from
[Select Material from DB…].

Es/Ec: Elastic ratio between steel and concrete

Ds/Dc: Deadweight ratio between steel and concrete

Ps: Poisson’s ratio of steel

Pc: Poisson’s ratio of concrete

Conv. Stiffness Factor: Stiffness reduction factor of concrete (default=1.0) for SRC section

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 594 of 1024

2D element

2D elements are Triangles or Quadrilaterals with the geometric property of area. Because 3D shapes are expressed as 2D elements, the
thickness needs to be defined. The thickness can be set the same or tapered.

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

3D element

3D elements are Tetrahedron or Hexahedrons, Bricks with the geometric property of volume.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 595 of 1024

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

Cross sectional area (A)

The cross sectional area is used to calculate the axial stiffness when a tensile or axial force acts on the member or the stress on a member. The
calculations for the H section are as follows.

There are 2 methods to calculate the cross sectional area in the GTS NX. The first method uses the provided database to input the dimensions
of a section and automatically calculate the area. For the second method, the user calculates the area directly and inputs the value. The first
method is convenient, but because it does not consider the decrease in area due to bolts in the connection or rivet holes, the area entered
using the second method may provide more accurate results.

<Example of cross sectional area calculation>

Torsional stiffness (I )
xx

The torsional stiffness resists the torsional moment and is expressed as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 596 of 1024

Here, : Torsional stiffness,

: Torsional moment or torque,

: Torsional angle (angle of twist),

: Shear modulus

The torsional stiffness is the stiffness that resists the torsional moment and is different from the polar moment of inertia that decides the shear
stress due to torsion. (However, the 2 are the same when considering a circular cross-section or a thick cylindrical section)

The torsional stiffness can be calculated from Saint-Venant's principle as shown below.

is the warping function that can be calculated using the Finite element method as shown below.

Because , the torsional stiffness comp1nt is expressed as the following equation.

Effective shear area (Asy, Asz )

The effective shear area is needed to calculate the shear stiffness that resists the shear force acting on the y axis or z axis of the element
coordinate system. If the effective shear area is not entered, the shear strain in that direction is ignored.

Here, : Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

When the interior section material properties are calculated or entered from the database, the shear stiffness comp1nt is automatically
considered and the effective shear factor is calculated using the warping function from the shear force caused by bending moment
and the warping function from the Saint-Venant principle.

Here,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 597 of 1024

Area moment of inertia (Iyy, Izz)

The area moment of inertia is used to calculate the flexural stiffness that resists the bending moment and is calculated from the centroid axis
of the section using the following equation.

l • Area moment of inertia about the y axis of the element coordinate system

l Area moment of inertia about the z axis of the element coordinate system

Section element b h
① 10 4 40 2 80 5 200
② 2 10 20 9 180 5 100
③ 8 3 24 15.5 372 5 120
total - - 84 - 632 - 420

<Table. First area moment of inertia and calculation of centroid >

: area

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the z′-axis direction

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the z′-axis direction

l • Calculate position of neutral axis ( , )

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 598 of 1024

l • Calculate second area moment of inertia ( , )

Section element
① 40 5.5328 1224.5 53.3 1277.8 0 0 333.3 333.3
② 20 1.4672 43.1 166.7 209.8 0 0 6.7 6.7
③ 24 7.9762 1526.9 18.0 1544.9 0 0 128.0 128.0
total 2794.5 238.0 3032.5 0 468.0 468.0

<Table. Second area moment of inertia example>

Area product moment of inertia (Iyz)

The area product moment of inertia is used to calculate the stress comp1nt of an asymmetrical section and the definition is as follows.

H, pipe, box, channel, tee type sections have at least 1 axis of symmetry out of the y,z axis on the element coordinate system and hence Iyz=0.
For angle type sections, it does not have any angle of symmetry (Iyz≠ 0) and so, the stress comp1nt needs to be calculated.

The calculations for the area product moment of inertia of an angle type section are shown in the figure below.

<Area product moment of inertia calculations for an angle section>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 599 of 1024

< Flexural stress distribution diagram for asymmetrical section>

The neutral axis is the axis that passes the points where the flexural stress due to the bending moment is ‘0(zero)’ within the member. The
neutral axis is perpendicular to the -axis and the -axis.

Because the flexural stress due to bending moment is ‘0’ on the neutral axis, the neutral axis direction can be found by the following equation.

The general equation used to calculate the flexural stress due to bending moment is as follows.

If this is a H type section, and,

Here, : Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Area product moment of inertia,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system

The shear stress due to shear force acting in the axis and axis direction of the element coordinate system can be calculated using the
following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 600 of 1024

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

First moment of area (Qy, Qz)

The first moment of area is used to calculate the shear stress at an arbitrary point on the section and the shear stress can be calculated using
the following equation.

For a section that is symmetrical about the y, z or both axis, the shear strength on an arbitrary point can be calculated using the following
equation.

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

Element thickness

On the GTS NX, the thickness needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. The plate element has a rotor
float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 601 of 1024

Spacing

This functionality is in the 1D element property which is activated only in 2D project setting. Since this option is used to consider the 1D
element force per each element when the user introduce the 1D element more or less than one along the axis of horizontal direction
(thickness direction) in 2D model.

If the user uncheck the spacing option, on the GTS NX, the spacing will be regarded as Plane Strain Thickness in the analysis setting, meaning
that the unit thickness based on the selected unit system.

On the GTS NX, spacing is used to calculate the stiffness of the element and output the member force per each element.

where, n = spacing, L = length , A = area, K* = stiffness considering spacing.

where, f* = member force

Refer to the following example,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 602 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Property

Property
Go to Section property

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Add/define ground and structural properties. This function defines the property of each mesh set when a ground or
structure mesh is generated. For ground, it determines which material to use and for structures, it adds section size, shape (stiffness) and
horizontal spacing etc. The horizontal spacing is the 1D spacing between structural members in the horizontal direction of a 2D model.
Tapered section option, where the size (thickness) of a beam or plate changes, is also available.

▒ Methodology

Create

Creates 1 of the following 4 property types and adds a material type and section characteristic for each property.

The supported model type for each property type is as follows. The section shape/size, stiffness depending on spacing and selectable
materials is defined.

Go to Section property

Ground Structural
Property type Model type Nonlinear property
property property
Geogrid(1D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(1D) X X -
From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
1D From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Embedded truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Beam X O -
Embedded Beam X O -
Pile X O -
Geogrid(2D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(2D) X X -
Gauging shell X O -
2D Axisymmetric O X -
Shell X O -
Plane stress X O Tension Only
Plane strain O X -
3D Solid O X -
Rigid link X O -
Pile tip X O -
User Supplied Behavior
X O -
for Shell Interface
Linear Elastic
Tension Only

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 603 of 1024

Compression Only
Hook
Point spring X O
Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Matrix spring X O -
Free Field
Free Field O X
Absorbent Boundary
Interface X O -
Others
Shell interface X O -
From Adjacent Element
Infinite O X
User Defined
Linear Elastic
Rigid Body
Elastic link X O Tension Only
Compression Only
Nonlinear Elastic

Refer to Ch.3 of the Analysis manual for detailed information on each input parameter and behavioral characteristic.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

Import

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material Properties

Material Properties

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 604 of 1024

Default parameter (General)

The input parameters and units for defining the default stiffness and initial condition of each model are listed in the table below

Input parameter Definition Unit

Elasticity modulus(
Elasticity modulus kN/m2
)
Elasticity modulus The Elasticity modulus increment amount depending on height
kN/m3
increment (slope)
Reference height Reference height of Elasticity modulus increment m
Poisson’s ratio( ) Poisson’s ratio -
Unit weight (γ) Unit weight of entire unsaturated soil(γt) kN/m3
Initial stress (Ko) Coefficient of earth pressure (initial stress parameter) -
Temperature
Coefficient for calculating temperature loading 1/[T]
coefficient
Damping ratio Material damping ratio (only applied to dynamic analysis) -
Safety Result (Mohr- Calculate Factor of Safety for each element based on MC failure
-
Coulomb) criteria

[Elastic modulus (E)]

This parameter defines the default initial stiffness of the material. The user can specify the Elasticity modulus, or use the Shear modulus (G) or
Oedometer Elasticity modulus (Eoed) from the Oedometer test. The initial stiffness is very important because geo-materials display nonlinear
behavior from the early stages of loading. The initial stiffness can be defined from the stress-strain curves of the triaxial compression test. It is
realistic to use the E0 for materials that display linear (elastic) behavior until a large strain but for general geo-materials, E50, the slope of the
tangent at 50% of the stress, is appropriate as an initial stiffness. When simulating unloading and reloading due to excavation during
construction step analysis, it is better to use Eur instead of E50 to realistically simulate the ground behavior.

Hence, it is important to set the stress path and stress range (size) when using the initial stiffness to simulate the ground behavior. To simulate
detailed behavior, various nonlinear material models can be used.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 605 of 1024

<Triaxial compression test result graph>

The use of K(bulk modulus) and G(shear modulus) may be debatable use to the continuity issues associated with the ground, but it can be
expressed more simply and clearly than E or v and is convenient to use. The following figure briefly explains the mechanical significance of K
and G.

<Various types of Elasticity modulus>

The Elasticity modulus values gained from on-site tests can be 1 of the many elasticity moduli discussed above and can be modified
appropriately for real situations.

Elasticity modulus
Geo-material Poisson’s ratio
(tonf/m2)
amphibolite 9.4~12.1 ´106 0.28~0.30
anhydrite 6.8 ´106 0.30
siabase 8.7~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.30
siorite 7.5~10.8 ´106 0.26~0.29
solomite 11.0~12.1 ´106 0.30

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 606 of 1024

sunite 14.9~18.3 ´106 0.26~0.28

deldspathic gneiss 8.3~11.9 ´106 0.15~0.20
gabbro 8.9~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.31
granite 7.3~8.6 ´106 0.23~0.27
ice 7.1 ´106 0.36
limestone 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
marble 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
mica Schist 7.9~10.1 ´106 0.15~0.20
obsidian 6.5~8.0 ´106 0.12~0.18
oligoclasite 8.0~8.5 ´106 0.29
quartzite 8.2~9.7 ´106 0.12~0.15
rock salt 3.5 ´106 0.25
slate 7.9~11.2 ´106 0.15~0.20
aluminum 5.5~7.6 ´106 0.34~0.36
steel 20.0 ´106 0.28~0.29

<The Elasticity modulus and Poisson’s ratio for rock and other materials>

The Elasticity modulus in the table above is for small, intact rock samples tested in the lab. Hence, when considering the site conditions, a
reduced elasticity modulus needs to be used considering the discontinuous surfaces within large scale rocks. The figure below is a graph of
actual data showing the relationship between the RQD (Rock Quality Designation) and the Elasticity modulus reduction ratio. An RQD is the
percentage of the sum of the lengths of cracks that are over 10cm and exist on the 100cm situ core against the total length. An RQD of 100%
does not mean the core is an intact rock. However, a higher RQD means a higher quality rock and the RQD decreases with more weathering.

<RQD- Modulus reduction ratio (EL/EM) relationship>

As shown on the figure, an RQD of 70% already needs to decrease the lab Elastic modulus by 20%.

[Increment of Elastic modulus]

In general, the strength properties of the soil change with depth and confining pressure, even within a ground layer composed of the same
material. To take this characteristic into account, increase or decrease in the Elastic modulus can be simulated with reference to a reference
height (standard height). If the elastic increase according to height is '0(zero)', the Elastic modulus has a constant value and if it is not '0(zero)',
the Elastic modulus is calculated with reference to a standard height using the following equation.

Here, : Input elastic modulus value

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 607 of 1024

: Incremental slope of elastic modulus

: Depth of measurement

<Schematic diagram of Elastic modulus increment>

The in the equation represent the integral point positions of an element where the finite element method calculation occurs. If the integral
point position is higher than , the elastic modulus value can be less than 0 in some places. To avoid this, use the value instead of
further decreasing the value.

[Poisson’s ratio( )]

Poisson’s ratio is a proportional constant from the stress-strain relationship and displays the material volume change associated with loading.
As approaches 0.5, the material becomes an incompressible solid and closer to 0 means the material is elastic, showing large volume
changes even at small loads. The initial stress ratio due to self weight K0 = σh/ σv can be related to the ratio in the uniaxial compression state
by K0 = . If K0 is not used to define the initial in-situ stress, the horizontal stress is calculated from the vertical stress using the
entered . For geo-materials, the general Poisson range is within 0.3~0.4 and entering a value larger than 0.49 can cause numerical errors.
Hence, if K0 is larger than 1, for example over-consolidated ground, the Poisson’s ratio cannot be calculated and the value must be entered
directly.

Shear modulus(G)

The Shear modulus is automatically calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation derived from Hooke's
law. If the value is directly entered, the Elastic modulus changes.

[Oedometer Elastic modulus (Eoed)]

The Oedometer modulus can be calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation.

[Initial stress (K0)]

K0 is the Coefficient of earth pressure, which is defined as the ratio of the initial vertical/horizontal stress (K0 = σh/ σv). The anisotropic
property can be set with reference to the Global Coordinate System.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 608 of 1024

Firstly, select yes/no on whether the Global Coordinate System direction and anisotropic property match and set the lateral pressure index in
each axis or any direction depending on the selected options.

When the 2 properties do match, the lateral pressure index is set in each axis direction but a value of ‘1’ in the direction of gravity cannot be
defined depending on the work environment (2D/3D).

When the 2 properties do not match, the lateral pressure index direction is set by entering the angle with respect to the reference axis. The
reference axis exists to set the lateral pressure index direction. For a 2D work environment, the ’X-Y’ plane is fixed and only the ‘X’ axis can be
selected, with all initial shear stress at ‘0(zero)’. For 3D, each axis apart from the gravitational direction can be selected. For example, if the
gravitational direction is the ‘Z’ axis and the reference axis is set as the ‘X’ axis, the angle can be entered on the ‘X-Z’ plane will be the
maximum lateral pressure angle and all initial shear stress in the XY and YZ direction will be '0(zero)'.

The in-situ stress state, where the soil it not disturbed by excavation or fill, can be expressed using the Coefficient of earth pressure and self
weight. In other words, realistic results can be obtained from applying K0 after modeling the in-situ ground for the 1st step of construction
during analysis. This is true for flat foundations but for inclined foundations, it is recommended that another construction process be added to
converge the stress found using K0 for equilibrium.

[Thermal Parameter]

Thermal Coefficient - describes how the size of an object changes with a change in temperature. Specifically, it measures the fractional
change in size per degree change in temperature at a constant pressure.

Molecular vapor diffusion coefficient - the gas diffusion coefficient of a porous medium, which indicates the change in gas density over time.
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

Thermal diffusion enhancement (factor) - controls the degree of gas flow according to the temperature gradient (unit less).
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

[Safety Result (Mohr-Coulomb)]

§Cohesion, Friction Angle and Allowable tensile strength (optional) can be defined as the failure criteria.

§Stress status of material for each construction stage can be represented by Factor of Safety based on Mohr-Coulomb failure criteria.

§The ratio of generated stress to stress at failure for each element will be calculated automatically.

§Users can figure out stable, potential failure and plastic failure area directly.

§Check factor of safety for each element - (2D : Plain Strain Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR , 3D : Solid Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR)

§In case that Safety Factor is less than 1(or 1.2), it can be identical with plastic failure region.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 609 of 1024

Porous: Seepage, Drained/Undrained Parameter

The input parameters for the permeability characteristics and drained/undrained conditions of the foundation are as follows.

Input parameter Definition Unit

Unit weight(saturated) Saturated state unit weight kN/m3
Initial void ratio(eo) Initial void ratio -
Unsaturated characteristic function setting (negative pore water
Unsaturated characteristic -
pressure-water content-permeability ratio)
Drainage parameter Drained/Undrained condition -
Permeability coefficient GCS direction - Saturated permeability constant m/sec
Void ratio dependent permeability
Permeability ratio dependent on void ratio -
ratio (ck)
Specific storage(Ss) Volume ratio of water inflow/outflow 1/m

<Permeability parameter>

[Initial void ratio (e0)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 610 of 1024

The initial void ratio of the foundation used in consolidation analysis and stress-seepage coupled analysis. It is the volume ratio between the
voids and soil particles within the soil and the value is less than 1 for most soils. The value can be larger than 1 for clays or organic soils, but
the value depends greatly on the sampling method or compaction. Generally, coarse grain sand has a value of 0.6~0.8 and high density sand
with an even size distribution has a value of 0.3. The void ratio can be even 2~3 for fine grained soils.

[Unsaturated Property]

Set to consider the unsaturated property of the foundation. It is a required property for unsteady infiltration analysis and is used to consider
the partial degree of saturation of the foundation for nonlinear (construction step)/consolidation analysis etc. Because real foundations are
unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil for more realistic
results. If the unsaturated properties are not considered, it is assumed that the ground is saturated and hence, the infiltration analysis with
time cannot be examined.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship). Refer to
"Function>Unsaturated characteristic function" for more information.

[Drainage parameters]

The pore water pressure in stress analysis can be divided into normal state pore water pressure and abnormal state pore water pressure - the
excess pore water pressure generated between soil particles due to external loading under undrained conditions. An excess pore water
pressure of nearly 0 is called the drainage condition and is generally used for drainage analysis of sand, which has a large permeability.
However when simulating clay, which has a very small permeability and water cannot be drained out during sudden loading, undrained
analysis is appropriate. The initial state, where the excess pore water pressure has not yet dissipated, is seen as the most unstable state and
the pore water pressure is determined by the volume change of the foundation due to compressibility and permeability coefficient.

Undrained Poisson’s ratio and Skempton(B) coefficient are parameters used to calculate the bulk modulus of elasticity for water. The
undrained Poisson’s ratio has a standard value of 0.495 with a compressibility of nearly ‘0(zero)’ and the Skempton coefficient expresses the
saturation, with 1 meaning full saturation.

The materials for the unsaturated analysis are as follows.

Please refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual for more detailed information.

Drained/Undrained Materials Useable Material models

Drained All geo-materials
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Duncan-Chang,
Undrained (Effective stiffness /Effective strength)
Hoek-Brown, Strain Softening, Modified Cam-clay, Jardine, D-min, Modified Mohr-
Coulomb, User-supplied, Transversely Isotropic
Undrained (Effective stiffness / Undrained
Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)
Undrained (Undrained stiffness / Undrained
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)

[Permeability coefficients (kx,ky,kz)]

The permeability coefficient represents the permeability characteristics (velocity) of the foundation and is used in infiltration analysis and
consolidation analysis. The permeability coefficient for each direction can be defined on the GCS. The input value is the saturated permeability
coefficient and becomes the standard for computing the permeability ratio (Kunsat / Ksat) due to negative pore water pressure when defining
an unsaturated property function.

[Void ratio dependency permeability (ck)]

The permeability coefficient is a measurement of how much the groundwater within a foundation moves in a unit time and is dependent on
the water content and the void ratio change . The larger water content, the larger the flow channel and hence, the value is largest when the
foundation is saturated. The water content depends on the pore water pressure and hence, the permeability coefficient is also dependent on

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 611 of 1024

the pore water pressure. The change in void ratio is considered in consolidation analysis as well as stress-seepage coupled analysis and is
calculated from the initial void ratio.

To express the change in pore water pressure, GTS NX uses the permeability ratio function depended on saturated pore water
pressure coefficient and pore water pressure change and the void ratio dependent permeability ratio dependent on void ratio change .
The unsaturated permeability coefficient depending on void ratio change is given by the following equation.

[Specific storativity(Ss)]

The Specific storage is the water volume inflow or outflows from the unit volume of the aquifer due to water level rise or fall in a confined
aquifer. A coefficient can be directly entered or automatically calculated for compressible fluids.

The change in volumetric water content for pore water pressure in infiltration and consolidation analysis can be expressed by the porosity and
degree of saturation.

The first clause is the slope of the volumetric water content under saturated conditions that can be expressed using the specific storage.

When the material drainage property is set to undrained, the specific storage is automatically calculated using the undrained Poisson's ratio
(vu) and the Effective elastic modulus (E') and Poisson's ratio (v'), entered in the general parameters.

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature unit. (required for transient heat
transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load vector for heat transfer analysis is
the total exothermic load applied to the object.

Unfrozen water content: indicates floating water content in soil / rock. It is given as a temperature-dependent function as a unique
characteristics of the ground.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 612 of 1024

Time Dependent

This is to define Creep Formulation to simulate time-dependent behavior of concrete structures. Following constitutive models are available
for concrete structures, Elastic, Tresca, von Mises, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker Prager, and Hoek Brown.

Two types of creep formulation are available to define Time-dependent behavior of material, Age Dependent and Age Independent. Refer to
analysis reference Ch.4-Section5 in detail.

[Age Dependent]

The stiffness of concrete changes with time, and the creep and shrinkage may cause unexpected deformation. The creep strain of concrete
depends on the time of stress occurrence even under the same applied load. GTSNX supports aging-Kelvin model and aging Viscous model
excluding the spring from Kelvin model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 613 of 1024

[Age Independent]

GTSNX can take into account the primary and secondary creep. The user can use two types of empirical law to define the creep behavior.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material

Material

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Define the general stiffness and nonlinear material properties of the ground and structure. For ground, additional
permeability properties and drained/undrained conditions can be set.

▒ Methodology

Create

Add a ground or structure material. The following 4 material types can be selected and the model type can be set for each material type.

The model type available for each material type is shown below. The ground/structure material properties and the material behavior
properties are defined for each model type. Here, the elements used for ground modeling such as plane strain or solid can be assigned to a
structure material that does not consider Ko effects or permeability properties.

Ground Structure Material behavior

Material type Model type
material material properties
Elastic O O Linear elastic
Tresca O O Elasto-plastic
von Mises (Nonlinear) O O Elasto-plastic
Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Drucker Prager O O Elasto-plastic
Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Generalized Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Hyperbolic(Duncan-
O X Elasto-plastic
Chang)
Strain Softening O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Cam Clay O X Elasto-plastic
Jardine O X Nonlinear elastic
D-min O X Nonlinear elastic

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 614 of 1024

Modified Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic

Soft Soil O X Elasto-plastic
Soft Soil Creep O X Elasto-plastic
User defined model O O Elasto-plastic
Modified UBCSAND O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Isotropic(General Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Parameter) Modified Ramberg-
O O Elasto-plastic
Osgood
Modified Hardin-Drnevich O O Elasto-plastic
Hardening Soil(small
O X Elasto-plastic
strain stiffness)
Generalized SCLAY1S O X Elasto-plastic
CWFS O O Elasto-plastic
PM4Sand O X Elasto-plastic
Transversely Isotropic O O Linear elastic
Jointed Rock Mass O O Elasto-plastic
Orthotropic
2D Orthotropic X O Linear elastic
Geogrid X O Elasto-plastic
(Equivalent)Linear
2D Equivalent 2D Equivalent O O
elastic
Interface X O Elasto-plastic
Shell Interface X O Elasto-plastic
Interface / Pile User supplied - Shell
X O Elasto-plastic
Interface
Pile X O Nonlinear elastic

Isotropic

Isotropic materials have the same properties in every direction and is used to define material behavior properties of most linear-elastic /
nonlinear elastic / elasto-plastic materials.

Orthotropic

Natural ground is generally layered and sloped, making it possible to have different strengths in each orthogonal direction. This option can
also be used to define Jointed Rocks, which have different properties depending on the direction and behave differently according to the
specific confinement conditions. In case of 2D Orthotropic, users can define different values of stiffness along each direction. It is required to
define geometrically orthotropic with significant different stiffness in horizontal and vertical direction.

2D Equivalent

2D equivalent linear analysis specific model. Use the converging strength and damping ratio from the equivalent linear method to consider
the nonlinear and n1lastic behavior of materials.

Interface / Pile

Applied when simulating relative behavior (interface behavior) between ground and structure.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

Import/Import from Excel / Export to Excel

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 615 of 1024

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

The user can construct the frequently used material DB by importing or exporting the excel file containing the material properties.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual to understand the Finite element formulization and yield shape. The input parameters and behavioral
characteristics for each material model are as follows.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Hinge

Hinge Property

▒ Overview

When crack or yield occurs due to irregular cyclic load such as seismic load, very complex behavior appears since displacement history to the
current affects to the restoring force and displacement relationship. It is called that hysteresis model which regulates this relationship and is
considered to inelastic hinge at inelastic element.

Inelastic hinges are available in nonlinear, construction stage, consolidation, fully coupled, nonlinear time history analysis, SRM/SAM (Slope
stability analysis) and nonlinear time history analysis with SRM and element results can be displayed.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 616 of 1024

Type

- Beam - Lumped : It concentrates the inelastic behavior represented by rotational and translational springs at each end and the center. And the remaining
parts are assumed to behave elastically. Inelastic hysteresis behaviors are defined by skeleton curves, which are empirical hysteresis models. The axial
component is represented by a spring at the center and two translational components are represented by springs at each end defined by force-
displacement relationships. The two flexural components, My and Mz, are represented by springs defined by the relationship between moment and angle of
rotation at either I or J or at both ends.

- Beam - Distributed : Unlike lumped hinges, it assumes inelastic behavior throughout the member. The plastic hinge locations in the length direction of a
member assigned by the user are defined as the integration points. The flexibility matrix of a section, which represents the distribution of internal forces, is
calculated through the integration points. The number of integration points can be 1 and between 3 and 20. If the number of integration points is 2, the
moment at the free end of a cantilever beam does not come to exactly zero due to the inherited characteristic of the integration method. Therefore, two
integration points are not permitted. Inelastic hysteresis behavior can be defined by 2 models, empirical Skeleton and Fiber. The hinge behaviors can be
expressed by force - deformation relationships in each axis direction, and the hinge hysteresis behavior of the flexural components can be expressed by the
relationships of moment and angle of rotation. Inelastic behaviors can be defined for 3 axis components and 2 flexural (My & Mz) components.

- Truss : The axial component is represented by a spring at the center defined by the force-displacement relationship. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a
spring is defined by a skeleton model.

- Spring / Elastic Link : Unlike Lumped and Distributed hinges, which are influenced by the inelastic properties of materials and members, the inelastic plastic
hinge properties for the corresponding linear properties of each component of Property Type defined in General Link Properties are defined. The elastic
stiffness of each component is defined by effective stiffness and acts as the initial stiffness in inelastic analysis. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a spring is
defined by a skeleton model. The inelastic properties of a spring can be defined for all 3 translational and 3 rotational directions.

Interaction

The type of considering interaction between axial force and moment is selected.

- None: Interaction between axial force and moments is not considered.

- P-M in Strength Calculation: N-M interaction in time history analysis is reflected by calculating the flexural yield strength of a hinge considering the effect
of axial force. In this method, the interaction between biaxial bending moments is ignored. The axial force is assumed to act with each directional bending
moment independently when the hinge status is evaluated at each time step. Recalculation of bending moment yield strength reflecting axial force is carried
out in a loading condition, which satisfies the following three conditions:

1) It must be the first among the sequential time history load cases, which will be consecutively analyzed.

2) Inelastic static analysis must be carried out.

The elements are inelastic beam elements assigned with hinge properties to which P-M interaction is applied. The initial axial and bending moment at this
time are determined by the combination of linear elastic analysis results of all the static loads contained in Time Varying Static Load. The factors used in the

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 617 of 1024

combination are defined by the Scale Factors specified in Time Varying Static Load.

- P-M-M in Status Determination: This method uses a multi-axis hinge hysteresis model in inelastic time history analysis. Interaction between axial force
and biaxial moments is realized by applying the plasticity theory. The interaction is considered at each time step through evaluating the status of inelastic
hinges using the 3-dimensional yield surface. GTSNX supports the kinematic hardening type.

Yield Surface Function

If "P-M in Strength Calculation" or "P-M-M in Status Determination" is selected in Interaction Type, enter the related data for P-M interaction curve and 3-D
yield surface.

Component

Select the components of sectional strength for which properties will be entered. The Spring Type permits properties in all directional components, whereas
Lumped and Distributed types permit all but the Mx component.

Hinge Location

Select the locations of lumped inelastic hinges. Axial component is fixed to the center of a member. I-end, j-end or both ends can be selected for the
bending moment components.

Num. of Sections

Enter the number of integration points for inelastic hinges of the distributed type. Up to 20 sections are permitted, and moment - curvature relationships are
calculated at all the sections corresponding to the points.

Hysteresis Model

Select a hysteresis model for an inelastic hinge.

Hinge Components (Single)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 618 of 1024

Hysteresis Model Type

- Origin-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
origin and again move along the skeleton curve after reaching the opposite skeleton curve.

- Peck-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
point of maximum displacement on the opposite side. If the first yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the response points move
toward the first yielding point on the skeleton curve.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 619 of 1024

- Kinematic : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. It shows the tendency of strength increase with the increase in loading. This is used to model the Bauschinger effect of metallic
materials. Accordingly, it is cautioned that energy dissipation may be overestimated for concrete. Due to the characteristic of the model, only
the positive (+) and negative (-) symmetry is permitted for the strength reduction ratios after yielding.

- Clough : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. Unloading stiffness is obtained from the elastic stiffness
reduced by the equation below. As the deformation progresses after yielding, unloading stiffness reduces gradually.

where,

K : unloading stiffness
R

Ko : elastic stiffness

Dy : yield displacement in the zone where unloading begins

Dm : maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins

(In the zone where yielding has not occurred, replace it with the yield displacement)

: constant for determining unloading stiffness

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 620 of 1024

If the sign of loading changes in the process of unloading, response points move toward the point of maximum displacement in the zone of
progressing direction. If yielding has not occurred in this zone, the response points move toward the yield point on the skeleton curve. If
unloading becomes loading without changing the loading sign, the response points move along the unloading path. If the loading continually
increases, loading continues on the skeleton curve again.

- Degrading : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The load-displacement coordinates at unloading
move to the path of reaching the maximum deformation point on the opposite side due to the change of unloading stiffness once in the
middle. If yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the first yielding point is assumed to be the maximum deformation point.

- Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a tetralinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D, does
not exceed D3, the hysteresis rules are identical to the Original Taketa hysteresis. If the current displacement or deformation, D, exceeds D3,
response points move along the slope K4. For unloading, response points move by the same rules as the Original Taketa hysteresis. The
Takeda tetralinear hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 621 of 1024

- Modified Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D,
exceeds D2 for the first time or the maximum deformation point up until now, response points move along the trilinear skeleton curve. If
unloading takes place from this straight line toward the opposite direction, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the point of the
restoring force becoming 0. If the restoring force goes beyond the 0 point, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the
opposite side. Even in the case where unloading takes place from the straight line directed toward the maximum deformation point from the
point of the 0 restoring force, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the points reach the 0 restoring force. After the point of 0 restoring
force is passed, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the opposite side. The Modified Takeda type hysteresis model
can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

- Normal Bilinear : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. The Normal Bilinear type hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and
Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 622 of 1024

- Modified Ramberg-Osgood :

- Modified Hardin-Drnevich :

Symmetric / Asymmetric

: Select the type of Skeleton Curve.

Yield Function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 623 of 1024

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

- Yield Displacement : Enter the yield displacement of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Yield Displacement is selected for Input Type.

- Force (Yield Strength) : Yield strength is specified. It is user defined based on material and section properties. The user specifies positive (+)
values regardless of tension (t) or compression (c). The program treats compression as negative (-) internally.

Unloading Stiffness Parameter

Exponent in Unloading Stiffness Calculation: This is an option used to determine the unloading stiffness of the outer loop used in the
Clough and Takeda type models among hysteresis models of skeleton curves. This is used to reflect the effect of reduction in stiffness, which
occurs as the deformation progresses after yielding. The unloading stiffness is determined by the elastic stiffness reduced by the yield
displacement and maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins and the exponent entered here.

Inner Loop Unloading Stiffness Reduction Factor: This is used to determine the unloading stiffness of the inner loop. The inner loop is
formed when unloading occurs before reaching the target point on the skeleton curve while reloading after the loading sign changes in the
process of unloading. The unloading stiffness of the inner loop is calculated by multiplying the unloading stiffness of the outer loop by the
reduction ratio for the unloading stiffness of the inner loop.

Hinge Components (Multi)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 624 of 1024

- P-M Interaction Curves : Enter the P-M interaction curve data required to calculate 3-dimensional yield surfaces. All strength values must be
entered with positive sign. Sign convention for plotting P-M curve is positive for compression and negative for tension.

Strengths for the 1st P-M Interaction Curves

PC(t): First yield strength subject to pure tension force

PC(c): First yield strength subject to pure compression force

PCBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PCBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MCy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MCz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

Strengths for the 2nd P-M Interaction Curves

PY(t): Second yield strength subject to pure tension force

PY(c): Second yield strength subject to pure compression force

PYBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second stage yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PYBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MYy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MYz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

- Approximation of Yield Surface Shape : On the basis of P-M interaction curve, the parameters for 3-dimensional yield surface are either user
defined or auto-calculated. If some items are auto-calculated and the remainder is to be user defined, Auto-calculation should be performed
first, and then necessary items can be modified after converting to User Input. In case of Alpha, only user defined entry is possible. The value
of each parameter is used in the equation of yield surface displayed in the dialog box.

Beta y, Beta z, Gamma: Being the exponential powers of P-My or P-Mz interactions, different values can be entered for the first and second

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 625 of 1024

yields. For Beta y and Beta z on the other hand, two separate values representing the ranges of larger and smaller axial forces relative to the
axial force at the time of balanced failure can be entered.

Alpha: Exponent for My-Mz interaction for the 1st and 2nd yielding

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

α1: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the first yielding divided by the initial stiffness

α2: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the second yielding divided by the initial stiffness

- Initial Stiffness : The initial stiffness used in inelastic analysis is either selected or entered by the user.

Elastic Stiffness: elastic stiffness of a member is used as the initial stiffness for inelastic analysis.

User Defined: the user directly enters the initial stiffness if the Input Type is Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Coordinate System

Coordinate System

▒ Overview

Add a result output coordinate system for 2D/3D element. The default rectangular/cylindrical coordinate system is defined and another
coordinate system can be added by arbitrarily defining 1 of the three planes on the coordinate system. The added coordinate system can be
used as the material coordinates when the properties of the 2D / 3D elements are defined. For 2D structural members, it is especially hard to
unify the element coordinate system in 1 direction depending on the element shape. It is useful to set the output coordinate system to check
the member forces of the entire structure according the same direction and sign convention.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 626 of 1024

There are 2 types of coordinate systems; rectangular and cylindrical. The coordinate system can be set by defining 1 of the three planes of the
coordinate system 12, 23, 31 (XY,YZ,ZX) by entering three points. In other words, the plane that passes the three points becomes 1 of the 12,
23, 31 planes and the other 2 planes are automatically determined by the direction of the reference plane.

Select the plane, origin point, a point on 1 axis of the selected plane and a point on the selected plane in this order to specify the position and
direction of the reference plant.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Function

Function

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
When setting the analysis conditions (boundary, loading etc.) after the mesh has been generated, the values that change
with position and time can be registered as a function. The provided function types are as follows and the characteristics and applicable range
for each function is given.

▒ Methodology

Applicable range
Function type
Material/Property Boundary condition Loading

Force, Displacement, Pressure,

Prestress, Initial equilibrium
General (Spatial) - Water level
force, Dynamic nodal, Dynamic
surface
General (Non-spatial) Pile, Pile tip - -
Force, Displacement, Pressure,
Prestress, Initial equilibrium
Generalized space - Water level
force, Dynamic noda, Dynamic
surface
Surface Function - Water level -

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 627 of 1024

Non-Hydrostatic Water
- Water level -
Pressure

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Time-dependent (User-

- -
Function defined)

Time-dependent
Creep / Shrinkage Strain
- -
Function Group
(Design code based)
Time-dependent
Elastic Modulus Function - -
(Design code based)
Shear Hardening (User-
Plastic Hardening Function - -
defined)
Hardening Curve von Mises - -
Stress-Strain Curve von Mises - -
Cohesion Hardening Curve CWFS - -
Frictional Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Dilatancy Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Tensile Strength Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve

Node head, Node

Seepage boundary - -
flux, Surface flux

Nonlinear elastic (Truss

Truss, Embedded truss - -
element)
Nonlinear elastic
Point spring, Elastic link - -
(Point spring/ Elastic link)
Unsaturated property Isotropic, Orthotropic - -
Strain compatible 2D Equivalent - -
Response spectrum - - Response spectrum
Ground acceleration, Time
Time forcing - - varying static, Dynamic nodal,
Dynamic surface

General function(Spatial)

Changes in position (coordinates) of a value with respect to the rectangular or cylindrical coordinate system can be set as function and used
when specifying the load. The water level conditions can be directly specified on the screen, but registering the water level according to the
coordinate change as a function allows this to be used as the water line during the construction step.

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

<Reference coordinate system standard>

[Equation]

The Equation can be set without defining the values of the independent variables.

For example, when defining the function Y=2*X on the Cartesian coordinate system, specify the X coordinate range (start, end) and the X
coordinate increment first. Input 2*X and press the calculate button to automatically generate a function as shown above.

When defining the function Sin(T) between a certain angle with reference to the T coordinate on the cylindrical coordinate system , specify the
angle range (start, end) and increment angle and then input sin(T) to generate a sin function within the specified angle range.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 628 of 1024

[Scale Value]

Value multiplied to the defined function value. The initial value is set as 1. For example, to increase all defined functions by 2 times, input 2 for
the scale value.

[Extrapolation]

Assign a function value to values outside the independent variable range. The user can select whether to set the function value outside the
range to be 0, the same as the closest function value or determined through linear extrapolation.

<Extrapolation>

General function (Non-spatial)

Used to specify the shear stiffness and spring stiffness of pile or pile tip elements as a function. The relative displacement vs Force/Area is
used as a shear stiffness function and the relative displacement vs Force/Length is used as a spring stiffness function at the pile tips. Different
pile shear stiffness functions can be set for each depth when defining the pile material properties.

Generalized space function

The purpose and functions are the same as the general function (spatial). However, the generalized space function is able to generate a
function that considers all 3 axis directions while the general function (spatial) is a 1 dimensional function that can only set 1 independent
variable axis. The input method and detailed functions are the same as the general function (spatial).

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

Surface function

Used to specify the water level surface in 3D space. The 3D water level surface can be generated by entering the variable values with reference

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 629 of 1024

to the global or cylindrical coordinates as shown in the table below, but it can also be generated using the Boundary Condition > Water Level
operation and selecting a surface in space to automatically extract the coordinate information. Here, the X axis spacing determines the
precision of the water surface and for suddenly changing sections, the spacing needs to be carefully set following the element node positions.

Non-Hydrostatic Water Pressure

Define the water pressure at the top and bottom depending on the position of the model.

Applicable in integer conditions and user-defined conditions when specifying the mesh set level.

- User-defined condition: the user can directly define the water pressure at the top and bottom of the assigned mesh by using the specific
water pressure function

- Hydrostatic condition: this function is used to define the water pressure at the top of the allocated mesh as hydrostatic.

Name – input name for the function.

Ref. CSys – reference coordinate system for the function definition.

Water Pressure Type – select the type of function for selection in Analysis Case > Analysis Control > Define Water Level for Mesh Set. (User
Defined or Hydrostatic condition)

Scale factor to multiply all input data.

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Function

Define the time dependent creep property and shrinkage strain of concrete material. These functions are available if User Defined is selected
in the Code field.

There are three types of Creep function data types.

Specific Creep ; Strain per unit stress excluding immediate deformation

Creep Function ; Strain per unit stress including immediate deformation

Creep Coefficient ; Ratio of creep strain to elastic strain

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 630 of 1024

A frequently used Creep Function may be saved in and recalled from a file. The data file, fn.TDM retains the following form:

* Unit, in, kip

* Data Assign the units (optional items)
Enter the data in the form of 'day' and
20, 0.9934
'value' (mandatory items)
40,1.2182 -
60, 1.3705 -
80,1.4883 -
100, 1.5854 -
120, 1.6683 -
140, 1.7408 -
160, 1.8054 -
180, 1.8636 -
200, 1.9166 -
220, 1.9653 -
240, 2.0103 -
260, 2.0252 -

Creep / Shrinkage Function Group

The user can define Creep/Shrinkage Function based on the embedded Design Codes as follows.

Link to Creep / Shrinkage Design Code

Elastic Modulus Function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 631 of 1024

Define Time-dependent Elastic modulus function based on selected design code. It is required to input End Time of function with the number
of steps.

Link to Elastic Modulus Design Code

Plastic Hardening Function

Shear Hardening in Modified Mohr-Coulomb model can be defined by Equivalent plastic strain related to the mobilized shear resistance.
Using "Auto-Calculated" option, solver recalculates friction angle based on the deviatoric plastic strain.

Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and stress are directly inputted. It is used when defining hardening curve within von Mises model. Plastic strain begin once the
material starts yielding so it can be calculated using following equation.

Stress-Strain Curve

Stress and stain are directly inputted. It is used when defining Stress-Strain Curve within von Mises model. When Load-Displacement Curve is
already known, true strain can be calculated using following equation.

Cohesion Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and cohesion are directly inputted. It is used when describing Cohesion Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion Weakening and
Frictional Strengthening).

Frictional Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and frictional angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Frictional Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 632 of 1024

Dilatancy Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and dilatancy angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Dilatancy Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Tensile Strength Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and tensile strength are directly inputted. It is used when describing Tensile Strength Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Seepage Boundary function

Used to simulate the head and flow rate difference with time such as node head, node flux rate, surface flux. Setting the values (head/flux)
according to the time flow that fits the specified time unit generates a function that can be applied to unsteady infiltration analysis.

For unsteady infiltration analysis, the time steps for result verification are set separately and the time function for the steps is used in the
analysis. When the time step is beyond the range of the function, the function value is automatically calculated using linear interpolation. In
other words, to apply a 0 function value to time steps outside the range, the same function value (0) needs to be entered for arbitrary time
steps when creating the function as shown in the figure above.

Nonlinear elastic function (Truss element)

The behavioral characteristics of truss elements or embedded truss elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The stress change according
to strain of the truss element can be directly generated as a function and used. The function can be applied to the tensile (compression) test
results of a structural member (truss affiliated) or to the deformation behavior properties of a general steel member.

Nonlinear elastic function (Point spring/ Elastic link)

The behavioral characteristics of spring or elastic link elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The spring/link stiffness according to the
element strain can be defined to generate a function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 633 of 1024

Unsaturated property function

For steady infiltration analysis that assumes a saturated ground, the unsaturated properties are not taken into account even if they are
entered. For the time dependent unsteady analysis, the unsaturated properties of the ground must be considered. Also, because real
foundations are unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil
for more realistic results.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship).

[Individually]

Define the permeability function data and water content function data. Based on the experimental data of unsaturated soil, the coefficients for
each function type can be defined using Curve Fitting or the data can be directly input through customize. If the experimental data is entered
directly, the negative pore water pressure size is entered by its absolute value and the permeability ratio is found by dividing the unsaturated
value with the saturated state value.

<Individual consideration>

The provided permeability functions and coefficients are listed below.

l Gardner coefficient

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Frontal function

K ratio (Rk) : Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

Ho : Head at which the permeability coefficient no longer decreases

l Van Genuchten function (Permeability ratio)

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Van Genuchten (Water content)

: Volume water content

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 634 of 1024

: Residual volume water content

: Saturated volume water content

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

[Relation]

The unsaturated material property data can be set on the ground type according to the JICE (Japan Institute of Construction Eng.) criteria. The
pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio relationship function for each type of ground is shown
below.

Pressure head(P)-Volumetric water content(T) Pressure head(P)-Degree of saturation(Sr)

-Permeability ratio (K) -Permeability ratio(K)

(T)- (P) (T)- (K) (Sr)- (P) (Sr)- (K)
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F],
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], [GF]
[GF] (JICE) (JICE)
[GF] (JICE) [GF] (JICE)
Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], Sandy soil [S], [S-F],

[SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE) [S-F], [SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE)

Cohesive soil [M], [C]
Sandy soil [SF] (JICE) Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) Sandy soil [SF] (JICE)
(JICE)
Cohesive soil [M], [C]
User specified Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) User specified
(JICE)
User specified User specified

<Dual consideration>

For unsteady analysis, the negative pressure head (pore water pressure) is calculated for each time step (construction step) and applied,
renewing the relative permeability coefficient. The volumetric water content (degree of saturation), according to the calculated pressure head,
is found and the relative permeability, according to the found volumetric water content (degree of saturation), is renewed for each step.

Strain compatible function

For the 2D equivalent linear analysis, the shear modulus and damping ratio are set as functions of strain to consider the nonlinearity and
inelastic behavior of the ground. If the function is not defined, the ground material is assumed to be linear and the entered (fixed) shear
modulus and damping ratio is applied. Generally, the ground displays decreasing shear modulus and increasing damping ratio as the shear
strain increases. For complex nonlinear behavior of the ground, the material properties are simplified to linear equivalent properties. Repeated
calculations from the assumed initial values can compute the converging shear modulus and damping ratio.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 635 of 1024

Material properties can be defined from various existing database. The following empirical equation can be used to generate a function
following the stratum properties.

[Database]

A strain function stored from existing research can be imported from the database. An example DB is shown below.

Clay - Pl=5-10 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Lower Bound (Sun et al.0)

Clay - Pl=10-20 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Average (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=20-40 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Upper Bound (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=40-80 (Sun et al.0) Clay (Idriss 1990)
Clay - Pl=80+ (Sun et al.0) Gravel (Seed et al.0)
Clay (Seed and Sun 1989) Linear
Modulus Gravel (Seed et al.0) Rock
Damping
Reduction Linear Rock (Idriss)
Curve
Curve Rock Sand (Idriss 1990)
Rock (Idriss) Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound Vucetic - Dobry
Sand (Seed and Idriss 1970)
-
Vucetic - Dobry

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 636 of 1024

Response spectrum function

Define the spectrum function used in response spectrum analysis. Because the response spectrum analysis uses a linearly interpolated
spectrum function value for the natural periodicity of the structure, compact spectrum values are needed for areas where the curvature of the
spectrum curve changes rapidly. The period range of the spectrum function must contain all natural periods of the structure.

The spectrum data types are normalized acceleration (acceleration spectrum, gravitational acceleration), acceleration, velocity and
displacement spectrum and changing the time function data format only changes the application format, not the data format. The scale factor
is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value. In the 'Damping Ratio' space,
input the damping ratio applied on the response spectrum but if the damping ratio of the target structure is different, the input spectrum data
is processed to fit the structural damping ratio.

[Design spectrum function]

Use the built-in design spectrum. The default built-in design spectrum types are as follows.

l Korea(Bridge) : Korea, Traffic Specification

l Japan(Bridge02) : Japan, Load instruction and Dynamic Analysis of Building

l China(JTJ004-89) : China, Specifications of Earthquake Resistant Design for Highway Engineering

l KBC 2009 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2009

l KBC 2005 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2005

l IBC2000(ASCE7-98) : USA, International Building Code 2000

l UBC(1997) : USA, Measure of Uniform Building Code 97 (Standards)

l EURO(2004H-ELASTIC) : Europe, Sesismic Design Measure of Structures

Time forcing function

The time forcing function is applied to the loading conditions (ground acceleration, time varying static, dynamic nodal, dynamic surface)
applied to linear/nonlinear time history analysis. A function for the time history loading value is formed and changing the time function data
format only changes the application format, not the data format.[edit] The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the
entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 637 of 1024

[Add Time Function]

The defined function is also applicable for Dynamic node (surface) loading and time varying static loading. Specifying 'Force' or 'Moment' uses
the time history load as a 'dynamic node (surface) load' input and specifying 'Normalized Acceleration' or 'Acceleration' uses it to input the
'ground acceleration'. Specifying 'Normal' uses the time history load as the change in static load with time for 'time varying static load' or
'dynamic surface load'.

[Import/Earthquake]

Save and import frequently used time history loading or select earthquake acceleration data from the program DB. There are a total of 32
types of earthquake acceleration.

[Add Time Sinusoidal]

A sine function can be used to define the time history loading. A, C are constants, f is the frequency of the input load, D is the damping factor
and P is the phase angle. If the time history load is entered as a harmonic function, input the necessary sine function variables and click
[Redraw Graph] to view the loading on the right hand side.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Contact > Define Contact

Define Contact (Welded / General)

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 638 of 1024

Use welded contact elements where element faces meet, but the nodes are not shared, to induce the same behavior.

It can be used as the initial contact conditions between adjacent objects in structural analysis, consolidation analysis or seepage analysis. It is
often used when node sharing on very complex geometry needs to be ignored to create an element. This function prevents analysis error and
checks the analysis results that are similar to node sharing.

General contact considers the impact and impact friction between two objects in analysis, otherwise two objects are bonded like rigid link each
other by welded contact. General contact can be used in nonlinear (static, dynamic) and fully coupled analysis. With Geometric Nonlinearity
option, solver will take into account all possible contact area automatically regardless of defined Contact tolerance between two objects. It is
also possible to consider Frictional behavior by Friction coefficient between two objects and the penetration at initial stage can be ignored by
adjusting slave nodes automatically.

▒ Concept

Contact analysis fundamentally assumes that two objects in a space can be in contact, but cannot penetrate each other (non-penetration
condition), and are nonlinear in behavior or condition from a physical point of view. The type of contacts are general contact (considers the
impact and impact friction between two objects in analysis), rough contact(does not consider sliding), welded contact (two objects are welded
from the start of analysis) and sliding contact (only considers the sliding in the tangent direction). In the example below, general contact and
rough contact are assigned depending on the position of two objects at the start of analysis and can be seen as linear. GTS NX supports the
welded and general contact feature.

<Concept of General contact and Rough contact> <Concept of Welded contact>

▒ Methodology

Contact element generation (Welded Contact)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 639 of 1024

The contact can be defined through the Automatic Contact and the Create Manual Contact Pair functions.

Auto contact

This function automatically searches for areas where the selected meshes meet without node sharing and creates a contact surface.

[Searching Distance] : Input the distance between the main contact surface and the sub contact surface. The function searches for contact
surfaces within this range.

Manual contact pair

The user can directly specify the main contact surface and the sub contact surface to create a contact surface. Face, 2D element, 3D element,
2D element free face, and 3D element free face geometries can be selected.

When creating the contact surface manually, the node-to-surface contact or surface-to surface-contact can be selected to create the surface.
Node-to-surface contact takes less time, but the solution accuracy is relatively low because the nodes of the main object tend to penetrate
through the sub object. On the other hand, surface-to surface-contact takes longer but the non-penetrating conditions are satisfied relatively
accurately, allowing for more accurate simulations of structural behavior.

[Contact Parameters] : Input the coefficient value to calculate the initial contact search distance. The initial contact search distance can be
found by multiplying the coefficient value by the longest length on the element face. If the main and sub contact faces are within this distance,
contact is considered to have occurred.

Contact Parameters

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 640 of 1024

Define the normal and tangential stiffness of contact element. Based on the material properties of adjacent elements, the stiffness will be
updated automatically according to the generated strain. Highly recommend to use Default setting for Scaling Factor.

Following is the summary of parameters for the Contact Elements.

Parameter Reference value (kN, m)

Contact stiffness (Recommend to use default setting)
Normal stiffness scaling 1 (The smaller value, the larger penetration)
Tangential stiffness scaling 0.1 ( Normal stiffness / 10)
Advanced options (parameters)
Contact Tolerance Auto (Uncheck) : Find contact area within the tolerance
Friction Coefficient (Optional) 0.3 ~ 0.6 (Depending on material types)
Impermeable (Uncheck) : Possible to allow seepage flow
Conduction for Seepage Flow
through the contact elements
Property used to describe ability to conduct heat
Thermal Conductance
between two bodies in contact.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Construction Stage > Auto Set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 641 of 1024

Auto Set

▒ Overview

Automatically generate construction stages using the mesh, boundary condition, load that are viewed on the current model screen.

It can be used in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis). The data used for each stage can be
checked on the model, allowing intuitive composition of stages.

▒ Methodology

Define construction stage automatically

The construction stage auto set function can be activated by using the following steps:

1. Adding the construction stage set after finishing modeling registers the added construction stage set on the worktree, as shown below.

2. Check the [Define Auto Stage] option by right mouse clicking on the registered construction stage set. This option activates the
Construction stage > Auto set on the ribbon menu that allows for the specification of construction stages on the selected construction stage
set.

3. Click the [Auto Set] icon to automatically register the displayed meshes, boundary conditions, load conditions on the activated data column
and the un-displayed (not checked) meshes, boundary conditions, load conditions on the deactivated data column. In other words, set the
show/hide model information for each composing stage and select [Auto Set] to automatically set the construction stage with reference to the
currently shown information. The created stages can be checked on the worktree.

Because the concept of construction stages is cumulative, the program compares the activated/deactivated model information in the previous
stage and only adds/deletes the changed information. Hence, it is recommended that the creation be done in stages, after the displayed
model information is returned to its initial in-situ state.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 642 of 1024

The auto set function generates construction stages using the work environment displayed on the screen. Hence, to specify the individual
options (LDF setting, clear displacement etc.) for each stage, use the Construction stage set specification menu to check the options for each
stage.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Construction Stage > Stage Definition Wizard

Stage Definition Wizard

▒ Overview

A wizard to efficiently define the construction stages. A regular number (postfix) needs to be assigned to each set to define the construction
stage using wizard. This number can be assigned using the [Rename] function for mesh sets. Sets that are only used once in the entire
construction stage process does not need to be assigned a number.

It can be used in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis, Thermal Analysis).

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 643 of 1024

Display the usable Mesh sets, Boundary sets and Load sets. Select the desired data and drag it to the Set assignment rule, or drag the Mesh
set, Boundary set and Load set to the activation state.

Be aware that the display format of each set is completely different from the worktree. Here, all mesh sets are displayed as individual mesh
sets, ignoring the relationship between mesh sets and sub-mesh sets in the worktree. Also, the upper most display name is the mesh set name
without the postfix. Expanding one step displays the mesh set name with the postfix.

Refer to the following example.

<Element, Boundary, Load display format>

Set Assignment Rule

Specify the construction stage set used to define the construction stage and specify the assignment rule.

l Set Type

The type of set on which the construction stage will be defined. The user can select between Mesh set, Boundary set or Load set.

l Set Name Prefix

Specify the name without the serial number of the set on which the construction stage will be defined.

For example, if a Mesh set is specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’, select the Set name prefix as ‘‘Final Core #’.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 644 of 1024

l A/R

Select whether to Add or Remove a selected set. A is displayed in green and R is displayed in yellow.

l Start Postfix

Specify the set number of the selected set that is used first in the construction stage.

For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final Core #001’ is removed at the
second construction stage with the other Cores removed in sequence after each step, the first used set number is 001 and so the postfix
can be set as ‘1’.

l F

Check this option on when the selected set is not used until the final number. The user can input the end suffix when checked. If it is not
checked, the set is used sequentially until the final number.

l End Postfix

Specify the set number of the selected set that is used last in the construction stage.

For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final Core #001’ is removed at the
second construction stage with sequential removal until the ‘Final Core #006’, check F and input the postfix 6.

l Postfix Increment

Input the postfix number increment used as the construction stage progresses.

For a Mesh set specified from 'Final Core #001' to 'Final Core #012', if the mesh is removed in order of 'Final Core #001', 'Final Core #003'
and 'Final Core #005' for each construction stage, the postfix increment is 2 and hence, input a postfix spacing of 2.

l Start Stage

Input the stage number first used in the construction stage.

For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final Core #001’ is removed at the
second construction stage with the other Cores removed in sequence after each step, the second stage is first used and so the start
stage is set as 2.

l Stage Increment

Select the stage increment for a selected set that is used every few stages.

For a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’, if the 'Final Core #001' is removed at the second construction stage
and the Final Core #002' is removed at the fourth construction stage, the set is used every 2 stages and so the stage spacing is 2.

[Apply Assignment Rule]

Press this button to display the specified data according to the assignment rule on the Mesh, Boundary, Load set activated state. Press
OK to create the construction stage.

The activated Mesh, Boundary, and Load set can be checked for each stage using the Preview construction stage( ) option. This
function has the same function as Construction stage simulation ( ).

Mesh, Boundary, Load Activation Status

Display the currently specified construction stage on a table.

The construction stage progresses as it moves to the right. The I.S. and S1 on the top of the columns are abbreviations for initial stage and
Stage1, respectively. The added data is displayed in green and the removed data is displayed in orange. Data defined by postfixes are

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 645 of 1024

expressed in each construction stage as numbers. Ddata that does not use a prefix (eg. Ground) are expressed as a line. If the mesh, boundary
condition and load data are dragged onto the menu [Mesh, Boundary, Load Activation Status], the delete setting cannot be conducted and
only additional settings can be conducted.

<Mesh, Boundary, Load display format>

Click the [Apply Assignment Rule] button to display the construction stage on the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status. To delete the
displayed construction stage, select that data cell and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

This method deletes the created construction stage data, but not the construction stage. Hence, a construction stage with no content is
created. Select the whole target column and press the Ctrl and Delete key together to delete the construction stage for the whole column.

The stage where all the mesh sets are activated initially (in-situ state) is when all the mesh sets in the I.S. (initial stage) are activated. This stage
can be specified by entering 0 for start stage (the 0 stage is the initial stage) and 0 for stage spacing (the stage increment number is 0 and
thus all elements are activated in one stage).

The advanced options (LDF etc.) used in the construction stage can be set in the Define Construction Stage menu. Hence for complex models,
it is convenient to use the Construction Stage Wizard to create the framework of the overall construction stages. It is also convenient to use
the [Define Construction Stage] menu to specify the individual options used in each construction stage.

Example

Let us examine a simple example of Construction stage definition.

The construction stage is defined for a tunnel modeled on a homogeneous ground. The entire tunnel shape is excavated at once and the rock
bolts and shotcrete are created in the following stages. The excavation is done in 5 stages. The excavation is assumed to start from the smaller
postfix number and progresses to the larger postfix.

The mesh set is created as follows.

Run the Stage definition wizard.

'Soil' and 'Tunnel#' need to be included in the in-situ state. Select using the Ctrl key and drag & drop into the I.S. column of the Mesh,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 646 of 1024

Boundary, Load activation status.

Start the tunnel excavation.

In this example, the exaction is done stage by stage, starting from the first stage as follows: 1st face tunnel excavation -> 1st face rock
bolt/shotcrete installment -> 2nd tunnel excavation -> 2nd face rock bolt/shotcrete installment -> ….

Select R to select and delete the 'Tunnel#' of the element type, the Start postfix as 1 and do not check F to process until the last number. The
Start stage is 1 and the input is 2 for the Stage spacing to allow for the installation of rock bolts and shotcrete between excavation stages.
Afterwards, click the [Apply Assignment Rules] button to specify the construction stage of the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status.

The shotcrete and rock bolts are also specified on the construction stage.

Input 2 for the Start stage and set as A to create both elements in the second construction stage. Also, input Start postfix 1, do not check F
and input Postfix spacing to use all the numbers from 1 to the final number. Finally, input 2 for the Start stage and Stage spacing to create the
first elements at the second construction stage with two stage spacing between element creation.

Press the [Assign Assignment Rules] button to automatically create the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status and click the [OK] button to
create the construction stage.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 647 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Construction Stage > Construction Stage Set

Construction Stage Set

▒ Overview

Define the Construction stage set for analysis. Used for analyses that incorporate construction stages (Static/Slope analysis,
Seepage/Consolidation analysis, Thermal Analysis).

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 648 of 1024

Define the Construction Stage Set and then define the Construction Stage.

A single file can be composed of multiple Construction stage sets.

The construction stage types are [Stress], [Seepage], [Stress-Seepage-Slope], [Consolidation], [Fully Coupled stress], [Heat Transfer], [Seepage-
Thermal Stress], [Thermal Stress].

Click the Define Construction Stage button to form the construction stage. Advanced options that are not available on the [Stage Definition
Wizard] can be set.

<Define construction stage>

Stage name

Define the construction stage name. Use [New] to create a new construction stage and use [Insert] to add a new construction stage in
between existing stages.

For example, clicking the Insert button at Stage 2 moves the current stage to Stage 3, and the new stage becomes Stage2. Click the button
to move to the previous or next stage.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 649 of 1024

Stage type

Specify the construction stage type. Be aware that the designated [Analysis Control], [Output Control] options are different and the boundary
conditions/loading conditions for each stage type are different.

Refer to the Analysis > Analysis case > General > Analysis/Output Control for more information on control options.

Move to Previous/Next

The construction stage order may need modification when many construction stages are created. Use the Move to Previous or Next button to
change the order of created construction stages.

Time Step

Define time steps used in the analysis.

l Duration

Insert the duration to be analyzed. ‘User Defined Step’ generates steps by dividing with Step Number. ‘Auto Time Step’ automatically
divides defined period with time step.

l Auto Time Step

It will automatically choose appropriate time steps for a seepage, consolidation, semi/fully coupled stress seepage analysis and thermal
analyses.

When the calculation runs smoothly, resulting in very few iterations per step, then the program will choose a larger time step. When the
calculation uses many iterations due to an increasing amount of plasticity, then the program will take smaller time steps.

This function reduces the pore water pressure result errors when loading is applied in short period of time.

l Initial Time Step

Initial Time Step can be either manually defined by user or calculated automatically within solver. The automatic calculation formula is as
follows:

l Max. Pore Pressure Changes per Step

Input Max. Pore Pressure Changes per step. When pore pressure changes exceeds the maximum value, step size is automatically reduced
and analyzed.

l Max. Temperature Changes per Step

Input Max. Temperature Changes per step. When temperature changes exceeds the maximum value, step size is automatically reduced
and analyzed.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 650 of 1024

l Ratio of Max Time Step to Initial

Input the maximum value of time step ratio compared to ‘Initial Critical Time Step’.

l Save Step

Select the output method of results. 'Last Increment': Only output results from last step, 'Every Increment': Output results from all steps.

Set Data

Display the usable Mesh sets, Boundary sets, and Load sets in a worktree. Be aware that the sub-sets are also displayed independently, so take
caution when selecting the mesh sets.

For example, the set data for the created Core mesh set with registered mesh sub-sets (Core 001, Core 002, Core 003) are shown in the right
figure. In this case, activating Core does not activate the mesh sub-sets Core 001, Core 002, Core 003. Hence, mesh sets that are not registered
directly on the set data are useless.

Activated Data

Register the activated sets for each construction stage. The activated sets remain active for future construction stages without needing re-
activation until it is deactivated. The sets that need to be activated for the construction stage can be selected using the left mouse button and
dragged & dropped into the activated data. Another method is to select the sets using the right mouse button on the Set data and select
activate on the Context menu.

Deactivated data

Register the deactivated set for each construction stage. The deactivated sets remain active for future construction stages until they are re-
activated. The sets that need to be deactivated for the construction stage can be selected using the left mouse button and dragged &
dropped into [Deactivated data]. Another method is to select the sets using the right mouse button on [Set data] and select deactivate on the
Context menu.

Define Water Level For Global

Input the groundwater level that changes according to the construction stage with respect to the GCS. Click to set the ground water level
function. If the water level and function are both specified, the input water level is multiplied onto the function and applied on the analysis.

Define Water Level for Mesh Set

Define the groundwater level that changes according to the construction stage for each mesh set.

If the groundwater layer is surrounded by rocks or an impermeable clay layer (confined aquifer), the presence/absence of the groundwater
level for each ground layer can be set for analysis.

If the total groundwater level is input and a mesh set has a defined groundwater level, the mesh set groundwater level has priority and the
total groundwater level is applied to mesh sets that do not have a defined level.

If the water level and function are both specified, the input water level is multiplied onto the function and applied on the analysis.

LDF

Set the Load Distribution Factor. The sum of all distribution factors need to be 1, and the keyboard Enter key needs to be pressed after the
input to apply the value properly.

For the example case shown below, a LDF of 0.4 is applied to the current stage and a LDF of 0.3 is applied to the next stage and the
subsequent stage. Here, the LDF does not need to be checked for the latter two stages and the LDFs need to be set such that they do not

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 651 of 1024

overlap in the construction stages.

The application method of the Load Distribution Factor is as follows:

The LDF keeps track of the Internal Forces of a deleted element and loads it in stages according to the factor assigned for each construction
stage, rather than loading it at once.

When applying the LDF on the top and bottom simultaneously, the factors need to be set such that they do not overlap in the construction
stages. If the LDFs overlap as shown below, when calculating the internal forces of this stage, the 0.5 on the bottom element released in STG
#5 releases the stress using the internal force of the bottom element, created by the 0.7 on the top element defined in STG #4. Hence, the 1.0
on the top element of STG #4 is not released and so, the internal force for the 0.3 on top is not taken into account for analysis. (Very
Confusing)

Part STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6

Top 0.3 0.4 0.3 -
Bottom - - 0.5 0.5

STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6

Hence, be careful not to overlap the LDFs in the construction stage, as shown below.

Part STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6 STG #7

Top 0.3 0.4 0.3 - -
Bottom - - - 0.5 0.5

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 652 of 1024

Clear Displacement

Set the displacement of an analysis result in the current stage as 0. It is used to set the initial conditions of the in-situ state. The stress is not
reset to 0.

Slope Stability (SRM/SAM)

Decide whether to conduct the slope stability analysis (SRM) in the current construction stage. If this option is checked, it is automatically
registered as an analysis case and analysis is conducted. In other words, the ground stress from the non-linear analysis results in the previous
stage is coupled and slope stability analysis is conducted. (However for SAM analysis, it is only applicable for 2D analysis and the boundary
conditions of the virtual slip surface needs to be set.)

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Construction Stage > Simulate Construction Stage

Simulate Construction Stage

▒ Overview

Check the defined construction stage as a video. It can be used in analyses that incorporate construction stages (Static/Slope analysis,
Seepage/Consolidation analysis).

▒ Methodology

Specify the defined construction stage set and click the button to play the construction stage video. The video is created by capturing the
whole work screen. Unwanted frames can be inserted if a different dialog box is open above the model.

Check the [Mesh],[Load] and [Boundary] to check the activated/deactivated data of the construction stage.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 653 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Construction Stage > Volume Data Export

Volume Data Export

▒ Overview

The volume data of 1D/2D/3D elements defined to the construction stage is exported to excel file. This shows the length/area/volume of activated/deactivated set for stages. This doesn’t
apply for the other element types (point spring, matrix spring, free field, interface, shell interface, pile tip, elastic link, rigid link, user supplied behavior for shell interface, mass).

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Define Set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 654 of 1024

Define Set

▒ Overview

Define the boundary condition set.

▒ Methodology

Input the name and specification and click [Add] to define the boundary condition set. The boundary
condition set can be input beforehand, and the name of each boundary condition can be entered when it is
generated.

The registered boundary condition set is automatically registered under Worktree > Analysis > Boundary
Condition and the checkbox is used to show or hide the set.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Constraint

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 655 of 1024

Constraint

▒ Overview

Set the constraint conditions of a model.

▒ Methodology

Auto generation of self weight and boundary condition

The methods for setting a constraint condition of a model are Basic, Advanced and Auto.

Basic

Select the target and assign a [Fixed], [Pinned] or [No Rotation] that fits the behavior of the analysis model.

Advanced

The 6 degrees of freedom of a node can be fully or partially constrained.

Tx, Ty, Tz are the displacement constraints in the x, y, z direction and Rx, Ry, Rz are the rotational constraints in the x, y, z direction.

The constraint conditions can be input for a desired boundary condition (Point, Edge, Face, Node, Free face node).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 656 of 1024

The constraint conditions are assigned to the element node and reflected in the analysis. Setting the constraint conditions on a point, edge,
face etc. is a convenient method of selecting element nodes included in the selected geometry shape

Auto

Select the target mesh set to automatically create constraint conditions. The ground conditions for general stress analysis are set
automatically. The x direction displacement is constrained for the left/right side, the y direction displacement is constrained for the front/back
side and the x,y direction displacement is constrained for the bottom of a model.

Boundary set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

Symmetric and inverse symmetric constraints

Boundary conditions can be largely divided into two conditions;

1. Constraint conditions of the analysis target are specified

2. Symmetry of the structure is used to analyze the symmetric area only, not the entire model.

Applying symmetry is a very effective way to increase the convenience of modeling and decrease the analysis time. If the geometry of the
structure and loading is symmetrical, a 1/2 model or 1/4 model can be used to decrease the number of elements and create an economic
model that reduces analysis time. However, constraints exist when checking the deformed shape or stress distribution for the entire model
because the analysis results from the symmetric model cannot be shown on the entire model. Here, use the View symmetric model function
on the Additional view control toolset to expand the analysis results of the 1/2 or 1/4 model onto the entire model.

l How to apply symmetric boundary conditions

If one or more of the geometry shapes, materials, loads or boundary conditions is symmetrical about a plane or axis, the symmetric boundary
condition can be used. The View symmetric model function can output, expand a 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 symmetric model onto the entire model. To
assign a symmetric boundary condition, a boundary condition needs to be set such that the structure does not invade the symmetry plane.

The figure below is an example of symmetric constraint conditions applied to a solid model. To apply the symmetric constraint conditions in
the YZ plane, the Translation degree of freedom Tx is constrained. For the XY plane, the Tz needs to be constrained and for the ZX plane, the
Ty needs to be constrained.

Because Solid elements do not have a rotational degree of freedom, only the displacement boundary condition of the symmetric model is
constrained. However, the rotational degree of freedom needs to be constrained for a Shell model such that the symmetry plane is not
invaded. In other words, Tx,Ry,Rz need to be constrained for the XY plane, Tz,Rx,Ry for the XY plane and Ty,Rx,Rz for the ZX plane.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 657 of 1024

When applying a symmetric boundary condition, the loading size needs to be converted to fit the symmetric condition. Also, the symmetric
condition cannot be applied to the model shape and buckling shape because of the asymmetric vibration mode or the possibility of
asymmetric buckling.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Constraint Equation

Constraint Equation

▒ Overview

Constrain the degree of freedom such that a particular node is dependent on the behavior of another node.

▒ Methodology

Constrain the behavior of one node to the behavior of another node. Define the main node that
affects the deformation of another node and degree of freedom [Constrained Node/DOF]. TX, TY,
TZ are the degrees of freedom for displacement and RX, RY, RZ are the degrees of freedom for
rotation. [Independent Node/DOF] inputs the coefficient applied on the displacement of the
independent node, to define the degree of freedom and interrelationship between the dependent
node.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of
the boundary set.

The behavioral characteristics are similar to Mesh > Element > Create > Other > Rigid link. For
example, when the main node moves by a certain distance, the dependent node can be constrained
such that it moves by twice that length. When creating a complex interrelationship between two or
more nodes, the constraint equation can be used.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 658 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Change Property

Change Property

▒ Overview

Apply a new attribute data or substitute an existing attribute data for an element that changes with the construction stage. It can be used in
construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis).

▒ Methodology

General

Select the target element and specify the element property subject to change.

Construction Stage

If the construction stage is specified, change the element property collectively.

For example, apply a stage by stage change in the material property of shotcrete, from ductile to
hardening, of a 3D model. If the mesh set is already specified by shotcrete 001 ~ shotcrete 010, the
boundary conditions for element property change need to be specified separately for each element
when using Change property > General. However, for Change property > Construction stage,
selecting shotcrete 001 ~ shotcrete 010 can create 10 boundary condition sets with just one click.

The name of the boundary condition set can be specified by [Replace substring of selected Mesh],
[Fixed Prefix] and [Add Prefix] to collectively change the name of the created mesh sets. If nothing is
input, the boundary condition set is created with the same name as the mesh set.

[Replace substring of selected Mesh] : Create a boundary condition set by using a different postfix
on the selected mesh set name.

[Fixed Prefix] : Create a boundary condition set by adding a different prefix, instead of using the
selected mesh set name.

[Add Prefix] : Create a boundary condition set by adding a prefix to the selected mesh set name.

Boundary set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

[Change Property] can be used when the element properties change with the construction stage. If the ground has a property A in Stage 1
and that property changes to B in Stage 2, which then changes to property C in Stage 3, the following two boundary conditions are created.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 659 of 1024

Boundary condition 1 : A -> B

Boundary condition 2 : A -> C (should be B -> C instead?)

Using Define construction stage, activate Boundary condition 1 in Stage 2 and for Stage 3, activate Boundary condition 2 and deactivate
Boundary condition 1.

As a result, an element property that changes by A->B->C can be defined.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Review

Review

▒ Overview

Conduct iterative calculations using the Review function when the exact seepage line is hard to find. Review is used as a boundary condition
for Seepage/Consolidation analysis(Fully-Coupled).

▒ Methodology

Select the points upon which to place the Review boundary.

For example, assuming that seepage occurs at the downstream face of a homogeneous dam, the seepage line intersecting the downstream
face cannot be found. In this case, set the review boundary and conduct iterative calculations.

<Specify Review boundary node (ex.) >

The target can be selected from [Node], [Edge], [Face], [Free Face Node].

For [Node], the node is directly selected to define the node on which iterative calculation will be conducted. Selecting [Edge] or [Face]
conducts the review for all nodes in the geometry shape.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 660 of 1024

For [Free Face Node], select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-containing element at an angle smaller than the
specified angle selected. Press the button to select the reference node, target element and feature angle.

The pore pressure P measured at the re-examined node is considered as the following condition, and these two roles can be used to
automatically search for the seepage surface.

1) When P > 0, Consider as P=0

2) Delete when P < 0

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Water Level

Water Level

▒ Overview

Create a changing groundwater level by selecting a geometry shape on the work screen.

▒ Methodology

Auto generation of 3D Water level

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 661 of 1024

Edge

Methodology

Create a changing groundwater level by selecting edges.

Specify the axis direction of the changing variable. For example, if the groundwater level changes in
the x direction of the model, select the variable axis as x. Then input the spacing value. For example,
if the spacing is 1m, the groundwater level lines are created in 1m intervals.

The created water level is registered under Worktree > Analysis > Function > General function and
can be edited as a table using right mouse click > Edit.

Face

Select a face and input the spacing value to create a changing groundwater level.

The created water level is registered under Worktree > Analysis > Function > General function and
can be edited as a table using right mouse click > Edit.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Nodal Head

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 662 of 1024

Nodal Head

▒ Overview

Input the head of the model. Both the constant head value for steady state analysis and the changing head value for Transient analysis can
be entered by applying the Seepage boundary condition function. The Nodal head is used as a boundary condition for Seepage/Consolidation
analysis (Fully-Coupled).

▒ Methodology

Directly input the head value of a specific point. The target can be selected from [Node], [Edge],
[Face], [Free Face Node].

For [Node], the node is directly selected to define the head condition. Selecting [Edge] or [Face]
defines the head condition at all nodes in the selected line/face.

For [Free Face Node], select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-
containing element at an angle smaller than the specified angle. Press to open the Free
face/line entity selection window to select the target.

There are two input methods:

1. [Total] : Input the head value calculated from the origin, regardless of the model position.

2. [Pressure] : Set the groundwater level condition by entering '0' for nodes that are on the
groundwater surface.

Transient analysis, in which the water level changes with time, can be defined as a function.

When using a function, the input value and function value are multiplied and reflected in the
analysis.

The defined function is registered under Function > Seepage Boundary Function, and can be edited
as a table using right mouse click > Edit.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 663 of 1024

If Total Head < Pressure Head, then Q = 0

A head-flow rate conversion boundary condition for water level variation analysis.

As the water level changes with time, such as for rapid drawdown, suction can occur and the
seepage flow can be reversed. If the water level falls suddenly for embankments or dams, the
descending water level speed is generally faster than the seepage speed within the body. To
simulate these real conditions, the head boundary conditions need to change automatically
according to the water level. In other words, when the node boundary at the bottom of the water
level is exposed to the top, the total nodal head is not the total head of the descended water level; it
is the total head value before the descent, which is maintained for a certain period, after which it
falls gradually with time.

This option can be applied where the water level changes periodically and can be applied
simultaneously with a time variant function. However, if this option is checked when the input (total
head) height of the water level is above the selected node position, the boundary condition is
automatically eliminated and so, the option must be unchecked for this case.

Boundary condition set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary condition set. The user can specify
the name of the boundary condition set.

The nodal head is applied then the water level position is known in advance. It is used to simulate confined flow that does not form a phreatic
surface. It is also used to simulate unconfined flow that creates a seepage face.

The head boundary conditions can be selectively input between the Total Head and Pressure Head, depending on the analysis condition. As
shown in the figure below, it is convenient to input the Total Head directly when the node position for boundary condition specification is
easy to find from Z=0 on the GCS. However, if the exact height is hard to find or if the height changes, it is convenient to input the Pressure
head as 0.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 664 of 1024

<Application of Nodal Head(ex.)>

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Nodal Flux

Nodal Flux

▒ Overview

Input the flux at an arbitrary node. The nodal flux is a boundary condition used in Seepage/Consolidation analysis (Fully-Coupled).

▒ Methodology

Input the inflow/outflow per unit time on a particular position in terms of volumetric units. The target can be selected from [Node], [Edge],
[Face], [Free Face Node].

For [Node], the node is directly selected to define the nodal flux. Selecting [Edge] or [Face] defines the flow rate conditions at all nodes in the
selected edge/face.

For [Free Face Node], select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-containing element at an angle smaller than the
specified angle selected. Press the button to select the reference node, target element and feature angle.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 665 of 1024

Transient analysis (where the water level changes with time) can be defined as a function.

When using a function, the input value and function value are multiplied and reflected in the analysis.

The defined function is registered under Function > Seepage Boundary Function, and can be edited as a table using right mouse click > Edit.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

The nodal flux boundary condition is used to simulate the inflow and outflow that happens at a node. The (+) represents water flow into the
node and (-) represents water flow out of the node. The time variant - flux boundary condition can be input by coupling with a seepage
function.

<Application of Nodal Flux>

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Surface Flux

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 666 of 1024

Surface Flux

▒ Overview

Input the surface flux boundary condition in terms of flow rate per unit area. The surface flux is a boundary condition used in
Seepage/Consolidation analysis (Fully-Coupled).

▒ Methodology

Input the surface inflow/outflow rate of a specific point in terms of flow rate per unit area. It can be
defined as either an [Edge Flux] or [Face Flux]. Generally, the [Edge Flux] is input for 2D models and
[Face Flux] is input for 3D models.

The Face flux can be defined by entering the value on the edge or surface geometry, or directly
entering it on the selected element edge.

Define the inflow input from rainfall etc. as a (+) value and define the outflow input from excavation
or pumping etc. as a (-) value.

Transient analysis (where the water level changes with time) can be defined as a [Function].

When using a function, the input value and function value are multiplied and reflected in the
analysis.

The defined function is registered under Function > Seepage Boundary Function, and can be edited
as a table using the right mouse click > Edit.

Rainfall Data can be inputted into GTS NX in the form of Surface Flux, this can be also be extended
to certain nodes in case if a small portion is considered instead of total area. The application of
rainfall data as surface flux is illustrated below:

Amount of Rainfall - 100 mm/hr ~ 0.028 mm/sec ~ 2.8e-5 m/sec

3
The flux data input is discharge per unit area can be interpreted as Q/m2 ( Discharge Q = m /sec),
when Q is divided per unit area, it gives the height of the rain column that is falling in that area as
post application of dimensional analysis, the flux input becomes m/sec. Hence, you can enter the
rainfall data as described before directly as 2.8e-5 m/sec. The distance inputs can also be changed
into mm or cm and the time inputs into hours or days. Using the seepage boundary function, one
can also enter the rainfall data distribution as available from the meteorological data.

If q > Ksat, then Total Head = Pressure Head

The flux-head boundary conversion condition for rainfall analysis.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 667 of 1024

For example, the Surface flux can be used to define the ground surface boundary conditions when
the rainfall intensity on the ground surface is inputted.

This function applies a forced inflow rate, as large as the rainfall intensity, onto the ground surface.
If the absorption capability of the soil stratum surface is larger than the rainfall intensity, the soil
stratum absorbs all the rain water. However if the absorption capability is smaller, rain is absorbed
into the ground surface by only the absorption capability amount, and the rest of the rain flows
across the ground surface.

If the rainfall intensity is larger than the absorption capability, the ground surface is in a saturated
state during rainfall, as if the groundwater level existed above the surface. Hence, the area of rainfall
needs to be changed to a water level line.

Use the [If q > Ksat, then Total Head = Pressure Head] option to automatically change the ground
surface boundary from the existing rainfall intensity inflow condition to a water level condition for
analysis. This option is only available when the rainfall intensity acting on the surface is larger than
the absorption capability of the ground surface.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of
the boundary set or create a new boundary set for the recently entered data values.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Draining Condition

Draining Condition

▒ Overview

Used to simulate the domain where the excess pore pressure is 0 (drain). The Drainage condition is used as a boundary condition for
Consolidation analysis.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 668 of 1024

Select the point to assign Drainage conditions.

The target can be selected from [Node], [Edge], [Face], [Free Face Node].

For [Node], the node is directly selected to define the node on which the Drainage conditions will be assigned. Selecting [Edge] or [Face]
applies Drainage conditions for all nodes in the geometry shape.

For [Free Face Node], select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-containing element at an angle smaller than the
specified angle are selected. Press the button to select the reference node, target element and feature angle.

The excess pore pressure in an area with assigned drainage conditions is maintained as 0 and this implies that water can escape due to
loading applied to the ground. The Drainage condition is mainly used when the permeability coefficient is large, or if the loading change is
small.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Non-Consolidation

Non-Consolidation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 669 of 1024

▒ Overview

Used to model non-consolidation layers. Non-consolidation elements are used as boundary conditions for Consolidation analysis.

▒ Methodology

Select the point to assign the Non-consolidation boundary conditions.

The target can be selected from [Element], [2D Element], [3D Element], [Face], [Part].

Selecting [Face] or [Part] applies the unconsolidated boundary conditions for all elements in the geometry shape.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

In Consolidation analysis, the elements have an additional pore pressure degree of freedom, as well as displacement degree of freedom, at the
nodes. GTS NX assumes all elements have a degree of freedom for pore pressure, unless the two boundary conditions (Non-consolidating
condition, Drainage condition) are specified for consolidation analysis. Hence, for embankment materials that do not express consolidated
behavior directly, the non-consolidating element conditions need to be defined to apply it as a general structural element. Also, the drainage
conditions need to be defined for drainage boundaries in consolidating elements. If the boundary conditions are properly defined and
consolidation analysis is conducted, the excess pore pressure is 0 (zero) where the non-consolidation conditions and drainage conditions are
applied.

<Boundary conditions of a consolidating element>

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Create Boundary from Results

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 670 of 1024

Create Boundary from Results

▒ Overview

The 'Nodal Seepage' is created to the boundary condition from the results of a previously completed analysis, and these results can be
applied in other analysis cases as the boundary condition type.

▒ Methodology

Name

Enter the name for the selected set for results. A single boundary set can have multiple set of results included too.

Result Type

Here select the nodal seepage results from the previous completed analysis case, for the current analysis.

Object Type

The user can select either the nodes or the Free Face Nodes for the Boundary Application.

Analysis Case

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 671 of 1024

Select the specific analysis case to be used for results import.

Step

In case the analysis is conducted in several steps, then the user needs to select the applicable load step with the intended seepage head
results.

Generate Boundary

Generate Total Head results as a boundary on the selected nodes.

NOTE: The relative position of the nodes in the analysis case whose results are used as Boundary and in the new analysis case in which the Head results are
to be used as boundary should be kept same, otherwise it will lead to errors in application of nodal head values and subsequently incorrect calculation
results.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Boundary > Boundary Table Import Export

Boundary Table Import / Export

▒ Overview

Import the information of boundary conditions from excel file or export them to excel. The sample of table for boundary conditions
(BoundaryTable Sample.xlsx) can be found in the installation folder. (ex. C:\Program Files\MIDAS\GTS NX\Sample)

▒ Methodology

There are limitations in this function as follows.

- Constraint : The 'Advanced' type is only supported. The DOFs of 'Tx-Rz' are displayed ‘1’ (check on) or ‘0’ (check off).

- Nodal Head : The 'Total' and 'Pressure' type are separated.

- Nodal Flux : This is exported the same way as the ‘Nodal Head‘ type.

- Review : This is exported only the node information.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 672 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Self Weight

Self Weight

▒ Overview

Enter the self-weight of elements included in the model as applied loads, or modify or delete previously entered self-weight. The computed
self-weight can be applied in each GCS X, Y and Z direction as a body force for static analysis. When considering the effects of self-weight in
dynamic analysis computations, the option can be considered through the Project Setting function.

▒ Methodology

Input the factor for the self-weight application direction in Project settings depending on the work
environment (2D/3D). The volume, density and gravitational acceleration of the input element is
used to automatically compute the self-weight included in the analysis model. The self-weight
direction is defined by a unit vector. The default value for the gravitational direction is set as -1.

[Spatial Distribution]

The ‘Generalized Space Function’ can be applied in the ‘Self Weight’. The input of ‘Generalized Space
Function’ is applied by scaling according to the location.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 673 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Force Moment

Force/Moment

▒ Overview

Apply the Force or Moment load on an element node. Force is one of the most fundamental loads and it can be specified by 3 force
components and a moment for each node. The direction can be defined with reference to an arbitrary coordinate system.

▒ Methodology

Select the node where the load will be applied and set the size and direction. The load direction can
be set using Default Load or Reference Object Load methods. For Default Load, the x, y, z,
components are input with reference to the coordinate system in the bottom right corner. For
Reference Object Load, select the target and reference shape to set the load direction. If the
reference shape is a line, the component direction is set in the line creation direction. If the
reference shape is a surface, the normal direction to the surface becomes the z component direction
and the left, right directions become the x, y component directions.

If the selected target shape is geometric, the Force can be selected as either a total force or
individual loads in Load Type as shown below. For total force, the input load size is considered as
the total force acting on the selected line/surface and is distributed evenly to all nodes. For
individual loads, the input load size is applied to all nodes of the selected line/surface.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 674 of 1024

<Total force / Individual load processing>

The total force is distributed according to the length or area ratio when two or more targets are
selected and the individual load is applied to each selected target.

[Object]

The applied load is defined on the node, but the selection target can also be set as a geometry
shape (edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes. For an edge or surface, the selected
shape must have been used for element creation and the force is applied to all nodes in the
specified direction/size. For free face nodes, select a free face node and all points that make contact
with the node-containing element at an angle smaller than the specified angle (feature angle) will
automatically be selected.

[Reference Object]

The load direction can be set using different methods. The reference coordinate system is the global
rectangular(cylindrical) coordinate axis. Geometry shapes (edge and surface) can be selected as a
reference direction. Selecting edge or surface displays the coordinate system of the selected shape
and the load is set with reference to that system. The vector is used to specify the load direction
using X,Y,Z vector components. The tangent direction can only be selected for surface objects and
automatically sets the direction in the tangent direction of the selected surface.

[Components]

Input the load size according to the set direction. A positive (+) value applies the load in the set
direction and a negative (-) value applies the load in the direction opposite of the set. The load size
changes with respect to the coordinate value increase in the GCS can be defined using a reference
function. Here, the input value is multiplied by the function value for application.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Displacement

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 675 of 1024

Displacement

▒ Overview

Input the displacement at an element node. The displacement is used to assign a displacement to a particular node. It is classified as a load
because it causes structural deformation, but it has similar characteristics as the boundary condition. For example, constraint forces occur on
the node where the displacement is input. The input displacement acts in the node coordinate system direction, which is defined by the GCS
by default. The displacement is useful when applying the measured displacement in analysis or when understanding the plastic (limit) state of
the element.

▒ Methodology

Select the node where the displacement will be applied and set the size and direction. The target
selection method and size/direction settings are as follows:

[Object]

The applied displacement is defined on the node, but the selection target can also be set as a
geometry shape (edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes. For an edge or surface, the
selected shape must have been used for element creation and the displacement is applied to all
nodes in the specified direction/size. For free face nodes, select a free face node and all points that
make contact with the node-containing element at an angle smaller than the specified angle
(feature angle) are automatically selected.

[Components]

Input the displacement size according to the set direction. A positive (+) value applies the
displacement in the set direction and a negative (-) value applies the displacement in the opposite
direction to the set direction. The size change with respect to the coordinate value increase in the
GCS can be defined using a reference function. Here, the input value is multiplied by the function
value for application.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 676 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Pressure

Pressure

▒ Overview

Input the pressure loads on the face or edge of a plate element, plane stress element or solid element. Uniform load and linearly/non-
linearly distributed loads can all be defined. The pressure load acts on the target geometric surface in a linearly/non-linearly distributed form
per unit area and hence, the units are [Force/Area]. Because it is the force per unit area, it is applied to all selected target surfaces equally. The
pressure is differ with the Force because the Force is using unit [N] and the force is loaded as nodal loads at sub-nodes generated at the
selected geometric surface.

Because the Pressure load considers the area of the target surface (element surface) and is automatically converted as a nodal load for
analysis, the two load conditions do not have a difference in analysis results. The more convenient load, depending on the applied direction,
can be selected and used from the concentrated/distributed load option given in Analysis Condition.

▒ Methodology

The pressure is input in distributed force form for an element face or edge. It can be used on 2D or
3D elements and the input direction can be specified as an arbitrary coordinate axis direction,
arbitrary vector direction or normal direction. The direction setting is the same as for [Force].
Uniform load size or linearly/non-linearly distributed load size can all be specified as shown below,
and the load change can be defined using a function of coordinate direction/distance. When
applying a function, the input value is multiplied by the function value for application as a total load.

<Pressure acting on each element (target)>

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Water Pressure

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 677 of 1024

Water Pressure

▒ Overview

A function that automatically calculates and applies the water pressure on an element boundary line or surface.

▒ Methodology

Select the element boundary edge or surface where the water pressure will be applied. The [Auto]
option can be used when the water level is pre-set, and it is used to automatically calculate the
hydrostatic pressure based on the height difference between the water level and element
boundary edge/surface. Use the [Manual] option to directly specify the water pressure size applied
on the selected element edge/surface.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Beam load

Beam load

▒ Overview

Concentrated and distributed force(moment) can be applied with reference to the GCS or the beam element coordinate system. Linear beam
load can be used when multiple beam elements are connected continuously. Both ends of the beam element can be specified and a
continuous beam load can be applied as either a distributed load or force load. The load can also be applied to a continuous beam placed in a

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 678 of 1024

curve on the same plane as the loading direction. For a beam element load, the beam load is applied as a distributed or force on the singular
beam element.

▒ Methodology

[Object]

For beam elements, select the beam element directly or select the line used to create the element to
apply a load. For continuous beam loads, the On Load Application Line Method or Select Element
Method can be used.

The [On the Loading Line] command applies the load to elements placed on the line between the
two points used to specify the continuous beam load. In this case, selecting two nodes sequentially
inputs the load for elements existing on the line between the two points. For the [Selected Element]
command, the load is applied to the selected element. It can be used to apply the continuous beam
load on elements that are not placed on the line. Select the start and end points of the beam
element on which the load will be applied.

[Direction]

The direction can be set with reference to the global coordinate system (X,Y,Z) or element
coordinate system (x,y,z). The projected area can be additionally set, which specifies whether to
apply the load on the total beam element within the load application section, or to apply the load
by the projected length, perpendicular to the load application direction. This option is only valid for
[Distributed] loads in directions with respect to the global coordinate system (GCS).

[Value (Fraction/Length)]

l Fraction: Input the continuous beam load position using a relative length ratio of the load
application section.

l Length: Input the actual length as the reference for the continuous beam load position.

x1 and x2 are the start and end points of the beam load respectively and w1,w2 are the load size at
points x1,x2. Entering a negative load size applies the load in the opposite direction to the set
direction, and a linearly distributed (increment, decrement) load can be set using the size difference.

<Apply linear beam load >

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Prestress

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 679 of 1024

Prestress

▒ Overview

Used to input the prestress load. For truss/beam elements, the initial load for axial direction force and moment can be applied. For plane
strain elements, axis symmetric elements and solid elements, the initial stress can be defined.

For truss/beam elements, the [Pretension Type] option can be applied. Checking this option maintains the input pretension regardless of the
stress state changes that occur in the construction stage. If this option is unchecked, the prestress changes with the input stress state. If a
prestress of 50 is input as shown in the figure below, checking [Pretension Type] retains the prestress as the axial force, regardless of the stress
change due to excavation. If the pretension is not checked, the axial force is affected by the stress change of 10 due excavation and so, the
output axial force is 40. Pretension can only be applied if the prestress is input for a truss element type.

▒ Methodology

[Element Type]

The applicable element types are as follows and the input load component is different for each type.
The target shape can be selected by directly selecting the element or geometry shape (edge, face,
solid). For shapes, the selected shape must have been used for element creation and the input load
is applied to all element nodes within the shape.

[Components]

Define the load or stress for each axial direction and use a function to simulate the linear
increment/decrement of the load size with reference to the global coordinate system(GCS). The load
components for different element types are as follows:

l Nxx : Initial axial force acting on 1D element

l Mx, My, Mz : Bending force (moment load) with reference to each element coordinate system

l Sxx, Syy, Szz : Axial stress in each axial direction

l Sxy, Syz, Szx : Shear stress in each plane direction

The load application direction for the initial stress of Plane/Axis Symmetric/Solid elements can be
set with reference to the GCS or element coordinate system.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Initial Equilibrium Force

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 680 of 1024

Initial Equilibrium Force

▒ Overview

Use the prestress function to apply the resultant force or stress as initial conditions, depending on the element type. If the initial stress state
is given as such, a force corresponding to the initial stress occurs. This initial equilibrium force uses the force created by the initial stress from
the prestress function as an external force. If additional external forces do not exist, the initial equilibrium force is in equilibrium with the initial
stress, hence the initial state is maintained. Also, use the [Self-Weight Consideration] option to assume the initial stress to be caused by
gravity. If this assumption is applied, the load distribution factor considering the self weight of the element is applied when the element is
removed from the construction stage.

▒ Methodology

[Element Type]

The applicable element types are as follows and the input load component is different for each type.
The target shape can be selected by directly selecting the element or geometry shape (edge, face,
solid), depending on the selected element type. For shapes, the selected shape must have been
used for element creation and the input load is applied to all element nodes within the shape.

[Components]

Define the load or stress for each axial direction and use a function to simulate the linear
increment/decrement of the load size with reference to the global coordinate system (GCS). The
load components for different element types are as follows:

l Nxx : Initial axial force acting on 1D element

l Mx, My, Mz : Bending force (moment load) with reference to each element coordinate system

l Sxx, Syy, Szz : Axial stress in each axial direction

l Sxy, Syz, Szx : Shear stress in each plane direction

The load application direction for the initial stress of Plane/Axis symmetric/Solid elements can be set
with reference to the GCS or element coordinate system.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Load Set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 681 of 1024

Load Set

▒ Overview

The load conditions can be classified as sets. It is useful to create the load set in advance for easy classification of data such as mesh sets,
boundary sets, etc, during analysis. When entering the actual loads, the loads can be inputted individually by entering their names. If the load
set is already classified, a particular factor can be assigned to each load set to create a combined load.

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Combined Load Set

Combined Load Set

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 682 of 1024

Create a combined load set by combining existing load sets. A factor can be assigned to each load set and the combined load is created
with respect to these load factors. It is generally used when creating a load combination according to the design code.

▒ Methodology

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Contraction

Contraction

▒ Overview

Consider shrinkage or simulate a volume loss around a lining of TBM tunnel. It can be applied by selecting beam/shell elements in 2D/3D
model.

▒ Methodology

The ‘Contraction’ is for the shrinkage in the circumferential direction of tunnel and the
‘Contraction Inc.’ is for the shrinkage in the excavation direction of 3D tunnel. The ‘Rep. Depth’
is for the reference depth to calculate the shrinkage in the excavation direction of 3D tunnel. To
specify this contraction, a contraction value is defined as a strain value in percentage.

Modeling Precautions

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 683 of 1024

1. Contraction can only be applied to circular tunnels (bores tunnels) with an active continuous
homogeneous lining. (If the selected elements are closure, contraction can be applied even
though non-circular tunnels, but it is unable to get the correct results.)

2. In case of shell elements in 3D model, the coordinate system needs to be aligned that the
excavation direction is the Element CSys-X to calculate the excavation length automatically.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Load Table Import,Export

Load Table Import / Export

▒ Overview

Define or modify load sets through excel file like the usage of Load Table.

Users can import the amounts of load sets from excel file and export defined load sets (node/element number, magnitude, and direction) to
excel. The sample of table for load sets (LoadTable Sample.xlsx) can be found in the installation folder. (ex. C:\Program Files\MIDAS\GTS
NX\Sample)

Force, Moment, Pressure, Prescribed Displacement and Element Beam Load are available to use this function.

Can be useful when users have to manage (input and modify) large numbers of load sets at once.

▒ Methodology

There are limitations in this function as follows.

- Force / Moment : GCS (Global Coordinate System) is only applicable to import and export.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 684 of 1024

- Pressure : Axisymmetric type is not available. In case that users select Geometries (Edge, Face) to define load sets, these load sets cannot be
detected when exporting load sets to excel, meaning that users must select element nodes or faces to define pressure load. In terms of
direction, "Normal" and "Direction" are available.

- Only one excel file can communicate with GTSNX at the same time.

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Load > Prescribed Strain

Prescribed Strain

▒ Overview

The prescribed strain is served as the boundary condition for the volume loss from Jet-grouting, compensation grouting and strain of rock.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 685 of 1024

Element Type;

Truss/Embedded Truss

Beam/Embedded Beam

Shell

Plane Strain/Plane Stress

Axisymmetric

Solid

Strain Component;

To apply volumetric strain to 3 directions (xx, yy, zz)

Applying to Solid Model for Example;

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 686 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Seepage Consolidation Analysis > Options > Options

Options

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Set the general environment of the program. The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary
Condition, Analysis/Results.

▒ Methodology

General

[General]

l Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.

l License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web Authorization method are supported.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 687 of 1024

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

[Graphic]

l Work View : Set the options for the screen.

- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.

- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder shaped curved surface. The available levels are
from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and smoother surface as the level gets higher.

- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work window during view rotation.

l Selection : Specify the options for the model part.

l Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.

l Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.

l Element : Specify the color for each element type.

l Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show the shadow and controls its shade. The
available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information shown as the level gets higher.

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]

l Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.

l Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]

l Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.

l Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol 3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z
axis respectively.

[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.

[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.

[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.

[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol.

Analysis/Results

[Analysis]

l Number of processors : Specify the number of CPUs used for analysis. For a dual core CPU, input 2 processors and for a quad core CPU,
input 4 processors to increase the analysis speed.

l Element Formulation : Specify the formula applied to the element.

In terms of speed, a faster solution can be obtained in order of Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability) > Hybrid (Accuracy). In terms
of accuracy, a more accurate solution can be obtained in order of Hybrid (Accuracy) > Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability).

l Equation Solver (Structural) : Specify the method for solving a finite element simultaneous equation. If the setting is automatic, the
program automatically determines one of the following methods: Multifrontal, Dense matrix or AMG(Algebraic Multi-Grid).

l 2D Element Setting (Structure) : The [Unique Shell Normal Generation] function judges two adjacent shell elements to have two different
normal directions when the value between the normal direction vectors are larger than the input value. Because the element size is

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 688 of 1024

relatively larger than the curvature, if this value is increased for a rough curved mesh, a smooth contour that considers the curvature of
the geometry shape can be calculated.
The [Consider Drilling DOF(degree of freedom)] option calculates the stiffness of the in-plane deformation by considering the rotation
about the out-plane axis (drilling degree of freedom).

[Result]

l General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default value is set as 1e-12, and results lower
than this value is considered as 0.

l Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.

l Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to represent the vectors.

l Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.

l No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.

l Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.

l Graph : Select whether to show the graph.

l Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.

l Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Section Property

Section Property

▒ Overview

The section material properties need to be defined for a 1 dimensional truss, embedded truss or beam element. Here, the truss and
embedded truss only need the cross-sectional area but the beam needs other material properties such as total cross section, torsional rigidity,
first area moment of inertia and second area moment of inertia to consider torsion, bend and shear.

The thickness of the element needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1 and the user can define the used units according to the thickness.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. Here, the plate element has a
rotor float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 689 of 1024

1D element

1D element is an element that is made up of 2(primary) or 3(secondary) nodes and has the geometric property of length. Because 3D shapes
are expressed as 1D elements, the section (size, shape) needs to be defined and this is modeled as a 2D element for calculations.

GTS NX provides various shapes, as shown in the figure below. The position can also be set when defining the sectional properties.

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 690 of 1024

QUAD-4 6400개 QUAD-4 3400개 QUAD-4 1700개

<Solid square> <H section> <Channel>

<Automatic section modeling >

<Solid Rectangle> <Solid Round> <Pipe>

<Box> <T-section> <H-section>

<Channel> <Angle> <Cross>

<I-section> <Channel 1> <Hat>

<Section shape and size specification>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 691 of 1024

1D element SRC Section

<SRC Section DB>

SRC(Steel Reinforced Concrete) can be defined under 1D element(truss, beam, embedded truss, embedded beam).

It has added SRC-Box, SRC-Pipe, Sect-HBeam, Circle-HBeam in the section of 1D element. User can define the section selecting the database
of steel and concrete, elastic modulus of steel will use for calculation.

Steel Data: Input the parameter of steel section or selecting the section from database.

Concrete Data: Input the outer dimensions of section for steel concrete

Material: Select the material for SRC or input the parameters. The parameters will be inputted automatically selecting the database from [Select Material from DB…].

Es/Ec: Elastic ratio between steel and concrete

Ds/Dc: Deadweight ratio between steel and concrete

Ps: Poisson’s ratio of steel

Pc: Poisson’s ratio of concrete

Conv. Stiffness Factor: Stiffness reduction factor of concrete (default=1.0) for SRC section

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 692 of 1024

2D element

2D elements are Triangles or Quadrilaterals with the geometric property of area. Because 3D shapes are expressed as 2D elements, the
thickness needs to be defined. The thickness can be set the same or tapered.

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

3D element

3D elements are Tetrahedron or Hexahedrons, Bricks with the geometric property of volume.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 693 of 1024

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

Cross sectional area (A)

The cross sectional area is used to calculate the axial stiffness when a tensile or axial force acts on the member or the stress on a member. The
calculations for the H section are as follows.

There are 2 methods to calculate the cross sectional area in the GTS NX. The first method uses the provided database to input the dimensions
of a section and automatically calculate the area. For the second method, the user calculates the area directly and inputs the value. The first
method is convenient, but because it does not consider the decrease in area due to bolts in the connection or rivet holes, the area entered
using the second method may provide more accurate results.

<Example of cross sectional area calculation>

Torsional stiffness (I )
xx

The torsional stiffness resists the torsional moment and is expressed as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 694 of 1024

Here, : Torsional stiffness,

: Torsional moment or torque,

: Torsional angle (angle of twist),

: Shear modulus

The torsional stiffness is the stiffness that resists the torsional moment and is different from the polar moment of inertia that decides the shear
stress due to torsion. (However, the 2 are the same when considering a circular cross-section or a thick cylindrical section)

The torsional stiffness can be calculated from Saint-Venant's principle as shown below.

is the warping function that can be calculated using the Finite element method as shown below.

Because , the torsional stiffness comp1nt is expressed as the following equation.

Effective shear area (Asy, Asz )

The effective shear area is needed to calculate the shear stiffness that resists the shear force acting on the y axis or z axis of the element
coordinate system. If the effective shear area is not entered, the shear strain in that direction is ignored.

Here, : Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

When the interior section material properties are calculated or entered from the database, the shear stiffness comp1nt is automatically
considered and the effective shear factor is calculated using the warping function from the shear force caused by bending moment
and the warping function from the Saint-Venant principle.

Here,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 695 of 1024

Area moment of inertia (Iyy, Izz)

The area moment of inertia is used to calculate the flexural stiffness that resists the bending moment and is calculated from the centroid axis
of the section using the following equation.

l • Area moment of inertia about the y axis of the element coordinate system

l Area moment of inertia about the z axis of the element coordinate system

Section element b h
① 10 4 40 2 80 5 200
② 2 10 20 9 180 5 100
③ 8 3 24 15.5 372 5 120
total - - 84 - 632 - 420

<Table. First area moment of inertia and calculation of centroid >

: area

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the z′-axis direction

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the z′-axis direction

l • Calculate position of neutral axis ( , )

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 696 of 1024

l • Calculate second area moment of inertia ( , )

Section element
① 40 5.5328 1224.5 53.3 1277.8 0 0 333.3 333.3
② 20 1.4672 43.1 166.7 209.8 0 0 6.7 6.7
③ 24 7.9762 1526.9 18.0 1544.9 0 0 128.0 128.0
total 2794.5 238.0 3032.5 0 468.0 468.0

<Table. Second area moment of inertia example>

Area product moment of inertia (Iyz)

The area product moment of inertia is used to calculate the stress comp1nt of an asymmetrical section and the definition is as follows.

H, pipe, box, channel, tee type sections have at least 1 axis of symmetry out of the y,z axis on the element coordinate system and hence Iyz=0.
For angle type sections, it does not have any angle of symmetry (Iyz≠ 0) and so, the stress comp1nt needs to be calculated.

The calculations for the area product moment of inertia of an angle type section are shown in the figure below.

<Area product moment of inertia calculations for an angle section>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 697 of 1024

< Flexural stress distribution diagram for asymmetrical section>

The neutral axis is the axis that passes the points where the flexural stress due to the bending moment is ‘0(zero)’ within the member. The
neutral axis is perpendicular to the -axis and the -axis.

Because the flexural stress due to bending moment is ‘0’ on the neutral axis, the neutral axis direction can be found by the following equation.

The general equation used to calculate the flexural stress due to bending moment is as follows.

If this is a H type section, and,

Here, : Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Area product moment of inertia,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system

The shear stress due to shear force acting in the axis and axis direction of the element coordinate system can be calculated using the
following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 698 of 1024

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

First moment of area (Qy, Qz)

The first moment of area is used to calculate the shear stress at an arbitrary point on the section and the shear stress can be calculated using
the following equation.

For a section that is symmetrical about the y, z or both axis, the shear strength on an arbitrary point can be calculated using the following
equation.

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

Element thickness

On the GTS NX, the thickness needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. The plate element has a rotor
float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 699 of 1024

Spacing

This functionality is in the 1D element property which is activated only in 2D project setting. Since this option is used to consider the 1D
element force per each element when the user introduce the 1D element more or less than one along the axis of horizontal direction
(thickness direction) in 2D model.

If the user uncheck the spacing option, on the GTS NX, the spacing will be regarded as Plane Strain Thickness in the analysis setting, meaning
that the unit thickness based on the selected unit system.

On the GTS NX, spacing is used to calculate the stiffness of the element and output the member force per each element.

where, n = spacing, L = length , A = area, K* = stiffness considering spacing.

where, f* = member force

Refer to the following example,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 700 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Property

Property
Go to Section property

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Add/define ground and structural properties. This function defines the property of each mesh set when a ground or
structure mesh is generated. For ground, it determines which material to use and for structures, it adds section size, shape (stiffness) and
horizontal spacing etc. The horizontal spacing is the 1D spacing between structural members in the horizontal direction of a 2D model.
Tapered section option, where the size (thickness) of a beam or plate changes, is also available.

▒ Methodology

Create

Creates 1 of the following 4 property types and adds a material type and section characteristic for each property.

The supported model type for each property type is as follows. The section shape/size, stiffness depending on spacing and selectable
materials is defined.

Go to Section property

Ground Structural
Property type Model type Nonlinear property
property property
Geogrid(1D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(1D) X X -
From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
1D From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Embedded truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Beam X O -
Embedded Beam X O -
Pile X O -
Geogrid(2D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(2D) X X -
Gauging shell X O -
2D Axisymmetric O X -
Shell X O -
Plane stress X O Tension Only
Plane strain O X -
3D Solid O X -
Rigid link X O -
Pile tip X O -
User Supplied Behavior
X O -
for Shell Interface
Linear Elastic
Tension Only

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 701 of 1024

Compression Only
Hook
Point spring X O
Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Matrix spring X O -
Free Field
Free Field O X
Absorbent Boundary
Interface X O -
Others
Shell interface X O -
From Adjacent Element
Infinite O X
User Defined
Linear Elastic
Rigid Body
Elastic link X O Tension Only
Compression Only
Nonlinear Elastic

Refer to Ch.3 of the Analysis manual for detailed information on each input parameter and behavioral characteristic.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

Import

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material Properties

Material Properties

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 702 of 1024

Default parameter (General)

The input parameters and units for defining the default stiffness and initial condition of each model are listed in the table below

Input parameter Definition Unit

Elasticity modulus(
Elasticity modulus kN/m2
)
Elasticity modulus The Elasticity modulus increment amount depending on height
kN/m3
increment (slope)
Reference height Reference height of Elasticity modulus increment m
Poisson’s ratio( ) Poisson’s ratio -
Unit weight (γ) Unit weight of entire unsaturated soil(γt) kN/m3
Initial stress (Ko) Coefficient of earth pressure (initial stress parameter) -
Temperature
Coefficient for calculating temperature loading 1/[T]
coefficient
Damping ratio Material damping ratio (only applied to dynamic analysis) -
Safety Result (Mohr- Calculate Factor of Safety for each element based on MC failure
-
Coulomb) criteria

[Elastic modulus (E)]

This parameter defines the default initial stiffness of the material. The user can specify the Elasticity modulus, or use the Shear modulus (G) or
Oedometer Elasticity modulus (Eoed) from the Oedometer test. The initial stiffness is very important because geo-materials display nonlinear
behavior from the early stages of loading. The initial stiffness can be defined from the stress-strain curves of the triaxial compression test. It is
realistic to use the E0 for materials that display linear (elastic) behavior until a large strain but for general geo-materials, E50, the slope of the
tangent at 50% of the stress, is appropriate as an initial stiffness. When simulating unloading and reloading due to excavation during
construction step analysis, it is better to use Eur instead of E50 to realistically simulate the ground behavior.

Hence, it is important to set the stress path and stress range (size) when using the initial stiffness to simulate the ground behavior. To simulate
detailed behavior, various nonlinear material models can be used.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 703 of 1024

<Triaxial compression test result graph>

The use of K(bulk modulus) and G(shear modulus) may be debatable use to the continuity issues associated with the ground, but it can be
expressed more simply and clearly than E or v and is convenient to use. The following figure briefly explains the mechanical significance of K
and G.

<Various types of Elasticity modulus>

The Elasticity modulus values gained from on-site tests can be 1 of the many elasticity moduli discussed above and can be modified
appropriately for real situations.

Elasticity modulus
Geo-material Poisson’s ratio
(tonf/m2)
amphibolite 9.4~12.1 ´106 0.28~0.30
anhydrite 6.8 ´106 0.30
siabase 8.7~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.30
siorite 7.5~10.8 ´106 0.26~0.29
solomite 11.0~12.1 ´106 0.30

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 704 of 1024

sunite 14.9~18.3 ´106 0.26~0.28

deldspathic gneiss 8.3~11.9 ´106 0.15~0.20
gabbro 8.9~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.31
granite 7.3~8.6 ´106 0.23~0.27
ice 7.1 ´106 0.36
limestone 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
marble 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
mica Schist 7.9~10.1 ´106 0.15~0.20
obsidian 6.5~8.0 ´106 0.12~0.18
oligoclasite 8.0~8.5 ´106 0.29
quartzite 8.2~9.7 ´106 0.12~0.15
rock salt 3.5 ´106 0.25
slate 7.9~11.2 ´106 0.15~0.20
aluminum 5.5~7.6 ´106 0.34~0.36
steel 20.0 ´106 0.28~0.29

<The Elasticity modulus and Poisson’s ratio for rock and other materials>

The Elasticity modulus in the table above is for small, intact rock samples tested in the lab. Hence, when considering the site conditions, a
reduced elasticity modulus needs to be used considering the discontinuous surfaces within large scale rocks. The figure below is a graph of
actual data showing the relationship between the RQD (Rock Quality Designation) and the Elasticity modulus reduction ratio. An RQD is the
percentage of the sum of the lengths of cracks that are over 10cm and exist on the 100cm situ core against the total length. An RQD of 100%
does not mean the core is an intact rock. However, a higher RQD means a higher quality rock and the RQD decreases with more weathering.

<RQD- Modulus reduction ratio (EL/EM) relationship>

As shown on the figure, an RQD of 70% already needs to decrease the lab Elastic modulus by 20%.

[Increment of Elastic modulus]

In general, the strength properties of the soil change with depth and confining pressure, even within a ground layer composed of the same
material. To take this characteristic into account, increase or decrease in the Elastic modulus can be simulated with reference to a reference
height (standard height). If the elastic increase according to height is '0(zero)', the Elastic modulus has a constant value and if it is not '0(zero)',
the Elastic modulus is calculated with reference to a standard height using the following equation.

Here, : Input elastic modulus value

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 705 of 1024

: Incremental slope of elastic modulus

: Depth of measurement

<Schematic diagram of Elastic modulus increment>

The in the equation represent the integral point positions of an element where the finite element method calculation occurs. If the integral
point position is higher than , the elastic modulus value can be less than 0 in some places. To avoid this, use the value instead of
further decreasing the value.

[Poisson’s ratio( )]

Poisson’s ratio is a proportional constant from the stress-strain relationship and displays the material volume change associated with loading.
As approaches 0.5, the material becomes an incompressible solid and closer to 0 means the material is elastic, showing large volume
changes even at small loads. The initial stress ratio due to self weight K0 = σh/ σv can be related to the ratio in the uniaxial compression state
by K0 = . If K0 is not used to define the initial in-situ stress, the horizontal stress is calculated from the vertical stress using the
entered . For geo-materials, the general Poisson range is within 0.3~0.4 and entering a value larger than 0.49 can cause numerical errors.
Hence, if K0 is larger than 1, for example over-consolidated ground, the Poisson’s ratio cannot be calculated and the value must be entered
directly.

Shear modulus(G)

The Shear modulus is automatically calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation derived from Hooke's
law. If the value is directly entered, the Elastic modulus changes.

[Oedometer Elastic modulus (Eoed)]

The Oedometer modulus can be calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation.

[Initial stress (K0)]

K0 is the Coefficient of earth pressure, which is defined as the ratio of the initial vertical/horizontal stress (K0 = σh/ σv). The anisotropic
property can be set with reference to the Global Coordinate System.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 706 of 1024

Firstly, select yes/no on whether the Global Coordinate System direction and anisotropic property match and set the lateral pressure index in
each axis or any direction depending on the selected options.

When the 2 properties do match, the lateral pressure index is set in each axis direction but a value of ‘1’ in the direction of gravity cannot be
defined depending on the work environment (2D/3D).

When the 2 properties do not match, the lateral pressure index direction is set by entering the angle with respect to the reference axis. The
reference axis exists to set the lateral pressure index direction. For a 2D work environment, the ’X-Y’ plane is fixed and only the ‘X’ axis can be
selected, with all initial shear stress at ‘0(zero)’. For 3D, each axis apart from the gravitational direction can be selected. For example, if the
gravitational direction is the ‘Z’ axis and the reference axis is set as the ‘X’ axis, the angle can be entered on the ‘X-Z’ plane will be the
maximum lateral pressure angle and all initial shear stress in the XY and YZ direction will be '0(zero)'.

The in-situ stress state, where the soil it not disturbed by excavation or fill, can be expressed using the Coefficient of earth pressure and self
weight. In other words, realistic results can be obtained from applying K0 after modeling the in-situ ground for the 1st step of construction
during analysis. This is true for flat foundations but for inclined foundations, it is recommended that another construction process be added to
converge the stress found using K0 for equilibrium.

[Thermal Parameter]

Thermal Coefficient - describes how the size of an object changes with a change in temperature. Specifically, it measures the fractional
change in size per degree change in temperature at a constant pressure.

Molecular vapor diffusion coefficient - the gas diffusion coefficient of a porous medium, which indicates the change in gas density over time.
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

Thermal diffusion enhancement (factor) - controls the degree of gas flow according to the temperature gradient (unit less).
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

[Safety Result (Mohr-Coulomb)]

§Cohesion, Friction Angle and Allowable tensile strength (optional) can be defined as the failure criteria.

§Stress status of material for each construction stage can be represented by Factor of Safety based on Mohr-Coulomb failure criteria.

§The ratio of generated stress to stress at failure for each element will be calculated automatically.

§Users can figure out stable, potential failure and plastic failure area directly.

§Check factor of safety for each element - (2D : Plain Strain Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR , 3D : Solid Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR)

§In case that Safety Factor is less than 1(or 1.2), it can be identical with plastic failure region.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 707 of 1024

Porous: Seepage, Drained/Undrained Parameter

The input parameters for the permeability characteristics and drained/undrained conditions of the foundation are as follows.

Input parameter Definition Unit

Unit weight(saturated) Saturated state unit weight kN/m3
Initial void ratio(eo) Initial void ratio -
Unsaturated characteristic function setting (negative pore water
Unsaturated characteristic -
pressure-water content-permeability ratio)
Drainage parameter Drained/Undrained condition -
Permeability coefficient GCS direction - Saturated permeability constant m/sec
Void ratio dependent permeability
Permeability ratio dependent on void ratio -
ratio (ck)
Specific storage(Ss) Volume ratio of water inflow/outflow 1/m

<Permeability parameter>

[Initial void ratio (e0)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 708 of 1024

The initial void ratio of the foundation used in consolidation analysis and stress-seepage coupled analysis. It is the volume ratio between the
voids and soil particles within the soil and the value is less than 1 for most soils. The value can be larger than 1 for clays or organic soils, but
the value depends greatly on the sampling method or compaction. Generally, coarse grain sand has a value of 0.6~0.8 and high density sand
with an even size distribution has a value of 0.3. The void ratio can be even 2~3 for fine grained soils.

[Unsaturated Property]

Set to consider the unsaturated property of the foundation. It is a required property for unsteady infiltration analysis and is used to consider
the partial degree of saturation of the foundation for nonlinear (construction step)/consolidation analysis etc. Because real foundations are
unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil for more realistic
results. If the unsaturated properties are not considered, it is assumed that the ground is saturated and hence, the infiltration analysis with
time cannot be examined.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship). Refer to
"Function>Unsaturated characteristic function" for more information.

[Drainage parameters]

The pore water pressure in stress analysis can be divided into normal state pore water pressure and abnormal state pore water pressure - the
excess pore water pressure generated between soil particles due to external loading under undrained conditions. An excess pore water
pressure of nearly 0 is called the drainage condition and is generally used for drainage analysis of sand, which has a large permeability.
However when simulating clay, which has a very small permeability and water cannot be drained out during sudden loading, undrained
analysis is appropriate. The initial state, where the excess pore water pressure has not yet dissipated, is seen as the most unstable state and
the pore water pressure is determined by the volume change of the foundation due to compressibility and permeability coefficient.

Undrained Poisson’s ratio and Skempton(B) coefficient are parameters used to calculate the bulk modulus of elasticity for water. The
undrained Poisson’s ratio has a standard value of 0.495 with a compressibility of nearly ‘0(zero)’ and the Skempton coefficient expresses the
saturation, with 1 meaning full saturation.

The materials for the unsaturated analysis are as follows.

Please refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual for more detailed information.

Drained/Undrained Materials Useable Material models

Drained All geo-materials
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Duncan-Chang,
Undrained (Effective stiffness /Effective strength)
Hoek-Brown, Strain Softening, Modified Cam-clay, Jardine, D-min, Modified Mohr-
Coulomb, User-supplied, Transversely Isotropic
Undrained (Effective stiffness / Undrained
Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)
Undrained (Undrained stiffness / Undrained
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)

[Permeability coefficients (kx,ky,kz)]

The permeability coefficient represents the permeability characteristics (velocity) of the foundation and is used in infiltration analysis and
consolidation analysis. The permeability coefficient for each direction can be defined on the GCS. The input value is the saturated permeability
coefficient and becomes the standard for computing the permeability ratio (Kunsat / Ksat) due to negative pore water pressure when defining
an unsaturated property function.

[Void ratio dependency permeability (ck)]

The permeability coefficient is a measurement of how much the groundwater within a foundation moves in a unit time and is dependent on
the water content and the void ratio change . The larger water content, the larger the flow channel and hence, the value is largest when the
foundation is saturated. The water content depends on the pore water pressure and hence, the permeability coefficient is also dependent on

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 709 of 1024

the pore water pressure. The change in void ratio is considered in consolidation analysis as well as stress-seepage coupled analysis and is
calculated from the initial void ratio.

To express the change in pore water pressure, GTS NX uses the permeability ratio function depended on saturated pore water
pressure coefficient and pore water pressure change and the void ratio dependent permeability ratio dependent on void ratio change .
The unsaturated permeability coefficient depending on void ratio change is given by the following equation.

[Specific storativity(Ss)]

The Specific storage is the water volume inflow or outflows from the unit volume of the aquifer due to water level rise or fall in a confined
aquifer. A coefficient can be directly entered or automatically calculated for compressible fluids.

The change in volumetric water content for pore water pressure in infiltration and consolidation analysis can be expressed by the porosity and
degree of saturation.

The first clause is the slope of the volumetric water content under saturated conditions that can be expressed using the specific storage.

When the material drainage property is set to undrained, the specific storage is automatically calculated using the undrained Poisson's ratio
(vu) and the Effective elastic modulus (E') and Poisson's ratio (v'), entered in the general parameters.

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature unit. (required for transient heat
transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load vector for heat transfer analysis is
the total exothermic load applied to the object.

Unfrozen water content: indicates floating water content in soil / rock. It is given as a temperature-dependent function as a unique
characteristics of the ground.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 710 of 1024

Time Dependent

This is to define Creep Formulation to simulate time-dependent behavior of concrete structures. Following constitutive models are available
for concrete structures, Elastic, Tresca, von Mises, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker Prager, and Hoek Brown.

Two types of creep formulation are available to define Time-dependent behavior of material, Age Dependent and Age Independent. Refer to
analysis reference Ch.4-Section5 in detail.

[Age Dependent]

The stiffness of concrete changes with time, and the creep and shrinkage may cause unexpected deformation. The creep strain of concrete
depends on the time of stress occurrence even under the same applied load. GTSNX supports aging-Kelvin model and aging Viscous model
excluding the spring from Kelvin model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 711 of 1024

[Age Independent]

GTSNX can take into account the primary and secondary creep. The user can use two types of empirical law to define the creep behavior.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material

Material

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Define the general stiffness and nonlinear material properties of the ground and structure. For ground, additional
permeability properties and drained/undrained conditions can be set.

▒ Methodology

Create

Add a ground or structure material. The following 4 material types can be selected and the model type can be set for each material type.

The model type available for each material type is shown below. The ground/structure material properties and the material behavior
properties are defined for each model type. Here, the elements used for ground modeling such as plane strain or solid can be assigned to a
structure material that does not consider Ko effects or permeability properties.

Ground Structure Material behavior

Material type Model type
material material properties
Elastic O O Linear elastic
Tresca O O Elasto-plastic
von Mises (Nonlinear) O O Elasto-plastic
Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Drucker Prager O O Elasto-plastic
Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Generalized Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Hyperbolic(Duncan-
O X Elasto-plastic
Chang)
Strain Softening O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Cam Clay O X Elasto-plastic
Jardine O X Nonlinear elastic
D-min O X Nonlinear elastic

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 712 of 1024

Modified Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic

Soft Soil O X Elasto-plastic
Soft Soil Creep O X Elasto-plastic
User defined model O O Elasto-plastic
Modified UBCSAND O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Isotropic(General Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Parameter) Modified Ramberg-
O O Elasto-plastic
Osgood
Modified Hardin-Drnevich O O Elasto-plastic
Hardening Soil(small
O X Elasto-plastic
strain stiffness)
Generalized SCLAY1S O X Elasto-plastic
CWFS O O Elasto-plastic
PM4Sand O X Elasto-plastic
Transversely Isotropic O O Linear elastic
Jointed Rock Mass O O Elasto-plastic
Orthotropic
2D Orthotropic X O Linear elastic
Geogrid X O Elasto-plastic
(Equivalent)Linear
2D Equivalent 2D Equivalent O O
elastic
Interface X O Elasto-plastic
Shell Interface X O Elasto-plastic
Interface / Pile User supplied - Shell
X O Elasto-plastic
Interface
Pile X O Nonlinear elastic

Isotropic

Isotropic materials have the same properties in every direction and is used to define material behavior properties of most linear-elastic /
nonlinear elastic / elasto-plastic materials.

Orthotropic

Natural ground is generally layered and sloped, making it possible to have different strengths in each orthogonal direction. This option can
also be used to define Jointed Rocks, which have different properties depending on the direction and behave differently according to the
specific confinement conditions. In case of 2D Orthotropic, users can define different values of stiffness along each direction. It is required to
define geometrically orthotropic with significant different stiffness in horizontal and vertical direction.

2D Equivalent

2D equivalent linear analysis specific model. Use the converging strength and damping ratio from the equivalent linear method to consider
the nonlinear and n1lastic behavior of materials.

Interface / Pile

Applied when simulating relative behavior (interface behavior) between ground and structure.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

Import/Import from Excel / Export to Excel

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 713 of 1024

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

The user can construct the frequently used material DB by importing or exporting the excel file containing the material properties.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual to understand the Finite element formulization and yield shape. The input parameters and behavioral
characteristics for each material model are as follows.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Hinge

Hinge Property

▒ Overview

When crack or yield occurs due to irregular cyclic load such as seismic load, very complex behavior appears since displacement history to the
current affects to the restoring force and displacement relationship. It is called that hysteresis model which regulates this relationship and is
considered to inelastic hinge at inelastic element.

Inelastic hinges are available in nonlinear, construction stage, consolidation, fully coupled, nonlinear time history analysis, SRM/SAM (Slope
stability analysis) and nonlinear time history analysis with SRM and element results can be displayed.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 714 of 1024

Type

- Beam - Lumped : It concentrates the inelastic behavior represented by rotational and translational springs at each end and the center. And the remaining
parts are assumed to behave elastically. Inelastic hysteresis behaviors are defined by skeleton curves, which are empirical hysteresis models. The axial
component is represented by a spring at the center and two translational components are represented by springs at each end defined by force-
displacement relationships. The two flexural components, My and Mz, are represented by springs defined by the relationship between moment and angle of
rotation at either I or J or at both ends.

- Beam - Distributed : Unlike lumped hinges, it assumes inelastic behavior throughout the member. The plastic hinge locations in the length direction of a
member assigned by the user are defined as the integration points. The flexibility matrix of a section, which represents the distribution of internal forces, is
calculated through the integration points. The number of integration points can be 1 and between 3 and 20. If the number of integration points is 2, the
moment at the free end of a cantilever beam does not come to exactly zero due to the inherited characteristic of the integration method. Therefore, two
integration points are not permitted. Inelastic hysteresis behavior can be defined by 2 models, empirical Skeleton and Fiber. The hinge behaviors can be
expressed by force - deformation relationships in each axis direction, and the hinge hysteresis behavior of the flexural components can be expressed by the
relationships of moment and angle of rotation. Inelastic behaviors can be defined for 3 axis components and 2 flexural (My & Mz) components.

- Truss : The axial component is represented by a spring at the center defined by the force-displacement relationship. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a
spring is defined by a skeleton model.

- Spring / Elastic Link : Unlike Lumped and Distributed hinges, which are influenced by the inelastic properties of materials and members, the inelastic plastic
hinge properties for the corresponding linear properties of each component of Property Type defined in General Link Properties are defined. The elastic
stiffness of each component is defined by effective stiffness and acts as the initial stiffness in inelastic analysis. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a spring is
defined by a skeleton model. The inelastic properties of a spring can be defined for all 3 translational and 3 rotational directions.

Interaction

The type of considering interaction between axial force and moment is selected.

- None: Interaction between axial force and moments is not considered.

- P-M in Strength Calculation: N-M interaction in time history analysis is reflected by calculating the flexural yield strength of a hinge considering the effect
of axial force. In this method, the interaction between biaxial bending moments is ignored. The axial force is assumed to act with each directional bending
moment independently when the hinge status is evaluated at each time step. Recalculation of bending moment yield strength reflecting axial force is carried
out in a loading condition, which satisfies the following three conditions:

1) It must be the first among the sequential time history load cases, which will be consecutively analyzed.

2) Inelastic static analysis must be carried out.

The elements are inelastic beam elements assigned with hinge properties to which P-M interaction is applied. The initial axial and bending moment at this
time are determined by the combination of linear elastic analysis results of all the static loads contained in Time Varying Static Load. The factors used in the

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 715 of 1024

combination are defined by the Scale Factors specified in Time Varying Static Load.

- P-M-M in Status Determination: This method uses a multi-axis hinge hysteresis model in inelastic time history analysis. Interaction between axial force
and biaxial moments is realized by applying the plasticity theory. The interaction is considered at each time step through evaluating the status of inelastic
hinges using the 3-dimensional yield surface. GTSNX supports the kinematic hardening type.

Yield Surface Function

If "P-M in Strength Calculation" or "P-M-M in Status Determination" is selected in Interaction Type, enter the related data for P-M interaction curve and 3-D
yield surface.

Component

Select the components of sectional strength for which properties will be entered. The Spring Type permits properties in all directional components, whereas
Lumped and Distributed types permit all but the Mx component.

Hinge Location

Select the locations of lumped inelastic hinges. Axial component is fixed to the center of a member. I-end, j-end or both ends can be selected for the
bending moment components.

Num. of Sections

Enter the number of integration points for inelastic hinges of the distributed type. Up to 20 sections are permitted, and moment - curvature relationships are
calculated at all the sections corresponding to the points.

Hysteresis Model

Select a hysteresis model for an inelastic hinge.

Hinge Components (Single)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 716 of 1024

Hysteresis Model Type

- Origin-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
origin and again move along the skeleton curve after reaching the opposite skeleton curve.

- Peck-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
point of maximum displacement on the opposite side. If the first yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the response points move
toward the first yielding point on the skeleton curve.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 717 of 1024

- Kinematic : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. It shows the tendency of strength increase with the increase in loading. This is used to model the Bauschinger effect of metallic
materials. Accordingly, it is cautioned that energy dissipation may be overestimated for concrete. Due to the characteristic of the model, only
the positive (+) and negative (-) symmetry is permitted for the strength reduction ratios after yielding.

- Clough : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. Unloading stiffness is obtained from the elastic stiffness
reduced by the equation below. As the deformation progresses after yielding, unloading stiffness reduces gradually.

where,

K : unloading stiffness
R

Ko : elastic stiffness

Dy : yield displacement in the zone where unloading begins

Dm : maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins

(In the zone where yielding has not occurred, replace it with the yield displacement)

: constant for determining unloading stiffness

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 718 of 1024

If the sign of loading changes in the process of unloading, response points move toward the point of maximum displacement in the zone of
progressing direction. If yielding has not occurred in this zone, the response points move toward the yield point on the skeleton curve. If
unloading becomes loading without changing the loading sign, the response points move along the unloading path. If the loading continually
increases, loading continues on the skeleton curve again.

- Degrading : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The load-displacement coordinates at unloading
move to the path of reaching the maximum deformation point on the opposite side due to the change of unloading stiffness once in the
middle. If yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the first yielding point is assumed to be the maximum deformation point.

- Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a tetralinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D, does
not exceed D3, the hysteresis rules are identical to the Original Taketa hysteresis. If the current displacement or deformation, D, exceeds D3,
response points move along the slope K4. For unloading, response points move by the same rules as the Original Taketa hysteresis. The
Takeda tetralinear hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 719 of 1024

- Modified Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D,
exceeds D2 for the first time or the maximum deformation point up until now, response points move along the trilinear skeleton curve. If
unloading takes place from this straight line toward the opposite direction, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the point of the
restoring force becoming 0. If the restoring force goes beyond the 0 point, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the
opposite side. Even in the case where unloading takes place from the straight line directed toward the maximum deformation point from the
point of the 0 restoring force, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the points reach the 0 restoring force. After the point of 0 restoring
force is passed, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the opposite side. The Modified Takeda type hysteresis model
can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

- Normal Bilinear : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. The Normal Bilinear type hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and
Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 720 of 1024

- Modified Ramberg-Osgood :

- Modified Hardin-Drnevich :

Symmetric / Asymmetric

: Select the type of Skeleton Curve.

Yield Function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 721 of 1024

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

- Yield Displacement : Enter the yield displacement of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Yield Displacement is selected for Input Type.

- Force (Yield Strength) : Yield strength is specified. It is user defined based on material and section properties. The user specifies positive (+)
values regardless of tension (t) or compression (c). The program treats compression as negative (-) internally.

Unloading Stiffness Parameter

Exponent in Unloading Stiffness Calculation: This is an option used to determine the unloading stiffness of the outer loop used in the
Clough and Takeda type models among hysteresis models of skeleton curves. This is used to reflect the effect of reduction in stiffness, which
occurs as the deformation progresses after yielding. The unloading stiffness is determined by the elastic stiffness reduced by the yield
displacement and maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins and the exponent entered here.

Inner Loop Unloading Stiffness Reduction Factor: This is used to determine the unloading stiffness of the inner loop. The inner loop is
formed when unloading occurs before reaching the target point on the skeleton curve while reloading after the loading sign changes in the
process of unloading. The unloading stiffness of the inner loop is calculated by multiplying the unloading stiffness of the outer loop by the
reduction ratio for the unloading stiffness of the inner loop.

Hinge Components (Multi)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 722 of 1024

- P-M Interaction Curves : Enter the P-M interaction curve data required to calculate 3-dimensional yield surfaces. All strength values must be
entered with positive sign. Sign convention for plotting P-M curve is positive for compression and negative for tension.

Strengths for the 1st P-M Interaction Curves

PC(t): First yield strength subject to pure tension force

PC(c): First yield strength subject to pure compression force

PCBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PCBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MCy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MCz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

Strengths for the 2nd P-M Interaction Curves

PY(t): Second yield strength subject to pure tension force

PY(c): Second yield strength subject to pure compression force

PYBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second stage yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PYBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MYy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MYz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

- Approximation of Yield Surface Shape : On the basis of P-M interaction curve, the parameters for 3-dimensional yield surface are either user
defined or auto-calculated. If some items are auto-calculated and the remainder is to be user defined, Auto-calculation should be performed
first, and then necessary items can be modified after converting to User Input. In case of Alpha, only user defined entry is possible. The value
of each parameter is used in the equation of yield surface displayed in the dialog box.

Beta y, Beta z, Gamma: Being the exponential powers of P-My or P-Mz interactions, different values can be entered for the first and second

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 723 of 1024

yields. For Beta y and Beta z on the other hand, two separate values representing the ranges of larger and smaller axial forces relative to the
axial force at the time of balanced failure can be entered.

Alpha: Exponent for My-Mz interaction for the 1st and 2nd yielding

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

α1: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the first yielding divided by the initial stiffness

α2: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the second yielding divided by the initial stiffness

- Initial Stiffness : The initial stiffness used in inelastic analysis is either selected or entered by the user.

Elastic Stiffness: elastic stiffness of a member is used as the initial stiffness for inelastic analysis.

User Defined: the user directly enters the initial stiffness if the Input Type is Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Coordinate System

Coordinate System

▒ Overview

Add a result output coordinate system for 2D/3D element. The default rectangular/cylindrical coordinate system is defined and another
coordinate system can be added by arbitrarily defining 1 of the three planes on the coordinate system. The added coordinate system can be
used as the material coordinates when the properties of the 2D / 3D elements are defined. For 2D structural members, it is especially hard to
unify the element coordinate system in 1 direction depending on the element shape. It is useful to set the output coordinate system to check
the member forces of the entire structure according the same direction and sign convention.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 724 of 1024

There are 2 types of coordinate systems; rectangular and cylindrical. The coordinate system can be set by defining 1 of the three planes of the
coordinate system 12, 23, 31 (XY,YZ,ZX) by entering three points. In other words, the plane that passes the three points becomes 1 of the 12,
23, 31 planes and the other 2 planes are automatically determined by the direction of the reference plane.

Select the plane, origin point, a point on 1 axis of the selected plane and a point on the selected plane in this order to specify the position and
direction of the reference plant.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Function

Function

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
When setting the analysis conditions (boundary, loading etc.) after the mesh has been generated, the values that change
with position and time can be registered as a function. The provided function types are as follows and the characteristics and applicable range
for each function is given.

▒ Methodology

Applicable range
Function type
Material/Property Boundary condition Loading

Force, Displacement, Pressure,

Prestress, Initial equilibrium
General (Spatial) - Water level
force, Dynamic nodal, Dynamic
surface
General (Non-spatial) Pile, Pile tip - -
Force, Displacement, Pressure,
Prestress, Initial equilibrium
Generalized space - Water level
force, Dynamic noda, Dynamic
surface
Surface Function - Water level -

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 725 of 1024

Non-Hydrostatic Water
- Water level -
Pressure

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Time-dependent (User-

- -
Function defined)

Time-dependent
Creep / Shrinkage Strain
- -
Function Group
(Design code based)
Time-dependent
Elastic Modulus Function - -
(Design code based)
Shear Hardening (User-
Plastic Hardening Function - -
defined)
Hardening Curve von Mises - -
Stress-Strain Curve von Mises - -
Cohesion Hardening Curve CWFS - -
Frictional Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Dilatancy Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Tensile Strength Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve

Node head, Node

Seepage boundary - -
flux, Surface flux

Nonlinear elastic (Truss

Truss, Embedded truss - -
element)
Nonlinear elastic
Point spring, Elastic link - -
(Point spring/ Elastic link)
Unsaturated property Isotropic, Orthotropic - -
Strain compatible 2D Equivalent - -
Response spectrum - - Response spectrum
Ground acceleration, Time
Time forcing - - varying static, Dynamic nodal,
Dynamic surface

General function(Spatial)

Changes in position (coordinates) of a value with respect to the rectangular or cylindrical coordinate system can be set as function and used
when specifying the load. The water level conditions can be directly specified on the screen, but registering the water level according to the
coordinate change as a function allows this to be used as the water line during the construction step.

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

<Reference coordinate system standard>

[Equation]

The Equation can be set without defining the values of the independent variables.

For example, when defining the function Y=2*X on the Cartesian coordinate system, specify the X coordinate range (start, end) and the X
coordinate increment first. Input 2*X and press the calculate button to automatically generate a function as shown above.

When defining the function Sin(T) between a certain angle with reference to the T coordinate on the cylindrical coordinate system , specify the
angle range (start, end) and increment angle and then input sin(T) to generate a sin function within the specified angle range.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 726 of 1024

[Scale Value]

Value multiplied to the defined function value. The initial value is set as 1. For example, to increase all defined functions by 2 times, input 2 for
the scale value.

[Extrapolation]

Assign a function value to values outside the independent variable range. The user can select whether to set the function value outside the
range to be 0, the same as the closest function value or determined through linear extrapolation.

<Extrapolation>

General function (Non-spatial)

Used to specify the shear stiffness and spring stiffness of pile or pile tip elements as a function. The relative displacement vs Force/Area is
used as a shear stiffness function and the relative displacement vs Force/Length is used as a spring stiffness function at the pile tips. Different
pile shear stiffness functions can be set for each depth when defining the pile material properties.

Generalized space function

The purpose and functions are the same as the general function (spatial). However, the generalized space function is able to generate a
function that considers all 3 axis directions while the general function (spatial) is a 1 dimensional function that can only set 1 independent
variable axis. The input method and detailed functions are the same as the general function (spatial).

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

Surface function

Used to specify the water level surface in 3D space. The 3D water level surface can be generated by entering the variable values with reference

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 727 of 1024

to the global or cylindrical coordinates as shown in the table below, but it can also be generated using the Boundary Condition > Water Level
operation and selecting a surface in space to automatically extract the coordinate information. Here, the X axis spacing determines the
precision of the water surface and for suddenly changing sections, the spacing needs to be carefully set following the element node positions.

Non-Hydrostatic Water Pressure

Define the water pressure at the top and bottom depending on the position of the model.

Applicable in integer conditions and user-defined conditions when specifying the mesh set level.

- User-defined condition: the user can directly define the water pressure at the top and bottom of the assigned mesh by using the specific
water pressure function

- Hydrostatic condition: this function is used to define the water pressure at the top of the allocated mesh as hydrostatic.

Name – input name for the function.

Ref. CSys – reference coordinate system for the function definition.

Water Pressure Type – select the type of function for selection in Analysis Case > Analysis Control > Define Water Level for Mesh Set. (User
Defined or Hydrostatic condition)

Scale factor to multiply all input data.

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Function

Define the time dependent creep property and shrinkage strain of concrete material. These functions are available if User Defined is selected
in the Code field.

There are three types of Creep function data types.

Specific Creep ; Strain per unit stress excluding immediate deformation

Creep Function ; Strain per unit stress including immediate deformation

Creep Coefficient ; Ratio of creep strain to elastic strain

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 728 of 1024

A frequently used Creep Function may be saved in and recalled from a file. The data file, fn.TDM retains the following form:

* Unit, in, kip

* Data Assign the units (optional items)
Enter the data in the form of 'day' and
20, 0.9934
'value' (mandatory items)
40,1.2182 -
60, 1.3705 -
80,1.4883 -
100, 1.5854 -
120, 1.6683 -
140, 1.7408 -
160, 1.8054 -
180, 1.8636 -
200, 1.9166 -
220, 1.9653 -
240, 2.0103 -
260, 2.0252 -

Creep / Shrinkage Function Group

The user can define Creep/Shrinkage Function based on the embedded Design Codes as follows.

Link to Creep / Shrinkage Design Code

Elastic Modulus Function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 729 of 1024

Define Time-dependent Elastic modulus function based on selected design code. It is required to input End Time of function with the number
of steps.

Link to Elastic Modulus Design Code

Plastic Hardening Function

Shear Hardening in Modified Mohr-Coulomb model can be defined by Equivalent plastic strain related to the mobilized shear resistance.
Using "Auto-Calculated" option, solver recalculates friction angle based on the deviatoric plastic strain.

Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and stress are directly inputted. It is used when defining hardening curve within von Mises model. Plastic strain begin once the
material starts yielding so it can be calculated using following equation.

Stress-Strain Curve

Stress and stain are directly inputted. It is used when defining Stress-Strain Curve within von Mises model. When Load-Displacement Curve is
already known, true strain can be calculated using following equation.

Cohesion Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and cohesion are directly inputted. It is used when describing Cohesion Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion Weakening and
Frictional Strengthening).

Frictional Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and frictional angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Frictional Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 730 of 1024

Dilatancy Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and dilatancy angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Dilatancy Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Tensile Strength Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and tensile strength are directly inputted. It is used when describing Tensile Strength Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Seepage Boundary function

Used to simulate the head and flow rate difference with time such as node head, node flux rate, surface flux. Setting the values (head/flux)
according to the time flow that fits the specified time unit generates a function that can be applied to unsteady infiltration analysis.

For unsteady infiltration analysis, the time steps for result verification are set separately and the time function for the steps is used in the
analysis. When the time step is beyond the range of the function, the function value is automatically calculated using linear interpolation. In
other words, to apply a 0 function value to time steps outside the range, the same function value (0) needs to be entered for arbitrary time
steps when creating the function as shown in the figure above.

Nonlinear elastic function (Truss element)

The behavioral characteristics of truss elements or embedded truss elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The stress change according
to strain of the truss element can be directly generated as a function and used. The function can be applied to the tensile (compression) test
results of a structural member (truss affiliated) or to the deformation behavior properties of a general steel member.

Nonlinear elastic function (Point spring/ Elastic link)

The behavioral characteristics of spring or elastic link elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The spring/link stiffness according to the
element strain can be defined to generate a function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 731 of 1024

Unsaturated property function

For steady infiltration analysis that assumes a saturated ground, the unsaturated properties are not taken into account even if they are
entered. For the time dependent unsteady analysis, the unsaturated properties of the ground must be considered. Also, because real
foundations are unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil
for more realistic results.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship).

[Individually]

Define the permeability function data and water content function data. Based on the experimental data of unsaturated soil, the coefficients for
each function type can be defined using Curve Fitting or the data can be directly input through customize. If the experimental data is entered
directly, the negative pore water pressure size is entered by its absolute value and the permeability ratio is found by dividing the unsaturated
value with the saturated state value.

<Individual consideration>

The provided permeability functions and coefficients are listed below.

l Gardner coefficient

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Frontal function

K ratio (Rk) : Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

Ho : Head at which the permeability coefficient no longer decreases

l Van Genuchten function (Permeability ratio)

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Van Genuchten (Water content)

: Volume water content

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 732 of 1024

: Residual volume water content

: Saturated volume water content

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

[Relation]

The unsaturated material property data can be set on the ground type according to the JICE (Japan Institute of Construction Eng.) criteria. The
pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio relationship function for each type of ground is shown
below.

Pressure head(P)-Volumetric water content(T) Pressure head(P)-Degree of saturation(Sr)

-Permeability ratio (K) -Permeability ratio(K)

(T)- (P) (T)- (K) (Sr)- (P) (Sr)- (K)
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F],
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], [GF]
[GF] (JICE) (JICE)
[GF] (JICE) [GF] (JICE)
Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], Sandy soil [S], [S-F],

[SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE) [S-F], [SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE)

Cohesive soil [M], [C]
Sandy soil [SF] (JICE) Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) Sandy soil [SF] (JICE)
(JICE)
Cohesive soil [M], [C]
User specified Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) User specified
(JICE)
User specified User specified

<Dual consideration>

For unsteady analysis, the negative pressure head (pore water pressure) is calculated for each time step (construction step) and applied,
renewing the relative permeability coefficient. The volumetric water content (degree of saturation), according to the calculated pressure head,
is found and the relative permeability, according to the found volumetric water content (degree of saturation), is renewed for each step.

Strain compatible function

For the 2D equivalent linear analysis, the shear modulus and damping ratio are set as functions of strain to consider the nonlinearity and
inelastic behavior of the ground. If the function is not defined, the ground material is assumed to be linear and the entered (fixed) shear
modulus and damping ratio is applied. Generally, the ground displays decreasing shear modulus and increasing damping ratio as the shear
strain increases. For complex nonlinear behavior of the ground, the material properties are simplified to linear equivalent properties. Repeated
calculations from the assumed initial values can compute the converging shear modulus and damping ratio.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 733 of 1024

Material properties can be defined from various existing database. The following empirical equation can be used to generate a function
following the stratum properties.

[Database]

A strain function stored from existing research can be imported from the database. An example DB is shown below.

Clay - Pl=5-10 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Lower Bound (Sun et al.0)

Clay - Pl=10-20 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Average (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=20-40 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Upper Bound (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=40-80 (Sun et al.0) Clay (Idriss 1990)
Clay - Pl=80+ (Sun et al.0) Gravel (Seed et al.0)
Clay (Seed and Sun 1989) Linear
Modulus Gravel (Seed et al.0) Rock
Damping
Reduction Linear Rock (Idriss)
Curve
Curve Rock Sand (Idriss 1990)
Rock (Idriss) Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound Vucetic - Dobry
Sand (Seed and Idriss 1970)
-
Vucetic - Dobry

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 734 of 1024

Response spectrum function

Define the spectrum function used in response spectrum analysis. Because the response spectrum analysis uses a linearly interpolated
spectrum function value for the natural periodicity of the structure, compact spectrum values are needed for areas where the curvature of the
spectrum curve changes rapidly. The period range of the spectrum function must contain all natural periods of the structure.

The spectrum data types are normalized acceleration (acceleration spectrum, gravitational acceleration), acceleration, velocity and
displacement spectrum and changing the time function data format only changes the application format, not the data format. The scale factor
is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value. In the 'Damping Ratio' space,
input the damping ratio applied on the response spectrum but if the damping ratio of the target structure is different, the input spectrum data
is processed to fit the structural damping ratio.

[Design spectrum function]

Use the built-in design spectrum. The default built-in design spectrum types are as follows.

l Korea(Bridge) : Korea, Traffic Specification

l Japan(Bridge02) : Japan, Load instruction and Dynamic Analysis of Building

l China(JTJ004-89) : China, Specifications of Earthquake Resistant Design for Highway Engineering

l KBC 2009 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2009

l KBC 2005 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2005

l IBC2000(ASCE7-98) : USA, International Building Code 2000

l UBC(1997) : USA, Measure of Uniform Building Code 97 (Standards)

l EURO(2004H-ELASTIC) : Europe, Sesismic Design Measure of Structures

Time forcing function

The time forcing function is applied to the loading conditions (ground acceleration, time varying static, dynamic nodal, dynamic surface)
applied to linear/nonlinear time history analysis. A function for the time history loading value is formed and changing the time function data
format only changes the application format, not the data format.[edit] The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the
entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 735 of 1024

[Add Time Function]

The defined function is also applicable for Dynamic node (surface) loading and time varying static loading. Specifying 'Force' or 'Moment' uses
the time history load as a 'dynamic node (surface) load' input and specifying 'Normalized Acceleration' or 'Acceleration' uses it to input the
'ground acceleration'. Specifying 'Normal' uses the time history load as the change in static load with time for 'time varying static load' or
'dynamic surface load'.

[Import/Earthquake]

Save and import frequently used time history loading or select earthquake acceleration data from the program DB. There are a total of 32
types of earthquake acceleration.

[Add Time Sinusoidal]

A sine function can be used to define the time history loading. A, C are constants, f is the frequency of the input load, D is the damping factor
and P is the phase angle. If the time history load is entered as a harmonic function, input the necessary sine function variables and click
[Redraw Graph] to view the loading on the right hand side.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Contact > Define Contact

Define Contact (Welded / General)

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 736 of 1024

Use welded contact elements where element faces meet, but the nodes are not shared, to induce the same behavior.

It can be used as the initial contact conditions between adjacent objects in structural analysis, consolidation analysis or seepage analysis. It is
often used when node sharing on very complex geometry needs to be ignored to create an element. This function prevents analysis error and
checks the analysis results that are similar to node sharing.

General contact considers the impact and impact friction between two objects in analysis, otherwise two objects are bonded like rigid link each
other by welded contact. General contact can be used in nonlinear (static, dynamic) and fully coupled analysis. With Geometric Nonlinearity
option, solver will take into account all possible contact area automatically regardless of defined Contact tolerance between two objects. It is
also possible to consider Frictional behavior by Friction coefficient between two objects and the penetration at initial stage can be ignored by
adjusting slave nodes automatically.

▒ Concept

Contact analysis fundamentally assumes that two objects in a space can be in contact, but cannot penetrate each other (non-penetration
condition), and are nonlinear in behavior or condition from a physical point of view. The type of contacts are general contact (considers the
impact and impact friction between two objects in analysis), rough contact(does not consider sliding), welded contact (two objects are welded
from the start of analysis) and sliding contact (only considers the sliding in the tangent direction). In the example below, general contact and
rough contact are assigned depending on the position of two objects at the start of analysis and can be seen as linear. GTS NX supports the
welded and general contact feature.

<Concept of General contact and Rough contact> <Concept of Welded contact>

▒ Methodology

Contact element generation (Welded Contact)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 737 of 1024

The contact can be defined through the Automatic Contact and the Create Manual Contact Pair functions.

Auto contact

This function automatically searches for areas where the selected meshes meet without node sharing and creates a contact surface.

[Searching Distance] : Input the distance between the main contact surface and the sub contact surface. The function searches for contact
surfaces within this range.

Manual contact pair

The user can directly specify the main contact surface and the sub contact surface to create a contact surface. Face, 2D element, 3D element,
2D element free face, and 3D element free face geometries can be selected.

When creating the contact surface manually, the node-to-surface contact or surface-to surface-contact can be selected to create the surface.
Node-to-surface contact takes less time, but the solution accuracy is relatively low because the nodes of the main object tend to penetrate
through the sub object. On the other hand, surface-to surface-contact takes longer but the non-penetrating conditions are satisfied relatively
accurately, allowing for more accurate simulations of structural behavior.

[Contact Parameters] : Input the coefficient value to calculate the initial contact search distance. The initial contact search distance can be
found by multiplying the coefficient value by the longest length on the element face. If the main and sub contact faces are within this distance,
contact is considered to have occurred.

Contact Parameters

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 738 of 1024

Define the normal and tangential stiffness of contact element. Based on the material properties of adjacent elements, the stiffness will be
updated automatically according to the generated strain. Highly recommend to use Default setting for Scaling Factor.

Following is the summary of parameters for the Contact Elements.

Parameter Reference value (kN, m)

Contact stiffness (Recommend to use default setting)
Normal stiffness scaling 1 (The smaller value, the larger penetration)
Tangential stiffness scaling 0.1 ( Normal stiffness / 10)
Advanced options (parameters)
Contact Tolerance Auto (Uncheck) : Find contact area within the tolerance
Friction Coefficient (Optional) 0.3 ~ 0.6 (Depending on material types)
Impermeable (Uncheck) : Possible to allow seepage flow
Conduction for Seepage Flow
through the contact elements
Property used to describe ability to conduct heat
Thermal Conductance
between two bodies in contact.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Boundary > Define Set

Define Set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 739 of 1024

▒ Overview

Define the boundary condition set.

▒ Methodology

Input the name and specification and click [Add] to define the boundary condition set. The boundary
condition set can be input beforehand, and the name of each boundary condition can be entered when it is
generated.

The registered boundary condition set is automatically registered under Worktree > Analysis > Boundary
Condition and the checkbox is used to show or hide the set.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Boundary > Constraint

Constraint

▒ Overview

Set the constraint conditions of a model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 740 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Auto generation of self weight and boundary condition

The methods for setting a constraint condition of a model are Basic, Advanced and Auto.

Basic

Select the target and assign a [Fixed], [Pinned] or [No Rotation] that fits the behavior of the analysis model.

Advanced

The 6 degrees of freedom of a node can be fully or partially constrained.

Tx, Ty, Tz are the displacement constraints in the x, y, z direction and Rx, Ry, Rz are the rotational constraints in the x, y, z direction.

The constraint conditions can be input for a desired boundary condition (Point, Edge, Face, Node, Free face node).

The constraint conditions are assigned to the element node and reflected in the analysis. Setting the constraint conditions on a point, edge,
face etc. is a convenient method of selecting element nodes included in the selected geometry shape

Auto

Select the target mesh set to automatically create constraint conditions. The ground conditions for general stress analysis are set
automatically. The x direction displacement is constrained for the left/right side, the y direction displacement is constrained for the front/back
side and the x,y direction displacement is constrained for the bottom of a model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 741 of 1024

Boundary set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

Symmetric and inverse symmetric constraints

Boundary conditions can be largely divided into two conditions;

1. Constraint conditions of the analysis target are specified

2. Symmetry of the structure is used to analyze the symmetric area only, not the entire model.

Applying symmetry is a very effective way to increase the convenience of modeling and decrease the analysis time. If the geometry of the
structure and loading is symmetrical, a 1/2 model or 1/4 model can be used to decrease the number of elements and create an economic
model that reduces analysis time. However, constraints exist when checking the deformed shape or stress distribution for the entire model
because the analysis results from the symmetric model cannot be shown on the entire model. Here, use the View symmetric model function
on the Additional view control toolset to expand the analysis results of the 1/2 or 1/4 model onto the entire model.

l How to apply symmetric boundary conditions

If one or more of the geometry shapes, materials, loads or boundary conditions is symmetrical about a plane or axis, the symmetric boundary
condition can be used. The View symmetric model function can output, expand a 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 symmetric model onto the entire model. To
assign a symmetric boundary condition, a boundary condition needs to be set such that the structure does not invade the symmetry plane.

The figure below is an example of symmetric constraint conditions applied to a solid model. To apply the symmetric constraint conditions in
the YZ plane, the Translation degree of freedom Tx is constrained. For the XY plane, the Tz needs to be constrained and for the ZX plane, the
Ty needs to be constrained.

Because Solid elements do not have a rotational degree of freedom, only the displacement boundary condition of the symmetric model is
constrained. However, the rotational degree of freedom needs to be constrained for a Shell model such that the symmetry plane is not
invaded. In other words, Tx,Ry,Rz need to be constrained for the XY plane, Tz,Rx,Ry for the XY plane and Ty,Rx,Rz for the ZX plane.

When applying a symmetric boundary condition, the loading size needs to be converted to fit the symmetric condition. Also, the symmetric
condition cannot be applied to the model shape and buckling shape because of the asymmetric vibration mode or the possibility of
asymmetric buckling.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Boundary > Constraint Equation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 742 of 1024

Constraint Equation

▒ Overview

Constrain the degree of freedom such that a particular node is dependent on the behavior of another node.

▒ Methodology

Constrain the behavior of one node to the behavior of another node. Define the main node that
affects the deformation of another node and degree of freedom [Constrained Node/DOF]. TX, TY,
TZ are the degrees of freedom for displacement and RX, RY, RZ are the degrees of freedom for
rotation. [Independent Node/DOF] inputs the coefficient applied on the displacement of the
independent node, to define the degree of freedom and interrelationship between the dependent
node.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of
the boundary set.

The behavioral characteristics are similar to Mesh > Element > Create > Other > Rigid link. For
example, when the main node moves by a certain distance, the dependent node can be constrained
such that it moves by twice that length. When creating a complex interrelationship between two or
more nodes, the constraint equation can be used.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Boundary > Transmitting

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 743 of 1024

Transmitting

▒ Overview

Approximately express the semi-infinite ground layer by setting a virtual slip surface perpendicular to the horizontally layered ground. This is
done to consider the surface wave propagation into the far-field ground.

The transmit boundary condition is only used for Dynamic analysis > 2D Equivalent linear analysis.

The boundary conditions in ground modeling can be largely divided into:

1. [Element Boundary Condition]

2. [Viscous Boundary Condition]

3. [Transmitting Boundary Condition].

1. The [Element Boundary Condition] can be divided into: 1) the free end, where the force of the earthquake response load is input, and 2) the
fixed end, where the displacement is input at the free field boundary position. The [Element Boundary Condition] can consider the effects of
earthquake waves in the free field, but it does not consider the effects of waves reflecting off the foundation slabs of an existing structure. This
effect gets larger as the boundary position moves closer to the foundation slab.

2. The [Viscous Boundary Condition] was developed as a solution to the flaws of the [Element Boundary Condition] using a boundary condition
that absorbs material waves having a certain angle to the boundary, developed by Lysmer & Kuhlemeyer, Ang & Newmark, etc. However,
because the [Viscous Boundary Condition] cannot fully process the effects of complex surface waves, the boundary needs to be set at a certain
distance from the foundation slab, as with the element boundary.

3. The [Transmitting Boundary Condition] supplements the flaws of the [Viscous Boundary Condition] and considers the effects of nearly all
types of material and surface waves. The horizontal soil layer can be expressed as a spring and damper using a function of frequency. The
[Transmitting Boundary Condition] generally assumes that the horizontal properties of each ground layer are equal and so, satisfactory results
can be obtained even when the boundary condition exists at the structure itself. However, to accurately consider the property changes due to
horizontal deformation, it is effective to maintain a certain distance between the boundary and foundation slab.

▒ Methodology

Auto generation of transmitting boundary for 2D equivalent linear analysis

General

Select the element edge and line to set the transmit boundary on that element edge. The ground
information assigned to the element can be used to create the transmit boundary.

When the line between 2 different elements is selected, the transmit boundary is not created.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 744 of 1024

Auto

Selecting a mesh set automatically creates boundary conditions and elements at the left/right/floor
of the mesh, according to the user specified options. The spring constant value is calculated
depending on the ground material characteristics defined for the mesh set.

The right/left transmit boundaries of the analysis model can be set, and the viscous boundary can
be created at the floor surface and free face.

It is difficult to accurately simulate the ground, which exists almost infinitely, using a 2D model used
in Ground-Structure Analysis. Hence, the model boundary needs to be set at an engineering-
appropriate position and processed to simulate in-situ conditions.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of
the boundary set.

Auto create viscous boundary

The Viscous boundary condition can be created as follows.

1. Compute Cp and Cs

The Cp and Cs are calculated using the equations below:

Here, ,

λ : Volume modulus, G : Shear modulus, E : Elastic modulus, ν = Poisson’s ratio,

A : Cross-section area

Elastic Volume Shear Unit Poisson’s

P wave S wave
modulus modulus modulus weight ratio
Cp Cs
Class E λ G W
γ
(tonf· (tonf·
(tonf/m2) (tonf/m2) (tonf/m2) (tonf/m3)
sec/m3) sec/m3)
Ground A 2000 1459.53 751.88 2 0.33 24.579 12.381

l Multiplying the Cp, Cs (tonf•sec/m^3 units) by the cross-section area eventually leads to the
spring stiffness of the viscous boundary element in tonf•sec/m units.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 745 of 1024

l The shaded cell parameters are the physical properties of the ground that the user inputs
during modeling. The volume modulus and Shear modulus are calculated using the Elastic
modulus and Poisson’s ratio. Hence, there is no need to input additional values when creating
a viscous boundary element.

l When creating the bottom viscous boundary element, the spring is automatically created by
considering the element area (effective length*unit width) as shown below.

l Input the Cp value for the normal direction coefficient at the point of spring creation and
input the Cs value for the parallel direction. Hence, the bottom spring coefficient Cz becomes
the Cp value and the Cs value is applied to the Cx.

<Auto-create viscous boundary>

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Boundary > Boundary Table Import Export.htm

Boundary Table Import / Export

▒ Overview

Import the information of boundary conditions from excel file or export them to excel. The sample of table for boundary conditions
(BoundaryTable Sample.xlsx) can be found in the installation folder. (ex. C:\Program Files\MIDAS\GTS NX\Sample)

▒ Methodology

There are limitations in this function as follows.

- Constraint : The 'Advanced' type is only supported. The DOFs of 'Tx-Rz' are displayed ‘1’ (check on) or ‘0’ (check off).

- Nodal Head : The 'Total' and 'Pressure' type are separated.

- Nodal Flux : This is exported the same way as the ‘Nodal Head‘ type.

- Review : This is exported only the node information.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 746 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Load > Load Set

Load Set

▒ Overview

The load conditions can be classified as sets. It is useful to create the load set in advance for easy classification of data such as mesh sets,
boundary sets, etc, during analysis. When entering the actual loads, the loads can be inputted individually by entering their names. If the load
set is already classified, a particular factor can be assigned to each load set to create a combined load.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 747 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Load > Response Spectrum

Response Spectrum

▒ Overview

Input the response spectrum function (spectrum data) and response spectrum load direction for response spectrum analysis. Response
spectrum analysis expresses the natural period, natural angular frequency or natural frequency at the maximum physical quantity response as
a function when a dynamic load is applied to the structure. The analysis can be expressed as a displacement response spectrum, pseudo
rapidity response spectrum or pseudo acceleration response spectrum. The load and boundary conditions required for response analysis are
similar to that of static analysis, but the load is defined as a function of time and the internal force and damping force are included for
response analysis. The important results obtained from the transient response analysis are the node displacement, velocity, acceleration, and
the force and stress on the element. Detailed explanations on mode combination methods and damping setting methods for maximum
physical quantity (displacement, stress, member forces etc.) judgment of each mode can be found in the Analysis Control Settings.

The response spectrum load acts on the global mode, hence at one time, the response spectrum can only be applied in one global
direction.

▒ Methodology

[Direction]

Set the application direction of the response spectrum load with respect to the global coordinate system (GSC) and input the
[Period Modification Factor] that increases all applicable natural periods when applying the natural frequency from the
eigenvalue analysis.

[Spectrum Function]

Set the spectrum data for analysis. Select the button to define the spectrum function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 748 of 1024

Directly input the period and spectrum value in the left input column on the dialog box. The spectrum function is expressed as
a graph by plotting the spectrum value against the period. The spectrum function value for the natural period is linearly
interpolated and used in response spectrum analysis. Hence, for regions where the curvature of the spectrum curve changes
rapidly, dividing the region into multiple segments for compact spectrum values is recommended. The period range of the
spectrum function must contain all natural periods of the structure.

Using the add tool, the user can input multiple damping coefficients using the Add tool. The final illustration for results can be
derived from the illustration below:

The spectrum data types are normalized acceleration (acceleration spectrum, gravitational acceleration), acceleration, velocity
and displacement spectrum. Changing the time function data format only changes the application format, not the data format.
The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data. The entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

In the [Damping Ratio] space, input the damping ratio applied on the response spectrum. But if the damping ratio of the target
structure is different, the input spectrum data is processed to fit the structural damping ratio.

Apply Design spectrum

Use the built-in design spectrum. The default built-in design spectrum types are as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 749 of 1024

l Korea(Bridge) : Korea, Traffic Specification

l Japan(Bridge02) : Japan, Load instruction and Dynamic Analysis of Building

l China(JTJ004-89) : China, Specifications of Earthquake Resistant Design for Highway Engineering

l KBC 2009 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2009

l KBC 2005 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2005

l IBC2000(ASCE7-98) : USA, International Building Code 2000

l UBC(1997) : USA, Measure of Uniform Building Code 97

l EURO(2004H-ELASTIC) : Europe, Sesimic Design Measure for Structures

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Load > Ground Acceleration

Ground Acceleration

▒ Overview

Load the time load function for time history analysis using the ground acceleration. It is mostly used to check the seismic design of
structures or liquefaction due to earthquakes. Time history analysis uses the dynamic structural properties and the applied load to calculate
the structural behavior (displacement, member forces etc.) at an arbitrary time under dynamic loading. The Mode Superposition Method and
Direct Integration Method are available for time history analysis, and detailed information on the damping setting for each analysis method
can be found in [Analysis Control].

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 750 of 1024

[Direction]

Define the input (transmission) direction of ground acceleration. It is set with reference to the global
coordinate system (GCS) and multiple directions (X,Y,Z) can be combined to set a single ground
acceleration load set. The increment coefficient for the ground acceleration can be defined using a
scale factor and the arrival time can be controlled to set the ground acceleration delay time.

[Function]

Select the button to define the ground acceleration function.

Add time function

Construct the time varying load by directly entering the time and the corresponding time varying
load value in the left input column on the dialog box. The time function data types are classified by
Acceleration, Force(load), Moments, Normalized Acceleration (Time history acceleration /
Gravitational acceleration) or Normal(generalized). Changing the data format only changes the
application format, not the data format. The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data.
The entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

Time function load application

The defined function is also applicable for [Dynamic nodal (surface)] and [Time varying static].
Specifying 'force' or 'moments' uses the time varying load as a [Dynamic Nodal(surface)] input and
specifying 'Normalized acceleration' or 'Acceleration' uses it to input the [Ground Acceleration].
Specifying ‘Normal’ uses the time varying load as the change in static load with time for [Time
Varying Static] or [Dynamic surface].

Import/Earthquake waves

Save and import frequently used time varying load or select earthquake acceleration data from the

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 751 of 1024

program DB. There are a total of 32 types of earthquake accelerations.

Add Time sinusoidal

A sine function can be used to define the time varying load. A and C are constants, f is the
frequency of the input load, D is the damping factor and P is the phase angle. If the time varying
load is entered as a harmonic function, input the necessary sine function variables and click [Redraw
Graph] to view the loading on the right hand side.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Load > Time Varying Static

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 752 of 1024

Time Varying Static

▒ Overview

Use the pre-entered static load to create a time load function for time history analysis. The dynamic load is defined by multiplying the static
load by the time load function. The time forcing function used here is dimensionless and only the ‘Normal’ type time history data can be used.
This function is a replacement function that includes the [Dynamic nodal (surface)] created by the static load-time forcing function
combination.

▒ Methodology

Select the static load to be applied on the load set. The load application position, direction and size are already determined when entering the
static load, and the to-be applied time forcing function is selected. The gradient modulus of the load can be defined by a scale factor and the
arrival time can be set to simulate the delay time.

Select the button to add (select) a time forcing function. It can only be applied when the time forcing function data type is ‘Normal’
(dimensionless function)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 753 of 1024

Construct the time varying load by directly entering the time and the corresponding load change ratio in the left input column on the dialog
box. The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data. The entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Load > Dynamic Nodal (Surface)

Dynamic Nodal (Surface)

▒ Overview

Used to create a time load function for time history analysis directly. The static load and force (pressure load) is defined by applying a time
forcing function. The applicable time function data type for dynamic nodal loads are ‘Force’, ‘Moments’ and, for dynamic surface loads,
‘Normal’. In addition, the reference function can be applied to define a linear/non-linear distributed dynamic load that changes with position.
Generally it is used to define vibration, driving, blast and railway movement loads. The arrival time can be set to simulate the delay time.

▒ Methodology

Select the node where the load will be applied and specify the direction. The load size is applied by
multiplying the time function (load size by time) and each load component (scale factor).

[Object]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 754 of 1024

The applied load is defined on the node , but the selection target can also be set as a geometry
shape (edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes. For a line or surface, the selected
shape must have been used for element creation and the force is applied to all nodes in the
specified direction/size. For free face nodes, select a free face node and all points that make contact
with the node-containing element at an angle smaller than the specified angle (feature angle) will
be automatically selected.

[Reference Object]

The load direction can be set using different methods. The default input reference is the Global
rectangular(cylindrical) coordinate axis. Geometry shapes (Edge and Surface) can be selected as a
reference direction. Selecting 'Line' or 'Surface' displays the coordinate system of the selected
shape and the load is set with reference to that system. 'Vector' is used to specify the load direction
using X,Y,Z vector components.

[Components]

Input the load scale factor according to the set direction. Generally, the load size is pre-defined as a
time variant value in the time function, and if the maximum ratio value is defined as 1, the actual
load size is input in the time function. A positive (+) value applies the load in the set direction and a
negative (-) value applies the load in the opposite direction to the set direction. The load size
change, depending on the coordinate value increase in the global coordinate system (GCS), can be
defined using a reference function. Here, the input value is multiplied by the function value for
application.

[Time Dependency (Time function)]

Define the load size change with respect to time.

Select the button to add (select) a time forcing function. It can only be applied when the time
forcing function data type is 'Acceleration', 'Velocity', 'Displacement', ‘Force’ and ‘Moments’.
Methodology (Dynamic Surface)

Dynamic surfaces are input as the distributed load change with respect to time on the element face
or edge. It can be used on 2D or 3D elements and the input direction can be specified as an
arbitrary coordinate axis direction, arbitrary vector direction or normal direction.

[Components]

Input the load scale factor according to the set direction. The uniform or linear/non-linear
distributed load can be defined. A positive (+) value applies the load in the set direction, while a
negative (-) value applies the load in the direction opposite of the set direction. The load size
change, depending on the coordinate value increase in the global coordinate system (GCS), can be
defined using a reference function. Here, the input load component is multiplied by the function
value for application.

[Time Dependency (Time function)]

Define the load size change with respect to time.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 755 of 1024

Select the button to add (select) a time forcing function. It can only be applied when the time
forcing function data type is ‘Normal’. ‘Normal’ functions are dimensionless and have no units.
Hence, if the pressure load size is directly entered, only the scale factor is input for the load
component. If the maximum ratio value is defined as 1, the actual load size is input.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Load > Load to Mass

Load to Mass

▒ Overview

Convert the already defined static load into a mass for application in dynamic analysis, such as Response Spectrum or Time History Analysis.

▒ Methodology

Static Load (Force,Beam load and Pressure load) to Mass conversion

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 756 of 1024

Mass direction(Global Csys.)

Specify the directional component for consideration of the converted mass. When conducting analysis that considers earthquake effects
(Response spectrum analysis, Time history analysis using earthquake data), the lateral behavior is mainly considered and the selected X,Y
generally ignores the perpendicular direction mass component. However, for driving or floor slab vibration analysis, the gravitational direction
dictates the dominant vibration mode and the Z direction is selected. Thus, the mass consideration direction is set to fit the purpose of the
analysis type.

Static Load Type for Converting

Select the static load set to convert and select the force, beam load and pressure load information in the selected static load set for
conversion. The scale factor during load-mass conversion can be considered and the gravitational acceleration value applied in the conversion
is specified.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Load > Train Dynamic Load Table

Train Dynamic Load Table

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 757 of 1024

▒ Overview

Create a train dynamic load and apply it to the analysis model.

The train dynamic load can be created in the same was as Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Create Dynamic Load Data Generator > Train Dynamic
Load.

The created load judges the train velocity and spacing between nodes and automatically applies it to the analysis model as a dynamic nodal.

▒ Methodology

Auto generation and application of a train dynamic load

[Object] : Select the edge or node the train dynamic load passes through, and select the start and end nodes.

[Name]: Define the train type name.

[Train Type] : Select the type of train. 6 basic DB (Mugunghwa Train, 2 diesel cars, Korea), [Saemaeul Train, 8 cars, Korea), [KTX, 20 cars, Korea),
[EL-18 Standard, 6 cars, Korea), [EL-18 Standard, 8 cars, Korea), [EL-18 Standard, 10 cars, Korea) are provided and the user can directly input
the length/force depending on the number of wheels.

[Number of Wheels] : Stands for the number of wheels on the train. It is the same as the added number on the table.

[Train Velocity] : Input the velocity of the train.

[Time] : Input the time the train dynamic load is applied.

[Direction] : Input the direction in which the train dynamic load is applied. It is generally applied in the gravitational direction and thus the user
can specify it in the same direction as the gravitational direction of the 3D model.

[Dynamic Load Set] : Input the name that will be registered on the load set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 758 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Load > Load Table Import,Export

Load Table Import / Export

▒ Overview

The information of dynamic nodal load can be imported / exported to MS Excel file format.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 759 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Seismic Data Generator

Seismic Data Generator

▒ Overview

Construct the earthquake acceleration, earthquake response spectrum and design response spectrum using the earthquake wave database
built into GTS NX.

▒ Methodology

File

Save the data created on the SGS in various forms, output or import existing data.

Generate

Construct the earthquake acceleration, earthquake response spectrum and design response spectrum using the earthquake database built
into the SGS.

Earthquake Record

Display the earthquake wave data on the graph.

Select the earthquake wave, input the amplitude and time scale and click the [OK] button.

The created data is the normalized acceleration. The data time spacing is 0.02 seconds for North American earthquake waves and 0.01
seconds for Japanese earthquake waves. Other earthquake wave data on a '*. dbs (SGS dbase)' file can be used by clicking the [Import] button.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 760 of 1024

Earthquake Response Spectra

Display the earthquake response spectrum as a graph, using the earthquake wave data in the database or from the user defined earthquake
wave data.

1. Select the earthquake wave and input the amplitude and time scale. Import other earthquake wave data on a '*. dbs (SGS database)' file by
clicking the [Import] button.

2. Input the damping ratio. To output multiple damping ratio graphs simultaneously, click the [Add] button.

3. Input the period range and spacing of graph output on the output period.

4. Select the spectrum type.

5. Check the [X-axis log scale] to set the x axis of the spectrum in log scale.

Design Response Spectra

Create a Design Response Spectra and display as a graph.

Input the data necessary for spectra creation on the dialog box, input the spectrum period range and click the [OK] button to display the
graph.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 761 of 1024

Option

Set various options for the graph. The graph x axis and y axis can be displayed in log scale. The scale marks can be displayed. The thickness of
the graph line can be modified and the graph title can also be modified.

View

Change the show/hide status of the tool bar or status bar. Also, the Zoom function for the graph and the Time Domain and Frequency Domain
of the graph can be modified.

Zoom Out All

Return from the zoomed state to the original state.

To magnify a section of the graph, drag and select the desired section using the left mouse button. The right mouse button can be used to
return the view state to the original state.

Time<->Frequency

Convert the graph x axis from the time domain to the frequency domain and vice versa.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Dynamic Load Data Generator

Dynamic Load Data Generator

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 762 of 1024

▒ Overview

Create a blast load function from the suggested blast load formula, and create a railway load function from the railway load database.

▒ Methodology

Auto generation of train dynamic load and Blasting load

File

Save the data created using the DGS in various forms, or import existing data.

[Unit System]

Specify the force and length units of the dynamic load data. The unit system must be specified before creating the dynamic load data.

Blasting Dynamic Load

Select a suggested blasting load equation type, suggested by various institutions.

The institution, suggested equation and corresponding units are as follows:

Suggested by Suggested equation Used units

PD : kbar
National Highway
V : ft/sec
Institute(US), 1991
S : g/cm3
PD : kbar
International Society of
V : m/sec
Explosive Engineers, 2000
S : g/cm3

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 763 of 1024

PD : kbar
Johannson & Persson,.
V : km/sec
1973
S : g/cm3
PD : g/cm2

Jones & Hino, 1974 V : cm/sec

S : g/cm3
PD : kbar

Liu & Tidman, 1995 V : km/sec

S : g/cm3
PD : kbar
Atlas powder company,
V : ft/sec
1987
S : g/cm3

When calculating the blast pressure, use the equation to consider the effects of decoupling. Depending on whether you are

considering the effects of the blast periphery length, use or to calculate the value.

The final computed blast function can be calculated using the equation suggested by Starfield and Pugliese (1968) that considers the Window
Function:

Parameter

[Blasting Velocity(V)] : Input the blasting velocity. The fixed unit can change depending on the suggested equation.

[Explosive Density(S)] : Input the density of explosives. The units are fixed as [g/cm3].

[Charge Diameter(dc)] : Input the explosive diameter. The units are fixed as [mm].

[Borehole Diameter(dh)] : Input the diameter of the borehole. The units are fixed as [mm].

[Maximum Charge Amount (W)] : Input the maximum charge per delay. The units are fixed as [kg].

[Load Factor(B)] : Input the load coefficient.

[Sound Velocity in Rock(C)] : Input the ground sound velocity. It is only considered in the ‘Liu & Tidman, 1995’ equation and the units are fixed
as [km/sec].

[Rock Density(D)] : Input the ground density. It is only considered in the ‘Liu & Tidman, 1995’ equation and the units are fixed as [g/cm3].

Time

[End time] : Input the final time for blast load creation. The units are fixed as [sec].

[Time Increment] : Input the time increment for blast load creation. The units are fixed as [sec].

Graph option

[X-axis log scale] : Output the X axis in log scale.

[Y-axis log scale] : Output the Y axis in log scale.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 764 of 1024

Equivalent Transform Blasting Load

Consider the equivalent blasting load. (When considering, refer to the content above)

Blasting Hole Perimeter (L)

Input the blast periphery length. The units are fixed as [mm].

Train Dynamic Load

[Name]: Define name.

[Train Type] : User can directly input the distance/force depending on the number of wheels.

[Number of Wheels] : Stands for the number of wheels on the train. It is the same as the added number on the table.

[Train Velocity] : Input the velocity of the train. The units are fixed as [km/hr].

[Element Size] : Input the size of the element which the train passes through. The units are fixed as [m].

The input element size and train velocity can be used to compute the arrival time when constructing the influence line function. For railway
moving load, the load is applied gradually to the node as the train arrives and decreases as the load is removed, hence creating a triangle
shaped load function form.

[Table] : Input the dynamic load of the train. Typical domestic train loads are provided in the database and the load can also be input by the
user defined load (Number of wheels/Length/Force).

l Number : Input the wheel number. The number starts from 1 and the wheel spacing and force are input sequentially.

l Length : Input the wheelbase. For the first starting wheel, the length is input as 0.

l Force : Input the axial load acting on the wheels. The axial load can be divided into 2 and used as a working load.

[Scaling] : Input the gradient modulus of the railway dynamic load.

l Scale factor : Input the gradient modulus.

l Maximum value : Modify the railway dynamic load data such that the maximum load value becomes the specified desired value.

[Start time] : Input the start time of the railway load. The default value is 0 sec.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 765 of 1024

[Import] : Import a railway dynamic load in MS-EXCEL format. It is only activated when the train type is set to User Defined.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Free Field Analysis > Free Field Analysis(Starting)

Free Field Analysis(Starting)

▒ Overview

1D Ground Response Analysis, also called Site Response Analysis, is a program used to analyze the in-situ response of the ground for
earthquake inputs before excavation or construction.

Model (Strata modeling)

Model(Dynamic Curve Function)

Model(Ground acceleration function)

Earthquake Response Spectrum

Analysis

Result

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 766 of 1024

▒ Methodology

First set the project and then input the strata information and material properties, dynamic material property function and ground acceleration
function onto the model. Later, create an analysis case and conduct the analysis for result analysis.

File

Set the basic information of the project. Because the analysis results are affected by the values set in Project Setting, the settings need to be
accurately set before analysis. It is best if the Project settings are pre-set when starting a new project, but it is fine if the settings are changed
during modeling.

Set the unit system applied in the project. Click the [Unit Convert] button to set a different unit system. The time unit settings are not changed.

Edit

Return to the immediate previous state using undo, or use redo to return to the state before the command execution.

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Free Field Analysis > Model (Strata modeling)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 767 of 1024

Model : Strata modeling

▒ Overview

Create a ground model for the free field analysis. Input the ground material property data for each stratum to create a strata property.

▒ Methodology

<Strata modeling>

Click the Input ground material property data button to input the strata material properties. (The number of stratum is limited to a maximum
of 50.)

[Number] : Automatically assigned identification number that starts from 1.

[Depth] : Input the depth of a stratum. The depth value needs to be larger than 0 and is applied cumulatively. Entering the depth automatically
calculates the stratum thickness.

[Unit weight] : Input the unit weight of the stratum.

[Vs(m/sec)] : Input the shear wave velocity of the ground.

[G0(kN/m2)] : Input the maximum shear modulus.

[H0] : Input the initial damping ratio of the ground.

[Output Motion type]

l Outcropping

Applied to strata that outputs the analysis results in outcrop form.

l Within

Applied to strata that outputs the analysis results as a ground response.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 768 of 1024

[Dynamic Curve Function]

Click to select or create the shear modulus and damping ratio function to consider the non-linear, non- elastic behavior of the ground.
(For shear strain, refer to the dynamic material property function.)

Free Freld Analysis(Starting)

Model(Dynamic Curve Function)

Model(Ground acceleration function)

Earthquake Response Spectrum

Analysis

Result

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Free Field Analysis > Model(Dynamic Curve Function)

Model : Dynamic Curve Function

▒ Overview

Define the shear modulus and damping ratio function depending on the shear strain to consider the non-linear, non-elastic behavior of the
ground.

▒ Methodology

Add/Delete/Modify

Define a new dynamic material property function, or check, modify or delete the existing input data.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 769 of 1024

Function Name

[ID] : Define the function ID number.

[Name] : Input the function name.

[Description] : Display a simple description that explains the shear strain function.

Initialization

Conduct the reset function on the entered data.

Database

Import the database suggested by previous researchers.

Add/Modify Dynamic Curve Function

The database supported on the FFA (Free Field Analysis) is shown on the following table.

Classification Database
Clay - PI=10-20 (Sun et al.)

Clay - PI=20-40 (Sun et al.)

Clay - PI=40-80 (Sun et al.)

Clay - PI=5-10 (Sun et al.)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 770 of 1024

Clay - PI=80+ (Sun et al.)

Clay (Seed and Sun 1989)

Gravel (Seed et al.)

Linear

Rock

Shear modulus damping ratio curve Rock (Idriss)

Sand (Seed & Idriss ) - Lower Bound

Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average

Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound

Sand (Seed and Idriss 1970)

Vucetic - Dobry
Clay - Lower Bound (Sun et al.)

Clay - Average (Sun et al.)

Clay - Upper Bound (Sun et al.)

Clay (Idriss 1990)

Gravel (Seed et al.)

Linear

Damping ratio curve Rock

Rock (Idriss)

Sand (Idriss 1990)

Sand (Seed & Idriss ) - Lower Bound

Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average

Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound

Vucetic - Dobry

Import

Import the saved data file.

Export

Save the entered data as a file.

Using Dynamic Curve Equation

Define the material property values from the various existing databases. The dialog boxes below represent the Japan Public Works Research
Institute (JPWRI) equation, Port facility technical standard, Yasda’s method, Database according to the liquefaction manual, Japan Building
Standard Law no.1457 and Yamade’s equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 771 of 1024

<PWRI equation> <Method of the technical standards of port facilities>

<Asuda’s method> <Liquidal manual>

<The building standard law of Japan, no.1457> <Yamade’s equation>

Free Freld Analysis(Starting)

Model (Strata modeling)

Model(Ground acceleration function)

Earthquake Response Spectrum

Analysis

Result

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 772 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Free Field Analysis > Model(Ground acceleration function)

Model : Ground acceleration function

▒ Overview

Input the time varying load for earthquake analysis on the input ground.

▒ Methodology

Add/Modify/Delete Acceleration

Input a new acceleration data, or check, modify or delete the existing input data.

Function Name

Selected the input time history analysis condition. If the condition is not input beforehand, press the button to call up this function.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 773 of 1024

Time function data type

[Normalized acceleration]: This spectrum is found by dividing the acceleration spectrum with the gravitational acceleration, and it cannot be
set as another type.

[Acceleration]:The acceleration spectrum with time.

Scaling

Input the gradient modulus of the ground acceleration function.

[Scale factor] : Input the gradient modulus.

[Maximum value] : Modify the spectrum data such that the maximum acceleration becomes the specified desired value.

Gravity

Input the gravitational acceleration.

Graph Options

Specify whether to express the direction of each axis of a graph in log scale.

[x-axis log scale]

Specify whether to express the x-axis direction of a graph in log scale.

[y-axis log scale]

Specify whether to express the y-axis direction of a graph in log scale.

[F.F.T]

Specify whether to convert the graph based on Fourier Transformation.

Description

Display a simple description that explains the ground acceleration function. If an [Earthquake] is created, the maximum acceleration, time etc.
used to create the wave is displayed.

Export

Export the ground acceleration function as a text(*.txt) file.

Free Freld Analysis(Starting)

Model (Strata modeling)

Model(Dynamic Curve Function)

Earthquake Response Spectrum

Analysis

Result

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 774 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Free Field Analysis > Earthquake Response Spectrum

Earthquake Response Spectrum

▒ Overview

Calculate and display the graph of the earthquake response spectrum using the earthquake wave data in the database or from the user
defined earthquake wave data. Input the damping ratio. To output multiple damping ratio graphs simultaneously, click the [Add] button. Input
the period range and spacing of graph output for the result stage. Select the spectrum type. Check the X-axis log scale and Y-axis log scale
item to change the X-axis, Y-axis of the spectrum to a log scale.

▒ Methodology

The FFA provides the following 3 types of time varying load input methods for the convenience of the user:

1) Method of saving the frequently used time varying load as a file and importing

2) Method of calling up the time varying load from the database

3) Direct user input method

The earthquake load input is only supported for the value obtained by dividing the time history acceleration by the gravitational acceleration.

1. Method of saving the frequently used time varying load as a file and importing

[Import]

Used to import a time varying load from an existing data. The data format is '*.sgs' or '*.thd' and the file is created in the following format:

States that this file is in the data format of the GTS NX automatic earthquake data
*SGSw
extraction module "Seismic Data Generator".
*TITLE, Elcentro 1940, N-S
-
Component
*X-AXIS, Second -

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 775 of 1024

*Y-AXIS, Normalized Acceleration -

*UNIT&TYPE, GRAV, ACCEL -
*FLAGS, 0, 0 -
*DATA -
1.00000E-010, 3.50102E-001 -
5.00000E-002, 3.82861E-001 -
1.00000E-001, 5.08226E-001 -
1.50000E-001, 5.17459E-001 -
: -

<Table. 'fn.sgs' file format>

Selective item ** Annotation– Can be entered anywhere

- *UNIT, M , N - Length : MM, CM, M, INCH, FEET, GRAV 가능
*Load : KG, TON, KN, LBF, KIP
- *TYPE, ACCEL - ACCEL, FORCE, MOMENT 가능
Essential item *Data
- X1 , Y1 (X : Time, Y : Time Function)
- X2 , Y2
- X3 , Y3
- :

<Table. 'fn.thd' file format –: User input>

2. Method of calling up the time varying load from the GTS NX database

[Earthquake wave]

Create a time varying load by importing various earthquake data from the database. There are a total of 32 types of earthquake acceleration in
the DB.

3. Direct user input method

Construct the time varying load by directly entering the time and the corresponding time varying load value in the left input column on the
dialog box.

Free Freld Analysis(Starting)

Model (Strata modeling)

Model(Dynamic Curve Function)

Model(Ground acceleration function)

Analysis

Result

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 776 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Free Field Analysis > Analysis

Analysis

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Create an analysis case. Add a new analysis case, or modify, copy, delete an existing analysis case. The input window for
analysis case creation is as follows:

▒ Methodology

General

[Name] : Input the analysis model name.

[Description] : Input the description for the analysis model.

General Setting

[Ground Material Set] : Select the modeled stratum to be used for analysis.

[Depth No. of Bed Rock] : Select the stratum number corresponding to the bedrock.

Control Motion Input

[Outcropping(2E)] : Set the ground acceleration as an outcrop state.

[Within(E+F)] : Set the ground acceleration as the ground response.

[Depth No.] : Select the control point for the earthquake wave input stratum.

[Ground Acceleration Function] : Select the input earthquake acceleration time varying load.

Water Level

[No. of Water Level] : Stratum ID inputted in Ground Material can be selected, and it calculates assuming that the
water level exists from the selected stratum.

Analysis

[Cut-off Frequency] : Set the maximum frequency range for frequency analysis.

[Frequency Step (for Transfer function)] : Set the calculation frequency spacing for transfer function analysis.

[Maximum Number of Iteration] : Input the maximum iterative calculations to find the equivalent linear material
property value.

[Tolerance] : Input the tolerance for the shear modulus and damping ratio used to find the equivalent linear
material property value through iterative calculations.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 777 of 1024

[Effective strain coefficient] : Input the coefficient needed to calculate the effective shear strain from the maximum
shear strain.

Response spectrum

[Damping] : Input the damping ratio to calculate the response spectrum.

IMG_C_ICON_D
Free Freld Analysis(Starting)

IMG_C_ICON_D
Model (Strata modeling)

IMG_C_ICON_D
Model(Dynamic Curve Function)

IMG_C_ICON_D
Model(Ground acceleration function)

IMG_C_ICON_D
Earthquake Response Spectrum

IMG_C_ICON_D
Result

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Free Field Analysis > Result

Result

▒ Methodology

Result

l The analysis results are output in a graph or table for each depth.

l Converging results and table (Absolute) (Maximum acceleration, Maximum velocity, Maximum displacement)

l Converging results and table (Relation) (Maximum acceleration, Maximum velocity, Maximum displacement)

l Strain/Stress result table (Uniform strain, Maximum strain, Maximum shear strain)

l Soil profile result table (Converging damping ratio, Converging shear modulus, Shear modulus ratio)

l Soil profile table (Shear wave velocity, Shear modulus, Damping ratio)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 778 of 1024

Result : Time History Result

Select the function type of the output graph. The function types are ground movement, response spectrum, stress/strain, and transfer function.

[Time History Result Function]

Select the function data, strata, result type of the output graph. Each result type can be selected depending on the ground movement result
function type.

round Motion Result Function

Result type
Type
Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, Relative displacement, Relative
Ground Motion
Velocity, Relative acceleration
Relative displacement, Relative pseudo-velocity, Relative velocity,
Response Spectrum
Absolute pseudo-acceleration, Absolute acceleration
Stress/Strain Stress, Strain
Transfer Function Transfer function

The selected result function is registered on the y axis.

The graph name, x axis name and y axis name can be defined for the time history graph in Define Graph, and the values can also be expressed
in exponential form.

The x axis, y axis can be represented in log scale or the F.F.T can be set in Graph Options.

The generated graph is displayed in the dialog window and can be exported in many forms such as image file, image word file or excel file.

Free Freld Analysis(Starting)

Model (Strata modeling)

Model(Dynamic Curve Function)

Model(Ground acceleration function)

Earthquake Response Spectrum

Analysis

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Artificial Earthquake

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 779 of 1024

Artificial Earthquake Generator

▒ Overview

Generate artificial earthquake data from the embedded design spectral data.

Envelope Function enables to generate transient earthquake data.

There are three types of envelope functions : Trapezoidal, Compound and Exponential. GTSNX supports Trapezoidal Type.

▒ Methodology

[Design Spectral Data] [Process of Artificial Earthquake Generation]

where, ωn= Frequency, An = Amplitude, Фn = Phase Angle, and I(t) = Envelope Function

[Envelope Function]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 780 of 1024

Envelope function will be multiplying to steady stage motion for transient of real seismic and this function can be divided to trapezoidal, compound, and exponential. Acceleration time
history will be almost same value from start to end without this envelope function.

Generate Options

- Max Iterations : Maximum number of iterations to fit computed spectral data to target one.

- Max. Acceleration : Maximum acceleration of artificial earthquake data

- Damping Ratio : Damping ratio to calculate spectral data

- Random Seed: To define the random seed for calculating the response spectrum from artificial earthquake (Artificial positive value).

Generate Acceleration : Convert from response spectrum to acceleration data

- Spectrum Graph : Check results based on spectral data

- Acceleration Graph : Check results based on acceleration data

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Material Evaluator

Material Evaluator

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 781 of 1024

▒ Overview

This tool allows the user to create materials for GHE-S, Bowl Model, Ramberg-Osgood & Hardin Drnevich from calibration of experimental
values and also from an existing database, this also creates a material input model in the Material tab.

▒ GHE-S model

Name

Enter the name for the material or data set.

Description

The user can add a description for the specific data set.

Database

Apart from incorporating experimental values from excel, the user can also input some pre existing data as illustrated below.

Strain Compatible Property Database Modulus Reduction Curve

Damping Curve

Dynamic Strain Compatible Equation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 782 of 1024

Public Works Research Institute Method of Technical Standards of Port

Facilities

Yasda's Method Liquidal Manual

Bowl Model

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 783 of 1024

Bowl Model Material Input Parameters

Ramberg-Osgood/ Hardin-Drnevich Model

Ramberg-Osgood/ Hardin-Drnevich Model Material Input Parameters

Home > GTS NX > Dynamic Analysis > Options > Options

Options

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Set the general environment of the program. The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary
Condition, Analysis/Results.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 784 of 1024

▒ Methodology

General

[General]

l Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.

l License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web Authorization method are supported.

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

[Graphic]

l Work View : Set the options for the screen.

- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.

- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder shaped curved surface. The available levels are
from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and smoother surface as the level gets higher.

- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work window during view rotation.

l Selection : Specify the options for the model part.

l Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.

l Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.

l Element : Specify the color for each element type.

l Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show the shadow and controls its shade. The
available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information shown as the level gets higher.

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]

l Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.

l Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]

l Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.

l Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol 3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z
axis respectively.

[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.

[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.

[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.

[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol.

Analysis/Results

[Analysis]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 785 of 1024

l Number of processors : Specify the number of CPUs used for analysis. For a dual core CPU, input 2 processors and for a quad core CPU,
input 4 processors to increase the analysis speed.

l Element Formulation : Specify the formula applied to the element.

In terms of speed, a faster solution can be obtained in order of Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability) > Hybrid (Accuracy). In terms
of accuracy, a more accurate solution can be obtained in order of Hybrid (Accuracy) > Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability).

l Equation Solver (Structural) : Specify the method for solving a finite element simultaneous equation. If the setting is automatic, the
program automatically determines one of the following methods: Multifrontal, Dense matrix or AMG(Algebraic Multi-Grid).

l 2D Element Setting (Structure) : The [Unique Shell Normal Generation] function judges two adjacent shell elements to have two different
normal directions when the value between the normal direction vectors are larger than the input value. Because the element size is
relatively larger than the curvature, if this value is increased for a rough curved mesh, a smooth contour that considers the curvature of
the geometry shape can be calculated.
The [Consider Drilling DOF(degree of freedom)] option calculates the stiffness of the in-plane deformation by considering the rotation
about the out-plane axis (drilling degree of freedom).

[Result]

l General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default value is set as 1e-12, and results lower
than this value is considered as 0.

l Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.

l Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to represent the vectors.

l Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.

l No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.

l Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.

l Graph : Select whether to show the graph.

l Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.

l Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Property

Property
Go to Section property

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Add/define ground and structural properties. This function defines the property of each mesh set when a ground or
structure mesh is generated. For ground, it determines which material to use and for structures, it adds section size, shape (stiffness) and
horizontal spacing etc. The horizontal spacing is the 1D spacing between structural members in the horizontal direction of a 2D model.
Tapered section option, where the size (thickness) of a beam or plate changes, is also available.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 786 of 1024

Create

Creates 1 of the following 4 property types and adds a material type and section characteristic for each property.

The supported model type for each property type is as follows. The section shape/size, stiffness depending on spacing and selectable
materials is defined.

Go to Section property

Ground Structural
Property type Model type Nonlinear property
property property
Geogrid(1D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(1D) X X -
From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
1D From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Embedded truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Beam X O -
Embedded Beam X O -
Pile X O -
Geogrid(2D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(2D) X X -
Gauging shell X O -
2D Axisymmetric O X -
Shell X O -
Plane stress X O Tension Only
Plane strain O X -
3D Solid O X -
Rigid link X O -
Pile tip X O -
User Supplied Behavior
X O -
for Shell Interface
Linear Elastic
Tension Only
Compression Only
Point spring X O
Hook
Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Matrix spring X O -
Others
Free Field
Free Field O X
Absorbent Boundary
Interface X O -
Shell interface X O -
From Adjacent Element
Infinite O X
User Defined
Linear Elastic
Rigid Body
Elastic link X O Tension Only
Compression Only
Nonlinear Elastic

Refer to Ch.3 of the Analysis manual for detailed information on each input parameter and behavioral characteristic.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 787 of 1024

Import

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Property > Section Property

Section Property

▒ Overview

The section material properties need to be defined for a 1 dimensional truss, embedded truss or beam element. Here, the truss and
embedded truss only need the cross-sectional area but the beam needs other material properties such as total cross section, torsional rigidity,
first area moment of inertia and second area moment of inertia to consider torsion, bend and shear.

The thickness of the element needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1 and the user can define the used units according to the thickness.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. Here, the plate element has a
rotor float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

▒ Methodology

1D element

1D element is an element that is made up of 2(primary) or 3(secondary) nodes and has the geometric property of length. Because 3D shapes
are expressed as 1D elements, the section (size, shape) needs to be defined and this is modeled as a 2D element for calculations.

GTS NX provides various shapes, as shown in the figure below. The position can also be set when defining the sectional properties.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 788 of 1024

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

QUAD-4 6400개 QUAD-4 3400개 QUAD-4 1700개

<Solid square> <H section> <Channel>

<Automatic section modeling >

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 789 of 1024

<Solid Rectangle> <Solid Round> <Pipe>

<Box> <T-section> <H-section>

<Channel> <Angle> <Cross>

<I-section> <Channel 1> <Hat>

<Section shape and size specification>

1D element SRC Section

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 790 of 1024

<SRC Section DB>

SRC(Steel Reinforced Concrete) can be defined under 1D element(truss, beam, embedded truss, embedded beam).

It has added SRC-Box, SRC-Pipe, Sect-HBeam, Circle-HBeam in the section of 1D element. User can define the section selecting the database
of steel and concrete, elastic modulus of steel will use for calculation.

Steel Data: Input the parameter of steel section or selecting the section from database.

Concrete Data: Input the outer dimensions of section for steel concrete

Material: Select the material for SRC or input the parameters. The parameters will be inputted automatically selecting the database from [Select Material from DB…].

Es/Ec: Elastic ratio between steel and concrete

Ds/Dc: Deadweight ratio between steel and concrete

Ps: Poisson’s ratio of steel

Pc: Poisson’s ratio of concrete

Conv. Stiffness Factor: Stiffness reduction factor of concrete (default=1.0) for SRC section

2D element

2D elements are Triangles or Quadrilaterals with the geometric property of area. Because 3D shapes are expressed as 2D elements, the
thickness needs to be defined. The thickness can be set the same or tapered.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 791 of 1024

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

3D element

3D elements are Tetrahedron or Hexahedrons, Bricks with the geometric property of volume.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 792 of 1024

<Actual model> <Finite element model>

Cross sectional area (A)

The cross sectional area is used to calculate the axial stiffness when a tensile or axial force acts on the member or the stress on a member. The
calculations for the H section are as follows.

There are 2 methods to calculate the cross sectional area in the GTS NX. The first method uses the provided database to input the dimensions
of a section and automatically calculate the area. For the second method, the user calculates the area directly and inputs the value. The first
method is convenient, but because it does not consider the decrease in area due to bolts in the connection or rivet holes, the area entered
using the second method may provide more accurate results.

<Example of cross sectional area calculation>

Torsional stiffness (I )
xx

The torsional stiffness resists the torsional moment and is expressed as follows.

Here, : Torsional stiffness,

: Torsional moment or torque,

: Torsional angle (angle of twist),

: Shear modulus

The torsional stiffness is the stiffness that resists the torsional moment and is different from the polar moment of inertia that decides the shear
stress due to torsion. (However, the 2 are the same when considering a circular cross-section or a thick cylindrical section)

The torsional stiffness can be calculated from Saint-Venant's principle as shown below.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 793 of 1024

is the warping function that can be calculated using the Finite element method as shown below.

Because , the torsional stiffness comp1nt is expressed as the following equation.

Effective shear area (Asy, Asz )

The effective shear area is needed to calculate the shear stiffness that resists the shear force acting on the y axis or z axis of the element
coordinate system. If the effective shear area is not entered, the shear strain in that direction is ignored.

Here, : Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system

: Effective shear area that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

When the interior section material properties are calculated or entered from the database, the shear stiffness comp1nt is automatically
considered and the effective shear factor is calculated using the warping function from the shear force caused by bending moment
and the warping function from the Saint-Venant principle.

Here,

Area moment of inertia (Iyy, Izz)

The area moment of inertia is used to calculate the flexural stiffness that resists the bending moment and is calculated from the centroid axis
of the section using the following equation.

l • Area moment of inertia about the y axis of the element coordinate system

l Area moment of inertia about the z axis of the element coordinate system

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 794 of 1024

Section element b h
① 10 4 40 2 80 5 200
② 2 10 20 9 180 5 100
③ 8 3 24 15.5 372 5 120
total - - 84 - 632 - 420

<Table. First area moment of inertia and calculation of centroid >

: area

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the z′-axis direction

: distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the y′-axis direction

: first moment of area relative to the reference point in the z′-axis direction

l • Calculate position of neutral axis ( , )

l • Calculate second area moment of inertia ( , )

Section element
① 40 5.5328 1224.5 53.3 1277.8 0 0 333.3 333.3
② 20 1.4672 43.1 166.7 209.8 0 0 6.7 6.7
③ 24 7.9762 1526.9 18.0 1544.9 0 0 128.0 128.0
total 2794.5 238.0 3032.5 0 468.0 468.0

<Table. Second area moment of inertia example>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 795 of 1024

Area product moment of inertia (Iyz)

The area product moment of inertia is used to calculate the stress comp1nt of an asymmetrical section and the definition is as follows.

H, pipe, box, channel, tee type sections have at least 1 axis of symmetry out of the y,z axis on the element coordinate system and hence Iyz=0.
For angle type sections, it does not have any angle of symmetry (Iyz≠ 0) and so, the stress comp1nt needs to be calculated.

The calculations for the area product moment of inertia of an angle type section are shown in the figure below.

<Area product moment of inertia calculations for an angle section>

< Flexural stress distribution diagram for asymmetrical section>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 796 of 1024

The neutral axis is the axis that passes the points where the flexural stress due to the bending moment is ‘0(zero)’ within the member. The
neutral axis is perpendicular to the -axis and the -axis.

Because the flexural stress due to bending moment is ‘0’ on the neutral axis, the neutral axis direction can be found by the following equation.

The general equation used to calculate the flexural stress due to bending moment is as follows.

If this is a H type section, and,

Here, : Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Area product moment of inertia,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Elemental axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Bending moment about the axis of the element coordinate system

The shear stress due to shear force acting in the axis and axis direction of the element coordinate system can be calculated using the
following equation.

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: First area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

First moment of area (Qy, Qz)

The first moment of area is used to calculate the shear stress at an arbitrary point on the section and the shear stress can be calculated using
the following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 797 of 1024

For a section that is symmetrical about the y, z or both axis, the shear strength on an arbitrary point can be calculated using the following
equation.

Here, : Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Shear force acting in the axis direction of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Second area moment of inertia about the axis of the element coordinate system,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis,

: Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction to the elemental axis

Element thickness

On the GTS NX, the thickness needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid element, plate element, plane strain
element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here, the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface
element have an interior unit weight of 1.

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the user. The plate element has a rotor
float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration is performed in the thickness direction.

Spacing

This functionality is in the 1D element property which is activated only in 2D project setting. Since this option is used to consider the 1D
element force per each element when the user introduce the 1D element more or less than one along the axis of horizontal direction
(thickness direction) in 2D model.

If the user uncheck the spacing option, on the GTS NX, the spacing will be regarded as Plane Strain Thickness in the analysis setting, meaning
that the unit thickness based on the selected unit system.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 798 of 1024

On the GTS NX, spacing is used to calculate the stiffness of the element and output the member force per each element.

where, n = spacing, L = length , A = area, K* = stiffness considering spacing.

where, f* = member force

Refer to the following example,

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material

Material

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 799 of 1024

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Define the general stiffness and nonlinear material properties of the ground and structure. For ground, additional
permeability properties and drained/undrained conditions can be set.

▒ Methodology

Create

Add a ground or structure material. The following 4 material types can be selected and the model type can be set for each material type.

The model type available for each material type is shown below. The ground/structure material properties and the material behavior
properties are defined for each model type. Here, the elements used for ground modeling such as plane strain or solid can be assigned to a
structure material that does not consider Ko effects or permeability properties.

Ground Structure Material behavior

Material type Model type
material material properties
Elastic O O Linear elastic
Tresca O O Elasto-plastic
von Mises (Nonlinear) O O Elasto-plastic
Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Drucker Prager O O Elasto-plastic
Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Generalized Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Hyperbolic(Duncan-
O X Elasto-plastic
Chang)
Strain Softening O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Cam Clay O X Elasto-plastic
Jardine O X Nonlinear elastic
D-min O X Nonlinear elastic
Isotropic(General Modified Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Parameter)
Soft Soil O X Elasto-plastic
Soft Soil Creep O X Elasto-plastic
User defined model O O Elasto-plastic
Modified UBCSAND O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Ramberg-
O O Elasto-plastic
Osgood
Modified Hardin-Drnevich O O Elasto-plastic
Hardening Soil(small
O X Elasto-plastic
strain stiffness)
Generalized SCLAY1S O X Elasto-plastic
CWFS O O Elasto-plastic
PM4Sand O X Elasto-plastic
Transversely Isotropic O O Linear elastic
Jointed Rock Mass O O Elasto-plastic
Orthotropic
2D Orthotropic X O Linear elastic
Geogrid X O Elasto-plastic
(Equivalent)Linear
2D Equivalent 2D Equivalent O O
elastic
Interface X O Elasto-plastic
Shell Interface X O Elasto-plastic
Interface / Pile
User supplied - Shell
X O Elasto-plastic
Interface

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 800 of 1024

Pile X O Nonlinear elastic

Isotropic

Isotropic materials have the same properties in every direction and is used to define material behavior properties of most linear-elastic /
nonlinear elastic / elasto-plastic materials.

Orthotropic

Natural ground is generally layered and sloped, making it possible to have different strengths in each orthogonal direction. This option can
also be used to define Jointed Rocks, which have different properties depending on the direction and behave differently according to the
specific confinement conditions. In case of 2D Orthotropic, users can define different values of stiffness along each direction. It is required to
define geometrically orthotropic with significant different stiffness in horizontal and vertical direction.

2D Equivalent

2D equivalent linear analysis specific model. Use the converging strength and damping ratio from the equivalent linear method to consider
the nonlinear and n1lastic behavior of materials.

Interface / Pile

Applied when simulating relative behavior (interface behavior) between ground and structure.

Modify/Copy/Delete

Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only changing certain parameters.

Import/Import from Excel / Export to Excel

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is useful when analyzing the existing
project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the
desired material.

The user can construct the frequently used material DB by importing or exporting the excel file containing the material properties.

Renumber

Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration number to recently added number+1.

Refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual to understand the Finite element formulization and yield shape. The input parameters and behavioral
characteristics for each material model are as follows.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Material > Material Properties

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 801 of 1024

Material Properties

▒ Methodology

Default parameter (General)

The input parameters and units for defining the default stiffness and initial condition of each model are listed in the table below

Input parameter Definition Unit

Elasticity modulus(
Elasticity modulus kN/m2
)
Elasticity modulus The Elasticity modulus increment amount depending on height
kN/m3
increment (slope)
Reference height Reference height of Elasticity modulus increment m
Poisson’s ratio( ) Poisson’s ratio -
Unit weight (γ) Unit weight of entire unsaturated soil(γt) kN/m3
Initial stress (Ko) Coefficient of earth pressure (initial stress parameter) -
Temperature
Coefficient for calculating temperature loading 1/[T]
coefficient
Damping ratio Material damping ratio (only applied to dynamic analysis) -
Safety Result (Mohr- Calculate Factor of Safety for each element based on MC failure
-
Coulomb) criteria

[Elastic modulus (E)]

This parameter defines the default initial stiffness of the material. The user can specify the Elasticity modulus, or use the Shear modulus (G) or
Oedometer Elasticity modulus (Eoed) from the Oedometer test. The initial stiffness is very important because geo-materials display nonlinear
behavior from the early stages of loading. The initial stiffness can be defined from the stress-strain curves of the triaxial compression test. It is
realistic to use the E0 for materials that display linear (elastic) behavior until a large strain but for general geo-materials, E50, the slope of the
tangent at 50% of the stress, is appropriate as an initial stiffness. When simulating unloading and reloading due to excavation during
construction step analysis, it is better to use Eur instead of E50 to realistically simulate the ground behavior.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 802 of 1024

Hence, it is important to set the stress path and stress range (size) when using the initial stiffness to simulate the ground behavior. To simulate
detailed behavior, various nonlinear material models can be used.

<Triaxial compression test result graph>

The use of K(bulk modulus) and G(shear modulus) may be debatable use to the continuity issues associated with the ground, but it can be
expressed more simply and clearly than E or v and is convenient to use. The following figure briefly explains the mechanical significance of K
and G.

<Various types of Elasticity modulus>

The Elasticity modulus values gained from on-site tests can be 1 of the many elasticity moduli discussed above and can be modified
appropriately for real situations.

Elasticity modulus
Geo-material Poisson’s ratio
(tonf/m2)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 803 of 1024

amphibolite 9.4~12.1 ´106 0.28~0.30

anhydrite 6.8 ´106 0.30
siabase 8.7~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.30
siorite 7.5~10.8 ´106 0.26~0.29
solomite 11.0~12.1 ´106 0.30
sunite 14.9~18.3 ´106 0.26~0.28
deldspathic gneiss 8.3~11.9 ´106 0.15~0.20
gabbro 8.9~11.7 ´106 0.27~0.31
granite 7.3~8.6 ´106 0.23~0.27
ice 7.1 ´106 0.36
limestone 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
marble 8.7~10.8 ´106 0.27~0.30
mica Schist 7.9~10.1 ´106 0.15~0.20
obsidian 6.5~8.0 ´106 0.12~0.18
oligoclasite 8.0~8.5 ´106 0.29
quartzite 8.2~9.7 ´106 0.12~0.15
rock salt 3.5 ´106 0.25
slate 7.9~11.2 ´106 0.15~0.20
aluminum 5.5~7.6 ´106 0.34~0.36
steel 20.0 ´106 0.28~0.29

<The Elasticity modulus and Poisson’s ratio for rock and other materials>

The Elasticity modulus in the table above is for small, intact rock samples tested in the lab. Hence, when considering the site conditions, a
reduced elasticity modulus needs to be used considering the discontinuous surfaces within large scale rocks. The figure below is a graph of
actual data showing the relationship between the RQD (Rock Quality Designation) and the Elasticity modulus reduction ratio. An RQD is the
percentage of the sum of the lengths of cracks that are over 10cm and exist on the 100cm situ core against the total length. An RQD of 100%
does not mean the core is an intact rock. However, a higher RQD means a higher quality rock and the RQD decreases with more weathering.

<RQD- Modulus reduction ratio (EL/EM) relationship>

As shown on the figure, an RQD of 70% already needs to decrease the lab Elastic modulus by 20%.

[Increment of Elastic modulus]

In general, the strength properties of the soil change with depth and confining pressure, even within a ground layer composed of the same
material. To take this characteristic into account, increase or decrease in the Elastic modulus can be simulated with reference to a reference
height (standard height). If the elastic increase according to height is '0(zero)', the Elastic modulus has a constant value and if it is not '0(zero)',
the Elastic modulus is calculated with reference to a standard height using the following equation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 804 of 1024

Here, : Input elastic modulus value

: Incremental slope of elastic modulus

: Depth of measurement

<Schematic diagram of Elastic modulus increment>

The in the equation represent the integral point positions of an element where the finite element method calculation occurs. If the integral
point position is higher than , the elastic modulus value can be less than 0 in some places. To avoid this, use the value instead of
further decreasing the value.

[Poisson’s ratio( )]

Poisson’s ratio is a proportional constant from the stress-strain relationship and displays the material volume change associated with loading.
As approaches 0.5, the material becomes an incompressible solid and closer to 0 means the material is elastic, showing large volume
changes even at small loads. The initial stress ratio due to self weight K0 = σh/ σv can be related to the ratio in the uniaxial compression state
by K0 = . If K0 is not used to define the initial in-situ stress, the horizontal stress is calculated from the vertical stress using the
entered . For geo-materials, the general Poisson range is within 0.3~0.4 and entering a value larger than 0.49 can cause numerical errors.
Hence, if K0 is larger than 1, for example over-consolidated ground, the Poisson’s ratio cannot be calculated and the value must be entered
directly.

Shear modulus(G)

The Shear modulus is automatically calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation derived from Hooke's
law. If the value is directly entered, the Elastic modulus changes.

[Oedometer Elastic modulus (Eoed)]

The Oedometer modulus can be calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the following equation.

[Initial stress (K0)]

K0 is the Coefficient of earth pressure, which is defined as the ratio of the initial vertical/horizontal stress (K0 = σh/ σv). The anisotropic
property can be set with reference to the Global Coordinate System.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 805 of 1024

Firstly, select yes/no on whether the Global Coordinate System direction and anisotropic property match and set the lateral pressure index in
each axis or any direction depending on the selected options.

When the 2 properties do match, the lateral pressure index is set in each axis direction but a value of ‘1’ in the direction of gravity cannot be
defined depending on the work environment (2D/3D).

When the 2 properties do not match, the lateral pressure index direction is set by entering the angle with respect to the reference axis. The
reference axis exists to set the lateral pressure index direction. For a 2D work environment, the ’X-Y’ plane is fixed and only the ‘X’ axis can be
selected, with all initial shear stress at ‘0(zero)’. For 3D, each axis apart from the gravitational direction can be selected. For example, if the
gravitational direction is the ‘Z’ axis and the reference axis is set as the ‘X’ axis, the angle can be entered on the ‘X-Z’ plane will be the
maximum lateral pressure angle and all initial shear stress in the XY and YZ direction will be '0(zero)'.

The in-situ stress state, where the soil it not disturbed by excavation or fill, can be expressed using the Coefficient of earth pressure and self
weight. In other words, realistic results can be obtained from applying K0 after modeling the in-situ ground for the 1st step of construction
during analysis. This is true for flat foundations but for inclined foundations, it is recommended that another construction process be added to
converge the stress found using K0 for equilibrium.

[Thermal Parameter]

Thermal Coefficient - describes how the size of an object changes with a change in temperature. Specifically, it measures the fractional
change in size per degree change in temperature at a constant pressure.

Molecular vapor diffusion coefficient - the gas diffusion coefficient of a porous medium, which indicates the change in gas density over time.
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

Thermal diffusion enhancement (factor) - controls the degree of gas flow according to the temperature gradient (unit less).
This parameter is will be used in next release of GTS NX in 2019 after additional analysis enhancement.

[Safety Result (Mohr-Coulomb)]

§Cohesion, Friction Angle and Allowable tensile strength (optional) can be defined as the failure criteria.

§Stress status of material for each construction stage can be represented by Factor of Safety based on Mohr-Coulomb failure criteria.

§The ratio of generated stress to stress at failure for each element will be calculated automatically.

§Users can figure out stable, potential failure and plastic failure area directly.

§Check factor of safety for each element - (2D : Plain Strain Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR , 3D : Solid Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR)

§In case that Safety Factor is less than 1(or 1.2), it can be identical with plastic failure region.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 806 of 1024

Porous: Seepage, Drained/Undrained Parameter

The input parameters for the permeability characteristics and drained/undrained conditions of the foundation are as follows.

Input parameter Definition Unit

Unit weight(saturated) Saturated state unit weight kN/m3
Initial void ratio(eo) Initial void ratio -
Unsaturated characteristic function setting (negative pore water
Unsaturated characteristic -
pressure-water content-permeability ratio)
Drainage parameter Drained/Undrained condition -
Permeability coefficient GCS direction - Saturated permeability constant m/sec
Void ratio dependent permeability
Permeability ratio dependent on void ratio -
ratio (ck)
Specific storage(Ss) Volume ratio of water inflow/outflow 1/m

<Permeability parameter>

[Initial void ratio (e0)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 807 of 1024

The initial void ratio of the foundation used in consolidation analysis and stress-seepage coupled analysis. It is the volume ratio between the
voids and soil particles within the soil and the value is less than 1 for most soils. The value can be larger than 1 for clays or organic soils, but
the value depends greatly on the sampling method or compaction. Generally, coarse grain sand has a value of 0.6~0.8 and high density sand
with an even size distribution has a value of 0.3. The void ratio can be even 2~3 for fine grained soils.

[Unsaturated Property]

Set to consider the unsaturated property of the foundation. It is a required property for unsteady infiltration analysis and is used to consider
the partial degree of saturation of the foundation for nonlinear (construction step)/consolidation analysis etc. Because real foundations are
unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil for more realistic
results. If the unsaturated properties are not considered, it is assumed that the ground is saturated and hence, the infiltration analysis with
time cannot be examined.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship). Refer to
"Function>Unsaturated characteristic function" for more information.

[Drainage parameters]

The pore water pressure in stress analysis can be divided into normal state pore water pressure and abnormal state pore water pressure - the
excess pore water pressure generated between soil particles due to external loading under undrained conditions. An excess pore water
pressure of nearly 0 is called the drainage condition and is generally used for drainage analysis of sand, which has a large permeability.
However when simulating clay, which has a very small permeability and water cannot be drained out during sudden loading, undrained
analysis is appropriate. The initial state, where the excess pore water pressure has not yet dissipated, is seen as the most unstable state and
the pore water pressure is determined by the volume change of the foundation due to compressibility and permeability coefficient.

Undrained Poisson’s ratio and Skempton(B) coefficient are parameters used to calculate the bulk modulus of elasticity for water. The
undrained Poisson’s ratio has a standard value of 0.495 with a compressibility of nearly ‘0(zero)’ and the Skempton coefficient expresses the
saturation, with 1 meaning full saturation.

The materials for the unsaturated analysis are as follows.

Please refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual for more detailed information.

Drained/Undrained Materials Useable Material models

Drained All geo-materials
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Duncan-Chang,
Undrained (Effective stiffness /Effective strength)
Hoek-Brown, Strain Softening, Modified Cam-clay, Jardine, D-min, Modified Mohr-
Coulomb, User-supplied, Transversely Isotropic
Undrained (Effective stiffness / Undrained
Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)
Undrained (Undrained stiffness / Undrained
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
strength)

[Permeability coefficients (kx,ky,kz)]

The permeability coefficient represents the permeability characteristics (velocity) of the foundation and is used in infiltration analysis and
consolidation analysis. The permeability coefficient for each direction can be defined on the GCS. The input value is the saturated permeability
coefficient and becomes the standard for computing the permeability ratio (Kunsat / Ksat) due to negative pore water pressure when defining
an unsaturated property function.

[Void ratio dependency permeability (ck)]

The permeability coefficient is a measurement of how much the groundwater within a foundation moves in a unit time and is dependent on
the water content and the void ratio change . The larger water content, the larger the flow channel and hence, the value is largest when the
foundation is saturated. The water content depends on the pore water pressure and hence, the permeability coefficient is also dependent on

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 808 of 1024

the pore water pressure. The change in void ratio is considered in consolidation analysis as well as stress-seepage coupled analysis and is
calculated from the initial void ratio.

To express the change in pore water pressure, GTS NX uses the permeability ratio function depended on saturated pore water
pressure coefficient and pore water pressure change and the void ratio dependent permeability ratio dependent on void ratio change .
The unsaturated permeability coefficient depending on void ratio change is given by the following equation.

[Specific storativity(Ss)]

The Specific storage is the water volume inflow or outflows from the unit volume of the aquifer due to water level rise or fall in a confined
aquifer. A coefficient can be directly entered or automatically calculated for compressible fluids.

The change in volumetric water content for pore water pressure in infiltration and consolidation analysis can be expressed by the porosity and
degree of saturation.

The first clause is the slope of the volumetric water content under saturated conditions that can be expressed using the specific storage.

When the material drainage property is set to undrained, the specific storage is automatically calculated using the undrained Poisson's ratio
(vu) and the Effective elastic modulus (E') and Poisson's ratio (v'), entered in the general parameters.

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature unit. (required for transient heat
transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load vector for heat transfer analysis is
the total exothermic load applied to the object.

Unfrozen water content: indicates floating water content in soil / rock. It is given as a temperature-dependent function as a unique
characteristics of the ground.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 809 of 1024

Time Dependent

This is to define Creep Formulation to simulate time-dependent behavior of concrete structures. Following constitutive models are available
for concrete structures, Elastic, Tresca, von Mises, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker Prager, and Hoek Brown.

Two types of creep formulation are available to define Time-dependent behavior of material, Age Dependent and Age Independent. Refer to
analysis reference Ch.4-Section5 in detail.

[Age Dependent]

The stiffness of concrete changes with time, and the creep and shrinkage may cause unexpected deformation. The creep strain of concrete
depends on the time of stress occurrence even under the same applied load. GTSNX supports aging-Kelvin model and aging Viscous model
excluding the spring from Kelvin model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 810 of 1024

[Age Independent]

GTSNX can take into account the primary and secondary creep. The user can use two types of empirical law to define the creep behavior.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Hinge

Hinge Property

▒ Overview

When crack or yield occurs due to irregular cyclic load such as seismic load, very complex behavior appears since displacement history to the
current affects to the restoring force and displacement relationship. It is called that hysteresis model which regulates this relationship and is
considered to inelastic hinge at inelastic element.

Inelastic hinges are available in nonlinear, construction stage, consolidation, fully coupled, nonlinear time history analysis, SRM/SAM (Slope
stability analysis) and nonlinear time history analysis with SRM and element results can be displayed.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 811 of 1024

Type

- Beam - Lumped : It concentrates the inelastic behavior represented by rotational and translational springs at each end and the center. And the remaining
parts are assumed to behave elastically. Inelastic hysteresis behaviors are defined by skeleton curves, which are empirical hysteresis models. The axial
component is represented by a spring at the center and two translational components are represented by springs at each end defined by force-
displacement relationships. The two flexural components, My and Mz, are represented by springs defined by the relationship between moment and angle of
rotation at either I or J or at both ends.

- Beam - Distributed : Unlike lumped hinges, it assumes inelastic behavior throughout the member. The plastic hinge locations in the length direction of a
member assigned by the user are defined as the integration points. The flexibility matrix of a section, which represents the distribution of internal forces, is
calculated through the integration points. The number of integration points can be 1 and between 3 and 20. If the number of integration points is 2, the
moment at the free end of a cantilever beam does not come to exactly zero due to the inherited characteristic of the integration method. Therefore, two
integration points are not permitted. Inelastic hysteresis behavior can be defined by 2 models, empirical Skeleton and Fiber. The hinge behaviors can be
expressed by force - deformation relationships in each axis direction, and the hinge hysteresis behavior of the flexural components can be expressed by the
relationships of moment and angle of rotation. Inelastic behaviors can be defined for 3 axis components and 2 flexural (My & Mz) components.

- Truss : The axial component is represented by a spring at the center defined by the force-displacement relationship. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a
spring is defined by a skeleton model.

- Spring / Elastic Link : Unlike Lumped and Distributed hinges, which are influenced by the inelastic properties of materials and members, the inelastic plastic
hinge properties for the corresponding linear properties of each component of Property Type defined in General Link Properties are defined. The elastic
stiffness of each component is defined by effective stiffness and acts as the initial stiffness in inelastic analysis. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a spring is
defined by a skeleton model. The inelastic properties of a spring can be defined for all 3 translational and 3 rotational directions.

Interaction

The type of considering interaction between axial force and moment is selected.

- None: Interaction between axial force and moments is not considered.

- P-M in Strength Calculation: N-M interaction in time history analysis is reflected by calculating the flexural yield strength of a hinge considering the effect
of axial force. In this method, the interaction between biaxial bending moments is ignored. The axial force is assumed to act with each directional bending
moment independently when the hinge status is evaluated at each time step. Recalculation of bending moment yield strength reflecting axial force is carried
out in a loading condition, which satisfies the following three conditions:

1) It must be the first among the sequential time history load cases, which will be consecutively analyzed.

2) Inelastic static analysis must be carried out.

The elements are inelastic beam elements assigned with hinge properties to which P-M interaction is applied. The initial axial and bending moment at this
time are determined by the combination of linear elastic analysis results of all the static loads contained in Time Varying Static Load. The factors used in the

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 812 of 1024

combination are defined by the Scale Factors specified in Time Varying Static Load.

- P-M-M in Status Determination: This method uses a multi-axis hinge hysteresis model in inelastic time history analysis. Interaction between axial force
and biaxial moments is realized by applying the plasticity theory. The interaction is considered at each time step through evaluating the status of inelastic
hinges using the 3-dimensional yield surface. GTSNX supports the kinematic hardening type.

Yield Surface Function

If "P-M in Strength Calculation" or "P-M-M in Status Determination" is selected in Interaction Type, enter the related data for P-M interaction curve and 3-D
yield surface.

Component

Select the components of sectional strength for which properties will be entered. The Spring Type permits properties in all directional components, whereas
Lumped and Distributed types permit all but the Mx component.

Hinge Location

Select the locations of lumped inelastic hinges. Axial component is fixed to the center of a member. I-end, j-end or both ends can be selected for the
bending moment components.

Num. of Sections

Enter the number of integration points for inelastic hinges of the distributed type. Up to 20 sections are permitted, and moment - curvature relationships are
calculated at all the sections corresponding to the points.

Hysteresis Model

Select a hysteresis model for an inelastic hinge.

Hinge Components (Single)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 813 of 1024

Hysteresis Model Type

- Origin-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
origin and again move along the skeleton curve after reaching the opposite skeleton curve.

- Peck-oriented : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response points at unloading move toward the
point of maximum displacement on the opposite side. If the first yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the response points move
toward the first yielding point on the skeleton curve.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 814 of 1024

- Kinematic : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. It shows the tendency of strength increase with the increase in loading. This is used to model the Bauschinger effect of metallic
materials. Accordingly, it is cautioned that energy dissipation may be overestimated for concrete. Due to the characteristic of the model, only
the positive (+) and negative (-) symmetry is permitted for the strength reduction ratios after yielding.

- Clough : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. Unloading stiffness is obtained from the elastic stiffness
reduced by the equation below. As the deformation progresses after yielding, unloading stiffness reduces gradually.

where,

K : unloading stiffness
R

Ko : elastic stiffness

Dy : yield displacement in the zone where unloading begins

Dm : maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins

(In the zone where yielding has not occurred, replace it with the yield displacement)

: constant for determining unloading stiffness

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 815 of 1024

If the sign of loading changes in the process of unloading, response points move toward the point of maximum displacement in the zone of
progressing direction. If yielding has not occurred in this zone, the response points move toward the yield point on the skeleton curve. If
unloading becomes loading without changing the loading sign, the response points move along the unloading path. If the loading continually
increases, loading continues on the skeleton curve again.

- Degrading : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The load-displacement coordinates at unloading
move to the path of reaching the maximum deformation point on the opposite side due to the change of unloading stiffness once in the
middle. If yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the first yielding point is assumed to be the maximum deformation point.

- Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a tetralinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D, does
not exceed D3, the hysteresis rules are identical to the Original Taketa hysteresis. If the current displacement or deformation, D, exceeds D3,
response points move along the slope K4. For unloading, response points move by the same rules as the Original Taketa hysteresis. The
Takeda tetralinear hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 816 of 1024

- Modified Takeda : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. If the current displacement or deformation, D,
exceeds D2 for the first time or the maximum deformation point up until now, response points move along the trilinear skeleton curve. If
unloading takes place from this straight line toward the opposite direction, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the point of the
restoring force becoming 0. If the restoring force goes beyond the 0 point, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the
opposite side. Even in the case where unloading takes place from the straight line directed toward the maximum deformation point from the
point of the 0 restoring force, the points move along the slope Kun2 until the points reach the 0 restoring force. After the point of 0 restoring
force is passed, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the opposite side. The Modified Takeda type hysteresis model
can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

- Normal Bilinear : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. The unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic
stiffness. The Normal Bilinear type hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and
Distributed Type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 817 of 1024

- Modified Ramberg-Osgood :

- Modified Hardin-Drnevich :

Symmetric / Asymmetric

: Select the type of Skeleton Curve.

Yield Function

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 818 of 1024

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

- Yield Displacement : Enter the yield displacement of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Yield Displacement is selected for Input Type.

- Force (Yield Strength) : Yield strength is specified. It is user defined based on material and section properties. The user specifies positive (+)
values regardless of tension (t) or compression (c). The program treats compression as negative (-) internally.

Unloading Stiffness Parameter

Exponent in Unloading Stiffness Calculation: This is an option used to determine the unloading stiffness of the outer loop used in the
Clough and Takeda type models among hysteresis models of skeleton curves. This is used to reflect the effect of reduction in stiffness, which
occurs as the deformation progresses after yielding. The unloading stiffness is determined by the elastic stiffness reduced by the yield
displacement and maximum displacement in the zone where unloading begins and the exponent entered here.

Inner Loop Unloading Stiffness Reduction Factor: This is used to determine the unloading stiffness of the inner loop. The inner loop is
formed when unloading occurs before reaching the target point on the skeleton curve while reloading after the loading sign changes in the
process of unloading. The unloading stiffness of the inner loop is calculated by multiplying the unloading stiffness of the outer loop by the
reduction ratio for the unloading stiffness of the inner loop.

Hinge Components (Multi)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 819 of 1024

- P-M Interaction Curves : Enter the P-M interaction curve data required to calculate 3-dimensional yield surfaces. All strength values must be
entered with positive sign. Sign convention for plotting P-M curve is positive for compression and negative for tension.

Strengths for the 1st P-M Interaction Curves

PC(t): First yield strength subject to pure tension force

PC(c): First yield strength subject to pure compression force

PCBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PCBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MCy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MCz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

Strengths for the 2nd P-M Interaction Curves

PY(t): Second yield strength subject to pure tension force

PY(c): Second yield strength subject to pure compression force

PYBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second stage yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

PYBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

MYy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the y-axis moment of the section

MYz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis moment of the section

- Approximation of Yield Surface Shape : On the basis of P-M interaction curve, the parameters for 3-dimensional yield surface are either user
defined or auto-calculated. If some items are auto-calculated and the remainder is to be user defined, Auto-calculation should be performed
first, and then necessary items can be modified after converting to User Input. In case of Alpha, only user defined entry is possible. The value
of each parameter is used in the equation of yield surface displayed in the dialog box.

Beta y, Beta z, Gamma: Being the exponential powers of P-My or P-Mz interactions, different values can be entered for the first and second

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 820 of 1024

yields. For Beta y and Beta z on the other hand, two separate values representing the ranges of larger and smaller axial forces relative to the
axial force at the time of balanced failure can be entered.

Alpha: Exponent for My-Mz interaction for the 1st and 2nd yielding

- Stiffness Reduction Ratio : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected
for Input Type.

α1: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the first yielding divided by the initial stiffness

α2: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the second yielding divided by the initial stiffness

- Initial Stiffness : The initial stiffness used in inelastic analysis is either selected or entered by the user.

Elastic Stiffness: elastic stiffness of a member is used as the initial stiffness for inelastic analysis.

User Defined: the user directly enters the initial stiffness if the Input Type is Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Coordinate System

Coordinate System

▒ Overview

Add a result output coordinate system for 2D/3D element. The default rectangular/cylindrical coordinate system is defined and another
coordinate system can be added by arbitrarily defining 1 of the three planes on the coordinate system. The added coordinate system can be
used as the material coordinates when the properties of the 2D / 3D elements are defined. For 2D structural members, it is especially hard to
unify the element coordinate system in 1 direction depending on the element shape. It is useful to set the output coordinate system to check
the member forces of the entire structure according the same direction and sign convention.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 821 of 1024

There are 2 types of coordinate systems; rectangular and cylindrical. The coordinate system can be set by defining 1 of the three planes of the
coordinate system 12, 23, 31 (XY,YZ,ZX) by entering three points. In other words, the plane that passes the three points becomes 1 of the 12,
23, 31 planes and the other 2 planes are automatically determined by the direction of the reference plane.

Select the plane, origin point, a point on 1 axis of the selected plane and a point on the selected plane in this order to specify the position and
direction of the reference plant.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Property Coordinate Function > Function

Function

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
When setting the analysis conditions (boundary, loading etc.) after the mesh has been generated, the values that change
with position and time can be registered as a function. The provided function types are as follows and the characteristics and applicable range
for each function is given.

▒ Methodology

Applicable range
Function type
Material/Property Boundary condition Loading

Force, Displacement, Pressure,

Prestress, Initial equilibrium
General (Spatial) - Water level
force, Dynamic nodal, Dynamic
surface
General (Non-spatial) Pile, Pile tip - -
Force, Displacement, Pressure,
Prestress, Initial equilibrium
Generalized space - Water level
force, Dynamic noda, Dynamic
surface
Surface Function - Water level -
Non-Hydrostatic Water
- Water level -
Pressure

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Time-dependent (User-

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 822 of 1024

Function defined) - -
Time-dependent
Creep / Shrinkage Strain
- -
Function Group
(Design code based)
Time-dependent
Elastic Modulus Function - -
(Design code based)
Shear Hardening (User-
Plastic Hardening Function - -
defined)
Hardening Curve von Mises - -
Stress-Strain Curve von Mises - -
Cohesion Hardening Curve CWFS - -
Frictional Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Dilatancy Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Tensile Strength Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve

Node head, Node

Seepage boundary - -
flux, Surface flux

Nonlinear elastic (Truss

Truss, Embedded truss - -
element)
Nonlinear elastic
Point spring, Elastic link - -
(Point spring/ Elastic link)
Unsaturated property Isotropic, Orthotropic - -
Strain compatible 2D Equivalent - -
Response spectrum - - Response spectrum
Ground acceleration, Time
Time forcing - - varying static, Dynamic nodal,
Dynamic surface

General function(Spatial)

Changes in position (coordinates) of a value with respect to the rectangular or cylindrical coordinate system can be set as function and used
when specifying the load. The water level conditions can be directly specified on the screen, but registering the water level according to the
coordinate change as a function allows this to be used as the water line during the construction step.

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

<Reference coordinate system standard>

[Equation]

The Equation can be set without defining the values of the independent variables.

For example, when defining the function Y=2*X on the Cartesian coordinate system, specify the X coordinate range (start, end) and the X
coordinate increment first. Input 2*X and press the calculate button to automatically generate a function as shown above.

When defining the function Sin(T) between a certain angle with reference to the T coordinate on the cylindrical coordinate system , specify the
angle range (start, end) and increment angle and then input sin(T) to generate a sin function within the specified angle range.

[Scale Value]

Value multiplied to the defined function value. The initial value is set as 1. For example, to increase all defined functions by 2 times, input 2 for

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 823 of 1024

the scale value.

[Extrapolation]

Assign a function value to values outside the independent variable range. The user can select whether to set the function value outside the
range to be 0, the same as the closest function value or determined through linear extrapolation.

<Extrapolation>

General function (Non-spatial)

Used to specify the shear stiffness and spring stiffness of pile or pile tip elements as a function. The relative displacement vs Force/Area is
used as a shear stiffness function and the relative displacement vs Force/Length is used as a spring stiffness function at the pile tips. Different
pile shear stiffness functions can be set for each depth when defining the pile material properties.

Generalized space function

The purpose and functions are the same as the general function (spatial). However, the generalized space function is able to generate a
function that considers all 3 axis directions while the general function (spatial) is a 1 dimensional function that can only set 1 independent
variable axis. The input method and detailed functions are the same as the general function (spatial).

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of the set variables in the table to
generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from Excel.

Surface function

Used to specify the water level surface in 3D space. The 3D water level surface can be generated by entering the variable values with reference
to the global or cylindrical coordinates as shown in the table below, but it can also be generated using the Boundary Condition > Water Level
operation and selecting a surface in space to automatically extract the coordinate information. Here, the X axis spacing determines the
precision of the water surface and for suddenly changing sections, the spacing needs to be carefully set following the element node positions.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 824 of 1024

Non-Hydrostatic Water Pressure

Define the water pressure at the top and bottom depending on the position of the model.

Applicable in integer conditions and user-defined conditions when specifying the mesh set level.

- User-defined condition: the user can directly define the water pressure at the top and bottom of the assigned mesh by using the specific
water pressure function

- Hydrostatic condition: this function is used to define the water pressure at the top of the allocated mesh as hydrostatic.

Name – input name for the function.

Ref. CSys – reference coordinate system for the function definition.

Water Pressure Type – select the type of function for selection in Analysis Case > Analysis Control > Define Water Level for Mesh Set. (User
Defined or Hydrostatic condition)

Scale factor to multiply all input data.

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Function

Define the time dependent creep property and shrinkage strain of concrete material. These functions are available if User Defined is selected
in the Code field.

There are three types of Creep function data types.

Specific Creep ; Strain per unit stress excluding immediate deformation

Creep Function ; Strain per unit stress including immediate deformation

Creep Coefficient ; Ratio of creep strain to elastic strain

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 825 of 1024

A frequently used Creep Function may be saved in and recalled from a file. The data file, fn.TDM retains the following form:

* Unit, in, kip

* Data Assign the units (optional items)
Enter the data in the form of 'day' and
20, 0.9934
'value' (mandatory items)
40,1.2182 -
60, 1.3705 -
80,1.4883 -
100, 1.5854 -
120, 1.6683 -
140, 1.7408 -
160, 1.8054 -
180, 1.8636 -
200, 1.9166 -
220, 1.9653 -
240, 2.0103 -
260, 2.0252 -

Creep / Shrinkage Function Group

The user can define Creep/Shrinkage Function based on the embedded Design Codes as follows.

Link to Creep / Shrinkage Design Code

Elastic Modulus Function

Define Time-dependent Elastic modulus function based on selected design code. It is required to input End Time of function with the number
of steps.

Link to Elastic Modulus Design Code

Plastic Hardening Function

Shear Hardening in Modified Mohr-Coulomb model can be defined by Equivalent plastic strain related to the mobilized shear resistance.
Using "Auto-Calculated" option, solver recalculates friction angle based on the deviatoric plastic strain.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 826 of 1024

Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and stress are directly inputted. It is used when defining hardening curve within von Mises model. Plastic strain begin once the
material starts yielding so it can be calculated using following equation.

Stress-Strain Curve

Stress and stain are directly inputted. It is used when defining Stress-Strain Curve within von Mises model. When Load-Displacement Curve is
already known, true strain can be calculated using following equation.

Cohesion Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and cohesion are directly inputted. It is used when describing Cohesion Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion Weakening and
Frictional Strengthening).

Frictional Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and frictional angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Frictional Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Dilatancy Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and dilatancy angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Dilatancy Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 827 of 1024

Tensile Strength Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and tensile strength are directly inputted. It is used when describing Tensile Strength Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion
Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Seepage Boundary function

Used to simulate the head and flow rate difference with time such as node head, node flux rate, surface flux. Setting the values (head/flux)
according to the time flow that fits the specified time unit generates a function that can be applied to unsteady infiltration analysis.

For unsteady infiltration analysis, the time steps for result verification are set separately and the time function for the steps is used in the
analysis. When the time step is beyond the range of the function, the function value is automatically calculated using linear interpolation. In
other words, to apply a 0 function value to time steps outside the range, the same function value (0) needs to be entered for arbitrary time
steps when creating the function as shown in the figure above.

Nonlinear elastic function (Truss element)

The behavioral characteristics of truss elements or embedded truss elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The stress change according
to strain of the truss element can be directly generated as a function and used. The function can be applied to the tensile (compression) test
results of a structural member (truss affiliated) or to the deformation behavior properties of a general steel member.

Nonlinear elastic function (Point spring/ Elastic link)

The behavioral characteristics of spring or elastic link elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The spring/link stiffness according to the
element strain can be defined to generate a function.

Unsaturated property function

For steady infiltration analysis that assumes a saturated ground, the unsaturated properties are not taken into account even if they are
entered. For the time dependent unsteady analysis, the unsaturated properties of the ground must be considered. Also, because real
foundations are unsaturated and have a certain ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil
for more realistic results.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation) in the unsaturated region
depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define
individually) the permeability function and water content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the
relationship between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define relationship).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 828 of 1024

[Individually]

Define the permeability function data and water content function data. Based on the experimental data of unsaturated soil, the coefficients for
each function type can be defined using Curve Fitting or the data can be directly input through customize. If the experimental data is entered
directly, the negative pore water pressure size is entered by its absolute value and the permeability ratio is found by dividing the unsaturated
value with the saturated state value.

<Individual consideration>

The provided permeability functions and coefficients are listed below.

l Gardner coefficient

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Frontal function

K ratio (Rk) : Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

Ho : Head at which the permeability coefficient no longer decreases

l Van Genuchten function (Permeability ratio)

: Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

l Van Genuchten (Water content)

: Volume water content

: Residual volume water content

: Saturated volume water content

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

[Relation]

The unsaturated material property data can be set on the ground type according to the JICE (Japan Institute of Construction Eng.) criteria. The
pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio relationship function for each type of ground is shown
below.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 829 of 1024

Pressure head(P)-Volumetric water content(T) Pressure head(P)-Degree of saturation(Sr)

-Permeability ratio (K) -Permeability ratio(K)

(T)- (P) (T)- (K) (Sr)- (P) (Sr)- (K)
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F],
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], [GF]
[GF] (JICE) (JICE)
[GF] (JICE) [GF] (JICE)
Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], Sandy soil [S], [S-F],

[SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE) [S-F], [SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE)

Cohesive soil [M], [C]
Sandy soil [SF] (JICE) Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) Sandy soil [SF] (JICE)
(JICE)
Cohesive soil [M], [C]
User specified Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) User specified
(JICE)
User specified User specified

<Dual consideration>

For unsteady analysis, the negative pressure head (pore water pressure) is calculated for each time step (construction step) and applied,
renewing the relative permeability coefficient. The volumetric water content (degree of saturation), according to the calculated pressure head,
is found and the relative permeability, according to the found volumetric water content (degree of saturation), is renewed for each step.

Strain compatible function

For the 2D equivalent linear analysis, the shear modulus and damping ratio are set as functions of strain to consider the nonlinearity and
inelastic behavior of the ground. If the function is not defined, the ground material is assumed to be linear and the entered (fixed) shear
modulus and damping ratio is applied. Generally, the ground displays decreasing shear modulus and increasing damping ratio as the shear
strain increases. For complex nonlinear behavior of the ground, the material properties are simplified to linear equivalent properties. Repeated
calculations from the assumed initial values can compute the converging shear modulus and damping ratio.

Material properties can be defined from various existing database. The following empirical equation can be used to generate a function
following the stratum properties.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 830 of 1024

[Database]

A strain function stored from existing research can be imported from the database. An example DB is shown below.

Clay - Pl=5-10 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Lower Bound (Sun et al.0)

Clay - Pl=10-20 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Average (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=20-40 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Upper Bound (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=40-80 (Sun et al.0) Clay (Idriss 1990)
Clay - Pl=80+ (Sun et al.0) Gravel (Seed et al.0)
Clay (Seed and Sun 1989) Linear
Modulus Gravel (Seed et al.0) Rock
Damping
Reduction Linear Rock (Idriss)
Curve
Curve Rock Sand (Idriss 1990)
Rock (Idriss) Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound Vucetic - Dobry
Sand (Seed and Idriss 1970)
-
Vucetic - Dobry

Response spectrum function

Define the spectrum function used in response spectrum analysis. Because the response spectrum analysis uses a linearly interpolated
spectrum function value for the natural periodicity of the structure, compact spectrum values are needed for areas where the curvature of the
spectrum curve changes rapidly. The period range of the spectrum function must contain all natural periods of the structure.

The spectrum data types are normalized acceleration (acceleration spectrum, gravitational acceleration), acceleration, velocity and
displacement spectrum and changing the time function data format only changes the application format, not the data format. The scale factor
is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value. In the 'Damping Ratio' space,
input the damping ratio applied on the response spectrum but if the damping ratio of the target structure is different, the input spectrum data
is processed to fit the structural damping ratio.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 831 of 1024

[Design spectrum function]

Use the built-in design spectrum. The default built-in design spectrum types are as follows.

l Korea(Bridge) : Korea, Traffic Specification

l Japan(Bridge02) : Japan, Load instruction and Dynamic Analysis of Building

l China(JTJ004-89) : China, Specifications of Earthquake Resistant Design for Highway Engineering

l KBC 2009 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2009

l KBC 2005 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2005

l IBC2000(ASCE7-98) : USA, International Building Code 2000

l UBC(1997) : USA, Measure of Uniform Building Code 97 (Standards)

l EURO(2004H-ELASTIC) : Europe, Sesismic Design Measure of Structures

Time forcing function

The time forcing function is applied to the loading conditions (ground acceleration, time varying static, dynamic nodal, dynamic surface)
applied to linear/nonlinear time history analysis. A function for the time history loading value is formed and changing the time function data
format only changes the application format, not the data format.[edit] The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the
entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

[Add Time Function]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 832 of 1024

The defined function is also applicable for Dynamic node (surface) loading and time varying static loading. Specifying 'Force' or 'Moment' uses
the time history load as a 'dynamic node (surface) load' input and specifying 'Normalized Acceleration' or 'Acceleration' uses it to input the
'ground acceleration'. Specifying 'Normal' uses the time history load as the change in static load with time for 'time varying static load' or
'dynamic surface load'.

[Import/Earthquake]

Save and import frequently used time history loading or select earthquake acceleration data from the program DB. There are a total of 32
types of earthquake acceleration.

[Add Time Sinusoidal]

A sine function can be used to define the time history loading. A, C are constants, f is the frequency of the input load, D is the damping factor
and P is the phase angle. If the time history load is entered as a harmonic function, input the necessary sine function variables and click
[Redraw Graph] to view the loading on the right hand side.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Contact > Define Contact

Define Contact (Welded / General)

▒ Overview

Use welded contact elements where element faces meet, but the nodes are not shared, to induce the same behavior.

It can be used as the initial contact conditions between adjacent objects in structural analysis, consolidation analysis or seepage analysis. It is
often used when node sharing on very complex geometry needs to be ignored to create an element. This function prevents analysis error and
checks the analysis results that are similar to node sharing.

General contact considers the impact and impact friction between two objects in analysis, otherwise two objects are bonded like rigid link each
other by welded contact. General contact can be used in nonlinear (static, dynamic) and fully coupled analysis. With Geometric Nonlinearity
option, solver will take into account all possible contact area automatically regardless of defined Contact tolerance between two objects. It is
also possible to consider Frictional behavior by Friction coefficient between two objects and the penetration at initial stage can be ignored by
adjusting slave nodes automatically.

▒ Concept

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 833 of 1024

Contact analysis fundamentally assumes that two objects in a space can be in contact, but cannot penetrate each other (non-penetration
condition), and are nonlinear in behavior or condition from a physical point of view. The type of contacts are general contact (considers the
impact and impact friction between two objects in analysis), rough contact(does not consider sliding), welded contact (two objects are welded
from the start of analysis) and sliding contact (only considers the sliding in the tangent direction). In the example below, general contact and
rough contact are assigned depending on the position of two objects at the start of analysis and can be seen as linear. GTS NX supports the
welded and general contact feature.

<Concept of General contact and Rough contact> <Concept of Welded contact>

▒ Methodology

Contact element generation (Welded Contact)

The contact can be defined through the Automatic Contact and the Create Manual Contact Pair functions.

Auto contact

This function automatically searches for areas where the selected meshes meet without node sharing and creates a contact surface.

[Searching Distance] : Input the distance between the main contact surface and the sub contact surface. The function searches for contact
surfaces within this range.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 834 of 1024

Manual contact pair

The user can directly specify the main contact surface and the sub contact surface to create a contact surface. Face, 2D element, 3D element,
2D element free face, and 3D element free face geometries can be selected.

When creating the contact surface manually, the node-to-surface contact or surface-to surface-contact can be selected to create the surface.
Node-to-surface contact takes less time, but the solution accuracy is relatively low because the nodes of the main object tend to penetrate
through the sub object. On the other hand, surface-to surface-contact takes longer but the non-penetrating conditions are satisfied relatively
accurately, allowing for more accurate simulations of structural behavior.

[Contact Parameters] : Input the coefficient value to calculate the initial contact search distance. The initial contact search distance can be
found by multiplying the coefficient value by the longest length on the element face. If the main and sub contact faces are within this distance,
contact is considered to have occurred.

Contact Parameters

Define the normal and tangential stiffness of contact element. Based on the material properties of adjacent elements, the stiffness will be
updated automatically according to the generated strain. Highly recommend to use Default setting for Scaling Factor.

Following is the summary of parameters for the Contact Elements.

Parameter Reference value (kN, m)

Contact stiffness (Recommend to use default setting)
Normal stiffness scaling 1 (The smaller value, the larger penetration)
Tangential stiffness scaling 0.1 ( Normal stiffness / 10)
Advanced options (parameters)
Contact Tolerance Auto (Uncheck) : Find contact area within the tolerance
Friction Coefficient (Optional) 0.3 ~ 0.6 (Depending on material types)
Impermeable (Uncheck) : Possible to allow seepage flow
Conduction for Seepage Flow
through the contact elements
Property used to describe ability to conduct heat
Thermal Conductance
between two bodies in contact.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 835 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Construction Stage > Stage_Definition_Wizard

Stage Definition Wizard

▒ Overview

A wizard to efficiently define the construction stages. A regular number (postfix) needs to be assigned to each set to define the construction
stage using wizard. This number can be assigned using the [Rename] function for mesh sets. Sets that are only used once in the entire
construction stage process does not need to be assigned a number.

It can be used in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis, Thermal Analysis).

▒ Methodology

Display the usable Mesh sets, Boundary sets and Load sets. Select the desired data and drag it to the Set assignment rule, or drag the Mesh
set, Boundary set and Load set to the activation state.

Be aware that the display format of each set is completely different from the workstree. Here, all mesh sets are displayed as individual mesh
sets, ignoring the relationship between mesh sets and sub-mesh sets in the workstree. Also, the upper most display name is the mesh set
name without the postfix. Expanding one step displays the mesh set name with the postfix.

Refer to the following example.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 836 of 1024

<Element, Boundary, Load display format>

Set Assignment Rule

Specify the construction stage set used to define the construction stage and specify the assignment rule.

l Set Type

The type of set on which the construction stage will be defined. The user can select between Mesh set, Boundary set or Load set.

l Set Name Prefix

Specify the name without the serial number of the set on which the construction stage will be defined.

For example, if a Mesh set is specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’, select the Set name prefix as ‘‘Final Core #’.

l A/R

Select whether to Add or Remove a selected set. A is displayed in green and R is displayed in yellow.

l Start Postfix

Specify the set number of the selected set that is used first in the construction stage.

For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final Core #001’ is removed at the
second construction stage with the other Cores removed in sequence after each step, the first used set number is 001 and so the postfix
can be set as ‘1’.

l F

Check this option on when the selected set is not used until the final number. The user can input the end suffix when checked. If it is not
checked, the set is used sequentially until the final number.

l End Postfix

Specify the set number of the selected set that is used last in the construction stage.

For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final Core #001’ is removed at the
second construction stage with sequential removal until the ‘Final Core #006’, check F and input the postfix 6.

l Postfix Increment

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 837 of 1024

Input the postfix number increment used as the construction stage progresses.

For a Mesh set specified from 'Final Core #001' to 'Final Core #012', if the mesh is removed in order of 'Final Core #001', 'Final Core #003'
and 'Final Core #005' for each construction stage, the postfix increment is 2 and hence, input a postfix spacing of 2.

l Start Stage

Input the stage number first used in the construction stage.

For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final Core #001’ is removed at the
second construction stage with the other Cores removed in sequence after each step, the second stage is first used and so the start
stage is set as 2.

l Stage Increment

Select the stage increment for a selected set that is used every few stages.

For a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’, if the 'Final Core #001' is removed at the second construction stage
and the Final Core #002' is removed at the fourth construction stage, the set is used every 2 stages and so the stage spacing is 2.

[Apply Assignment Rule]

Press this button to display the specified data according to the assignment rule on the Mesh, Boundary, Load set activated state. Press
OK to create the construction stage.

The activated Mesh, Boundary, and Load set can be checked for each stage using the Preview construction stage( ) option. This
function has the same function as Construction stage simulation ( ).

Mesh, Boundary, Load Activation Status

Display the currently specified construction stage on a table.

The construction stage progresses as it moves to the right. The I.S. and S1 on the top of the columns are abbreviations for initial stage and
Stage1, respectively. The added data is displayed in green and the removed data is displayed in orange. Data defined by postfixes are
expressed in each construction stage as numbers. Data that does not use a prefix (eg. Ground) are expressed as a line. If the mesh, boundary
condition and load data are dragged onto the menu [Mesh, Boundary, Load Activation Status], the delete setting cannot be conducted and
only additional settings can be conducted.

<Mesh, Boundary, Load display format>

Click the [Apply Assignment Rule] button to display the construction stage on the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status. To delete the
displayed construction stage, select that data cell and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

This method deletes the created construction stage data, but not the construction stage. Hence, a construction stage with no content is
created. Select the whole target column and press the Ctrl and Delete key together to delete the construction stage for the whole column.

The stage where all the mesh sets are activated initially (in-situ state) is when all the mesh sets in the I.S. (initial stage) are activated. This stage
can be specified by entering 0 for start stage (the 0 stage is the initial stage) and 0 for stage spacing (the stage increment number is 0 and
thus all elements are activated in one stage).

The advanced options (LDF etc.) used in the construction stage can be set in the Define Construction Stage menu. Hence for complex models,
it is convenient to use the Construction Stage Wizard to create the framework of the overall construction stages. It is also convenient to use

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 838 of 1024

the [Define Construction Stage] menu to specify the individual options used in each construction stage.

Example

Let us examine a simple example of Construction stage definition.

The construction stage is defined for a tunnel modeled on a homogeneous ground. The entire tunnel shape is excavated at once and the rock
bolts and shotcrete are created in the following stages. The excavation is done in 5 stages. The excavation is assumed to start from the smaller
postfix number and progresses to the larger postfix.

The mesh set is created as follows.

Run the Stage definition wizard.

'Soil' and 'Tunnel#' need to be included in the in-situ state. Select using the Ctrl key and drag & drop into the I.S. column of the Mesh,
Boundary, Load activation status.

Start the tunnel excavation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 839 of 1024

In this example, the exaction is done stage by stage, starting from the first stage as follows: 1st face tunnel excavation -> 1st face rock
bolt/shotcrete installment -> 2nd tunnel excavation -> 2nd face rock bolt/shotcrete installment -> ….

Select R to select and delete the 'Tunnel#' of the element type, the Start postfix as 1 and do not check F to process until the last number. The
Start stage is 1 and the input is 2 for the Stage spacing to allow for the installation of rock bolts and shotcrete between excavation stages.
Afterwards, click the [Apply Assignment Rules] button to specify the construction stage of the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status.

The shotcrete and rock bolts are also specified on the construction stage.

Input 2 for the Start stage and set as A to create both elements in the second construction stage. Also, input Start postfix 1, do not check F
and input Postfix spacing to use all the numbers from 1 to the final number. Finally, input 2 for the Start stage and Stage spacing to create the
first elements at the second construction stage with two stage spacing between element creation.

Press the [Assign Assignment Rules] button to automatically create the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status and click the [OK] button to
create the construction stage.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Construction Stage > Construction_Stage_Set

Construction Stage Set

▒ Overview

Define the Construction stage set for analysis. Used for analyses that incorporate construction stages (Static/Slope analysis,
Seepage/Consolidation analysis).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 840 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Define the Construction Stage Set and then define the Construction Stage.

A single file can be composed of multiple Construction stage sets.

The construction stage types are [Stress], [Seepage], [Stress-Seepage-Slope], [Consolidation], [Fully Coupled stress].

Click the Define Construction Stage button to form the construction stage. Advanced options that are not available on the [Stage Definition
Wizard] can be set.

<Define construction stage>

Stage name

Define the construction stage name. Use [New] to create a new construction stage and use [Insert] to add a new construction stage in
between existing stages.

For example, clicking the Insert button at Stage 2 moves the current stage to Stage 3, and the new stage becomes Stage2. Click the button
to move to the previous or next stage.

Stage type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 841 of 1024

Specify the construction stage type. Be aware that the designated [Analysis Control], [Output Control] options are different and the boundary
conditions/loading conditions for each stage type are different.

Refer to the Analysis > Analysis case > General > Analysis/Output Control for more information on control options.

Move to Previous/Next

The construction stage order may need modification when many construction stages are created. Use the Move to Previous or Next button to
change the order of created construction stages.

Time Step

Define time steps used in the analysis.

l Duration

Insert the duration to be analyzed. ‘User Defined Step’ generates steps by dividing with Step Number. ‘Auto Time Step’ automatically
divides defined period with time step.

l Auto Time Step

It will automatically choose appropriate time steps for a consolidation or fully coupled stress seepage analysis.

When the calculation runs smoothly, resulting in very few iterations per step, then the program will choose a larger time step. When the
calculation uses many iterations due to an increasing amount of plasticity, then the program will take smaller time steps.

This function reduces the pore water pressure result errors when loading is applied in short period of time.

l Initial Time Step

Initial Time Step can be either manually defined by user or calculated automatically within solver. The automatic calculation formula is as
follows:

l Max. Pore Pressure Changes per Step

Input Max. Pore Pressure Changes per step. When pore pressure changes exceeds the maximum value, step size is automatically reduced
and analyzed.

l Ratio of Max Time Step to Initial

Input the maximum value of time step ratio compared to ‘Initial Critical Time Step’.

l Save Step

Select the output method of results. 'Last Increment': Only output results from last step, 'Every Increment': Output results from all steps.

Set Data

Display the usable Mesh sets, Boundary sets, and Load sets in a worktree. Be aware that the sub-sets are also displayed independently, so take
caution when selecting the mesh sets.

For example, the set data for the created Core mesh set with registered mesh sub-sets (Core 001, Core 002, Core 003) are shown in the right
figure. In this case, activating Core does not activate the mesh sub-sets Core 001, Core 002, Core 003. Hence, mesh sets that are not registered
directly on the set data are useless.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 842 of 1024

Activated Data

Register the activated sets for each construction stage. The activated sets remain active for future construction stages without needing re-
activation until it is deactivated. The sets that need to be activated for the construction stage can be selected using the left mouse button and
dragged & dropped into the activated data. Another method is to select the sets using the right mouse button on the Set data and select
activate on the Context menu.

Deactivated data

Register the deactivated set for each construction stage. The deactivated sets remain active for future construction stages until they are re-
activated. The sets that need to be deactivated for the construction stage can be selected using the left mouse button and dragged &
dropped into [Deactivated data]. Another method is to select the sets using the right mouse button on [Set data] and select deactivate on the
Context menu.

Define Water Level For Global

Input the groundwater level that changes according to the construction stage with respect to the GCS. Click to set the ground water level
function. If the water level and function are both specified, the input water level is multiplied onto the function and applied on the analysis.

Define Water Level for Mesh Set

Define the groundwater level that changes according to the construction stage for each mesh set.

If the groundwater layer is surrounded by rocks or an impermeable clay layer (confined aquifer), the presence/absence of the groundwater
level for each ground layer can be set for analysis.

If the total groundwater level is input and a mesh set has a defined groundwater level, the mesh set groundwater level has priority and the
total groundwater level is applied to mesh sets that do not have a defined level.

If the water level and function are both specified, the input water level is multiplied onto the function and applied on the analysis.

LDF

Set the Load Distribution Factor. The sum of all distribution factors need to be 1, and the keyboard Enter key needs to be pressed after the
input to apply the value properly.

For the example case shown below, a LDF of 0.4 is applied to the current stage and a LDF of 0.3 is applied to the next stage and the
subsequent stage. Here, the LDF does not need to be checked for the latter two stages and the LDFs need to be set such that they do not
overlap in the construction stages.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 843 of 1024

The application method of the Load Distribution Factor is as follows:

The LDF keeps track of the Internal Forces of a deleted element and loads it in stages according to the factor assigned for each construction
stage, rather than loading it at once.

When applying the LDF on the top and bottom simultaneously, the factors need to be set such that they do not overlap in the construction
stages. If the LDFs overlap as shown below, when calculating the internal forces of this stage, the 0.5 on the bottom element released in STG
#5 releases the stress using the internal force of the bottom element, created by the 0.7 on the top element defined in STG #4. Hence, the 1.0
on the top element of STG #4 is not released and so, the internal force for the 0.3 on top is not taken into account for analysis. (Very
Confusing)

Part STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6

Top 0.3 0.4 0.3 -
Bottom - - 0.5 0.5

STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6

Hence, be careful not to overlap the LDFs in the construction stage, as shown below.

Part STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6 STG #7

Top 0.3 0.4 0.3 - -
Bottom - - - 0.5 0.5

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 844 of 1024

Clear Displacement

Set the displacement of an analysis result in the current stage as 0. It is used to set the initial conditions of the in-situ state. The stress is not
reset to 0.

Slope Stability (SRM/SAM)

Decide whether to conduct the slope stability analysis (SRM) in the current construction stage. If this option is checked, it is automatically
registered as an analysis case and analysis is conducted. In other words, the ground stress from the non-linear analysis results in the previous
stage is coupled and slope stability analysis is conducted. (However for SAM analysis, it is only applicable for 2D analysis and the boundary
conditions of the virtual slip surface needs to be set.)

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Construction Stage > Simulate_Construction Stage

Simulate Construction Stage

▒ Overview

Check the defined construction stage as a video. It can be used in analyses that incorporate construction stages (Static/Slope analysis,
Seepage/Consolidation analysis).

▒ Methodology

Specify the defined construction stage set and click the button to play the construction stage video. The video is created by capturing the
whole work screen. Unwanted frames can be inserted if a different dialog box is open above the model.

Check the [Mesh],[Load] and [Boundary] to check the activated/deactivated data of the construction stage.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Construction Stage > Auto Set

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 845 of 1024

Auto Set

▒ Overview

Automatically generate construction stages using the mesh, boundary condition, load that are viewed on the current model screen.

It can be used in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis). The data used for each stage can be
checked on the model, allowing intuitive composition of stages.

▒ Methodology

Define construction stage automatically

The construction stage auto set function can be activated by using the following steps:

1. Adding the construction stage set after finishing modeling registers the added construction stage set on the worktree, as shown below.

2. Check the [Define Auto Stage] option by right mouse clicking on the registered construction stage set. This option activates the
Construction stage > Auto set on the ribbon menu that allows for the specification of construction stages on the selected construction stage
set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 846 of 1024

3. Click the [Auto Set] icon to automatically register the displayed meshes, boundary conditions, load conditions on the activated data column
and the un-displayed (not checked) meshes, boundary conditions, load conditions on the deactivated data column. In other words, set the
show/hide model information for each composing stage and select [Auto Set] to automatically set the construction stage with reference to the
currently shown information. The created stages can be checked on the worktree.

Because the concept of construction stages is cumulative, the program compares the activated/deactivated model information in the previous
stage and only adds/deletes the changed information. Hence, it is recommended that the creation be done in stages, after the displayed
model information is returned to its initial in-situ state.

The auto set function generates construction stages using the work environment displayed on the screen. Hence, to specify the individual
options (LDF setting, clear displacement etc.) for each stage, use the Construction stage set specification menu to check the options for each
stage.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Construction Stage > Volume Data Export

Volume Data Export

▒ Overview

The volume data of 1D/2D/3D elements defined to the construction stage is exported to excel file. This shows the length/area/volume of activated/deactivated set for stages. This doesn’t
apply for the other element types (point spring, matrix spring, free field, interface, shell interface, pile tip, elastic link, rigid link, user supplied behavior for shell interface, mass).

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 847 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Boundary > Define Set

Define Set

▒ Overview

Define the boundary condition set.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 848 of 1024

Input the name and specification and click [Add] to define the boundary condition set. The boundary
condition set can be input beforehand, and the name of each boundary condition can be entered when it is
generated.

The registered boundary condition set is automatically registered under Worktree > Analysis > Boundary
Condition and the checkbox is used to show or hide the set.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Boundary > Boundary Condition

Constraint

▒ Overview

Set the constraint conditions of a model.

▒ Methodology

Auto generation of self weight and boundary condition

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 849 of 1024

The methods for setting a constraint condition of a model are Basic, Advanced and Auto.

Basic

Select the target and assign a [Fixed], [Pinned] or [No Rotation] that fits the behavior of the analysis model.

Advanced

The 6 degrees of freedom of a node can be fully or partially constrained.

Tx, Ty, Tz are the displacement constraints in the x, y, z direction and Rx, Ry, Rz are the rotational constraints in the x, y, z direction.

The constraint conditions can be input for a desired boundary condition (Point, Edge, Face, Node, Free face node).

The constraint conditions are assigned to the element node and reflected in the analysis. Setting the constraint conditions on a point, edge,
face etc. is a convenient method of selecting element nodes included in the selected geometry shape

Auto

Select the target mesh set to automatically create constraint conditions. The ground conditions for general stress analysis are set
automatically. The x direction displacement is constrained for the left/right side, the y direction displacement is constrained for the front/back
side and the x,y direction displacement is constrained for the bottom of a model.

Boundary set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 850 of 1024

Symmetric and inverse symmetric constraints

Boundary conditions can be largely divided into two conditions;

1. Constraint conditions of the analysis target are specified.

2. Symmetry of the structure is used to analyze the symmetric area only, not the entire model.

Applying symmetry is a very effective way to increase the convenience of modeling and decrease the analysis time. If the geometry of the
structure and loading is symmetrical, a 1/2 model or 1/4 model can be used to decrease the number of elements and create an economic
model that reduces analysis time. However, constraints exist when checking the deformed shape or stress distribution for the entire model
because the analysis results from the symmetric model cannot be shown on the entire model. Here, use the View symmetric model function
on the Additional view control toolset to expand the analysis results of the 1/2 or 1/4 model onto the entire model.

l How to apply symmetric boundary conditions

If one or more of the geometry shapes, materials, loads or boundary conditions is symmetrical about a plane or axis, the symmetric boundary
condition can be used. The View symmetric model function can output, expand a 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 symmetric model onto the entire model. To
assign a symmetric boundary condition, a boundary condition needs to be set such that the structure does not invade the symmetry plane.

The figure below is an example of symmetric constraint conditions applied to a solid model. To apply the symmetric constraint conditions in
the YZ plane, the Translation degree of freedom Tx is constrained. For the XY plane, the Tz needs to be constrained and for the ZX plane, the
Ty needs to be constrained.

Because Solid elements do not have a rotational degree of freedom, only the displacement boundary condition of the symmetric model is
constrained. However, the rotational degree of freedom needs to be constrained for a Shell model such that the symmetry plane is not
invaded. In other words, Tx,Ry,Rz need to be constrained for the XY plane, Tz,Rx,Ry for the XY plane and Ty,Rx,Rz for the ZX plane.

When applying a symmetric boundary condition, the loading size needs to be converted to fit the symmetric condition. Also, the symmetric
condition cannot be applied to the model shape and buckling shape because of the asymmetric vibration mode or the possibility of
asymmetric buckling.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Boundary > Constraint Equation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 851 of 1024

Constraint Equation

▒ Overview

Constrain the degree of freedom such that a particular node is dependent on the behavior of another node.

▒ Methodology

Constrain the behavior of one node to the behavior of another node. Define the main node that
affects the deformation of another node and degree of freedom [Constrained Node/DOF]. TX, TY,
TZ are the degrees of freedom for displacement and RX, RY, RZ are the degrees of freedom for
rotation. [Independent Node/DOF] inputs the coefficient applied on the displacement of the
independent node, to define the degree of freedom and interrelationship between the dependent
node.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of
the boundary set.

The behavioral characteristics are similar to Mesh > Element > Create > Other > Rigid link. For
example, when the main node moves by a certain distance, the dependent node can be constrained
such that it moves by twice that length. When creating a complex interrelationship between two or
more nodes, the constraint equation can be used.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Boundary > Change Property

Change Property

▒ Overview

Apply a new attribute data or substitute an existing attribute data for an element that changes with the construction stage. It can be used in
construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 852 of 1024

▒ Methodology

General

Select the target element and specify the element property subject to change.

Construction Stage

If the construction stage is specified, change the element property collectively.

For example, apply a stage by stage change in the material property of shotcrete, from ductile to
hardening, of a 3D model. If the mesh set is already specified by shotcrete 001 ~ shotcrete 010, the
boundary conditions for element property change need to be specified separately for each element
when using Change property > General. However, for Change property > Construction stage,
selecting shotcrete 001 ~ shotcrete 010 can create 10 boundary condition sets with just one click.

The name of the boundary condition set can be specified by [Replace substring of selected Mesh],
[Fixed Prefix] and [Add Prefix] to collectively change the name of the created mesh sets. If nothing is
input, the boundary condition set is created with the same name as the mesh set.

[Replace substring of selected Mesh] : Create a boundary condition set by using a different postfix
on the selected mesh set name.

[Fixed Prefix] : Create a boundary condition set by adding a different prefix, instead of using the
selected mesh set name.

[Add Prefix] : Create a boundary condition set by adding a prefix to the selected mesh set name.

Boundary set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the boundary set.

[Change Property] can be used when the element properties change with the construction stage. If the ground has a property A in Stage 1
and that property changes to B in Stage 2, which then changes to property C in Stage 3, the following two boundary conditions are created.

Boundary condition 1 : A -> B

Boundary condition 2 : A -> C

Using Define construction stage, activate Boundary condition 1 in Stage 2 and for Stage 3, activate Boundary condition 2 and deactivate
Boundary condition 1.

As a result, an element property that changes by A->B->C can be defined.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Boundary > Water level

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 853 of 1024

Water Level

▒ Overview

Create a changing groundwater level by selecting a geometry shape on the work screen.

▒ Methodology

Auto generation of 3D Water level

Edge

Methodology

Create a changing groundwater level by selecting edges.

Specify the axis direction of the changing variable. For example, if the groundwater level changes in
the x direction of the model, select the variable axis as x. Then input the spacing value. For example,
if the spacing is 1m, the groundwater level lines are created in 1m intervals.

The created water level is registered under Worktree > Analysis > Function > General function and
can be edited as a table using right mouse click > Edit.

Face

Select a face and input the spacing value to create a changing groundwater level.

The created water level is registered under Worktree > Analysis > Function > General function and
can be edited as a table using right mouse click > Edit.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 854 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Load > Define Set

Define Set

▒ Overview

Define the thermal load set.

▒ Methodology

Input the name and specification and click [Add] to define the thermal load set.
It can be input beforehand, and the name of each thermal load can be entered when it is
generated.

The registered thermal load set is automatically registered under Worktree > Analysis > Thermal
Load and the checkbox is used to show or hide the set.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 855 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Load > Prescribed Temperature

Prescribed Temperature

▒ Overview

The prescribed temperature (fixed) serves as the boundary condition of the heat transfer analysis, makes it always maintained during
analysis. It has a similar role to the constraint in structural analysis. A time function can also be added.

▒ Methodology

Name

Enter the name of the prescribed temperature condition.

Type

The applied temperature is defined on the node, but the selection target can also be set as a
geometry shape (edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes.

Temperature

Enter the temperature value for the selected target objects.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 856 of 1024

Base Function

Set a spatial function or a non-spatial function as a base function to be applied to the

magnitude of temperature.

Time Function

Select the function to be applied to time.

Global Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the total analysis time.

Local Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the subcase time.

Thermal Load

Register the specified fixed temperature conditions to a desired thermal load set.
The user may assign any name to the load set.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Load > Heat Source

Heat Source

▒ Overview

An exothermic load is a modeling of the heat generated in a solid body, and is defined as the energy per unit time of a unit volume. The
larger the volume of the structure, the greater the total calorific value, and it plays a similar role to the self weight in structural analysis. A time
function can also be applied.

▒ Methodology

Name

Enter the name of the condition of heat generation (source).

Type

Select the type of target objects to which the transient heat generation conditions will be
applied. Element, 1D Element, 2D Element, 3D Element, Edge, Face and Part can be selected.

Heat Generation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 857 of 1024

Enter the magnitude of heat generation per unit volume.

Base Function

Set a spatial function or a non-spatial function as a base function to be applied to the

magnitude of heat
generation.

Time Function

Select the function to be applied to time.

Global Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the total analysis time.

Local Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the subcase time.

Thermal Load

Register the specified heat generation conditions to a desired thermal load set.
The user may assign any name to the load set

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Load > Heat Flux

Heat Flux

▒ Overview

It is the function to input the heat flux load. It can be applied to nodal points / edges / faces. Heat flux is used to model heat input through
the surface of an object.
It is used as a load vector in heat transfer analysis. The heat flux is entered as the unit time energy per time x unit area (Watt/Area). A time
function can also be applied.

▒ Methodology

Name

Enter the name of the heat flux to be defined.

Type

Select the type of target objects to which heat flux will be applied. Only the edges of 2D

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 858 of 1024

elements can be selected.

Heat Flux

Enter the heat flux value to the selected target objects.

Uniformly Distributed Load

Load the heat flux uniformly. If this is not selected, the heat flux will be loaded in a linear
varying form.

Area Factor

Enter Area factor when Nodal method is used.

Base Function

Set a spatial function or a non-spatial function as a base function to be applied to the heat flux.

Q1

Enter the heat flux value when Uniformly Distributed Load is selected.

Q2 - Q4

For a linearly varying distribution, enter the heat flux values sequentially.

Time Function

Select the function to be applied to time.

Global Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the total analysis time.

Local Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the subcase time.

Thermal Load

Register the specified heat flux to a desired load set. The user may assign any name to the load set.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Load > Convection

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 859 of 1024

Convection

▒ Overview

The phenomenon of heat transfer in a liquid or gas as the hot and cold parts move together is called convection. Convection conditions can
be entered in the desired part of the model (nodes, lines, faces). Convection generated by buoyancy due to density change caused by
temperature difference in fluid is called free convection. Convection heat transfer rate is generally proportional to temperature difference.
Enter the atmospheric temperature at which the structure is placed at ambient temperature, and the convection coefficient is the atmospheric
convection coefficient. A time function can also be applied.

▒ Methodology

Name

Enter the name of the convection condition.

Type

Select the type of target objects to which convective heat transfer conditions will be applied.
Face, 2D Element, 3D Element Face and 3D Element Free Face can be selected.

Ambient Temperature

Enter the ambient temperature value for the selected target objects.

By Value

Enter the ambient temperature directly.

Ambient Temp. Function

In the ambient temperature function, you can define the outside temperature using
Sine function, where

T: Maximum outside temperature,

to: Delay time, and
To: Minimum outside temperature.

Convection Coefficient

Enter the convection coefficient.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 860 of 1024

Base Function

Set a spatial function or a non-spatial function as a base function to be applied to the

magnitude of convection or temperature.

Time Function

Select the function to be applied to time.

Global Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the total analysis time.

Local Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the subcase time.

Thermal Load

Register the specified convection conditions to a desired thermal load set.

The user may assign any name to the load set.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Load > Pipe Cooling

Pipe Cooling

▒ Overview

Define the Pipe Cooling which reduces the heat of hydration. The user can model
with buried pipe, and reduce the heat of hydration by water cooling. In this case, the
heat exchange is through convection between the pipe surface and cooling water.

▒ Methodology

Name

Enter the name of the pipe cooling.

Cooling Pipe Diameter

Enter the pipe diameter.

Convection

Enter the Convection Coefficient..

Cooling Water Specific Heat

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 861 of 1024

Enter the specific heat of cooling water.

Mass Density

Enter the density of cooling water.

Flow Rate

Enter the Unit Flow Rate.

Inlet Temp.

Enter the temperature of pipe inlet.

Time Function

Select the function to be applied to time.

Global Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the total

analysis time.

Local Time

The time applied to the time function is based on the subcase

time.

Thermal Load

Register the pipe cooling conditions to a desired thermal load

set.
The user may assign any name to the load set.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Load > Load Table Import.Export

Load Table Import / Export

▒ Overview

Define or modify load sets through excel file like the usage of Load Table.

Users can import the amounts of load sets from excel file and export defined load sets (node/element number, magnitude, and direction) to
Excel.

The sample of table for load sets (LoadTable Sample.xlsx) can be found in the installation folder. (ex. C:\Program Files\MIDAS\GTS NX\Sample)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 862 of 1024

Prescribed Temperature, Heat Source, Heat Flux, Convection loads are supported.

Can be useful when users have to manage (input and modify) large numbers of load sets at once.

▒ Methodology

There are limitations in this function as follows.

- Heat Flux:: Node, Edge / Face - Only 2D Element Edge, 2D Element, 3D Element Face type are supported.

- Heat Source: Element type is supported.

- Prescribed Temperature: Node type is supported.

- Convection: 2D Element Edge, 2D Element, 3D Element Face type.

Only one excel file can communicate with GTSNX at the same time.

Home > GTS NX > Thermal Analysis > Options > Options

Options

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Set the general environment of the program. The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary
Condition, Analysis/Results.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 863 of 1024

General

[General]

l Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.

l License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web Authorization method are supported.

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

[Graphic]

l Work View : Set the options for the screen.

- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.

- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder shaped curved surface. The available levels are
from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and smoother surface as the level gets higher.

- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work window during view rotation.

l Selection : Specify the options for the model part.

l Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.

l Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.

l Element : Specify the color for each element type.

l Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show the shadow and controls its shade. The
available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information shown as the level gets higher.

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]

l Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.

l Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]

l Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.

l Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol 3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z
axis respectively.

[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.

[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.

[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.

[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol.

Analysis/Results

[Analysis]

l Number of processors : Specify the number of CPUs used for analysis. For a dual core CPU, input 2 processors and for a quad core CPU,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 864 of 1024

input 4 processors to increase the analysis speed.

l Element Formulation : Specify the formula applied to the element.

In terms of speed, a faster solution can be obtained in order of Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability) > Hybrid (Accuracy). In terms
of accuracy, a more accurate solution can be obtained in order of Hybrid (Accuracy) > Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability).

l Equation Solver (Structural) : Specify the method for solving a finite element simultaneous equation. If the setting is automatic, the
program automatically determines one of the following methods: Multifrontal, Dense matrix or AMG(Algebraic Multi-Grid).

l 2D Element Setting (Structure) : The [Unique Shell Normal Generation] function judges two adjacent shell elements to have two different
normal directions when the value between the normal direction vectors are larger than the input value. Because the element size is
relatively larger than the curvature, if this value is increased for a rough curved mesh, a smooth contour that considers the curvature of
the geometry shape can be calculated.
The [Consider Drilling DOF(degree of freedom)] option calculates the stiffness of the in-plane deformation by considering the rotation
about the out-plane axis (drilling degree of freedom).

[Result]

l General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default value is set as 1e-12, and results lower
than this value is considered as 0.

l Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.

l Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to represent the vectors.

l Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.

l No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.

l Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.

l Graph : Select whether to show the graph.

l Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.

l Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > General

General

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Ground analysis can be explained by comparing it to general structural analysis. Structural analysis gives importance to the
uncertainty of load, acting on the structure. Hence, it conducts the member design for the largest member force obtained by combining
various results systematically. In contrast, ground analysis focuses more on the uncertainty of construction step and material itself, rather than
the load and so, it is important to understand physical state inside the ground. As a result, for ground analysis, solid elements need to be used
in modeling to reflect the ground shape and construction situation; and non-linear anisotropic materials and in-situ stress states need to be
considered to reflect the actual on-site conditions as much as possible.

The program for ground analysis can be used to simulate in-situ conditions and determine whether design or construction condition is
appropriate. For ground analysis, various types of analysis are covered, from General static analysis to Seepage analysis, Stress-seepage

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 865 of 1024

coupled analysis, Consolidation analysis, Construction stage analysis, Slope stability analysis etc.

This section provides a brief overview of the analysis methods and descriptions for the analysis options. Refer to the Ch. 5 of the Analysis
manual for more detailed information on analysis algorithms.

Provided ground analysis features are as follows:

Static Analysis

l Linear static analysis

l Non-linear static analysis (Non-linear elastic or Elasto-plastic analysis)

Construction Stage Analysis

Seepage Analysis

l Steady State

l Transient

Coupled Seepage-Stress Analysis

l Seepage-Stress Sequential Analysis

l Consolidation Analysis

l Fully-coupled Seepage-Stress Analysis

Dynamic Analysis

l EigenValue Analysis

l Response Spectrum Analysis

l Linear Time History(Modal)

l Linear Time History(Direct)

l Nonlinear Time History Analysis

l 2D Equivalent Linear Analysis

Slope Stability Analysis

l Strength Reduction Method

l Stress Analysis Method

l Nonlinear time history + SRM

▒ Methodology

Create an ‘Analysis Case’ to perform analysis. This step sets the analysis method and the analysis conditions (Mesh set, Boundary condition,
Load condition etc.) for each method. In addition, the detailed analysis option and result output option can be adjusted according to each
analysis method. For Construction stage analysis in particular, the analysis can be set using the following five different analysis methods and
the data used for analysis is specified. The detailed analysis option and result output option can be adjusted and multiple construction stage
sets can be set for recursive analysis on a single model with changing analysis conditions.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 866 of 1024

Input the Title (and Description) to differentiate each Analysis case and select the Solution
(analysis) type. The Analysis Case Model should be defined according to the selected Solution
(analysis) type. Only the activated analysis conditions (Mesh, Boundary condition, Load etc.)
moved to the Active Sets are reflected in the analysis, not All Sets included in the analysis model.
Therefore, it is possible to create several Analysis cases by adjusting the analysis condition on the
same model and comparing the results. Especially for Linear static analysis, the [Solve Each Load
Set Independently] option can be used to apply all the activated Load Sets individually for
recursive analysis and comparison of results.

Particular detailed analysis settings (Time step, Analysis control, Output control) can be added,
<Construction state-supported Analysis according to each Solution type (analysis method). Each analysis method has different settings
methods > and the settings need to be checked before creating an Analysis Case.

(Go to Analysis Control)

If all sets are reflected in the analysis, use the button to move all conditions to the Active Set.
If only several particular conditions are reflected, use drag & drop to move the selected sets to
the Active Set. For Construction stage analysis, because the data used for stage-by-stage analysis
is already set, select only the sets used to perform the analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Linear Static Analysis

Solution Type

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 867 of 1024

▒ Linear Static Analysis

Linear static analysis assumes ground and rock materials to be linear-elastic materials and uses static analysis to determine the behavioral
characteristics when loading is applied. Ground materials only display linear-elastic properties in the early stages of loading, where only a small
strain is generated. However, because Linear-elastic analysis does not consider failure and idealizes the stress-strain relationship linearly, it is
widely used for simple analysis, such as identifying the stress distribution or concentration in the in-situ ground.

In a broad sense, linear behavior can be viewed as a special form of nonlinear behavior but because linear analysis is convenient and intuitive,
linear static analysis is categorized as a separate analysis type. Linear analysis, including Linear dynamic analysis, utilizes the elastic behavior of
a defined material for analysis. Also, the non-linear behavior (tension only, compression only and non-linear elastic behavior) of elastic link
elements or truss elements are ignored and the elements are used in the analysis as elastic bodies. Consequently, it is useful to use Linear
static analysis to observe the approximate behavior of the ground, to organize the initial stage conditions of the construction stage or to
conduct tunnel lining analysis.

Particularly, Linear static analysis does not require recursive calculations and hence, it has a short calculation time. GTS NX considers pore
pressure in Linear-static analysis and drained and undrained conditions can be assigned to elastic materials for analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Non-linear static analysis

Solution Type

▒ Non-linear static analysis

All physical phenomena includes non-linearity. Ground or structural behaviors are not an exception. Non-linear static analysis is used to
simulate the behavior of ground considering such non-linearity, when the change with time is small and can be ignored. GTS NX considers the
following non-linearity

l Non-linearity of material : This occurs when the stress-strain relationship is non-linear. Most ground materials have this non-linearity.

l Geometric non-linearity: If the displacement-strain relationship is non-linear, the linear assumption is no longer applicable when the
displacement is large, or the rotational deformation is large.

l Non-linearity of load and boundary: Non-linearity that includes the non-linear behavior at an interface, or non-linearity caused by the
direction change of a load due to strain, caused by forces such as the follower force.

GTS NX can consider all non-linearity mentioned above in analysis. Non-linear analysis can take a long time for complex non-linear systems
because repeated calculations are conducted. Hence for the practicality, considering appropriate non-linearity can result in analysis results that
simulate non-linear behavior, while maintaining the accuracy with little computational cost.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Construction Stage Analysis

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 868 of 1024

Solution Type

▒ Construction Stage Analysis

Construction stage analysis can be used to simulate the construction process of the ground using numerical analysis. Construction stage
analysis consists of multiple stages and loading/ boundary conditions, as well as elements, can be added or removed at each stage. This
loading/ boundary or element change is applied at the start of each stage. GTS NX can use following types of analysis features to conduct
Construction stage analysis.

Stress-Slope Analysis

Analysis of stress and slope stability during the construction process

Seepage Analysis

Stage by stage Steady state seepage analysis, Stage by stage Transient seepage analysis

Stress-Seepage-Slope coupled analysis

Sequential Seepage-stress analysis and Slope stability analysis during the construction process

Consolidation analysis

Consolidation analysis for environment change and construction process of embankment

Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis

Stress analysis fully coupled with Transient seepage phenomenon

Stress - Nonlinear Time History analysis

Users can perform nonlinear dynamic analysis considering stress status of ground resulted from not only self weight but also construction stage (the history of stress).
Nonlinear time history stage must be set at the final stage.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 869 of 1024

Heat Transfer

Stage by stage of steady state thermal analysis, stage by stage of transient thermal analysis.

Seepage-Thermal Stress

Users can perform thermo-hydro-mechanical analysis.

Thermal Stress

Thermo-mechanical simulation can be conducted.

When conducting Construction stage analysis, the following should be considered.

l Addition/Removal of element

l Loading/Unloading of weight

l Change in boundary condition

l Change in rock material property

l Definition of load distribution factor

l Step by step underground water level

l Drained-Undrained analysis

l Initialization of displacement

l Stress Analysis for initial construction stage (Consider Ko condition)

l Restart

For example, the construction stages for a tunnel are as follows.

1 Stage: Initial ground stress

2 Stage: 1st face excavation

3 Stage: 1st reinforcement + 2nd face excavation

4 Stage: 2nd reinforcement + 3rd face excavation

5 Stage: 3rd reinforcement + 4th face excavation

…… (Repeat) ……

The first stage is the used to calculate the in-situ stress of soil strata. Because stress analysis of the ground assumes the in-situ state to be the
initial state, the in-situ stress state needs to be calculated.

GTS NX uses self-weight analysis to calculate the initial in-situ stress.

Activate / Deactivate element

An element activated during Construction stage analysis has a default in-situ stress value of ‘0 (zero)’. But if a prestress is defined on the
element, the element has the defined prestress value as its in-situ stress. If the self-weight is defined, the activated element has a body force
due to its self-load. If the activated element uses the Modified Cam-Clay material model, it has an initial linear-elastic property that is
determined by the loading/ boundary conditions of the corresponding stage.

New nodes will be activated as the element appears, and the initial displacement of the node is also ‘0 (zero)’.

If an element is deactivated at a construction stage, and an additional load distribution factor is not defined, the internal forces of the
deactivated element are no longer considered. The total stress state is re-distributed according to this condition.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 870 of 1024

Loading / Unloading of weight

The addition and removal of load at each construction stage is possible and the load from the previous stage is maintained, except for
following cases.

l When an element subjected to the load is deactivated at a stage, its self-weight and external load applied to it are also removed.

l When a node subjected to the load is deactivated, the external load applied to it is also removed.

Added load is cumulated to the already applied load from the previous construction stage.

Boundary conditions can also be modified in the same way and the same exceptions hold true.

Load distribution factor

The Load distribution factor is used during Construction stage analysis to simplify the modeling. The Load distribution factor is a numerical
analysis method that uses the load distribution factor to apply the effects of element removal sequentially in the following stages. The Load
distribution factor can be used to simplify a 3D problem in 2D, or to downscale the construction stage of a 3D model during analysis.

For example, if stress relaxations of 40%, 30% and 40% are assumed to occur in three consecutive stages, starting from the excavation stage,
define the excavation stage and activate the load distribution factor option for that step. Input 0.4, 0.3 and 0.3 for the load distribution factor
in option window for ‘After Current Stage 0, 1, 2 stage’ respectively.

The pre-defined LDF for any stage can be copied to any other stage in the whole construction stage set, by using the [Copy To Specific Stage]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 871 of 1024

tool. Therefore, each stage doesn't necessarily require a separate definition for LDF unless the factor change for that particular stage as per the
user's requirements.

Local LDF - If the LDF is applied to any particular stage as shown above, it is termed as Local LDF.

Global LDF - The LDF function when extended to all the stages in as construction stage set is termed as Global LDF. The user can also local
LDF to any particular stage

Material property conversion

During Construction step analysis, the ground material properties can change to model time dependent ground disturbance, soil improvement
or hardening. There are also cases where the structural material properties need to be change in the middle of the stage, such as hardening of
lining concrete or changes in lining thickness. For this purpose, the material properties of a specific element can be changed without any
number limits. The changed material property is continued onto the element results(displacement, stress, strain etc.) of the previous stage for
analysis.

Caution: The Material property conversion feature needs to be used carefully. Changing the infill material after excavation in Construction
stage analysis can be simulated using just the property conversions, without activating or deactivating any elements. Here, the stress
conditions from the previous stage is applied to the following stage and so, physically inappropriate behavior can be observed due to the
material property conversion. Hence, the material property conversion needs to be conducted at a stage where the element is deactivated and
re-activated to obtain the intended results. If a new element is activated, the internal element has an in-situ stress, strain and interior state
variable of ‘0(zero)’.

Undrained Analysis

Undrained analysis can be conducted for selected elements and selected construction stages. Two conditions should be satisfied beforehand
to apply undrained analysis. Firstly, the drainage parameter should be set as undrained type on material model. Secondly, the undrained
condition should be checked on the Analysis control of construction stage. If only one of the conditions is met, the material conducts drainage
analysis in the corresponding stage.

For singular analysis cases such as static linear/nonlinear analysis, or slope stability examination, check the Analysis Control > Undrained
Condition > Allow Undrained Material Behavior.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Consolidation analysis

Solution Type

▒ Consolidation analysis

Consolidation analysis is an analytical method that calculates the behavior of pore water pressure when it resists external loading, when excess
pore water pressure occurs and as the excess pore water pressure reduces with time for an undrained condition.

Pore water pressure in the ground with a small osmotic coefficient instantaneously displays the same behavior as the undrained condition.
Hence, it bears most of the compressive load by the created excess pore water pressure, according to the change in load state. However, as
time goes by, excess pore water pressure is re-distributed and if there is a drainage boundary, the excess pore water pressure decreases
gradually. Because of this, the load previously resisted by the excess pore water pressure is gradually resisted by the soil frame, causing
gradual deformation of the soil frame and increasing effective stress within the frame.

The increase in effective stress leads to the deformation of soil structure and this deformation is accumulated in the gravitational direction,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 872 of 1024

eventually displaying settlement behavior in the gravitational direction with time elapse.

This gradual increase in deformation creates settlement at the base of structural foundation and differential settlement at the base foundation
greatly affects the stability and safety of the structure.

Characteristics of Consolidation element

In Consolidation analysis, the elements have an additional pore water pressure degree of freedom, as well as displacement degree of freedom,
at the nodes. It is assumed that all elements have a degree of freedom for pore water pressure, unless the two boundary conditions (Non-
consolidating condition, Drainage condition) are specified, for Consolidation analysis. Hence, for bank materials that do not express
consolidated behavior directly, the non-consolidating element conditions need to be defined to apply it as a general structural element. Also,
the drainage conditions needs to be defined for drainage boundaries in consolidating elements. If the boundary conditions are properly
defined and Consolidation analysis is conducted, the excess pore water pressure is 0 (zero) where the non-consolidation conditions and
drainage conditions are applied.

<Consolidation element boundary conditions>

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis

Solution Type

▒ Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis

Analysis that couples the seepage phenomenon and ground stress analysis can be classified in various ways, depending on the coupling.

The simplest way is to obtain the pore water pressure distribution by conducting seepage analysis beforehand, and reflecting it in the total
stress/effective stress relationship equation of the stress analysis conducted in the following step. Such analysis is called sequential analysis.
This method can be used to understand the static stress state of the given steady groundwater flow. However, since deformation due to stress
analysis does not influence the seepage phenomenon inversely, there is no two-way coupling.

Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis is the two-way coupled analysis between seepage analysis and stress analysis. Both analyses are used to
solve the coupled equation. It can display the pore water pressure, stress or deformation changes with time.

The consolidation analysis begins with the assumption that steady state pore water pressure can be maintained, and is used to see the
changes in excess pore water pressure. In other words, this analysis is used to simulate the phenomenon of how excess pore water pressure
changes with the changes in load/boundary conditions.

Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis does not follow assumption that steady state pore water pressure is maintained. Hence, it is suitable
for simulating the transient seepage phenomenon, stress analysis and stability in abnormal condition in a fully coupled form. Unlike the
consolidation analysis, it is possible to define the changes in seepage boundary conditions with time, boundary flow rate etc.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 873 of 1024

In other words, for Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis, it is possible to use all the transient seepage boundary conditions, structural load
and boundary conditions.

This analysis can be applied to the ground stability analysis for rainfall or the of large-scale dam stability analysis for water level change. The
seepage boundary conditions (Head/Flux) can all be used to analyze not only the changes in excess pore water pressure, but also the
consolidation analysis that considers the total change in pore water pressure.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Seepage analysis

Solution Type

▒ Seepage analysis

Seepage analysis can be largely divided into two; the steady state analysis and transient analysis.

Steady state flow analysis is where the boundary conditions inside and outside of the ground does not change with time. Therefore, the inflow
is always equal to the outflow within the analysis range. Transient analysis on the other hand, can display different inflow and outflow with
time, even when the same boundary conditions as the steady state analysis are applied.

A permeable ground layer (aquifer) exists where the groundwater can seep through, and if the head difference or flux exists at the boundary,
the seepage phenomenon occurs.

Seepage flow occurs along the waterway that connects through the empty pores between soil particles. This flow complies with Darcy’s law.
According to this law, the seepage quantity through the soil volume is equal to the multiplication of permeability coefficient, hydraulic
gradient and cross sectional area. Darcy’s law originally started from the saturated domain, but can also be applied to the unsaturated domain.

The unsaturated domain includes all non-saturated domains, from the fully dried condition to the almost saturated condition. As the degree
of saturation falls below 100% , air bubbles will also exist in the pores and if the saturation is very low, the water particles will attached
between soil particles in a concave form.

Negative pore pressure is referred to as suction pressure. In most cases, suction pressure increases as the degree of saturation decreases.

Transient analysis is used when the boundary conditions inside or outside of the ground changes according to time.

The main differences between transient analysis and steady state analysis are that the boundary conditions change as time passes and the fact
that the transient analysis requires volumetric water content. When the underground water level goes up or down, the influence factors such
as the water content in the unsaturated domain and porosity are needed.

Comparing the water filling of a reservoir between the fully dried initial state and the partially saturated state, there is significant difference in
the time it takes for the seepage in the reservoir body to reach a steady state. Hence, transient analysis can be used to estimate the time it
takes to saturate the interior of the body, or deduce a more economic design variable by comparing it with the saturated case.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Eigenvalue analysis (Mode analysis)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 874 of 1024

Solution Type

▒ Eigenvalue analysis (Mode analysis)

Eigenvalue analysis is used to analyze the inherent dynamic properties of the ground/structure, and this can be used to obtain the natural
mode(mode shape), natural period (natural frequency), modal participation factor etc. of the ground/structure. These properties are
determined by the mass and stiffness of the structure. In other words, if a structure is determined, the natural frequency and vibration mode
(natural mode) are also determined and the number of properties are the same as the degree of freedom of the structure. For real cases, the
structure does not vibrate at a single mode shape and multiple modes overlap to display a complex vibration shape.

Here, the Mass participation factor is a mass percentage factor that represents how much of the structure participates in the vibration for each
vibration mode when the structure is vibrated at a complex vibration mode. For example, if the first mode mass participation factor is 60%,
60% of the total mass of the structure participates in the first mode. Hence, the a mode with a high mass participation factor is considered in
the earthquake wave for analysis.

For general structure, considering only vibration modes with a mass participation factor sum of around 90% is still regarded as a sufficiently
accurate analysis. However, the ground material properties are relatively smaller that structural properties and it is hard to have a mass
participation factor of 90% in Eigenvalue analysis. The period is also relatively smaller and no specific standard exists.

Natural periods are defined as the time taken for a structure to vibrate from its natural vibration state to the particular mode shape using a
natural value that 1:1 corresponds to the natural mode.

<Natural mode shapes>

<Natural frequency>

The General seismic design criteria requires that each mode’s effective model mass included in the analysis should retain more than 90% of
the total mass. This is to include most of the major modes that influence the result.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 875 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Response Spectrum Analysis

Solution Type

▒ Response Spectrum Analysis

The Response spectrum analysis uses and combines the spectrum data, corresponding to the absolute maximum values of the time response
for each mode, using the principle of superposition. Because the simultaneity of the maximum value occurrence for each mode is not
considered and only the absolute maximum values are combined, it is considered as an approximate solution to the Modal linear time history
analysis. However, the correlation between modes is considered in the mode combination to correct for simultaneity errors.

Spectrum data

A spectrum data is the absolute maximum displacement (or velocity, acceleration) values found by fixing the damping ratio and changing the
period (mass, stiffness) of a single DOF system for a time history data. Because the damping ratio for each mode of the structure can be
different, instead of using a spectrum data for one damping ratio, multiple spectrum data for different damping ratios are created and
interpolated for the damping ratio. The period spacing used to create the spectrum data can be different to the natural period of the structure
and so, interpolation for the natural period is also needed. Both linear interpolation and logarithmic interpolation are supported. Also, the
spectrum data generally uses the design response spectrum created from the statistical historic earthquake data in the target region, rather
than converting a particular given data. Because a design response spectrum with one damping ratio is generally used, correction instead of
interpolation is applied for this case.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 876 of 1024

<Create displacement response spectrum of SDOF system>

Damping consideration

Damping consideration is essential for accurate dynamic analysis. All real structures cannot vibrate infinitely and the energy loss at the
molecular level, or energy loss in the structure due to interaction between component elements, applies damping to the system and gradually
decreases the vibrations of the structure.

In particular, for stimulation near the natural frequency region (resonance effect) of the structure, damping has a dominant effect on the
analysis results.

<Without damping> <With damping effects>

The accurate damping ratio of the structure needs to be determined through experimentation, and the generally used damping ratios used
are as follows.

System Damping ratio

Steel (within elastic region) <1%
Steel structure with joint 3%~7%
Pipe system with small diameter 1%~2%
Pipe system with large diameter 2%~3%
Rubber material ~5%
Prestressed concrete structure 2%~3%
RC structure 4%~7%

The modal damping is most frequently used to express the structural damping for general numerical analysis. The modal damping determines
the damping for each natural frequency in the system and can be largely divided into proportional and non-proportional damping.
Proportional damping can use the mass proportional type, stiffness proportional type or Rayleigh type damping.

Mass proportional damping expresses the viscous damping due to external factors such as air resistance and assumes that the damping
matrix is proportional to the mass. For stiffness proportional damping, the dissipation damping effect (vibration energy dissipated to the
ground) is hard to express directly and is assumed to be proportional to the damping stiffness. Hence, the damping can be overestimated at
higher modes.

Rayleigh damping is the stiffness proportional type corrected for the damping constant at higher modes and can be expressed as the sum of
the mass proportional type and stiffness proportional type.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Linear time history analysis (Moda Direct)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 877 of 1024

Solution Type

▒ Linear time history analysis (Modal/Direct)

Linear time history analysis calculates the solution to the dynamic equilibrium equation for the structural behavior (displacement, member
force etc.) at an arbitrary time using the dynamic properties of the structure and applied loading when a dynamic load is applied. The Modal
superposition method and Direct method are used for linear time history analysis.

Because of linear analysis characteristics, nonlinearity is not considered. When using a nonlinear material, the material is converted to an
equivalent linear elastic material for analysis.

The water level can be defined for the linear time history analysis and the effective stress results can be viewed. Also the drained/undrained
effects of the material can be included in the analysis.

Mode superposition method

The mode superposition method assumes the structural displacement as a linear combination of orthogonal displacements. Using this, a more
simplified time integral function can be used to calculate the dynamic response for a selected mode. The mode superposition method is used
in many structural analysis programs and is an effective way to calculate the dynamic response for the linear dynamic analysis of large
structures with little computational cost. However, the accuracy of the total response depends on the number of used natural modes and so,
the number of modes used in the calculation need to be selected appropriately.

Direct method

The direct method is a time history analysis that uses the DOF of the total analysis area as a variable. The dynamic equilibrium equation for the
total DOF can be integrated gradually with time to find the solution. The solution is found for each time stage without any form change to the
equilibrium equation and various integration methods can be used. The direct integration method conducts the analysis for all time stages
and the number or time stages is proportional to the analysis time.

Loading in Linear time history analysis

Dynamic loads that change with time can be used in linear time history analysis.

Define time step

The time step for time history analysis is different for the direct method and mode method.

The direct method uses the defined time step to conduct time integration implicitly. Hence, accuracy difference can occur depending on the
time step size. Generally, accurate results can be obtained when a time step that is smaller than 10% of the minimum period is used. Using
large steps create errors in the time integration and using too small steps create unnecessary computation cost.

The direct method conducts the time integration analytically. Hence, the time step does not affect the accuracy of the calculated result. The
Mode method time step is used to set the time to view the interim results of the time history.

Comparison between the Direct method and Mode method

The direct method generally takes longer than the mode method for analysis. Hence, if many time steps are needed or if the model size is
large, it is effective to use the mode method. If many natural frequencies are calculated near the analysis load frequency (for example, the
problem of too many active frequencies), it is better to use the direct method to obtain more accurate results.

Element Direct method Mode method

Analysis time Long analysis time Short analysis time
Details Time step setting is important Number of modes setting is important
Model size Fit for small models Fit for large models
Long analysis time, but highly accurate Accuracy errors can occur depending on the selected number of
Analysis accuracy
results modes

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 878 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Nonlinear time history analysis

Solution Type

▒ Nonlinear time history analysis

Nonlinearity can also be considered for ground and civil structures in time history analysis. Like the nonlinear static analysis, the material
nonlinearity, geometric nonlinearity, load and boundary nonlinearity can all or selectively be considered in analysis.

Generally, most ground materials have nonlinear properties and so, the dynamic response of the ground can be accurately simulated using
nonlinear time history analysis.

Water level

Nonlinear time history analysis is used to identify the dynamic response in a relatively short time and to, the water level for dynamic analysis is
assumed to be constant.

Loading in Nonlinear time history analysis

Dynamic loads that change with time can be used in nonlinear time history analysis.

Define time step

Nonlinear time history analysis conducts time integration implicitly. Hence, accuracy difference can occur depending on the time step size.
Generally, accurate results can be obtained when a time step that is smaller than 10% of the minimum period is used. Using large steps create
errors in the time integration and using too small steps create unnecessary computation cost. In particular for nonlinear analysis, the
converging solution is found using iterative calculations and hence, the time step must be computed carefully.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > 2D equivalent linear analysis

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 879 of 1024

Solution Type

▒ 2D equivalent linear analysis

The equivalent linear method on the GTS NX is applied to free field analysis and 2D equivalent linear analysis. The equivalent linear method
approximates the ground material nonlinearity as an equivalent linear material property for linear iterative analysis. It is generally valid for
strain sizes of .

For the equivalent linear method, the initial element shear modulus G and initial damping ratio h need to be set for each layer. Generally, the
values when the strain is minimum are used, and the frequency domain analysis is conducted to calculate the maximum shear strain of
each layer or element. The effective shear strain is calculated as 0.65 or using the earthquake magnitude by multiplying to
that value and the shear modulus G and damping ratio h are calculated using the dynamic material function curve, created from the effective
shear strain of each layer or element. This analytical process is repeated until the G and values h converge, generally determined by the
relative error of 5% or less, then the analysis is complete and the calculated results are output.

Free field analysis finds the ground response to an input earthquake at the in-situ ground stage before structure construction. Free field
analysis is often used to for the determination of design response spectrum using ground surface vibration estimation, liquefaction
assessment using dynamic stress-strain computation and the determination of earthquake load that causes instability of ground or structures.

2D equivalent linear analysis not only provides analysis for the ground, but also for soil-structure interaction. To minimize the earthquake
damage, the seismic design for underground structures is performed, and the stability examination needs to be done to the structure that
considered seismic safety. If the structure is built on a soft ground layer such as clay or silt layers, the vibrations in the bedrock due to
earthquakes can be greatly amplified at the surface and hence, the effects on the structure by the soil-structure interaction due to earthquake
vibrations need to be assessed in detail. Because underground structure are different from ground structures in that the structural response to
earthquakes is mostly controlled by the ground displacement, the dynamic material properties of the ground and modeling method
determines the analysis results. The figure below displays the general information on modeling the actual analysis domain using the finite
element method (FEM) for soil-structure interaction analysis.

<Schematic diagram of analysis domain and FEM modeling>

Boundary
Analysis method Model depth Model width
conditions
Transfer Frequency domain - D ≥ 2d
Viscous Time domain H≥d D ≥ 5d
Symmetric Effective stress D ≥ 10d

<Table. FEM model size to minimize analysis result interference cause by the boundary>

The main difference between soil-structure interaction problems and normal structural dynamic problems is the radiation damping effect due
to the infinite property of the ground. Normal damping properties come from material friction etc. that dampens the structural movement,
but radiation damping radiates the wave energy into the infinite ground space to dampen the structural energy. Hence, seismic analysis
conducted using the equivalent linear method to consider the material nonlinearity and use the frequency domain analysis, that makes the
modeling of radiation damping easier.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 880 of 1024

The analysis method depending on the shear modulus G and shear strain γ relationship is shown in the figure below.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Slope stability analysis (SRM SAM)

Solution Type

▒ Slope stability analysis (SRM/SAM)

Slope stability for an embankment or excavation is one of the most frequently dealt problems in geotechnical engineering. The slope always has a self-
weight potential energy due to gravity and if external forces such as pore water pressure, applied load, earthquake, wave force etc. act on the slope, its
stability is greatly affected. Here, slope failure can occur if the internal shear stress due to the self-weight and external forces is greater than the shear
strength of the slope soil. Calculating the safety for this slope failure due to shear stress and shear force is called Slope stability analysis.

The following slope stability analysis methods can be used on the GTS NX.

l Strength Reduction Method (SRM): Nonlinear FEM-coupled strength reduction method

l Stress Analysis Method (SAM): Method based on Nonlinear FEM and limit equilibrium theory

Strength Reduction Method (SRM)

Slope stability analysis using the finite element method is a numerical analysis method that analyzes the minimum safety factor and failure behavior using
various shapes, loads and boundary conditions. In particular, the strength reduction method can be used to simulate the failure process without any
previous assumptions (Griffith et. al. 1999; Matsui, 1990). It can also be applied to 3D axis symmetric problems.

SRM Analysis can be conducted on Mohr-Coulomb, Modified Mohr-Coulomb, Hardening Soil, Generalized Hoek-Brown, Ramberg-Osgood etc. All
other constitutive models do NOT support SRM Analysis, in case if any other soil type is selected, then the FoS values will be faulty and cannot be
taken into account.

The strength reduction method gradually decreases the shear strength and friction angle until the calculation does not converge, and that point is
considered to be the failure point of the slope. The maximum strength reduction ratio at that point is used to calculate the minimum safety factor of the
slope.

The results of FoS Calculations can be checked in the form of Safety vs maximum Displacement Chart in real time while the analysis is running. The feature
is applicable to SRM analysis either as a standalone analysis and also in construction stages as illustrated below:

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 881 of 1024

Maximum Displacement vs Safety Factor Chart (Real Time Analysis)

Maximum Displacement vs Safety Factor Chart (Result)

Stress Analysis Method based on limit equilibrium theory (SAM)

This method first uses the finite element method to perform stress analysis on the slope and the safety factor for each various virtual slip surface, created
from the assumptions of the limit equilibrium theory, is calculated based on the stress analysis results. Here, the calculated minimum safety factor of the
various virtual slip surfaces becomes the safety factor, and the critical section is computed. The SAM method can only be used on the 2D environment.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 882 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Nonlinear time history analysis SRM

Solution Type

▒ Nonlinear time history + SRM

Slope stability analysis using the general SRM cannot be used as a factor of safety for the dynamic state. Since slopes are more vulnerable to
dynamic loads such as earthquakes. In a dynamic equilibrium state, the ground receives stress from not only its self-weight, but also from the
inertial force due to vibrations.

GTS NX can conduct such slope stability analysis for the dynamic equilibrium state. The slope stability analysis is based on the SRM and can be
applied to 2D, axis symmetric and 3D problems.

The input time during nonlinear time history analysis can use the stress state of the ground at that point as the initial values to calculate the
slope stability.

The dynamic boundary conditions applied to the model may not be suitable for SRM and Insitu analysis. Tthe user can choose a different
boundary condition for Insitu and SRM analysis. This feature is applicable for all Time History Analyses as well as Construction Stage Stress –
Nonlinear Time History Analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Heat Transfer

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 883 of 1024

Solution Type

▒ Heat Transfer

Heat Transfer analysis can be divided into two: the steady state analysis (state of the model: the temperature and heat flow rates, is steady)
and transient analysis (time dependent).
This analysis type can be used to model the thermal changes in the ground due to environmental changes, or due to the construction of
facilities, such as buildings or pipelines.
Heat Transfer is transmission of thermal energy due to a gradient in temperature.

Thermal energy is exchanged based on following phenomenological ways:

- Conduction: determines heat transfer from a hot to a cold object, that are in direct contact to each other.
The thermal conductivity of the different objects decides how much heat in which time is being transferred.

- Convection: determines transfer of heat between two areas without physical contact. Convective heat transfer is the process that removes
heat from a surface when that surface is exposed to fluid (liquid or gas) of a different temperature flowing over it.

After the heat transfer analysis, results such as temperature distribution, temperature gradient, heat flow direction / size are output.

Available under Construction Stage analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Thermal Stress

Solution Type

▒ Thermal Stress

Thermal stress analysis can be divided into two: the steady state analysis (state of the model: the temperature and heat flow rates, is steady)
and transient analysis (time dependent).

Thermal stress and thermal deformation due to heat will be calculated as additional to Heat Transfer analysis output.

Available under Construction Stage analysis.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 884 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > General > Seepage Thermal Stress

Solution Type

▒ Seepage - Thermal Stress

Seepage-Thermal Stress analysis is an analytical type that can use seepage boundary condition. It can select steady state and transient state
type as same as thermal stress analysis. Both structural analysis results and seepage / heat transfer analysis results are output.

The initial condition used for transient seepage-thermal stress analysis can be interpreted as a steady state at time = 0 from the seepage
boundary condition, or it can be calculated by specifying the water level.

Available under Construction Stage analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > Analysis Control (Option)

Analysis Control (Option)

▒ Overview

The basic options, automatic settings and various advanced analysis options can be checked and changed depending on the selected
analysis type. For construction stage analysis, the options can be defined for each separate stage. For analysis results, the output result list can
be set in terms of element type to effectively decrease the size and output time of the result file. For time history dependent analysis, such as
transient seepage, consolidation, time history analysis, the time step for result check and print can be set separately.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 885 of 1024

▒ Methodology

The figure above is the Analysis control and Result control setting windows. The additional setting control options for each analysis type is
shown, and the detailed inputs are listed in the table below.

*Consolidation
Linear/Nonlinear analysis, Seepage Slope stability
Tab Construction stage
Static analysis *Fully coupled (Steady/*Transient) (SRM/SAM)
seepage stress
Water Pressue Water pressure Water pressure Maximum negative Water pressure
(Automatic) (Automatic) (Automatic) pore pressure (Automatic)
In-situ analysis Initial stage(K0) In-situ analysis Water level
Initial temperature Water level Saturation Effects
Final calculation stage
Maximum negative
Water level Saturation Effects
pore pressure
Specify restart stage
Maximum negative
General Saturation Effects Undrained Condition
Restart option pore pressure
-
Maximum negative
Initial temperature - -
pore pressure
Saturation Effects
Maximum negative pore
Undrained Condition - -
pressure
Initial Configuration
Geometry Load steps (or Time Load steps (or Time
Geometry Nonlinearity Geometry Nonlinearity
Nonlinearity Step) Step)
Load Step (or Time Load steps (or Time
Convergence Criteria Convergence Criteria Convergence Criteria
Step) Step)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 886 of 1024

Advanced nonlinear Advanced nonlinear Use arc-length

Convergence Criteria Convergence Criteria
setting setting method
Advanced nonlinear Advanced nonlinear
Nonlinear Use arc-length -
setting setting
-
Advanced nonlinear
- - -
setting
Age - Age - - -
Seepage - - - Initial condition -
Geometry
Nonlinearity
Nonlinear parameter
Slope stability
- - - - Safety factor
(SRM)
Advanced nonlinear
setting(Use arc-length
method)

( * : Time step setting analysis type )

<Table.Static analysis - Analysis control options for each analysis type>

Eigenvalue, *Linear time history *Nonlinear time history, *2D equivalent

Tab
Response spectrum (Modal/Direct) * Nonlinear time history +SRM linear
Water pressure
Initial temperature Water pressure (Automatic)
(Automatic)
Water level In-situ analysis In-situ analysis

Eigenvectors Water level Water level

Saturation effects Eigenvectors Saturation effects

Max negative pore pressure Saturation effects Max negative pore pressure
General Max negative pore -
Undrained condition Undrained condition
pressure
Mass parameters Undrained condition Mass parameter

- Mass parameter -
Multi Shear Mechanism for RO, GHES
- -
(with Bowl)
- - -

Geometry Nonlinearity

Nonlinear - - Converge standard -

Advanced nonlinear setting

Effective shear
Modal combination type Damping definition Damping definition
strain
Damping definition - - Convergence
Interpolation of spectral
Dynamic analysis - - Interpolation control
data
Time Integration
- Time Integration Method -
Method
- - - Mass parameters

Define time

Nonlinear parameters

Slope stability Convergence criteria

- - -
(SRM)
Safety factor
Advanced nonlinear parameters (Use arc
-length method)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 887 of 1024

(* : Time step setting analysis type )

<Table. Dynamic analysis- Analysis control options for each analysis type>

Construction stage Construction stage Construction stage

Tab
Heat Transfer Thermal Stress Seepage-Thermal Stress
Water Pressue(Automatic) Water Pressue(Automatic)
Initial stage(K0) Initial sage(K0)

Initial Stress Initial Stress

Initial Temperature Final calculation stage

Final calculation stage Specify restart stage

General Specify restart stage Restart option

Initial Temperature
Restart option Initial Temperature

Saturation Effects Saturation Effects

Maximum negative pore Maximum negative pore

pressure pressure

Initial Configuration Initial Configuration

- Geometry Nonlinearity Geometry Nonlinearity
Load Step (or Time Step) Load Step (or Time Step) Load Step (or Time Step)
Nonlinear
Convergence Criteria Convergence Criteria Convergence Criteria
Advanced nonlinear setting Advanced nonlinear setting Advanced nonlinear setting

<Table. Thermal analysis- Analysis control options for each analysis type>

Water Pressure (Automatically consider water pressure)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 888 of 1024

Analysis Control dialog windows for Linear Static and Construction Stage analysis types

This option considers all free surfaces/edges of the model as an external water pressure. The water pressure is calculated with reference to the
pore pressure acting on the free surface/edge.

l If water level is set, assume constant water pressure with reference to the water pressure.

l If seepage analysis was conducted previously, use the pore water distribution (size) calculated for each node.

l If the pore pressure is a negative (-) value, water pressure is not considered automatically

NOTE: This option is to be activated only in case of development of high external water pressures at model boundaries i.e. in case of fully
submerged soil bodies like river beds or in offshore conditions. This option can also be extended to excavations where groundwater level
reaches the top surface or the outcrop. For all other cases, this option should remain deactivated i.e. this option should not be used for generic
GWL lowering cases unless the initial water is at the surface.

Caution: If modeling is done for the case where the external water pressure corresponding to pore water pressure in the model does not exist,
this option needs to be canceled. When conducting stress analysis by specifying the water level line, the pore pressure is calculated by the
water level difference between the free node and corresponding load. Activation of this option will lead to changes in stress results due to the
balancing forces applied by the software, which can also give abnormal results for structural forces for beam/truss /shell elements. Hence, to
accurately examine the influence lines of the underground water level, Seepage-stress coupled analysis is recommended.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 889 of 1024

<Application of auto-water pressure on excavation surface when excavating below the water level>

In-situ analysis

[Include in-situ Analysis with Self-weight]

This option resets the stress state of the singular analysis ground. The calculated in-situ stress is in equilibrium with the self-weight and the
same boundary conditions used in singular analysis for analysis. When considering self-weight in time history analysis, the initial in-situ stress
needs to be calculated. If not, vibrations can occur due to the load addition. In particular, the self-load must be included for nonlinear time
history analysis.

[Ko condition consideration]

The method uses the constant defined by to calculated the horizontal stress from the vertical stress to set it as the in-situ
stress.

Using this method, the vertical stress needs to be found first using self-weight analysis and that value can be used to compute the
horizontal stress using . Here, the shear stress maintains its value, calculated from the analysis result.

If the ground surface is horizontal, there are no problems in using this method, but if not, the calculated stress state and self-weight are not in
equilibrium.

If the stress is adjusted without maintaining the equilibrium state, the stress can change to fit the equilibrium with the external force in future
stress analysis, even if there are no external force changes, causing deformation. Hence, the method can be applied if the additional stress
changes are relatively small. Generally, the conditions when the stress modification due to the method can be used are as follows.

l When the ground shape change in the horizontal direction is small

l When the pore pressure distribution shows no change in the horizontal direction

l When the horizontal stress can occur due to the horizontal boundary condition of the free line/face

l When using transversely isotropic materials that have the same material vertical/horizontal axis

If the condition is not considered, the stress state obtained from the self-weight analysis is set as the in-situ stress. If the ground surface is
horizontal, this method is the same as the method when . If not, a horizontal strain exists and different results than the
method results can be obtained. Shear stress also occurs.

This method is generally recommended when the ground is sloped. However, because a value larger than 1 cannot be set for the value, a
null stage can be added for re-analysis after using the method to calculate the equilibrium stage, without adding extra external conditions
when a value larger than 1 is needed. However in this case, the final equilibrium state does not satisfy the condition. Also, the modified
stress is vastly different from the equilibrium point, it can be hard to calculated a converging solution using nonlinearity.

Initial Stress

[Estimate Initial Stress of Activated Elements]

In order to calculate the initial stress of ground, GTS NX perform Linear Analysis even if nonlinear material is assigned to the elements. In this
case, it can result in, sometimes, over-estimating the soil behavior (large displacement). Initial Stress Options can eliminate this problem
especially for newly activated elements which are to simulate a fill-up ground such as backfill and embankment. This function determines the
plasticity from the calculated initial stress, and if it is plastic, it is updated with the appropriate stress.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 890 of 1024

[Engineering example]

[Clear Displacement/Strain]

The displacement reset condition may be needed during analysis. For example, when the displacement and strain due to self-weight need not
be considered in the initial analysis stage, the reset option can be used to reset the in-situ state displacement and strain to ‘0(zero)’.

Also, the reset can be performed at an arbitrary construction stage, such that the middle stage after analysis of several stages can be set as the
reference state. Displacement/Strain reset is applied at the end of the specified stage, after the analysis has finished.

Caution: When conducting nonlinear analysis by considering geometry nonlinearity, arbitrarily modifying the deformation does not guarantee
the continuity. Hence, this option is not recommended for geometric nonlinear analysis of construction stages.

[Cut-Off Negative Effective Pressure]

When conducting linear static analysis for initial stress of ground, tensile stress can be generated especially at the ground surface according to
the geometry and stiffness differences. In this case, this tensile stress can take effect on the convergence for the following stage (nonlinear
analysis) significantly. If there is tensile stress generated in in-situ state, software will make it close to Zero to ignore the abnormal stress
distribution. Since this is the basic concept of initial stress of ground, strongly recommended to use for all staged analysis. In case of
construction stage analysis, this feature of eliminating the excess tensile stress can also be applied to any specific stage as per the user's
analysis requirements. Since, this is the basic concept of initial stress of ground, it is strongly recommended to be used for all stages analysis.
For a construction staged analysis, the user can select the particular stage where the effects of excess tensile stress can be eliminated for the
successive stages, the user can choose either the initial stage or any stage in between too.

Initial Temperature

This option sets the initial temperature of the single analysis model. If not checked, the initial temperature defined in the [Analysis Control] is
considered. The temperature is used to assess the effects of thermal load, and the temperature difference with the input temperature load is
considered in the analysis.

Water Level

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 891 of 1024

[Define water level]

Directly input the water level height, or select a water level function that already has a specified water level to set the water level. The set water
level is applied to the total model. When using the water level function, the input value is multiplied to the function value and applied.

[Define water level for mesh set]

Define the water level for each mesh set.

If the groundwater layer is surrounded by rocks or an impermeable clay layer (confined aquifer), the presence/absence of the groundwater
level for each ground layer can be set for analysis.

If the total groundwater level is input and a mesh set has a defined groundwater level, the mesh set groundwater level has priority and the
total groundwater level is applied to mesh sets that do not have a defined level.

If the water level and the function are specified at the same time, the input water level and the function are multiplied and reflected in the
analysis.

Mesh Set – select the mesh set to apply the water level condition.

Water Level Condition – select between Head, Dry, Hydrostatic and User-Defined for applying water pressure

Head – compute head according to the water level assigned to the mesh set.

Dry – assume there is no pore water pressure applied to the mesh set.

Hydrostatic – assign a non-hydrostatic water pressure to a mesh set.

User-Defined – apply a user-defined pressure gradient to a mesh set

Condition Function – select a condition function for Head, Hydrostatic & User-Defined

l Head

- None – set a single water level for water pressure calculation.

- Water Level Function – assign a function which describes the water level using General Function in 2D and Surface Function in 3D.

l Hydrostatic – not available

- Water Level Function – assign a Non-Hydrostatic Water Pressure function type Hydrostatic to define a pressure profile to be used to
compute the water pressure.

l User Defined

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 892 of 1024

- Water Level Function – assign a Non-Hydrostatic Water Pressure function type User-Defined to apply a linear pressure profile.

Water Level – input water level to be considered for the selected mesh set (only for Head).

Saturation Effects

This option is to conduct accurate analysis when the saturation has a value between the unsaturated state (Se=0) and the saturated state
(Se=1). The partial saturation can be applied in the following two cases.

l Applying the partial saturation to calculated the effective stress-total stress relationship (Use Bishop’s effective stress relationship
equation)

l Consider the partially saturated state in the unit weight calculations for a material, such that the unit weight when partially saturated has
a value between the saturated unit weight and unsaturated unit weight.

If partial saturation is not considered, Terzaghi’s effective stress formula is used and the unit weight is set as either the saturated unit weight
or the unsaturated unit weight, depending on the pore water pressure distribution (a value in between is not used.). The saturation is defined
as a function of pore water pressure and if partial saturation is considered, the unsaturated properties of the material need to be defined to
define the saturation function for pore water pressure.

Maximum negative pore water pressure limit

This option limits the maximum negative pore pressure by the input number. If partial saturation is not considered, Terzaghi’s effective stress
formula is used and the pore stress of the unsaturated state can be overly reflected in the calculation. Hence, when not considering partial
saturation, the negative pore water pressure needs to be limited to a certain value. Reversely, if the partial saturation is considered, Bishop’s
equation is used and there is no such danger. In other words, the pore stress is limited by the unsaturated property function and there is no
need for a particular limit on the negative pore water pressure.

Construction stage general setting

[Initial stage]

Specify the construction stage that will be considered as the in-situ condition and check the Ko consideration. Refer to the ‘Linear analysis’
option for more information on the Ko. The displacement and strain for the construction stage specified as the initial stage, is reset.

[Initial Stress]

In order to calculate the initial stress of ground, GTSNX perform Linear Analysis even if nonlinear material is assigned to the elements. In this
case, it can result in, sometimes, over-estimating the soil behavior (large displacement). Initial Stress Options can eliminate this problem
especially for newly activated elements which are to simulate a fill-up ground such as backfill and embankment.

[Final calculation stage]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 893 of 1024

The default setting is calculation up to the final stage, but a separate Final calculation stage can be set when stopping the analysis to check
the interim results.

[Specify restart stage]

When specifying the construction stage, the [Specify restart stage] option can be checked on the Analysis control for each stage. The checked
stage is automatically saved on a separate result file and when the same model is used for re-analysis, the re-analysis can be performed
starting from the next stage of the result file. It is useful when many construction stages are specified.

[Restart option]

If the converge standard is not satisfied for non-linear analysis, the reliability can be in question and so, it is important to check whether the
converge standard is satisfied for each stage during construction stage analysis. In particular, because construction stage analysis can take
longer time than single analysis, the [Save only User Specified Steps] option is available when a stage does not satisfy the standard. This
option saves the stage before as a result file and the model can be review and modified before restarting. Also, the [Save all stages] option is
available for when the analysis is terminated forcefully, due to the computer system instability or to check the interim results. If in case the
analysis experiences divergence or if divergence is expected or if in case the program is terminated, then the user can click the option of
[Save All Stages and last Converged step], this option will enable the software to save the step where the program was either forcefully
terminated or in case if divergence occurred.

However, because saving all analysis results takes up a large size, the save capacity needs to be secured on the computer.

Initial Configuration

During construction, the newly activated nodes(elements) can be set to the position considering deformed shape in the previous stage.
Following is the example of staged embankment to compare the settlement distribution between with and without applying the option.

[With option vs Without option]

Undrained Condition

Activating this tab activates the undrained behavior based calculations for the models where undrained materials are used. This tab eliminates
the process of individually activating the "Allow Undrained Behavior" option in each and every construction stage.

Geometry Nonlinearity

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 894 of 1024

In case of large deformation analysis, the user can check more reasonable behavior with this option. This is to consider geometric nonlinear
effects in stress, fully coupled and slope stability analysis. Analysis can take into account load nonlinearity which is reflecting the effects of
follower loads, where the load direction changes with the deformation. Depending on the deformed shape, the pore water pressure can be
updated automatically.

Load steps (or Time Steps)

A static load can be used for nonlinear static analysis. The defined load sum can be applied at once or in stages, as an increment, cumulatively.
If the load increment is too large, it may be hard to calculate the converging solution and if the load increment is too small, unnecessary is
spent on calculations. In case of considering time-dependent material, the user can define Time steps to check the results with time elapse.

Convergence Criteria

Because nonlinear analysis uses iteration methods, the converge condition can be used to determine whether the solution has converged. The
convergence is determined by comparing the displacement, member force or energy change in the previous calculation with the reference
values. If all selected conditions are satisfied, the iteration is determined to have converged.

Use Arc-Length Method

GTS NX uses the Newton-Raphson method, where the increments are calculated to minimize the error repeatedly, as a base for calculating the
nonlinear analysis solution. The Full Newton-Raphson, which renews the stiffness matrix for each repeated calculation, is basically used and
the Newton-Raphson method or Initial stiffness method can be used at the renewal point. Also, other various options such as the line search
method to improve the convergence, or arc length method, to calculate the unstable equilibrium state, can be used (Refer to Chp.5-5 of the
Analysis manual for more details). The iterated calculation method repeats the calculation until a satisfactory solution is obtained. If there is no
accurate numerical basis, the initial setting value is recommended.

[Minimum arc-length adjustment ratio]

Input the minimum change to the initial arc length to current increment arc length ratio. This prevents the arc length from becoming infinitely
small.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 895 of 1024

[Maximum arc-length adjustment ratio]

Input the maximum change to the initial arc length to current increment arc length ratio. This prevents the arc length from becoming infinitely
large.

[Maximum arc-length increments]

Input the maximum number of increments. Nonlinear analysis using the explicit arc length method is conducted until the load factor is larger
than 1, or when the number of increments reaches the maximum value. The explicit arc length method may not work, according to the load in
the problem, and the number of maximum allowable load increments is input to prepare for this.

Advanced nonlinear setting

The basic settings use the nonlinear analysis parameters and the [Use default settings] option is selected for most problems. The detailed
settings are as follows.

[Stiffness update scheme parameter]

The Full Newton-Raphson, which renews the stiffness matrix for each repeated calculation, and the Initial stiffness method, which maintains
the initial stiffness matrix and has very weak nonlinearity, are available. Other options such as the Modified Newton-Raphson method or
Secant method, which increases the convergence and efficiency of the Newton-Raphson material properties, can be selected. Refer to Chp.5 of
the Analysis manual for more details on the algorithms. The user can also specify a method to recompose the stiffness matrix by selecting
repetition, semiautomatic and automatic.

[Analysis option]

l Terminate Analysis on Failed Convergence : Close analysis when convergence fails. If the option is not selected, the analysis is
continuously conducted even when the values to not converge.

l Max number of Iterations per Increment : Input the maximum number of iterations for one increment. [Maximum Bisection level] :
Specify the maximum division level.

l Enable Line Search : Use the line search feature. This feature is helpful for problems with flexible structures, where the stiffness increases
with the load, or if the nonlinear analysis solution converges while vibrating. It may only increase the analysis time when used on an
ineffective problem.

l Max Line Search per Iteration : Input the maximum number of line search per repeated calculation.

l Line Search Tolerance : Input the line search tolerance.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 896 of 1024

l Divergence Threshold : Specify the number of allowable diversions if the value does not converge. The modified Newton-Raphson
method renews the stiffness matrix at the start of each load increment.

Age

In case of construction stage analysis, the user can take Age into account to consider creep / shrinkage effect generated in the previous stage.
For the time-dependent material, the user, in general, can enter the curing period of concrete.

Initial condition (Seepage)

This option specifies the initial pore water pressure distribution in the ground for transient seepage analysis. The initial conditions must be set
for the transient analysis. The initial condition can be selected by using the values at time ‘0(zero)’ of the transient time step, using an
arbitrarily set water level height, or using the water level function.

Safety factor (SRM)

Input the initial safety factor and the safety factor increment for each repeated calculation step. The resolution of safety factor can also be set.

[Resolution of Safety Factor] - Slope analysis using SRM uses the strength reduction method, and the resolution of safety factor value can be
input to specify the accuracy of the safety factor calculation. The resolution of safety factor is used as a convergence standard for stability
analysis. However, if the resolution of safety factor is entered too low, the analysis time increases greatly and so, the following guideline needs
to be used to input an appropriate value.

Safety factor accuracy Applicability

0.05 Low(Use as initial review)
0.01 Average
0.005 High

<Table. Dynamic analysis- Analysis control options for each analysis type>

Eigenvectors

Input the number of natural frequency modes (number of modes) to input and specify the range to search. The option to check for any
omitted eigenvalues can be applied.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 897 of 1024

Mass parameters

[Coupled Mass Calculation]: Use a mass matrix that considers the coupling between modes. Check to use a consistent mass matrix, and
uncheck to use a lumped mass matrix. It is hard to determine which is more accurate, but for eivenvalue analysis, using a lumped mass matrix
displays a more flexible behavior than using a consistent mass matrix.

Multiple Shear Mechanisms for RO, HD, GHES (with Bowl)

[Coupled Mass Calculation]: Use a mass matrix that considers the coupling between modes. Check to use a consistent mass matrix, and
uncheck to use a lumped mass matrix. It is hard to determine which is more accurate, but for eivenvalue analysis, using a lumped mass matrix
displays a more flexible behavior than using a consistent mass matrix.

Modal combination type

If the maximum actual physical quantity is assumed to be the maximum physical quantities (maximum values for displacement, stress, member
force, reaction force etc.) of each mode, the maximum values of each mode can simply be added. But because there is no guarantee that the
maximum values of each mode occur on the same time step, it is difficult to express the maximum actual physical quantity through simple
linear super positioning.

Hence, a mode combination method to approximate the maximum value is needed. Various mode methods are suggested, but because no
one combination can give the appropriate approximation for all cases, the characteristics of each mode combination needs to be understood.
The modal combination types are as follows, and refer to Ch.5 of the Analysis manual for more detailed algorithms.

l ABS(summation of the Absolute value)

This method assumes that all mode responses occur on the same phase and the maximum value for each mode is judged to occur on the
same time step, giving the most conservative results.

l SRSS(Square Root of the Summation of the Squares)

This method provides appropriate results when each mode is sufficiently separated.

l NRL(Naval Research Laboratory method)

This method removes one mode( ) that has the maximum absolute value from the SRSS method, and like the SRSS method, this method
provides appropriate results when each mode is sufficiently separated.

l TENP(TEN Percent method)

This method includes effect of adjacent frequency modes in the SRSS. In other words, if two mode frequencies satisfy the following, the two
modes are determined to be adjacent, within 10% of the frequency.

l CQC(Complete Quadratic Combination method)

If the cross-correlation coefficient between modes is 1, it displays the same results as the SRSS method.

Damping definition

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 898 of 1024

[Direct modal]

The user directly defines the damping ratio of each mode, and the mode response is calculated using that ratio. The direct modal method is
only activated for Response spectrum / Time history (Modal) analysis.

l Damping Ratio for All Modes

Define the default damping ratio that is applied to all modes, except for the ones defined by the user. The default damping ratio is applied to
all modes that have a lower priority than the specified mode. If the input damping ratio is different from the damping ratio of the response
spectrum function, the spectrum data is adjusted with reference to the input damping ratio and used for analysis.

l Modal Damping Overrides

It is used to directly input the damping ratio for each mode. The mode number and mode damping ratio are input separately and then added.

[Mass Stiffness Proportional]

Compute the damping constant for mass proportional attenuation and stiffness proportional attenuation. The proportional coefficient can be
directly input, or automatically calculated from the mode attenuation, for checked items on the attenuation type.

Input the mode frequency or period and specify the damping ratio to automatically calculate the proportionality coefficient.

Here, the attenuation for each material, when calculating the mass & stiffness coefficients from the modal damping, can be reflected in the
analysis. The damping ratio of each material, input in the [Show Coefficients from Material], and the damping coefficient (alpha, beta) of the
damping matrix, calculated using that value, can be checked. As during a seismic event or while conducting a seismic analysis, the
superstructure, substructure and ground all have different attenuation coefficients, this function allows the user to calculate the attenuation
coefficients for each material separately along with the frequencies input.

Interpolation of Spectral Ratio

Select the interpolation method for the response spectrum load data. Both linear interpolation or logarithmic interpolation can be used for the
spectrum data period and the default setting is the logarithmic interpolation method. If multiple damping ratios are in the spectrum data,

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
 Intro Page 899 of 1024

interpolation of the damping ratio also follows this option. Spectrum data with one damping ratio cannot be interpolated and is corrected
using the following equation. (1.5/(40xAttenuation+1) + 0.5)

Time Integration Method

Newmark-β method is added in the analysis control and one can choose between Newmark-β and HHT-α methods for analysis. Newmark-β
supports three Input methods, of which Constant Acceleration is recommended as it provides the most stable analysis.

HHT-α is a generalized form of the Newmark method, featuring adjustable numerical damping effects. In GTSNX, the default value for αH is set
to -0.05.

N Newmark Method: In the direct integration method, the Newmark method is used for numerical integration of the equations of motion, and two parameters related to this, Gamma and Beta,
are input.

l Constant Acceleration Method: This method assumes that the acceleration of the structure remains constant over each time step interval, automatically inputting Gamma (=1/2) and
Beta (=1/4). According to this assumption, in the analysis based on direct integration, the interpretation results can prevent divergence regardless of the value of
the time increment.

l Linear Acceleration Method: This method assumes that the acceleration of the structure changes linearly over each time step interval, automatically inputting Gamma
(=1/2) and Beta (=1/6). According to this assumption, in the analysis based on direct integration, if the time increment is more than 0.551 times the shortest period
contained in the structure, the interpretation results may diverge.

l User Input: Users input the values of Gamma and Beta directly.

l Displacement/Velocity/Acceleration Damping Coefficient: In co-analysis, to prevent deterioration of convergence due to abrupt changes,
the curve inputted in the solver is smoothed for use. Entering '0' means no smoothing is applied.

NOTE: Control of the Newmark method according to the time integration method cannot be done on a stage-by-stage basis in the construction stage analysis, so it has been
added as a global setting. Consequently, even in general step-by-step analyses, the dynamic analysis tab is displayed, but the control values in this dynamic analysis tab are
only reflected in the analysis when performing stress-nonlinear time history analysis.

Define Time (Nonlinear time history + SRM)

Specify the time to view the SRM analysis results. Multiple time steps can be specified. The SRM stability assessment is conducted using the
nonlinear time history stress results from the specified time period.

Effective shear strain (2D equivalent linear analysis)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 900 of 1024

The shear strain of the ground changes with the input seismic motion or vibration load. To apply equivalent linear analysis, the concept of
effective shear strain is introduced, and the material properties are simplified to have equivalent linear values for calculation.

Frequency domain analysis is analyzed to have a certain shear modulus and damping for each frequency, and the material nonlinearity cannot
be considered. Hence, the 2D equivalent linear analysis uses iterated calculations, using the changing ground stiffness and damping ratio due
to the shear strain calculated in the previous stage, to consider the nonlinear behavior of the ground. Here, the maximum shear strain used in
the previous stage is multiplied by a certain value(50%~70%) smaller than 1 to define the effective shear strain. The effective shear strain is
used because the maximum shear strain generates a larger strain energy than the actual behavior.

Generally, an effective shear strain coefficient of 0.65 (65%), or the value that uses the earthquake magnitude is used. Also, a
maximum shear strain calculation method in the time domain is supported to calculate shear strain more precisely than the maximum shear
strain found using the RMS(root mean square) in the frequency domain.

<Difference between maximum and effective strain>

There are two methods to calculating the maximum shear strain; the time domain and frequency domain. The time domain method defines
the load (acceleration, force etc.) changes according to time and composes the structural state as a differential equation. Hence, the structural
response (displacement, velocity, acceleration response) can be calculated by performing the integration for every time interval. The frequency
domain method is useful when determining the relationship and ratio between the load response and frequency characteristics. Because it is
hard to determine this relationship and ratio for irregular waves such as earthquake response, the wave in the time domain is converted to the
frequency domain and used for analysis.

[Interpolation control]

Input the frequency range for frequency domain analysis. Interpolation methods are used to efficient frequency domain analysis and one of
the four methods can be selected.

Select [Coupled Mass Calculation] to conduct the analysis for all frequencies and if the interval is specified, the analysis frequency interval in

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 901 of 1024

the frequency domain becomes the set interval.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > Time Step

Time Step

▒ Overview

The time step is specified for result examination with time in Consolidation, Seepage (transient), Dynamic (linear/nonlinear time history)
analysis. The analysis result can be checked at every specified time interval and for dynamic analysis, the time history result graph is provided.

▒ Methodology

Consolidation (singular) analysis, Stress seepage-Fully coupled – Loading/Sustain

Specify the applied time step and load factor. In consolidation analysis, the analysis can be simulated using 'Sustain' option without creating
the construction stage. User can define loading and leave time separately.. All applied loads including self-weight is used for analysis,
according to the input time and load factor. The analysis is conducted by simulating the dissipation of excess pore water pressure in the lead
load stage, according to the defined time information, after the [Loading] analysis has finished. Because of this, the load factor in the [Sustain]
cannot be input and the time information is added to the final time of the [Loading].

Construction stage consolidation analysis - Input time and load

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 902 of 1024

For consolidation analysis, the appropriate load application time and load distribution of an added load can be done by inputting the time
and load factor.

<Initial state> <Embankment load application> <Sustained period>

<Initial state> <Embankment load application> <Sustained period>

When using a Modified Cam-clay material model, the in-situ stress needs to be defined. Hence, drainage analysis is needed to calculate in-situ
stress and in this case, the application time is meaningless.

If an additional load is applied, the load is applied over an appropriate total time, as shown in the ‘Embankment load application’ figure above.
The figure displays the additional load applied in 10 equal stages over 10 days. Here, the sum of the load factors is 1.0.

After the embankment has finished, the leave analysis can be conducted where the load is left continuously without any additional increase.
The leave time is defined as shown in the ‘leave period’ figure above. Because of the characteristics of consolidation analysis, the initial stress
change happens rapidly. Hence, the first time step can start as small and gradually increase with time to pursue both convergence and analysis
speed.

Seepage(Transient analysis) - Define time step

Specify the time step for performing analysis and saving results. The seepage boundary time function value (heat, flow rate etc.) that
corresponds to the set time step is used for analysis, and the results can be examined. Values outside the time range of the seepage boundary
time function can be automatically applied using linear interpolation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 903 of 1024

Dynamic analysis - Define time step

It is possible to assign time step using irregular intervals and so, the target time step is assigned a name.

l Time Duration : Insert the time interval

l Time Increment : Input the time interval that will be used for calculation for the entered time range.

l Intermediate Output : Input the time interval for the output of analysis results. The results are printed for every time interval x print
interval for interim results.

※ At every assigned interval, a result is printed on the result tree. If you need to print out any amount of data, it might take a considerable
amount of time. In case your PC is lack of RAM, the result file might not be created.

According to the assigned time step, it shows total amount of time elapsed (total amount of time used for analysis according to the time step),
the total number of time step (The total number of time steps used during the analysis).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 904 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > Output Control

Output Control

▒ Overview

Specify the Output type/print option (element result print coordinate system) and for dynamic analysis, the time history to print. The node
result and element results are set as default, depending on the analysis type, and the desired results in each result column can be selectively
saved and printed, allowing efficient management of analysis result file size and print time etc.

▒ Methodology

It is possible to print out every mesh set used in the analysis, or select only the main mesh set that needs result confirmation. Check the
[Element Corner Results] option to output the calculated results for each element node on the element result directly. Uncheck this option to
view the average output of each node. The checked result is the same as the legend results when viewed using contours.

If the neutral plane result of shell element is needed, check the [Shell Mid-Plane Results] option.

For a beam element, the number of printed segments can be adjusted.

The results can be printed out at points 1(i, j), 2(i, 1/2, j), 3(i, 1/3, 2/3, j), 4(i, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, j).

The analyzed result are arranged as a separate text file in the folder in which the model is saved.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > Analysis Setting

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 905 of 1024

Analysis Setting

▒ Overview

Specify the model type (2D/3D) and setup the working environment. The sub menus, such as available features or elements, are determined
by the set environment. Here, the unit system and initial variables of the analysis model is set, and these values can be modified during the
modeling process.

▒ Methodology

Model Type

Select the model type. For a 3D model, the gravitational direction can be set as Y or Z and for the 2D or axis symmetric model, the
gravitational direction is fixed in the Y direction.

Unit System

Setup project unit for force/length/energy/time. Selected system of unit can be changed anytime during the modeling process and on the
status bar in the lower right-hand corner.

The provided unit systems are as follows.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 906 of 1024

<Force> <Length> <Energy> <Time>

When importing a geometric shape from an DXF(2D/3D) file, AutoCAD does not have a length unit so, the imported shape follows the units
set on the program.

When importing a CAD geometry, the length unit of the object model can be separately specified by importing the length unit file.

Initial/Water Parameters

When converting the mass of dynamic loading and self-load by material’s unit weight or calculating pore water pressure, unit weight of water
and acceleration of gravity is set as variables. Initial temperature is a variable that is assigned when thermal load is inserted. The difference
between set initial temperature and inserted thermal load would be converted into weight and assigned.

Additional input for thermal analysis is provided:

Specific Heat of Water: determines amount of heat (energy) can be stored in the pore water per unit of mass.

Conductivity of Water: determines rate of heat (energy) can be transported in the pore water.

Conductivity of Ice: determines rate of heat (energy) can be transported through ice.

Latent Heat of Water: amount of energy required for water phase change (from liquid to solid state and vice versa).

* For 2D analysis, the planar deformation thickness of the ground needs to be directly input to be applied to the analysis. Generally, the unit
width is input, with respect to the set length unit system.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis Case > Parametric Analysis

Parametric Analysis

▒ Overview

This feature is useful when changing the properties (material) of a particular element in a model and conducting the analysis to compare
results. The notable example is the Ko parameter analysis. For example, when conducting the tunnel excavation construction step analysis,
comparing the analysis results by changing the coefficient of earth pressure (Ko) value as 0.5, 1, 1.5 in stages, the model is not separated and

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 907 of 1024

only the property is added for analysis. Changing various conditions, not only ground materials but also structural characteristics (section
characteristics), is possible for iterative calculations and all outcomes can be compared at once.

▒ Methodology

First, select the base analysis case. Automatically create the parametric analysis case by
assigning the changed characteristic conditions below.

Select the target mesh set and select the target property change (current properties of
the selected element) and changed property sequentially. Select the Add/Edit button to
create a parametric analysis case. It is good to add properties in advance to the
parameters for the change property setting.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Analysis > Perform Batch Analysis

Perform/Batch Analysis

▒ Overview

Conduct analysis on the created analysis case. If multiple analytical cases have been created, select the cases to conduct analysis upon and
conduct arrangement analysis to analyze multiple models simultaneously.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 908 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Select the analysis cases to conduct analysis upon. Arrangement analysis is useful when performing analysis on multiple models. During
analysis, the convergence, warning/error can be checked on the output window. After analysis, the automatically created text file in the saved
folder can be used to review the analysis results, convergence and the warning messages that occurred during analysis.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > History > History Output Probes

History Output Probes

▒ Overview

This operation specifies the function that outputs the results at a particular location in graph form for time variant analysis cases (Transient
seepage, Consolidation, Fully-coupled stress-seepage analysis, Linear/nonlinear time history analysis, 2D Equivalent linear). Because printing
the entire analysis results on the analysis tree is inefficient in terms of both usability and performance, the user can specify the desired location
effectively and apply it to analysis. In other words, the history result search node must be registered before conducting analysis.

▒ Methodology

The following process can be performed to output the history result graphs for all time variant analysis methods. The printable history results
include ground deformation, member force and seepage results.

1. Select the Probe type (Analysis > History > History Output Probes > Probe Type) and select the Object to check the result

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 909 of 1024

<History result search and search type >

Probe Type Type Of Result

Displ/Vel/Accel

Truss/Em Truss/Geogrid(1D)

Beam/Embedded Beam

Plane Strain

Plane Stress/Geogrid (2D)

Axisymmetric

Shell

Solid

Response Spectrum

Transfer Function

Nodal Seepage -

Point Spring/Elastic Link

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 910 of 1024

This feature can be specified for each search type and the detailed components are selected. For element results, the results can be output for
the selected node center or for each node position. However, the middle nodes of higher order elements cannot output results. For the
'Displacement/Velocity/Acceleration' type, the results calculated at the [Reference Node] can be used to deduct relative results. In case of
'Transfer Function', it has always a relative result, the user must specify the [Reference Node].

[History step] specifies the step at which the results will be output. Select [All Output Step] to output results at all the time intervals, not just at
the output time steps specified in the Analysis case. Specify the [Frequency] option when printing the results at analysis conducting step/time
intervals. For an example analysis case with an analysis time increment as 0.1,0.2,0.3 sec... and an interim result output time as 0.3,0.6sec...,
specifying 'Step : 2' outputs the results at 0.2, 0.4, 0.6sec... . Entering '0.2sec' in the 'Time' option can output the results at 0.2, 0.4, 0.6sec... .

※ Be careful not to reflect search types that are not printed in the Analysis case.

2. Analysis > Analysis > General > Output control > Register the history items for result checking, added from the history tab

<History result output setting>

3. Result > Special Post > History > Check time history result using graph function

History Probes Graph allows for customizing displayed data for both X and Y axes.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 911 of 1024

<History result search graph>

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Tools > Analysis Option

Overview

Set the general environment of the analysis set up.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 912 of 1024

Analysis Options

[Analysis]

l Number of processors : Specify the number of CPUs used for analysis. For a dual core CPU, input 2 processors and for a quad core CPU,
input 4 processors to increase the analysis speed.

l Element Formulation : Specify the formula applied to the element.

In terms of speed, a faster solution can be obtained in order of Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability) > Hybrid (Accuracy). In terms
of accuracy, a more accurate solution can be obtained in order of Hybrid (Accuracy) > Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability).

l Equation Solver (Structural) : Specify the method for solving a finite element simultaneous equation. If the setting is automatic, the
program automatically determines one of the following methods: Multifrontal, Dense matrix or AMG(Algebraic Multi-Grid).

l 2D Element Setting (Structure) : The [Unique Shell Normal Generation] function judges two adjacent shell elements to have two different
normal directions when the value between the normal direction vectors are larger than the input value. Because the element size is
relatively larger than the curvature, if this value is increased for a rough curved mesh, a smooth contour that considers the curvature of
the geometry shape can be calculated.
The [Consider Drilling DOF(degree of freedom)] option calculates the stiffness of the in-plane deformation by considering the rotation
about the out-plane axis (drilling degree of freedom).

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Tools > Options

Options

▒ Overview

Set the general environment of the program. The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary Condition,
Analysis/Results.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 913 of 1024

▒ Methodology

General

[General]

l Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.

l License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web Authorization method are supported.

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

[Graphic]

l Work View : Set the options for the screen.

- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.

- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder shaped curved surface. The available levels are
from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and smoother surface as the level gets higher.

- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work window during view rotation.

l Selection : Specify the options for the model part.

l Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.

l Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.

l Element : Specify the color for each element type.

l Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show the shadow and controls its shade. The
available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information shown as the level gets higher.

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]

l Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 914 of 1024

l Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]

l Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.

l Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol 3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z
axis respectively.

[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.

[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.

[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.

[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol.

[Result]

l General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default value is set as 1e-12, and results lower
than this value is considered as 0.

l Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.

l Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to represent the vectors.

l Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.

l No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.

l Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.

l Graph : Select whether to show the graph.

l Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.

l Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Tools > Fatigue Analysis Case > Perform

PERFORM

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 915 of 1024

▒ Overview

Selecting this option will enable the program to run the fatigue analysis, however the user needs to define the type of analysis to be conducted first in the
'Setting" Menu.

Create

Create a new fatigue analysis case.

Modify

Modify an existing analysis case for fatigue analysis.

Delete

Delete an existing analysis case

Home > GTS NX > Analysis > Tools > Fatigue Analysis Case > Setting

SETTING

▒ Overview

Fatigue analysis can be performed based on stress (stress-life method) and strain ( strain-life method). Fatigue life cycle and fatigue damage can be viewed
for the various mean stress correction methods, i.e., Goodman, Gerber, etc

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 916 of 1024

Fatigue Analysis Fatigue Lifecycle Contour

The flow chart for fatigue analysis is as shown below:

To start your fatigue analysis setup, it is necessary to perform static analysis for your model. When the static results are loaded, you can enter the Fatigue Analysis dialog
box.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 917 of 1024

Name

Enter the name for the analysis case.

Description

Enter the description for the specific analysis case.

Method

The user can specify the S-N and E-N methods by using the loading, stress, or strain results based on the linear static analysis carried on the
structure. Users can specify the following methods:

1.SN using loading history

2.EN using loading history

3.SN using stress history

4.EN using stress history

5.EN using stress/strain history

Analysis Set

Select the previously conducted analysis case for implementing the Fatigue Analysis.

Stress Type

Experimental test data is mostly uniaxial whereas FE results are usually multiaxial. At some point, stress must be converted from a multiaxial
stress state to a uniaxial one. Equivalent (Von Mises), Signed Von Mises, Absolute Maximum Principal, and Maximum Shear options are
available for this purpose.

Property

Assign the specific property for the selected material types where fatigue load cases will be generated.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 918 of 1024

Stress Life Approach

Strain Life Approach

Mean Stress Correction

For the different combinations of mean stresses and alternating stresses, we can use the Goodman, Gerber, Soderberg, Morrow, or SWT
method of fatigue life prediction in the case of the S-N approach. These methods can be chosen depending on the material properties and
loading criteria.

Mean Stress Correction Approach

If the stress cycle is fully reversible and alternating with no deviation then no mean stress correction is required and, in that case, None can be selected.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 919 of 1024

By applying several individual strain amplitudes to the E-N curve, which has been extracted through rain flow counting, each number of cycles
and the corresponding individual damage level are obtained. The user can use either Morrow, SWT, and Manson-Halford method of
fatigue life prediction in the case of the E-N approach.

Output Result

The output results can be viewed as 1. Damage 2. Fatigue Life Cycle 3. Contribution of Fatigue; which are illustrated in the pictures below:

Home > GTS NX > Result > Result > Combination

Combination

▒ Overview

If the analysis case is linear static analysis, the load sets in the case can be combined with various other case load sets. The load sets within a
case can only be combined when the [Solve Each Load Set Independently] option is checked, and when both load sets have printed mesh set
results.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 920 of 1024

▒ Methodology

Define the new load set name and designate the analysis set and load results. The scale can be set when designating the load results.

There are two combination methods; the [Linear Combination] method, which linearly combines the analysis results, and the [Envelop]
on the value size. [Envelop] displays the maximum value, minimum value, maximum absolute value (no sign) and maximum absolute v
analysis results of each load condition.

For linear combination results, the user has the option to choose between [Exact] and [Simple Average] methods. The computations a
processes as shown below:

SIMPLE AVERAGE METHOD

EXACT METHOD

Home > GTS NX > Result > Result > Calculation

Calculation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 921 of 1024

▒ Overview

Create combined results between particular result components.

▒ Methodology

Define the set name to create a new set, or perform additional computation on an existing
selected file.

The letter case of the operator used in the formula can be mixed. The method of using is the
same as that of a scientific calculator and the operation priority follows the mathematical laws.

Element Description Example use

Open
( -
parenthesis
Close
) -
parenthesis
+ Plus -
- Minus -
* Multiply -
/ Divide -
SQRT √ <ex> √2 = SQRT(2)
SIN Sine Unit : Degree
COS Cosine Unit : Degree
TAN Tangent Unit : Degree
ASIN Arc Sine <ex> sin-1 (0.3)=ASIN(0.3)
ACOS Arc Cosine <ex> cos-1 (0.3)=ACOS(0.3)
ATAN Arc Tangent <ex> tan-1 (0.3)=ATAN(0.3)
EXP Exponential <ex> e0.3 =EXP(0.3)
SINH Hyperbolic Sine <ex> sinh(1)=SINH(1)
Hyperbolic
COSH <ex> cosh(1)=COSH(1)
Cosine
COTAN Cosine / Sine <ex> cotan(1)=COTAN(1)
Natural
LN -
logarithm
Common
LOG -
logarithm

Home > GTS NX > Result > General > Contour

Contour

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 922 of 1024

▒ Overview

Display the displacement, reaction force, stress, strain size and direction of an activated element using contours.

▒ Methodology

Analysis results inspection tool

Use Contour ON/OFF to decide whether to output the contour on the screen.

<Contour On> <Contour OFF>

Contour property

The contours can be overlapped with the graphic display setting function to output more graphic results

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 923 of 1024

[Color]

Display the color of the selected results as the contour or model mesh color.

<Contour> <Model(Shading)>

l Contour

Plot the result color as the result contour color.

l Model (Shading)

Plot the result color as the model mesh color. The analysis color can be displayed as result edge, deformed shape and fill type line draw, but
not contour types.

Setting the contour line

The show line, color, thickness in the contour properties can be adjusted to clearly express the contour distribution.

<Show contour line - unchecked>

<Show contour line- checked>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 924 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Result > General > Vector

Vector

▒ Overview

Display the size and direction of the selected displacement or reaction force component as a vector on each node. The vector plot is also
affected by the ‘Clip & Slice Plane’.

▒ Methodology

<Vector + Contour > <Vector> <Slice

Plane Vector-Displacement Result>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 925 of 1024

[Slice Plane Vector]

The vector plot is displayed on the cutting line/plane. The cutting line/plane definition method is same as the 'Clipping Plane'.

[Slice Plane Contour]

The contour and vector plot are displayed on the cutting line/plane at the same time.

[Full Model Vector]

The vector plot of cutting line/plane and full model are displayed at the same time.

[Slice Vector Projection]

The vector plot is displayed by the projection of vertical direction on the cutting line/plane.

[Show Uniform (only Solid)]

This option controls display vector density on the screen.

This option is model size sensitive - it is recommended to check dimensions of the model (geometry and/or element size) to insert reasonable
input.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 926 of 1024

Setting the vector properties

Use vectors to display the analysis results on the work screen. This option can be used to set how the vectors will be displayed.

Vector > Scale Factor

Plot the scaled vector results.

<Scale value = 2 > <cale value = 5> <Scale value = 10>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 927 of 1024

Vector > Start Position

Determine the arrow position.

<Start position = Start> <Start position = Center> <Start position = End>

Vector > Plot All Components

When the principal stress vector of an element is output, both the maximum and minimum principal stresses are output if True.

Vector > Only Free Face

Only plot the arrows for nodes on the free face.

<Only free face Unchecked(False)> <Only free face checked(True)>

Head > Type

Determine the vector arrowhead direction. (One direction/ Two direction/ No direction)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 928 of 1024

<One direction> <Both direction> <No direction>

Head > Constant Size

Set all vector arrowheads to an equal size. (True/False)

Head > Scale Factor

Plot the scaled vector arrowhead. (Scale Value)

Body > Constant Size

Set all vector arrow body lengths to an equal size. (True/False)

Body > Scale Factor

Plot the scaled vector arrow body length. (Scale Value)

Body > Line Width

Plot the scaled vector arrow body thickness. (Scale Value)

Color > User Color

Plot the vector arrow using the user defined positive and negative colors. (True/False)

Color > Plus Value Color

When setting the user color, determine the positive value vector arrow color.

Color > Minus Value Color

When setting the user color, determine the negative value vector arrow color.

Home > GTS NX > Result > General > Diagram

Diagram

▒ Overview

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 929 of 1024

Display the selected 1D element results as a diagram.

▒ Methodology

Setting the diagram properties

Specify the display settings for a 1D element result diagram.

Diagram > Scale Factor

Plot the scaled member force or stress diagram of a 1D element.

Diagram > Line Width

Plot the scaled Diagram line thickness.

Diagram > Diagram Type

Select the diagram type that reflects the analysis results, using contours or a single color, and plot.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 930 of 1024

<Contour> <Single color>

Diagram > Diagram Color

Define the color for the single color type diagram.

Diagram > Fill Type

Plot the diagram using a fill type; either a line fill or solid fill.

<Line fill> <Solid fill>

Diagram > Reverse

Reverse the direction of the diagram display and plot.

<Reverse(True)> <Revers(False)>

Diagram > Reference Value

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 931 of 1024

Determine whether to display the diagram using a relative value, with respect to the reference value.

Diagram > Result Direction

Set the diagram display direction with reference to the element coordinate axis or GCS, and plot.

<Element X direction> <Element Y direction> <Element Z direction>

<GCS X direction> <GCS Y direction> <GCS Z direction>

Division

Determine the number of divisions there will be on the diagram for representation.

Home > GTS NX > Result > General > Smooth

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 932 of 1024

Smooth

▒ Overview

Display the analysis results using a continuous or fringe contour.

▒ Methodology

<Continuous> <Fringe>

Continuous

Display the contours of the contour plot smoothly.

Fringe

Display the contours of the contour plot using bands for distinction.

Home > GTS NX > Result > General > Deform

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 933 of 1024

Deform

▒ Overview

Determine the graphic processing of graphically represented results, with reference to the selected deformed shape.

▒ Methodology

<Undeformed shape> <Deformed shape>

<Deformed + Undeformed (Wire)> <Deformed + Undeformed (Feature)>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 934 of 1024

<Deform + Undeformed (Shading)>

Undeformed

The deformed shape is not drawn. In other words, the original shape before deformation is graphically expressed.

Deformed

Output the deformed shape.

Deformed + Undeformed (Wire)

Output both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape (as a Wire).

Deformed + Undeformed (Feature)

Output both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape (as a Feature boundary line).

Deformed + Undeformed (Shading)

Output both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape (using the geometry shape colors).

Deformed + Undeformed (Transparent)

Output both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape (using the geometry shape colors under the transparency condition).

Deform Properties

Specify the detailed properties for graphic processing of deformed shapes.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 935 of 1024

Deform

l Shape Type

Graphically display the results with reference to the selected deformed shape.

l Factor

Input the scale value used when displaying the deformed shape on the screen.

l Actual Deformation

Checked: Express the actual deformation.

UnChecked: The program scales the displacement using an arbitrary scale to easily determine the deformed shape (Scale the maximum
displacement to 1/20 size of the entire model).

Undeformed/Deformed shape

Specify the method used to display both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape simultaneously on the screen. It is used when applying
Deformed + Undeformed (Wire) or Deformed + Undeformed (Feature).

l Line Color

Specify the color of the line used to display the un-deformed/deformed shape.

l Line Width

Specify the thickness of the line used to express the un-deformed/deformed shape.

l Dotted Line

Switches to dotted type of the line used to display the un-deformed/deformed shape.

Relative Deformation

l Relative Deformation

Express the node selected from the node number as a relative deformation.

l Node number

Select the reference point of the relative deformation.

Relative deformation usage

The standard for relative displacement examination can be selected to examine the deformed shape.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 936 of 1024

<Relative deformation based on bottom> <Relative deformation based on top>

<Original> <based on Node 5232>

<based on Node 58361>

Home > GTS NX > Result > General > Edge Type

Edge Type

▒ Overview

Define the mesh set display type of an activated analysis result graphic element.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 937 of 1024

<No Edge > <Mesh Edge)>

<Feature Edge> <Free-Face Mesh Edge>

No Edge

The mesh is not drawn.

Mesh Edge

Draw the mesh edge.

Feature Edge

Draw the feature edge of the mesh.

Free-Face Mesh Edge

Draw the mesh as a wireframe.

Home > GTS NX > Result > General > Fill

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 938 of 1024

Fill

▒ Overview

Determine the contour fill method. The available settings are Draw solid and Draw line.

▒ Methodology

<Draw solid> <Draw line>

Draw solid

Display the analysis result contour continuously on a solid.

Draw line

Display the analysis result contour using isogram lines.

Adjust draw line width

When selecting the Draw line fill, the thickness of the isograms lines can be changed on the contour settings of the Properties window.

Adjust the line thickness using Properties > Contour > Line Width.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 939 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Result > General > No Results

No Results

▒ Overview

Determine the representation method for a target object with no results.

▒ Methodology

Property setting for no results

Specify the display settings for no result entities.

Color Type

Determine whether to display the specified color of the no result entity as a mesh set or user defined. When using the user defined method,
the set shading color or no result color is displayed on the screen, depending on the display mode.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 940 of 1024

No Result Element Width

When displaying the no result entity as a wireframe, specify the wireframe width.

No Result Entity

l Minimum value: Display a no result entity as the minimum result value in the contour process.

l Maximum value: Display a no result entity as the maximum result value in the contour process.

l Zero value: Display a no result entity as 0 in the contour process.

l Exclude: Exclude a no result entity from the contour process.

l Wireframe: Display the no result entity as a wireframe on the screen during the contour process.

l Feature edge: Display the no result entity as a feature edge on the screen during the contour process.

l Shading (Wireframe): Display the no result entity as a ‘shading’ that includes a wireframe on the screen during the contour process.

l Shading (Feature edge): Display the no result entity as a ‘shading’ that includes a feature edge on the screen during the contour process.

Home > GTS NX > Result > Advanced Function > Probe

Probe

▒ Overview

Display the results by attaching a result tag on the desired node or element.

▒ Methodology

Design approach - table and graph results in post processing

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 941 of 1024

Select the node or element on the screen to create a probe. The user can edit the tag color, text color, tag type etc.

The information and values of a node/element, where the maximum, minimum, maximum absolute values are generated, on the current result
can be checked, and the minimum, maximum values of each mesh set can be checked. The output font size can be changed from size 1 to 5
using the size tool.

Home > GTS NX > Result > Advanced Function > Multi Step Iso Surface

Multi Step Iso Surface

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 942 of 1024

▒ Overview

Simultaneously display the iso-surfaces obtained from multiple analysis steps.

▒ Methodology

Select the analysis condition to display the iso-surface on and specify the result type, result value
and step. Input the iso-value. The iso-value can be selected using the bar between the
maximum/minimum values of the total result.

Home > GTS NX > Result > Advanced Function > Extract

Extract

▒ Overview

Extract the user desired data from the analysis result.

▒ Methodology

Select the analysis conditions and result type of the extraction target, and specify the results.

The result types differ, depending on the analysis model setting (2D/3D) and material property

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 943 of 1024

(Plain strain, Plate, Solid etc.).

Step: Results

Specify the result extraction target step from the results. To select all steps in the list, click the
[Select All] button. To deselect all selected steps, click the [Unselect All] button.

The Order are [Step] or [Node].

For [Step], the extracted result values are listed on a table in the order of affiliated step. For [Node],
the extracted result values are listed on a table in the order of node coordinates for nodes, and the
center of mass coordinates for elements.

The nodes, from which the result values will be extracted, can be selected by directly entering the
node ID number or selecting the nodes on the screen. It is possible to extract only the maximum,
minimum and absolute minimum values. Checking [Only Show Node/Element] extracts the
maximum/minimum value within a node/element displayed on the screen.

The element extraction location, where the result values will be extracted, can be directly specified
for a 1D element.

In case of beam element results extraction, the user can select any particular node or according to
the number of output segments of beam elements.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 944 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Result > Advanced Function > Local Direction Force Sum

Local Direction Force Sum

▒ Overview

Calculate the force sum on an arbitrary section of a Solid or Plate element.

▒ Methodology

Select the analysis case and analysis step, and create the section plane to calculate the local direction member force sum.

Check [With text] and click the [Plot] button to output the section force component at the calculated centroid of the section as a text file, and
to display the define plane on the screen.

The Local Direction Force Sum is a useful function that can automatically calculate the section force of a Solid or Plate element. This function
calculates the internal force sum in each direction at the centroid of an arbitrary plane on a Solid or Plate element, using the internal force of
each node on the plane. The Local Direction Force Sum is useful when computing the member forces to be applied in structural design, after
detailed analysis on a particular section of the structure.

The arbitrary section is determined from the intersection between the structure, composed of a Plate or Solid element, and the infinite plane
created by selecting 3 arbitrary points. The centroid is automatically calculated for this determined section and the section force, in the same
direction as the frame result, is calculated using the stress results of that analysis step.

If a structure that is not a considered exists in the specified plane, the mesh set corresponding to that structure needs to be deactivated
before specifying the plane.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 945 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Result > Advanced Function > Cutting Diagram

Cutting Diagram

▒ Overview

Specify an arbitrary line or plane to check the on-surface analysis results as a diagram.

▒ Methodology

Cutting DiagramThe diagram setting method can be specified as [Line] or [Surface], and the results can be displayed as a diagram.

Cutting Line

l Select a 2-point line or edge when defining the position.

l For the 2-point line, select the coordinates directly on the screen or input the coordinates of the 2 points.

l Then, specify the direction of the diagram and input the number of samples to divide the diagram by that number and display on the
screen.

l The diagram direction follows the GCS and the default direction is the (+) direction. To draw the diagram in the opposite direction, check
the [Reverse] option. For the edge, select [Only On Node] to draw the diagram on that node position. Only one edge can be selected.

l The arbitrary line diagram is useful when assessing the relative settlement conditions of a geotechnical structure for 2D models.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 946 of 1024

Cutting Plane

l Select a 3-point face or plane when defining the position.

l For the 3-point face, select the coordinates directly on the screen or input the coordinates of the three points.

l The diagram direction can be selected in the [Plane Surface] or [Plane Normal] direction, and the [Reverse] option can be checked to
draw the diagram in the opposite direction.

l The sample number is the number of diagram divisions displayed on the screen.

l The arbitrary plane diagram is useful when checking the member force distribution in a particular section of a 3D model (ex. Lining
transitional section model).

l 2D elements like shell or gauging shell can be directly selected from this option to check for results.

The specified arbitrary line diagram is registered on the left Works tree > Result tab and the check button can be used to show/hide on the
screen. The right mouse click can be used for editing.

Home > GTS NX > Result > Advanced Function > Others

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 947 of 1024

Others

Element Contour Plot

Print different element result types on the screen.

Specify the result set and step, and select the element type and element results to print.

<Simultaneous representation of ground stress and plate stress>

Summation of Reaction

Display the reaction force sum on a table. The table can be checked for all analysis that has the reaction forces as its result output.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 948 of 1024

Specify the analyzed analysis case and step, and click Update Load sum/Reaction force sum to automatically calculate and display the
Load/Reaction force sums on a table.

Convert to Decibel

- Dynamic analysis result (Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration) Decibel auto conversion

Convert the displacement, velocity and acceleration to Decibel (dB) form and display it as a table.

Select the node after specifying the analysis set/step/result and input the reference value to convert the displacement, velocity and
acceleration at that node to Decibels (dB).

Vibration levels generally use g (acceleration) or g2 values, while the dB (decibel) is widely used. This is because when noise or vibration
occurs, the physical quantity range humans can feel is very wide and so, it is inappropriate to express this physical quantity using a linear scale.

The decibel (dB) is expressed using a ratio between the physical quantity X and the reference physical quantity Xref, plotted as a common log
function.

Here, when the reference physical quantity is 20μPa for sound pressure, the acceleration is in μm/s2 (KS, JIS). The 20μPa is a subjective
reference that is expressed as “the minimum sound pressure an average healthy human can hear”

[Decibel Reference Levels(ISO R 1683)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 949 of 1024

Quantity Definition Ref. level

Vibratory Acc. Level La = 20 log10 (a/a0) dB a = 10-6 m/s2
0

Amplitude Rations Vibratory Vel. Level Lv = 20 log10 (v/v0) dB v = 10-9 m/s

0

Vibratory Dis. level LF = 20 log10 (d/d0) dB d0 = 10-12 m

3D-2D Wizard

When checking the results after 3D analysis, use the cut section & clipping function to check the arbitrary section result contours. Here, for the
cut arbitrary section, the analysis results such as the minimum, maximum, absolute maximum value etc. can be checked along with the
position. Because all results from the FEM analysis is calculated with reference to the element nodes, when a cut arbitrary section passes
through the interior of the solid element, the results from nearby nodes are automatically interpolated and output.

<3D-2D Wizard(Result output on arbitrary section)>

The result tag from the specified arbitrary section is output following the process outlined below.

1. Add the arbitrary section where the results will be checked, from Additional view control toolset > View cut model (Cut section & Clipping).
As many cut sections as desired can be added in the GCS axis direction, or in the arbitrary section direction.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 950 of 1024

<Cut section & Clipping (Specify arbitrary section)>

2. Choose Result analysis > Advanced > Others > 3D-2D Wizard.

Check the [Show Points] option to display all nodes on an arbitrary section where the results can be output.

Like the result value tag, select the nodes or elements to check the numerical value, along with the positions of the minimum, maximum,
absolute maximum values on the viewed section.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 951 of 1024

Multi Step Graph

The results of multi-step are drawn by graph type based on the selected nodes/elements. Analysis set, result type, results, step and
nodes/elements will be selected to draw graph. In the ‘Define Graph’, ‘Axis’ is the coordinate of selected nodes/elements, and it is placed at
the Y axis of graph. The value of selected nodes/elements is placed at the X axis of graph.

Modal Damping Ratio

This can be used to obtain modal damping rations in the structure with different materials or damping devices for each model based on the
strain energy of the structure.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 952 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Result > Special Post > Seepage

Seepage

▒ Overview

Identify the flow path and flow quantity values obtained from the Seepage analysis results.

▒ Methodology

Flow Path

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 953 of 1024

<Flow path>

l Specify the analyzed analysis case and step, and then input the coordinates of the flow path display position (an arbitrary point on the
flow path). Snap option can be used to input the coordinate values.

l Under [Selection Type] option selection method can be chosen: Node or Face. Multi-path selections (definitions) can be created and
stored under Flow Path section.
Press Show button to display defined flow paths.

l The flow path can be displayed as a line or pipe. For a line, the line thickness and for a pipe, Scale can be used to adjust the size.

l The flow path color can be selected between Single color and Contour.

l The arrow grid option is an indicator that represents the flow direction of the flow path. The scale value and number can be used to
adjust the arrow size and number of arrows.

l If the [Leave Previous Flow Path] option is checked, a flow path is displayed for every clicked position on the screen. If this option is
unchecked, a flow path is displayed only on the last clicked position.

l If the [Sensitive] option is checked, the flow net is displayed on the screen immediately. If this option is unchecked, the [Apply] button
needs to be pressed in order to display the flow net.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 954 of 1024

Flow Quantity

l Specify the analyzed analysis case and step, and then select the nodes where the flow quantity will be calculated.

l The nodes can be selected and specified on the screen, or [User Input Mode] can be checked to input the node ID if the node number is
known.

l Press the Calculate button to automatically calculate the flow quantity at the nodes, and the calculated flow quantity value is expressed
on the dialog.

l The flow quantity at each node is made up of the flow rate value sum, and (+) indicates inflow while (-) indicates outflow.

l The node selection method (Node Mode), line/plane definition method (Cutting Mode) and Arbitrary Type are supported.

l Nodes/Cutting Mode - returns the flow rate by summing the flow rates calculated at the nodes by direct selection or input of the nodal
points where the outflow or inflow occurs.

l Arbitrary type - calculates the flow of elements through any line or plane

l There are ‘Cutting Line’ and ‘Cutting Plane‘ option in the ‘Cutting Mode’. The ‘Cutting Line’ option calculates flow quantity from nodes within the 'Search Tolerance' by defining ‘2-
Points Line’ directly or selecting ‘Edge’. The ‘Cutting Plane‘ option calculates flow quantity from nodes within the 'Search Tolerance' by defining ‘3-Points Plane’ directly or selecting
‘Plane’. The ‘3-Points Plane’ type calculates flow quantity from the infinite plane consisting of three points or the plane only consisting of them with the 'Limited Plane' option.

l Once the information for calculating flow quantity is created in the ‘Define Information’ dialogue box, it will be registered in the ‘Define List’. Flow quantity can be calculated by
duplicate selecting a number of information registered in the ‘Define List’ and they can be modified or deleted as well. The node information included in the checked ‘Define List’ is
displayed in the ‘Node ID’ and duplicated same nodes of a number of information will be treated as one.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 955 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Result > Special Post > Slope Stability(SAM) Result

Slope Stability(SAM) Result

▒ Overview

Output the Slope stability analysis results that incorporate the limit equilibrium method indicators.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 956 of 1024

Output the Slope stability analysis results that incorporate the limit equilibrium
method indicators. Specify the analyzed analysis case and analysis step to check the
results on the virtual fracture plane defined in the stage. Check [Boundary Set Label]
and specify the Boundary set to identify the boundary conditions of the virtual
fracture plane specified on the screen.

Use Min, Max to check the area where the maximum/minimum values occur, and
use the Drawing option to modify the thickness, safety factor, size and color of the
fracture plane at that point.

< SAM result>

Home > GTS NX > Result > Special Post > History

History

▒ Overview

Identify the results at particular positions for a time-existing analysis case, using a time variant graph or plot the results for each time period
on the work screen.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 957 of 1024

Graph

Select the analysis case for result output and function type for each analysis type. The function type is possible for analysis cases with time
(Transient seepage, Consolidation, Fully coupled stress-seepage, Linear/nonlinear time history analysis, 2D equivalent linear).

The probe type can select the specified results from Analysis > Special Post > History, and the results for each probe type are as follows.

※Be aware not to include a search type that is not output in the analysis case.

Probe type Result type

Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, Relative displacement,
Displacement/Velocity/Acceleration
Relative velocity, Relative acceleration
Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage,Hinge Force, Hinge
Truss/ Embedded truss/ Geo-grid(1D)
Deform
Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage,Hinge Force, Hinge
Beam
Deform
Plane strain Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage
Plane stress/Geo-grid (2D) Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage
Axis symmetric Strain, Stress, Seepage
Shell Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage
Solid Strain, Stress, Seepage
Relative displacement, Relative velocity, Relative pseudo-
Response spectrum
velocity, Absolute acceleration, Absolute pseudo-velocity
Transfer function Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration
Seepage node results Total head, Pressure head, Flow rate
Point Spring/Elastic Link Strain, Stress, Force, Hinge Force, Hinge Deform

The output function used on the vertical axis of the result graph is selected on the Y axis. This function must be defined in advance using
Analysis > Search time history result.

The name of the graph, X axis and Y axis of the time history graph can be defined using Define graph, and the values can be expressed in
exponential form.

The axis settings for the X axis and Y axis can be set in detail using the Graph option. The max/min value can be determined, and line shape,
line width, line form can be set. It can also be expressed using a log scale.

The generated graph is displayed in the dialog window, and can be output in various forms using Print image file, Print image word file and
Print excel file.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 958 of 1024

Plot

Select the analysis case for result check and specify the time step. The number of created time steps is determined from the number of total
time steps defined in Analysis > Analysis setting.

Selecting the analysis result output type and results automatically displays a contour on the screen.

The time history function reflected in the analysis case can be checked in the [Input Function]. The specified time of the time step can be
checked on the input function, and the output results reflect the selected time on the time step.

The [Output Function] can be specified in Search time history analysis, and the output result function can be checked. The specified time of
the time step can be checked on the input function, and the output results reflect the selected time on the time step.

Check the [Sensitive] option to immediately output the results from the selected time step on the screen.

Home > GTS NX > Result > Etc > Image File

Image File

▒ Overview

Output the finished analysis results as an image file, or a word file that contains an image file.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 959 of 1024

Check the desired article on the component tree menu and determine the image save format.

Consider All Steps

l Function which allows to Select/Unselect Stage/Step/Result/Component level at the same time. If this option is unchecked, it will
Select/Unselect individually.

l All the subordinate components are checked for all stages when the result level is selected.

l Only components are checked for all stages when the component level is selected.

GTS NX supports PNG, JPG, BMP image file formats.

Select the Post style. The Post style can be used to conveniently identify different result data, after the current post-processing graphic display
options are saved on the Result tree.

Call up the Context menu on the left Works tree by right mouse click, and use the [Add New Post Style] menu to save the current graphic
display settings. Double click the saved post-processing style to apply that post style.

Post styles from a different model file can be imported by using the [Import Post Style] on the Context menu. Also, the [Export Post Style (All)]
menu can be used to save the set Post style on the current model file separately.

The View point is provided to easily determine the model direction when capturing the screen.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 960 of 1024

The results can be saved as an image file or a word file using the Output form, and specifying the output location saves the image or word file
on that location.

The File name prefix is the prefix that is automatically assigned in front of the file name during save.

Home > GTS NX > Result > Etc > Initialize

Initialize

▒ Overview

Reset the post to the basic post-processing condition set by the program.

▒ Methodology

Clicking Reset post resets all post-processed results to the basic post-processing condition. The default Initial value is a Continuous contour,
the Result edge a Feature edge and the Deformed shape an Underformed shape.

<Before initialized> <Initialized>

Home > GTS NX > Result > Tools > Options

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 961 of 1024

Options

▒ Overview

Set the general environment of the program. The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary Condition,
Analysis/Results.

▒ Methodology

General

[General]

l Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.

l License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web Authorization method are supported.

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

[Graphic]

l Work View : Set the options for the screen.

- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.

- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder shaped curved surface. The available levels are

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 962 of 1024

from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and smoother surface as the level gets higher.

- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work window during view rotation.

l Selection : Specify the options for the model part.

l Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.

l Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.

l Element : Specify the color for each element type.

l Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show the shadow and controls its shade. The
available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information shown as the level gets higher.

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]

l Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.

l Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]

l Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.

l Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol 3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z
axis respectively.

[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.

[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.

[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.

[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol.

[Result]

l General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default value is set as 1e-12, and results lower
than this value is considered as 0.

l Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.

l Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to represent the vectors.

l Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.

l No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.

l Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.

l Graph : Select whether to show the graph.

l Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.

l Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 963 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Geometry > Change Color

Change Color

▒ Overview

Edit the color of a Geometry/Mesh/Material/Property.

▒ Methodology

Specify the color and object, and click the Apply button. The color of Geometry/Mesh/Material/Property can be changed easily by this
function. Also the color can be edited by using property window.

[User Defined Color]: User can define the color of selected object.

[Geometry Type Color]: Change color to geometry type color.

[Random Color]: Apply random color to selected object.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 964 of 1024

[Display ID]: Check to see Material/Property ID.

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Geometry > Color Type

Color Type

▒ Overview

Display the face or solid geometry shape or mesh set shape in the shape color or material color on the screen.

▒ Methodology

Select the shape color or material color.

This function can be used to check what types of material properties are assigned after modeling.

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Geometry > Random Color

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 965 of 1024

Random Color

▒ Overview

Assign a random color to a Face/Solid geometry shape or Mesh set.

▒ Methodology

The program automatically assigns a color to the geometry shape or Mesh set.

A random color can be assigned to a geometry shape or Mesh set by clicking the Geometry shape ( ) or Mesh set ( ) on the [View
toolbar] on the top of the work screen.
ㄴ

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Geometry > Measure

Measure

▒ Overview

Measure the shortest distance or angle between shapes using various methods. It can be used in both Pre and Post Mode.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 966 of 1024

Measure the distance or angle by selecting a shape’s point, line, face etc. on the screen.

The distance can be measured using [Distance between point and point], [Distance between point and Edge], [Distance between point and
face], [Distance between edge and edge], [Distance between edge and face], [Distance between face and face]. The angle can be measured
using [Angle between three points].

Checking the needed snaps with Define snap ( ) makes it easier to select points on the screen.

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Node,Element > Query

Query

▒ Overview

Check the Node or Element information.

▒ Methodology

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 967 of 1024

Specify the Query type (Node or Element) of the target and input the Node number or Element number. The particular Node or Element can
be directly selected on the work screen. If the Query type is a Node, its coordinates and adjacent elements to that node are printed on the
Output window. If the Query type is an Element, the type and shape, volume, aspect ratio, property/material and node connection information
are printed.

<Node information>

<Element information>

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Export to 3D PDF > Export to 3D PDF

Export to 3D PDF

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Save the model information before analysis and the result information after analysis as a 3-dimensional PDF document.
Adjusting the 3D view on the PDF document and checking the cross-section information, similar to the operations in the program, is possible.
Hence, the 3D model/analysis result information can all be checked on one PDF document without the model/result files.

▒ Methodology

Export model and analysis result to 3D PDF, PDF report generation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 968 of 1024

<Before analysis (Model information)> <After analysis (Result information)>

Export all the information on a model such as table for input parameters, geometry and mesh before analysis as a PDF file. Specify the output
direction, path, file name and select the OK button to create a PDF document as shown above.

Because this operation has model tree/view tools etc. similar to the program, basic show/hide, rotation, move operations are available and can
be used to check the 3D model information.

In particular, the model dimension lines and comments can be added and for 3D models, the arbitrary cross-section information can also be
checked.

After analysis, the result images and animation can be saved and the output results can be selected on the tree structure and composed as a
PDF document.

<3D PDF>

The user can also export the phreatic line/surface, cutting planes, and Isoplanes to the 3D PDF as illustrated below:

PHREATIC LINE/SURFACE

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 969 of 1024

ISOPLANES

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Export to 3D PDF > Export Material Image

Export Material Image

▒ Overview

The information of materials which are using from analysis case can be export to image file or word formation.

▒ Methodology

Export model and analysis result to 3D PDF, PDF report generation

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 970 of 1024

Limitation of selection from export material image can be exported by analysis case and can get the information of material model.

In case of construction stage from analysis case, it can be exported stage by stage.

Export with image format is supporting PNG, JPG and BMP format. Image and word types are supported by output type. File name will be defined by user manually.

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Flight Simulation > Flight Simulation

Flight Simulation

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
The Perspective view function from the View toolset below can be used to check the interior information and results of a
3D model.

▒ Methodology

Dynamic view (Pre / Post processing)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 971 of 1024

For the Perspective view function, the checking positions need to be checked directly using a mouse, but to automatically simulate it along a
particular guideline, the 'Flight simulation' function can be used.

The guideline can be selected from a line or repeating line(wire), and the model interior can be checked along the selected line. This function is
available for both before/after analysis.

Select the guideline. Directly draw the path in the model interior, or select a sub-shape line of an existing geometry shape.

Selecting the line instantly displays an arrow in the processing direction, and the direction can be changed using the opposite direction option.

The simulation operates using Start, Stop, End buttons and selecting the Record button saves the simulation as a video file.

Control

Control the process speed using a scroll bar.

In particular, the (Progress/Rewind) button is activated at the Stop state and the model interior results can be checked by moving back and
forth along the guide line. The currently viewed model can also be zoomed in/out.

Rotate

The view perspective can be rotated Left/Right/Top/Bottom as it moves along the guideline and can be moved (offset) with respect to the
guideline. Hence, the information can still be checked when the guideline position is different from the target position by using the
rotate/move operations.

All buttons during the flight simulation can be used as the following shortcut keys, and can be checked from the Tooltips of each button.

Shortcut Key List

A View left
D View right
S View bottom
W View top
1 Rotate to original position
← Move center to the left
→ Move center to the right
↑ Move center to the top
↓ Move center to the bottom
2 Move center to original position
R Proceed from stop state(Only available at Stop state)
F Rewind from stop state(Only available at Stop state)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 972 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Options > Tunnel Lining Plots

Tunnel Lining Plots

▒ Overview

This tool allows the user to generate capacity curves for composite lining for tunnels using Carranza-Torres and Diederichs Method* (2009).

▒ Methodology

TABULAR INPUT

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 973 of 1024

CAPACITY CURVES OUTPUT

The user can calculate the Equivalent Section properties of the Composite Lining and can draw the Demand - Capacity plots (M-N & Q-N) of
Steel Sets/Ribs/Lattice Girders and Shotcrete separately using the Bending Moment (M), Shear Force (Q) and Axial Force/Hoop Force (N)
obtained from the analysis.

Material Properties

l The user inputs of material properties are inputted in here.

Steel Properties

l Enter the strength parameters for lattice girder or steel in here.

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

Section Properties

l The user inputs for dimensions are inputted in here.

Shotcrete Properties (Strength Parameters & Section Data)

l Similar to the steel section properties, in these tabs, the user can input the stiffness parameters and dimensional attributes of the
shotcrete liner.

General Parameters

l The user can input the total liner thickness in this tab.

l The FoS needs to be defined, the user can also input multiple values of FoS with a space e.g (1 1.5 2).

Equivalent Properties

l Equivalent Section Thickness (teq) and the Equivalent Modulus Of Elasticity (Eeq) will be calculated by the tool and the output will be
shown.

Input Forces

l Enter the Bending Moment (M), Shear Force (Q) and Axial Force/Hoop Force (N) inputs from the analysis here.

Redistributed Forces

l The redistribution of forces to steel and concrete based on the inputs provided on the material and section tabs, along with the Input
Forces will be illustrated here in the tabular format.

View Curves

l Clicking this option will show the M-N and Q-N curves for steel and concrete.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 974 of 1024

Generate Report

l This option allows generation of a comprehensive report for the tool output in .docx format as shown below:

* Hoek, Evert & Carranza-Torres, Carlos & Diederichs, Mark & Corkum, Brent. (2008). Integration of geotechnical and structural design in tunnelling. Proceedings University of Minnesota 56th Annual Geotechnical
Engineering Conference. 1-53.

Home > GTS NX > Tools > Options > Options

Options

▒ Overview

IMG_C_ICON_D
Set the general environment of the program. The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary
Condition, Analysis/Results.

▒ Methodology

General

[General]

l Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.

l License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web Authorization method are supported.

l Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter at the bottom right to convert the units
before or after analysis.

[Graphic]

l Work View : Set the options for the screen.

- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 975 of 1024

- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder shaped curved surface. The available levels are
from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and smoother surface as the level gets higher.

- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work window during view rotation.

l Selection : Specify the options for the model part.

l Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.

l Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.

l Element : Specify the color for each element type.

l Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show the shadow and controls its shade. The
available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information shown as the level gets higher.

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]

l Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.

l Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]

l Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.

l Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol 3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z
axis respectively.

[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.

[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.

[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.

[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol..

[Result]

l General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default value is set as 1e-12, and results lower
than this value is considered as 0.

l Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.

l Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to represent the vectors.

l Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.

l No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.

l Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.

l Graph : Select/Deselect display of graphs, the user has the option of checking Norm Graphs (Work/Load/Displacement VS Iteration) &
SRM Graphs.

l Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.

l Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

l Analysis Results: Select/deselect the results which the user does not want to check, this saves the total computation time and also the
storage space required for running a model.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 976 of 1024

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

Home > GTS NX > Appendix > Results List

Results list
Link to Appendix

Link to Ribbon Menu Link to Trouble Shooting Guide Link to Shortcut Key

Link to USSR

* GCS (Global Coordinate System)

** ECS (Element Coordinate System)

Category Item Description

Reactions TOTAL REACTION FORCE GCS X,Y,Z Reactions
TX REACTION FORCE GCS X Reaction
TY REACTION FORCE GCS Y Reaction
TZ REACTION FORCE GCS Z Reaction
TOTAL REACTION MOMENT GCS X,Y,Z Moment Reactions
RX REACTION MOMENT Moment Reaction about GCS X
RY REACTION MOMENT Moment Reaction about GCS Y
RZ REACTION MOMENT Moment Reaction about GCS Z
Displacement TOTAL TRANSLATION(V) GCS X,Y,Z Total Displacement
TX TRANSLATION(V) GCS X Displacement
TY TRANSLATION(V) GCS Y Displacement
TZ TRANSLATION(V) GCS z Displacement

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 977 of 1024

TOTAL ROTATION GCS X,Y,Z Rotational Total Displacement

RX ROTATION GCS X Rotational Displacement
RY ROTATION GCS Y Rotational Displacement
RZ ROTATION GCS Z Rotational Displacement
Beam Element Forces AXIAL FORCE ECS x Axial Force
SHEAR FORCE Y ECS y Shear Force
SHEAR FORCE Z ECS z Shear Force
TORQUE Torsional Moment about ECS x
BENDING MOMENT Y Bending Moment about ECS y
BENDING MOMENT Z Bending Moment about ECS z
Truss Element Forces AXIAL FORCE ECS x Axial Force
TORQUE Torsional Moment about ECS x
Beam Element Stress S-AXIAL ECS x Axial Stress
S-POINT C~F Stresses by Bending at User Defined Point (C~F)
S-TORSIONAL Torsional Stress about ECS x
S-XY ECS xy Shear Stress(Beam)
S-XZ ECS xz Shear Stress(Beam)
S-VON MISES von Mises Stress of Element
S-MIN Minimum Bending Stress(Combination)
S-MAX Maximum Bending Stress(Combination)
Truss Element Stresses S-AXIAL ECS x Axial Stress
S-TORSIONAL Torsional Stress about ECS x
Beam Element Strains E-AXIAL ECS x Axial Strain
E-POINT C~F Strains by Bending at User Defined Point (C~F)
E-TORSIONAL Torsional Strain about ECS x
E-XY ECS xy Shear Strain
E-XZ ECS xz Shear Strain
E-VON MISES von Mises Strain of Element
E-MIN Minimum Bending Strain(Combination)
E-MAX Maximum Bending Strain(Combination)
Truss Element Strains E-AXIAL ECS x Axial Strain
E-TORSIONAL Torsional Strain about ECS x
Plane-Strain Forces MEMBRANE FORCE XX x Axial Force
MEMBRANE FORCE YY y Axial Force
MEMBRANE FORCE XY xy Shear Force
Plane-Strains Stresses S-XX GCS X Effective Stress
S-YY GCS Y Effective Stress
S-ZZ GCS Z Effective Stress
S-XX TOTAL GCS X Total Stress
S-YY TOTAL GCS Y Total Stress
S-ZZ TOTAL GCS Z Total Stress
S-XY GCS XY Shear Stress
S-MAJOR PRINCIPAL(V) Principal Stress (Maximum)
S-MINOR PRINCIPAL(V) Principal Stress (Minimum)
S-MAX SHEAR Maximum Shear Stress
S-VON MISES von Mises Stress
PLASTIC STATUS* Plastic Status of Ground Element
MEAN EFFECTIVE PRESSURE Mean Effective Pressure
MEAN TOTAL PRESSURE Mean Total Pressure
PORE STRESS Pore Pressure
EXCESSIVE PORE STRESS Excessive Pore Stress
Plane-Strain Strains E-XX GCS X Strain
E-YY GCS Y Strain
E-XY GCS XY Strain
E-MAJOR PRINCIPAL (V) Maximum Strain of Principal Stress about Main Axis
E-MINOR PRINCIPAL (V) Minimum Strain of Principal Stress about Main Axis
E-MAX SHEAR Maximum Shear Strain
E-EQUIVALENT Equivalent Strain
E-VON MISES von Mises Strain of Element
E-VOLUMETRIC Volumetric Strain of Element
E-EFFECTIVE PLASTIC Equivalent Plastic Strain
Shell Element Forces MEMBRANE FORCE XX x Axial Force
MEMBRANE FORCE YY y Axial Force

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 978 of 1024

MEMBRANE FORCE XY xy Shear Force

BENDING MOMENT XX Bending moment about y axis
BENDING MOMENT YY Bending moment about x axis
BENDING MOMENT XY xy plane Torsional Moment
TRANSVERSE SHEAR FORCE XZ zx plane Shear Force about Thickness direction

TRANSVERSE SHEAR FORCE YZ yz plane Shear Force about Thickness direction

Shell Element Stresses S-XX x Axial Stress
S-YY y Axial Stress
S-ZZ y Axial Stress
S-XY xy Axial Shear Stress
S-MAJOR PRINCIPAL(V) Maximum Principal Stress
S-MINOR PRINCIAL(V) Minimum Principal Stress
S-MAX SHEAR Maximum Shear Stress
S-VON MISES von Mises Stress

Shell Element Strains E-XX GCS X Strain

E-YY GCS Y Strain
E-ZZ GCS Z Strain
E-XY GCS XY Strain
E-MAJOR PRINCIPAL (V) Maximum Strain of Principal Stress about Main Axis
E-MINOR PRINCIPAL (V) Minimum Strain of Principal Stress about Main Axis
MAX SHEAR Maximum Shear Strain
E-VON MISES von Mises Strain
Solid Stresses S-XX Effective Stress of GCS X
S-YY Effective Stress of GCS Y
S-ZZ Effective Stress of GCS Z
SXY GCS XY Shear Stress
SYZ GCS YZ Shear Stress
SXZ GCS XZ Shear Stress
S-PRINCIPAL A~C(V) Principal Stresses (A(V) >B(V) > C(V))
S-MAX SHEAR Maximum Shear Stress
S-EQUIVALENT Equivalent Stress
S-VON MISES von Mises Stresses
PLASTIC STATUS* Plastic Status of Ground Element
MEAN EFFECTIVE PRESSURE Mean Effective Pressure
S-XX TOTAL Total Stress of GCS X
S-YY TOTAL Total Stress of GCS Y
S-ZZ TOTAL Total Stress of GCS Z
MEAN TOTAL PRESSURE Mean Total Pressure
PORE STRESS Pore Stress (=Hydrostatic Pore Stress + Excessive Pore Stress)
EXCESSIVE PORE STRESS Excessive Pore Stress
Solid Strains E-XX GCS X Elastic Strain
E-YY GCS Y Elastic Strain
E-ZZ GCS Z Elastic Strain
E-XY GCS XY Elastic Strain
E-YZ GCS YZ Elastic Strain
E-ZX GCS XZ Elastic Strain
E-PRINCIPAL A~C Principal Stress Strain of Main Axis
E- MAX SHEAR Maximum Shear Strain
E- EQUIVALENT Equivalent Strain
E- VON MISES von Mises Strain
E- EFFECTIVE PLASTIC Equivalent Plastic Strain
Nodal Seepage Results TOTAL HEAD Total Head
PORE PRESSURE HEAD Pore Pressure Head
PORE PRESSURE Pore Pressure
FLOW RATE Flow Rate
APPLIED SEEPAGE FLOW Flow Rate about Flux
REACTION SEEPAGE FLOW Flow Rate about Head / Pressure
Plane Strain Seepage Result HYDRAULIC GRADIENT X(V) x Hydraulic Gradient
HYDRAULIC GRADIENT Y(V) y Hydraulic Gradient
HYDRAULIC GRADIENT
xyz Hydraulic Gradient
RESULTANT(V)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 979 of 1024

SEEPAGE FLOW VELOCITY X(V) x Seepage Flow Velocity

SEEPAGE FLOW VELOCITY Y(V) y Seepage Flow Velocity
SEEPAGE FLOW VELOCITY
xyz Seepage Flow Velocity
RESULTANT(V)
PERMEABILITY A~B x,y,z Conductivity
VOLUMETRIC WATER CONTENT Volumetric Water Content
DEGREE OF SATURATION Degree of Saturation
3D Element Seepage Results HYDRAULIC GRADIENT X,Y,Z x,y,z Hydraulic Gradient
HYDRAULIC GRADIENT XY xy Hydraulic Gradient
HYDRAULIC GRADIENT YZ yz Hydraulic Gradient
HYDRAULIC GRADIENT XZ xz Hydraulic Gradient
HYDRAULIC GRADIENT
xyz Hydraulic Gradient
RESULTANT
FLOW VELOCITY X,Y,Z x,y,z Seepage Flow Velocity
FLOW VELOCITY XY,YZ,XZ x,y,z Seepage Flow Velocity
FLOW VELOCITY RESULTANT xyz Seepage Flow Velocity
PERMEABILITY A~B x,y,z Conductivity
VOLUMETRIC WATER CONTENT Volumetric Water Content
Hinge Force AXIAL FORCE Force in Axial Direction
Shear Force Y Force in Shear Direction "y"
Shear Force Z Force in Shear Direction "y"
Bending Moment Y Bending Moment in "y" Direction
Bending Moment Z Bending Moment in "Z" Direction
Hinge Deformation AXIAL DEFORM Deformation in Axial Direction
SHEAR Y DEFORM Deformation in Y Direction
SHEAR Z DEFORM Deformation in Z Direction
TORQUE DEFORM Deformation due to Rotation in Axial Direction
BENDING Y DEFORM Deformation due to Bending in Y Direction
BENDING Z DEFORM Deformation due to Bending in Z Direction
Yielding in Axial Direction (1= Yielded Component,
Hinge Status (Positive) YIELD STATUS AXIAL
0= Non-Yielded Component)
YIELD STATUS SHEAR Y Yielding in Y Direction
YIELD STATUS SHEAR Z Yielding in Z Direction
YIELD STATUS BENDING (Y&Z) Yielding due to bending in Shear (Y&Z) Direction
Hinge Status (Negative) YIELD STATUS AXIAL Yielding in Axial Direction
YIELD STATUS SHEAR Y Yielding in Y Direction
YIELD STATUS SHEAR Z Yielding in Z Direction
YIELD STATUS BENDING Y Yielding due to bending in Shear Y Direction
YIELD STATUS BENDING Z Yielding due to bending in Shear Z Direction
Liquefaction Material Results Pore Pressure Ratio Ration between Excess Pore Pressure & Initial Effective Pressure
-Ratio between Mobilized Friction Angle & Peak Friction Angle

-When Max Stress Ratio is reached, the mobilized friction angle is

Normalized Max Stress Ratio close to the peak friction angle, then liquefaction is triggered.
(1=Liquefaction)

Fluid Boundary Boundary Pressure Add Description

Boundary Elevation -Add Description

Sloshing Fluid 2D/3D Pressure Add Description

2D/3D Compression Add Description

Crack Element Results CRACK STATUS

CRACK STRESS-NN Stress Along N-Direction (Normal Direction)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 980 of 1024

CRACK STRESS-NS Stress Along S-Direction (Shear Direction)

CRACK STRESS-NT Stress Along T-Direction (Tangential Direction)

CRACK STRAIN-NN Strain Along N-Direction (Normal Direction)

CRACK STRAIN-NS Strain Along S-Direction (Shear Direction)

CRACK STRAIN-NT Strain Along T-Direction (Tangential Direction)

CRACK WIDTH-NN Crack Width Along N-Direction (Normal Direction)

CRACK WIDTH-NS Crack Width Along S-Direction (Shear Direction)

CRACK WIDTH-NT Crack Width Along T-Direction (Tangential Direction)

*PLASTIC STATUS: f

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 981 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Appendix > Shortcut List

Shortcut Key List

Link to Appendix

Link to Ribbon Menu Link to Trouble Shooting Guide Link to Shortcut Key

Link to USSR

Main
Name Shortcut Icon Description
Menu
New Ctrl+N Create a new document
Open Ctrl+O Open an existing document
Save Ctrl+S Save the active document
File
Screen Shot Select All Alt+C Copy to clipboard of modelview
Copy to clipboard of selected
Screen Shot Select Area Ctrl+Alt+C
area in model view
Redo Ctrl+Y Redo
Ctrl+Z
Edit
Undo Alt+Back Undo
space
Measure the distance or angle
Measure F3
between geometries
Move Work Plane Ctrl+M Move the location of Grid
Translate Ctrl+1 Translate selected geometries
Geometry
Rotate Ctrl+2 Rotate selected geometries
Mirror Ctrl+3 Mirror selected geometries
Scale selected geometries based
Scale Ctrl+4
on the center point.
Generate Mesh Face(Auto-
F7 Generate 2D mesh automatically
Mesh)
Generate Mesh Solid
F8 Generate 3D mesh automatically
(Auto-Solid)
Node Merge F9 Merge selected nodes
Assign mesh size to point or
Size Control F4
Mesh edge
Mesh Translate Alt+1 Translate selected mesh sets
Mesh Rotate Alt+2 Rotate selected mesh sets
Mesh Mirror Alt+3 Mirror selected mesh sets
Scale selected mesh sets based
Mesh Scale Alt+4
on the center point.
Create Element F11 Create element manually

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 982 of 1024

Delete Element F12 Delete selected elements

Help Online Manual F1 Link to On-line Manual

Shotrcut
F1 Online Manual Ctrl+1 Translate Ctrl+N New
F3 Measure Ctrl+2 Rotate Ctrl+O Open
F4 Size Control Ctrl+3 Mirror Ctrl+S Save
Generate Mesh Face
F7 Ctrl+4 Scale Alt+1 Translate
(Auto-Mesh)
Generate Mesh Solid Move Work
F8 Ctrl+M Alt+2 Rotate
(Auto-Solid) Plane
F9 Node Merge Ctrl+Y Redo Alt+3 Mirror
F11 Create Element Ctrl+Z Undo Alt+4 Scale
Alt+Back
F12 Delete Element Alt+C Screen Shot Select All
Key
Screen Shot
Screen Shot Select
Ctrl+Alt+C
Area

Home > GTS NX > Appendix > USSR(User Supplied Subroutine)

USSR (User Supplied Subroutine)

Link to Appendix

Link to Ribbon Menu Link to Trouble Shooting Guide Link to Shortcut Key

Link to USSR

▒ Contents

01. Function Description and Limitation

02. FORTRAN File Preparation

03. DLL File Preparation

04. Using the USSR material model in midas GTS

01. Function Description and Limitation

The user supplied material function allows users to customize their own material nonlinear model in conjunction with existing Pre/Post
processing features in midas GTS. Basically, the user supplied material subroutine is expected to update the integration point total stress and
internal variables as well as compute the tangent modulus utilizing the basic data such as total strain, strain increment, etc.

Nonlinear elastic material and Nonlinear elasto-plastic material can be defined in the user supplied material function, and support elements
that are Plane strain (3, 4, 6, 8 node element), Axisymmetric (3, 4, 6, 8 node element) and Solid (4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20 node element). Stress

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 983 of 1024

components for each element type are defined as follows.

Element Stress Strain

Truss
Axisymmetirc
Plane strain
Plane stress
Solid

<Table 1. Stress component of element>

Requirements for midas GTS user supplied material function are listed below:

l Preparing a FORTRAN File

l Compiling and creating a DLL File

l Using the user supplied material model in midas GTS.

02. FORTRAN File Preparation

User supplied material functions can be written using either a FORTRAN 77 or FORTRAN 90 programming language; however, since the midas
GTS solver uses FORTRAN 90, users are encouraged to follow the same language. In order for the midas GTS solver to recognise the user
subroutine, the name of the subroutine as well as the data types of the arguments must exactly match those given below.

!***************************************************************************

! USER SUPPLIED MATERIAL SUBROUTINE

!***************************************************************************

SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS(EPS0, DEPS, NS, INFM_STEP, COORD, SE, USRVAL, NUV, & USRSTA, NUS, IUSRIND, NUI, SIG, STIFF, ID, DETJ)

IMPLICIT NONE

!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES DLLEXPORT::USRMAT_GTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NS ! NUMBER OF STRESS COMPONENTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: INFM_STEP(5) ! STEP INFORMATION FOR STAGE, INCREMENT, ITERATION, ELEMENT, INTEGRATION POINT

! INFM_STEP(1) : STAGE ID

! INFM_STEP(2) : LOAD INCREMENTAL STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(3) : ITERATION STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(4) : ELEMENT ID

! INFM_STEP(5) : INTEGRATION POINT ID

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: ID ! MATERIAL ID OF CURRENT ELEMENT

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUV ! NUMBER OF PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUS ! NUMBER OF INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUI ! NUMBER OF INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DT ! INCREMENTAL TIME

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: EPS0(NS) ! TOTAL STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DEPS(NS) ! INCREMENTAL STRAIN

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 984 of 1024

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: COORD(3) ! COORDINATE OF INTEGRATION POINT

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: SE(NS, NS) ! ELASTIC CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: SIG(NS) ! TOTAL STRESS AT PREVIOUS(IN) & CURRENT(OUT) STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: STIFF(NS, NS) ! TANGENT STIFFNESS AT CURRENT STEP (OUT)

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: USRSTA(NUS) ! INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: USRVAL(NUV) ! PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(INOUT) :: IUSRIND(NUI) ! INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

User Supplied Subroutine

RETURN

END SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS

!***************************************************************************

The descriptions of the arguments that are used to communicate between the midas GTS solver and the user subroutine are listed below:

NS : Number of stress components.

INFM_STEP : Step Information

INFM_STEP(1) : Current stage number

INFM_STEP(2) : Current load increment step

INFM_STEP(3) : Current iteration number

INFM_STEP(4) : Current element number

INFM_STEP(5) : Current integration point number

ID : Material ID of current element.

NUV : Number of material parameters.

NUS : Number of internal state variables.

NUI : Number of integer indicator variables.

EPS0 : Total strain at previous step.

DEPS : Incremental strain.

COORD : Coordinates of integration point.

SE : Elastic constitutive matrix.

SIG : Total stress at previous step; Required to be updated in the subroutine.

STIFF : Real array of tangent stiffness that needs to be computed in the subroutine.

USRSTA : Internal state variables required to be updated in the subroutine.

USRVAL : User defined material parameters.

IUSRIND : Integer indicator valuables required to be updated in the subroutine.

DT : Incremental time.

Three simple example subroutines are included for reference: 1. linear elastic material model for 3D solid elements; 2. simple nonlinear elastic

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 985 of 1024

constitutive model for 2D plane strain elements; 3. an example to show how to define two different nonlinear elastic material models for 3D
solid elements.

[EXAMPLE 1] Linear elastic constitutive model for 3D solid element:

!***************************************************************************

! USER SUPPLIED MATERIAL SUBROUTINE

!***************************************************************************

SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS(EPS0, DEPS, NS, INFM_STEP, COORD, SE, USRVAL, NUV, &

USRSTA, NUS, IUSRIND, NUI, SIG, STIFF,ID, DT)

IMPLICIT NONE

!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES DLLEXPORT::USRMAT_GTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NS ! NUMBER OF STRESS COMPONENTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: INFM_STEP(5) ! STEP INFORMATION FOR STAGE, INCREMENT, ITERATION, ELEMENT, INTEGRATION POINT

! INFM_STEP(1) : STAGE ID

! INFM_STEP(2) : LOAD INCREMENTAL STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(3) : ITERATION STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(4) : ELEMENT ID

! INFM_STEP(5) : INTEGRATION POINT ID

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: ID ! MATERIAL ID OF CURRENT ELEMENT

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUV ! NUMBER OF PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUS ! NUMBER OF INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUI ! NUMBER OF INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DT ! INCREMENTAL TIME

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: EPS0(NS) ! TOTAL STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DEPS(NS) ! INCREMENTAL STRAIN

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: COORD(3) ! COORDINATE OF INTEGRATION POINT

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: SE(NS, NS) ! ELASTIC CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: SIG(NS) ! TOTAL STRESS AT PREVIOUS(IN) & CURRENT(OUT) STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: STIFF(NS, NS) ! TANGENT STIFFNESS AT CURRENT STEP (OUT)

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: USRSTA(NUS) ! INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: USRVAL(NUV) ! PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(INOUT) :: IUSRIND(NUI) ! INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

INTEGER :: I, J

REAL*8 :: TEMP

REAL*8, ALLOCATABLE :: DSIG(:)

IF(ALLOCATED(DSIG)) DEALLOCATE(DSIG)

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 986 of 1024

ALLOCATE(DSIG(NS))

DO I = 1, NS

TEMP = 0.D0

DO J = 1, NS

TEMP = TEMP + SE(I, J) * DEPS(J)

STIFF(I, J) = SE(I, J)

ENDDO

DSIG(I) = TEMP

SIG(I) = SIG(I) + DSIG(I)

ENDDO

RETURN

END

!***************************************************************************

[EXAMPLE 2] Simple nonlinear elastic constitutive model for 2D plane strain element

!***************************************************************************

! USER SUPPLIED MATERIAL SUBROUTINE

!***************************************************************************

SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS(EPS0, DEPS, NS, INFM_STEP, COORD, SE, USRVAL, NUV, &

USRSTA, NUS, IUSRIND, NUI, SIG, STIFF,ID, DT)

IMPLICIT NONE

!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES DLLEXPORT::USRMAT_GTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NS ! NUMBER OF STRESS COMPONENTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: INFM_STEP(5) ! STEP INFORMATION FOR STAGE, INCREMENT, ITERATION, ELEMENT, INTEGRATION POINT

! INFM_STEP(1) : STAGE ID

! INFM_STEP(2) : LOAD INCREMENTAL STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(3) : ITERATION STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(4) : ELEMENT ID

! INFM_STEP(5) : INTEGRATION POINT ID

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: ID ! MATERIAL ID OF CURRENT ELEMENT

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUV ! NUMBER OF PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUS ! NUMBER OF INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUI ! NUMBER OF INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DT ! INCREMENTAL TIME

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: EPS0(NS) ! TOTAL STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DEPS(NS) ! INCREMENTAL STRAIN

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: COORD(3) ! COORDINATE OF INTEGRATION POINT

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 987 of 1024

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: SE(NS, NS) ! ELASTIC CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: SIG(NS) ! TOTAL STRESS AT PREVIOUS(IN) & CURRENT(OUT) STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: STIFF(NS, NS) ! TANGENT STIFFNESS AT CURRENT STEP (OUT)

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: EPSP(NS) ! TOTAL PLASTIC STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: USRSTA(NUS) ! INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: USRVAL(NUV) ! PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(INOUT) :: IUSRIND(NUI) ! INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

INTEGER :: I, J

REAL*8 :: EMOD

REAL*8, ALLOCATABLE :: EPS(:)

IF(ALLOCATED(EPS)) DEALLOCATE(EPS)

ALLOCATE(EPS(NS))

EMOD = USRVAL(1)

EPS(1:NS) = EPS0(1:NS) + DEPS(1:NS)

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! TOTAL STRESS

!-----------------------------------------------------------

SIG(1) = EMOD * EPS(1) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)**2

SIG(2) = EMOD * EPS(2) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)**2

SIG(4) = EMOD * EPS(4) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(4)**2

SIG(3) = (EMOD * EPS(3)) / 2.D0

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! MATERIAL STIFFNESS MATRIX

!----------------------------------------------------------

STIFF(1,1) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)

STIFF(2,2) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)

STIFF(4,4) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(4)

STIFF(3,3) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

RETURN

END

!***************************************************************************

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 988 of 1024

[EXAMPLE 3] defines two different nonlinear elastic material models for 3D solid elements. It makes use of material ID that is passed
on to the subroutine to distinguish between the two different material models and take necessary action accordingly.

!***************************************************************************

! USER SUPPLIED MATERIAL SUBROUTINE

!***************************************************************************

SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS(EPS0, DEPS, NS, INFM_STEP, COORD, SE, USRVAL, NUV, &

USRSTA, NUS, IUSRIND, NUI, SIG, STIFF,ID, DT) IMPLICIT NONE

!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES DLLEXPORT::USRMAT_GTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NS ! NUMBER OF STRESS COMPONENTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: INFM_STEP(5) ! STEP INFORMATION FOR STAGE, INCREMENT, ITERATION, ELEMENT, INTEGRATION POINT

! INFM_STEP(1) : STAGE ID

! INFM_STEP(2) : LOAD INCREMENTAL STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(3) : ITERATION STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(4) : ELEMENT ID

! INFM_STEP(5) : INTEGRATION POINT ID

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: ID ! MATERIAL ID OF CURRENT ELEMENT

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUV ! NUMBER OF PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUS ! NUMBER OF INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUI ! NUMBER OF INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DT ! INCREMENTAL TIME

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: EPS0(NS) ! TOTAL STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DEPS(NS) ! INCREMENTAL STRAIN

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: COORD(3) ! COORDINATE OF INTEGRATION POINT

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: SE(NS, NS) ! ELASTIC CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: SIG(NS) ! TOTAL STRESS AT PREVIOUS(IN) & CURRENT(OUT) STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: STIFF(NS, NS) ! TANGENT STIFFNESS AT CURRENT STEP (OUT)

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: USRSTA(NUS) ! INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: USRVAL(NUV) ! PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(INOUT) :: IUSRIND(NUI) ! INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

INTEGER :: I, J

REAL*8 :: EMOD

REAL*8, ALLOCATABLE :: EPS(:)

IF(ALLOCATED(EPS)) DEALLOCATE(EPS)

ALLOCATE(EPS(NS))

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 989 of 1024

IF(ID == 1)THEN

SIG(1:NS) = 0.D0

EMOD = USRVAL(1)

EPS(1:NS) = EPS0(1:NS) + DEPS(1:NS)

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! TOTAL STRESS

!-----------------------------------------------------------

SIG(1) = EMOD * EPS(1) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)**2

SIG(2) = EMOD * EPS(2) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)**2

SIG(3) = EMOD * EPS(3) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(3)**2

SIG(4) = (EMOD * EPS(4)) / 2.D0

SIG(5) = (EMOD * EPS(5)) / 2.D0

SIG(6) = (EMOD * EPS(6)) / 2.D0

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! MATERIAL STIFFNESS MATRIX

!-----------------------------------------------------------

STIFF(1,1) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)

STIFF(2,2) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)

STIFF(3,3) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(3)

STIFF(4,4) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

STIFF(5,5) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

STIFF(6,6) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

ELSEIF(ID == 2) THEN

SIG(1:NS) = 0.D0

EMOD = USRVAL(1)

EPS(1:NS) = EPS0(1:NS) + DEPS(1:NS)

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! TOTAL STRESS

!-----------------------------------------------------------

SIG(1) = EMOD * EPS(1) + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)**2

SIG(2) = EMOD * EPS(2) + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)**2

SIG(3) = EMOD * EPS(3) + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(3)**2

SIG(4) = (EMOD * EPS(4)) / 2.D0

SIG(5) = (EMOD * EPS(5)) / 2.D0

SIG(6) = (EMOD * EPS(6)) / 2.D0

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! MATERIAL STIFFNESS MATRIX

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 990 of 1024

!-----------------------------------------------------------

STIFF(1,1) = EMOD + 3000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)

STIFF(2,2) = EMOD + 3000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)

STIFF(3,3) = EMOD + 3000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(3)

STIFF(4,4) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

STIFF(5,5) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

STIFF(6,6) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

ENDIF

RETURN

END

!***************************************************************************

03. DLL File Preparation

To utilise the developed FORTRAN code inside midas GTS for analysis and pre-/post-processing, the user subroutine should be compiled and
linked in the form of DLL (Dynamic Link Library). It is highly recommended to use the Intel FORTRAN compiler to create DLL of the user
subroutine for compatibility. Other compilers are not guaranteed to work with midas GTS.

3.1 Intel FORTRAN 11.1.067

Creating DLL file using Intel FORTRAN 11.1.067

1) Select File > New > Project (Figure 1).

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 991 of 1024

<Figure 1. Selection of project menu>

A new project window is opened. (Figure 2)

<Figure 2. Input window of new project>

2) The following example explains how to create a DLL file with a simple nonlinear elastic model [Example 2].

Figure 3 consists of defining the name of a subroutine and the list of arguments required by the user subroutine. The part where the actual
calculations are executed is shown in Figure 4. Figure 5 shows the internal function defined for use within the user subroutine.

<Figure 3. USRMAT_GTS.f90 file>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 992 of 1024

<Figure 4. Execution part input code>

<Figure 5. Function input code>

Select ‘Release’ from the Solution Configuration at the top of Intel FORTRAN window. Click the ‘Build Solution’ function under ‘Build’ menu as
shown in Figure 6 to start the build process. The message shown in Figure 7 will appear on the Output window when the compiler successfully
generated the DLL file

<Figure 6. Build Solution>

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 993 of 1024

<Figure 7. Successful Build>

04. Using the user-defined material model in midas GTS

The Add/Modify Ground Material dialogue box, as shown in Figure 8, contains constitutive models in the midas GTS Solver. By selecting the
Isotropic constitutive model as “User supplied material”, the “Non-Linear Parameters” subsequently are enabled: Number of Parameters (NUV),
Number of Internal State Variables (NUS), and Number of Indicator Variables (NUI). This section provides descriptions about the parameters
and required procedures.

<Figure 8. Ground Material input window>

※ Modulus of Elasticity (E) and Poisson’s Ratio ( ) in general tab are used for computing linear elastic constitutive matrix which is passed on to
the user subroutine. Therefore this should be entered as initial values for nonlinear analysis. Unit Weight and Unit Weight (Saturated) values
will continue be used to compute the external weight load by the GTS solver.

1. User Supplied Material Library File

By clicking on , as shown in Figure 8, users can select the DLL file generated from the above steps.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 994 of 1024

<Figure 9. DLL file open window>

2. Number of Parameters (NUV)

NUV indicates the number of material parameters that are passed on to the user subroutine as USRVAL. By clicking on the adjacent icon , as
shown in Figure 8, the values of the material parameters can be viewed or changed. Generally material coefficients defining the Constitutive
model, for instance, if the Mohr-Coulomb model is used, then the coefficients such as Cohesion and Friction angle should be included in the
USRVAL.

If is clicked, as shown in Figure 8, then the parameters can be entered by following the procedure outlined below:

Procedure:

1) Input the coefficients into the corresponding rows as shown in Figure 10.

2) Click “Enter Key” after inputting each value.

*Note: If users do not press the “Enter Key” then the value will be set to 0. Users can input up to 100 data parameters. The unit must be in N-m.

<Figure 10. User-defined value input window>

3. Number of Internal State Variables (NUS)

Internal State Variables “NUS” are usually used to store state variables such as the plastic strain components. Unlike NUV, NUS can be modified
in the FORTRAN routine.

If selected, as shown in Figure 8, then the initial internal state variables can be entered by following the procedure outlined below:

Procedure:

1) Input the coefficients for each corresponding row in Figure 11.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 995 of 1024

2) Click “Enter Key” after inputting each value.

Note: If users do not press the “Enter Key” then the value will be considered as 0. Users can input up to 100 data parameters. The unit
must be in N-m.

<Figure 11. Internal State Variable input window>

4. Number of Integer Indicator Variables (NUI)

Internal Integer variable(NUI) are used for indicator values such as the plasticity status. Unlike the NUV, NUI can also be modified in the
FORTRAN routine. If is selected, as shown in Figure 8, then the initial values of the integer indicator variables can be entered by following
the procedure outlined below:

Procedure:

1) Input the Integer Indicator Variable for each corresponding row in Figure 12.

2) Press “Enter Key” after entering each value.

Note: If users do not press the “Enter Key” then the value will be set to 0. Users can input up to 100 data parameters.

<Figure 12. User-defined Integer Indicator Variable input window>

Debugging is not possible within the midas GTS program. For complex material models, it is recommended that a separate FORTRAN driver
programme be used to check the user material subroutine and to eliminate bugs. For the purpose of checking the values of variables within
the midas GTS programme, the file no. 6 can be used, which is provided by GTS. Output results can be checked in the model name.out file.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 996 of 1024

Home > GTS NX > Appendix > User Supplied Soil Material

USSR (User Supplied Subroutine)

Link to Appendix

Link to Ribbon Menu Link to Trouble Shooting Guide Link to Shortcut Key

Link to USSR

▒ Contents

01. Function Description and Limitation

02. FORTRAN File Preparation

03. DLL File Preparation

04. Using the USSR material model in midas GTS

01. Function Description and Limitation

The user supplied material function allows users to customize their own material nonlinear model in conjunction with existing Pre/Post
processing features in midas GTS. Basically, the user supplied material subroutine is expected to update the integration point total stress and
internal variables as well as compute the tangent modulus utilizing the basic data such as total strain, strain increment, etc.

Nonlinear elastic material and Nonlinear elasto-plastic material can be defined in the user supplied material function, and support elements
that are Plane strain (3, 4, 6, 8 node element), Axisymmetric (3, 4, 6, 8 node element) and Solid (4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20 node element). Stress
components for each element type are defined as follows.

Element Stress Strain

Truss
Axisymmetirc
Plane strain
Plane stress
Solid

<Table 1. Stress component of element>

Requirements for midas GTS user supplied material function are listed below:

l Preparing a FORTRAN File

l Compiling and creating a DLL File

l Using the user supplied material model in midas GTS.

02. FORTRAN File Preparation

User supplied material functions can be written using either a FORTRAN 77 or FORTRAN 90 programming language; however, since the midas
GTS solver uses FORTRAN 90, users are encouraged to follow the same language. In order for the midas GTS solver to recognise the user
subroutine, the name of the subroutine as well as the data types of the arguments must exactly match those given below.

!***************************************************************************

! USER SUPPLIED MATERIAL SUBROUTINE

!***************************************************************************

SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS(EPS0, DEPS, NS, INFM_STEP, COORD, SE, USRVAL, NUV, & USRSTA, NUS, IUSRIND, NUI, SIG, STIFF, ID, DETJ)

IMPLICIT NONE

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 997 of 1024

!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES DLLEXPORT::USRMAT_GTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NS ! NUMBER OF STRESS COMPONENTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: INFM_STEP(5) ! STEP INFORMATION FOR STAGE, INCREMENT, ITERATION, ELEMENT, INTEGRATION POINT

! INFM_STEP(1) : STAGE ID

! INFM_STEP(2) : LOAD INCREMENTAL STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(3) : ITERATION STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(4) : ELEMENT ID

! INFM_STEP(5) : INTEGRATION POINT ID

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: ID ! MATERIAL ID OF CURRENT ELEMENT

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUV ! NUMBER OF PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUS ! NUMBER OF INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUI ! NUMBER OF INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DT ! INCREMENTAL TIME

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: EPS0(NS) ! TOTAL STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DEPS(NS) ! INCREMENTAL STRAIN

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: COORD(3) ! COORDINATE OF INTEGRATION POINT

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: SE(NS, NS) ! ELASTIC CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: SIG(NS) ! TOTAL STRESS AT PREVIOUS(IN) & CURRENT(OUT) STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: STIFF(NS, NS) ! TANGENT STIFFNESS AT CURRENT STEP (OUT)

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: USRSTA(NUS) ! INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: USRVAL(NUV) ! PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(INOUT) :: IUSRIND(NUI) ! INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

User Supplied Subroutine

RETURN

END SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS

!***************************************************************************

The descriptions of the arguments that are used to communicate between the midas GTS solver and the user subroutine are listed below:

NS : Number of stress components.

INFM_STEP : Step Information

INFM_STEP(1) : Current stage number

INFM_STEP(2) : Current load increment step

INFM_STEP(3) : Current iteration number

INFM_STEP(4) : Current element number

INFM_STEP(5) : Current integration point number

ID : Material ID of current element.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 998 of 1024

NUV : Number of material parameters.

NUS : Number of internal state variables.

NUI : Number of integer indicator variables.

EPS0 : Total strain at previous step.

DEPS : Incremental strain.

COORD : Coordinates of integration point.

SE : Elastic constitutive matrix.

SIG : Total stress at previous step; Required to be updated in the subroutine.

STIFF : Real array of tangent stiffness that needs to be computed in the subroutine.

USRSTA : Internal state variables required to be updated in the subroutine.

USRVAL : User defined material parameters.

IUSRIND : Integer indicator valuables required to be updated in the subroutine.

DT : Incremental time.

Three simple example subroutines are included for reference: 1. linear elastic material model for 3D solid elements; 2. simple nonlinear elastic
constitutive model for 2D plane strain elements; 3. an example to show how to define two different nonlinear elastic material models for 3D
solid elements.

[EXAMPLE 1] Linear elastic constitutive model for 3D solid element:

!***************************************************************************

! USER SUPPLIED MATERIAL SUBROUTINE

!***************************************************************************

SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS(EPS0, DEPS, NS, INFM_STEP, COORD, SE, USRVAL, NUV, &

USRSTA, NUS, IUSRIND, NUI, SIG, STIFF,ID, DT)

IMPLICIT NONE

!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES DLLEXPORT::USRMAT_GTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NS ! NUMBER OF STRESS COMPONENTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: INFM_STEP(5) ! STEP INFORMATION FOR STAGE, INCREMENT, ITERATION, ELEMENT, INTEGRATION POINT

! INFM_STEP(1) : STAGE ID

! INFM_STEP(2) : LOAD INCREMENTAL STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(3) : ITERATION STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(4) : ELEMENT ID

! INFM_STEP(5) : INTEGRATION POINT ID

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: ID ! MATERIAL ID OF CURRENT ELEMENT

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUV ! NUMBER OF PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUS ! NUMBER OF INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUI ! NUMBER OF INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 999 of 1024

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DT ! INCREMENTAL TIME

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: EPS0(NS) ! TOTAL STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DEPS(NS) ! INCREMENTAL STRAIN

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: COORD(3) ! COORDINATE OF INTEGRATION POINT

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: SE(NS, NS) ! ELASTIC CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: SIG(NS) ! TOTAL STRESS AT PREVIOUS(IN) & CURRENT(OUT) STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: STIFF(NS, NS) ! TANGENT STIFFNESS AT CURRENT STEP (OUT)

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: USRSTA(NUS) ! INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: USRVAL(NUV) ! PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(INOUT) :: IUSRIND(NUI) ! INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

INTEGER :: I, J

REAL*8 :: TEMP

REAL*8, ALLOCATABLE :: DSIG(:)

IF(ALLOCATED(DSIG)) DEALLOCATE(DSIG)

ALLOCATE(DSIG(NS))

DO I = 1, NS

TEMP = 0.D0

DO J = 1, NS

TEMP = TEMP + SE(I, J) * DEPS(J)

STIFF(I, J) = SE(I, J)

ENDDO

DSIG(I) = TEMP

SIG(I) = SIG(I) + DSIG(I)

ENDDO

RETURN

END

!***************************************************************************

[EXAMPLE 2] Simple nonlinear elastic constitutive model for 2D plane strain element

!***************************************************************************

! USER SUPPLIED MATERIAL SUBROUTINE

!***************************************************************************

SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS(EPS0, DEPS, NS, INFM_STEP, COORD, SE, USRVAL, NUV, &

USRSTA, NUS, IUSRIND, NUI, SIG, STIFF,ID, DT)

IMPLICIT NONE

!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES DLLEXPORT::USRMAT_GTS

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1000 of 1024

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NS ! NUMBER OF STRESS COMPONENTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: INFM_STEP(5) ! STEP INFORMATION FOR STAGE, INCREMENT, ITERATION, ELEMENT, INTEGRATION POINT

! INFM_STEP(1) : STAGE ID

! INFM_STEP(2) : LOAD INCREMENTAL STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(3) : ITERATION STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(4) : ELEMENT ID

! INFM_STEP(5) : INTEGRATION POINT ID

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: ID ! MATERIAL ID OF CURRENT ELEMENT

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUV ! NUMBER OF PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUS ! NUMBER OF INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUI ! NUMBER OF INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DT ! INCREMENTAL TIME

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: EPS0(NS) ! TOTAL STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DEPS(NS) ! INCREMENTAL STRAIN

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: COORD(3) ! COORDINATE OF INTEGRATION POINT

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: SE(NS, NS) ! ELASTIC CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: SIG(NS) ! TOTAL STRESS AT PREVIOUS(IN) & CURRENT(OUT) STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: STIFF(NS, NS) ! TANGENT STIFFNESS AT CURRENT STEP (OUT)

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: EPSP(NS) ! TOTAL PLASTIC STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: USRSTA(NUS) ! INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: USRVAL(NUV) ! PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(INOUT) :: IUSRIND(NUI) ! INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

INTEGER :: I, J

REAL*8 :: EMOD

REAL*8, ALLOCATABLE :: EPS(:)

IF(ALLOCATED(EPS)) DEALLOCATE(EPS)

ALLOCATE(EPS(NS))

EMOD = USRVAL(1)

EPS(1:NS) = EPS0(1:NS) + DEPS(1:NS)

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! TOTAL STRESS

!-----------------------------------------------------------

SIG(1) = EMOD * EPS(1) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)**2

SIG(2) = EMOD * EPS(2) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)**2

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1001 of 1024

SIG(4) = EMOD * EPS(4) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(4)**2

SIG(3) = (EMOD * EPS(3)) / 2.D0

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! MATERIAL STIFFNESS MATRIX

!----------------------------------------------------------

STIFF(1,1) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)

STIFF(2,2) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)

STIFF(4,4) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(4)

STIFF(3,3) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

RETURN

END

!***************************************************************************

[EXAMPLE 3] defines two different nonlinear elastic material models for 3D solid elements. It makes use of material ID that is passed
on to the subroutine to distinguish between the two different material models and take necessary action accordingly.

!***************************************************************************

! USER SUPPLIED MATERIAL SUBROUTINE

!***************************************************************************

SUBROUTINE USRMAT_GTS(EPS0, DEPS, NS, INFM_STEP, COORD, SE, USRVAL, NUV, &

USRSTA, NUS, IUSRIND, NUI, SIG, STIFF,ID, DT) IMPLICIT NONE

!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES DLLEXPORT::USRMAT_GTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NS ! NUMBER OF STRESS COMPONENTS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: INFM_STEP(5) ! STEP INFORMATION FOR STAGE, INCREMENT, ITERATION, ELEMENT, INTEGRATION POINT

! INFM_STEP(1) : STAGE ID

! INFM_STEP(2) : LOAD INCREMENTAL STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(3) : ITERATION STEP ID

! INFM_STEP(4) : ELEMENT ID

! INFM_STEP(5) : INTEGRATION POINT ID

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: ID ! MATERIAL ID OF CURRENT ELEMENT

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUV ! NUMBER OF PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUS ! NUMBER OF INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

INTEGER, INTENT(IN) :: NUI ! NUMBER OF INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DT ! INCREMENTAL TIME

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: EPS0(NS) ! TOTAL STRAIN AT PREVIOUS STEP

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1002 of 1024

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: DEPS(NS) ! INCREMENTAL STRAIN

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: COORD(3) ! COORDINATE OF INTEGRATION POINT

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: SE(NS, NS) ! ELASTIC CONSTITUTIVE MATRIX

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: SIG(NS) ! TOTAL STRESS AT PREVIOUS(IN) & CURRENT(OUT) STEP

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: STIFF(NS, NS) ! TANGENT STIFFNESS AT CURRENT STEP (OUT)

REAL*8, INTENT(INOUT) :: USRSTA(NUS) ! INTERNAL STATE VARIABLES

REAL*8, INTENT(IN) :: USRVAL(NUV) ! PARAMETERS

INTEGER, INTENT(INOUT) :: IUSRIND(NUI) ! INTEGER INDICATOR VARIABLES

INTEGER :: I, J

REAL*8 :: EMOD

REAL*8, ALLOCATABLE :: EPS(:)

IF(ALLOCATED(EPS)) DEALLOCATE(EPS)

ALLOCATE(EPS(NS))

IF(ID == 1)THEN

SIG(1:NS) = 0.D0

EMOD = USRVAL(1)

EPS(1:NS) = EPS0(1:NS) + DEPS(1:NS)

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! TOTAL STRESS

!-----------------------------------------------------------

SIG(1) = EMOD * EPS(1) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)**2

SIG(2) = EMOD * EPS(2) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)**2

SIG(3) = EMOD * EPS(3) + 1000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(3)**2

SIG(4) = (EMOD * EPS(4)) / 2.D0

SIG(5) = (EMOD * EPS(5)) / 2.D0

SIG(6) = (EMOD * EPS(6)) / 2.D0

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! MATERIAL STIFFNESS MATRIX

!-----------------------------------------------------------

STIFF(1,1) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)

STIFF(2,2) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)

STIFF(3,3) = EMOD + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(3)

STIFF(4,4) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

STIFF(5,5) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

STIFF(6,6) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1003 of 1024

ELSEIF(ID == 2) THEN

SIG(1:NS) = 0.D0

EMOD = USRVAL(1)

EPS(1:NS) = EPS0(1:NS) + DEPS(1:NS)

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! TOTAL STRESS

!-----------------------------------------------------------

SIG(1) = EMOD * EPS(1) + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)**2

SIG(2) = EMOD * EPS(2) + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)**2

SIG(3) = EMOD * EPS(3) + 2000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(3)**2

SIG(4) = (EMOD * EPS(4)) / 2.D0

SIG(5) = (EMOD * EPS(5)) / 2.D0

SIG(6) = (EMOD * EPS(6)) / 2.D0

!-----------------------------------------------------------

! MATERIAL STIFFNESS MATRIX

!-----------------------------------------------------------

STIFF(1,1) = EMOD + 3000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(1)

STIFF(2,2) = EMOD + 3000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(2)

STIFF(3,3) = EMOD + 3000.D0 * EMOD * EPS(3)

STIFF(4,4) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

STIFF(5,5) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

STIFF(6,6) = 0.5D0 * EMOD

ENDIF

RETURN

END

!***************************************************************************

03. DLL File Preparation

To utilise the developed FORTRAN code inside midas GTS for analysis and pre-/post-processing, the user subroutine should be compiled and
linked in the form of DLL (Dynamic Link Library). It is highly recommended to use the Intel FORTRAN compiler to create DLL of the user
subroutine for compatibility. Other compilers are not guaranteed to work with midas GTS.

3.1 Intel FORTRAN 11.1.067

Creating DLL file using Intel FORTRAN 11.1.067

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1004 of 1024

1) Select File > New > Project (Figure 1).

<Figure 1. Selection of project menu>

A new project window is opened. (Figure 2)

<Figure 2. Input window of new project>

2) The following example explains how to create a DLL file with a simple nonlinear elastic model [Example 2].

Figure 3 consists of defining the name of a subroutine and the list of arguments required by the user subroutine. The part where the actual

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1005 of 1024

calculations are executed is shown in Figure 4. Figure 5 shows the internal function defined for use within the user subroutine.

<Figure 3. USRMAT_GTS.f90 file>

<Figure 4. Execution part input code>

<Figure 5. Function input code>

Select ‘Release’ from the Solution Configuration at the top of Intel FORTRAN window. Click the ‘Build Solution’ function under ‘Build’ menu as

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1006 of 1024

shown in Figure 6 to start the build process. The message shown in Figure 7 will appear on the Output window when the compiler successfully
generated the DLL file

<Figure 6. Build Solution>

<Figure 7. Successful Build>

04. Using the user-defined material model in midas GTS

The Add/Modify Ground Material dialogue box, as shown in Figure 8, contains constitutive models in the midas GTS Solver. By selecting the
Isotropic constitutive model as “User supplied material”, the “Non-Linear Parameters” subsequently are enabled: Number of Parameters (NUV),
Number of Internal State Variables (NUS), and Number of Indicator Variables (NUI). This section provides descriptions about the parameters
and required procedures.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1007 of 1024

<Figure 8. Ground Material input window>

※ Modulus of Elasticity (E) and Poisson’s Ratio ( ) in general tab are used for computing linear elastic constitutive matrix which is passed on to
the user subroutine. Therefore this should be entered as initial values for nonlinear analysis. Unit Weight and Unit Weight (Saturated) values
will continue be used to compute the external weight load by the GTS solver.

1. User Supplied Material Library File

By clicking on , as shown in Figure 8, users can select the DLL file generated from the above steps.

<Figure 9. DLL file open window>

2. Number of Parameters (NUV)

NUV indicates the number of material parameters that are passed on to the user subroutine as USRVAL. By clicking on the adjacent icon , as
shown in Figure 8, the values of the material parameters can be viewed or changed. Generally material coefficients defining the Constitutive
model, for instance, if the Mohr-Coulomb model is used, then the coefficients such as Cohesion and Friction angle should be included in the
USRVAL.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1008 of 1024

If is clicked, as shown in Figure 8, then the parameters can be entered by following the procedure outlined below:

Procedure:

1) Input the coefficients into the corresponding rows as shown in Figure 10.

2) Click “Enter Key” after inputting each value.

*Note: If users do not press the “Enter Key” then the value will be set to 0. Users can input up to 100 data parameters. The unit must be in N-m.

<Figure 10. User-defined value input window>

3. Number of Internal State Variables (NUS)

Internal State Variables “NUS” are usually used to store state variables such as the plastic strain components. Unlike NUV, NUS can be modified
in the FORTRAN routine.

If selected, as shown in Figure 8, then the initial internal state variables can be entered by following the procedure outlined below:

Procedure:

1) Input the coefficients for each corresponding row in Figure 11.

2) Click “Enter Key” after inputting each value.

Note: If users do not press the “Enter Key” then the value will be considered as 0. Users can input up to 100 data parameters. The unit
must be in N-m.

<Figure 11. Internal State Variable input window>

4. Number of Integer Indicator Variables (NUI)

Internal Integer variable(NUI) are used for indicator values such as the plasticity status. Unlike the NUV, NUI can also be modified in the
FORTRAN routine. If is selected, as shown in Figure 8, then the initial values of the integer indicator variables can be entered by following

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1009 of 1024

the procedure outlined below:

Procedure:

1) Input the Integer Indicator Variable for each corresponding row in Figure 12.

2) Press “Enter Key” after entering each value.

Note: If users do not press the “Enter Key” then the value will be set to 0. Users can input up to 100 data parameters.

<Figure 12. User-defined Integer Indicator Variable input window>

Debugging is not possible within the midas GTS program. For complex material models, it is recommended that a separate FORTRAN driver
programme be used to check the user material subroutine and to eliminate bugs. For the purpose of checking the values of variables within
the midas GTS programme, the file no. 6 can be used, which is provided by GTS. Output results can be checked in the model name.out file.

Home > GTS NX > Appendix > Design Code

Design Code [Creep / Shrinkage / Elastic Modulus Function Group]

Creep / Shrinkage Function Group Elastic Modulus Function Group

CEB-FIP(1990) CEB-FIP(1990)

CEB-FIP(1978) CEB-FIP(1978)

ACI ACI

PCA Chzagi

Combined (ACI & PCA) European

AASHTO AS 3600-2009

European AS / RTA 5100.5-2011

AS 3600-2009 Russian

AS / RTA 5100.5-2011 Korean Standard

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1010 of 1024

Russian Japan (Hydration)

Korean Standard Japan (Elastic)

JAPAN KCI-USD 12

JAPAN (JSCE)

CHINA

China (JTG D62-2004)

KCI-USD12

KSCE 2010

Creep / Shrinkage Function Group

[CEB-FIP(1990)]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[CEB-FIP(1978)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1011 of 1024

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[ACI]

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

Material factored ultimate value

- The user may enter the ultimate values considering concrete properties by ACI code or User type.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1012 of 1024

[PCA]

[Combined (ACI & PCA)]

Material factored ultimate creep strain / Shrinkage

- The user may enter the ultimate values considering concrete properties by User type.

[AASHTO]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1013 of 1024

Expose to drying before 5 Days of curing

- If this option is checked on, the influence of Creep & Shrinkage is increased by 20% (ref. AASHTO 5.4.2.3)

[European]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[AS 3600-2009]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1014 of 1024

Hypothetical Thickness

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[AS/RTA 5100.5-2011]

Hypothetical Thickness

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[Russia]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1015 of 1024

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

Fast – accumulating creep

- If this option is checked on, the influence of Creep & Shrinkage will be increased by % based on Russian code

[Korean Standard]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1016 of 1024

[Japan]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member considering Environmental Coefficient.

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[Japan (JSCE)]

Cement content / Water content

- Required to input each content per unit volume to generate Creep/Shrinkage Function automatically

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[CHINA]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1017 of 1024

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member considering Environmental
coefficient

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[China (JTG D62-2004)]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member.

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[KCI-USD 12]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1018 of 1024

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[KSCE 2010]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

Elastic Modulus Function Group

[CEB-FIP(1990)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1019 of 1024

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 Days and Cement Type

RS – Rapid hardening high strength cements

N,R – Normal or rapid hardening cements

SL – Slowly hardening cements

[CEB-FIP(1978)]

[ACI]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1020 of 1024

Modulus of elasticity, which will be reflected in the analysis, is calculated using the compressive strength of concrete and weight density

[Ohzagi]

The equation proposed by Ohzagi is used to define the change of compressive strength of concrete. Specify the Concrete Compressive
Strength at 28 Days and Cement Type

RS – Rapid hardening high strength cements

N,R – Normal or rapid hardening cements

SL – Slowly hardening cements

Fly ash – Fly ash cementing material

[European]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1021 of 1024

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 Days and Cement Type

RS – Rapid hardening high strength cements

N,R – Normal or rapid hardening cements

SL – Slowly hardening cements

[AS 3600-2009] / [AS/RTA 5100.5-2011]

Mean modulus of elasticity of concrete at the appropriate age is calculated as follows.

Since there is no equation for Compressive Strength at the appropriate age in Australian Standard, it is calculated based on the following
equation specified in CEB-FIP 1978.

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1022 of 1024

[Russian]

[Korean Standard]

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 91 Days and Strength Factor (a,b)

[Japan (Hydration)]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1023 of 1024

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 Days and Strength Factor (a,b,d)

[Japan (Elastic)]

[KCI-USD12]

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025
Intro Page 1024 of 1024

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 91 Days and Strength Factor (a,b)

N,R – Normal or rapid hardening cements

RS – Rapid hardening high strength cements

SL – Slowly hardening cements

file:///C:/Users/FESCALANTE/AppData/Local/Temp/~hhBD36.htm 04/03/2025